4 5819047049554822430 PDF

https://t.
me/MBS_MedicalBooksStore
TRAUMA CARE
PRE-HOSPITAL MANUAL
http://taylorandfrancis.com
TRAUMA CARE
PRE-HOSPITAL MANUAL
EDITED BY
IAN GREAVES FRCEM FRCP FRCSEd FIMC FASI DTM&H DMCC DipMedEd L/RAMC
Consultant in Emergency Medicine, UK
KEITH PORTER FRCS FRCSEd FRCEM FFSEM FIMC FASI

Professor of Clinical Traumatology, UK
with
CHRIS WRIGHT DIMC FRCEM L/RAMC

Consultant in Emergency Medicine, UK
CRC Press
Taylor & Francis Group
6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300
Boca Raton, FL 33487-2742
© 2019 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC

CRC Press is an imprint of Taylor & Francis Group, an Informa business
No claim to original U.S. Government works
Printed on acid-free paper
International Standard Book Number-13: 978-1-138-62684-3 (Paperback)

International Standard Book Number-13: 978-1-138-62457-3 (Hardback)
This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. While all reasonable efforts have been
made to publish reliable data and information, neither the author[s] nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility or
liability for any errors or omissions that may be made. The publishers wish to make clear that any views or opinions expressed
in this book by individual editors, authors or contributors are personal to them and do not necessarily reflect the views/
opinions of the publishers. The information or guidance contained in this book is intended for use by medical, scientific or
health-care professionals and is provided strictly as a supplement to the medical or other professional’s own judgement, their
knowledge of the patient’s medical history, relevant manufacturer’s instructions and the appropriate best practice guidelines.
Because of the rapid advances in medical science, any information or advice on dosages, procedures or diagnoses should be
independently verified. The reader is strongly urged to consult the relevant national drug formulary and the drug companies’
and device or material manufacturers’ printed instructions, and their websites, before administering or utilizing any of the
drugs, devices or materials mentioned in this book. This book does not indicate whether a particular treatment is appropriate
or suitable for a particular individual. Ultimately it is the sole responsibility of the medical professional to make his or her
own professional judgements, so as to advise and treat patients appropriately. The authors and publishers have also attempted
to trace the copyright holders of all material reproduced in this publication and apologize to copyright holders if permission
to publish in this form has not been obtained. If any copyright material has not been acknowledged please write and let us
know so we may rectify in any future reprint.
Except as permitted under U.S. Copyright Law, no part of this book may be reprinted, reproduced, transmitted, or utilized in
any form by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying, micro-
filming, and recording, or in any information storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publishers.
For permission to photocopy or use material electronically from this work, please access www.copyright.com (http://www
.copyright.com/) or contact the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc. (CCC), 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-
8400. CCC is a not-for-profit organization that provides licenses and registration for a variety of users. For organizations that
have been granted a photocopy license by the CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged.
Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identifi-
cation and explanation without intent to infringe.
Library of Congress Cataloging‑in‑Publication Data
Names: Greaves, Ian, editor. | Porter, Keith M., editor.

Title: The trauma care pre-hospital manual / edited by Ian Greaves, Keith Porter.
Description: Boca Raton : CRC Press, 2018. | Includes bibliographical references and index.
Identifiers: LCCN 2018012347| ISBN 9781138626843 (pbk. : alk. paper) | ISBN 9781138624573
(hardback : alk. paper) | ISBN 9781315212821 (ebook)
Subjects: | MESH: Advanced Trauma Life Support Care | Wounds and Injuries--therapy | United Kingdom
Classification: LCC RD93.95 | NLM WB 105 | DDC 617.1--dc23
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2018012347
Visit the Taylor & Francis Web site at

http://www.taylorandfrancis.com
and the CRC Press Web site at

http://www.crcpress.com
This edition is dedicated to Professor David Alexander
Contents
Introductionix
Abbreviations and acronyms xi
Contributorsxvii
1 Trauma: A global perspective 1

2 Safety14
3 The incident scene 31
4 Communication in pre-hospital care 40
5 Mechanism of injury 50
6 The primary survey 61
7 Catastrophic haemorrhage 72
8 Airway management 83
9 Chest injuries 98
10 Shock115
11 Entrapment and extrication 125
12 Head injury 138
13 Spinal injuries 151
14 Musculoskeletal trauma 165
15 Analgesia, sedation and emergency anaesthesia 179
16 The injured child 194
17 Trauma in pregnancy 213
18 Trauma in the elderly 223
19 Burns233
20 Firearms, ballistics and gunshot wounds 243
21 Blast injuries 256
22 Trauma management in the austere pre-hospital environment 264
23 Mass casualty situations 278
24 Retrieval and transport 299
25 Handover and documentation 308
26 Law and ethics in pre-hospital care 322
27 Research and audit in pre-hospital care 330
28 Training in pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM) 341
29 Trauma systems 349
Annex A: Practical procedures in thoracic trauma 369

Annex B: Traumatic cardiac arrest 374
Index378
vii
Introduction
When the first edition of the Trauma Care Manual was published in 2001, we wrote that it
had been prepared to ‘begin the process of establishing United Kingdom guidelines for best practice
in the management of major trauma’ and expressed a wish that it and future editions would be
recognised as ‘definitive statements of best practice’. So it has turned out. A second edition of
the Trauma Care Manual appeared in 2009, and a third edition, focused on care of the victim of
trauma in hospital is currently being prepared.
This volume, the Trauma Care Pre-Hospital Manual, builds on the earlier books and, like
them, offers evidence-based guidelines for the management of major trauma, written by clini-
cians with many years of trauma experience, and endorsed as authoritative by Trauma Care
(UK). As its title suggests, it deals with the management of trauma in the pre-hospital environ-
ment and thus complements the upcoming third edition of the Trauma Care Manual.
In 2001, few if any of those most involved in the care of victims of trauma could have antici-
pated the changes and developments that have occurred in the years that followed. The UK
now has functioning (and on the evidence to date) effective trauma systems and networks,
and clinical developments include the introduction of damage control resuscitation, tranexamic
acid, blood product resuscitation, hybrid resuscitation and an emphasis on the control of major
external haemorrhage as part of a new <C>ABCDE approach. As a consequence, more patients
with major trauma are surviving than ever before. Much of this change has been led by experi-
ence from recent conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan. If this experience has taught one thing more
emphatically than any other, it is that optimal pre-hospital care is essential if survival rates are
to be improved and morbidity reduced.
We are more aware than ever that trauma victims do not, in a sense, die from the trauma,
but from the effects of trauma. These include hypoxia, acidosis, embolism, haemorrhage, abnor-
mal clotting, hypothermia, metabolic and immunological derangement. The sooner these
harmful processes are arrested (or better still prevented), the better outcomes will be. It is the
recognition of this concept as the key to trauma management that underpins these guidelines.
The Trauma Care Pre-Hospital Manual offers clear, didactic, evidence-based guidelines for
the management of major trauma before arrival at hospital. Where it is available, the evidence
base is given, and where it is not, we have indicated a course of action supported by recognised
authorities in the field. Needless to say, we have ensured that all the recent advances in care
of the trauma victim are included, but we have tempered our recommendations with practical
experience of what can realistically be achieved outside hospital. We hope this text will be use-
ful to all practitioners of pre-hospital care whatever their profession or seniority, and we look
forward to future editions incorporating the changes that will undoubtedly occur in the next
few years.
ix
Abbreviations and acronyms
AAA abdominal aortic aneurysm

ac alternating current
ACCOLC access overload control
ACE angiotensin converting enzyme
ACS American College of Surgeons
ACSCT American College of Surgeons Committee on Trauma
ADI acute decompression illness
A&E accident and emergency
AED automated external defibrillator
AEP Attenuating Energy Projectile
AF atrial fibrillation
AIC ambulance incident commander
AIS abbreviated injury scale
ALS advance life support
ALSO advanced life support obstetrics
AMPLE Allergies, Medications, Past Medical History, Last ate or drank, Events
AOC air operations centre
AP anteroposterior
APACHE Acute Physiology and Chronic Health Evaluation
APLS advanced paediatric life support
ARDS acute respiratory distress syndrome
ASHICE Age, Sex, History, Injuries sustained, Condition of patient, Estimated time
of arrival
ATLS Advanced Trauma Life Support®
ATMIST Age, Time of injury, Mechanism of injury, Injuries suspected or known, Signs
as recorded, Treatment provided, and its effect
ATOMFC Airway obstruction, Tension pneumothorax, Open pneumothorax, Massive
haemothorax, Flail chest, Cardiac tamponade
AV atrioventricular
AVLS automatic vehicle location system
AVNRT AV nodal re-entrant tachycardia
AVPU Alert, Voice, Pain, Unresponsive
BA biological agent
BASICS British Association for Immediate Care
BAT burns assessment team
BATLS Battlefield Advanced Trauma Life Support
BLS basic life support
BP blood pressure
BSA body surface area
BTLS basic trauma life support
xi
BURP backward-upward-rightward pressure

BVM bag, valve, mask
CAA Civil Aviation Authority
<C>ABCDE catastrophic external haemorrhage, airway, breathing, circulation, disability, exposure
CAD computer-aided dispatch
CAT Combat Application Tourniquet®
CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
CCA Civil Contingencies Act
CCC Civil Contingencies Committee
CCS casualty clearing station
CH47 Chinook helicopter
CLI caller line Identification
cm centimetre
CMACE Centre for Maternal and Child Enquiries
CNS central nervous system
CO carbon monoxide
COBR Cabinet Office Briefing Room
COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
CPP cerebral perfusion pressure
CPR cardiopulmonary resuscitation
CRM crew resource management
CSCATT Command and control, Safety, Communication, Assessment, Triage, Treatment, Transport
CSF cerebrospinal fluid
CT computerised tomography
CVA cerebrovascular accident
DAI diffuse axonal injury
dc direct current
DCS damage control surgery
DCR damage control resuscitation
DipIMC Diploma in Immediate Medical Care
DKA diabetic ketoacidosis
DNR do not resuscitate
DORA dynamic operation risk assessment
DSTC Definitive Surgical Trauma Care®
DVT deep vein thrombosis
ECG electrocardiogram
ECT enhanced care team
EDH extradural/epidural haematoma
EMD electromechanical association
EMJ Emergency Medicine Journal
EPO emergency planning officer
ePRF electronic patient report form
ERL emergency reference level
ET endotracheal
ETC European Trauma Course
ETCO2 End-tidal CO2
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency (US)
FIMC Fellowship in Immediate Medical Care
xii
FMJ Full metal jacket

FPOS first person on scene
GCS Glasgow Coma Scale
GMC General Medical Council
GMP Good Medical Practice
GSW gunshot wound
GTN glyceryl trinitrate
HART hazardous area response team
HAZCHEM hazardous chemical
HAZMAT hazardous material
HCPC Health and Care Professions Council
HEMS helicopter emergency medical service
HGV heavy goods vehicle
HITMAN Hydration, Hygiene, Infection, Tubes, Temperature control, Medication,
Analgesia, Nutrition and notes
HIV human immunodeficiency virus
hr hour
IBTPHEM Intercollegiate Board for Training in Pre-Hospital Emergency Medicine
ICH intracerebral haemorrhage/haematoma
ICP intracranial pressure
ICRC International Committee of the Red Cross
IED improvised explosive device
IHCD Institute for Health Care Development
IHD ischaemic heart disease
ILMA intubating laryngeal mask airway
Im intramuscular
In intranasal
ISS Injury Severity Score
ICU intensive care unit
ITU intensive therapy unit
Iv Intravenous
JESIP Joint Emergency Services Interoperability Programme
JRCALC Joint Royal Colleges Ambulance Liaison Committee
JVP jugular venous pressure
KE kinetic energy
kg kilogram
L litre
LA local anaesthetic
LEDC less economically developed country
LEH local emergency hospital
LMA laryngeal mask airway
LSD lysergic acid diethylamide
m metre
MAC military aid to the civil powers
MAOI monoamine oxidase inhibitor
MAP mean arterial pressure
MCA Maritime and Coastguard Agency
mcg microgram
xiii
MDI metered dose inhaler

MERIT Medical Emergency Response Incident Team
METHANE Major incident declared or stand by; Exact location; Type of incident; Hazards present and potential;
Access, the direction of approach; Numbers of casualties, with nature and type; Emergency services
present and required
mg milligram
MI myocardial infarction
MIA medical incident advisor
MICC major incident coordination centre
MICP mean intracranial pressure
MIMMS Major Incident Medical Management and Support
min minute
mL millilitre
mm millimetre
MMMF man-made material fibre
MRC Medical Research Council
MRCC Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centres
MRSC Maritime Rescue Sub-Centres
MSK musculo-skeletal
mTBI mild traumatic brain injury
MTC major trauma centre
MTPAS Mobile Telecommunications Privileged Access System
NAI non-accidental injury
NAIR National Arrangements for Incidents involving Radioactivity
NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration (US)
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organisation
NCEPOD National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and Death
NEXUS National Emergency X-Radiography Utilization Study
NIBP non-invasive blood pressure
NICE National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
NIJ National Institute of Justice (US)
NMC Nursing and Midwifery Council
NPA nasopharyngeal airway
NPIS National Poisons Information Service
NRPB National Radiological Protection Board
NRS (verbal) numerical rating scale
NSAID non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug
OPA oropharyngeal airway
ORCON operational research consultancy
PACS picture archiving and communication system
PASG pneumatic anti-shock garment
PCI percutaneous coronary intervention
PE pulmonary embolism
PEA pulseless electrical activity
PEFR peak expiratory flow rate
PEPP paediatrics for pre-hospital professionals
PHEA pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia
PHEC pre-hospital emergency care
xiv
PHEM pre-hospital emergency medicine

PHPLS pre-hospital paediatric life support
PHTC pre-hospital trauma course
PHTLS pre-hospital trauma life support
PICO Population (participants), Intervention (or exposure for observational studies),
Comparator and Outcomes
PICU paediatric intensive care unit
PPE personal protective equipment
PR per rectum
PRF patient report form
PTS paediatric trauma score
RCSEd Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh
REBOA retrograde endoscopic balloon occlusion of the aorta
RED Russell extrication device
RICE rest, ice, compression, and elevation
RNLI Royal National Lifeboat Institution
RSI rapid sequence induction (of anaesthesia)
RTC road traffic collision
RTS revised trauma score
RVS Royal Voluntary Service (formerly Women’s Royal Voluntary Service)
SAD supraglottic airway device
SAH subarachnoid haemorrhage/haematoma
SAMU Service d’Aide Médicale Urgente
sc subcutaneous
SCG Strategic Coordinating Group
SCIWORA spinal cord injury without radiological abnormality
SDH subdural haematoma
sec second
SIDS sudden infant death syndrome
SIRS systemic inflammatory response syndrome
SOAP-ME Suction, Oxygenation, Airway, Pharmacy, Monitoring, Equipment
SOP standard operating procedure
SSRI selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors
START Simple Triage and Rapid Treatment
Stat Immediately
SUFE slipped upper femoral epiphysis
SVT supraventricular tachycardia
TARN Trauma Audit and Research Network
TBI traumatic brain injury
TBSA total burn surface area
TCA tricyclic antidepressant
tds three times daily
TED Telford extrication device
TETRA Terrestrial Trunked Radio
TIA transient ischaemic attack
TRA trauma resuscitation anaesthetist
TREM transport emergency
TRISS trauma score – injury severity score
xv
TRTS Triage Revised Trauma Score

TTL trauma team leader
TU trauma unit
TWELVE Tracheal deviation, Wounds, surgical Emphysema, Larynx, Veins, Exposure
UKIETR UK International Emergency Trauma Register
USS ultrasound scanning
V volts
VAS visual analogue scale
VF ventricular fibrillation
VRS verbal categorical rating scale
VT ventricular tachycardia
WHA World Health Assembly
WHO World Health Organization
xvi
Contributors
Neil Abeysinghe mrcp uk frca fficm dipimc bsc (hons) Paul Dias mrcp frca
pgcertmeded Consultant Neuroanaesthetist
Consultant Critical Care Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham,
Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham, Birmingham, UK
Birmingham, UK
Paul Gates
Colette Augre Consultant Paramedic
Specialist Registrar in Anaesthetics North West Ambulance Service, UK
West Midlands Rotation, UK
Ian Greaves frcem frcp frcsed fimc fasi dtm&h dmcc
David Balthazor dipimc mrcs frca fficm dipmeded l /ramc
Consultant Anaesthetist and Intensivist Consultant in Emergency Medicine
Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham, James Cook University Hospital, Middlesbrough;
Birmingham, UK Defence Medical Services, UK
Jon Barratt mcem dmcc dipimc ramc
Stephen Hearns frcs frcem frcp dipimc diprtm
Specialist Registrar in Emergency Medicine
Consultant in Emergency Medicine
St Mary’s Hospital; London and Defence Medical
Royal Alexandra Hospital; Paisley and Retrieval Doctor
Services, UK
with the Emergency Medical Retrieval Service of
Emir Battaloglu mbchb msc mrcs Scotland
Specialist Registrar in Trauma and Orthopaedic Surgery
Kieran M Heil beng rn
University Hospitals Birmingham NHS Foundation Trust
Institute of Naval Medicin, Portsmouth, UK
Philippa M Bennett mrcs rn
Specialist Registrar in Surgery Simon Horne frcem dipimc ramc
Institute of Naval Medicine, Portsmouth, UK Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Pre-Hospital Care
Derriford Hospital Plymouth; Defence Medical Services UK
Matt Boylan frcem dipimc ramc
Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Pre-Hospital Care Amy Hughes mbe dtm&h (liv) emdm mrcem
Royal Centre for Defence Medicine, Birmingham, UK Lecturer in Emergency Humanitarian Response
and Programme Director (Global Health)
Alasdair Corfield mrcp fcem dipimc Humanitarian and Conflict Response Institute, University
Consultant in Emergency Medicine of Manchester
Royal Alexandra Hospital; Paisley and Retrieval Doctor with
the Emergency Medical Retrieval Service of Scotland Jon Hulme mbchb mrcp dipimc frca fficm
Consultant in Anaesthesia and Intensive Care Medicine
Nick Crombie frca fimc Sandwell and West Birmingham Hospitals NHS Trust
Consultant Trauma Anaesthetist Resuscitation Service
Clinical Lead, Honorary Researcher, NIHR SRMRC Tim Kilner phd dipimc rcsed pgcert bn rn
Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham; Midlands Air Senior Lecturer
Ambulance Service, Birmingham, UK Institute of Health and Society, University of Worcester
xvii
Contributors
Dhushy Surendra Kumar fca rcsi frca ficm Peter Oakley frca
Consultant in Critical Care, Anaesthesia and Pre-Hospital Former Consultant Anaesthetist
Emergency Medicine University Hospitals of the North Midlands,
University Hospital, Conventry, UK Stoke-on-Trent, UK
Graham Lawton bsc dmcc md frcs (plast.) ramc Jowan G Penn-Barwell frcs (tr & orth) rn
Consultant Plastic and Reconstructive Surgeon Specialist Registrar in Trauma and Orthopaedic Surgery
Imperial College Healthcare NHS Trust, London; Medical Institute of Naval Medicine, Portsmouth, UK
Officer, British Army
Professor Sir Keith Porter frcs frcsed frcem ffsem
Caroline Leech frcem fimc rcsed fimc fasi
Consultant in Emergency Medicine Honorary Professor of Clinical Traumatology
University Hospitals Coventry and Warwickshire NHS University of Birmingham
Trust Consultant Trauma Surgeon
Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham, Birmingham, UK
Simon Leigh-Smith mrcgp frcsed (a&e) dipimc frcem rn
Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Pre-Hospital Paul Reavely frcem
Care Consultant in Emergency Medicine
Edinburgh Royal Infirmary; Defence Medical Services, UK Bristol Royal Infirmary and Bristol Royal Hospital for
Children
Ari K Leppäniemi md phd dmcc
Chief of Emergency Surgery Julian Redhead frcp frcem mfsem
Department of Surgery, Meilahti Hospital Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Paediatric
University of Helsinki, Helsinki, Finland Emergency Medicine, Medical Director
Imperial College Healthcare NHS Trust
Rod Mackenzie td phd frcp frcs frcem
Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Pre-Hospital Andy Thurgood msc fimc rcsed diphs rgn sr para
Emergency Care Consultant Nurse in Pre-Hospital Medicine
Addenbrooke’s Hospital, Cambridge, UK Advanced Clinical Practitioner (Emergency Department)
Chairman and Clinical Director
David McConnell mrcem rn Mercia Accident Rescue Service
Specialist Registrar in Emergency Medicine
Defence Medical Services, UK Darren Walter mph frcs(ed) frcem fimc
Consultant in Emergency Medicine
Carl McQueen mb chb (hons) mcem mmed sci (dist) dipimc University Hospital of South, Manchester, UK
rcsed nihr
Doctoral Research Fellow Matt Wordsworth ma dipimc mrcc ramc
Warwick Clinical Trials Unit Warwick Medical School, UK Specialist Registrar in Surgery
Imperial Healthcare NHS Trust; Defence Medical
Robb Moss frca dipimc Services, UK
Consultant Anaesthetist
Queen Elizabeth Hospital Birmingham; Mercia Accident Chris Wright dipimc frcem ramc
Rescue Service, Birmingham, UK Consultant in Emergency Medicine, Defence Consultant
Advisor in Pre-Hospital Emergency Care
Ross Moy frsem dipimc ramc Imperial College Healthcare NHS Trust; Defence Medical
Consultant in Emergency Medicine and Pre-Hospital Care Services, UK
John Radcliffe Hospital Oxford; Defence Medical
Services, UK
xviii
Trauma: A global perspective
OBJECTIVES
After completing this chapter the reader will
▪▪ Comprehend the scale of the challenge presented by trauma across the world
▪▪ Understand the different effects of trauma in developed and less developed societies
▪▪ Understand the importance of prevention in reducing the impact of trauma internationally
INTRODUCTION
All we can do in the face of that ineluctable defeat called life is to try to understand it.
Milan Kundera, The Curtain (1)
The aetiology, pathophysiology and management of trauma are complex and challenging. In
contrast to a disease process, trauma as an aetiological factor involves more or less immediate
external energy transfer into the human body, whether caused by mechanical, thermal or some
other form of energy. In order to better understand the multitude of factors involved in the
process of traumatic injury, a wider perspective encompassing the context in which the trauma
occurs is warranted. When analysing the evolving trends in trauma, a perspective is needed
that goes beyond narrow local and clinically orientated views. This chapter considers trauma in
its widest context, including other causes of mortality and morbidity, with an emphasis on the
causes and manifestations of trauma on a global scale.
THE BIG PICTURE

Many seemingly unrelated events in different parts of the world produce the same end result:
one or more people are severely injured or killed as a result of trauma, whether associated
with a natural or man-made disaster, a single violent act by an individual, organised crime, an
industrial accident, terrorism or warfare. Although easily interpreted as individual and unre-
lated events, there are many trends in the globalised world that offer at least a partial explana-
tion of the root causes of these occurrences.
1
Various combinations of fundamentalism, individual and institutional greed, inequality and

lack of basic human rights and democracy, just to mention the most obvious factors, can lead to
unforeseen consequences. For example, the Arab Spring, which began on December 18, 2010,
in Tunisia as a protest against police corruption and ill treatment, triggered demonstrations,
protests, riots, civil wars and revolutions all over North Africa and the Middle East culminating
in the Syrian civil war that started in 2011. As a consequence of the Syrian civil war, hundreds
of thousands of Syrians have sought to escape their war-torn country creating the worst refu-
gee problem in Europe since the Second World War. After 4½ years of war, more than a quarter
of a million people have died, many whilst trying to cross the Mediterranean or in the hands
of human traffickers. Eleven million have fled their homes (2). In addition to these refugees
from war, many others seek better living conditions by trying to enter the United States or the
European Union illegally, adding to the already explosive refugee problem.
The financial crisis of September 2008 originating in the United States but having economic
consequences throughout the world can be seen just as a temporary setback in continuous
globalisation and the success story of the current consumer- and market-orientated way of life.
However, it could also be a signal that the current culture based on speculation and immedi-
ate reward is no longer sustainable. Immanuel Wallerstein (3) has predicted that after half a
millennium of success, the recognisable capitalist world order is coming to an end and is likely
to bring chaos for the next 50 years. The main reason he gives is a decrease in profits due to
a shortage of cheap labour and natural resources. According to some economists, there are
also fundamental flaws in the global monetary and banking system, where independent coun-
tries have to increasingly rely on financing their budgets with borrowed money (4). It is also
clear that the reactions of individual organisations and states are closely entwined. The current
and ongoing political and economic crisis in Greece, for example, was triggered by the fear of
losses to major German and French banks. The Greek financial crisis demonstrated that the
real global financial (and by extension political) power rests not only in major economies such
as the United States, China or Germany, but in the multinational institutions and corporations
that also have substantial political influence. Inevitably, unrest and a sense of injustice will lead
to changes in the global pattern of trauma.
As stated in a TV interview by Kishore Mahbubai, a leader of the Lee Kuan Yew School of
Public Policy in Singapore, 900 million Westerners, 15% of the world population, can no longer
dictate world opinion. With the increasing economic power of Asia, especially China and India,
it can be expected that their role in the global economy as well as in international organisa-
tions will grow at the expense of a Europe that is suffering from shrinkage of its population.
According to an estimate by the Berlin Institute, the population of Europe will decrease by
8.3% from 2007 until 2050 and that of Russia by 21.1%. In contrast, the population in Africa,
Asia, Latin America (including the Caribbean), the United States and Canada will increase by
105.2%, 30.1%, 37.6% and 30.7%, respectively (5). According to the United Nations Economy
and Social Division (DESA), by the end of the year 2008, half of the 6.7 billion people in the
world were living in cities and the projection for 2050 is 70%. By 2025 there will be 27 mega-
cities, mostly in Asia and Africa (6). The dark side of rapid economic growth was revealed in
one of the fastest growing economies when a huge corruption scandal involving the Brazilian
oil company Petrobras emerged in 2013. Top politicians and businesspeople received bribes
including luxury yachts, cars, art, fine wines and the services of prostitutes (7). It has been
estimated that in 2013 alone the total amount of corruption money was between US$32 billion
and US$53 billion.
Another threat to welfare in rich countries is presented by the so-called frail states. Almost
50 countries, including Afghanistan, Ethiopia, Georgia, Kenya, Nigeria, Somalia, Sudan and
2
Climate change and energy use
South Sudan are listed as frail states: they have a total population of 870 million. Such states are
characterised by the inability or lack of political will of the state to provide basic services critical
to welfare, such as essential social services, security, human rights and the uninterrupted func-
tion of basic economic and social institutions. In a typical frail state, poverty increases bringing
violence, anarchy and crime, producing uncontrollable refugee flows, epidemics and environ-
mental destruction (8). However, a contrasting view has been presented by the researchers of
the World Bank who estimate that the absolute number of the poorest segment of the popula-
tion in developing countries has decreased by 500 million in the last 50 years (9). In some coun-
tries such as Ethiopia, substantial progress has been made in the last decade where the annual
economic growth has been around 10%, millions more people have access to clean water, and
in spite of the population growing from 40 million in 1984 to 95 million in 2014, the mortality
rate among children less than 5 years old has at the same time decreased from 227 to 63 per
thousand births (10). Consequently, the life expectancy has increased from 65.3 years in 1990
to 71.5 in 2013.
CLIMATE CHANGE AND ENERGY USE

Climate change is real and becoming critical. Only a few would now deny the contribution
of human behaviour to its causation. The sea level rises about 1 mm for every 360 gigatons of
water, and during a study period of 1994 to 2013 based on photographs by NASA, the sea level
has risen about 4 mm from the melting of Alaskan glaciers alone. The Alaskan coast no longer
freezes as it has in the past and storms erode the coastline causing houses to fall into the sea
and populations to move inland.
According to the worst-case scenario of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change,
the mean temperature of the Earth will increase from 15 to 20 centigrade by the year 2100.
Even if this is an overestimate, most scientists agree that the current trend in climate change
will bring huge effects including natural disasters and epidemics (11). In the last three decades,
over 1000 extreme weather events hit the World Health Organization (WHO) European region
alone. Climate change increases the frequency and severity of these events, and according to
the latest projections, if global warming is unconstrained (12), the future effects of heatwaves,
floods and droughts, worsening air pollution and changes in vector and plant distribution are
likely to harm the health of millions of people. As stated by the economist Jeffrey Sachs, climate
change is already driving warfare in some Sub-Saharan countries where hungry people clash
over scarce food and water (13). Interestingly, it has been shown that long-term fluctuations in
war frequency and population changes follow the cycles of temperature change and that rela-
tive food scarcity is a fundamental cause of outbreaks of conflict (14).
Besides the long-term effects on climate change through the production of greenhouse gases,
the global dependency on oil, especially in the Western world and growing Asian economies,
will have major effects in the short term. It has been estimated that the world has utilised about
one third of its oil reserves and that the demand for crude oil has permanently surpassed the sup-
ply, which means that the price of oil will not consistently decrease in the future (15). The search
for alternative fuels has in the last few years focused on bio-fuels made of corn, wheat, soybean
or palm oil, for example. This has led to acute food shortages with the risk of food-related unrest
in at least 33 countries, as estimated by the former World Bank President Robert Zoellick (16). In
the United States, one-third of the corn produced is already used for the production of ethanol,
and 75% of the increase in food prices is caused by favouring bio-fuel production (17). Michael
Delgado, an agricultural economist from the World Bank, has estimated that the global food
3
reserves per capita are lower than at any time during the last 35 years (18). In addition to food
shortages caused by diverting arable land from food production to fuel production, droughts
in Australia for example, and speculation in the global food markets have increased the price
of food and led to violent uprisings in numerous countries, including Egypt, the Philippines,
Yemen, Haiti, Cameroon, Mozambique, Morocco and Indonesia (19).
GLOBAL BURDEN OF TRAUMA

According to the Global Burden of Disease project (20), there will be a projected 40% increase
in global deaths due to injury between 2002 and 2030, predominantly due to the increasing
number of road traffic collision deaths that, together with increases in population numbers,
more than offset small declines in age-specific death rates for other causes of injury. Road traffic
collision deaths are projected to increase from 1.2 million in 2002 to 2.1 million in 2030, pri-
marily due to increased motor vehicle fatalities associated with economic growth in low- and
middle-income countries (21). The overall increase in injury-related deaths is projected to be
from about 5 million to about 7 million by 2030. The changes in rankings for causes of deaths
from 2002 to 2030 show an increase in road traffic collisions from 10th to 8th and self-inflicted
injuries from 14th to 12th. In disability adjusted life years (DALYs), the ranking change for road
traffic accidents is from 8th to 4th, violence from 15th to 13th and self-inflicted injuries from
17th to 14th.
NATURAL DISASTERS
During the last few years, dramatic natural disasters have claimed the lives of hundreds of
thousands of people. The 2004 underground earthquake and the following tsunami in South
East Asia killed over 230,000 people in 10 countries and the earthquake in October 2005 in
northern Pakistan killed 78,000. On May 3, 2008, the floods caused by hurricane Nargis killed
85,000 people and 53,000 went missing in southern Myanmar. The Caribbean and the United
States have been hit repeatedly by hurricanes several times a year, with Katrina in 2005 killing
1836 people in New Orleans (22,23).
On March 11, 2011, following a major earthquake, a 15-meter tsunami hit the Japanese
coast and disabled the cooling system of three nuclear reactors leading to melting of all three
cores and radioactive releases into the air and sea. Although there were no immediate deaths
from radiation sickness, over 100,000 people had to be evacuated. The long-term effects on the
population and environment remain to be seen.
In large-scale natural disasters with damage or overwhelming of the local and national
healthcare facilities, rapid and well-coordinated international relief efforts are of the utmost
importance. In some cases, individual countries have opted for evacuating their own citi-
zens from the disaster area (24). In an analysis of the fatalities caused by Hurricane Katrina
in Louisiana, the major causes of death were drowning in 40%, injury and trauma in 25% and
heat-related illness in 11%. People of 75 years old and older formed the most affected popula-
tion cohort. The authors recommended that future disaster preparedness efforts should focus
on evaluating and caring for vulnerable populations, including those in hospitals, long-term
care facilities and their own homes (25).
A new and worrying development in the management of disasters is the increasingly com-
mon privatised disaster response, to the extent that disasters themselves have become major
4
War
new markets, a phenomenon Naomi Klein has called the ‘disaster-capitalism complex’ (26).
Within weeks of hurricane Katrina, several major private companies signed contracts worth
millions of dollars for services that included protection of Federal Emergency Management
Agency (FEMA) operations and providing mobile homes to evacuees. These companies
increasingly regard both the state and non-profit organisations as competitors, while the state
has lost the ability to perform its core functions without the help of external agencies. Also on
the list of privatised services are the global communication networks, emergency health and
electricity services, and the providers of transportation for a global workforce in the midst of a
major disaster.
MAN-MADE DISASTERS
Many mass casualty incidents are man-made (or a combination of a natural disaster with man-
made elements). In many cases the reason is the lack of appropriate supervision of construction
and storage sites by local authorities.
On August 12, 2015, two explosions at a warehouse storing dangerous chemicals devastated
an industrial park in the northeastern port city of Tianjin in China killing at least 121 people,
including 67 firefighters. More than 700 people were injured and thousands were evacuated
because of the risk posed by chemicals stored at the site. On September 11, 2015, at least 87 peo-
ple died and almost 200 were injured in Mecca in Saudi Arabia when a construction crane fell
over the Masjid al-Haram mosque (27). The increasing use of immigrant workforces, especially
in some wealthy oil-producing states in the Middle East, has led to a near epidemic of construc-
tion site accidents due to deficient safety practices. Added to the reckless driving culture in
many of those countries, their trauma centres see many blunt trauma patients every year.
WAR
There were more wars in 2014 than in any other year since 2000. There were 14 conflicts that
killed more than 1000 people. Syria, Iraq and Afghanistan were the three deadliest wars with
Nigeria being the fourth where the number of deaths almost tripled from the previous year due
to the intensification of the conflict with the militant group Boko Haram. While the number of
state-based conflicts has remained stable for the last 10 years, the number of non-state conflicts
increased from 29 in 2004 to 48 in 2013. Using the Global Peace Index ranking of 162 coun-
tries by their relative states of peace, the bottom five countries were Syria, Afghanistan, South
Sudan, Iraq and Somalia. In Europe despite the dense web of legal conventions, political agree-
ments, institutions of different kinds and other security instruments in place, political crisis
escalated into major conflict in Ukraine in the space of only few months. It has been estimated
that by the end of 2014 more than 4300 people had been killed in this conflict and that 500,000
people have been internally displaced. At the time of writing, there appear to be no prospects
of a lasting settlement.
In addition to the geopolitical considerations of destabilising neighbouring countries to pre-
vent them joining the opposite political bloc, the persistence of conventional warfare doctrine
related to ethnic and resource competition is evident, for example in the war in August 2008
between Georgia and Russia where the control of the oil pipelines from the Caspian Sea area
was undoubtedly a major factor. It has been speculated that the vast untapped energy reserves in
the Persian Gulf and the Caspian Sea area could provoke great-power warfare even today (28).
5
An interesting new theory about the causes of conflicts has been presented by the German
population scientist Gunnar Heinsohn. The expansion of men aged 15 to 29 years to comprise
more than 30% of the adult male population, a so-called youth bulge, seems to correlate with the
risk of conflict (29). The size of the youth bulge in some of the recent conflict areas is significant:
53% in the Gaza strip, 52% in Kenya and 49% in Afghanistan.
According to a global report on child soldiers, the use of children in wars has decreased
during the past few years, but they are still present among the fighters in Myanmar, Chad, the
Democratic Republic of Congo, Sudan, Uganda (Lord’s Resistance Army), Yemen and Israel
where the military has used Palestinian children as human shields and the training of those
under the age of 18 is common (30). Another disturbing development is the increasing use
of rape as a method of war, as has been witnessed recently in eastern Congo (31). In modern
conflicts the great majority of victims are civilians, as seen in the conflict in Syria with millions
of civilians fleeing the country and overwhelming neighbouring countries and the whole of
Europe with an unprecedented influx of refugees, not forgetting that of the more than 200,000
deaths and more than 800,000 wounded, a large majority were civilians.
One of the uncertain factors potentially destabilising the Middle East is the nuclear program
in Iran. In spite of the nuclear agreement with Iran and the reactions of its neighbours, particu-
larly Israel, the strategic balance in the region may shift and lead to a regional and potentially
global conflict. The recent decision by the USA to withdraw unilaterally from this agreement
has the potential to destabilise an already difficult situation, not least by rendering the situation
of Iranian modernisers more difficult. A pre-emptive air strike or other form of attack on the
Iranian nuclear facilities would lead to economic and political turmoil which could have world-
wide implications. The closure of the Strait of Hormuz, for example, would severely impair
global oil availability (32,33).
In 2014, world military expenditure was estimated at US$1776 billion, representing 2.3%
of global gross domestic product or US$245 per person. Military spending has continued to
increase rapidly in Africa, Eastern Europe and the Middle East, and the conflicts in Ukraine,
Syria and Iraq are likely to continue to drive military expenditure in many countries in these
regions. Divided by region, military spending in 2014 was largest in North America (US$627 bil-
lion) followed by East Asia (US$309 billion) and Western and Central Europe (US$292 billion).
Civil wars continue in many parts of the world and their relationship with the drug trade
has become increasingly recognised, at least in Colombia and Afghanistan. According to the
United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), the Taliban rebels in Afghanistan
received 64 million euros in 2007 from opium growers. The total yield from opium fields was
8000 tons when the average global consumption is 4000 tons. The rest is in storage in unknown
locations. Conversely, in Colombia real progress in the FARC conflict may be possible with the
release of long term hostages, the death of their leader Manuel Marulanda and the signing of
a political accord with the government (31) A political resolution between FARC and the civil
government was signed in 2016 but may not ensure permanent peace as large numbers of for-
mer FARC members are now leaderless and have lost political and social influence. Illustrative
of the difficulties in nation building after a civil war is the double assassination attempt in 2008
on the president and prime minister of East Timor. President Jose Ramos-Horta suffered two
abdominal gunshot wounds and was operated on in Australia (34).
The most important major new strand in international terorrism of recent years has been
Islamic extremism. The Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS), or the Islamic State of Iraq and
the Levant (ISIL), now known as Islamic State (IS), expanded very rapidly and by the most
brutal means to control large areas of the Middle East. Although this geographical dominance
is now largely lost, as a result of military intervention by Iraq, Syria and the Western powers,
6
Terrorism
there is no doubt that the spreading of an extremist Islamic ideology will remain prominent in
motivating terrorist activity and it seems likely that a consequence of the loss of territory will be
the export of violence to states perceived to represent most clearly a decadent western lifestyle
and willing to engage militarily with IS. As well as extreme brutality including mass killings,
executions and kidnappings, IS was also responsible for destroying ancient temples in Palmyra,
possibly for manufacturing or capturing chemical weapons, and using videos advertising a
luxury lifestyle to recruit young people to join the five star jihad (35). Another destabilising
factor in the area is the complex relationship between Turkey and the Kurdish areas both inside
and outside Turkey and in northern Iraq and Syria, mostly driven by domestic political struggle
in Turkey between the model of a secular state and an Islamic republic.
TREATMENT OF WAR WOUNDS

In an analysis of 82 US Special Operations Forces fatalities from 2001 to 2004, 19 were non-
combat deaths, while of the combat deaths 43% were caused by explosions, 28% by gunshot
wounds, 23% by aircraft accidents and 6% by blunt trauma (36). Seventy of the deaths were
classified as non-survivable and 12 (15%) as potentially survivable. Of those with potentially
survivable injuries, cause of death was identified in 16 cases: 8 (50%) truncal haemorrhage,
3 (19%) compressible haemorrhage, 2 (13%) haemorrhage amenable to tourniquet, and 1 (6%)
each from tension pneumothorax, airway obstruction, and sepsis. Structured analysis identi-
fied improved methods of truncal haemorrhage control as a principal research requirement.
This data and analysis reflects the findings of the very considerable literature arising from
medical interventions in Iraq and particularly Afghanistan where there have been significant
developments in trauma and particularly shock management which are increasingly being
incorporated into civilian practice.
TERRORISM
Since 2000, there has been a more than fivefold increase in the number of deaths from terror-
ism, rising from 3361 in 2000 to 17,958 in 2013. Over 80% of the lives lost to terrorist activ-
ity in 2013 occurred in only five countries – Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria.
However, another 55 countries recorded one or more deaths from terrorist activity (37). On
July 22, 2011, a deranged Norwegian man exploded a truck bomb adjacent to the govern-
ment building in Oslo and continued by gunning down young people in a summer camp on
a nearby island. Overall, 78 people died and more than 150 were injured. In another incident
in Finland in 2002, a young man detonated a self-made explosive in a shopping centre killing
and injuring 164 people. In 2013, 60% of all attacks involved the use of explosives, 30% used
firearms and 10% used other tactics including incendiary devices, melee attacks and sabotage
of equipment (37).
To increase the fatality rate from terrorist attacks some innovative methods have recently been
used including spherical metal pellets propelled by the explosion increasing the severity of injuries
and adding a penetrating component to the blast injury and blunt trauma. Potential transmission
of infection by body fragments in suicide bombings is also a concern. Medical teams assessing
and treating terrorist bomb victims should be trained to recognise these injuries (38).
A dirty bomb is a mix of a conventional explosive with radioactive material resulting in dis-
persion of radioactive material. Although the major medical risk associated with a dirty bomb is
7
blast injury caused by the conventional charge, the casualty profile of such a bomb will include
a small group of casualties who may also be contaminated with radioactive material and who
may require implementation of decontamination procedures either in the field or at the receiv-
ing hospital (39).
The use of a second hit (a second bomb designed to explode in the vicinity of the first bomb
after a short time period to injure helpers and bystanders) has been recorded in several recent
terrorist attacks. It is imperative that in any current terrorist explosion the risks must be mini-
mised by strict security procedures and scene access control. In two cases recorded from Israel,
the second bombs exploded 10 to 30 minutes after the first detonation (40). In addition, the
discovery in Israel in 2003 of arms and gunmen in some ambulances lead to the practice that all
ambulances, even those conveying critically injured victims had to pause for brief inspection at
the perimeter of the hospital’s grounds (41). Another potential security risk for EMS personnel
entering a ‘hostile’ area is the possibility of a sniper (42).
In addition to the conventional injury pattern associated with explosions (primary, second-
ary, tertiary and associated blast injuries) the possibility of biological foreign body implantation
from the suicide bombers or other victims has been recently reported (43,44).
Despite the death of Osama bin Laden in 2011, al-Qaeda and its associated organisations
are still thought to have cells in 40 to 50 countries and a membership of 200–500 men. The
decentralised structure makes it hard to control and major attacks can be perpetrated with
only a handful of members. The biggest threat, however, is thought to be related to the ability
of the terrorists to obtain weapons of mass destruction (45). Access through the Internet to the
SCADA guidance systems that control many industrial processes and infrastructures could
also be serious by inducing malfunctions in nuclear power plants, mass transport systems, oil
and gas pipes, and electricity networks (46).
In the long run, the key issue in coping with militant Islamic radicalism is to understand the
deep resentment of Western values by the Wahhabist form of Islam that since the 1700s has been
the dominating ideology in Saudi Arabia. Wahhabism was founded by Ibn Abdul Wahhab in
the 18th century and has militantly asserted the monotheistic roots of Islam. According to Dore
Gold, the former Israeli ambassador to the United Nations, the uneasy alliance of the ruling
Saudi family and the Wahhabist ulama (religious leadership), and the Saudi state support for its
ideology of hatred has provided the framework for promoting Wahhabi ideology and financial
support for radical groups in many conflict areas of the world reaching from Bosnia and the
Caucasus through the former Soviet republics in Central Asia and the Taliban in Afghanistan to
the Philippines and Indonesia (47). The only permanent solution seems to be in trying to engage
the rulers of Saudi Arabia in a meaningful dialogue about the peaceful coexistence of different
cultures and ideologies, and minimal standards of acceptable international behaviour.
ORGANISED CRIME AND CIVILIAN VIOLENCE

While the organised crime societies in southern Italy seem to be suffering from severe weaken-
ing thanks to diligent work by the police, the rampant violence and turf wars of the drug cartels
in Mexico seem to be becoming uncontrollable. Since 2006 at least 85,000 people have been
killed, and in 2014 alone there were 19,699 murders in Mexico (48). There are many similarities
between the actions of the Mexican drug cartels and IS; extremely brutal killings, mass graves,
rapes and hangings, with videos distributed through the Internet. Both obtain arms from the
United States: IS by stealing equipment from the Iraqi army and cartels by smuggling illegal
arms across the border, about 250,000 weapons annually.
8
Globalisation, trauma systems and education
School and other mass shootings have occurred with regularity during the last few years.
The highest number of victims in such a shooting (33 dead) was recorded in the Virginia Tech
massacre on April 16, 2007, but even in Finland an 18 year-old high school student killed 9 people
including himself and injured 12 on November 7, 2007. The killer admired school shooters in
other countries and left hints of his plans on the Internet 2 days before the shooting (49). A sim-
ilar incident occurred on September 23, 2008, in the western part of Finland when a 22-year-old
student shot 10 people in a training centre for adults and then killed himself (50). The number
of gunshot wounds in the victims varied from 1 to 20 reflecting the degree of determination and
hatred of the perpetrator. Besides the dangers of marginalisation, alienation and the specific
sub-culture of violence glorification among young men in Western countries, the availability
of, and lax laws governing the purchase of, handguns need to be urgently revised. Most of the
innocent victims of school and other public-place shootings were shot with guns that had been
purchased recently and legally (51).
According to a report from the United States, the number of murders has increased rap-
idly in some of major cities, by 76% in Milwaukee, 60% in St. Louis and 56% in Baltimore
(52). The most popular explanation seems to be that the increased criticism of police actions
(starting from August 2014 when an unarmed black teenager was shot by a white policeman
in Ferguson, Missouri) has resulted in a less aggressive approach by police forces allowing
criminals to have the upper hand. In June 2016, 50 people were shot dead in a bar in Orlando
frequented by the LGBT community, an event which, with more recent mass shootings, has
led to increasing public demands for gun control legislation. To date there seems little political
appetite at a central level for such intervention and the ‘gun lobby’ remains an exceptionally
powerful force in US politics.
GLOBALISATION, TRAUMA SYSTEMS AND EDUCATION

Trauma care practices are becoming increasingly uniform all over the world, not in small
part due to trauma training programmes, such as Advanced Trauma Life Support (ATLS®), the
European Trauma Course (ETC®) and Definitive Surgical Trauma Care (DSTC™). Although some
countries are ahead of others, the principles vary little from continent to continent (53–58).
A landmark event in global trauma care occurred on May 23, 2007, when the World Health
Assembly (WHA) adopted Resolution 60.22, ‘Health Systems: Emergency Care Systems’,
which called on the World Health Organization (WHO) and governments to adopt a variety
of measures to strengthen trauma and emergency care services worldwide (59). This resolution
constitutes the highest level of attention ever devoted to trauma care on a global scale.
There are signs, however, that medical systems have increasing difficulty in providing ade-
quate emergency care to their populations. In the United States some hospitals have had to
close their emergency departments (60). In 2007, the National Academy of Science and Institute
of Medicine published its report ‘Future of Emergency Care for the US Health System’ which
identified the following problems: poorly coordinated and chaotic pre-hospital care ambulances
being regularly turned away from hospital doors; overcrowded emergency departments, long
waiting times, lack of senior decision makers in emergency departments, poor facilities for pae-
diatric patients and lack of space for continuation of patient care. One of the solutions offered
is reorganisation and regionalisation of emergency care along the trauma system model, with
improvement in resourcing, training, leadership and research (61).
In Europe, the WHO has observed that emergency departments are overcrowded with
cases that cannot be considered urgent and has urged the development of daytime emergency
9
services, better coordination and selection of emergency patients, and more training of the
doctors and nurses treating emergency patients (62). In the UK the alleged pressure on the
National Health Service resulting from European Union migration was a major area of contro-
versy in the referendum regarding the EU membership debate and there is an opposite political
lobby demanding, in effect, ever-increasing health spending with no recognised limit.
One key issue is the level of expertise in the emergency department. Experiences from the
United Kingdom and New Zealand show that increasing availability of specialist-level physi-
cians in emergency departments shortens emergency department and hospital lengths of stay,
increases daytime and decreases night-time emergency operations, and decreases costs (63,64).
In the United States the combination of trauma surgery, emergency general surgery and
surgical critical care into one acute care surgery model and curriculum has progressed rapidly
(65). Initial experiences show that the acute care surgery model does not compromise the care
of the injured patients, and improves the care of some emergency surgery patient groups, such
as acute appendicitis or ruptured abdominal aortic aneurysms (66–68). This new paradigm is
also having an influence on clinical practice, for example by extending the concept of damage
control surgery to emergency general surgery (69,70). Based on a report from various hospitals
with similar complication rates but highly variable mortality rates, the concept of failure to res-
cue has been introduced, and surgical rescue has been included as the fifth pillar of acute care
surgery (in the United States) or emergency surgery (in Europe) alongside trauma, critical care,
emergency surgery and elective general surgery (71,72).
Finally, the paradigm change will also affect patient care on a system level. A message from
the president, Timothy Fabian, in the American Association for the Surgery of Trauma newsletter
stated: ‘For delivery of Emergency Surgical Services, it is time to ‘circle the wagons’ and regionalize
care in the same fashion as healthcare is being regionalized for many disease processes. The future will
hold Regional Emergency Surgery Hospitals’ (73).
SUMMARY
In spite of significant advances in clinical practice, economical, educational and organisational
limitations prevent us from providing the best available care for many of our patients, at least on
a global scale. Fresh solutions and new paradigms are needed in order to approach the key issues
successfully. Trauma and emergency clinicians can and should play a key role in identifying the
problems and challenges in providing adequate trauma care to the population. To do it, however,
requires a view encompassing the wider trends and challenges of the world we live and work in.
REFERENCES
1. Kundera M. The Curtain. New York: Harper Collins Publishers, 2005.
2. Huusko J. Pakolaiskriisin jäljet johtavat Syyriaan. Helsingin Sanomat, August 22, 2015.
3. Nieminen T. 2008a. Tohtori Wallersteinin hirviö. Helsingin Sanomat, March 9, 2008.
4. Immonen P. 2015. Tsunami avasi silmät. Raha-aktivisti Ville Iivarinen kertoo ihmisille
rahajärjestelmän ongelmista. Helsingin Sanomat, September 2, 2015.
5. Ahtiainen I. 2008. Euroopan väestökehitys maahanmuuton varassa. Helsingin Sanomat,
August 22, 2008.
6. Sillanpää S. Kaupungistumisesta tulee kiivainta Aasiassa ja Afrikassa. Helsingin
Sanomat, June 29, 2008.
10
References
7. Manner M. Suurpetos järisytti Brasiliaa. Helsingin Sanomat, September 14, 2015.

8. Ruohomäki O. Valtioiden haurastuminen uhkaa hyvinvointia rikkaissakin maissa.
Helsingin Sanomat, December 3, 2007.
9. Baer K. Maailman köyhien määrä kasvoi 400 miljoonalla. Helsingin Sanomat, September 4,
2008.
10. Sillanpää S. Rahat menivät kaivoon. Helsingin Sanomat, September 5, 2015.
11. Isomäki R. Millainen paikka maapallo on vuonna 2100 ilmaston lämmettyä viidellä
asteella? Duodecim 2007;123:2795–2801.
12. World Health Organization. Protecting health from climate change: WHO experts call
for health systems to play a greater role. Press release, April 4, 2008.
13. Sachs J. 2005. Climate change and war. Global Policy Forum. Project syndicate, March 1,
2005.
14. Zhang DD, Brecke P, Lee HF, He Y-Q, Zhang J. Global climate change, war, and popula-
tion decline in recent human history. PNAS 2007;104:19214–19219.
15. Rossi J. Öljyn kysynnän tyydyttäminen vaikeutuu tulevaisuudessa. Helsingin Sanomat,
May 14, 2008.
16. Saksa M. 2008. Uusi öljykriisi. Helsingin Sanomat, April 27, 2008.
17. Välimaa M. 2008. Maailmanpankki: Biopolttoaineet suurin syy ruuan hinnannousuun.
Helsingin Sanomat, July 5, 2008.
18. Baer K. Ruuan kysyntä on jo vuosia kasvanut tuotantoa nopeammin. Helsingin Sanomat,
April 17, 2008.
19. Virtanen J. Ruokamellakat leviävät ympäri maailmaa. Helsingin Sanomat, April 8, 2008.
20. Murray CJL, Lopez AD. Mortality by cause for eight regions of the world: Global Burden
of Disease Study. Lancet 1997;349:1269–1276.
Murray CJL, Lopez AD. Global mortality, disability, and the contribution of risk factors:
Global Burden of Disease Study. Lancet 1997;349:1436–1442.
Murray CJL, Lopez AD. Alternative projections of mortality and disability by cause
1990–2020: Global Burden of Disease Study. Lancet 1997;349:1498–1504.
21. Mathers CD, Loncar D. Projections of global mortality and burden of disease from 2002
to 2030. PLoS Medicine 2006;3:2011–2030.
22. Sillanpää S. Kiinan maanjäristyksessä kuoli ainakin 10000. Helsingin, 2008.
23. Nieminen T. Tulvatuhon silminnäkijä. Helsingin Sanomat, August 31, 2008.
24. Leppäniemi A, Vuola J, Vornanen M. Surgery in the air – Evacuating Finnish tsunami
victims from Thailand. Scandanavian Journal of Surgery 2005;94:5–8.
25. Brunkard J, Namulanda G, Ratard R. Hurricane Katrina deaths, Louisiana, 2006. Disaster
Medicine and Public Health Preparedness. August 27, 2008. [Epub ahead of print].
26. Klein N. 2007. Disaster capitalism. The new economy of catastrophe. Harper’s Magazine,
October 2007, 47–58.
27. Hiiro J. 2015. Lähes sata ihmistä kuoli nosturin kaaduttua moskeijan päälle Mekassa.
Helsingin Sanomat, September 12, 2015.
28. Klare MT. 2004. Blood and oil: How America’s thirst for petrol is killing us. New York: Henry
Holt and Company.
29. Huusko J. Nuorten miesten runsaus ruokkii konflikteja. Helsingin Sanomat, March 21,
2008.
30. Huusko J. Raportti: Lapsisotilaiden käyttö sodissa vähentynyt. Helsingin Sanomat,
May 30, 2008.
31. Lehtniemi N. 2008. Itä-Kongossa raiskauksesta on tullut sodankäynnin väline. Helsingin
Sanomat, January 7, 2008.
11
32. Duffy M. What would war look like? Time, September 25, 2006.
33. Aro J. Israelin isku Iraniin aiheuttaisi kaaoksen Lähi-Idässä. Helsingin Sanomat, July 10,
2008.
34. Kovanen I. 2008. Itä-Timor tuotti pettymyksen kansainväliselle yhteisölle. Helsingin
Sanomat, February 12, 2008.
35. Pettersson M. 2015. Viiden tähden jihad houkuttelee nuoria. Helsingin Sanomat, August 31,
2015.
36. Holcomb JB, McMullin NR, Pearse L, Caruso J, Wade CE, Oetjen-Gerdes L, Champion
HR et al. Causes of death in U.S. Special Operations Forces in the global war on terror-
ism 2001–2004. Annals of Surgery 2007;245:986–991.
37. Global Terrorism Index. Measuring and understanding the impact of terrorism. Institute
for Economics & Peace, 2014.
38. Kluger Y, Mayo A, Hiss J, Ashkenazi E, Bendahan J, Blumenfeld A, Michaelson M
et al. 2005. Medical consequences of terrorist bombs containing spherical metal pel-
lets: Analysis of a suicide terrorism event. European Journal of Emergency Medicine
2005;12:19–23.
39. Schecter WP. Nuclear, biological and chemical weapons: What the surgeon needs to
know. Scandanavaian Journal of Surgery 2005;94:293–299.
40. Stein M, Hirshberg A. Medical consequences of terrorism: The conventional weapon
threat. Surgical Clinics of North America 1999;79:1537–1552.
41. Shapira SC, Cole LA. 2006. Terror medicine: Birth of a discipline. JHSEM 2006;3:1–6.
42. Sullivan JP. Medical responses to terrorist incidents. Prehospital and Disaster Medicine
1990;5:151–153.
43. Eshkol Z, Katz K. Injuries from biologic material of suicide bombers. Injury 2005;36:271–274.
44. Wong JM-L, Marsh D, Abu-Sitta G, Lau S, Mann HA, Nawabi DH, Patel H. Biological
foreign body implantation in victims of the London July 7th suicide bombings. Journal of
Trauma 2006;60:402–404.
45. Kähkönen V. Al-Qaida murenee sisältä päin. Helsingin Sanomat, July 6, 2008.
46. Huusko J. Maailma valmistautuu kybersotien aikakauteen. Helsingin Sanomat, June 11,
2008.
47. Gold D. Hatred’s Kingdom: How Saudi Arabia Supports the New Global Terrorism.
Washington, DC: Regnery Publishing, 2003.
48. Koskinen M. Huumekartellit muistuttavat Isisiä. Helsingin Sanomat, August 24, 2015.
49. Saarinen J. 2007. Auvinen kertoi hyökkäyksestä etukäteen verkossa. Helsingin Sanomat,
November 8, 2007.
50. Jokelan tragedia toistui Kauhajoella. Yksitoista kuoli verilöylyssä. Helsingin Sanomat,
September 24, 2008.
51. Wintemute GJ. Guns, fear, the Constitution, and the public’s health. NEJM 2008;358:
1421–1424.
52. Similä V. Murhat lisääntyneet rajusti USA:ssa. Helsingin Sanomat, September 2, 2015.
53. Uranues S, Lamont E. 2008. Acute care surgery: The European model. World Journal
Surgery 32: 1605–1612.
54. Joshipura MK. Trauma care in India: Current scenario. World Journal of Surgery 2008;32:
1613–1617.
55. Christey GR. Trauma care in New Zealand: It’s time to move ahead. World Journal of
Surgery 2008;32:1618–1621.
56. Goosen J, Veller M. Trauma and emergency surgery: South African model. World Journal
of Surgery 2008;32:1622–1625.
12
References
57. Poggetti RS. Acute care surgeon South American model. World Journal of Surgery 2008;32:
1626–1629.
58. Hoyt DB, Kim HD, Barrios C. Acute care surgery: A new training and practice model in
the United States. World Journal of Surgery 2008;32:1630–1635.
59. Mock C, Arafat R, Chadbunchachai W, Joshipura M, Goosen J. 2008. What World
Health Assembly Resolution 60.22 means to those who care for the injured. World
Journal of Surgery 2008;32:1636–1642.
60. Mitchell A, Krmpotic D. What happens when a hospital closes it’s emergency department:
Our experience. Journal of Emergency Nursing 2008;34:126–129.
61. Committee on the Future of Emergency Care in the United States Health System. Emergency
medical services: At the crossroads. 2007. htpp://www.nap.edu/catalog/11629.html.Committee
on the Future of Emergency Care in the United States Health System. Hospital based
emergency care. At the breaking point. 2007. htpp://www.nap.edu/catalog/11629.html.
62. WHO Europe. What are emergency medical services? 2008. 1htpp:/www.euro.who.int
/emergservices/About/20020226_3.
63. Sorelli PG, El-Masry NS, Dawson PM, Theodorou NA. The dedicated emergency
surgeon: Towards consultant-based acute surgical admission. Annals of the Royal
College of Surgeons of England 2008;90:104–108.
64. Harvey M, Al Shaar M, Cave G, Wallace M, Brydon P. Correlation of physician seniority
with increased emergency department efficiency during a resident doctor’s strike. New
Zealand Medical Journal 2008;121:59–68.
65. The Committee on Acute Care Surgery American Association for the Surgery of
Trauma. The acute care surgery curriculum. Journal of Trauma 2007;62:553–556.
66. Pryor JP, Reilly PM, Schwab CW, Kauder DR, Dabrowski GP, Gracia VH, Braslow B,
Gupta T. Integrating emergency general surgery with a trauma service: Impact on the
care of injured patients. Journal of Trauma 2004;57:467–473.
67. Earley AS, Pryor JP, Kim PK, Hedrick JH, Kurichi JE, Minogue AC, Sonnad SS, Reilly
PM, Schwab CW. An acute care surgery model improves outcomes in patients with
acute appendicitis. Annals of Surgery 2006;244:498–504.
68. Utter GH, Maier RV, Rivara FP, Nathans AB. Outcomes after ruptured abdominal aortic
aneurysms: The “halo effect” of trauma center designation. Journal of the American
College of Surgeons 2006;203:498–505.
69. Stawicki SP, Brooks A, Bilski T, Scaff D, Gupta R, Schwab CW, Gracias VH. The c oncept
of damage control: Extending the paradigm to emergency general surgery. Injury
2008;39:93–101.
70. Leppäniemi A, Kimball EJ, De Laet I, Malbrain ML, Balogh ZJ, De Waele JJ.
Management of abdominal sepsis – A paradigm shift? Anaesthesiology Intensive Therapy.
May 14, 2015. doi: 10.5603/AIT.a2015.0026. [Epub ahead of print]
71. Ghaferi AA, Birkmeyer JD, Dimick JB. Complications, failure to rescue, and mortality
with major inpatient surgery in medicare patients. Annals of Surgery 2009;250:1029–1034.
72. Peitzman AB, Leppäniemi A, Kutcher ME, Forsythe RM, Rosengart MR, Sperry JL,
Zuckerbraun BS. Surgical rescue: An essential component of acute care surgery (edito-
rial). Scandinavian Journal of Surgery 2015;104:135–136.
73. Fabian TC. Message from the President. Newsletter of the American Association for the
Surgery of Trauma 2008:1–2.
13
Safety
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be aware of the full range of hazards associated with responding to an incident

▪▪ Understand the simple steps which will reduce the hazards associated with an incident
scene
▪▪ Be aware of the importance of honest and open review of adverse events and the need to
continuously update practices in the light of lessons learnt
INTRODUCTION
The aim of pre-hospital emergency care is to deliver prompt clinical care to patients within a
robust and safe framework. A robust clinical governance framework ultimately keeps everyone
safe. Much is made of the need for clinical safety in today’s modern healthcare system and this
is entirely correct. However, some aspects of safety can be overlooked by the pre-hospital prac-
titioner, particularly when they are faced with the multiple challenges of a critically ill patient.
Nevertheless, the pre-hospital environment is challenging and some degree of risk must be
considered acceptable: an obsessively safe culture has to be avoided and clinical effectiveness
maintained.
It is all too easy to be drawn on arrival into dealing with the clinical aspects of the situation
with the result that the pre-hospital practitioner becomes too patient centred too soon: com-
plete focus on dealing with the patient can make the practitioner unsafe as scene safety issues
develop around them unnoticed. It is therefore essential that the practitioner has a structure for
dealing with these aspects of safety whilst working.
GETTING TO THE SCENE SAFELY

No emergency call is so urgent as to justify an accident. Emergency care providers must comply
with the appropriate road traffic acts and avoid putting themselves, other road users and pedes-
trians at risk. Wherever possible the location of the incident and route to it should be established
14
The safety 123
before responding. Every responder should drive within their capabilities and must take account
of road, weather and ground conditions. Response driver training is mandatory. However tempt-
ing the alternative might be, it is essential to focus on the journey not the scene, making steady
progress without delay, and using headlights and warning lights where permitted.
PRACTICE POINT
Get to the scene safely – do not take risks, do not become a casualty!
When close to the scene, it should be approached slowly, with awareness of possible debris
or patients on the roadway. Police instructions should be followed and access or egress must
not be obstructed by either vehicle or equipment. Arrival should be notified to control, noting
the time. If first on scene, warning lights should be left on; if the other emergency services are
present, the warning lights can be switched off and the vehicle parked beyond the incident.
Wherever the vehicle is parked, it must be secured. Theft from emergency services vehicle is
far from unknown. Having arrived, it is essential to identify the resource leaders and to make
oneself known to them. Appropriate personal protective equipment must be worn and it is vital
to look out for hazards including moving traffic.
THE SAFETY 123

There are three facets of safety (see Box 2.1). BOX 2.1: Facets of Safety
This is known commonly as safety 123. This
123 approach implies a linear progression, starting ▪▪ Safety of the practitioner
from the point of arrival at the scene (Figure 2.1). ▪▪ Safety of the scene
However, attention to safety actually starts well ▪▪ Safety of the patient
before the practitioner even begins work and contin-
ues throughout the care offered, beyond pre-hospital care and into the hospital handover phase.
Safety has an important time aspect to it: dangers
PRACTICE POINT and threats can evolve on scene as time passes and
the situation develops, and if not reassessed may put
Hazards can change over time.
the practitioner at risk. It is vital therefore to think in
three dimensions (or four including time).
This chapter considers the elements of safety that need to be considered before, during and
after working in the pre-hospital environment. A SAFE approach is summarised in Box 2.2.
BOX 2.2: SAFE

Remember SAFE
▪▪ S – Standards
▪▪ A – Awareness
▪▪ F – Follow SAFETY 123
▪▪ E – Evaluation and re-evaluation
Figure 2.1 The approach to the scene – Safety 123.
15
Safety
S – STANDARDS
The professions involved in the provision of pre-hospital care produce and distribute their
own standards for safe practice. With the establishment of pre-hospital emergency medicine
(PHEM) as a medical sub-speciality, such standards are now also available for medical practi-
tioners (1). Whatever an individual’s background, they must be aware of the aspects of safety
standards mandated for their professional group.
A – AWARENESS
Any practitioner working within pre-hospital emergency care must be aware of the dangers
and risks inherent in the pre-hospital arena. This awareness can be developed by working with
the emergency services on joint exercises using the Joint Emergency Services Interoperability
Programme (JESIP; www.jesip.org.uk). Training together allows safe exposure to risks in a con-
trolled manner, together with structured education and rehearsal of those risks. Those start-
ing out in pre-hospital emergency care can develop awareness by doing observer shifts with
senior experienced pre-hospital emergency care practitioners. Much of the necessary aware-
ness is gained by exposure to the environment and learning through experience, which is why
it is important that new practitioners in pre-hospital emergency care are closely supported.
Working with those who have this experience is key to developing the foundation of awareness
of dangers and risks.
F – FOLLOW THE 123
1 – SELF
Being healthy and fit for the pre-hospital role is important, and good occupational support and
screening will help keep the practitioner safe. Every practitioner must be fit enough to work
in the physically challenging environments they will face. Fitness levels vary across different
agencies and it is important to establish what the expectations are for each role before starting.
All new healthcare workers must now undergo health clearance, including screening for blood-
borne viruses for those performing ‘exposure prone procedures’ (2). Other key issues which
must be considered under self are transmission of infection, and personal protective equipment
(see later).
2 – SCENE
The scene is by definition unsafe. Until an assessment has been made, it should never be
assumed that the scene is safe. On arrival, simple steps will reduce the risks (as well as creating
a professional impression) (Box 2.3).
Looking at the road on the approach will allow the practitioner to identify any hazards
which may be in the road (most commonly debris); spotting these early will prevent injury
16
F – follow the 123
BOX 2.3: First Steps on Arrival at the Scene

▪▪ Park at the scene as directed by emergency services.
▪▪ Do not ignore instructions from the police!
▪▪ If the responder is the first to arrive at the incident, consider protecting the scene by the use of
the ‘fend off position’.
▪▪ To do this, site the vehicle at a safe distance from the incident at an angle of 40 degrees into
the direction it would be safe for the vehicle to go if it were hit from behind; this is most likely to
be the verge with the wheels angled towards the verge. Should another vehicle subsequently
strike the stationary vehicle it should deflect the impact from the scene and protect the
responders forward of the impact point.
▪▪ Do not partially obstruct a traffic lane. If in doubt, fully close that lane as well.
or damage to those arriving (Figures

2.2 and 2.3). Importantly, the trail of
debris laid in the road from a road
traffic collision is precious forensic
evidence that must be protected for
the subsequent police accident inves-
tigation team; it should not be kicked
aside. There may also be sounds and
smells which will provide warning of
hazards such as unstable vehicles or
Figure 2.2 Scene hazards: sharps from a road traffic spilt fuel.
collision and confined space working.
Figure 2.3 Glass dust from a road traffic collision.
3 – PATIENT
A logical structured approach to the patient is essential (Figure 2.4). Rapid access to the patient may
require assistance from the fire and rescue service with stabilisation of the vehicle and glass man-
agement. A rapid assessment using the <C>ABCDE process will identify life-threatening conditions
17
Safety
and allow a judgement regarding the

necessary speed of evacuation of the
patient: will there be a need for a ‘snatch
rescue’ or a planned and staged removal?
Initial communication with the patient
will generally very rapidly provide useful
information. Once the patient has had
analgesia and is ready to move, they must
be protected from noise and sharps, and
care must be taken that vascular access
is not dislodged. Appropriate levels of
Figure 2.4 Assessing the scene before approaching
monitoring are essential. Trip hazards the patient.
must be avoided.
E- EVALUATION AND RE-EVALUATION

Regular reassessment of the scene for developing (or resolving) hazards is essential throughout
the assessment treatment and evacuation process. In addition, reassessment of the <C>ABCDE
sequence is essential, as the patient’s condition may change at any time. In the light of this new
information, decisions may change regarding the ultimate destination of the patient. Whatever
the destination, all lines must be secured, the patient must be safe and secure in whatever car-
rying or immobilisation device is used, and a clear plan for their safe removal from the scene
to the vehicle must be established and clear to all involved. Hypothermia must be prevented
or treated, and splints must be in situ and correctly applied where necessary. Monitoring will
allow the rapid recognition of any suggestion of deterioration.
PRACTICE POINT
Blowing three long blasts on a whistle should clear the scene of all personnel if any danger is
seen or expected.
An overall evaluation or re-evaluation of the scene will include the wind direction to assess
the impact of fumes, as not all fumes
are visible. As long as the approach is
upwind the risk is reduced, bearing
mind that wind direction can change
at any time (Figure 2.5).
If possible, odours that may give
a clue to potential dangers should be
identified, the obvious one being pet-
rol fumes following a road traffic colli-
sion (RTC). Strong-smelling chemicals
found in a factory may mean that the
environment is oxygen-depleted and
Figure 2.5 The Buncefield fire at the Hertfordshire Oil
any entry into this scene could result in Storage Terminal, December 11, 2005. A knowledge of
rescuer hypoxia and collapse. It should wind direction was vital for safe working at this scene.
18
Transmission of infection
also be remembered that some fumes such as carbon monoxide do not have a scent and the only
clue may come from the situational context of the injured patient, for example in an old house
with a poorly maintained gas appliance.
Looking at the posture of those standing around the scene (or running away) may give a
clue to the presence of danger, for example a crowd suddenly rushing away from the scene may
indicate that someone has just produced a weapon or become aggressive.
PRACTICE POINT
Always have an escape route in case things deteriorate.
TRANSMISSION OF INFECTION
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO BLOOD-BORNE PATHOGENS

There is a small but significant risk of transmission of infection in pre-hospital care. When
evaluating occupational exposures to fluids that might contain hepatitis B virus (HBV), hepatitis
C virus (HCV), or human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), PHEM practitioners should consider that
all blood, body fluids, secretions, and excretions except sweat may contain transmissible infec-
tious agents and adopt appropriate precautions. Blood contains the greatest load of infectious
particles of all body fluids and is the most critical transmission vehicle in the health-care set-
ting (Box 2.4).
BOX 2.4: Blood-Borne Pathogens

What is the risk of infection after an occupational exposure?
Hepatitis B virus (HBV)

PHEM practitioners who have received hepatitis B vaccine and have developed immunity to the
virus are at very slight risk of infection. For an unvaccinated person, the risk from a single
needle-stick or a cut exposure to HBV-infected blood ranges from 6% to 30% and depends
on the hepatitis B e antigen (HBeAg) status of the source individual. Individuals who are both
hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg) positive and HBeAg positive have more virus in their blood
and are more likely to transmit HBV.
Hepatitis C virus (HCV)
Based on limited studies, the estimated risk for infection after a needle-stick or cut exposure to
HCV-infected blood is approximately 1.8%. The risk following a blood splash is unknown but is
believed to be very small; however, HCV infection from such an exposure has been reported.
Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)
The average risk for HIV infection after a needle-stick or cut exposure to HlV-infected blood is
0.3% (about 1 in 300). The risk after exposure of the eye, nose, or mouth to HIV-infected blood
is estimated to be, on average, 0.1% (1 in 1000).
The risk after exposure of the skin to HlV-infected blood is estimated to be less than 0.1%. A small
amount of blood on intact skin probably poses no risk at all. There have been no documented
cases of HIV transmission due to an exposure involving such exposure for a short period of
time). The risk may be higher if the skin is damaged (for example by a recent cut), if the contact
involves a large area of skin or if the contact is prolonged.
19
Safety
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Personal protective equipment (PPE) consists of specialised clothing or equipment worn to protect
against hazards. Examples include gloves, masks, protective eyewear with side shields, and gowns
to prevent skin and mucous membrane exposures. In PHEM, PPE is also needed to protect the
practitioner from the environment. Employers have legal duties concerning the provision and use
of PPE at work through the Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations 1992. The risks against
which PPE should be worn are given in Box 2.5. Based on a dynamic risk assessment of the situ-
ation, the level of PPE depends on the requirements of the situation but may include (Figure 2.6):
• High visibility jacket with clear identification labels

• Waterproof overalls with knee protection and fire retardant as a minimum standard
• Safety helmet and visor
• Safety glasses
• Ear defenders
• Debris/chemical gloves
• Safety boots which are acid resistant with steel-toe caps and reinforced sole
• Head torch
• Whistle
• Clinical gloves
Whilst it is essential to be adequately protected, PPE must be tailored to the situation since
wearing PPE can dramatically downgrade performance.
BOX 2.5: Potential Hazards in Pre-hospital Practice

Eyes: Chemical or metal splash, dust, projectiles, gas and vapour, radiation
Head: Impact from falling or flying objects, risk of head bumping, hair entanglement
Breathing: Dust, vapour, gas, oxygen-deficient atmospheres
Body: Temperature extremes, adverse weather, chemical or metal splash, spray from
pressure leaks or spray guns, impact or penetration, contaminated dust, excessive wear or
entanglement of own clothing
Hands and arms: Abrasion, temperature extremes, cuts and punctures, impact, chemicals,
electric shock, skin infection, disease or contamination
Feet and legs: Wet, electrostatic build-up, slipping, cuts and punctures, falling objects, metal and
chemical splash, abrasion
PRACTICE POINT
It is essential to prepare equipment prior
to deployment: rehearsal is key to being
safe.
Goggles should provide adequate protec-

tion when the risk of splashing is pres-
ent, and must wrap around the eye area
to ensure side areas are protected. Face Figure 2.6 Individual personal protective equipment
shields or visors should be considered in (PPE).
20
Personal protective equipment
place of a surgical mask or goggles when there is a higher risk of splattering or aerosolisation
of blood or other body fluids. Gloves must be worn for invasive procedures, contact with sterile
sites and non-intact skin or mucous membranes and all activities that have been assessed as
carrying a risk of exposure to blood, body fluids, secretions and excretions; and when handling
sharp or contaminated instruments (also see Box 2.6).
BOX 2.6: Double Gloving

Double gloving
▪▪ Double gloving has been shown to be an effective method for reducing the potential for
contact with bodily fluids. In a 1992 study it was reported that surgeons who only single
gloved had a 51% hand contamination rate versus a 7% contamination rate for surgeons
who double gloved.
▪▪ Double gloving (wearing two pairs of gloves) significantly reduces the perforation rate of the
inner glove by at least 70% compared to single gloving (3).
SHARPS MANAGEMENT
Sharps injuries do occur on scene and good standards for handling sharps must be observed
(Box 2.7). If sharps are used, approved containers for the disposal of sharps (conforming to
UN3291 and BS 7320 standards) must be available before a procedure is started. Approved
sharps containers should be assembled correctly and never over-filled (above the manufactur-
ers’ fill line on the box or more than ¾ full).
BOX 2.7: Dealing with a Needle-Stick Injury

Actions in the event of an occupational exposure including needle-stick or similar injury
Perform first aid to the exposed area immediately as follows:
Skin/tissues
– Skin/tissues should be gently encouraged to bleed. Do not scrub or suck the area.
– Wash/irrigate with soap and warm running water. Do not use disinfectants or alcohol.
– Cover the area using a waterproof dressing.
Eyes and mouth
– Eyes and mouth should be rinsed/irrigated with copious amounts of water. Eye and mouth
washout kits are usually available in clinical areas.
– If contact lenses are worn, irrigation should be performed before and after removing these.
The contact lenses must not be replaced in the eyes.
– Water which has been used for mouth rinsing following mucocutaneous exposure must not
be swallowed.
Definitive Management
This will depend on the situation and information regarding the potential infection source but
will include blood tests for specific titres, immunisation and less commonly immunoglobulin
therapy. Local protocols should be followed and all incidents must be reported.
21
Safety
Sharps should not be passed directly hand to hand, and handling should be kept to a mini-
mum and carried out with care. Needles must not be re-sheathed, re-capped, bent, broken or
disassembled after use. Needles or other sharps must never be removed from holding imple-
ments using fingers. Safer sharps needles (Sharpsafe® or similar) are mandatory.
Sharps boxes should be secured to avoid spillage and appropriately sealed in accordance
with the manufacturers’ instructions once full. Local waste disposal policy must be followed.
Needless to say, items should never be removed from sharps containers. The label on the sharps
container must be completed when starting to use the container and again once sealed, to
facilitate tracing if required.
EQUIPMENT AND DRUG SAFETY

Arrival at the patient without the necessary equipment can seriously compromise the chances
of survival and a good outcome. For every minute that passes following collapse from cardiac
arrest before a defibrillation shock is delivered, the chance of survival reduces by 7% to 10%. It
is important that kit and drugs are carried safely to maintain clinical effectiveness and can be
easily retrieved when needed.
Carriage of materials such as drugs and medical gases must be in accordance with the
appropriate regulatory framework as well as being easily accessible and stored in a manner
which makes them immediately recognisable and safe from breakage (Figures 2.7 and 2.8).
Drugs such as those used for anaesthesia should be pre-drawn at the beginning of each shift,
and use of pre-prepared commercial syringes is encouraged. Correct labelling is essential in
order to avoid drug errors (Figure 2.9) (4). The use of laminated, easily accessible drug dosage
aid memoires is also encouraged (Figure 2.10).
Equipment used in pre-hospital care must be packed and prepared in a way that keeps the
equipment safe and accessible. Many equipment-packing systems exist around the world that
generally reflect different ways of working.
Many packaging systems are modular, based on the interventions likely to be used by an
advanced pre-hospital emergency medical team. These modular systems reduce turnaround
times as pre-packed modules that are held in storage can be ‘hot swapped’ quickly thus keep-
ing the team operational. In addition, location of the required equipment in adverse situations
Figure 2.7 Drugs stored in a soft canvass case that Figure 2.8 Safe carriage of controlled drugs
leaves drugs prone to breakage (glass on glass). with protection of glass ampoules.
22
Helicopter safety
Induction agents Hypnotics

Propofol Ketamine Diazepam Midazolam
...............................mg/mL. ...............................mg/mL. ............................mg/mL. ............................mg/mL.
Neuromuscular blocking drugs Neuromuscular blocking drug antagonist

Suxamethonium Vecuronium Neostigmine
..................................mg/mL. ...............................mg/mL. ...............micrograms/mL.
Opioids Opioid antagonist

Morphine Fentanyl Naloxone
...............................mg/mL. .................micrograms/mL. ................micrograms/mL.
Vasopressors Hypotensive agent

Adrenaline Ephedrine Labetalol
...............micrograms/mL. ...............................mg/mL. ................................mg/mL.
Anticholinergic agents Local anaesthetics

Atropine Glycopyrronium Lidocaine Bupivacaine
...............micrograms/mL. ..............micrograms/mL. ..................................%. ..................................%.
Anti-emetics Miscellaneous
Ondansetron Heparin Protamine
....................mg/mL. ....................units/mL. ....................mg/mL.
Figure 2.9 Standard drug labelling. (From http://www.rcoa.ac.uk/system/files/SYRINGE-LABELLING

-2014_0.pdf.)
is greatly facilitated (Figure 2.11). Using this approach standards of equipment delivery are
maintained, as packing and checking are done in a controlled manner.
PRE-DEPLOYMENT CHECKLISTS
Every deploying scheme or individual should have standard operating procedures (SOPs) for
reference use before deploying to the scene of an incident. These SOPs should aim to ensure
that nothing is forgotten and that all necessary safety measures have been put in place. An
example of the subjects which should be covered in such an SOP is given in Box 2.8.
HELICOPTER SAFETY
The ability to work safely around helicopters is an essential part of pre-hospital practice and
potentially one of its most hazardous components. Each helicopter will be slightly different
and the first priority is to be familiar with the airframe used in one’s area of practice. Faced
with an unfamiliar helicopter, there are certain general principles which are summarised in
Figure 2.12 (5). In general however, two points should be remembered: do not approach a
helicopter until signalled to do so by the pilot and make sure that unsecured items are unable
to cause damage to the airframe. In general, a helicopter should not be approached when the
rotors are turning.
23
Safety
FENTANYL ANALGESIA 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 1 mic/kg 60 mcg 80 mcg 100 mcg
Concentration 500 mcg in 10 mL Give 1.2 mL 1.6 mL 2 mL
DIAMORPHINE ANALGESIA 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 0.01 mg/kg 0.6 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg
Concentration 10 mg in 10 mL Give 0.6 mL 0.8 mL 1 mL
KETAMINE ANALGESIA 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 0.25 mg/kg 15 mg 20 mg 25 mg
Concentration 100 mg in 10 mL Give 1.5 mL 2 mL 2.5 mL
MORPHINE ANALGESIA 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Concentration 10 mg in 10 mL Give 6 mL 8 mL 10 mL
MIDAZOLAM SEDATION 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 0.01 mg/kg 0.6 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg
Concentration 10 mg in 10 mL Give 0.6 mL 0.8 mL 1 mL

KETAMINE INDUCTION 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 2 mg/kg 120 mg 160 mg 200 mg

SUX PARALYSIS 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg

Concentration 200 mg in 2 mL Give 0.9 mL 1.2 mL 1.5 mL
ROCURONIUM PARALYSIS 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Dose 1 mg/kg 60 mg 80 mg 100 mg
TIDAL VOLUME VENTILATION 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg
Normal 8 mL/kg 480 mL 640 mL 800 mL

Pulmonary 6 mL/Kg 360 mL 480 mL 600 mL
Protection
Figure 2.10 Drug dosage checking aid memoire for PHEM.
Figure 2.11 A system for equipment layout and packing used in pre-hospital emergency care.
24
Specific hazards
BOX 2.8: SOP for Pre-Hospital Response Team

Personnel
– ID cards
– PPE check
– Ensure head torches are working
Vehicle
– Carry out vehicle check, oil, water, tyres tread and pressures, lights/sirens
– Vehicle work-ticket signed
– Fuel card present
– Check access code and battery level of team tablet and secured to vehicle
Controlled drugs and equipment
– Ensure controlled drugs keys are drawn from keypress
– Check stock and sign controlled drug (CD) register
– Secure small CD pouch on person signing for controlled drugs
– Secure larger CD pouch in car safe
– Check clinical equipment and pouch seals
– Load car using agreed configuration
Communication
– Inform ambulance control of availability and ensure call sign allocated
– Identify consultant clinical support for the team
– Allocate responsibility for radio communications and navigation
Command and control
– Allocate provisional clinical roles before arrival
Record-keeping
– Complete patient report forms (PRFs) for all patients seen and place one copy to patient’s
hospital records (emergency department), second copy to station for scanning; if
applicable, ensure trainee paperwork is present
– Complete case log for all team activity including cancels/stand downs
– Debrief jobs post-incident where necessary
End of shift
– Unload all clinical equipment from car if using vehicle; repack/stock and keep clinical
equipment on vehicle
– Return controlled drugs to safe and sign them all back in to controlled drug register.
– Replenish/clean any equipment or leave a message for missing/broken items
SPECIFIC HAZARDS
WEATHER
The most significant weather hazard in pre-hospital care is cold, although even in the UK heat ill-
ness is not unknown. Wind chill is the perceived decrease in air temperature felt on exposed skin
due to the flow of air. Wind chill will inevitably affect a patient (and practitioner) if they are not
protected from it. Appropriate clothing and preparation (including watching the weather reports)
before deploying will reduce the risk.
Adding hypothermia to a patient’s other problems (through poor control of heat loss) will make
the clinical situation worse for the patient, as hypothermia affects the body’s ability to regulate
25
Safety
APPROACHING OR LEAVING A HELICOPTER
Helicopter Safety Zones
Acceptable Prohibited
Do not approach without receiving a visual signal from the
pilot. Never leave without a visual or spoken instruction to
do so. Stay where the pilot can see you at all times.
Preferred
On sloping ground always

approach or leave on the downslope side for maximum
rotor clearance.
Acceptable
Acceptable
(except for the S76)
Preferred
If blinded by swirling dust or grit, STOP − crouch lower, Caution:
or sit down and wait for assistance. For helicopters like the S76 with low front rotor blade clearance, always approach from the side.
If disembarking while the helicopter is hovering, get out Crouch while walking for extra rotor clearance. Always remove hats. Never reach up
slowly and smoothly when cleared to by the pilot. or chase after anything that blows away.
Never approach or leave a helicopter when its engine and

rotors are running down or starting up. Carry long objects horizontally below waist level − never upright or on the shoulder.
TAKEOFF, LANDING, AND LOADING OPERATIONS
Clear helipad of loose articles. Secure your gear from the

effects of rotor wash. After hooking up a cargo sling, move
forward and to the side to signal the
When directing the pilot for landing, stand
pilot. Ensure the sling is not across
with back to wind and arms raised.
the skid. Never ride on the sling.
When transporting personnel, loading staff should ensure that:

Passengers are briefed on approaching and leaving the helicopter
They are grouped together and positioned to one side of the When directing the pilot Fasten and adjust your
landing zone by radio, remember seat belt on entering the
They face away from the helicopter during takeoff and landing they may be too busy helicopter and leave it
Each person looks after their own gear to give a reply. fastened until the pilot
They are ready to board in turn as soon as the pilot gives the signals you to get out.
signal, and they are escorted to the helicopter.
Revised May 2012
Figure 2.12 Safe working around helicopters. (From https://www.caa.govt.nz/assets/legacy/safety_info

/Posters/safety_around_helicopters-industry.pdf.)
26
Specific hazards
Risk of getting hypothermia and frostbite outdoors

Air temperature C
... –10 C –11 ... –28 C –29 ... –39 C
0 10 7 4 1 –2 –5 –8 –11 –14 –17 –20 –23 –26 –29 –32 –35
2 9.2 5.7 2.2 –1.3 –4.8 –8.3 –12 –15 –19 –22 –26 –29 –33 –36 –40 –43
3 8.5 4.9 1.3 –2.3 –5.9 –9.5 –13 –17 –20 –24 –28 –31 –35 –38 –42 –46
4 8 4.3 0.6 –3.1 –6.8 –10 –14 –18 –22 –25 –29 –33 –36 –40 –44 –47
5 7.6 3.8 0.1 –3.7 –7.4 –11 –15 –19 –23 –26 –30 –34 –38 –41 –45 –49
6 7.2 3.4 –0.4 –4.2 –8 –12 –16 –19 –23 –27 –31 –35 –39 –42 –46 –50
7 6.9 3.1 –0.8 –4.6 –8.5 –12 –16 –20 –24 –28 –32 –36 –39 –43 –47 –51
8 6.7 2.8 –1.1 –5 –8.9 –13 –17 –21 –25 –29 –32 –36 –40 –44 –48 –52
9 6.4 2.5 –1.5 –5.4 –9.3 –13 –17 –21 –25 –30 –33 –37 –41 –45 –49 –53
Wind speed m/s
10 6.2 2.2 –1.8 –5.7 –9.7 –14 –18 –22 –26 –30 –34 –38 –42 –46 –50 –53
11 6 2 –2 –6 –10 –14 –18 –22 –26 –30 –34 –38 –42 –46 –50 –54
12 5.8 1.8 –2.3 –6.3 –10 –14 –18 –23 –27 –31 –35 –39 –43 –47 –51 –55
13 5.6 1.6 –2.5 –6.6 –11 –15 –19 –23 –27 –31 –35 –39 –43 –47 –51 –55
14 5.5 1.4 –2.7 –6.8 –11 –15 –19 –23 –27 –31 –35 –40 –44 –48 –52 –56
15 5.3 1.2 –2.9 –7 –11 –15 –19 –24 –28 –32 –36 –40 –44 –48 –52 –56
16 5.2 1 –3.1 –7.2 –11 –16 –20 –24 –28 –32 –36 –40 –45 –49 –53 –57
17 5 0.9 –3.3 –7.5 –12 –16 –20 –24 –28 –32 –37 –41 –45 –49 –53 –57
18 4.9 0.7 –3.5 –7.6 –12 –16 –20 –24 –29 –33 –37 –41 –45 –50 –54 –58
19 4.8 0.6 –3.6 –7.8 –12 –16 –20 –25 –29 –33 –37 –42 –46 –50 –54 –58
20 4.7 0.4 –3.8 –8 –12 –17 –21 –25 –29 –33 –38 –42 –46 –50 –55 –59
21 4.5 0.3 –3.9 –8.2 –12 –17 –21 –25 –29 –34 –38 –42 –46 –51 –55 –59
22 4.4 0.2 –4.1 –8.3 –13 –17 –21 –25 –30 –34 –38 –42 –47 –51 –55 –60
Low risk of hypothermia.

Risk of hypothermia, if being outdoors too long without relevant protection.
Increased risk of hypothermia. Exposed skin gets frostbitten in 10–30 min.
High risk of hypothermia. Exposed skin gets frostbitten in 5–10 min.
Exposed skin gets frostbitten in 2–5 min.
Exposed skin gets frostbitten in less than 2 min.
Figure 2.13 Hypothermia risk.
bleeding and contributes to the trauma lethal triad (Figure 2.13). The patient can be wrapped in bub-
ble wrap or cellular blankets; the important thing is to keep the patient out of the wind. Wrapping
a patient wearing cold wet clothes in a tinfoil blanket will only exacerbate the problem: cold wet
clothes should be removed and replaced where possible, if transfer times are likely to be prolonged.
MOTORWAYS
Motorways are extremely dangerous places to work and deaths of rescuers are sadly not rare.
The 20 highest scoring hazards account for around 90% of the total risk and include driver
fatigue, speeding, rapid changes of general vehicle speed, tailgating, vehicles stopping in a run-
ning lane, pedestrians in running lanes and vehicles recovered from a refuge area.
Some of the hazards can be mitigated, and the design and use of technology to create a con-
trolled environment where drivers comply with signs and speeds have allowed the Highways
Agency to manage these risks down to an acceptable level. So, for instance, the hazards of a
vehicle being driven too fast or the occurrence of tailgating are mitigated through the use of
variable mandatory speed limits and enforcement. As a general principle, one should always
adopt a position on the bankside of the safety barrier and watch the approaching traffic (or get
someone to spot this aspect of the scene for you) (6).
27
Safety
RAIL INCIDENTS
Unless advised by the fire or ambulance safety officer, or senior representative of Network Rail
that the scene is safe, one must not go onto a railway line without prior appropriate training
through Network Rail or unless in the company of Network Rail or British Transport Police
personnel.
Many rail lines are electrified and access to these sites requires specialist knowledge to
manage the risks. For example, the London Underground rail system has a third rail which
is charged to around 600 volts. This needs to be isolated before making an approach to a
patient on the line. British Transport Police are the agency to refer to for this advice and
support.
FIRES
The senior fire officer on scene is in charge of scene safety. The safety of all personnel work-
ing on scene is his responsibility. Generally speaking, having arrived on scene the responder
should report to the fire officer (white helmet) for a safety briefing (Figure 2.14).
CHEMICAL INCIDENTS
If at a scene one patient appears to have collapsed for unknown reasons, it is usually safe to
approach normally. However, if two patients have collapsed for unknown reasons, the approach
must be with caution. If three or more patients have collapsed without any obvious reason, then
the correct action is to withdraw and report this immediately to control. Having done this,
every effort should be made to control scene access and egress until specialist help is available.
This latter event maybe a serious chemical incident and requires a specialist response. The
recent incidents involving a chemical weapons agent in Salisbury and Amesbury very clearly
highlighted the dangers in managing such a situation.
WATER
To prevent drowning and other injuries when working around water, it is crucial to assess the
risks and call upon specialist teams who are trained and equipped to deal with this hazard.
Some pre-hospital medical schemes that are frequently called to incidents in or around water
will allocate personal flotation
devices to their staff (7). Crew manager
Yellow helmet
Two 12.5 mm
ACTS OF AGGRESSION black bands
Managing violence and aggres- Watch manager

White helmet with black comb
sion is a large and important
12.5 mm black band
subject and cannot be covered in
detail here. If there is a risk of vio-
Station manager
lence, control will advise standing White helmet with black comb
off from the scene until the police 19 mm black band
have secured it. It is important
to ensure familiarity with local Figure 2.14 Senior fire officers’ rank markings.
28
Post-incident debriefing
policies for handling unexpected situ-

BOX 2.9: Signs of Aggression
ations. Sometimes it is not what a per-
son says, but what their body is ‘doing’ ▪▪ Flushed or pale face
(Box 2.9). There may be situations ▪▪ Sweating
where contact with the patient is made ▪▪ Pacing, restless or repetitive movements
and it is not obvious at the begin- ▪▪ Banging/kicking things
ning that there is a threat of violence. ▪▪ Stamping feet
Caution is important when someone ▪▪ Trembling or shaking
shows one or more of the ‘non-verbal’ ▪▪ Clenched jaws or fists
signs of aggression. Avoidance of spe- ▪▪ Exaggerated or violent gestures
cific risk means paying attention to ▪▪ Standing too close
the patient’s hands and feet range ▪▪ Change in voice
as well as being aware of the risk of ▪▪ Loud talking or chanting
being headbutted! When the risk is ▪▪ Shallow, rapid breathing
identified, the first consideration is ‘do ▪▪ Scowling, sneering or use of abusive language
I need to leave now?’ In many cases ▪▪ Glaring or avoiding eye contact
this is the first and only option and is ▪▪ Violating your personal space (they get too close)
entirely correct.
Conversely, it is important to be aware of your own body language and present a non-
threatening, open stance, keeping good eye contact whilst ensuring this does not appear
confrontational.
Make sure you are able to ‘escape’ at all times when dealing with potentially violent situ-
ations. In such situations movements should be slow and steady and actions calm. Personal
space should be respected. It is vital to keep calm (8).
POST-INCIDENT DEBRIEFING
Although it might seem unusual to include debriefing and case review in a section on
safety, in reality safe and effective practice depends on having an established system for
reviewing and changing practise based on experience. Facets of such a structure may
include discussion of issues arising from an individual case between a trainee and a super-
visor (case-based discussions) and team discussion of critical interventions with review
of standard operating procedures in the light of any issues identified. Standard operating
procedures which are regularly revised and updated in the light of experience and newly
available evidence not only improve performance, but protect the clinician in the event of
a serious untoward event. Whenever such an event happens, a full investigation of how
and why it happened is mandatory in order to reduce the possibility of it happening again.
Honest and constructive analysis of such incidents is essential to non-judgemental learn-
ing and a supportive culture.
Equipment governance is also important in maintaining safety standards. All equipment
must be ready to use and all personnel must be fully familiar with the checking, maintenance
and proper use of equipment and drugs. In addition, systems must be in place to ensure that
equipment is safe to use and, where necessary, appropriately calibrated. Equipment failures not
infrequently contribute to adverse incidents during PHEM. SOPs must aim to prevent equip-
ment failure through routine checking and maintenance, rapid identification of equipment
failures (by checking equipment prior to immediate use and maintaining a high level of vigi-
lance) and by effectively managing an equipment failure (through resolution or replacement).
29
Safety
Failure of equipment should be reported to the appropriate statutory authority. Common causes
of equipment failure include lack of training or poor instructions, inappropriate modifications,
use in inappropriate circumstances, use outside the manufacturer’s specifications, poor main-
tenance and unsuitable storage conditions (9).
SUMMARY
Safety is a vital aspect of pre-hospital practice. Most risks can be avoided by following very sim-
ple rules and by inculcating a safety culture. To do this, it is vital that standard operating pro-
cedures reflect accumulated experience and up-to-date knowledge and that a non-judgemental
supporting environment allows all those individuals involved to be honest about mistakes and
to learn from them.
REFERENCES
1. http://www.ibtphem.org.uk/IBTPHEM/Curriculum.html. Similar standards for the fire
and rescue services are at http://www.ukfrs.com/.
2. http://www.gmc-uk.org/education/undergraduate/15_5_health_clearance_and_disclosure
.asp.
3. http://www.nhsprofessionals.nhs.uk/download/comms/cg1_nhsp_standard_infection
_control_precautions_v3.pdf.
4. Syringe labelling in critical care areas: 2014 review. http://www.rcoa.ac.uk/system/files
/ SYRINGE-LABELLING-2014_0.pdf.
5. https://www.caa.govt.nz/assets/legacy/safety_info/Posters/safety_around_helicopters
-industry.pdf.
6. https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/363993
/ Smart_motorways_-_Fact_Sheets.pdf.
7. Recognising aggression in others. SkillsYouNeed. http://www.skillsyouneed.com/ps
/ dealing-with-aggression2.html#ixzz3PGSaSA8l.
8. http://www.mhra.gov.uk/Aboutus/index.htm.
30
The incident scene
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand how the scene of an incident is safely managed

▪▪ Understand how to function effectively at the scene of an incident
▪▪ Be aware of the important information which can be obtained from a careful assessment of
the scene of an incident
INTRODUCTION
Pre-hospital practitioners have the opportunity to gain important information from the scene of an
incident which may be vital for the effective management of a patient. Equally, the scene of an inci-
dent can be a dangerous and inhospitable place. Practitioners must, therefore, be able to function
effectively at the scene of an incident, including interacting appropriately and professionally with
the emergency services and other responders. Practitioners must also be vigilant for those details
of the scene which may prove to be important in ensuring optimal management of the patient.
PREPARATION AND RESPONSE

Vehicle and medical equipment checks should take place every day. The most effective way
to ensure readiness for service is to use a checklist; a challenge and response checklist with a
colleague may prove the most effective system. If an observer or trainee is attending, their role
on scene and any expectations of them during the drive or at the scene should be made clear
before departing.
TAKING THE CALL AND SETTING OUT

A single responder must inevitably know what the task is, but in a team response some services
‘blind’ the driver to the type of call in an effort to ensure consistency of driving and avoid a
change in speed for the urgent calls.
31
The incident scene
If a colleague is available to navigate, knowing the exact location of the incident before set-
ting off may not be a priority. A skilled navigator will be able to determine the location of the
incident and the most appropriate (not necessarily the fastest) route. As a single responder it is
important to have clarity on the location from the outset and use of a satellite navigation system
(satnav) is useful (see later), although maps must also be carried.
En route a driver should have the majority of his or her attention or bandwidth focused on
driving. This means looking out at the road ahead and being aware of the vehicle and how it is
responding. To facilitate this, all other distractions should be minimised. If a satellite naviga-
tion system is used, its auditory mode should be enabled to avoid the driver being distracted by
the map display. Conversation en route should be focused on the task and nothing else. Control
should avoid giving unnecessary updates, such as ‘the patient has progressed to cardiac arrest’.
This will only distract the driver and potentially change their driving style. Important updates
such as change of location or safety issues on scene should always be communicated.
THE APPROACH
Accuracy of navigation is vital. A 3 to 4 minute detour because of a wrong turn may have a mate-
rial effect on outcome in a patient in cardiac arrest. It is better to slow down and stop rather than
make hasty navigation decisions. When driving to an incident, any hazards that may require
modification of the direction of the approach should be considered. Fires and potential chemical
incidents may necessitate a less direct approach depending on the prevailing wind. Consideration
should also be given to the time of day, likely flows of traffic, the possibility of traffic build up and
gridlock due to the incident. The most direct route may not necessarily be the quickest.
On arrival the vehicle should be parked in a way that will not slow the exit of the ambulance
carrying the casualty to hospital or impede other emergency vehicles that may need to be closer to
the scene than your own. If the road is not closed and moving traffic threatens those at the scene,
the vehicle should be parked in a way that brings traffic to halt and protects the scene. The police
will formalise this process on their arrival. It may be appropriate to leave flashing lights active to
increase protection. The ignition keys may be left in the vehicle so that the police can move it if
necessary, but consideration must be given to the possibility of theft of the vehicle or its contents.
PRACTICE POINT
It is vital to confirm arrival on scene with the operations room.
Arriving by helicopter provides an opportunity to survey the scene. In large-scale incidents, a

sketch picture taken from the air may be useful. Such pictures can add significant clarity to peo-
ple’s understanding of the magnitude of an incident and where resources might best be placed.
It is essential to exit the vehicle carefully and safely, especially if traffic is still moving. Risks
must not be taken by parking in an unsafe position in an attempt to arrive a few seconds
sooner. Ideally, the driver should remind everyone else in the vehicle about the importance of
safety before doors are opened. Appropriate personal protective equipment is mandatory.
The walk to the scene is an opportunity to take stock and to survey the scene for immediate
hazards. A fall from height through a window or skylight may leave the patient in continued
danger from unsecure glass or debris above (Figure 3.1).
If the patient and other rescuers appear in a vulnerable position, any such concerns must be
raised as soon as possible and appropriate action taken. A detailed history and examination can
32
Preparation and response
Figure 3.1 (Left) Glass from the skylight is visible on floor. (Right) The patient fell through a skylight.
wait until all are safe. A road traffic collision (RTC) can present many hazards including spilt
fuel, an unstable vehicle, sharp metal edges, shattered glass and danger risk from other road
users if the road is not closed (Figure 3.2).
If the patient has been injured at height or close to water this may present potential risks,
and the use of specialist protective or rescue equipment may be desired or essential. Dynamic
risk assessment is vital (Figure 3.3). An unresponsive patient trapped under a car and thought
to be in respiratory or cardiac arrest should be removed if resources and manpower will facili-
tate this. Waiting for dedicated rescue resources may result in a poor patient outcome and
public criticism in post-incident analysis.
The final approach on foot is also an opportunity to consider the egress for the patient once
the decision to transport has been made. Bystanders can help clear pathways and corridors, or
source keys for gates or doors that may be locked. They may also be able to identify an area
where the patient can be assessed and treated with 360 degrees of access if the patient was
originally injured in a confined space.
Gather
information
and
intelligence
Take Assess
action and risks and
Working
review together develop a
what Saving lives,
working
happened Reducing strategy
Harm
Identify Consider
options and powers,
contingencies policies and
procedures
Figure 3.2 Hazards for responding clinicians in

this RTC include unstable vehicle, glass, sharp Figure 3.3 The Joint Emergency Services
metal fragments, exposed electrics and fuel on the Interoperability Programme (JESIP) Joint Decision
ground, un-deployed airbags. Model.
33
The incident scene
PRACTICE POINT
360 degree access should be obtained at the earliest opportunity.
THE PATIENT
Having made contact with the patient, it is important to establish who else is present. Are
those present relatives, friends, work colleagues or simply witnesses? It may be obvious why
an ambulance was called but who made the call and exactly why? This may add clarity to the
mechanism of the presenting complaint. A witness who saw the crash may intimate there was
loss of control before the accident indicating a prodromal medical event.
Questioning the witnesses will also allow the responder to understand the patient’s physiol-
ogy immediately after the injury and whether the patient’s condition is improving or deterio-
rating. Specific questions should be used to clarify the details of any incident which is initially
described as being one in which the patient was alleged to have been ‘unconscious’. The lay use
of the term can be different from the exact clinical definition. It is not unusual for a patient who
has not moved their limbs to be deemed unconscious, but closer questioning reveals they had
full eye movements and were vocalising seconds after the incident.
WHY MAKING DIAGNOSES IS DIFFICULT IN PRE-HOSPITAL CARE

A clinical consultation in the pre-hospital phase is no different to a consultation in hospital. It
is expected that the history will be complete and that examination will elucidate all the clini-
cal findings both positive and negative. However, establishing diagnoses may be harder in the
pre-hospital phase. Traditional medical education teaches us that the majority of diagnoses are
made from the history and in many cases the primary symptom is pain. Obtaining an accurate
history from a trauma patient may be compromised; they may be unconscious, be incapable of
feeling pain as a result of spinal cord or brachial plexus injury, or have major distracting inju-
ries. Opiates and adrenaline may mask pain and other symptoms or the patient may be under
the effects of alcohol or drugs.
In the pre-hospital phase of trauma management, the injury response will be in evolution.
For example the established features of a large pneumothorax or internal bleeding may not
be present on scene as the condition may still be developing. For this reason the pre-hospital
clinician must anticipate injuries. Understanding the mechanisms of injury and likely injury
patterns from the mechanism is the primary way of doing this.
To improve diagnostic accuracy, the examination must be focussed and nuanced using likely
injury patterns. Such injury patterns can only be defined when the clinician understands what
has happened to the patient, and the exact mechanism of injury is clear. It is necessary, there-
fore to talk to witnesses wherever possible. Concentration on the predicted injury pattern must
not blind the clinician to other injuries which may be present, neither should the examination
be used solely to confirm the expected injury pattern.
PRINCIPLES OF SCENE MANAGEMENT

If resources allow, a senior clinician should lead the incident and refrain from touching the
patient or undertaking interventions where possible. However, resources are often limited and
34
Undertaking the consultation
the clinical lead will be required to undertake patient assessment and specific interventions,
recognising that during such times situational awareness is lost. The clinician must make best
use of all the resources on scene and tailor the contributions of individuals to their particular
skill level; this is part of effective crew resource management. A paramedic should not be left to
undertake manual in-line mobilisation of the spine when this could be carried out by a fireman
or policeman. The paramedic should be free to use their extended clinical skills appropriately.
Anticipation of the steps in patient care is important and all personnel tending the patient
should be aware of what is likely to happen next. When intravenous access is being attempted,
another team member should be preparing to secure it and have a primed infusion line ready.
The clinical lead should facilitate clinicians working simultaneously around the patient.
UNDERTAKING THE CONSULTATION

If other emergency personnel are tending to the patient, it is entirely inappropriate for a doctor
or other senior clinician to behave as if they have primacy and ‘own’ the patient. Brief introduc-
tions to colleagues are important, and knowing who is present and their skill levels will aid
communication and teamwork as well as avoiding embarrassment. Careful attention should
be paid to any handover, and the plans which have already been put in place must be clearly
established and understood. It is good manners and assists with relationships within the team
to seek ‘permission’ to consult the patient.
Introductions to the patient should be appropriate; first names may not be the best approach
with an older patient. Whatever the situation, creating the impression that everything is under
control will calm the patient, improve their physiology and generally promote effective working.
Research shows that conscious patients may have their anxiety raised when they become aware that
a helicopter has been sent to the incident with a doctor and specially trained paramedic on board.
Appropriate physical contact is likely to be very reassuring to the patient (Figure 3.4). This is
often one of the few things patients remember from the scene. Many patients feel or worry that
they may be dying: if they are not, they should be explicitly told so. Appropriate reassurance
should always be offered.
The position in which a patient is first found may not be ideal for examination and interven-
tion, In such circumstances, consideration must be given to moving the patient safely in order
to facilitate management (Figure 3.5).
Establishing the existence (or otherwise) of significant issues with catastrophic external
haemorrhage, airway, breathing or circulation (the primary survey) should take place over a
few seconds and any necessary interventions carried out as required. A thorough head-to-toe
examination should then proceed, again tak-
ing only a minute or so, and looking for life-
or limb-threatening injuries only. When the
clinician has completed this examination the
extent of the majority of the injuries should
be understood. A plan should be established
with regard to further clinical interventions
and extrication. At an opportune moment the
clinician should meet witnesses to under-
stand the mechanism of injury and may
need to return to nuance the examination
Figure 3.4 Appropriate reassurance is vital. accordingly.
35
The incident scene
Figure 3.5 Attempts to intubate the patient who Figure 3.6 Axial skeletal injury from rollover
had fallen into this basement were unsuccessful incidents may be asymptomatic and the individual
until the patient was moved to a more suitable not considered a patient by other emergency
location where 360 degree access was possible. services.
It is important to establish how many people have been involved in the incident. Some indi-
viduals may not consider themselves to be patients or may not have been ‘labelled’ as patients
by other emergency services on scene (Figure 3.6). Details of who has been involved should
be clarified when trying to understand the mechanism of injury and what happened. On ini-
tial assessment, patients may appear less badly injured than the circumstances of the accident
might suggest. Once the number of patients and their injuries has been established, control
must be updated and informed of the resources required.
MANIPULATING THE ENVIRONMENT

The pre-hospital environment can present issues that compromise assessment and interven-
tions. The weather may be windy, cold or wet. It may be very sunny, hampering laryngoscopy
or interpretation of ultrasound images on a screen. It is incumbent on the clinician to manage
the scene in a way that the effects of the environment are minimised. The fire brigade may have
tarpaulin to provide shelter so that the patient can be intubated in an area that is out of bright
sunlight, or it might be less windy in the lee of an ambulance vehicle.
VEHICLE ACCIDENTS AND ENTRAPMENT

During extrications it is essential that the roles of the fire and rescue personnel are clearly estab-
lished, in particular which individual is leading on the technical aspects of the extrication and who is
in overall charge. These should be two different roles. The Joint Emergency Services Interoperability
Programme (JESIP) principles should be followed (Figure 3.7). Clinical findings will need to be
conveyed to the leader of the extrication in order to determine the method and speed of the process.
Establishing whether a patient is trapped, and why, is essential. Entrapments may be physi-
cal (when the patient cannot get out irrespective of their clinical state because the structure of
the vehicle impedes their removal) or clinical (relative) where analgesia and minimal manipula-
tion will allow extrication. An example of the latter might be a fractured ankle ‘trapped’ by the
pedals in the footwell of the car.
36
Manipulating the environment
Co-locate
Co-locate with commanders as soon as practicably possible at a single, safe and easily identified location
near to the scene
Communicate
Communicate clearly using plain English
Co-ordinate
Co-ordinate by agreeing on the lead service; identify priorities, resources and capabilities for an effective
response, including the timing of further meetings
Jointly understand risk

Jointly understand risk by sharing information about the likelihood and potential impact of threats and
hazards to agree on potential control measures
Shared situational awareness

Shared situational awareness established by using METHANE and the Joint Decision Model
Figure 3.7 The five principles of effective joint working.
Different mechanisms of injury produce different injury patterns. Frontal impact RTCs
such as that in Figure 3.8 may be associated with injuries to the head and spine through
contact with the windscreen or steering wheel or the deceleration forces themselves. As
the torso loads the seat belt, injuries to the chest and abdomen can occur. Contact of the
lower limbs on the dashboard can produce fractures to the knees, femurs or pelvic bones.
Dislocation of the hip may also occur. In incidents where the energy transfer is so great
there is deformation of the passenger cell, lower leg injuries may occur from crumpling of
the footwell and pedals.
Side impacts (Figure 3.9) may be of greater clinical significance, as the crumple zone is
smaller than in front or rear collisions. Injuries to the head can occur as the head impacts
the side windscreen or bonnet of the other car or other roadside furniture. Forced lateral
flexion of the neck may produce cervical spine injuries. As the torso makes contact with
the intruding door, injuries to the chest and abdomen can occur, along with injuries to
the limbs. Compression fractures of the pelvis and injuries to the acetabulum are also
possible.
The police will undertake a detailed investigation of the scene if there have been fatali-
ties, if a patient’s life is threatened or there are life-changing injuries. This investigation will
take time and result in the road being closed for a protracted time. Due consideration should
therefore be given to the consequences when affirming an event is life threatening.
37
The incident scene
Figure 3.8 A front impact RTC. Figure 3.9 A side impact RTC.
PHOTOGRAPHY
The importance of understanding the mechanism of injury has been alluded to. Photographs of
car wreckage may help convey some of this to hospital-based clinicians. When amputation is
being considered, a photograph of the entrapment may prove useful if the decision to amputate
is challenged at a later time. As with all clinical photography these pictures should be processed
as part of the patient’s record and the necessary consents established where practicable and
possible. A dedicated clinical camera should be used for this purpose and not ad hoc use of a
personal phone camera.
EGRESS AND TRIAGE

On occasion, access to the patient and egress for the patient may be difficult. It is important that
there is clear allocation of clinical and non-clinical tasks. Two clinicians troubleshooting the
same problem is inefficient. It is important therefore to be clear who is addressing clinical issues
and who is working with other emergency personnel in defining the egress from the scene.
Establishing the most appropriate hospital for the patient will depend on the patient’s inju-
ries and local facilities. Most trauma networks will have guidance documents to help decision-
making, however a consensus should be established from all involved especially the clinician
first on scene.
Debriefing following an incident is an important process. It is useful to communicate with
the leads from the other emergency services on scene to enquire if any issues have arisen and if
a quick or a more formal debrief is required. For the clinical teams, a debrief should take place
following handover at hospital after every significant incident. Having a structured debrief
form or checklist ensures that all aspects of a mission are covered.
EN ROUTE TO HOSPITAL
The chosen hospital must be made aware of the patient’s impending arrival. If the patient
requires special resources or skills on arrival at hospital this must be made clear. If the patient
needs a general trauma team or a specific specialty response (for example, a cardiothoracic sur-
geon), then this should be clearly stated. Many centres employ special code names for differing
types of hospital responses such as code red for major haemorrhage.
38
Summary
CLINICAL NOTES
All patients should have a clinical record of their pre-hospital consultation and this should form
part of the hospital record. All clinical notes must be made and kept in a way that is compli-
ant with any relevant medical regulations. The notes convey important clinical information to
hospital-based colleagues and should describe the mechanism of injury, the patient’s physiol-
ogy since the incident occurred, the injuries, relevant past medical history and all interventions
undertaken. They should always include details from witnesses and other emergency services
on scene before the arrival of the emergency services. The clinical notes are a reflection of the
clinical care provided, and should be accurately, honestly and promptly completed.
SUMMARY
Managing the scene is an important part of patient care and one that requires practice.
Establishing and maintaining good relationships with other responders will enhance patient
care. Careful assessment of the scene (and questioning of witnesses) allows access to vital
information which might otherwise be missed.
39
Communication in pre-hospital
care
4
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the importance of communication in pre-hospital care

▪▪ Be able to pass important information effectively in order to ensure the patient receives the
best pre-hospital care
▪▪ Understand the importance of on-scene communication with other agencies and the role
of teamwork
INTRODUCTION
The pre-hospital management of patients who have suffered trauma starts from the moment
the emergency services are contacted and ends when the patient arrives at the appropriate
treatment centre and their care has been formally transferred to hospital staff. Throughout this
process clinical care will only save the patient’s life and ensure they reach the right hospital as
quickly as possible, if on-scene communication between all the responding organisations is
open, clear and timely. The importance of getting on-scene relationships right and ensuring
effective communication has developed into a subject in its own right. A number of helicopter
emergency medical services, BASICS schemes and ambulance services in the UK have now
adopted Crew Resource Management (CRM) techniques to improve communication on scene
by encouraging organisations to recognise the importance of how people work together most
efficiently and constructively.
On-scene communication has for a number of years also been a source of concern at major
incidents. In every one of the recent enquiries undertaken into these incidents, on-scene com-
munication has been highlighted as a key issue requiring improvement. A report by Dr Kevin
Pollock commissioned to review the lessons learnt relating to communications and interoper-
ability from emergencies and major incidents since 1986 cites a number of lessons originating
from shortcomings in inter-service communication. Out of the recommendations in this report
and other work originated the national Joint Emergency Services Interoperability Programme
(JESIP).
40
Communication and responding to the trauma call
COMMUNICATION AND RESPONDING TO THE TRAUMA CALL

In the UK access to the emergency services is gained by dialling 999 or 112. All calls to
this number are directed to the service provider of the telephone (BT emergency or another
service provider such as Vodaphone, O2 or Cable and Wireless). The call is answered and then
directed to the appropriate emergency service. In the case of patients who have suffered
trauma, the ambulance service is obviously most commonly requested although the police
and fire and rescue services may be required if there has been, for example, a road traffic
collision. The call is directed to the ambulance service control room for the geographi-
cal area in which the calls originates. With the increasing number of calls being gener-
ated from mobile phones this can mean the call is not always routed to the geographically
appropriate emergency service especially close to area boundaries or across areas of water
(Box 4.1).
Once the call is passed to the ambulance ser-
BOX 4.1: Effective Messaging
vice they have a target of ensuring that 95% of
emergency calls are answered within 5 s econds Any effective communication should be:
of being routed to them. To speed up the essen- ▪▪ Intelligible
tial information being taken, technology such ▪▪ Accurate
as Caller Line Identification (CLI) is used by all ▪▪ Timely
ambulance services. This computer system ▪▪ Clear
allows the address, if the call is originating ▪▪ As short as possible (concise)
from a landline phone, to be automatically pop-
ulated in the ambulance service call-taking
screen. Mobile (cellular) phone location identification software is rapidly developing but in
most cases exact locations cannot yet be reliably obtained.
All emergency calls in ambulance control rooms are recorded on a computer aided dispatch
system (CAD). The CAD has an integrated mapping system which is linked to an address data-
base to provide a map reference for the site at which the incident has occurred. Once the location
details are obtained the caller is taken through a set of questions to determine the priority of the
response required. Currently in the UK two triage systems are licenced to be used for prioritising
calls: Medical Priority Dispatch System (AMPDS) and NHS Pathways. Where a call is identified as
immediately life threatening (Red 1 or 2) the call has a resource dispatched. In most cases as soon
as the address and type of incident are established the call is automatically passed by the computer
system for dispatch. The rest of the questions can then be asked without slowing the response and
the responding vehicle can then be updated as required with the relevant information.
All ambulances and single response vehicles are tracked through integrated satellite naviga-
tion systems, these are located in the vehicle and in most cases the Airwave handset. This enables
the ambulance control centre to assign the closest resource to the call. All relevant call details are
passed by mobile data systems enabling the vehicle mapping system to be automatically updated
and reducing the time it takes the resource to locate the incident. Apart from the location, the
clinician responding to a trauma call will require: the number of patients, a brief description of the
main injuries and, in the case of a road traffic collision, details of whether any patients are trapped,
how many vehicles are involved and the nature of any hazards. In many cases this information
will not be immediately available but a substantial number of ambulance services now have criti-
cal care or incident desks manned by experienced staff who listen to calls and will then phone the
caller back to obtain the necessary information so that the responding team can be informed and
additional specialist assets assigned prior to the arrival of the first resource at the incident.
41
Communication in pre-hospital care
PRACTICE POINT
It is essential that as much information about the scene and the patient is obtained so that the
appropriate resources can be dispatched to a trauma call.
COMMUNICATION ON ARRIVAL AT A SCENE

Once the pre-hospital care response is on scene, no further support will be sent unless it is asked
for. It is therefore of fundamental importance that the ambulance control room is updated at regular
intervals. Whilst this may seem obvious, delays waiting for assets which have not been requested
are not uncommon. Forethought will enable additional assets to be sent including air ambulances,
BASICS doctors or other dedicated resources to support patient and scene management.
Whilst information can be gathered en route to the scene from those already there, it is
important that information is shared with ambulance control on arrival at the scene, and once
an initial assessment has been made as well as at regular intervals whilst on scene. This infor-
mation is relevant to both the patient’s condition and also the scene in general and is especially
important if the incident involves multiple patients or is a major incident.
Some ambulances services have introduced the windscreen report as a tool to communicate
from the scene what is happening as visualized from the cab (through the windscreen) of their
vehicle. This initial snap shot will provide useful information about the scene so that additional
support from managers and extra resources can be organised. The windscreen report tells staff
to describe what they see using the METHANE sequence.
INITIAL COMMUNICATION ON SCENE

All the emergency services through JESIP have adopted a common way of passing, information
between emergency responders and control rooms in the initial stages of an incident. The mne-
monic METHANE (Box 4.2)
allows the establishment of a
BOX 4.2: Approved Way of Passing Initial shared situational awareness
Information at the Scene of a Major Incident of the scene and is as valid at
smaller incidents as at major
M Major incident declared or standby (may not be used) ones. It contains essential and
E Exact location detailed information about
T Type of incident e.g. explosion, transport incident the scene providing an initial
H Hazards present, actual or potential oversight of what is happening
A Access routes that are safe
at that moment.
On arrival at a trauma
N Number, type and severity of patients
scene, initial communication
E Emergency services now present and those required
should be with the first ambu-
lance resource on scene or the
ambulance manager who is
leading and running the scene, or failing this with the senior officer of whichever emergency
service is present. Where the practitioner is the first person on scene the first point of contact
will obviously be with the patient once the scene has been assessed to be safe. In this situation it is
essential that a METHANE (or similar) update is provided so that ambulance control can ensure
the despatch of additional support including the best means of evacuation for the patient.
42
Radio voice procedure
PRACTICE POINT
The use of METHANE as a mnemonic to provide an update to control rooms will ensure a com-
mon situational awareness is obtained.
RADIO VOICE PROCEDURE

Effective use of the radio to transmit clear and
BOX 4.3: The Phonetic Alphabet
unambiguous messages to other emergency
services personnel and others is an essen- A Alpha N November
tial skill for all pre-hospital responders and B Bravo O Oscar
one which must be practised until it is fluent.
C Charlie P Papa
The phonetic alphabet must be mastered (Box
D Delta Q Quebec
4.3) as well as the standard expressions used
in transmitting messages (Box 4.4). Phonetic E Echo R Romeo
numbers are useful but less commonly used F Foxtrot S Sierra
(Box 4.5). G Golf T Tango
When speaking on the radio (or the telephone) H Hotel U Uniform
in order to pass important information, every I India V Victor
care must be taken to ensure that the message is
J Juliet W Whisky
as clear as possible. This may mean writing down
K Kilo X X-ray
and briefly rehearsing the message first. Speech
should be clear and consciously slower than in L Lima Y Yankee
normal conversation. Women’s voices tend to M Mike Z Zulu
be clearer due to their higher pitch, and where
BOX 4.4: Commonly Used Expressions in Passing Messages
Over Start talking

Go ahead/Send I am ready to receive your message
Understood/OK I have understood your message
Say again Repeat (say again all after/say again all before)
Spell Indicates that what follows will be spelt out using the phonetic alphabet, or
as please spell is used to request the spelling of a difficult or unclear word
Numbers Indicates that a list of numbers is about to be transmitted such as a
map reference or telephone number
Out Indicates that the exchange is finished
Wait I am unable to speak to you for a few seconds, please wait (occasion-
ally the term wait one, meaning wait one minute, is used)
Wait out I am unable to speak to you but will contact you very shortly
Wrong Indicates an error and is followed by the correct version
Standby Standby for further information
Acknowledge Please confirm that you have received my message
43
possible strong regional accents are best avoided if the

BOX 4.5: Phonetic Numbers
listeners are likely to be unfamiliar with them.
1 Wun 6 Six At the beginning of each radio transmission, the
caller should state the call sign being called, give
2 Too 7 Seven
their own call sign, pass the message and termi-
3 Thuree 8 Ate
nate the message with over. Some services use the
4 Fower 9 Niner convention of giving their own call sign alone at the
5 Fiyiv 0 Zero beginning of each transmission.
The term over and out is self-contradictory and
should not be used. Once the call sign of the caller
and the recipient have been exchanged, go ahead or send are used to indicate readiness to receive
the reply, over means please speak in response. If the message transmitted was not clear, then
say again all after, say again all before, or say again or alternatively please spell may be used to clar-
ify. Understood and OK confirm that the message has been understood. Spell indicates that the
following word or phrase will be spelt out using the phonetic alphabet and is most often used
for names. Numbers should be used to indicate that a series of numbers such as a map refer-
ence or telephone number is to be given. The use of acknowledge at the end of a message means
that confirmation of receipt and understanding are required. When an error is made, this is
acknowledged by wrong (spoken) followed by the correct version. Difficult implies a message
which can be understood but is not clear, broken when only parts of a message can be heard and
unworkable when only fragments can be heard or interference is so severe that the message is
undecipherable. Nothing heard is self-explanatory (Box 4.6).
BOX 4.6: The Radio Check

Performing a Radio Check
A radio check begins with the call signs of the stations being called followed by the caller’s own call
sign and then by radio check, over (‘Yankee 1, Yankee 2, Yankee 3 from Yankee 4, radio check over’).
Once all the call signs have checked in, the initiator ends the call with OK, Out (i.e. ‘Yankee 4 OK, out’).
THE USE OF CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (CRM)

AND ON-SCENE COMMUNICATION
At the end of a message out is used. The phrase call sign X out to you can be used if communica-
tion is concluded with one or more call signs in a network, but further communication with
other call signs is needed. If for any reason a speaker is unable to continue with a message, wait
should be used, but only to cover a few seconds and it should not be repeated more than once.
If a longer pause is necessary, wait out is the correct term and the communication is temporar-
ily ended. The communication can then be restarted at a convenient time. Standby informs the
listener that they must be alert for further messages which will follow shortly.
WHAT IS CRM?
CRM initially came from the commercial airline sector and over the last 10 years has been increas-
ingly adopted in civilian pre-hospital care practice. The concepts of CRM include open and honest
communication, the immediate analysis of alternate probabilities, and a reliance on the strengths
of individuals and what they bring to the team. The implementation of CRM, which includes
44
The use of crew resource management (CRM) and on-scene communication
open and respectful feedback as well

BOX 4.7: The Principles of Crew
as a focus on collective awareness
Resource Management
of the larger situation, can provide
a much safer environment on scene ▪▪ Working with an open and enquiring mind
and will result in better patient care ▪▪ Being respectful to team members and patients
being delivered. ▪▪ Communicating effectively
CRM has rapidly become a stan- ▪▪ Thinking before speaking
dard operating model for all air ▪▪ Being honest and admitting weaknesses or
ambulance operations in the UK mistakes
along with other organisations that ▪▪ Working towards high reliability through continual
provide pre-hospital care such as learning
BASICS. The essential principles of
CRM are listed in Box 4.7.
CONCEPTS OF CRM
For practitioners to understand how CRM can be used effectively in the delivery of pre-hospital
care, it is necessary to understand a number of concepts. A key principle is that there is a need
to understand and acknowledge that the team dealing with the incident extends out beyond its
immediate members. In practice this means that all the responders on the scene are part of the
team, not only the obvious agencies (personnel from the ambulance service for example). By
taking an approach that values the expertise of all on scene and demonstrates trust and respect
as well as flexibility, the team will have greater cohesion and be more effective. The key element
in communication is practising proper forms of interpersonal engagement and showing appro-
priate respect. Greater value also comes from the concept that no one individual is as effective
as the team they are working in. As a consequence, the team needs to have open and honest
communication. Open communication allows continuing situational awareness which is one of
the principles behind JESIP (see later).
Research from the United States has shown that maintaining situational awareness
within a culture of CRM improves the safety of high risk, low frequency events. For exam-
ple a pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) task standard has been developed using
the CRM concepts of task allocation, open communication, clarification of the task and col-
lective situational awareness. Checklists are used to train staff with the aim of standardis-
ing the skill and reducing error. This has been mirrored in all PHEA standard operating
procedures (SOPs) in the UK. In these models, task standards divide the responsibilities
among the individuals in the team. This facilitates effective and safe completion. In most
UK models the team undertaking PHEA consists of at least two people: the team leader
and an assistant. In addition up to two other people are needed especially when provid-
ing manual in-line spine immobilisation (MILS). The communication element of the task is
maximisation of situational awareness to ensure nothing has been missed. All the people
in the team must know what the patient’s oxygenation level is and how the intubation by
the team leader is progressing.
In tasks that do not adhere to CRM one of the common errors leading to loss of situational
awareness is the tendency of individuals in the team to ignore or disregard information that
maybe given out of context or whilst they are otherwise occupied. There are a number of cited
examples of clinicians saying to the person undertaking an intubation that the patient was
bradycardic or that they had been in the airway for longer then 30 seconds but who were con-
sciously ignored or not heard due to the person being fixated on the critical component of the
45
task of passing the tube. As a consequence of effective CRM, important signs which may be
missed by the task-focussed team leader will be identified by the other team members and
communicated so that appropriate action can be taken. Successful intubation is the responsibil-
ity of the team, not just the team leader.
PRACTICE POINT
CRM will ensure that the patient gets the best care by using open communication and common
situational awareness, reducing the risks to patient safety.
METHODS OF COMMUNICATING ON SCENE

In today’s society the number of methods of communication grown considerably. Whereas
15 years ago communication methods on scene at a pre-hospital care call were limited to voice,
either face to face or via a limited range VHF/UHF radio and possibly the use of a pager, today
there are mobile phone technology, social media, Airwave radio, e-mail and video confer-
encing. More reliable equipment allows real-time updates both visually and through speech.
Nevertheless, the best method of communication on scene remains face to face where possible.
In larger incidents, however, the commanders may not be able to do this so other methods will
need to be employed.
AIRWAVE
The current national Airwave radio network is used by all the emergency services. Whilst
all individual organisations have their own talk groups as well as inter-service channels, the
facility exists for there to be multi-agency talk groups, especially in cases of major or seri-
ous incidents. The Airwave network is resilient,
secure and recordable. Whilst there are a num-
ber of licenced hardware items that services can
use, the functionality of them is broadly the same
(Figure 4.1).
Practitioners should be familiar with the hand-
set their organisation uses and understand how
to change talk groups and make contact with the
ambulance control centre.
The concept of using Airwave is the same as
for two-way radio. The facility normally oper-
ates on the press-to-talk model. There are no
range restrictions on the handsets, as they use
the digital radio/phone network rather than radio
waves. The network is secure and communication
is instant on a controlled network. Airwave can
be used in most tunnels as well as on the under-
ground networks and there is national coverage
over 99% of the UK. Application to use Airwave
is through Ofcom. Figure 4.1 An Airwave handset.
46
Methods of communicating on scene
MOBILE TELEPHONES
In most cases on-scene communication in pre-hospital care will be undertaken by mobile
phone. It is important to realise that mobile phone coverage can be difficult in remote areas and
cannot be relied upon, especially when passing clinical information to receiving hospitals. The
conversations are not normally recorded and this may make audit difficult. Mobile phones are
used because they are easy and do not rely on others for availability as most people have one.
They provide a direct one-to-one communication method but are insecure, with a network that
can easily be overloaded, for example on New Year’s Eve at midnight. Wrong numbers can be
dialled and misdirects can occur as can delays in connection. Although radio voice procedure is
not necessary, the phonetic alphabet should be used where necessary to ensure clarity.
COMMUNICATING CARE ON SCENE

Whilst on scene with a trauma patient, especially one with multi-system injuries, pro-
viding ambulance control with updates regarding what has been found and what has
been done will allow additional support to be dispatched if required. Providing updates
to the receiving hospital will also ensure that they are ready for the patient with the
required specialists and equipment ready and waiting, and blood available for immediate
administration. In addition, operating theatres may be prepared and protocols activated.
An early call through the co-ordination centre of the major trauma network will allow
discussion with receiving hospitals regarding the patient and the options for transport
and final destination, for example direct
to a burns unit. This ensures that centres
BOX 4.8: Essential Pre-Hospital
are not overloaded with a high number of
Information
patients when they do not have the capac-
ity to manage them and facilitates the most A Age
appropriate care. The essential information T Time of injury
regarding the patient can be best delivered M Mechanism of injury
based around the ATMIST mnemonic (Box
I Injuries suspected or known
4.8) and must include specific details of
any extra support required on arrival, such S Signs as recorded
as mass transfusion capability or cardio- T Treatment provided and its effect
thoracic surgery.
COMMUNICATING EN ROUTE TO HOSPITAL

There may be occasions when the patient’s condition changes en route to hospital. Where this
occurs, an update to the receiving unit is essential, so that they are ready and have the right
people in the resuscitation department. How this is done will depend on local protocols. Some
areas use Airwave radio to speak directly with the receiving hospital while others use the tele-
phone. It is essential to be familiar with local processes and to ensure that the correct numbers
are stored in phones so that they can be easily accessed.
COMMUNICATION ON ARRIVAL AT THE RECEIVING UNIT

On arrival at the receiving hospital it is important that the handover is listened to by the trauma
team who are not distracted by the patient’s injuries and that the information is provided only
47
once. Handover should occur once the patient has been transferred to the resuscitation trolley
and no attempt should be made to remove a scoop stretcher at this stage. The person who has
led the care of the patient in the pre-hospital part of their care should provide the handover
using the ATMIST system. A structured handover should ensure that it is only necessary to give
it once, although it is often helpful if pre-hospital personnel are able to wait before they leave
so that other questions arising during the initial assessment can be answered. The handover
should be given to the whole team, although it remains the team leader who must ensure that
they at least have a clear overview of the patient and the history of the trauma.
AFTER AN INCIDENT
After the patient has been transported to the receiving unit, the final part of the management
in pre-hospital care is a post-incident review and debrief. This element is often missed due to
demands on clinicians’ time but should occur as soon as possible after the call. The carrying
out of a post-incident analysis is the final part of CRM but also provides the opportunity for
learning and discussion regarding how the patient was managed, as well as reviewing what
went well and what could be improved upon next time.
Non-learning teams are those that will only want to review calls that did not go well so
blame can be placed or incompetence exposed. Learning teams, on the other hand, and those
with good CRM will recognise the opportunity to critique and improve performance in a posi-
tive environment and to offer support in challenging circumstances.
A number of models are used to carry out the debriefing process and each individual should
use the model with which they are familiar. Whichever model is used, ‘What went well?’ ‘What
could be improved next time?’, ‘What has been learnt?’, and ‘What will be repeated the next time a
similar scenario occurs?’, offer suitable headings under which a constructive discussion can be
organised. Pre-hospital care is challenging and every situation is unique. Feeling that a situa-
tion could have been better managed, occasionally exacerbated by ill-considered criticism from
hospital clinicians, is common, and constructive support which allows areas for improvement
to be identified in a supportive way, and gives credit where it is due, is essential for the optimal
mental health of clinicians.
JOINT EMERGENCY SERVICES INTEROPERABILITY PROGRAMME

(JESIP)
The JESIP programme was set up at the Home Secretary’s request following a number of pub-
lic enquiries which found that better joint working between the three emergency services would
enhance the collective ability to save lives and reduce harm. JESIP recognises that whilst major or
complex incidents do not occur regularly, when they do there is a need to ensure efficient, effective
and joined up responses. The programme is nationally recognised and staffed from the three emer-
gency services. The process had full sign-up from the chief officers of all three blue light services
as well as the Home Office, Cabinet Office, Department for Communities and Local Government,
and the Department of Health. The programme provides courses at operational, tactical and stra-
tegic levels. JESIP principles of joint working are based on five key elements (Figure 4.2).
Throughout the programme the emphasis on shared situational awareness and open commu-
nication are essential for ensuring the objectives of JESIP are met. Of course the same principles
exist with CRM and therefore it is vital that on-scene communication is open and that all the
information is shared between the team to enhance the delivery of the care to the trauma patient.
48
Further reading
Co-locate
Co-locate with commanders as soon as practicably possible at a single, safe and easily identified location
near to the scene
Communicate
Communicate clearly using plain English
Co-ordinate
Co-ordinate by agreeing on the lead service; identify priorities, resources and capabilities for an effective
response, including the timing of further meetings
Jointly understand risk

Jointly understand risk by sharing information about the likelihood and potential impact of threats and
hazards to agree on potential control measures
Shared situational awareness

Shared situational awareness established by using METHANE and the Joint Decision Model
Figure 4.2 JESIP principles.
SUMMARY
Effective and timely communication is key to pre-hospital care. Effective team working (crew
resource management) is a skill that must be learnt and practised. In the UK joint working is
enhanced by the Joint Emergency Service Interoperability Programme.
FURTHER READING
Joint Emergency Services Interoperability Programme Training. College of Policing, 2013.
Le Sage P, Dyar JT, Evans B. Crew Resource Management: Principles and Practice. Jones and
Bartlett, 2011.
49
Mechanism of injury
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the scientific principles underlying energy transfer and the resulting injuries
▪▪ Have a broad appreciation of the types of injury commonly associated with blunt trauma
(road traffic collisions and falls from a height), blast and penetrating trauma
▪▪ Understand the importance of mechanism of injury in terms of its relevance to individual
patient care and the prediction of cohort injuries for the purposes of triage and research
INTRODUCTION
Mechanism of injury might be defined as the totality of the physical circumstances in which an
injury arises. Analysis of mechanism of injury is frequently used to assist clinical decision-
making in the care of the individual trauma patient throughout the continuum of care. In the
pre-hospital phase, the mechanism of injury will be a key part of the information influencing
decisions regarding the patient’s hospital destination and means of evacuation. In the hospital
phase, the mechanism of injury may determine the organisation of trauma team resources,
with a view to actively excluding predictable and occult injuries.
Despite some evidence to the contrary (1), there is a growing body of evidence that both
general and specific mechanisms of injury can be used to independently predict morbidity and
mortality at a population level (2). This has led to mechanism of injury becoming an important
factor in triage systems, trauma system evaluation and research. Nevertheless, caution must
be sounded that mechanism of injury assessment must not result in clinicians missing injuries
that are not predicted by the mechanism, but are nevertheless present, or cause them simply to
assess the patient only to confirm their potentially incorrect assumptions.
PRACTICE POINT
Assessment of mechanism should not lead to incomplete clinical assessment designed to con-
firm preconceived but incorrect injury patterns.
50
The physics of energy transfer
PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
Before attempting to understand why human tissue behaves in a specific way depending on the
insult it sustains, it is necessary to understand the characteristics of insults in terms of causa-
tion and the type and magnitude of the energy involved.
Insults cause injury as a result of energy transfer which exceeds the level at which tissue
damage occurs. Thus the severity of injury can be determined by studying the physics of the
energy transfer (which indicate the magnitude of transferred energy), and the anatomic and
material characteristics of the tissue to which
it is transferred. This chapter will focus on the BOX 5.1: Types of Energy Capable
most common energy transfers and how spe- of Causing Injury
cific tissues are affected by these transfers. ▪▪ Kinetic Energy
Energy can be transferred to tissue in a vari- ▪▪ Chemical Energy
ety of forms (Box 5.1). Injuries relating to thermal ▪▪ Nuclear Energy
energy and electrical energy will be dealt with in the ▪▪ Thermal Energy
chapter on thermal injury (Chapter 19). Nuclear ▪▪ Electrical Energy
energy is not discussed further in this manual.
The energy possessed by a moving object is called kinetic energy (KE), defined by the follow-
ing equation:
Kinetic energy = 1 Mass × ( Velocity )2 or KE = 1 mv 2

2 2
This chapter will concentrate on the transfer of kinetic energy, which is the most common
form of injurious energy transfer. The resulting injury can be broadly divided into that caused
by interaction between tissue and either a blunt or a penetrating object.
The transfer of kinetic energy in blunt trauma takes place most commonly in road traffic collisions
and falls from a height, and these will be considered later in some detail, followed by a brief review
of blast injury and penetrating trauma which are discussed in more detail in Chapters 20 and 21.
THE PHYSICS OF ENERGY TRANSFER

When considering transfer of kinetic energy, it is useful to first revisit Newton’s 2nd Law of
Motion, and the relationship between velocity, energy and work done. In summary Newton’s
Second Law indicates that
Force = Mass × Acceleration or F = ma
So force applied over a period of time will cause a change in momentum, and produce accel-
eration or deceleration. The concept of duration of time is critical, since it determines accelera-
tion or deceleration.
Force (F) exerted over a period of time (t) results in an impulse (Ft), which brings about a
change in the momentum (Mass × Velocity) of the object to which it is applied.
Ft = Change in momentum

Ft = m × Change in velocity

F = m × (Change in velocity)/t

51
Mechanism of injury
However, Change in velocity/t = Acceleration, and therefore F = ma.

Energy and ‘work done’ are interchangeable.
Acceleration or deceleration (rate of change of velocity) of the tissue will determine the force
acting on it (assuming mass is constant). A gradual change in velocity will subject tissue to
far less force (for example an aircraft landing) than a sudden change in velocity (such as a car
crashing into a tree).
Since the energy possessed by a moving object (kinetic energy) is defined as ½mass ×
(velocity)² or ½mv², the kinetic energy of a moving object depends on its velocity – the faster it
moves, the greater its kinetic energy.
Acceleration or deceleration brings about a change in velocity, and therefore a change in
kinetic energy. When the kinetic energy of a moving object increases, work is being done on the
object by an external force to increase its speed. When kinetic energy decreases, work is done
by the object on itself and its environment. In a collision, for example, when a moving object
stops moving, its kinetic energy is transferred or converted to ‘work done’ in deformation, injury,
sound, heat and friction. So force applied, change in velocity, and conversion of kinetic energy
to work done all form part of the process we call energy transfer as it relates to injury in trauma.
KINETIC ENERGY AND BLUNT TRAUMA

A collision between an object and tissue can be thought of as fully elastic if all the kinetic energy is
conserved as kinetic energy. Usually collisions are inelastic, and some or all of the available kinetic
energy is converted into ‘work done’ (see earlier).
It is worth noting that in collisions between two freely moving objects, some kinetic energy
may be retained if the two objects rebound from each other, or one passes through the other, and
so not all kinetic energy is converted to
work done. In collisions between a mov- A C B
ing object and a fixed object (for example
the ground) only the moving object can (a)
properly rebound, and so less energy may
A
be retained, allowing more of the kinetic
energy to be converted into work done, or B
C
damage.
(b)
The direction and type of collision are C
important, as they can have a major impact
on the remaining kinetic energy after the A B C
collision (Figure 5.1). For example, in a
head-on collision between two vehicles, (c)
in which the vehicles become ‘locked’
together and stop immediately, the resul- Figure 5.1 Energy and momentum available in
various motor vehicle collisions. (a) Frontal collision
tant ‘object’ has no kinetic energy. All with maximum change in momentum over the
the kinetic energy has been used to pro- shortest period of time and hence the highest force
duce deformation and injury. This can be generated. (b) T-bone collision: when cars A and B
collide their resultant momentum directs them to
contrasted with a front-to-side impact of their final position C. The individual momentums in
two vehicles (a T-bone–type collision), in the x and y axes are dissipated over a greater time
which the resultant ‘object’ continues to resulting in smaller forces than scenario A. (c) Rear-
end collision: since these vehicles are moving in
move. Since some kinetic energy remains, the same direction, the changes in momentum and
not all has been converted into work done. resultant forces are smaller.
52
Types of incident
The detailed effect of collisions on the occupants of a vehicle in a collision, who are likely to con-
tinue to move after the vehicle stops, will be considered later.
When a force is applied to tissue as a result of energy transfer (work done), how the tissue
reacts depends on its material characteristics (which are in turn related to the tissue’s micro-
and macroscopic anatomy). Stress can be defined as load or force per unit area and is responsible
for tissue deformation. Strain can be defined as the distance of this deformation relative to the
original length of the material. If stress and strain are plotted, the results show an initial elastic
component whereby deformation is reversible (the absorbed energy is released), followed by
a plastic part where the deformation is permanent. Higher density structures (such as solid
organs like liver) are generally less able to perform elastically and therefore absorb more energy
with a consequent increase in damage.
It is also important to recognise that injuries often result from multiple interactions between
tissue and the injuring object. For example, during one ‘overall’ collision, a vehicle occupant
can sustain injuries that are directly affected by several separate collisions. The first collision
is between the vehicle and some external object. In this collision some of the kinetic energy of
the vehicle is converted into work done deforming the vehicle. The second collision is between
the occupant (who is travelling at the same velocity as the vehicle) and the internal structure
of the vehicle. The kinetic energy of the occupant is converted into work done, injuring the
occupant where he meets the internal surface of the vehicle. (If the occupant is wearing a seat
belt, the second collision is between the occupant and the seat belt, which is designed to absorb
some of this kinetic energy without causing major injury, and which will slow the occupant’s
forward motion, resulting in less injurious subsequent collisions.) The third collision is where
the internal organs of the occupant (still moving forward) meet his now stationary inner body
cavity surfaces. Again the kinetic energy of the organs is converted into work done injuring the
same. Finally, a fourth collision can occur where loose objects in the vehicle make contact with
the now stationary occupant. Again, the kinetic energy of these objects will be converted into
work done in injuring the occupant.
TYPES OF INCIDENT
Road traffic collision as an injury mechanism can be further subdivided into collisions involving
vehicle occupants and those involving pedestrians.
VEHICLE OCCUPANT COLLISIONS

In vehicle collisions, it is possible to predict the likely injuries sustained, alongside the probable
morbidity and mortality, by examining the collision type (for example, head-on, side impact, rear
impact, rollover and ejection).
In a head-on collision (Figure 5.2), the driver may slide forward below the steering wheel or
up and over the steering wheel. With the former, the first point of contact is between the knee
and the dashboard, possibly giving rise to a posterior dislocation and vascular injury. Next, the
upper abdomen and chest make contact with the steering wheel, where compression may give
rise to rib fractures, cardiac contusions and pneumothoraces. Continuous forward motion of
solid organs causes shear stresses and may give rise to rupture of the thoracic aorta. With the
up and over the steering wheel motion, the initial contact of the occupant is of their head with the
windscreen, causing head and brain injury. Once the head has stopped moving, the cervical
spine is then the location bearing the brunt of the energy transfer, resulting in vertebral and
53
Mechanism of injury
spinal cord injury. Following this, the

chest and upper abdomen impact
with the steering wheel with the
possible injuries already noted.
Alternatively, the driver may simply
be crushed between steering wheel
and seat. Similar but usually less
severe injuries will be found in front
seat passengers.
In side impacts, chest and abdom-
inal injuries are more common than
in head-on collisions (3). It is inter-
Figure 5.2 A head-on collision.
esting to note that although there is a
marked reduction in space between
the occupant and the side of the vehicle compared with head-on impacts, the overall mortality
is still much lower. As previously remarked, the vehicles involved in this type of impact gener-
ally continue to move for some distance, so that the deceleration is slower, the force experienced
by the vehicle and occupant is smaller, and transfer of kinetic energy to work done takes place
more gradually, resulting in less severe injury.
Rear impacts classically give rise to neck injuries and have the lowest overall mortality. This
is possibly because the majority of them are at low velocity, but also because both vehicles gen-
erally continue to move, so that some kinetic energy remains and not all has been converted
into work done.
A rollover scenario carries a mortality in between that of rear impacts and other types of col-
lision (3). The reason for this may be that despite the dramatic appearance of these impacts, the
deceleration experienced can occur in many directions, and not all deceleration is in a direction
that directly involves the occupant, who is partially restrained by his seat belt as the car rolls.
So the occupant may ‘lose’ his kinetic energy randomly and not as a result of a single direct
forward motion such as might be experienced in a head-on collision. As a consequence of this,
injury patterns are much more difficult to predict. For these reasons and somewhat conten-
tiously, rollover has been removed from some algorithms as a predictor of serious injury (4).
Last, ejection, compared with other mechanisms of injury, is associated with significantly
worse outcomes, with a fivefold increase in injury severity score and mortality, a fourfold
increase in admissions to critical care and a threefold increase in the incidence of severe trau-
matic brain injury (5). This is thought to be due to the fact that the occupant has the same
initial velocity as the vehicle when he collides with an immovable object (the ground), so that
on impact most if not all kinetic energy is immediately converted to work done in producing
devastating injury. The occupant also impacts the ground without any of the inherent protec-
tion of being a car occupant.
PEDESTRIAN COLLISIONS
The vast majority of pedestrian road traffic collisions involve being struck by the front of a
vehicle (6). This usually results in a fairly predictable pattern of events and their consequent
injuries.
The wrap is the commonest pattern, with an initial bumper strike to the leg (the exact posi-
tion is determined by the vehicle size and configuration and the height of the pedestrian) caus-
ing injury and rotating the head and torso, which are then injured by contact with the bonnet,
54
Types of incident
windscreen and its surround (the secondary impact). The pedestrian is now travelling at the
same speed as the vehicle, but the vehicle usually brakes and therefore slows down faster than
the pedestrian, who then slides off the front of the bonnet, impacting the road surface (the
tertiary impact).
Forward projection is the next most common pattern, often involving a large flat-fronted vehi-
cle and a small child. The pedestrian is thrown forwards instead of upwards, increasing their
risk of subsequently being run over.
A wing top collision describes the situation in which the pedestrian impacts with the front
corner of the vehicle, is carried over the wing and then impacts with the ground, whereas
rooftop and somersault describe situations in which the vehicle is travelling at high speed
or when the vehicle fails to brake. As the name implies, in the former the pedestrian slides
up and over the roof after the bonnet impact, whereas in the latter the speeds are such that
there is no further impact after the initial bumper impact until the pedestrian impacts with
the ground.
FALLS FROM A HEIGHT

The kinetic energy gained by a falling person is determined by the velocity reached as a result
of the acceleration due to gravity and the height fallen. Impact with the ground is not elastic,
and almost all of the kinetic energy gained will be converted to work done in deformation
and injury. The other major factors determining the injuries sustained are the position of the
person on impact and to a lesser extent the surface of impact. So called fall-specific mechanisms
of injury are thought to be related to factors including sudden deceleration, direct impact
and a possible hydraulic ram effect from sudden compression of the abdomen. A study of
603 patients falling from heights over 3 m showed that 88% of fatalities were due to multiple
injuries. The most frequently injured areas were thorax (98%), head (82%) and abdomen and
pelvis (79%) (7).
Thoracic aortic injuries were found in 51% of fatalities (complete transaction in 70% cases
and full thickness rupture in 30%). The most common site for tearing in traumatic aortic
rupture is the proximal descending aorta, near where the left subclavian artery leaves it.
Tethering by the ligamentum arteriosum makes this site prone to shearing forces. Cardiac
injuries are common, with lacerations (predominantly right sided) found in up to 48% of
fatalities. It has been suggested that the hydraulic ram effect mentioned above may con-
tribute to this. Cardiac and thoracic aortic injuries occur together in 75% of fatalities. Lung
injuries and rib fractures are also common (80% of fatalities). It is thought that the hydraulic
ram effect (increasing intrathoracic pressure) may contribute to lung injury when rib fractures
are absent.
In the aforementioned study, traumatic brain injury was present in 37% of fatalities, with
20% of these being massive disruption of the brain and head consistent with a primary impact.
Feet-first impacts are associated with ring fractures to the base of skull and brainstem injuries.
All types of brain injury are possible, although subarachnoid haemorrhage is the most common
on post-mortem.
Injuries to the abdomen are predominantly to the solid organs, as would be expected due to
the main mechanism of injury being rapid deceleration. The most frequently damaged is the
liver, followed by the spleen and kidney. Fractures of the pelvis are found in 50% of fatalities,
with the vertical shear fracture (and its accompanying catastrophic haemorrhage) being almost
exclusively associated with significant falls.
55
Mechanism of injury
In one study of patients from a relatively low fall height (of <6 m), fractures were found in
75% of patients, with spinal fractures occurring in 19% to 22% (36% of all fatalities). These are
predominantly in the thoracic area and may be associated with the vertical transmission of
deceleration forces up the axial skeleton (8).
BLUNT INJURIES BY REGION

Having detailed some of the specifics of energy transfer and the resultant injuries related to
road traffic collisions and significant falls, it is also useful to review specific anatomical areas of
the body and how the forces applied in blunt trauma cause damage.
Traumatic brain injury is extremely important, as it is the single most important factor con-
tributing to death and disability after trauma (9). The internal collision previously described
between the brain and the inner surface of the skull results in a direct compressive strain on the
surface of the brain (the coup injury) and a corresponding tensile strain on the opposite surface
(often damaging bridging veins). The brain then rebounds, giving rise to another compres-
sive strain on the opposite surface (the contre-coup). Damage to deeper brain structures (with
or without surface damage) may be due to the so-called stereotactic phenomenon where the
concavity of the skull reflects multiple pressure waves and focuses them on areas deep in the
brain causing injury. This phenomenon is also thought to be responsible for traumatic loss of
consciousness when waves are focused on the reticular activating system.
Thoracic injury is a result of directly applied external compressive strain and is due to differ-
ential deceleration between fixed and mobile structures. As with other fractures, ribs fracture as
a result of direct compressive strain on the outer cortex, with tensile strain on the inner cortex.
There can also be fractures remote to the point of impact, such as at the lateral and posterior rib
angles where forces are focused. As with injury to the deeper brain structures, stress waves can
penetrate deep into the chest with distortion and shearing forces especially at areas of significant
pressure differential (air-filled alveoli and lung tissue). This results in pulmonary contusions.
The classic areas of injury due to the continued movement of mobile structures which are
attached to solid structures are the thoracic aorta (fixed at the ligamentum arteriosum connected
to the mobile heart) (10) and the bronchial tree (fixed at the hilum connected to the mobile lungs).
Abdominal injuries are somewhat different to those of the thoracic cavity, in part due to the
lack of protection afforded by the rib cage. However, they also result from direct compressive
strain and points of attachment causing differential movement. The latter can be responsible
for injuries at splenic and renal points of attachment, and of the free pancreatic tail. Shear
forces in the liver can cause injury around the falciform ligament anteriorly and the hepatic
vein posteriorly. Perforation of hollow structures is comparatively rare with blunt trauma (11)
and is related to shear strains and overpressures (forming a temporary closed loop). The latter
mechanism can also be responsible for diaphragmatic rupture.
Musculoskeletal injuries are less likely to be fatal than the injuries just described, but are
potentially very costly to society in terms of repair, rehabilitation and permanent disability.
Vertebral fractures are important due to the potential for associated spinal cord injury. There
are three main mechanisms of primary cord injury: impact with persistent or transient compres-
sion, distraction and laceration or transection. The first is the most common and may occur with
retropulsed bone fragments compressing the cord. Distraction, such as from vertebral disloca-
tion, can cause a shearing force on the spinal cord and its blood supply, and is the predominant
mechanism when there is no radiological abnormality (12).
56
Kinetic injury and penetrating trauma
BLAST INJURY
Blast injury is covered in detail in Chapter 21 and only an overview is given here. Tissue damage due
to blast injury combines blunt trauma (from kinetic energy transfer) and penetrating injury from
fragments. Conventional explosions involve a solid or liquid undergoing a chemical reaction, gen-
erating gaseous by-products and releasing a large amount of stored energy. It must be remembered
that the majority of explosions are caused not by bombs, but by chemical reactions and release of
flammable materials in an industrial or domestic context. The release of energy compresses the sur-
rounding air, producing a spherical wave of compressed gas known as the blast wave (with increased
temperature, pressure and density). The movement of the air and explosive products produce the
blast wind. The blast overpressure is defined as the difference between the wave front pressure and
atmospheric pressure. It is related to the amount of energy released in the blast and the distance
from the blast (falling away exponentially with increasing distance). Following this overpressure is
a small period of negative pressure. When the blast wave hits an object, kinetic energy is converted
to work done causing deformation and injury. Tissue damage as a result of blast can be divided into
primary, secondary, tertiary and other effects (13). This classification is summarised in Box 5.2.
BOX 5.2: A Classification of Blast Injury

▪▪ Primary injury is as a result of tissue interaction with the over pressure (blast wave).
▪▪ Secondary injury is a result of the explosion transferring kinetic energy to objects (which are
either part of the device or close by it), which then become projectiles.
▪▪ Tertiary injuries are caused by the blast wind.
▪▪ Other injuries include burns, crush injuries, psychological effects, and the effects of toxins and
bacteria or viruses.
▪▪ Radiation effects may result from a bomb contaminated with radioactive material.
In primary blast injury air-filled organs (such as the ears, lung or gastrointestinal tract) are
at the greatest risk of injury (usually contusion or perforation), which is more severe in con-
fined spaces where overpressure waves are reflected from walls or other surfaces (14). Secondary
injuries are the result of the impact of energised fragments and are almost invariably multiple.
Primary fragments are components of the explosive device, and secondary fragments arise from
the environment and include debris and body parts. Secondary injury is more common than
primary as these projectiles travel over a much greater distance than the original blast wave.
Tertiary injuries are caused by the blast wind. Victims may be projected considerable dis-
tances, suffer traumatic amputation, or when very close to the point of detonation suffer whole-
body disruption.
Radiation effects may result from a bomb contaminated with radioactive material (a so-called
dirty bomb) or theoretically from a nuclear detonation. Other injuries include burns, crush inju-
ries, psychological effects, and the effects of toxins and bacteria or viruses (sometimes trans-
ferred by the impact of body parts or a deliberate contaminant of an explosive device).
KINETIC INJURY AND PENETRATING TRAUMA

Many of the principles already mentioned are equally relevant to penetrating trauma. Ballistics
is the study of projectiles, usually from firearms, which are an increasingly common cause of
57
Mechanism of injury
penetrating trauma. Ballistics is discussed in detail in Chapter 20 and only a brief overview is
given here.
The kinetic energy of the projectile can be transferred in a number of ways, namely heat,
sound, deformation of the projectile, and work required to move tissue out of the way radi-
ally and to crush it frontally. The latter two result in the phenomena of cavitation, which may
be permanent or temporary. The temporary cavitation is important as the transiently sub-
atmospheric pressure that cavitation generates will result in contaminants being sucked into
the wound.
The amount of energy transferred is the difference between the kinetic energy of the projec-
tile as it enters and that as it exits the tissue – clearly, if it does not exit, all the energy has been
transferred to the tissue in the form of tissue damage. Projectiles have various characteristics
that may increase this transfer of energy and tissue damage. First, the kinetic energy of the
projectile as it reaches the tissue is partly determined by the energy imparted to it by the fire-
arm, via the muzzle velocity (KE = ½mv 2). Second, characteristics which increase the surface
area of the contact between the projectile and tissue, will increase the energy transfer. These
characteristics are yaw, tumble, deformation and fragmentation (15).
NON-PROJECTILE PENETRATING INJURY

Non-projectile penetrating injury (stab injury) is generally at low velocity, and tissue injury
severity is principally related to damage to vital structures.
USE OF MECHANISM OF INJURY

As well as the drawing the attention of the clinician to critical injury patterns associated with
a particular mechanism, mechanism of injury information has been extensively used to inform
triage decisions (Figure 5.3)
In 1987 the American College of Surgeons Committee on Trauma produced the field triage
criteria (4), which included mechanism of injury as well as physiological and anatomical factors.
These criteria have been used worldwide, both on an individual patient and population level,
and have been regularly revised and updated.
Since the 1980s, studies into the validity of mechanism of injury in predicting injury patterns,
have shown varying results, with wide variations in sensitivity and specificity. These wide varia-
tions depend on the different specific mechanisms of injury studied. The data in these studies
can often be compared using the concept of over- and under-triage. Over-triage happens when
patients are triaged as more severely injured than they actually are (this is safer but has a severe
impact on available resources), and under-triage when patients are categorised as less severely
injured than they actually are (this is less safe but allows more efficient resource utilisation). The
American College of Surgeons Committee on Trauma has deemed an under-triage rate of 5%
to 10% to be acceptable, with a corresponding over-triage rate of 30% to 50%. For example, a
systematic review of triage criteria to inform deployment of advanced trauma care by helicopter
services identified 4982 patients in 5 studies (15). In these patients the positive predictive value
of mechanism of injury for a major trauma level Injury Severity Score (15 or greater) varied from
27% (general mechanism of injury) to 59% (for ejection specific mechanism of injury).
This study and others have concluded that the best positive predictive value is achieved by
combining mechanism of injury with physiological and anatomical factors, and that mecha-
nism of injury is important. Another study of 515,464 trauma patients showed that mechanism
58
References
Major Trauma Triage Tool West Midlands Ambulance Service NHS

Entry criteria for this triage is a judgement that the NHS Trust
patient may have suffered significant trauma
3 TICK TEST 7 TICK TEST 8 TICK TEST 7 TICK TEST
1. Measure vital signs 2. Assess anatomy 3. Assess mechanism 4. Special conditions
of injury of injury
Respiratory Rate <10 Penetrating to neck/ Fall > 6 m/2 storeys in Age > 55
or > 29/min chest/abdomen adult Children < 8 years old
Systolic Blood Suspected fractured Fall > 3 m/2 times Pregnancy > 20 weeks
pressure <90 mmHg pelvis height in child Renal dialysis patients
(2 measurement) 2 or more long bone
fractures Bleeding disorders/
Glasgow Coma Scale Motor Vehicle: anticoagulants
<14 NO Crushed/de-gloved/ NO Ejection (partial or
mangled extremity NO Timecritical extremity
complete) injury
Amputation proximal Intrusion > 30 cm at
to wrist/ankle Burns: Circumferential
patient site or 20% (BSA)
Open or depressed Death in same
skull fracture compartment
Sensory or motor
deficit (new onset) Motorcycle crash
>20 mph
Pedestrian/bicyclist
versus motor vehicle
thrown/run over with
significant impact
Entrapment Yes
to any NO
Yes Yes Yes one
to any to any to any If any of Transport
one one one the factors to nearest
If any of the factors are are present Trauma
If any of the factors are present:- contact:
present contact: Unit or
Activate a Major Trauma Alert with the EOC Regional EOC Local
Trauma Desk EOC Regional Trauma
Regional Emergency
Desk for advice Trauma
Transport to Major Trauma Centre Hospital
If all factors are absent, Desk for
If all factore are absent, proceed to stage 3. proceed to stage 4. advice
Figure 5.3 The major trauma triage tool.
of injury was an independent predictor of mortality and long-term functional impairment (2).
The Committee on Trauma field guidelines are reviewed on a regular basis and amended when
required (for example regarding the relevance of vehicle damage with specific velocities, as
safety engineering improves).
SUMMARY
Injury is caused by energy transfer (usually of kinetic energy) to tissue. The amount of energy
transferred is determined by the specific situation, and it is helpful to analyse this by reference
to the physics of energy transfer in different situations. By reviewing the specific situations in
turn, it is possible to determine possible injury patterns and to examine how the energy transfer
has caused these injuries. The utility of being able to predict injuries based on knowledge of the
mechanism has been well validated and is emphasised by its continued status as an important
component of field triage algorithms.
REFERENCES
1. Santaniello JM, Esposito TJ, Luchette FA, Atkian DK, Davis KA, Gamelli RL.
Mechanism of injury does not predict acuity or level of service need: Field triage criteria
revisited. Surgery 2003;134(4):698–703.
59
Mechanism of injury
2. Haider AH, Chang DC, Haut ER, Cornwell EE, Efron DT. Mechanism of injury predicts
patient mortality and impairment after blunt trauma. Journal of Surgical Research 2009;
153:138–142.
3. Daffner RH. Patterns of high speed impact injuries in motor vehicle occupants. Journal of
Trauma 1988;28(4):498–501.
4. Sasser SM, Hunt RC, Sullivent EE, Wald MM, Mitchko J, Jurovich GJ, Sattin RW.
Guidelines for Field Triage of Injured Patients: Recommendations of the National Expert Panel
on Field Triage. Washington, DC: Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 2009.
5. Góngora E, Acosta JA, Wang Dennis SY, Brandenburg K, Jablonski K, Jorda MH.
Analysis of motor vehicle ejection victims admitted to a level I trauma center. Journal of
Trauma-Injury Infection & Critical Care 2001;51(5):854–859.
6. Ravani B, Brougham D, Mason R. Pedestrian post impact kinematics and injury pat-
terns. Society of Automotive Engineers, 1982.
7. Mason JK, Purdue BN. The Pathology of Trauma. 3rd ed. London: Arnold, 2000.
8. Helling TS, Watkins M, Evans LL, Nelson PW, Shook JW, Van Way CW. Low falls: An
underappreciated mechanism of injury. Journal of Trauma 1999;46:453–456.
9. Gennarelli TA, Champion HR, Copes WS, Sacco WJ. Comparison of mortality, morbid-
ity and severity of 59,713 head injured patients with 114,447 patients with extracranial
injuries. Journal of Trauma 1994;37:962–968.
10. Richens D, Field M, Neale M, Oakley C. The mechanism of injury in blunt traumatic
rupture of the aorta. European Journal of Cardiothoracic Surgery 2002;21(2):288–293.
11. Dauterive AH, Flancbaum L, Cox EF. Blunt intestinal trauma: A modern-day review.
Annals of Surgery 1985;201(2):198–203.
12. Dumont RJ, Okonkwo DO, Verma S, Hurlbert RJ, Boulos PT, Ellegala DB, Dumont AS.
Acute spinal cord injury, part I: Pathophysiologic mechanisms. Clinical
Neuropharmacology 2001;24(5):254–264.
13. Medical Research for Prevention, Mitigation and Treatment of Blast Injuries.
Department of Defence Directive 2006. July 2006. http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives
/corres/html/602521.htm. Accessed January 22, 2015.
14. Ritenour AE, Baskin TW. Primary blast injury: Update on diagnosis and treatment.
Critical Care Medicine 2008;36(7):S311–S317.
15. Ringburg AN, de Ronde G, Thomas SH, van Lieshout EM, Patka P, Schipper IB. Validity
of helicopter emergency medical services dispatch criteria for traumatic injuries:
A systematic review. Prehospital Emergency Care 2009;13(1):28–36.
60
The primary survey
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the aims of the primary survey in the pre-hospital environment

▪▪ Understand the structure of the primary survey
▪▪ Be able to prioritise the management of immediately life-threatening injuries
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is an overview of the primary survey. Each section is also covered in detail in the
relevant chapter. The primary survey of a trauma patient is the initial assessment of the patient
conducted in order to identify and manage any immediately life-threatening injuries and to
determine the urgency and means by which the patient will be best evacuated to hospital.
With the establishment of trauma networks and centres, it is information gathered during the
primary survey which will determine the level of facility most appropriate for the patient. The
primary survey begins on the approach to the patient when information can be gathered from
the scene and environment, from bystanders and relatives and from other health professionals
and members of the emergency services (Box 6.1).
As life-threatening problems are identified, they are immediately managed. Life-threatening
problems which can only be managed in hospital mandate rapid completion of the primary survey
and expedited transfer to hospital. The desired
end state is a patient in whom all immediately BOX 6.1: Sources of Information
life-threatening problems have been detected and at an Incident
those amenable to pre-hospital intervention have ▪▪ The scene
been managed. As part of the process, other, less ▪▪ Bystanders
time-critical problems are likely to be identified. ▪▪ The patient
These can be managed either on scene, if no life- ▪▪ Relatives
threatening injuries are present, or after lifesav- ▪▪ The emergency services
ing treatment in hospital.
61
The primary survey
The primary survey should be conducted at the first safe opportunity. The immediate pre-
hospital priority is always to ensure the safety of the rescuers, other persons present and the
patient. If the initial environment is non-permissive, the primary survey may be abbreviated or
delayed to allow rapid evacuation or securing of the area. If so, it should be repeated or com-
pleted as soon as possible. It should also be repeated if the patient’s condition alters significantly
and at handovers of care. The term golden hour was an important one, designed to empha-
sise the importance of the trauma victim reaching definitive care within 60 minutes of injury.
However, it is best avoided, as it risks introducing a degree of complacency into the assessment
and evacuation process. The aim must be to evacuate the seriously or critically injured patient
to the care they need to provide the best chance of survival at the earliest opportunity. The aim
of the primary survey is to identify these patients and ensure that there is no unnecessary delay
on scene, interventions being restricted to those needed immediately to save life.
PRACTICE POINT
Saving minutes saves lives and reduces the long-term effects of injury.
THE INITIAL APPROACH

The following is a suggested sequence,
based on the principles of the British
Armed Forces Battlefield Advanced Trauma BOX 6.2: The Sequence of the Primary
Life Support (BATLS) (1) course endorsed Survey
by the Ministry of Defence. This proto-
<C> Catastrophic external haemorrhage
col incorporates changes based on recent
civilian and military experience. A Airway, with Cervical Spine control
The separate stages of the primary B Breathing
survey are listed, in order, in Box 6.2. C Circulation
Given that the numbers of personnel D Disability
are normally limited in the pre-hospital E Exposure and environment
environment, these activities will nor-
mally be conducted in sequence, but if
additional personnel are available, a par-
allel approach may be taken. This requires excellent communication and co-ordination to ensure
that the entire sequence has been completed.
As the patient is approached, the first thing that must be assessed is the patient’s level of
response, as this guides the next steps and gives a good global assessment of the patient’s
status. A patient who can speak and answer questions sensibly and without difficulty is likely
to have a patent airway, reasonable cerebral function and adequate respiratory function.
<C> – CATASTROPHIC HAEMORRHAGE

The first stage of the primary survey (<C>) is identification of external catastrophic haemor-
rhage. Internal bleeding is identified during the C component, which is when a pelvic binder,
if appropriate, should be applied. Only life-threatening bleeding requires action during this
stage; other minor bleeding is ignored. Massive external haemorrhage is particularly common
62
A – Airway (with cervical spine control)
in casualties with penetrating or blast injuries. Although civilian and military experience is not
directly comparable, evidence has shown that the majority of battlefield casualties who die prior
to hospital do so because of uncontrolled bleeding (2,3). It is logical therefore that where such
haemorrhage is found, simple and rapid steps are immediately taken to arrest it.
PRACTICE POINT
<C> is an initial rapid assessment, asking, ‘Does this patient have exsanguinating external bleeding?’
If such bleeding is identified, the initial intervention should be the application of direct pres-
sure, by gloved hand if necessary, or with the use of a suitable haemostatic dressing. If the bleed-
ing is from a limb, the injured limb should be elevated. In limb trauma, if pressure fails to stem
the bleeding, it may be necessary to apply a tourniquet to gain control, especially if the limb
damage is extensive. In mangled amputations, immediate application of an arterial tourniquet
may be needed to stem very heavy bleeding (4). If a tourniquet is used, the time of application
should be documented, on the patient’s body if necessary. Clinicians should also note that effec-
tive tourniquets are very painful, and that good analgesia will be needed as soon as the primary
survey is complete (5). In some cases, application of a second tourniquet may be required.
In junctional areas, such as the groin and axilla, tourniquet application will not be possible
and direct pressure should be applied and maintained, for example by pressure from a fist onto
an applied dressing (6). Novel haemostatic agents have a role in the management of this type of
bleeding, although the choice of agent and method of use will be determined locally.
A – AIRWAY (WITH CERVICAL SPINE CONTROL)

If there are no signs of massive external bleeding, attention should move to management of the
airway. Particularly in head-injured patients, any reduction in level of consciousness may lead to
obstruction of the airway, either from debris such as blood or vomit, or from posterior movement
of oropharyngeal tissues. The aim during the primary survey is to ensure that the patient has a
patent airway in order to allow oxygenation. At this stage of the resuscitation, airway management
may not involve definitive airway intervention, although this may be necessary. In many cases,
the primary survey will continue whilst the drugs and equipment for intubation are prepared.
The assessment has already begun if the patient is talking or able to answer questions. Failing
this, the next stage is to establish whether the patient is breathing, and if so, is the breathing
normal? If it is, the airway can be assumed to be adequate at least initially. Assessment can
then move on to B. If the patient can count to 10 in a single breath without distress, the airway
is patent. Signs suggesting a partially obstructed airway include snoring, gurgling or paradoxi-
cal respiration. Strategies for managing the airway must follow a set sequence beginning with
simple techniques and progressing to more complex manoeuvres if simple ones are inadequate
to establish and maintain airway patency. Any obvious obstructing foreign body should be
removed if possible, using fingers, Magill forceps or suction. Movement of the cervical spine
should be minimised, and hence the jaw thrust is the preferred simple airway-opening manoeuvre.
Airway adjuncts should be used if needed and if tolerated. Care should be taken with naso-
pharyngeal airways in significant facial trauma, as there is a small risk of insertion through
a fracture into the cranial cavity. However, there is no convincing evidence to suggest any
significant risk in head injury, providing the correct insertional technique is used. If an oropha-
ryngeal airway is placed, and tolerated, the patient is not able to protect his airway and is likely
63
The primary survey
to require a definitive airway. If pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) is available, it should

be considered as soon as possible and performed as expeditiously as is safe.
As soon as the airway is patent, high-flow oxygen should be administered, at 15 L/min by
facemask with reservoir. Care should be taken with the use of oxygen in confined spaces if
there is a possibility of fire (7).
During this phase, an assessment of the likelihood of cervical spine injury should be made.
Routine reflex immobilisation of the cervical spine is inappropriate and may significantly com-
promise outcome in patients with head injury as well as making airway management more
difficult. A brief but careful examination of the neck should be carried out at this stage if a collar
and immobilisation are applied, otherwise it will wait until B.
In some cases, it will be impossible to clear the cervical spine at the scene, due to the pres-
ence of distracting injuries and reduced conscious level. Nevertheless, if the components of a
validated clinical clearance pathway can be met, the spine can be cleared, and immobilisation
may not be required (8,9). If immobilisation is needed, a three-point restraint with collar, blocks
and tape should be used. If a spinal board is used for extrication, the patient should then be
transferred to a scoop stretcher or other appropriate device and immobilised. It should be noted
that an ambulance trolley with a firm mattress will conform better to a patient’s natural contours
and reduce pressure effects while providing good spinal immobilisation. If possible, the patient
should be placed on the trolley using a scoop stretcher, then secured with the scoop stretcher
in place. Under no circumstances should the patient be secured by the head and neck alone. In
the head-injured patient, the use of a tight-fitting collar risks increased intracranial pressure and
pressure sores, and so if the head can be adequately immobilised using blocks, the collar may be
omitted (10–12). In some patients agitation can make immobilisation dangerous (13). The patient
who is secured and struggling is likely to exert more pressure on their spine and may exacer-
bate an injury. Unless they can be safely sedated, immobilisation may not be practical in these
patients. A collar alone may be used, or manual in-line stabilisation may be all that is possible.
B – BREATHING
Examination of breathing should start at the neck and work down. As part of the airway assess-
ment, therefore, the neck should be briefly but carefully examined. This is partly to check for
local injuries and partly to check for signs of significant thoracic injury. The neck should be
examined in the following sequence using the mnemonic TWELVE (Table 6.1):
The B component of the primary survey is designed to examine the chest for life-threatening
thoracic injuries. These may or may not be amenable to treatment pre-hospital, but their detec-
tion should trigger expedited evacuation (14). The injuries being sought are listed in Box 6.3.
Table 6.1 Features of neck examination and potential clinical significance
Feature Significance
Tracheal deviation This is a late sign of tension pneumothorax.
Wounds
Surgical Emphysema Suggests disruption to airway or chest wall, likely pneumothorax.
Larynx Crepitus may indicate fracture and associated airway compromise.
Veins Suggests raised intrathoracic pressure, although unreliable in
hypovolaemic shock.
Exposure Ensure collars are loosened to allow proper examination.
64
B – Breathing
Some of those conditions can and must

BOX 6.3: Potentially Life-Threatening
be managed rapidly at scene. These are
Chest Injuries
• Airway obstruction
A Airway obstruction
• Tension pneumothorax
T Tension pneumothorax • Open pneumothorax
O Open pneumothorax
A logical and effective system for the
M Massive haemothorax
management of the airway is described
F Flail chest in Chapter 8. The best initial manage-
C Cardiac tamponade ment of tension pneumothorax in the
ventilated patient is thoracostomy; oth-
erwise a needle decompression is appro-
priate. An open chest wound should be sealed with a commercial one-way valve dressing.
If massive haemothorax is identified in the pre-hospital environment, the management
is immediate evacuation to hospital. Major flail segments are best managed by intubation
and ventilation. Cardiac tamponade is difficult to diagnose outside hospital and unless a
thoracotomy can be performed, immediate transport to hospital is the most prudent course.
Chest injuries and their immediate management are the subject of Chapter 9.
When examining the chest, full exposure is essential; otherwise subtle injuries will be
PRACTICE POINT
The chest should be fully exposed in order to assess for injury.
missed. Like all examinations, B must follow a structure and begin with inspection. The con-
ventional sequence look – feel – percuss – auscultate is followed.
PRACTICE POINT
If anything changes or you become confused, always go back to <C>.
INSPECTION
The respiratory rate must be assessed or recognised to be normal. Bruising, deformity and asym-
metry must be sought. Abnormal movements of the chest wall are best seen from low down look-
ing tangentially across the chest or upwards from the feet. The amount of effort breathing requires
should be noted, together with the use of accessory muscles. The front of the chest should be care-
fully assessed and wherever possible the back. In some cases this may not be possible, but if glass or
other sharp objects can be excluded, at the very least a gentle palpation of the back should be care-
fully carried out in search of bleeding or wounds. If spinal injury is possible from the mechanism
of injury, diaphragmatic breathing should be sought, which is suggestive of high spinal cord injury.
PALPATION
Thorough palpation should be performed for tenderness, crepitus and surgical emphysema. If it
is unclear whether chest movement is symmetrical, the patient should be examined low down
looking upwards from their feet.
65
The primary survey
PERCUSSION
Percussion is often of limited value in the pre-hospital environment due to the levels of ambi-
ent noise. Ideally a brief assessment for resonance or dullness should be carried out, identifying
asymmetry of resonance. In practice hyper-resonance is difficult to demonstrate.
AUSCULTATION
Like percussion, auscultation is challenging in the presence of background noise. Where pos-
sible, an assessment should be made of air entry, and differences between the right and left
sides identified.
It is essential to be absolutely clear about the aims of the primary survey in assessing the
respiratory system. The information which can be gained by clinical examination of the neck
and chest will almost inevitably be compromised by the environment and should be supple-
mented by monitoring, including oxygen saturation and end tidal carbon dioxide (ETCO2).
However, the aim of B is to immediately identify the life-threatening problems listed earlier,
and in the absence of signs suggestive of these, or deteriorating respiratory function, the patient
will be monitored whilst the primary survey continues, and the chest will be revisited if there
is any sign of deterioration.
C – CIRCULATION
Exsanguinating external haemorrhage will have been identified and managed in <C>. The sec-
ond C has three key objectives. First, an assessment of the adequacy of the patient’s circulatory
system must be made, with a view to ascertaining whether end organs are being adequately per-
fused. Second, an assessment should be made as to whether there is a suspicion of occult internal
bleeding, and if so its site must be identified. Where appropriate, splints should be applied to
reduce bleeding from the pelvis or long bones. Third, intravaneous or intraosseous access must
be obtained with judicious administration of intravenous fluid to maintain end organ perfusion.
The adequacy of circulation has already been partly assessed by talking to the patient. A
lucid patient is by definition perfusing their brain adequately. Note should also be made of
the patient’s skin colour and temperature, as sympathetic activation in response to hypovo-
laemia will reduce skin perfusion. The skin may be cold, clammy and pale. The hypovolaemic
patient may complain of feeling cold, regardless of the external temperature, anxious and
may also be nauseated. The radial pulse should be felt, and the rate noted. Along with the
rate, they clinician should take note of whether the pulse is full or weak. If possible, blood
pressure should be measured. A poor oxygen saturation trace may indicate poor peripheral
circulation. Single measurements of vital signs in iso-
lation mean little, but serial observation may indicate
deterioration or improvement. Regular recording of BOX 6.4: Potential Sites
respiratory rate, O2 saturations, pulse and blood pres- for Blood Loss
sure should therefore take place. ▪▪ External
When assessing blood loss, the mnemonic ‘blood on ▪▪ Chest
the floor, and four more’ is useful. Box 6.4 lists the poten- ▪▪ Abdomen
tial sites for occult blood loss. Significant amounts of blood ▪▪ Pelvis
on the floor should already have been addressed under <C>. ▪▪ Femurs
The other potential sites should now be considered.
66
D – Disability
Palpation of the abdomen is of limited value in assessing injury to internal organs, but the
presence of bruising may lead to increased suspicion (15). No attempt should be made to elicit pel-
vic instability or pain as such attempts may precipitate or exacerbate haemorrhage and in any case
are insufficiently sensitive to indicate significant injury with any relaibility. The pelvis should be
immobilised based on mechanism of injury, symptoms (usually pain), or signs such as bruising,
open wounds or blood at the urinary meatus. A simple pelvic splint must be applied and should
remain in place until appropriate imaging has been performed (16). If fractures of the femurs are
noted, reduction and splintage will reduce pain and bleeding. If there is no concern regarding
pelvic fracture, a traction splint may be used. Where there is the potential for the co-existence of a
pelvic fracture, a traction splint which does not apply pressure to the pelvis is appropriate.
Any other significant but non-life-threatening external bleeding should be identified and
managed by covering with dressings. Other fractures should be splinted, and if open, dressed.
Distal circulation should be examined, and recorded both before and after any manipulation,
which should be restricted to that required for the application of splintage or where limb circu-
lation is threatened and evacuation may be delayed. Evacuation of the critically injured, how-
ever, must under no circumstance be delayed for unnecessary practical procedures.
Venous access should be gained at this stage, if possible. A large bore cannula should be placed
in a large vein and secured. It may be, however, that intravenous access is impractical and that
intraosseous (IO) is the only viable option. Time should not be wasted in multiple attempts at
intravenous access. Either an IO needle should be inserted or immediate evacuation should be
carried out. The choice of location for access depends on the injuries and equipment available. The
tibia is usually the first option, followed by the sternum or humeral head, although the iliac crest
may also be utilised. Care should be taken in obese or muscular patients, especially when using
the humeral head, as standard adult needles may not be long enough to enter the marrow cavity.
The administration of intravenous fluids is a matter of some debate, with regard to the ideal fluid
and time of administration. Clearly, if the patient is on the verge of circulatory collapse, fluid should
be given immediately. Studies demonstrate that patients who receive limited crystalloid resusci-
tation in the early phase of their injury have better outcomes than those who receive aggressive
volumes (17,18). Although this initially led to the suggestion that casualties should be resuscitated
to below normal blood pressure (hypotensive resuscitation), animal models of haemorrhage have
shown that prolonged hypotension leads to acidosis and coagulopathy. A consensus, therefore, has
emerged that the target blood pressure for the first hour after injury should be 90 mmHg (or a radial
pulse if measurement is impossible), but that thereafter normal physiology should be the target (19).
The choice of fluid to administer has likewise been the matter of much debate. There is now
overwhelming evidence that blood product resuscitation produces better outcomes, with blood and
fresh frozen plasma being given in a 1:1 ratio (20). The logistical difficulties of providing blood sup-
plies forward of hospital are considerable, and at present this capability is confined to services which
see very high volumes of major trauma, mainly air ambulances (21). There is no evidence of benefit
from treatment with colloids, and given their cost and increased risk of allergic reactions, when
blood products are not available, volume resuscitation, if required, should be with crystalloids.
D – DISABILITY
After the circulatory assessment, the patient’s neurological status should be determined. During
the primary survey, the aim is to immediately identify life-threatening problems; hence a full
neurological examination will be delayed until the patient arrives in hospital. The assessment
should therefore be rapid and focussed on significant injuries to the central nervous system.
67
The primary survey
PRACTICE POINT
Every so often do a ‘Where are we up to check’ out loud
For example:
‘So that’s:
<C> No severe external haemorrhage
A Airway patent and talking
B Respiratory rate 24, breath sounds equal and normal, expansion equal and normal,
seat belt bruising to left side of chest
OK, let’s carry on …’
The first assessment is of the patient’s

BOX 6.5: Primary Survey Part D
level of consciousness, although this will
of course have started the moment the Is the patient:
patient is approached. At this stage, the – Alert A
AVPU assessment should be used (Box 6.5) – Responsive to Voice V
together with examination of the pupils – Responsive to Pain P
for size equality and reactivity. If possible, – U
nresponsive U
the eyes should be examined before the Head and face
administration of any drugs, as pupils are – For signs of head and facial injury
affected by opiates and muscle relaxants. Pupils
The size and responsiveness of the pupils – Size, equality, reaction
should be documented prominently, espe- Limbs
cially if anaesthesia is contemplated, as – Movement and weakness
neurological assessment of sedated patients – Abnormal movements or posturing
is challenging.
A gross assessment of limb movement
and weakness should be performed. If involuntary limb movements or abnormal postur-
ing are seen, this should be documented. Other signs of spinal injury should be looked for,
such as lower limb vasodilation and priapism, but these are unreliable, and their absence
does not exclude injury.
In addition, when there is time, without causing delay in evacuation (for example during
transfer), the patient’s Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) score should be calculated, and documented,
to allow changes to be clearly identified. This scale is divided into three segments, and the best
score in each category is used to calculate the overall score out of 15. Table 6.2 shows the com-
ponents of the GCS and the corresponding scores.
Table 6.2 The Glasgow Coma Scale
Motor response Verbal response Eye opening

Obeys commands (6) Oriented (5) Spontaneous (4)
Localises pain (5) Confused speech (4) To voice (3)
Withdraws from pain (4) Inappropriate words (3) To pain (2)
Abnormal flexion (3) Moans (2) No eye opening (1)
Abnormal extension (2) No verbal response (1)
No Motor Response (1)
68
Summary
The patient should also be assessed for external head injury. Lacerations and contu-
sions to the scalp should be noted and the patient examined for signs of underlying fracture.
Examination should be made for signs of basal skull fracture, looking for periorbital bruising,
blood or cerebrospinal fluid draining from nose or ears. Battle’s sign (bruising to the mastoid
process) suggests fracture if present, but may take some hours to become apparent.
In any patient with reduced conscious level, it is essential to check the blood sugar and treat
hypoglycaemia immediately with 1 mL/kg of 10% glucose intravenously. Particular care should
be taken with known diabetics, young children, the elderly and alcoholics, but any patient can
become hypoglyaemic when stressed.
E – EXPOSURE AND ENVIRONMENT

Whilst every effort must be made to safeguard the patient’s modesty, exposure must be suf-
ficient to ensure effective inspection. The patient must also be kept warm using conventional
blankets or active warming blankets. Wet clothes must be removed. Wrapping a patient
wearing cold wet clothes in a silver foil blanket will likely only lead to the development of
hypothermia. Temperature control has a key role in the maintenance of haemostasis, and
so normothermia must be maintained (22,23). Hypovolaemia can cause hypothermia even
in hot climates. If the patient has a temperature of less than 35°C, they should be actively
rewarmed.
TIMELINES
In this section, examination must ensure that all significant or serious injuries are identified.
This is not the time to search for, identify and document every single injury, however minor.
That is what the secondary survey is for. Following this assessment, the patient must be pack-
aged for transfer.
If hospital is nearby or life-threatening injuries have been identified, it may be that it is more
appropriate to transfer the patient and complete the examination in a more conducive environ-
ment. On the other hand, if the transfer is likely to be prolonged, a more thorough examination
may be desirable.
SUMMARY
By the end of the primary survey, the clinician must have identified the patient’s life-
threatening injuries and should be aware of other significant injuries. Where immediate
lifesaving intervention is possible, it should have been performed. Where no intervention
is possible, but urgent treatment is needed to save life or prevent serious deterioration, this
should provide impetus to the process of urgent evacuation and the time spent on the pri-
mary survey may decrease. The emphasis of the primary survey is treatment of what can
be treated immediately to save life and identification of those injuries that need treatment
in hospital. Decisions must be made about any further on-scene interventions which may
be needed, and how and when safe transfer to hospital may be effected. If at any point the
patient deteriorates significantly, the primary survey should be repeated and any new prob-
lems attended to.
69
The primary survey
REFERENCES
1. Battlefield Advanced Trauma Life Support. 3rd ed. Defence Medical Services Department,
2005.
2. Champion HR, Bellamy RF, Roberts CP, Leppaniemi A. A profile of combat injury.
Journal of Trauma 2003;54(5):S13–S19.
3. Holcomb JB, McMullin NR, Pearse L, Caruso J, Wade CE, Oetjen-Gerdes L, Champion
HR et al. Causes of death in U.S. Special Operations Forces in the Global War on
Terrorism: 2001–2004. Annals of Surgery 2007;245(6):986–991.
4. Parker P, Clasper J. The military tourniquet. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps
2007;153(1):10–12.
5. Lakstein D, Blumenfeld A, Sokolov T, Lin G, Bssorai R, Lynn M, Ben-Abraham R.
Tourniquets for hemorrhage control on the battlefield: A 4-year accumulated experience.
Journal of Trauma 2003;54(5):S221–S225.
6. Englehart MS, Cho SD, Tieu BH, Morris MS, Underwood SJ, Karahan A, Muller PJ,
Differding JA, Farrell DH, Schreiber MA. A novel highly porous silica and chitosan-
based hemostatic dressing is superior to HemCon and gauze sponges. Journal of Trauma
2008;65(4):884–892.
7. Calland V. Safety at Scene. London: Mosby, 2000.
8. Hoffman JR, Mower WR, Wolfson AB, Todd KH, Zucker MI. Validity of a set of clini-
cal criteria to rule out injury to the cervical spine in patients with blunt trauma. New
England Journal of Medicine 2013 Jan 6;343(2):94–99.
9. Vaillancourt C, Stiell IG, Beaudoin T, Maloney J, Anton AR, Bradford P, Cain E et al.
The Out-of-Hospital Validation of the Canadian C-Spine Rule by Paramedics. Annals of
Emergency Medicine 2009;54(5):663–671.
10. Harrison P, Cairns C. Clearing the cervical spine in the unconscious patient. Continuing
Education in Anaesthesia, Critical Care & Pain 2008;8(4):117–120.
11. Chendrasekhar A, Moorman DW, Timberlake GA, Printen K. An evaluation of the
effects of semirigid cervical collars in patients with severe closed head injury. The
American Surgeon 1998;64(7):604–606.
12. Hunt K, Hallworth S, Smith M. The effects of rigid collar placement on intracranial and
cerebral perfusion pressures. Anaesthesia 2001;56(6):511–513.
13. Greaves I, Porter K, Garner J, editors. Trauma Care Manual. 2nd ed. Edward Arnold,
2009.
14. Willett KM. The future of trauma care in the UK. British Journal of Hospital Medicine
2009;70(11):612–613.
15. Michetti CP, Sakran JV, Grabowski JG, Thompson EV, Bennett K, Fakhry SM. Physical
examination is a poor screening test for abdominal-pelvic injury in adult blunt trauma
patients. Journal of Surgical Research 2010;159(1):456–461.
16. Lee C, Porter K. The prehospital management of pelvic fractures. Emergency Medicine
Journal 2007;24(2):130–133.
17. Bickell WH, Wall MJ, Pepe PE, Martin RR, Ginger VF, Allen MK, Mattox KL. Immediate
versus delayed fluid resuscitation for hypotensive patients with penetrating torso inju-
ries. New England Journal of Medicine 1994;331(17):1105–1109.
18. Bickell WH, Bruttig SP, Millnamow GA, O’Benar J, Wade CE. The detrimental effects of
intravenous crystalloid after aortotomy in swine. Surgery 1991;110(3):529–536.
70
References
19. Consensus Working Group on Pre-Hospital Fluids. Fluid resuscitation in pre-

hospital trauma care: A consensus view. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps
2001;147:147–152.
20. Joint Doctrine Publication 4–03.1: Clinical Guidelines for Operations. Ministry of
Defence, 2011.
21. Greer SE, Rhynhart KK, Gupta R, Corwin HL. New developments in massive transfu-
sion in trauma. Current Opinion in Anaesthesiology 2010;23(2):246–250.
22. Jurkovich GJ, Greiser WB, Luterman A, Curreri PW. Hypothermia in trauma victims: An
ominous predictor of survival. Journal of Trauma 1987;27(9):1019–1024.
23. Beilman G, Nelson T, Nathens A, Moore F, Rhee P, Puyana J, Moore E, Cohn S.
Early hypothermia in severely injured trauma patients is a significant risk factor for
multiple organ dysfunction syndrome but not mortality. Critical Care 2007;11(Suppl 2):
P345.
71
Catastrophic haemorrhage
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand why catastrophic haemorrhage requires immediate management

▪▪ Be aware of the methods available for the control of catastrophic haemorrhage
▪▪ Be able to rapidly and effectively control catastrophic junctional or extremity haemorrhage
INTRODUCTION
Catastrophic haemorrhage is defined as severe and sustained bleeding which if left untreated
would lead to rapid exsanguination and death. It is the leading cause of early preventable death
following traumatic injury both on the battlefield and in civilian trauma (1,2). Catastrophic
haemorrhage may be divided into internal and external bleeding, external haemorrhage being
identified and controlled during part <C> of the primary survey, and internal haemorrhage
during C. Internal sources of haemorrhage include injury to the great vessels (for example, the
aorta or vena cava) or their major branches supplying the chest, abdomen, retroperitoneum, or
pelvis. External sources include injury to the vessels within the upper and lower limbs (extremi-
ties) and the junctional zones of the axilla, neck, groin, perineum and buttocks (Figure 7.1).
The elastic content of arteries makes them highly resistant to blunt injury, but susceptible to
incision or ballistic fragment penetration. Catastrophic extremity or junctional haemorrhage is
therefore relatively rare following blunt trauma, with early deaths usually resulting from central
vascular deceleration injuries or traumatic brain injury (3). In contrast, the superficial location
of blood vessels within the extremities and across junctional zones makes them particularly
vulnerable to penetrating injury at these sites (4). Traumatic amputation is a common cause of
catastrophic haemorrhage following blast injury on the battlefield (5) but uncommon in civilian
practice where it occasionally follows farming and industrial accidents or accidental explosions.
However, the rise in terrorist activity over the last decade means such injuries are likely to
become increasingly common in civilian practice, too.
The recognition that catastrophic bleeding requires immediate management has led to the
widespread adoption of the <C>ABCDE paradigm across military and civilian pre-hospital
care, where <C> represents immediate control of catastrophic haemorrhage.
72
Control of bleeding
CONTROL OF BLEEDING
A number of methods are now available for the
control of catastrophic external haemorrhage.
Many of these have been informed by develop-
ments in tactical combat casualty care during
the recent wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. These
are listed in Box 7.1.
The anatomical site of the bleeding and
the environment in which care is to be deliv-
ered will determine the method and order in
which these techniques are employed. In a low-
threat environment the continued application
of direct pressure may be sufficient to control
catastrophic limb haemorrhage. Conversely, in Figure 7.1 Massive external haemorrhage
from a limb wound.
a high-threat environment (for example, where
there is a risk of building collapse or a secondary
terrorist explosive device), rapid haemorrhage BOX 7.1: Methods of Control
control with a tourniquet and extraction to a of Catastrophic Haemorrhage
safer environment would be a more appropriate ▪▪ Direct pressure with elevation
immediate action. ▪▪ Haemostatic dressings
▪▪ Extremity tourniquets
▪▪ Truncal and junctional tourniquets
CONTROL OF EXTREMITY ▪▪ Tissue clamps
BLEEDING
Critical extremity and junctional external bleeding are controlled in the <C> component of the
primary survey. In most circumstances extremity bleeding can be controlled by the stepwise
application of basic haemorrhage control techniques. Direct pressure through a dressing in
combination with limb elevation (above the level of the heart) will be sufficient to manage most
cases. Where bleeding cannot be controlled by these measures, or the environmental threat
precludes their use, the early application of a tourniquet, haemostatic dressing or indirect pres-
sure device should be considered.
CONTROL OF JUNCTIONAL BLEEDING

Due to the proximal location and involvement of large vessels, junctional injuries can be chal-
lenging to manage. Early consideration should be given to the use of haemostatic dressings
(see later). Direct pressure through a dressing should be applied immediately to the region of
the bleeding vessel while the haemostatic dressing is made ready. The haemostatic dressing
is then packed into the wound cavity and pressure re-applied. Pressure may need to be con-
tinued until proximal surgical control can be gained in an operating theatre. Application of
direct pressure can be complicated by the presence of important adjacent structures such as
the trachea in the neck. In these cases early definitive airway management may be required
before effective haemorrhage control can be achieved. Although junctional injuries are not
amenable to standard limb tourniquets, specific junctional tourniquets are now available for
use in the axilla and groin, although their role is not yet clearly established. Other novel
73
techniques such as balloon tamponade (6), wound clamping and truncal tourniquets may
be useful alternatives, but currently evidence is limited. Blind clamping of vessels in deep
wounds is time-consuming, frequently ineffective and is discouraged.
CONTROL OF INTERNAL BLEEDING

The optimal management for non-compressible internal haemorrhage within the thoracic or
abdominal cavity is rapid and definitive operative haemostasis or interventional radiology.
Early recognition and rapid evacuation to a major trauma centre is therefore critical to patient
survival. A clear appreciation of the mechanism of injury, pattern of physical injury and tem-
poral changes in physiology will allow the pre-hospital practitioner to rapidly identify those
patients at risk. At the current time there are few other management options available to the
pre-hospital practitioner other than appropriate fluid replacement, application of a pelvic sling
if pelvic bleeding is a possibility and limb elevation. Experimental work looking at pre-hospital
resuscitative endovascular balloon occlusion of the aorta (REBOA) (7,8), intraperitoneal injec-
tion of self-expanding polyurethane polymer (9) and suspended animation (10) may offer
potential options for this group of patients by providing a bridge to life-saving surgery.
HAEMORRHAGE CONTROL TECHNIQUES
DIRECT PRESSURE
Haemorrhage from the extremity or junctional zones can normally be stopped through the
effective application of direct pressure. Disposable gloves and personal protective equipment
(including eye protection) should always be worn due to the risk of blood-borne virus trans-
mission. Traditionally, pressure is applied through gauze swabs or dressings using the rescuer’s
fingers, palm or fist. Cellulose fibres within the dressing activate the extrinsic clotting pathway
and act as a matrix for subsequent clot formation. Care should be taken to ensure pressure is
maximal over the bleeding vessel. Targeted, firm digital pressure through a single dressing
over a bleeding vessel will often be more effective than diffuse pressure applied over a wad of
bulky layered dressings. Some field dressings now incorporate a pressure bar or cap to focus
direct pressure more effectively. If bleeding continues despite direct pressure, the addition of
further dressings on top is rarely beneficial, as these serve only to distribute the applied force
over a wider area. Similarly the requirement for ongoing pressure not only prevents the r escuer
undertaking further interventions but also becomes less effective over time as the rescuer tires.
In such circumstances, alternative haemorrhage control techniques should be considered.
There is no role for the use of compression over proximal ‘pressure points’ in significant exter-
nal bleeding.
New Ideas
The XSTAT™ (Revolutionary Medical Technologies™, Wilsonville, Oregon, United States) is an alter-
native device for packing a bleeding wound and uses multiple small sponges that are injected into
the wound cavity using an applicator. The sponges expand and swell rapidly to fill the wound cavity
within 20 seconds of contact with blood. This rapid expansion not only packs the wound cavity but
also applies pressure to bleeding vessels negating the need for external direct pressure. Each sponge
contains an X-ray detectable marker to aid in surgical removal. It is currently undergoing trials (11).
74
Haemorrhage control techniques
HAEMOSTATIC DRESSINGS
Haemostatic dressings possess active haemorrhage control properties and come in a variety of
presentations (for example impregnated gauzes, pads, powders and granules). They are par-
ticularly useful for controlling bleeding from junctional zones but must be used in combination
with a standard dressing and direct pressure. Haemostatic agents in current usage work by
three main mechanisms to promote clotting:
• Factor concentrators
• Procoagulant supplementers
• Mucoadhesive agents
FACTOR CONCENTRATORS
These agents promote clot formation by concentrating clotting factors at the site of injury
through the adsorption of water from plasma. They rely on the patient’s intrinsic clotting
mechanism for clot formation and are therefore less effective when clotting is impaired due to
hypothermia or anticoagulant drugs.
QuikClot® (Z-Medica®, Wallingford, Connecticut, United States) is a factor concentrator
based on a naturally occurring volcanic mineral called zeolite. When zeolite comes into contact
with blood it rapidly adsorbs water in an exothermic reaction concentrating clotting factors and
large protein components on its surface. It also provides calcium ions and causes platelet activa-
tion as further adjuncts to coagulation.
Zeolite is biologically inert but needs physical removal following use due to the risk of
delayed granuloma or abscess formation (12). In the first generation of Quikclot, granular
zeolite was designed to be poured into a wound cavity. Whilst effective as a haemostatic
agent, it had a number of disadvantages including thermal injury to surrounding skin as
a result of the exothermic reaction, and the practical limitation of only being able to pour
downwards into wounds. There was also a risk of the material being blown into the eyes
of those treating the casualty. This drove the development of second-generation dressings
such as the Quikclot Advanced Clotting Sponge (Quikclot ACS) and the Quikclot Advanced
Clotting Sponge Plus (Quikclot ACS+) in which zeolite beads are packaged within a mesh bag.
The mesh bag permits application to wounds at any orientation and minimises the risk of
thermal burns to surrounding skin by containing the product within the wound. Quikclot
ACS+ uses a re-engineered formula that is less exothermic and has interior baffles within
the dressing to ensure equal distribution of the beads. It also has the addition of a silicon
rod within the bag for ease of location on wound radiographs. All Quikclot products require
the application of direct pressure over the wound for a minimum of 3 minutes following
application of the dressing.
New Ideas
Self-Expanding Haemostatic Polymer (Payload Systems Inc, Cambridge, Massachusetts, United
States) consists of a highly absorbent polymer with a wicking binder contained within a microporous
nylon bag that stretches as the polymer expands. It swells in the wound providing tamponade without
the need for direct pressure, whilst also acting as a factor concentrator. It has shown promise in animal
trials and has the advantage of being non-exothermic (13). Further comparative studies are required to
gauge its effectiveness against other agents in common use.
75
PROCOAGULANT SUPPLEMENTERS
These agents function by delivering procoagulant factors to the bleeding wound to promote
blood clotting.
QuikClot Combat Gauze (Z-Medica, Wallingford, Connecticut, United States) is a non-woven
surgical gauze coated in kaolin in use with the US military. Kaolin is a layered clay with the
active ingredient aluminium silicate which activates factor XI and factor XII of the intrinsic
coagulation pathway on contact with blood. It does not produce any exothermic reaction and
despite relying on intrinsic coagulation pathways has been shown in animal studies to be effec-
tive in the presence of hypothermia and haemodilution (14). As a gauze roll, it is easy to handle
and pack into cavity wounds. It is also easily removed at surgical debridement. Direct pressure
must be applied over the wound for a minimum of 3 minutes following application of the hae-
mostatic dressing.
The Dry Fibrin Sealant Dressing (American Red Cross Holland Laboratory, Rockville,
Maryland, United States) incorporates highly purified human fibrinogen, thrombin, cal-
cium and coagulation factor XIII onto a mesh that can be applied directly to the bleed-
ing wound. This dressing enhances coagulation by providing a high local concentration of
coagulation factors. Pre-hospital use is currently precluded by lack of dressing durability
and high cost (£300–800) (15).
MUCOADHESIVE AGENTS
Mucoadhesive agents are chitosan-based dressings which adhere to and physically seal bleed-
ing wounds. Chitosan is a naturally occurring biodegradable polysaccharide derived from the
shells of marine arthropods such as shrimp. Being positively charged it rapidly cross-links with
negatively charged red cells and adheres strongly to the wound surface. This process is inde-
pendent of intrinsic clotting mechanisms and so is unaffected by hypothermia, anticoagulant
drugs, antiplatelet agents or the acute coagulopathy of trauma. There are two main chitosan-
based products available: Celox™ and HemCon®.
Celox (Sam Medical Products, Newport, Oregon, United States) is a mucoadhesive agent
currently in use with UK armed forces (Figure 7.2). It is available as either granules or
impregnated gauze. Celox granules are very high surface area flakes that can either be
poured (Celox Granules) or injected into the wound cavity using an applicator (Celox-A™).
Celox Gauze (Figure 7.2) is a high-
density gauze, impregnated with Celox
granules and available in either a 3 m
roll or 1.5 m Z-folded pack. When
Celox comes in contact with blood,
the granules swell and stick together
to make a gel-like clot that adheres to
the wound. Direct pressure must be
applied over the wound for a minimum
of 3 minutes following application of
the haemostatic dressing. The second-
generation Celox RAPID employs an
activated form of chitosan (Chito-
RTM) bonded to gauze. Only 1 minute Figure 7.2 Celox™ Gauze. Celox is a mucoadhesive
of direct pressure is required following agent.
76
application of this dressing presenting some advantage in the pre-hospital setting. Celox
products are removed by irrigating the wound with water or saline.
HemCon Medical Technologies (Portland, Oregon, United States) produces a range
of chitosan-based products for catastrophic haemorrhage control. The HemCon bandage
(HemCon Bandage PRO) combines deacetylated chitosan acetate with a sterile foam-backing
pad to produce a wafer-like dressing that can be directly applied to bleeding vessels, organs
or wounds. It is inflexible and has only one mucoadhesive side. Recognising these limitations,
HemCon developed a flexible double-sided impregnated dressing (ChitoFlex® PRO) and an
impregnated gauze (ChitoGauze® PRO) which are more suited to packing large wound cavities.
Direct pressure must be applied over the wound for a minimum of 3 minutes following applica-
tion of the haemostatic dressing.
TOURNIQUETS
Tourniquets are an effective means of arresting catastrophic extremity haemorrhage if used
appropriately. The use of tourniquets was controversial, with the debate centring on the poten-
tial risk of limb loss due to prolonged ischaemia versus the ability to improve survival through
control of haemorrhage. However, the high rate of extremity blast trauma seen in the recent
Afghanistan conflict drove the widespread reintroduction of tourniquets to deployed military
forces. Tourniquets can be rapidly self-applied by the casualty or applied by a bystander. Such
has been their success in Afghanistan that their introduction led to a drop in mortality from
extremity bleeding from 7.4% to 2.6% (2). A windlass-type tourniquet is recommended for rou-
tine inclusion in pre-hospital care equipment.
Their use is not restricted to the battlefield and there has been an increasing recogni-
tion of their value within the civilian setting. The rapidity of application makes them ideal
for use in high-threat environments (for example, marauding terrorist firearms incident)
or mass casualty incidents where only limited medical intervention is desirable. They also
provide an alternate means of controlling limb haemorrhage where standard techniques
have failed.
WINDLASS TOURNIQUETS
The Combat Application Tourniquet (CAT®, North American Rescue, South Carolina, United States) is
the windlass tourniquet currently rec-
ommended for use by the UK Armed
Forces. It is light, compact and simple
to use. It has been shown to be effec-
tive in arresting haemorrhage, how-
ever, its relatively narrow band means
higher arterial occlusion pressures are
required than their wider competi-
tors (16). Self-application of the CAT
(Figure 7.3) is easy, but there have been
anecdotal reports of plastic windlass
failure and Velcro slippage particularly
when wet or contaminated with mud Figure 7.3 Combat Application Tourniquet (CAT®, North
or sand (17). American Rescue, South Carolina, United States).
77
RATCHET TOURNIQUETS
The Mechanical Advantage Tourniquet (MAT®, Pyng Medical, Richmond, Canada) is a ratchet-
style tourniquet that consists of a rigid collar that goes around the limb with a constricting
strap that is tightened using a rotary turnkey. It is quicker and easier to apply than its windlass
competitors (18), however, the size of the collar and ratchet mechanism makes the device less
practical for carriage and storage.
ELASTICATED TOURNIQUETS
Attention has turned to the development of wider tourniquets that will occlude arterial flow
at lower pressures thereby lessening pain and the risk of nerve and tissue damage. The Stretch
Wrap and Tuck Tourniquet (SWAT-T™, TEMS Solutions, Abingdon, Virginia, United States) con-
sists of a broad elasticated band that can be tightly wrapped around the affected limb to provide
arterial occlusion. It is lightweight, can be self-applied and has the advantage over competitors
that it can be used on any sized limb (including paediatric).
PNEUMATIC TOURNIQUETS
Pneumatic tourniquets are commonly used in surgery to safely establish a bloodless surgi-
cal field. The Emergency & Military Tourniquet (EMT, Delphi™ Medical, Vancouver, Canada)
is a portable pneumatic tourniquet similar to a manual blood pressure cuff. Whilst effective at
arresting haemorrhage, it is larger and more expensive than its competitors and being pneu-
matic carries the risk of puncture (19), making it less attractive for field use.
TOURNIQUET APPLICATION
Tourniquets should be placed as distally as possible on the affected limb and should be tight-
ened until all bleeding ceases. In amputation due to blast, more proximal application may be
necessary to control haemorrhage. Application over a joint should be avoided. Some oozing
may continue even following correct tourniquet application due to bleeding from fractured
bone ends, however, this is easily controlled with direct pressure. Tourniquet application
is often more painful than the injury itself and so judicious use of intravenous analgesia
should be considered. The commonest practical error is the failure to apply a tourniquet
tight enough, often due to concern over pain. This practice can actually increase bleeding
from distal soft tissue injuries if there is occlusion of venous outflow, but inadequate arterial
occlusion (20). Proximal lower limb bleeding, for example from the thigh, may require the
application of more than one tourniquet to achieve control. The time of application must be
noted on either the tourniquet, patient or in the handover notes. Tourniquet times greater
than 2 hours are associated with increased risk of complications including permanent nerve
or vascular injury, rhabdomyolysis, compartment syndrome, skin necrosis and muscle con-
tractures (16). Casualties with tourniquets applied should therefore be prioritised for urgent
evacuation to a surgical facility. There is no evidence to support periodic reperfusion by
loosening the tourniquet at intervals during evacuation and this practice may lead to incre-
mental exsanguination (21). It is vital that tourniquets are reassessed regularly during both
the resuscitation process and evacuation, as they may require adjustment if bleeding recurs
as a result of muscle relaxation or blood pressure changes.
78
New Ideas
Truncal tourniquets. The Abdominal Aortic and Junctional Tourniquet (Compression Works,
Birmingham, Alabama, United States) is designed to compress the infrarenal aorta above the level of
the bifurcation in order to gain proximal control of catastrophic pelvic, junctional and lower extremity
bleeding (Figure 7.4). The device consists of a circumferential abdominal strap with a windlass mecha-
nism and inflatable wedge-shaped bladder for aortic compression. The device can be applied in less
than a minute by a single responder and should not remain in place for more than 1 hour. The device
has been shown to be 100% effective at flow reduction in healthy volunteers with 94% achieving com-
plete occlusion of their common
femoral artery on Doppler ultra-
sound (22). The device has also
been used to arrest haemorrhage
from the upper extremity by axil-
lary application (23). It is contrain-
dicated in pregnancy and patients
with a known abdominal aortic
aneurysm. Penetrating abdominal
trauma is a relative contraindica-
tion and the device may be less
effective with abdominal obesity.
There is currently insufficient evi-
dence to recommend its use in Figure 7.4 Abdominal Aortic and Junctional Tourniquet
pre-hospital care. (Compression Works, Birmingham, Alabama, United States).
JUNCTIONAL TOURNIQUETS
A junctional tourniquet should be considered when direct pressure and haemostatic agents
have failed to control a catastrophic junctional bleed. There are three currently in use: the
Junctional Emergency Treatment Tool, Combat Ready Clamp and SAM® Junctional Tourniquet.
These devices are not currently recommended for routine use.
The Junctional Emergency Treatment Tool (JETT™, North American Rescue, Greer, South
Carolina, United States) consists of a pelvic binder assembly with bilateral trapezoid-shaped
pressure pads attached to threaded T-handles which can be used to apply pressure onto the
common femoral arteries either unilaterally or bilaterally. It can be used to apply direct pressure
to junctional bleeds in the groin or to gain proximal control of lower extremity bleeding. The
binder assembly also serves as a pelvic binder to stabilise the pelvis. The manufacturers recom-
mend that application time should not exceed 4 hours.
The Combat Ready Clamp (CRoC™, Combat Medical Systems, Fayetteville, North Carolina,
United States) is an aluminium C-clamp with an adjustable pressure disc designed to exert
mechanical pressure over the groin or axilla in order to control junctional bleeding or gain
proximal control of extremity haemorrhage (24). The device is bulky and assembly and applica-
tion can take up to 1–2 minutes (25). There are reports of severe pain on application and con-
cerns over dislodgement during patient transfer. Application time should not exceed 4 hours.
The SAM® Junctional Tourniquet (SAM Medical Products®, Wilsonville, Oregon, United
States) consists of a belt with two inflatable bladders called Target Compression Devices (TCD).
79
The two TCD are moveable and can be positioned over a wound or the junctional vessels if
proximal control is the aim. It can be applied in under 25 seconds. When applied to the inguinal
region the belt can also be used as a pelvic binder. An auxiliary strap is required for application
to the axilla. Tourniquet time should not exceed 4 hours.
WOUND CLAMPS
The iTClamp™ (Innovative Trauma Care, San Antonio, Texas, United States) is a temporary
wound closure device designed for wounds with opposable edges. It consists of two pressure
bars connected by a clutched hinge. Along each pressure bar there are four 21-gauge needles,
which serve to evert the skin edges during application and fix the device in place once closed.
The iTClamp seals the wound closed and creates a temporary pool of blood under pressure that
then clots. The hinge has a clutch release mechanism that allows removal or repositioning of
the device. Large wound cavities can be packed with gauze or haemostatic agent before appli-
cation of the iTClamp. It is designed for use on the extremities and junctional zones but may
also be used for wound closure on the trunk or scalp. The device is compact and well tolerated
by patients. It has the potential advantage over tourniquets of preserving distal blood flow if
the artery is not transected, although it has yet to convincingly demonstrate a role for itself in
pre-hospital care.
SUMMARY
Catastrophic haemorrhage must be managed rapidly and aggressively. Most bleeding can be
managed through the stepwise application of basic haemorrhage control techniques. Where
this fails, haemostatic dressings and tourniquets should be used. We recommend that a wind-
lass tourniquet is available to all pre-hospital practitioners, accepting that the occasions when
it will be required are likely to be rare. As the range of haemostatic techniques increases, it is
important that the pre-hospital practitioner remains abreast of these developments in order to
maintain currency and to provide optimum patient care. However, we caution that practitio-
ners should not be seduced by complex equipment that is likely to be infrequently used and for
which a strong evidence base for appropriate effective pre-hospital use is not available.
REFERENCES
1. Kauvar DS, Wade CE. The epidemiology and modern management of traumatic hemor-
rhage: US and international perspectives. Critical Care 2005;9(5):S1–S9.
2. Eastridge BJ, Mabry RL, Seguin P, Cantrell J, Tops T, Uribe P, Mallett O et al. Death on
the battlefield (2001–2011): Implications for the future of combat casualty care. Journal of
Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2012;73:S431–S437.
3. Chiara O, Scott JD, Cimbanassi S, Marini A, Zoia R, Rodriguez A, Scalea T, Milan
Trauma Death Study Group. Trauma deaths in an Italian urban area: An audit of pre-
hospital and in-hospital trauma care. Injury 2002;33(7):553–562.
4. Perkins ZB, De’Ath HD, Aylwin C, Brohi K, Walsh M, Tai NR. Epidemiology and out-
come of vascular trauma at a British Major Trauma Centre. European Journal of Vascular
and Endovascular Surgery 2012;44(2):203–209.
80
References
5. Morrison JJ, Hunt N, Midwinter M, Jansen J. Associated injuries in casualties with

traumatic lower extremity amputations caused by improvised explosive devices. British
Journal of Surgery 2012;99(3):362–366.
6. Navsaria P, Thoma M, Nicol A. Foley catheter balloon tamponade for life-threatening
hemorrhage in penetrating neck trauma. World Journal of Surgery 2006;30(7):1265–1268.
7. Stannard A, Eliason JL, Rassmussen TE. Resuscitative endo-vascular balloon occlusion
of the aorta (ReBoA) as an adjunct for hemorrhagic shock. Journal of Trauma and Acute
Care Surgery 2011;71:1869–1872.
8. Andersen NG, Rehn M, Oropeza-Moe M, Oveland NP. Pre-hospital resuscitative endo-
vascular balloon occlusion of the aorta. Scandinavian Journal of Trauma, Resuscitation and
Emergency Medicine 2014; 22(1):19.
9. Rago AP, Duggan MJ, Beagle J, Peev MP, Marini J, Hwabejire JO, Hannett P et al. Self-
expanding foam for prehospital treatment of intra-abdominal hemorrhage: 28-day sur-
vival and safety. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2014;77(3 Suppl 2):S127–S133.
10. Alam HB, Duggan M, Li Y, Spaniolas K, Liu B, Tabbara M, Demoya M et al. Putting
life on hold-for how long? Profound hypothermic cardiopulmonary bypass in a
swine model of complex vascular injuries. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery
2008;64:912–922.
11. Mueller GR, Pineda TJ, Xie HX, Teach JS, Barofsky AD, Schmid JR, Gregory KW. A
novel sponge-based wound stasis dressing to treat lethal noncompressible hemorrhage.
Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2012;73(2 Suppl 1):S134–S139.
12. Wright FL, Hua HT, Velmahos G, Thoman D. Intracorporeal use of the hemostatic agent
QuickClot in a coagulopathic patient with combined thoracoabdominal penetrating
trauma. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2004;56:205–208.
13. Velmahos G, Tabbara M, Spaniolas K et al. Self-expanding hemostatic polymer for
control of exsanguinating extremity bleeding. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery
2009;66:984–988.
14. Johnson D, Bates S, Nukalo S, Staub A, Hines A, Leishman T, Michel J, Sikes D,
Gegel B, Burgert J. The effects of QuikClot Combat Gauze on hemorrhage control
in the presence of hemodilution and hypothermia. Annals of Medicine and Surgery
2014;3:21–25.
15. Granville-Chapman J, Jacobs N, and Midwinter MJ. Pre-hospital haemostatic dressings:
A systematic review. Injury 2011;42:447–459.
16. Wakai A, Winter DC, Street JT, Redmond PH. Pneumatic tourniquets in extremity
surgery. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons 2001;9:345–351.
17. Childers R, Tolentino JC, Leasiolagi J, Wiley N, Liebhardt D, Barbabella S, Kragh JF Jr.
Tourniquets exposed to the Afghanistan combat environment have decreased
efficacy and increased breakage compared to unexposed tourniquets. Military
Medicine 2011;176(12):1400–1403.
18. Ruterbusch VL, Swiergosz MJ, Montgomery LD, Hopper KW, Gerth WA. ONR/
MAR- SYSCOM evaluation of self-applied tourniquets for combat applications. Navy
Experimental Diving Unit Technical Report TR 05-15, November 2005.
19. Kragh JF, O’Neill ML, Walters TJ, Dubick MA, Baer DG, Wade CE, Holcomb JB,
Blackbourne LH. The Military Emergency Tourniquet Program’s lessons learned with
devices and designs. Military Medicine 2011;176(10):1144–1152.
20. Starnes BW, Beekley AC, Sebesta JA, Andersen CA, Rusk RM Jr. Extremity vascular
injuries on the battlefield: Tips for surgeons deploying to war. Journal of Trauma and
Acute Care Surgery 2006;60:432–442.
81
21. Clifford CC. Treating traumatic bleeding in a combat setting. Military Medicine
2004;169(12 Suppl):8–10.
22. Taylor DM, Coleman M, Parker PJ. The evaluation of an abdominal aortic tourniquet
for the control of pelvic and lower limb hemorrhage. Military Medicine 2013;178(11):
1196–1201.
23. Croushorn J, Thomas G, McCord SR. Abdominal aortic tourniquet controls junctional
hemorrhage from a gunshot wound of the axilla. Journal of Special Operations Medicine
2013;13(3):1–4.
24. Kheirabadi BS, Terrazas IB, Hanson MA, Kragh JF Jr, Dubick MA, Blackbourne LH. In
vivo assessment of the Combat Ready Clamp to control junctional hemorrhage in swine.
Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2013;74:1260–1265.
25. Kotwal RS, Butler FK, Gross KR, Kheirabadi BS, Baer DG, Dubick MA, Rasmussen TE,
Weber MA, Bailey JA. Management of junctional hemorrhage in tactical combat
casualty care: TCCC Guidelines? Proposed Change 13-03. Journal of Special Operations
Medicine 2013;13(4):85–93.
82
Airway management
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be capable of recognising the obstructed or partially obstructed airway

▪▪ Understand the principles of stepped airway care
▪▪ Be able, by selecting the most appropriate method, to provide a patent airway for every
trauma victim.
INTRODUCTION
It is fundamental that, with the rare exception of controlling catastrophic haemorrhage,
management of the airway is the first priority when assessing and treating a trauma casu-
alty (1–3). The principles are simple: to provide a reliable pathway to deliver oxygen to the
lungs and to allow the ventilation of carbon dioxide from the body. It is of concern therefore
that repeated reports continue to highlight poor or absent pre-hospital airway management
in the hands of healthcare professionals as an ongoing cause of death and morbidity (4–6).
Complex interventions such as surgical cricothyroidotomy or pre-hospital anaesthesia
with intubation are rare when compared to the number of trauma casualties requiring some
form of airway support. Effective airway care is not, in the vast majority of cases, difficult,
requiring the mastery only of a sequence of straightforward techniques. Therefore if the
reports referred to are accurate, there must be a gap between what providers are learning
in both basic and advanced courses, and what is being delivered to patients. The potential
causes of such a gap are given in Box 8.1.
In addition, it should not be forgotten that BOX 8.1: Potential Causes of Poor
overconfidence associated with unnecessar- Airway Management
ily complex interventions is also a cause of
▪▪ Lack of recognition of an airway at risk
morbidity.
▪▪ Lack of theoretical knowledge
This chapter aims to describe the patho-
▪▪ Lack of practical skill
physiology of airway trauma, explain the
▪▪ Lack of confidence in delivering these
signs of an airway at risk and illustrate the
skills
possible interventions to maintain an airway.
83
Airway management
CERVICAL SPINE CONSIDERATIONS

There is little evidence that patient outcomes are improved through meticulous spinal precau-
tions when coupled with inadequate airway management. There is, however, plenty to suggest
that good airway management saves lives and reduces morbidity. It is reasonable to suggest
therefore that good airway management with associated provision of oxygenation and ade-
quate ventilation should be the priority (7). As much care as possible should be taken to protect
a potentially injured spine from further movement and damage, but not at the expense of man-
aging an airway at risk.
THE AIRWAY
The airway starts at the lips and the nostrils, and terminates in the alveoli of the lungs. Every
part of this network of passages is susceptible to damage or compromise as a result of trauma.
However,
• If a pathway can be found that allows the movement of gas in and out of the lungs, then
the airway is open.
• If this pathway is held open despite the natural tendency to occlude, the airway is
supported.
• If this pathway is supported such that contamination and further disruption of the
airway is impossible, the airway is secured.
A safe airway is open, supported and secure.
There are two reasons why it may be important to actively manage an airway in the pre-
hospital environment.
The first and most obvious need is to provide enough oxygen to the lungs to meet the meta-
bolic requirements of the casualty. Lack of oxygen will cause cellular malfunction within min-
utes and hypoxic brain injury with cardiac arrest will quickly follow.
Adequate oxygenation can theoretically be provided with a single breath of 100%
oxygen per minute, but this does not address the second component of ventilation – the
removal of carbon dioxide. This function requires substantially greater volumes of gas to be
exchanged in order to allow the carbon dioxide produced through metabolism to be cleared
from the bloodstream. Uncontrolled rises in carbon dioxide do not threaten life as quickly
as uncontrolled drops in oxygen levels, but they do cause alterations in blood pH, intracra-
nial pressure, function of the myocardium and coagulation pathways which may all increase
secondary damage to the body (8–10). It is therefore important to differentiate oxygenation
from ventilation and to realise that one can be achieved without the other: A patient with an
open airway on supplemental oxygen can demonstrate normal pulse oximetry but still be
hypo-ventilating, accumulating carbon dioxide and sustaining secondary injury. In contrast,
adequate ventilation of carbon dioxide can be achieved in an oxygen poor environment, but
hypoxia will occur.
84
The pathophysiology of airway trauma
THE PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF AIRWAY TRAUMA
INDIRECT TRAUMA
Indirect trauma describes a traumatic injury that, whilst not disrupting the airway, may cause
the airway to occlude. The most common cause of this type of injury is a traumatic brain injury
with subsequent alteration or loss of consciousness. This usually manifests itself in one of two
ways (Box 8.2).
BOX 8.2: Indirect Trauma to the Airway

Significant reduction in consciousness to the point that normal muscle tone is lost. This results in the
collapse of the soft structures within the airway, especially if the patient is lying on their back. This may
also include patients who following reduction in consciousness rest in a position where the neck is
flexed forward occluding the airway (for example slumped forward in a car seat).
Alteration in consciousness to the point that the patient may appear agitated, combative and
muscle tone is increased. This results in clenching of the jaw (trismus) and an inability to clear secre-
tions or debris from the airway.
DIRECT TRAUMA
Physical damage to the airway may occur as a result of an impact to the head or the neck. Blows to
the head may result in fractures of the facial bones with subsequent bleeding into the airway fol-
lowed by swelling and occlusion of the nasal passages. Blows around the jaw may cause mandib-
ular fractures and loss of teeth into the airways, as well as bleeding and swelling of the tongue.
Direct force to the neck, especially the anterior neck, can disrupt the anatomy of the larynx
causing collapse of the airway or the passage of gas into the surrounding tissues that can become
swollen and distorted (surgical emphysema and expanding haematoma). Untreated, all of these
can be rapidly life threatening and must be both identified and managed as early as possible.
THERMAL TRAUMA
Burns can be divided into two types with regard to the airway.
FLASH BURNS
A flash burn is commonly seen when a flammable material rapidly ignites and dissipates (for
example when an accelerant is used to light a fire and causes a brief flare of heat). This type of burn
will usually affect the skin and soft tissues of the neck and face, but if the casualty does not inhale
the hot gases, the swelling is mainly confined to the external tissues and may be assessed in hos-
pital regarding whether observation and conservative management in hospital is appropriate (11).
INHALATIONAL INJURIES
An inhalational injury is more often seen in a burn sustained in an enclosed area with an endur-
ing source of heat (such as a house or vehicle fire). The inhalation of hot toxic gases in this situa-
tion is almost inevitable and will result in damage to the mucosa lining the airways, swelling of
85
Airway management
the tongue, oropharynx and vocal cords. In addition, deposition of carbonaceous and chemical
soot within the airways causes further irritation and inflammation. This type of burn presents
an immediate risk to the airway and must be recognised as a life-threatening emergency.
CONTAMINATION AS A RESULT OF TRAUMA

It is quite common following trauma for the airway to be open or supported, and for contami-
nation to occur causing inhalation or blockage due to debris. This may take the form of blood
or blood clots, liquid or particulate vomit, secretions or foreign material, all of which can be
difficult to remove even with suction. This cause of airway obstruction can be more difficult
to recognise as there may be no external signs of injury. By way of example, there have been
several cases of young children found unresponsive and not breathing whilst securely fastened
into an appropriate child seat in a relatively undamaged car following a minor collision. There
has been no apparent explanation for their respiratory arrest until a small sweet was identified
lodged in their larynx, inhaled at the point of impact.
ASSESSMENT OF THE AIRWAY

The assessment of the airway must be conducted in a simple and methodical fashion and any
finding that is not entirely normal should raise concern. As with many examinations in medi-
cine, the system of look, listen and feel will identify all but the most subtle of signs.
LOOK
The casualty’s chest should be exposed to
BOX 8.3: The Airway: Look
view the umbilicus to the neck, and both chest
walls to the armpits. On general observation Wide view
(wide view) cyanosis, and signs of obstructed ▪▪ Cyanosis
or partially obstructed respiration must be ▪▪ Obstruction or partial obstruction
identified, as must respiration that is inad- ▪▪ Ineffective respiration
equate. Examining the chest more closely
Close view
(close view) must identify the signs of specific
▪▪ Specific injury to the face and neck
trauma to the face and neck as well as assess-
▪▪ Mouth opening
ing mouth opening. See Box 8.3.
WIDE VIEW
Cyanosis
It may be readily apparent that a patient is suffering from global hypoxia from their skin colour.
This is, however, not reliable in those who are cold, in poor or very bright light conditions (12),
or those with heavily pigmented skin. By the time cyanosis is visible, however, cerebral func-
tion is often disturbed with the patient becoming agitated, confused or obtunded.
Obstructed Respiration
Respiratory effort in the presence of an occluded airway manifests as paradoxical or see-saw
movements of the chest and abdomen. In normal respiration, the chest wall and abdomen rise
86
Assessment of the airway
and fall together but in occluded respiration the abdomen will recess as the chest rises, and vice
versa creating a see-saw effect. This is a sign of impending respiratory arrest and must be acted
upon immediately. Partially obstructed respiration as indicated by use of accessory muscles, in-
drawing of the abdominal wall and gasping are all indicative of an increased effort of breath-
ing, which in trauma can suggest compromise of the patent airway at some point along its path.
Ineffective Respiration
Within a few seconds it should be apparent whether the rate or depth of respiration is abnormal.
Occasional sighing breaths (referred to as agonal) commonly precede a respiratory arrest. Very rapid
shallow breaths are both ineffective and quickly tiring. Note should be made of the rate and depth
of breathing as subsequent deterioration or improvements can then be recorded and acted upon.
CLOSE VIEW
Signs of direct trauma, bleeding or swelling around the face and neck, should be noted. These
are likely to suggest disruption or potential swelling to the normal airway anatomy and may
require early and definitive intervention.
Mouth opening should be assessed to determine muscle tone of the airway and access to the
airway. A slack jaw that opens easily suggests that when supine the mandible is likely to drop
backwards causing the tongue to fill the oropharynx and cause noisy or occluded respiration.
A clenched jaw suggests a degree of cerebral irritation and any airway intervention is likely to
be difficult without careful sedation. If the mouth can be opened, a visual inspection for vomit,
blood, saliva or foreign objects will determine whether suction is required immediately.
LISTEN
Whilst at the patient’s head examining the mouth, listening should provide a very easy indica-
tion of the state of the airway. Normal respiratory effort through an open airway will sound like
normal breathing. Any other sound is therefore abnormal (13) (see Box 8.4).
BOX 8.4: The Airway: Listen for Added Sounds

▪▪ Snoring is the sound of gas passing between the collapsed soft tissues of the upper airway. It
is usually amenable to simple airway manoeuvres.
▪▪ Bubbling or gurgling sounds are caused by liquid within the upper airways. This may be
saliva, blood or vomit. Air exiting the lungs bubbles through this liquid. As air is drawn back into
the lungs it will inevitably bring some of this fluid with it causing contamination of the airways
and secondary damage.
▪▪ Groaning or straining noises come from the muscular contraction of the vocal cords and indicate
that there is a reduced level of consciousness that may deteriorate further, requiring airway support.
▪▪ Stridor is a very specific noise which may be inspiratory, expiratory or both. It arises from the
vocal cords being almost, but not completely closed causing production of a moderately high-
pitched sound as gas passes through the larynx. This is usually due to swelling or oedema of
the cords and surrounding structures, and is a clear indication that total airway occlusion is
imminent, even in a conscious patient. It must not be ignored.
▪▪ Wheeze may be audible and indicates narrowing of the airways below the larynx. This may be
medical in origin such as asthma or anaphylaxis, trauma related such as inhalational burns, or
caused by airway irritation due to contamination with a chemical irritant such as vomit.
87
Airway management
FEEL
A gentle bilateral palpation starting at the angle of the mandible and running forward to the
chin may identify any step or swelling associated with a mandibular fracture, before running
down the front and sides of the neck feeling for surgical emphysema or swelling that might
impact on the airway. Finally, a brief assessment of the area around the cricothyroid membrane
is useful so that if the need for a needle or surgical airway arises, there is already some familiar-
ity with the area.
AIRWAY MANAGEMENT
Having taken into account the mechanism of injury and conducted a brief but methodical
assessment of the airway, it may be that some intervention is required to restore an open sup-
ported and secure airway. It is obvious that different healthcare providers have varying levels
of skill and equipment available, but this in no way suggests that good basic first aid is of less
value than advanced interventions. Indeed, often it is the basic principles performed well that
allow the patient to survive until advanced interventions are possible. Airway management
should always start simple!
PRACTICE POINT
Airway management should always start simple!
This part of the chapter will address possible airway interventions in turn, starting with
simple manoeuvres, and although later interventions may be outside the skill set of some prac-
titioners, it is useful for all providers to be aware of what steps may follow if required.
BASIC AIRWAY MANOEUVRES

MANUAL MANOEUVRES
Jaw thrust (Figure 8.1) and chin lift (Figure 8.2) are the basic foundations of every first aid course
and are remarkably effective in the majority of patients. The airway from the larynx to the
mouth is in effect a simple tube. With the head tilted forward this tube is bent, and with the
pressure of the jaw falling rearward, it is then easily occluded by the tongue.
By lifting the chin, the airway is straightened out, and the tissues around the neck and jaw
pulled into some tension that may be enough to open the airway.
Placing a finger underneath each angle of the jaw and lifting the jaw forward will bring
the jaw and the base of the tongue forward at the same time, further creating space in the
oropharynx and allowing free passage of air. When there is a suspicion of a cervical spine
injury, a jaw thrust will cause less movement than a chin lift and is preferable, but if a com-
bined jaw thrust and chin lift are the only means by which the airway can be opened, the
airway takes priority.
The benefit of these simple manoeuvres is that they require someone to remain engaged
and physically in contact with the airway so changes or deteriorations are immediately noticed;
equally this is labour intensive and reduces the number of available hands to assist with other
tasks.
88
Airway management
Figure 8.1 The jaw thrust manoeuvre. Figure 8.2 The chin lift manoeuvre.
NASOPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY (NPA)

A nasopharyngeal airway (NPA) is a simple and effective device that can help bypass the base
of the tongue in a similar fashion to a jaw thrust. If a jaw thrust proves effective but on release
returns to a partially occluded state, a nasopharyngeal airway is likely to be effective.
Once sized correctly (see Box 8.5), the NPA
should be lubricated and passed into either BOX 8.5: Sizing a Nasopharyngeal
nostril aimed directly towards the back of the Airway
head rather than upward. There is no real evi-
Adult female: 6.0–7.0 mm (internal diameter)
dence to suggest that the bevel should lie away
Adult male: 7.0–8.0 mm (internal diameter)
from or against the midline. In adults, gentle
Or use an airway the size of the patient’s nostril.
rotation will aid insertion.
Once fully inserted, air should pass freely
and audibly through the tube. If this does not work, the tube should be left in situ as further
manoeuvres may render it effective, and any bleeding that may have been caused will be com-
pressed and partially controlled by the presence of the tube.
The use of an NPA is recommended in the semi-conscious casualty as once in situ it is well
tolerated and unlikely to cause gagging. There is a frequently expressed concern that any suspi-
cion of a base of skull fracture is a contraindication to use of a nasopharyngeal airway. This is
based upon very limited evidence involving two individual case reports (14,15) in which an NPA
penetrated the skull vault through a base of skull fracture and has resulted in many patients being
denied appropriate airway management. Current guidance (16) suggests that the risks from mis-
placement of an NPA are outweighed by the both the potential benefit in airway compromise and
by the risk of vomiting caused by use of an oropharyngeal airway in the semi-conscious patient.
OROPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY (OPA)

The oropharyngeal airway (OPA) is another simple device used to elevate the base of the
tongue away from the posterior wall of the oropharynx. Once sized appropriately (Box 8.6), the
mouth should be opened, the OPA inserted curved upwards, and rotated 180° as it is advanced.
This allows the end to rotate around the rear of the tongue rather than pushing it backwards.
89
Airway management
BOX 8.6: Sizing an Oropharyngeal

Airway
Small adult: size 2

Medium adult: size 3
Large adult: size 4
Or size between the incisors and the angle of
the jaw (see Figure 8.3).
Often the presence of an OPA will relieve

simple airway obstruction in an unconscious
patient, but it is most effective when used in
combination with a jaw thrust – the teeth
hold the OPA in place and the jaw thrust
uses the curve of the OPA to pull the tongue Figure 8.3 Sizing an oropharyngeal airway from the
forward. The use of an appropriate OPA does incisor teeth to the angle of the jaw.
not relieve the provider of having to provide
continuing close observation and ongoing support of an airway that by definition is at risk.
The main risk of using an OPA is that it may induce a gag reflex and vomiting in a conscious
or semi-conscious patient. It should only be considered in the obtunded patient, and if any
resistance occurs it should be withdrawn and an NPA considered.
BAG–VALVE–MASK
The bag–valve–mask (BVM) is a simple and efficient means of providing assisted or complete ven-
tilation of the lungs through an open or supported airway. With the use of a jaw thrust and NPA/
OPA as required, the mask can be applied over the face (see Figure 8.4) and positive pressure
applied by squeezing the bag until the chest is observed to rise. Unless experienced in its use, a
two-handed technique is recommended with a second operator tasked with squeezing the bag.
The pressure required to inflate the lungs is not great so assertive squeezing of the bag will only
serve to force gas into the oesophagus, inflate the stomach and cause vomiting. Failure of the
chest to rise with gentle squeezing of the bag
should instead be addressed by reassessing the
patency of the airway.
Ventilation should consist of a single-
handed squeeze of the bag at a rate of 10 to
12 squeezes per minute. The natural ten-
dency is to overventilate.
INTERMEDIATE AIRWAY
MANOEUVRES
The airway interventions that follow should
be accompanied by monitoring of exhaled
carbon dioxide (capnography). This demon-
strates the presence of alveolar gas and there-
fore a patent airway. Figure 8.4 Bag–valve–mask ventilation.
90
Airway management
THE LARYNGEAL MASK AIRWAY

Also known as a supraglottic airway device (SAD) and of varying designs, the laryngeal mask
airway (LMA) is quite literally a mask that is applied directly over the laryngeal inlet with an
attached tube that extends out of the mouth to allow active ventilation.
There are two common designs: with an inflatable cuff and with a solid gel cuff, both of
which conform to the shape of the laryngeal inlet. Insertion in both types is similar and simple,
that is the mouth is opened and the lubricated device passed backwards over the tongue base
into the oropharynx. Once it is in position and will advance no further, the cuff is inflated (if
applicable).
The laryngeal mask has evolved since it was first designed and second-generation devices
incorporate moderate degrees of protection from aspiration of stomach contents, the facility
for easy and rapid insertion (17), and the ability to generate relatively high airway pressures
without bypassing the cuff and causing inflation of the oesophagus and stomach (18). As such,
these newer devices are now widely considered to be first-line airways in many patients includ-
ing those in cardiac arrest and in unconsciousness. Early insertion in an unconscious patient
requiring assisted ventilation has demonstrated reduced incidence of regurgitation (19).
ADVANCED AIRWAY MANOEUVRES

ENDOTRACHEAL INTUBATION
Endotracheal intubation is regarded as the definitive or ‘gold standard’ airway for the following
reasons:
• There is an uninterrupted connection from the ventilator source to the trachea.

• An inflatable cuff effectively seals the trachea from the oropharynx.
• The presence of the cuff renders further contamination of the airway unlikely and allows
positive pressure ventilation with no chance of gastric insufflation.
• Exhaled gas can be sampled and analysed.
However, prolonged attempts at intubation coupled with a high chance of misplacing an

endotracheal tube, the opportunity to damage teeth with risks of aspiration, and the possibil-
ity of causing vomiting or laryngospasm in the semi-conscious patient all are associated with
significant potential for morbidity or death.
PRACTICE POINT
There are two broad circumstances in which endotracheal intubation may be possible:
▪▪ In a patient who is deeply unconscious or in cardiac arrest

▪▪ In a patient who has been sedated and paralysed (pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia)
Therefore, intubation should not be undertaken lightly. The essential requirements are
given in Box 8.7 and the risks and benefits in Table 8.1.
With appropriate training and in the right pre-hospital operational environment, endotra-
cheal intubation can be an effective, safe and reliable way of offering early and definitive airway
management to trauma patients (20). Without investment in equipment, training and gover-
nance, patients can suffer worse outcomes than with simple airway manoeuvres alone (21).
A strong and effective clinical governance system is essential for any service which provides
91
Airway management
pre-hospital anaesthesia. Standards of care

BOX 8.7: Minimum Requirements
must be effectively the same as those provided
for Tracheal Intubation
in the resuscitation room and the system must
be able to identify and manage cases where The minimum equipment required for intuba-
analysis reveals unnecessary and potentially tion consists of
harmful interventions. ▪▪ Two personnel (one intubator, one
assistant)
PRE-HOSPITAL EMERGENCY ▪▪ Powered suction
ANAESTHESIA ▪▪ Laryngoscope with illuminated blade
(with spares)
The most advanced airway intervention is to ▪▪ Selection of endotracheal tubes
administer potent and potentially fatal anaes- ▪▪ 10 mL syringe to inflate cuff
thetic drugs to a conscious patient and com- ▪▪ Stethoscope
mit the attending team to securing a definitive ▪▪ Oxygen
airway and taking complete control of the ven- ▪▪ Tube holder or tie to secure tube
tilation and oxygenation of that patient (Table ▪▪ Bougie
8.2). This decision and process is clearly a crit- ▪▪ The facility to monitor exhaled carbon
ical sequence of steps any of which may cause dioxide (capnography)
the patient harm if performed incorrectly.
CRICOID PRESSURE VERSUS BURP

There are two actions that the airway assistant may be asked to perform during attempts at
endotracheal intubation that are frequently confused.
As shown in Figure 8.5, there are three surface landmarks that can be felt at the front of the
neck:
• The thyroid cartilage (Adam’s apple)

• The cricoid cartilage – the thin ring of cartilage below the thyroid cartilage
• The cricothyroid membrane – the small depression between the two aforementioned
cartilages
Cricoid pressure is designed to occlude the oesophagus through firm pressure applied rear-
wards on the cricoid cartilage which encircles the trachea. This pressure is transmitted through
Table 8.1 Risks and benefits of intubation
Benefit Risk
• Prevention of further aspiration of vomit or • Aspiration during intubation attempts
blood once tube placed • Failure to correctly site tube (into
• Ability to effectively ventilate with positive oesophagus or bronchus)
pressures/PEEP • Hypoxia during intubation attempts
• Ability to measure exhaled carbon dioxide • Hypotension due to anaesthetic drugs
• Ability to accurately control ventilation to administered to a shocked patient
normalise gas exchange • Progression of an undiagnosed
• Ability to provide continuous ventilation pneumothorax
during patient transfers • Adverse reaction to anaesthetic drugs
• Freeing up attending staff to perform other (e.g. anaphylaxis)
tasks
92
Airway management
Table 8.2 Rapid pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia

Decision Indication Airway obstruction
Anticipated airway problem during transport
Risk of aspiration
Oxygenation/ventilation failure
Reduced consciousness
Severe shock/injury
Major burns
Planned surgical intervention
Location Out of adverse weather (wind, rain, cold, direct sun)
Away from onlookers
Safe (from traffic, violence, flowing water, hazards)
360 degree access to patient
Well lit, adequate space
Attending team Competent and trained
At least one pre-hospital doctor
At least one assistant trained in RSI (rapid sequence
induction of anaesthesia)
Working to agreed standard operating procedure
Equipment Airway equipment as listed in standard operating procedure
Monitoring (ECG, oximetry, blood pressure, capnography)
Powered suction
Procedure Preparation Pre-oxygenation
Two free-running points of vascular access (iv/io)
Equipment checked and tested
Drugs drawn up, checked and doses agreed
Roles of team agreed and confirmed
Suitable pre-induction checklist performed
Successful attempt Drugs administered
Ongoing oxygenation
Cricoid pressure if required
Intubation
Confirmation of tube position
Tube secured
Failed attempt 30-second drills
Failed intubation algorithm
Surgical airway
Subsequent Safety Ensuring tube secured
care Taping eyes to prevent corneal drying/damage
Ensuring pressure points protected
Maintenance of core temperature
Splinting of limbs and dressing of open wounds
Maintenance Provision of anaesthesia/sedation
Mechanical ventilation
Monitoring Ongoing monitoring with ECG, BP, SpO2 and ETCO2
Assessment for depth of sedation
Close observation for adverse events
93
Airway management
the cartilage ring and compresses the

oesophagus lying behind it. The suggestion
is that this will reduce passive regurgitation
of stomach contents into the oropharynx.
The evidence for this being effective is very
limited (22) and when performed correctly
it may make laryngoscopy and intubation
more difficult (23). There is worldwide varia-
tion in the use of cricoid pressure with little
if any difference in aspiration rates (24). The
use of cricoid pressure remains common
practice in some areas and may still be asked
for but is no longer routinely recommended.
If, however, the application of cricoid pres-
sure is impeding laryngoscopy, the pressure
should be released (25).
Figure 8.5 Anatomical landmarks on the front of During laryngoscopy, the blade of the
the neck.
laryngoscope may force the larynx anteri-
orly (forwards), caudally (downwards) and leftwards. This may make direct vision of the larynx
difficult. The assistant may be asked for a BURP manoeuvre which counters this forward–
downward–leftward displacement by placing the fingers on the thyroid cartilage and applying
backward–upward–rightward pressure (BURP). This can improve the view and make intubation
substantially easier (26).
Cricoid pressure and BURP are applied in different places, for different reasons and have
different effects on intubation and it is important to differentiate between them.
DIFFICULT OR FAILED AIRWAY

All pre-hospital airway management should be approached as potentially difficult. When com-
pared with in-hospital intubation, trauma patients in the pre-hospital environment present as
a very challenging group – unstarved, unprepared, often shocked with some degree of respira-
tory failure, and without the benefit of pre-anaesthetic investigations, a dedicated well lit and
warm area with a tilting trolley at optimum height and the ability to perform a full chin-lift/
head tilt.
As a result, a robust protocol to minimise risk and optimise the conditions that exist is
required. The first look at laryngoscopy requires strong muscle relaxation, a laryngoscope blade
which offers the best opportunity to visualise the larynx (often a size 4 Macintosh blade is
used), routine use of a bougie and support from an assistant skilled both in pre-hospital emer-
gency anaesthesia and in working in this environment.
If, after 30 seconds, tube placement has not been successful the assistant should be empow-
ered to stop further attempts to allow re-oxygenation to occur.
A second look with any further optimisation possible follows and if unsuccessful within
30 seconds, the protocol in Table 8.3 should be followed. Multiple unsuccessful attempts simply
increase the risk of airway damage, swelling, aspiration and hypoxia, all of which worsen an
already serious situation.
Following failure to intubate, if it is not possible to ventilate with airway adjuncts and a two-
person bag–valve–mask technique, then an immediate move to plan B must occur. A supraglot-
tic airway should be placed. If this works well, it may be satisfactory to leave the supraglottic
94
Summary
Table 8.3 Timings for emergency anaesthesia

0 sec Induction of anaesthesia
45 sec First attempt at laryngoscopy If tube placement successful, end of pathway
If unsuccessful within 30 seconds continue
1 m 15 sec Re-oxygenate for 30 seconds Reposition self, reposition patient as able, suction
1 m 45 sec Second attempt Consider reducing cricoid in favour of BURP
2 m 15 sec Re-oxygenate for 30 seconds Change operator
2 m 45 sec Final attempt
3 m 15 sec Re-oxygenate for 30 seconds Prepare failed airway equipment
3 m 45 sec Insert supraglottic airway Remove cricoid pressure if required
airway in situ. If it is not possible to ventilate or ventilation is inadequate with the supraglottic
airway, then a rapid decision must be made to perform a surgical airway. If BVM ventilation is
possible but no further changes can be made to improve the chances of successful intubation,
then the options are to place a supraglottic airway or to consider a surgical airway if the supra-
glottic airway is not functioning well.
Rarely, consideration should be given to allowing a patient to wake and spontaneously
breathe during transfer. Cautious sedation with midazolam may be required to maintain con-
trol of the situation.
CRICOTHYROIDOTOMY
Pre-hospital cricothyroidotomy is performed for two reasons:
• To secure an airway in an emergency when other airway manoeuvres are impossible

(for example a driver trapped in a vehicle with reduced consciousness, torrential facial
bleeding and impending airway compromise)
• To secure an airway when other airway manoeuvres have failed (for example following
an airway burn with glottic oedema where intubation is impossible and a laryngeal mask
device will not create an effective seal)
The method of providing a cricothyroidotomy varies according to skill, equipment and cir-
cumstance. The process must be exhaustively practised if it is to be successful when used for real.
Needle cricothyroidotomy involves placing a large bore needle through the cricothyroid
membrane and delivering relatively small volumes of 100% oxygen. It is impossible to ade-
quately ventilate a patient by this method, but the delivery of oxygen can be life saving until a
definitive airway is established.
Surgical cricothyroidotomy creates an incision through the cricothyroid membrane to
allow passage of a cuffed endotracheal or tracheostomy tube through which the airway can be
secured and properly ventilated.
SUMMARY
Management of the airway in trauma often generates considerable anxiety amongst healthcare
providers of all levels of experience. It is however amenable to a methodical and simple assess-
ment which should direct the provider towards the appropriate treatment. If that treatment is
beyond the scope of practice of the provider, simple manoeuvres performed with confidence can
provide the patient with life-saving oxygen until such time as definitive treatment is available.
95
Airway management
REFERENCES
1. Nolan, Jerry P., ed. 2010 European Resuscitation Council Guidelines. Elsevier, 2010.
2. American College of Surgeons, Committee on Trauma. ATLS, Advanced trauma life sup-
port for doctors: Student course manual. American College of Surgeons, 2012.
3. First aid manual, 9th edition. St John Ambulance, St. Andrew’s Ambulance Association,
British Red Cross Dorling Kindersley.
4. National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and Death (NCEPOD). Trauma:
Who cares: http://www.ncepod.org.uk/2007report2/Downloads/SIP_report.pdf.
5. JRCALC Airway Working Group. A critical reassessment of ambulance service airway
management in prehospital care. Recommendation for Future Airway Management Pre
Hospital. Nottingham: JRCALC, 2008.
6. Lockey DJ, Healey BA, Weaver AE, Chalk G, Davies GE. Is there a requirement
for advanced airway management for trauma patients in the pre-hospital phase of
care? Scandinavian Journal of Trauma, Resuscitation and Emergency Medicine 2014;22
(suppl. 1): P8.
7. Kwan I, Bunn F, Roberts IG. Spinal immobilisation for trauma patients. Cochrane
Database of Systematic Reviews 2001; Issue 2: art. no. CD002803.
8. Engström M, Schött U, Romner B, Reinstrup P. Acidosis impairs the coagulation:
A thromboelastic study. Journal of Trauma-Injury, Infection & Critical Care
2006;61(3):624–628.
9. Bruce DA, Langfitt TW, Miller JD, Schutz H, Vapalahti MP, Stanek A, Goldberg HI.
Regional cerebral blood flow, intracranial pressure, and brain metabolism in comatose
patients. Journal of Neurosurgery 1973;38:131–144.
10. Werner C, Engelhard K. Pathophysiology of traumatic brain injury. British Journal of
Anaesthesia 2007;99(1):4–9.
11. Oscier C, Emerson B, Handy JM. New perspectives on airway management in acutely
burned patients. Anaesthesia 2014;69:105–110.
12. Medd WE, French EB, Wyllie VM. Cyanosis as a guide to arterial oxygen desaturation.
Thorax 1959;14(3):247–250.
13. Rathlev NK, Medzon R, Bracken ME. Evaluation and management of neck trauma.
Emergency Medicine Clinics of North America 2007;25(3):679–694.
14. Muzzi DA, Losasso TJ, Cucchiara RF. Complication from a nasopharyngeal airway in a
patient with a basilar skull fracture. Anaesthesiology 1991;74:366–368.
15. Schade K, Borzotta A, Michaels A. Intracranial malposition of nasopharyngeal airway.
Journal of Trauma 2000;49(5):967–968.
16. Roberts K, Whalley H, Bleetman A. The nasopharyngeal airway: Dispelling myths and
establishing the facts. Emergency Medicine Journal 2005;22(6):394–396.
17. Castle N, Owen R, Hann M, Naidoo R, Reeves D. Assessment of the speed and ease
of insertion of three supraglottic airway devices by paramedics: A manikin study.
Emergency Medicine Journal 2010;27(11):860–863.
18. Uppal V, Fletcher G, Kinsella J. Comparison of the i-gel with the cuffed tracheal
tube during pressure-controlled ventilation. British Journal of Anaesthesia 2009;102(2):
264–268.
19. Stone BJ, Chantler PJ, Baskett PJF. The incidence of regurgitation during cardiopul-
monary resuscitation: A comparison between the bag valve mask and laryngeal mask
airway. Resuscitation 1998;38(1):3–6.
96
References
20. McQueen C, Crombie N, Hulme J, Cormack S, Hussain N, Ludwig F, Wheaton S.

Prehospital anaesthesia performed by physician/critical care paramedic teams in a major
trauma network in the UK: A 12 month review of practice. Emergency Medicine Journal
2015;32(1):65–69.
21. Davis DP, Hoyt DB, Ochs M, Fortlage D, Holbrook T, Marshall LK, Rosen P. The effect
of paramedic rapid sequence intubation on outcome in patients with severe traumatic
brain injury. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2003;54(3):444–453.
22. Sellick BA. Cricoid pressure to control regurgitation of stomach contents during induc-
tion of anaesthesia. The Lancet 1961;278(7199):404–406.
23. Haslam N, Parker L, Duggan JE., Effect of cricoid pressure on the view at laryngoscopy.
Anaesthesia 2005;60:41–47.
24. Benhamou D. Cricoid pressure is unnecessary in obstetric general anaesthesia.
International Journal of Obstetric Anesthesia 1995;4(1):30–31.
25. Ellis DY, Harris T, Zideman D. Cricoid pressure in emergency department rapid
sequence tracheal intubations: A risk-benefit analysis. Annals of Emergency Medicine
2007;50(6):653–665.
26. Knill RL. Difficult laryngoscopy made easy with a “BURP”. Canadian Journal of
Anaesthesia 1993;40(3):279–282.
97
Chest injuries
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be able to recognise the clinical features of critical chest injuries

▪▪ Understand the significance of critical decision making in managing chest trauma
▪▪ Understand the indications for life-saving interventions in critical chest injuries
INTRODUCTION
Thoracic injuries are a cause of significant mor-
BOX 9.1: Simple Interventions
bidity and mortality with blunt chest trauma
in Chest Trauma
causing 25% of all trauma deaths and being a
major contributor in another 50% of deaths (1). ▪▪ Oxygen
Although many deaths occur at time of injury ▪▪ One-way valve dressing
(for example massive aortic disruption), some ▪▪ Needle thoracocentesis
can be avoided through effective use of sim- ▪▪ Analgesia
ple interventions (Box 9.1). Only 10% of these ▪▪ Critical decision-making regarding
patients require formal surgery (2), although evacuation location and urgency
those that do are often critically unstable.
Further deaths can be avoided by the use of a range of more complex interventions which
will be discussed later. The key to the management of these challenging injuries is effective
prompt and correct decision-making, especially with regard to interventions that should be
performed on scene and when, how and where to evacuate for further intervention.
POSSIBLE THORACIC INJURIES
IMMEDIATELY LIFE-THREATENING CHEST INJURIES

Immediately life-threatening injuries can be remembered using the mnemonic ATOM FC (Box 9.2).
There are a number of other injuries, however, which may progress to become life threatening,
98
Mechanisms of injury
but which in general do so less rapidly

BOX 9.2: Immediately Life-Threatening
than those in ATOM FC. There is, inevita-
Injuries
bly, some overlap between the two groups.
These potentially life-threatening injuries ▪▪ A Airway obstruction
include aortic (and other great vessel) ▪▪ T Tension pneumothorax
injury, tracheal injury, oesophageal injury, ▪▪ O Open pneumothorax
myocardial contusion, p ulmonary contu- ▪▪ M Massive haemothorax/mediastinal
sion and diaphragmatic injury. traversing injury
▪▪ F Flail chest
▪▪ C Cardiac tamponade
MECHANISMS OF INJURY
BLUNT TRAUMA
Although road traffic collisions are the commonest cause of blunt trauma, similar injuries
may result from other causes such as falls from height or assault with a blunt object. The
legal requirement to wear a seatbelt and the introduction of airbags have resulted in a major
reduction in the incidence of severe chest injury with those driving commercial vehicles
who are not compelled to wear a seat belt remaining at greatest risk. Blunt trauma is usually
associated with external evidence of injury such as bruising, abrasions, fracture crepitus or
subcutaneous emphysema. In severe blunt trauma the most important injuries to consider
are tension pneumothorax, flail chest, pulmonary contusion and massive haemothorax.
Cardiac tamponade has a 99% mortality rate in blunt trauma patients who are in arrest and
98% in those who have not yet suffered a cardio-respiratory arrest (3). Myocardial contusion
occurs but is rarely severe and hypotension must always be assumed to be from blood loss (4).
Tracheal and oesophageal injury may produce subcutaneous emphysema (as may a pneumo-
thorax with a significant leak).
PENETRATING TRAUMA
Internal haemorrhage is more likely to be uncontrolled in penetrating than in blunt trauma.
Flail chest, myocardial contusion and pulmonary contusion do not occur to the same extent in
penetrating trauma.
Penetrating trauma can be divided into low-energy trauma such as knife wounds and
impalement (Figure 9.1) and high-energy
trauma from gunshot wounds. Knife crime
is the most common isolated penetrating
mechanism in the UK. Impalement by fenc-
ing or other objects occasionally occurs at
road traffic collisions, falls or industrial acci-
dents where it may co-exist with blunt injury.
Although gun crime is on the rise, it is much
less common than in the United States.
An appreciation of the anatomy of the chest
cavity is pertinent to the expected injuries in
penetrating trauma. The site and size of the
external wound bears no relationship to the
degree of internal damage. Wounds around Figure 9.1 Low-energy penetrating trauma.
99
Chest injuries
Figure 9.2 The cardiac box.
the neck or upper part of the chest risk involving both areas, whilst wounds lower than the nip-
ples risk involving the abdominal cavity. Likewise wounds in the abdominal cavity risk involving
the chest. Any wounds in the ‘cardiac box’ (see Figure 9.2) risk involving the heart.
PRACTICE POINT
Penetrating ‘thoracic’ trauma can involve any structures in the chest, neck and abdomen.
BLAST TRAUMA
Blast injuries are considered in detail in Chapter 21. It is essential to remember that both blunt
and penetrating injuries may be present in blast victims. Blunt injury occurs if the patient is
thrown against a hard object or from a height by the explosion, or is hit by a large object.
Penetrating injury occurs due to fragments energised by the explosion.
PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF THORACIC TRAUMA

The end stage of severe thoracic trauma will be cardio-respiratory arrest if blood oxygenation
fails in the normotensive patient, or if the primary problem is obstruction or hypovolaemia. The
different pathophysiologies are discussed next.
HYPOXAEMIA
Hypoxaemia leading to tissue hypoxia is the cardinal feature of most severe thoracic trauma. It
is caused by either damage to the chest wall or by ‘ventilation–perfusion mismatch’.
CHEST WALL
Loss of mechanical function of the chest wall (muscles, ribs, diaphragm, parietal pleura) causes
hypoxaemia in flail chest and open pneumothorax. The chest wall may also be damaged in soft
tissue injury, simple pneumothorax and isolated rib fracture, but these injuries will not usually
cause hypoxaemia. However, minor chest wall injuries in the elderly may prove fatal due to
respiratory function compromise.
100
Assessment
VENTILATION–PERFUSION MISMATCH
Ventilation–perfusion mismatch is a cause of hypoxaemia in pulmonary contusion and ten-
sion pneumothorax. In pulmonary contusion, de-oxygenated blood passes through injured
alveoli that themselves are full of blood and oedema instead of air. This prevents oxygen-
ation of this blood, which even when combined with the oxygenated blood that has passed
through un-injured lung will profoundly lower the average oxygenation level of the blood
returning to the left-hand side of the heart. Blood passing through the lung on the side of
tension pneumothorax is poorly oxygenated leading to a ventilation–perfusion mismatch.
This hypoxaemia worsens and may turn into a vicious circle when the respiratory cen-
tre in the brainstem, intercostal muscles, diaphragm and myocardium themselves become
hypoxic (5).
HYPOTENSION BOX 9.3: Causes of Hypotension

in Thoracic Trauma
Hypotension will cause tissue hypoxia Hypovolaemia caused by:
due to vasoconstriction. The commonest
▪▪ Massive haemothorax (blunt or penetrating)
causes of hypotension in severe thoracic
▪▪ Aortic (and other great vessel) injury
trauma are listed in Box 9.3.
▪▪ Penetrating cardiac injury (without
tamponade)
▪▪ Cardiac tamponade (constrictive/obstructive
ASSESSMENT shock)
▪▪ Myocardial contusion (myocardial/‘pump’
INITIAL ASSESSMENT failure)
▪▪ Tension pneumothorax (more likely to occur
In thoracic trauma as in other types
earlier in the artificially ventilated patient)
of injury, time is the patient’s great-
est enemy. Unnecessary delay increases
time to definitive care and risks hypo-
thermia along with coagulopathy. In BOX 9.4: Initial Assessment of the Chest
trapped patients it may be necessary to Questions to Ask in Suspected Thoracic Trauma
do a brief assessment before extrication,
▪▪ Is there an open pneumothorax that needs
then a more detailed assessment in the
dressing?
ambulance. In the case of chest trauma,
▪▪ Is there a tension pneumothorax to
examination should follow the sequence
decompress?
outlined in Box 9.4 look, feel, percuss,
▪▪ Is there a hypoxaemic injury that requires
ausculate.
intervention?
▪▪ Is there penetrating trauma?
LOOK ▪▪ What is the quickest way to access this care?
– Pre-hospital team
A consistently raised or increasing respi-
– Emergency department (local)
ratory rate (tachypnoea) is the hallmark
– Major trauma/cardiothoracic centre
of severe chest injury causing hypox-
▪▪ Is RSI required?
aemia. However, many patients have a
▪▪ Is finger thoracostomy required?
high respiratory rate by virtue of anxi-
▪▪ Is blood required?
ety, fear and pain, which may settle with
▪▪ Is thoracotomy required?
reassurance.
101
Chest injuries
New Ideas
Chest injury screening test in blunt trauma
In blunt trauma, a brief assessment of respiratory status combined with the presence or absence
of pleuritic pain as a ‘chest injury screening tool’ is all that is required initially. If this is normal, more
detailed assessment can wait. It is especially useful if access to the chest is restricted or there is a
noisy environment.
The chest injury screening test is normal in blunt trauma if the patient has
▪▪ Breathing that ‘feels’ normal

▪▪ No respiratory distress
▪▪ Normal respiratory rate
▪▪ No pleuritic pain (on cough and deep breath)
▪▪ Normal SpO2 on air
Note: A patient with an isolated hypotensive pathophysiology from a very low velocity penetrating
trauma (such as knife stabbing) may pass this screening test. It does not rule out significant penetrat-
ing trauma.
Severe respiratory distress is indicated by
• Inability to count to 10 or speak a sentence in one breath

• A respiratory rate consistently >30–40 per minute
• Cyanosis
• SpO2 <92% on air
A low respiratory rate may be due to head injury, drugs (particularly opiates) or hypothermia.
A consistently raised and increasing respiratory rate is the hallmark of severe chest injury caus-
ing hypoxaemia.
PRACTICE POINT
Assessment of respiratory distress:
▪▪ Count the respiratory rate as the first observation.

▪▪ Reassure the tachypnoeic patient, then reassess respiratory rate.
▪▪ Consistent tachypnoea is an early feature of significant chest injury.
▪▪ Consider anxiety, pain and fear as causes of intermittent tachypnoea.
General observation will also reveal whether the skin is clammy, cold and sweaty. In the
absence of head injury or shock, confusion and agitation indicate probable cerebral hypoxia
secondary to thoracic trauma.
A brief examination of the neck is essential before a collar is applied. The things to examine
for can be remembered by the mnemonic TWELVE (Table 9.1).
Evidence of chest injury includes wounds, bleeding, abrasions and bruising. The patient has
a back and sides (including the axillae), all of which must be examined. It may be sufficient to
run hands under the patient’s back to feel for wounds, but especially in penetrating trauma
102
Assessment
Table 9.1 A system for examining the neck

Feature Significance
Tracheal deviation This is a late sign of tension pneumothorax.
Wounds
Surgical Emphysema Suggests disruption to airway or chest, likely
pneumothorax.
Larynx Crepitus may indicate fracture and associated airway
compromise.
Veins Suggests raised intrathoracic pressure, although unreliable
in hypovolaemic.
Exposure Ensure collars are loosened to allow proper examination.
a more formal examination of the back is

required (Figure 9.3).
The chest must be inspected for move-
ment and symmetry. Deliberate inspection
along the line of the chest (low tangential
inspection) is vital (6). Causes of immobility
and hypoventilation include pain, rib frac-
tures including flail segment, pneumotho-
rax, haemothorax and pulmonary contusion.
Both hypomobility and hyperinflation occur
in tension pneumothorax of which the com-
bination is pathognomonic.
Figure 9.3 This significant wound could easily be

FEEL missed if the back was not adequately assessed.
As mentioned earlier, a brief ‘hand sweep’ down the back of the patient may identify a source
of bleeding. Palpation may also identify crepitus and pain from rib fractures, sternal fractures
or surgical emphysema. Surgical emphysema infers pneumothorax in 75% of cases. and major
airway injury or oesophageal injury in the remaining 25% (7).
LISTEN
The chest should be carefully auscultated for reduced, absent or altered breath sounds. Axillary
auscultation is less likely to pick up transmitted sounds.
In a noisy environment looking and feeling are more useful than listening.
New Ideas
Portable ultrasound may have a role in the immediate pre-hospital environment in the diagnosis of pneu-
mothorax, haemothorax and cardiac injury by bringing an imaging modality forward from the resuscitation
room. This capability is operator dependent and relies on appropriate training and regular refreshing of skills.
103
Chest injuries
IMMEDIATELY LIFE-THREATENING INJURIES
TENSION PNEUMOTHORAX
Tension pneumothorax is rare (in the Vietnam War it was thought to have caused 0.3% of the
deaths in the pre-hospital environment) (8–10). However, it is also easily treatable and hence
one of the most important immediately life-threatening injuries. Tension pneumothorax occurs
when pleural damage allows more air into the pleural space during inspiration than escapes
during expiration. This leads to a build up of air in the pleural space with an increase in intra-
thoracic pressure. As a result there is further collapse of the lung and pushing of the diaphragm
down, ribs outwards and mediastinum across to the other hemithorax. Tension pneumothorax
occurs in both blunt and penetrating trauma.
If the glottic opening is closed, air trapped in the alveoli or airways may rupture the vis-
ceral pleura if the chest is subjected to blunt trauma. In the awake self-ventilating patient,
tension pneumothorax does not usually kill immediately and many will compensate for
some significant time. Final decompensation presents as worsening respiratory status with
respiratory arrest preceding cardiac arrest. Hypotension is late and results from decreased
venous return to the right side of the heart along with a hypoxic myocardium. In contrast,
ventilated patients declare themselves at the time of decompensation in as little as 5 minutes
from onset.
CLINICAL FEATURES
Table 9.2 lists the presenting features of tension pneumothorax.
MANAGEMENT
In the spontaneously ventilating patient, needle thoracocentesis is a useful temporising mea-
sure. In the ventilated patient, the definitive pre-hospital treatment for tension pneumotho-
rax is finger thoracostomy. This is usually done in the 4th intercostal space, and in the UK is
only performed by a medical practitioner or critical care paramedic. A chest seal may then be
applied. The most effective chest seal currently available is probably the Russell® chest seal.
Both the Asherman® and Bolin® are prone to
blockage by blood (11). Table 9.2 Features of tension pneumothorax
Finger thoracostomy avoids some of the • Respiratory distress
complications associated with drain insertion • Low oxygen saturation on air
and allows repeat intra-pleural finger sweeps • Ipsilateral hyperexpansion and reduced
to check that the patient is not re-tensioning. movement
This is particularly useful in the ventilated • Absent breath sounds
patient who drops their SpO2 or blood pres- • Tachycardia
sure whilst en route to hospital. • Hyporesonance
Reasons for failure of needle thoracocente- • Tracheal deviation (late – not present if
sis include a chest wall too thick for the needle, tension is bilateral)
blockage with blood or tissue, and kinking. In • High inflation pressures
one series chest walls were thicker than 3 cm • Distended neck veins if the patient is not
in 50% of patients but thicker than 4.5 cm in hypovolaemic
only 5% (12,13). Therefore, the needle should
104
Immediately life-threatening injuries
be longer than 4.5 cm. Needle thoracocentesis should initially be performed in the 2nd inter-
costal space mid-clavicular line, but if this is unsuccessful it should be repeated in the 4th or 5th
intercostal space mid-axillary line (the usual site for trauma chest tube placement). Following
this a chest tube will usually need to be placed whether or not a tension truly existed, although
this should normally wait until arrival in hospital. So whatever the outcome of needle thoraco-
centesis, the cannula should be left in place until the patient reaches hospital, as this will be a
visual reminder of the need to critically assess the chest to determine whether a chest tube is
necessary.
There may not be a rush of air on finger thoracostomy or needle thoracocentesis, however,
an immediate improvement in vital signs, especially SpO2 but also respiratory rate, heart rate
and less commonly blood pressure, confirms the diagnosis.
In the spontaneously breathing patient, decompression should be performed when the diag-
nosis is suspected and examination of the chest reveals supporting signs. Although the maxim
‘if in doubt decompress’ is valid, decompression should be a considered decision. It may be
made over a period of observation and re-observation. Care is essential as needle decompres-
sion is undoubtedly overused and frequently undertaken because of perceived decreased air
entry (often associated with lung contusion, which is not a pre-hospital diagnosis) not because
of the signs of tension.
In the ventilated patient, the decision to decompress should be made rapidly as they present
at the point of decompensation. If the SpO2 or blood pressure of the ventilated patient with
thoracic trauma suddenly drops and there is no other apparent and immediately correctable
cause, they should be assumed to have a tension pneumothorax. Finger thoracostomy (unilat-
eral if good lateralising signs of tension or bilateral if this is not the case) should be performed
immediately.
OPEN PNEUMOTHORAX
When a penetrating chest wall injury creates a direct communication between the thoracic
cavity and the external environment, an open pneumothorax exists (Figure 9.4). Smaller defects
(for example from stab wounds) usually seal off, although air may be seen bubbling around
the edge of the wound. Either way, these are
at risk of tensioning. Larger defects (most
commonly seen with shotgun wounds in
the civilian sector) cause a ‘communicat-
ing pneumothorax’. In these patients there
is immediate equilibration between the
atmospheric pressure and the intrapleural
pressure. If the defect is sufficiently large,
air preferentially flows through the hole in
the chest wall which may be called a sucking
chest wound. The loss of chest wall integrity
causes the lung to paradoxically collapse
(completely) on inspiration and expand
slightly on expiration – forcing air in and out
of the wound. This results in a significant
ventilation–perfusion mismatch and pro-
Figure 9.4 A large open pneumothorax to the
found hypoxaemia. apex of the right lung.
105
Chest injuries
CLINICAL FEATURES BOX 9.5: Clinical Features of an

The clinical features of an open pneumotho- Open Pneumothorax
rax are listed in Box 9.5. ▪▪ Chest pain
▪▪ Respiratory distress
MANAGEMENT ▪▪ Low SpO2
▪▪ Cyanosis
The definitive treatment of the respiratory dis- ▪▪ Confusion/agitation
tress associated with a large open pneumotho- ▪▪ Visible open wound
rax is mechanical ventilation (with chest drain ▪▪ Ipsilateral chest signs (hypomobility,
insertion and wound dressing). A temporising, hypoinflation, reduced breath sounds,
but potentially life-saving, treatment is the hyperresonance)
application of a one-way valve type dressing. ▪▪ Tachycardia
The one-way valve dressing should be a pro-
prietary dressing. There is no evidence to suggest
that the often described ‘dressing sealed on three sides’ acts as anything other than a simple dressing. If
the wound is larger than the chosen chest seal only part of it needs to be covered with this. The remain-
der of the wound can be dressed with a completely occlusive dressing. Likewise, if there is more than one
wound, only one per hemithorax needs a one-way valve dressing and the others can be sealed. If circum-
stances, skills and experience permit, the defect may be sealed with an occlusive dressing and the patient
carefully watched to ensure there is no deterioration due to development of a tension pneumothorax.
MASSIVE HAEMOTHORAX BOX 9.6: Clinical Features

Massive haemothorax is defined as >1500 mL of Massive Haemothorax
of blood in the hemithorax which represents ▪▪ Haemorrhagic shock (tachycardia and
about 30% of the average blood volume. Its hypotension)
incidence is higher in penetrating than blunt ▪▪ Ipsilateral chest signs
trauma (14). Most (small) haemothoraces are
– Hypomobility
the result of rib fractures, lung parenchymal
– Hypoinflation
injury and minor venous injuries. They tend to
– Reduced breath sounds
be self-limiting due to the compressive effect
– Dullness to percussion
of the haemothorax, the high local concentra-
tion of thromboplastin and low pulmonary ▪▪ Respiratory distress (may be mild)
artery pressure, which combine to produce
early clotting and haemostasis (Box 9.6).
Less commonly, there is an arterial injury or major vein injury, or there are multiple injuries to the
intercostal vessels, which may produce massive haemothorax. The incidence of haemopneumotho-
rax (and mortality) increases with multiple rib fractures and ranges from 6.7% with no rib fractures
to 81.4% with more than three rib fractures (7).
Although massive haemothorax is a ‘B’ injury and can cause hypoxaemia due to ventilation–
perfusion mismatch, the hypotensive component may manifest itself before there is significant
respiratory compromise.
MANAGEMENT
The definitive treatment for massive haemothorax is chest drain insertion, sometimes followed
by formal thoracotomy by a trauma or cardiothoracic surgeon. Pre-hospital interventions should
106
Immediately life-threatening injuries
expedite this. There are few if any indications for drainage of a massive haemothorax in the pre-
hospital environment. Massive haemothorax may occasionally be discovered when performing fin-
ger thoracostomy on a ventilated patient. The pre-hospital team should initiate blood transfusion as
soon as possible if massive haemothorax is ‘discovered’ in this way and blood products are available.
PRACTICE POINT
Draining a massive haemothorax is hazardous and should be avoided in the pre-hospital
environment.
FLAIL CHEST
Flail chest is exclusively a disease of blunt trauma. It occurs when adjacent ribs are fractured
in multiple places. This separates a segment, so that part of the chest wall moves in the oppo-
site direction (paradoxically) to the rest of the chest wall. This is the flail segment. Counter-
intuitively, large, especially symmetrical flail segments involving the sternum, can on occasion
be more difficult to detect than smaller flails.
The number of ribs that must be broken varies by differing definitions: some sources say at least
two adjacent ribs are broken in at least two places, some require three or more ribs in two or more
places (15). Mortality rises with an increasing number of rib fractures: 0.2% with no fractures, 4.7%
with three or more and 17% if a flail segment is present (7). Other work has shown mortality up
to 50% when severe flail chest is present (16). In another study the number of rib fractures beyond
which mortality was found to increase dramatically was four (from 2.5% to 19%) (17).
The associated pulmonary contusion with its ventilation–perfusion mismatch is primar-
ily responsible for the severe hypoxaemia
that occurs with flail chest, although the BOX 9.7: Clinical Associations
paradoxical movement also plays a part if with Flail Chest
the minute volume can not be maintained. Flail chest associations
The multiple rib fractures may result in
▪▪ Pneumothorax (±tension, especially if
significant blood loss causing haemo-
thorax (sometimes ‘massive’), whilst the ventilated)
▪▪ Pulmonary contusion
pleural injury can lead to tension pneu-
▪▪ Massive haemothorax
mothorax, especially after ventilation of
▪▪ Sternal fracture
severe flail chest. Flail chest may also go
▪▪ Myocardial contusion
hand in hand with sternal fracture and
▪▪ Respiratory failure
cardiac contusion (Box 9.7).
CLINICAL FEATURES
Flail chest will usually be diagnosed on the basis of respiratory distress, abnormal chest wall
movements and palpation of fracture crepitus and/or subcutaneous emphysema. There are
usually visual clues to the severe chest trauma (Figure 9.5), but this is not always the case and
flail chest can present with little in the way of external bruising or abrasions (Box 9.8).
MANAGEMENT
The definitive treatment of severe flail chest (and its associated pulmonary contusion) is posi-
tive pressure ventilation. All efforts should be directed to expediting this management.
107
Chest injuries
BOX 9.8: Clinical Features of Flail

Chest
▪▪ Chest pain
▪▪ Low SpO2
▪▪ Cyanosis
▪▪ Confusion/agitation
▪▪ Tachycardia
▪▪ Signs of flail (paradoxical movement,
asymmetrical movement)
▪▪ External signs of blunt chest injury
(bruising, swelling and seatbelt marks)
▪▪ Crepitus
▪▪ Subcutaneous emphysema
Figure 9.5 External signs of severe blunt trauma
(seatbelt marks).
Flail chest patients may develop co-existent tension pneumothorax(ces), whilst spon-
taneously breathing and they are at high risk of rapid tension pneumothorax development
when ventilated. If pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) is necessary for other rea-
sons, it should be performed, followed by finger thoracostomy if tension develops.
CARDIAC TAMPONADE
Any breach in the myocardium will allow blood into the pericardial space. When the filling of
the pericardial space is rapid, as little as 100 mL is needed within the fixed fibrous pericardium
to restrict cardiac filling and cause tamponade (18). If this continues, it leads fairly quickly to
either a low output state or cardiac arrest. Pericardial blood invariably clots very rapidly. The
vast majority of cardiac tamponades are caused by a penetrating injury inside the cardiac box.
However, it can also occur (albeit rarely) from lateral wounds, neck wounds and abdominal
wounds. Pericardial effusion is rare following blunt trauma but does occasionally occur.
CLINICAL FEATURES
The predominant features of cardiac tamponade are tachycardia and hypotension, but it is the
presence of a penetrating injury which must raise the possibility of the diagnosis. Distended
neck veins may occur, but will not be found in the hypovolaemic patient. The presence of muf-
fled heart sounds is exceptionally difficult to establish in the pre-hospital environment and no
attempt should be made to elicit pulsus paradoxus. Diagnosis of cardiac tamponade can be
effectively made on ultrasound scan if the capability is available.
MANAGEMENT
The definitive treatment for traumatic cardiac tamponade is thoracotomy, pericardial incision
and repair of the myocardial defect. Because the blood in the pericardial space is almost invari-
ably clotted, needle pericardiocentesis, although very occasionally providing brief respite, is
usually ineffective. For this reason any patient with a wound in the central thoracic area and
lateral wounds with associated hypotension should be triaged directly to a major trauma centre.
108
Potentially life-threatening injuries
The pre-hospital trauma team should consider thoracotomy for any patient who has arrested
within the previous 10 minutes or who is peri-arrest following a stabbing in the cardiac box (see
Appendix B for the management of traumatic cardiac arrest).
Ultrasound scanning (USS) may be used by those skilled in its use to confirm the pres-
ence of cardiac tamponade before proceeding to thoracotomy. Pre-hospital thoracotomy is less
controversial than it was, and a recent series of 71 pre-hospital thoracotomies by the London
Helicopter Emergency Medical Service documented 13 survivors (12 with good neurological out-
come) when this was undertaken within 10 minutes of arrest (8 of them within 5 minutes
of arrest). All of these survivors had cardiac tamponade (19,20). It is of interest that the first
successful ‘pre-hospital’ thoracotomy and cardiac repair was carried out on a kitchen table in
Montgomery, Alabama, in 1902.
MEDIASTINAL TRAVERSING INJURY

Mediastinal traversing injuries are high-mortality penetrating wounds, suggested initially by the
position of the wounds and confirmed by imaging following arrival in hospital (Figure 9.6). They
may have different component injuries including tension pneumothorax, open pneumothorax,
massive haemothorax and cardiac tamponade. They require urgent evacuation for surgery.
POTENTIALLY LIFE-THREATENING INJURIES

These injuries are usually not diagnosed until hospital, but the pre-hospital practitioner should
be aware of them.
AORTIC (AND OTHER GREAT VESSEL) INJURY

An aortic tear is immediately fatal in about 90% of cases. It is caused by rapid deceleration blunt
trauma when the mobile parts of the aorta continue moving leading to tearing at one of the
fixed points, usually the ligamentum arteriosum. Survival depends on the development of a
contained haematoma, hence the patient may not be shocked. If the scene indicates a sudden
deceleration mechanism, this must be communicated to the hospital so that they can seriously
consider this diagnosis. Any of the great vessels (aorta, vena cava, subclavian, carotids and
Figure 9.6 Mediastinal traversing wound (entrance wound left shoulder). The diagnosis was confirmed
on plain radiograph after arrival in hospital.
109
Chest injuries
hilar vessels) can be damaged in penetrating trauma leading to torrential blood loss. The only
chance of survival lies in rapid transport to definitive surgical care.
TRACHEOBRONCHIAL BOX 9.9: Features of Tracheobronchial

INJURY Injury
▪▪ Laryngeal fractures presenting with
Injury to the larynx, trachea and proximal
hoarseness and crepitus
bronchus causes extensive subcutaneous
▪▪ Tracheal injuries (often subtle)
emphysema in the neck, face and/or chest
▪▪ Cough
wall. Additional features of tracheobron-
▪▪ Airway obstruction
chial injury are shown in Box 9.9
▪▪ Pneumothorax which may tension
▪▪ Haemoptysis
MANAGEMENT
Definitive treatment of tracheobronchial injury is to secure the airway, usually in hospital.
A very high threshold should be maintained for attempting this pre-hospital and if the deci-
sion to proceed is made, the need for a surgical airway must be expected and planned for. If
intubation is successful, the tip of the tube must be below the injury and therefore may need
to be inserted further than normal.
OESOPHAGEAL INJURY
Oesophageal injury is difficult to diagnose, even in hospital and hence is sometimes known as
the ‘silent killer’. It will not be diagnosed in pre-hospital care but may be one of the causes of
extensive subcutaneous emphysema in the neck or chest.
MYOCARDIAL CONTUSION
Direct blunt trauma to the heart occurs usually as a result of compression against the seatbelt (or
steering wheel if unrestrained) during sudden deceleration forces. About 20% of these patients may
have a dysrhythmia such as sinus tachycardia, supraventricular tachycardia, ventricular extrasys-
tole, bundle branch block or complete heart block. It can also cause persistent shock despite fluid
resuscitation as a result of decreased cardiac contractility and compliance. The diagnosis should be
suspected when there are signs of a sternal fracture such as bruising and tenderness.
PULMONARY CONTUSION
Contusion (bruising) of the lung occurs frequently with blunt trauma and plays a major part in
the severe respiratory distress found with flail chest.
MANAGEMENT
The definitive treatment of severe pulmonary contusion leading to hypoxaemia is mechanical ven-
tilation, although this may only be required in severe cases or where there are associated injuries.
DIAPHRAGMATIC INJURY
It is difficult to diagnose diaphragmatic injury in the pre-hospital environment, but it must
be suspected with any penetrating injury in the lower thoracic or upper abdominal areas.
110
Minor injuries
Diaphragmatic injury also occurs with blunt trauma and may contribute to respiratory distress
due to the displacement of abdominal contents into the chest cavity.
PRACTICE POINT
In traumatic cardiac arrest:
The reversible causes are Therefore the treatment is

Hypoxia Intubation
Hypovolaemia Ventilation with 100% oxygen
Tension pneumothorax Bilateral finger thoracostomy
Tamponade Fluid/blood challenge
Thoracotomy
MINOR INJURIES
If the patient shows no signs of major chest injury, they may have any one or more of a num-
ber of minor problems. These include injury to the chest wall (soft tissue injury to intercostal
muscles or rib fractures), sternal fracture, clavicular fracture and simple pneumothorax. The
decision to treat these injuries will depend on the presence of other more time-critical injuries
and the need for urgent evacuation.
SIMPLE PNEUMOTHORAX
Simple pneumothorax is air in the pleural cavity that is neither under tension nor communicating
with the outside. It can be difficult to diagnose clinically but the (ipsilateral) features to look for are
poor expansion on the affected side, reduced breath sounds and hyperresonance. Simple pneumo-
thorax may also be diagnosed in the pre-hospital environment by USS. There is no need to treat
simple pneumothorax pre-hospital, however, its diagnosis is mainly of importance in monitoring
the patient for the development of a tension (particularly if the patient is to be ventilated).
MINOR CHEST WALL INJURY

Minor chest wall injury (without flail segment) requires no action, but these injuries can be
disproportionately painful and adequate analgesia should be given. Chest wall injuries present
with pain, localised tenderness and hypoventilation and may be particularly debilitating in the
elderly or those with chronic respiratory disease.
STERNAL FRACTURE
The main significance of this injury is its association with myocardial contusion. Any patient
suspected of sternal fracture must be transferred to hospital. Its features are sternal tenderness
with or without bruising and swelling. Occasionally a palpable step in the sternum may be felt
and the patient may complain of clicking on inspiration.
PRACTICE POINT
High flow oxygen must be given to all patients with significant thoracic trauma.
111
Chest injuries
GENERAL TREATMENT OF THORACIC TRAUMA
OXYGEN
High flow oxygen must be given to all patients with significant thoracic trauma. Care is theoreti-
cally needed in the patient with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), however, it must
be remembered that the majority of patients with significant thoracic trauma are suffering a severe
hypoxaemic process. Therefore if any COPD patient is tachypnoeic from significant thoracic trauma
high concentration oxygen should still be given. The concentration can always be titrated down-
wards if the patient’s respiratory rate starts to fall as a result of presumed hypercarbia.
INTRAVENOUS ACCESS AND FLUIDS/BLOOD

Unless blood products are available, standard pre-hospital guidelines for pre-hospital fluid
administration should be observed with 250 mL fluid bolus (crystalloid or blood if available)
given only if the radial pulse is absent (21). Intravenous access may be required before transport
to hospital for administration of analgesia, sedation or anaesthesia, or for fluid administration
if the patient is trapped.
PENETRATING OBJECTS
In general any penetrating object must be left in situ. It may be possible to gently pack around
the protruding part of a penetrating object, but this should not delay evacuation, must not
result in movement of the object inside the patient and should not inhibit movement of the
object, for example of a knife to the precordium moving with each heartbeat.
ANALGESIA
Reassurance plays an important part in analgesia. It also decreases any anxiety-driven hyper-
ventilation and therefore decreases overall oxygen demand. Local anaesthesia is the standard
approach to thoracostomy but does not take away the pain associated with pleural penetration.
For this reason judicious use of analgesia in addition to the local anaesthetic can make this
slightly less unpleasant for the patient.
PRACTICE POINT
Entonox is absolutely contraindicated due to the risk of increasing the size of a pneumothorax.
TRANSPORT
The importance of critical decision making as an ‘intervention’ in itself cannot be overstated.
For example, this may be the decision to rapidly transfer (with no practical procedures per-
formed) a patient with an anterior stab wound to a major trauma centre. On occasion, critical
decisions must also be made with respect to the need to request rendezvous with a pre-hospital
trauma team.
112
References
A hypoxaemic patient will have better respiratory function if they are sitting at 45 degrees
than if lying supine. Patients with penetrating trauma may be transported semi-recumbent
unless they are hypotensive in which case lying supine is likely to be preferable. A critical
decision is required as to whether the B (breathing) or C (circulating) problem is the greatest
risk to the patient and whether there are any procedures that can temporarily improve one or
both of these problems.
SUMMARY
The management of thoracic trauma is straightforward as long as the basic principles are fol-
lowed and the underlying pathological processes are understood. Careful assessment will iden-
tify the immediately life-threatening problems. A limited number of interventions will very
significantly increase survival rates.
Critical decision-making with regard to evacuation and which interventions should be per-
formed before arrival in hospital are vital components of management.
REFERENCES
1. www.emedicine.medscape.com/article/428723-overview
2. Thoracic trauma, www.trauma.org.
3. Burlew CC, Moore EE, Moore FA, Coimbra R, McIntyre RC Jr, Davis JW, Sperry J, Biffl
WL. Western Trauma Association critical decisions in trauma: Resuscitative thoracot-
omy. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2012;73(6):1359–1363.
4. Kaye P, O’Sullivan I. Myocardial contusion: Emergency investigation and diagnosis.
5. Rutherford RB, Hurt HH, Brickman RD, Tubb JM. The pathophysiology of progressive
tension pneumothorax. Journal of Trauma 1968;8(2):212–227.
6. Leigh-Smith S, Davies G. Tension pneumothorax: Eyes may be more diagnostic than
ears. Emergency Medicine Journal 2003;20(5):495–496.
7. Liman ST, Kuzucu A, Tastepe AI, Ulasan GN, Topcu S. Chest injury due to blunt
trauma. European Journal of Cardio-Thoracic Surgery 2003;23(3):374–378.
8. Leigh-Smith S, Harris T. Tension pneumothorax – Time for a re-think? Emergency
Medicine Journal 2005;22:8–16.
9. McPherson JJ, Feigin DS, Bellamy RF. Prevalence of tension pneumothorax in fatally
wounded combat casualties. Journal of Trauma 2006;60:573–578.
10. Leigh-Smith S. Tension pneumothorax prevalence grossly exaggerated. Emergency
Medicine Journal 2007;24(12):865.
11. Comparative trial of chest seals for battlefield use. Defence Medical Services Report
2012 (unpublished).
12. Britten S, Palmer SH, Snow TM. Needle thoracocentesis in tension pneumothorax:
Insufficient cannula length and potential failure. Injury 1996;27(5):321–322.
13. Britten S, Palmer SH. Chest wall thickness may limit adequate drainage of tension
pneumothorax by needle thoracocentesis. Journal of Accident and Emergency Medicine
1996;13(6):426–427.
14. Tintinalli J, Ruiz E, Krome R. Emergency Medicine: A Comprehensive Study Guide, 4th ed.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1996.
113
Chest injuries
15. Keel M, Meier C. Chest injuries – What is new? Current Opinion in Critical Care
2007;13(6):674–679.
16. Velmahos GC, Vassiliu P, Chan LS, Murray JA, Berne TV, Demetriades D. Influence of
flail chest on outcome among patients with severe thoracic cage trauma. International
Surgery 2002;87(4):240–244.
17. Svennevig JL, Bugge-Asperheim B, Geiran OR. Prognostic factors in blunt chest trauma:
Analysis of 652 cases. Annales Chirurgiae et Gynaecologiae 1986;75:8–14.
18. Forauer AR, Dasika NL, Gemmete JJ, Theoharis C. Pericardial tamponade complicat-
ing central venous interventions. Journal of Vascular and Interventional Radiology 2003;
14(2 Pt 1):255–259.
19. Davies, Gareth E. Lockey, David J. Thirteen survivors of prehospital thoracotomy for
penetrating trauma: A prehospital physician-performed resuscitation procedure that can
yield good results. Journal of Trauma 2011;70(5):E75–E78.
20. Thoracotomy, www.trauma.org.
21. Revell M, Porter K, Greaves I. Fluid resuscitation in prehospital trauma care: A consen-
sus view. Emergency Medicine Journal 2002;19:494–498.
114
Shock
10
OBJECTIVES
After completing this chapter the reader will be able to
▪▪ Understand the pathophysiology of shock associated with trauma

▪▪ Recognise the clinical features of a shock state
▪▪ Apply a structured approach to the assessment and management of shock
INTRODUCTION
Physiological shock occurs when there is inadequate organ perfusion and cellular oxygen utili-
sation (1). In this chapter, the basic pathophysiology and applied therapeutics related to shock
following major injury are reviewed. Physiological shock occurs when an imbalance of oxygen
supply and demand results in a critical reduction in the oxygen available to the mitochon-
dria. Anaerobic metabolism, lactic acidosis and organ dysfunction follow. The pathophysiologic
events in the various shock syndromes are complex and interrelated. In simple terms, physio-
logical shock may result from a change in any combination of intravascular volume, myocardial
function, systemic vascular resistance or tissue blood flow. Although there is often an overlap,
the clinical classification of shock is usually based on the likely dominant trigger: hypovolaemic,
cardiogenic, obstructive or distributive (Figure 10.1). All of these may be present in any single
trauma patient (2,3).
PRACTICE POINT
Physiological shock occurs when an imbalance of oxygen supply and demand results in a critical
reduction in the oxygen available to the mitochondria.
115
Shock
Obstructive
Pulmonary embolus
Tension pneumothorax
Hypovolaemic
Cardiac
tamponade
Haemorrhage
Ischaemia
Dehydration
Valve dysfunction
Arrhythmia
Sepsis
Cardiogenic
Poisoning
Anaphylaxis e.g. Ca-channel blocker
Neurogenic shock
Distributive
Figure 10.1 The relationship between different types of shock. (Adapted from Shippey B, Anaesthesia
and Intensive Care Medicine 2010;11:509–511.)
TYPES OF SHOCK
HYPOVOLAEMIC SHOCK
Hypovolaemic shock remains the greatest single contributor to early trauma mortality and, in many
respects, reflects the final common pathway for all forms of shock. Cardiac output is dependent on
stroke volume and heart rate. Stroke volume, the amount of blood ejected by the left ventricle in
one contraction, is influenced by preload, myocardial contractility and afterload. Preload, or dia-
stolic filling, is affected by venous blood pressure, venous tone and the volume of circulating blood.
An absolute or relative reduction in the volume of circulating blood can thus reduce cardiac output.
Stroke volume is also dependent on myocardial contractility and afterload. Increased myo-
cardial contractility is a compensatory mechanism in hypovolaemia. However, the hypoxaemia
and acidaemia associated with hypoperfusion depress myocardial contractility. Similarly, left
ventricular afterload, the resistance opposing myocardial ejection of blood, is closely linked
to systemic vascular resistance. Increased systemic vascular resistance is also a compensatory
mechanism that may, if prolonged, result in both reduced tissue perfusion and increased after-
load. Cardiac output is also related to heart rate. Increased heart rate is a compensatory mecha-
nism in hypovolaemia but the potentially adverse consequence is that the increased heart rate
is at the expense of the duration of diastole and cardiac filling and, in due course, results in
116
The body’s response to shock
reduced preload. The control of haemorrhage, preservation of intravascular volume and man-
agement of the physiological consequences of relative and absolute hypovolaemia are therefore
cornerstones of shock management.
CARDIOGENIC SHOCK
Cardiogenic shock occurs when there is decreased cardiac output and evidence of inadequate
tissue perfusion in the presence of adequate intravascular volume. It is usually considered in
the context of acute myocardial infarction. However, myocardial dysfunction can occur in the
context of major trauma both primarily (as a result of direct myocardial injury) and as a second-
ary phenomenon (in association with, for example, the acute catecholamine excess state seen
in traumatic brain injury). Traumatic myocardial dysfunction, as a contributor to physiological
shock, is frequently unsuspected and therefore undiagnosed. When it results in, or contributes
to, hypoperfusion, the resultant acidaemia further reduces contractility.
PRACTICE POINT
Preservation of intravascular volume and management of the physiological consequences of
hypovolaemia are the cornerstones of shock management.
OBSTRUCTIVE SHOCK
Obstructive shock occurs when there is a physical obstruction to flow into, or out of, the heart. It is
characterised by either impairment of diastolic filling (decreased preload) or excessive afterload
or both. Impaired diastolic filling can result from direct venous obstruction, increased intratho-
racic pressure or decreased cardiac compliance. In the context of the trauma patient, increased
intrathoracic pressure can result from tension pneumothorax and pneumomediastinum. It can
also result from mechanical ventilation where there is air trapping, excessive inflation pressures
or excessive positive end-expiratory pressure. Cardiac tamponade is the commonest cause of
restricted cardiac filling (compliance). Excessive afterload is more often associated with pulmo-
nary embolism or aortic dissection. Obstructive shock, as with cardiogenic shock, may easily be
missed in the trauma patient if there is co-existing evidence of hypovolaemia.
DISTRIBUTIVE SHOCK
Hypovolaemic, cardiogenic and obstructive shock are all associated with vasoconstriction and
increased systemic vascular resistance. In contrast, distributive or vasodilatory shock is associated
with a failure of vasomotor tone and decreased systemic vascular resistance (4). The systemic
release of histamine in anaphylaxis, the loss of sympathetic tone related to disruption of the
autonomic pathways in spinal cord injury (neurogenic shock) and the systemic inflammatory
response syndrome in sepsis are the commonest precipitants of distributive shock but other
causes such as transfusion reactions and poisoning should be considered.
THE BODY’S RESPONSE TO SHOCK

Irrespective of the dominant trigger, the response to diminished tissue perfusion is activa-
tion of a wide range of homeostatic mechanisms and an initial phase of compensation.
117
Shock
This compensated phase can be subtle. As tissue perfusion worsens, however, there is a pro-
gressive failure of compensatory mechanisms and less subtle signs and symptoms of organ
dysfunction will appear. Progressive end-organ dysfunction leads to irreversible organ damage
and patient death. In undertaking initial and subsequent assessments of trauma patients, the
clinician must therefore be familiar with the different shock syndromes and their subtle symp-
toms and signs.
THE CLINICAL APPROACH TO THE TRAUMA PATIENT

Haemorrhage is the most common cause of shock in the trauma patient. As highlighted else-
where, active, rapid identification and control of critical external haemorrhage (<C>) is an
essential precursor to shock management. Haemorrhage control, or haemostatic resuscitation,
involves strategies to both minimise blood loss and optimise coagulation. Blood loss can be
controlled by a combination of
• Simple dressings, pressure and elevation

• Haemostatic dressings
• Tourniquets
• Reduction and splintage of fractures
• Careful handling
After arrival at hospital, either interventional radiology or damage control surgery (or both)
may be used to definitively stop bleeding.
Coagulopathy associated with trauma may occur for a number of reasons (3,5). Normal
coagulation is a balance between haemostatic and fibrinolytic processes. Factors that dis-
rupt this balance include the lethal triad of acidaemia, hypothermia and hypoperfusion related
to tissue injury as well as haemodilution. A systemic consumptive coagulopathy (a dissemi-
nated intravascular coagulation) may also occur due to inadequate clotting factors in the face of
ongoing consumption. More recently, an acute traumatic coagulopathy has also been char-
acterised (Figure 10.2).
Traumatic coagulopathy is an impairment of haemostasis and activation of fibrinolysis
occurring early after injury, and independent of the development of significant acidae-
mia, hypothermia or haemodilution (6). Some consider this to be an early, partially com-
pensated stage of disseminated intravascular coagulation. The key point is that there are
a number of reasons why significant coagulopathy may already be present in the early
stages of clinical assessment and why
exposure to factors that are known to BOX 10.1: Methods of Promoting
be associated with coagulopathy should Effective Haemostasis
be avoided. This is achieved by control- ▪▪ Minimisation of any further tissue
ling blood loss (as mentioned earlier) by
damage
minimising any further tissue damage, ▪▪ Prevention or correction of acidaemia
preventing or correcting acidaemia and ▪▪ Prevention or correction of hypothermia
hypothermia, and preventing dilutional ▪▪ Prevention of dilutional coagulopathy
coagulopathy. In addition factors that are ▪▪ Avoidance of any factor known to
known to exacerbate coagulopathy must
exacerbate coagulopathy
be avoided and physiological conditions ▪▪ Creation of physiological conditions that
that actively facilitate clotting created
actively facilitate clotting
(Box 10.1).
118
The clinical approach to the trauma patient
Pre-existing factors
Genetics
Medical illness
Medication (especially antithrombotics)
TRAUMA
Loss of haemostatic factors due to Activation of

INFLAMMATION HAEMORRHAGE FIBRINOLYSIS
Shock
Activation of Tissue
haemostasis hypoxia Resuscitation
and endothelium
Crystalloid RBC
Acidosis and colloid transfusion
Dilutional
coagulopathy
TRAUMATIC
COAGULOPATHY
Figure 10.2 Pathophysiology of coagulopathy following injury. (Adapted from Spahn DR et al., Critical
Care 2013;17(2):R76.)
PRACTICE POINT
Significant coagulopathy may already be present in the early stages of clinical assessment.
The control of haemorrhage and the optimisation of coagulation are key elements of the ini-
tial assessment and resuscitation phase. It is equally important to consider and identify any non-
haemorrhagic causes of shock (obstructive, cardiogenic or neurogenic) in order to reduce their
impact on coagulation and reduce metabolic compromise. Similarly, the full range of wound-
protective, lung-protective and neuro-protective strategies should be employed early.
Once primary assessment and immediate threats to life have been addressed, and efforts
are under way to minimise any further blood loss and reduce coagulopathy, it is essential
to actively look for the features that might reveal an ongoing shock state. These syndromes
comprise a combination of the causes of shock and the compensatory physiologic responses.
119
Shock
Table 10.1 Clinical presentation of adult with shock
Parameter Class I Class II Class III Class IV

Estimated blood loss (litres) <0.75 0.75 to 1.5 1.5 to 2.0 >2.0
Blood volume loss (%) <15 15 to 30 30 to 40 >40
Respiratory rate (per minute) 14 to 20 20 to 30 30 to 40 >35 or low
Heart rate (per minute) <100 100 to 120 120 to 140 >140 or low
Capillary refill time Normal Delayed Delayed Delayed
Diastolic blood pressure Normal Raised Low Very low
Systolic blood pressure Normal Normal Low Very low
Pulse pressure Normal Low Low Low
Mental state Slightly Mildly anxious Anxious Confused
anxious confused lethargic
Early recognition can be challenging but is best achieved by looking for any physical, physi-
ological or biochemical evidence of hypoperfusion.
In terms of clinical examination, the American College of Surgeons has historically sought
to provide guidance to clinicians through the concept of clinical correlates of haemorrhage or
the ‘grades of shock’ (Table 10.1).
Whilst over-reliance on this guidance has drawn some criticism, particularly with respect
to the degree to which heart rate and blood pressure changes occur with any given volume
of blood loss, it remains a reasonable guide to the progression of shock, bearing in mind
that young, fit patients are unlikely to gradually progress from one stage to the next, but
significantly more likely to maintain near normal parameters before rapidly decompensat-
ing (2,3). In addition, the classification should be supplemented with the knowledge that
patients may not fall easily into these categories as co-morbidity and compensatory mecha-
nisms may skew interpretation. For example, all shock states tend to be associated with a
tachycardia in their initial stages – with the exception of neurogenic shock (where there
is an inability to mount a tachycardia). Paradoxical or relative bradycardia has, however,
been described in hypoperfusing trauma patients and, more importantly, the absence of a
tachycardia in the presence of other signs of hypoperfusion has been associated with poor
outcomes (5). Hypotension itself may, of course, be relative and it is important to interpret
vital signs with the patient’s baseline in mind. This is particularly important in children,
pregnancy, athletes and elderly patients. Pallor, poor capillary refill and cool extremities
may represent early peripheral vasoconstriction in the absence of changes in vital signs. So
too may be subjectively weak peripheral pulses or an objective but subtle reduction in the
pulse pressure. Agitation, confusion or irritability may also be early indicators of relative
cerebral hypoperfusion. Sweating may indicate physiologic stress and appear before other
abnormalities. Mild tachypnoea may reflect early respiratory compensation for metabolic
acidosis. The key is that there should be a low threshold for considering whether these find-
ings might represent a compensated shock state.
Once the patient has arrived in hospital, serum lactate and blood gas analysis (systemic
metabolic acidosis and base deficit) can be used to identify hypoperfusion and monitor the
progress of the patient’s shock state with treatment. It may be that these metabolic changes are
evident before the clinician identifies subtle clinical signs (Table 10.2).
120
Clinical management
Table 10.2 Signs of shock

PRACTICE POINT
• Pallor
The clinician should use all available resources
• Poor capillary refill
to make a deliberate assessment of whether
• Sweating
the trauma patient has any evidence of a
• Cool extremities or clamminess
shock syndrome. If such a syndrome is obvi-
• Weak peripheral pulses
ous, then it should be considered to represent
• Reduction in the pulse pressure
a decompensated state requiring immediate
• Agitation, confusion or irritability
management.
• Sweating
• Tachypnoea
CLINICAL MANAGEMENT
Clinical management of shock needs to be integrated into the wider trauma patient manage-
ment decision framework. There is limited evidence regarding the best therapeutic approach
and judgement will always be required regarding resuscitation priorities and techniques (7–9).
In all cases, early access to the circulation is essential, ideally with peripheral intravenous
access. If this fails, intraosseous access is recommended (10).
If hypovolaemic shock is identified,
management can be considered in terms of
BOX 10.2: Compensated
whether the bleeding has been controlled
Hypovolaemic Shock
and whether the patient is compensating
or decompensating. All patients require The haemostatic resuscitation strategy
an approach that reduces further bleeding, ▪▪ Reduce further bleeding
optimises coagulation, causes minimal fur- ▪▪ Optimise coagulation
ther harm and improves physiology prior ▪▪ Cause minimal further harm
to damage control, or definitive surgical ▪▪ Improve physiology
repair and/or critical care. This combination ▪▪ Consider volume replacement
has been termed by some as a ‘haemostatic
resuscitation strategy’ (Box 10.2).
Blood transfusion is accepted as the basis of treatment for hypovolaemic shock due to
trauma. However, for less severe haemorrhage that has been controlled, the clinical literature
is limited. In the patient who has sustained haemorrhage (or injuries consistent with haem-
orrhage), a judgment needs to be made about whether the patient is ‘compensating’ and the
bleeding controlled. This judgement requires assimilation of the physiology in the context of
the injury pattern. A patient may have features of controlled haemorrhage and hypovolaemic
shock but be maintaining sufficient blood flow to remain alert and conscious. These patients
might possibly be safely managed with no intravenous volume expansion or may benefit from
moderate restoration of volume with crystalloid solutions.
Current recommendations are that the need for restoration of volume should be carefully
considered in the context of the wider fluid and electrolyte requirements of the patient (11).
If crystalloids are used for resuscitation at all, they should be warmed and contain sodium
in the range 130–154 mmol/L. Colloid solutions based on hydroxyethyl starch should never
be used (11). The use of further fluids should be based on the patient’s response to initial
121
Shock
resuscitation (after a 250–500 mL bolus) and their ongoing fluid requirements. Patients who
respond by normalisation of vital signs and other parameters may not require further volume
resuscitation, although they may remain at high risk of further bleeding and/or development
of coagulopathy.
The patient who is compensating but thought to be actively bleeding should only have crys-
talloids to replace fluid volume if blood components are not available (packed red cells and pre-
thawed fresh frozen plasma pre-hospital with platelets in hospital). Consideration should be
given to haemorrhage control and using a more restrictive volume replacement approach until
that control is achieved (see later). Patients who are transient responders or show minimal or no
response to initial treatment should be considered to have decompensated and have continued
uncontrolled bleeding.
DECOMPENSATED HYPOVOLAEMIC SHOCK

For the decompensating patient, there is an immediate risk of death and resuscitation should be
directed at controlling bleeding and preservation of life. There is a continuum between shock
and cardiac arrest. The risk of imminent cardiac arrest should be recognised and efforts should
be made to control any external bleeding; secure the airway; ventilate the patient; minimise the
risk of any obstructive causes of shock; gain access to the circulation via intraosseous, periph-
eral vascular or central venous routes; and prepare for transfusion. The emergency manage-
ment of the decompensated shock patient is to restore sufficient volume and oxygen-carrying
capacity to restore perfusion, with a view to surviving to damage control surgery. Traumatic
cardiac arrest protocols are an exemplar of this approach.
For those decompensated shocked patients who are not in cardiac arrest, the concept of
permissive hypotension has emerged as a bridge to damage control surgery or interventional
radiology. This is the situation where a shocked patient is permitted to remain shocked in order
to support haemostatic resuscitation and reduce the risk of further bleeding prior to definitive
haemorrhage control. This restrictive approach involves small boluses of 250 mL of blood or
crystalloid, depending on availability, to maintain an adequate level of perfusion whilst en
route to definitive control.
PRACTICE POINT
Red blood cells and fresh frozen plasma (1:1 ratio) are the fluids of choice for the resuscitation of
the shocked trauma patient in volumes sufficient to maintain a palpable radial pulse.
In pre-hospital settings, volume resuscitation should be titrated to maintain a palpable

radial pulse. If blood is available, it should be administered in a ratio of 1 unit of pre-thawed
fresh frozen plasma or reconstituted plasma to 1 unit of red blood cells. If blood is not avail-
able, crystalloid may have to be used. The antifibrinolytic agent tranexamic acid should also
be administered as early as possible (and within 3 hours of injury). Once in the hospital
setting, there should be no barrier to provision of blood products in a 1:1:1 ratio of red
cells, plasma and platelets (10,12,13). This initial fixed ratio protocol should be changed to a
protocol guided by laboratory coagulation results as soon as possible. All hospitals should
have specific major haemorrhage protocols and access to haematology and transfusion spe-
cialists to support this. Physiological parameters such as systolic blood pressure and mean
arterial pressure are more likely to be available in hospital, and a permissive hypotensive
122
Summary
strategy should be targeted to a systolic blood pressure of approximately 80 to 100 mmHg

or a mean arterial pressure of approximately 50 to 65 mmHg. It has been recognised that
whilst this permissive hypotensive strategy may buy time, patients may only tolerate it for
an hour or so. A hybrid approach has therefore been recommended whereby if definitive
control of bleeding has not been achieved within an hour of permissive hypotension, a less
restrictive approach is adopted and volume titrated to a systolic blood pressure of approxi-
mately 100 to 110 mmHg. In practice, the majority of patients will have reached hospital
within an hour of injury.
PRACTICE POINT
Tranexamic acid should be administered within 3 hours of injury.
OVERVIEW
The patient who is obviously in a decompensated shock state with evidence suggesting possible
hypovolaemic, cardiogenic and obstructive elements may represent a challenge for the trauma
team but the patient’s shock state is not concealed. The patient might require immediate trans-
fusion with a range of blood products balanced to replicate whole blood, surgical interven-
tion or a permissive hypotensive strategy as a bridge to surgery or interventional radiology.
Whatever the case, the shock syndrome and its component pathophysiology is revealed and
targets for resuscitation, no matter how challenging, can be developed.
In contrast, the patient with the same underlying injuries who is compensating represents
a much greater challenge. These are the patients who may ‘talk and die’. To prevent this, all
trauma patients require not only the immediate structured assessment as described in this
manual but also a meticulous search for the presence of the shock syndrome. Everyone who
is, or might be, bleeding needs to have the possible sources identified and controlled, with
minimal further tissue damage, as quickly as possible. This focus on preservation of blood and
optimisation of coagulation now takes precedence over the traditional model of immediate
fluid challenge. It is the control of haemorrhage, the preservation of intravascular volume and
management of the physiological consequences of relative and absolute hypovolaemia that now
represent the cornerstones of shock management.
SUMMARY
A haemostatic resuscitation strategy should be used with all trauma patients: control bleed-
ing, optimise coagulation, and make deliberate and informed decisions about volume replace-
ment. In those who are compensating and have bleeding controlled, volume replacement may
not be required. If it is, consider blood products and/or crystalloid solutions in the context of
wider fluid and electrolyte requirements. In those who are decompensating and where bleeding
is not controlled, blood products or crystalloid should be given, depending on availability, to
maintain a central pulse. A permissive hypotensive strategy should be followed for one hour. If
definitive control cannot be achieved within an hour, a hybrid strategy may be more appropri-
ate, titrating blood or crystalloid to a higher systolic blood pressure for the remaining period
until haemostasis is achieved.
123
Shock
REFERENCES
1. Shippey B. Causes and investigation of shock. Anaesthesia and Intensive Care Medicine
2010;11:509–511.
2. Vincent J, De Backer D. Circulatory shock. New England Journal of Medicine 2013;369:
1726–1734.
3. Spahn DR, Bouillon B, Cerny V, Coats TJ, Duranteau J, Fernandez-Mondejar E, Filipescu D
et al. Management of bleeding and coagulopathy following major trauma: An updated
European guideline. Critical Care 2013;17(2):R76.
4. Demetriades D, Chan LS, Bhasin P, Berne TV, Ramicone E, Huicochea F, Velmahos G
et al. Relative bradycardia in patients with traumatic hypotension. Journal of Trauma
1998;45:534–539.
5. Landry DW, Oliver JA. The pathogenesis of vasodilatory shock. New England Journal of
Medicine 2001;345:588–595.
6. Frith D, Brohi K. The pathophysiology of trauma-induced coagulopathy. Current Opinion
in Critical Care 2012;18:631–636.
7. Curry N, Hopewell S, Doree C, Hyde C, Brohi K, Stanworth S. The acute management
of trauma hemorrhage: A systematic review of randomized controlled trials. Critical Care
2011;15:R92.
8. Kwan I, Bunn F, Chinnock P, Roberts I. Timing and volume of fluid administration for
patients with bleeding. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2014;(3):CD002245.
9. Karam O, Tucci M, Combescure C, Lacroix J, Rimensberger PC. Plasma t ransfusion
strategies for critically ill patients. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews
2013;(12):CD010654.
10. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Major trauma: Assessment and initial
management. NICE Guideline NG39, February 2016.
11. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Intravenous fluid therapy: Intravenous
fluid therapy in adults in hospital. NICE Clinical Guideline CG174, December 2013.
12. Holcomb JB, Tilley BC, Baraniuk S. Fox EE, Wade CE, Podbielski JM, del Junco DJ
et al. Transfusion of plasma, platelets, and red blood cells in a 1:1:1 vs a 1:1:2 ratio and
mortality in patients with severe trauma: The PROPPR randomized clinical trial. JAMA
2015;313:471–482.
13. Holcomb JB, Donathan DP, Cotton BA, del Junco DJ, Brown G, Wenckstern TV,
Podbielski JM et al. Prehospital transfusion of plasma and red blood cells in trauma
patients. Prehospital Emergency Care 2015;19:1–9.
124
Entrapment and extrication
11
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be able to determine the need for extrication in the light of a rapid but thorough
assessment of the patient and the scene
▪▪ Understand the processes used by the emergency services to extricate a patient
▪▪ Be able to balance the urgency of the need for extrication with the risks associated with the
procedure
INTRODUCTION
The extrication of a trapped patient can be a complex operation. It presents unique hazards and
clinical challenges. No two extrications are the same, but the approach of the emergency ser-
vices follows distinct stages which must be understood by those providing medical assistance
at scene. The key role of the clinician is to determine the urgency with which the patient is
extracted, bearing in mind that the risks are likely to increase with increasing speed of removal.
The clinician must also be able to communicate clearly and effectively with personnel who are
used to a hierarchical command structure. Safe extrication is about balancing risks, and the role
of the clinician in providing guidance and ensuring responsiveness to clinical priorities is vital.
The patient’s condition may demand any of the approaches described later, whether or not
they are entrapped. Extrication does not imply entrapment, merely that the patient is in a posi-
tion where they are unable to safely or comfortably remove themselves from a situation following
trauma. Entrapment is conventionally divided into absolute or relative (clinical) entrapment (Box 11.1).
BOX 11.1: Entrapment–Definitions

Absolute entrapment
Absolute entrapment occurs when a trauma victim is physically trapped by wreckage or other
material which renders it impossible for them to move and requires removal.
Relative (clinical) entrapment
Relative entrapment occurs when pain associated with movement is so severe that the casualty
cannot be moved until the pain is eliminated by analgesia or anaesthesia.
125
TYPES OF EXTRICATION
Many patients will be able to remove themselves
from a hazardous area at the scene of an acci-
dent and will probably already have done so by
the time the emergency services arrive. If they
have not, they should always be asked if they can
‘extricate’ themselves and assisted to do so if this
is possible. There is no evidence to suggest that
patients will put their spines at risk in such cir-
cumstances, nor that an assisted self-extrication
poses risks to the victim as long as it is carried out
carefully and halted in the event of pain. When
extrication from a vehicle is needed (Figure 11.1), Figure 11.1 Extrication from a road traffic
it is conventionally divided into three types: collision.
• Snatch or immediate rescue

• Controlled release
• Rapid access
SNATCH OR IMMEDIATE RESCUE

Snatch rescue is the immediate removal of the patient from the vehicle. Snatch rescue will be
needed where there is an immediate risk to the patient or rescuers, for example from fire (or
risk of fire), or where the patient’s condition necessitates it, for example when they are in cardiac
arrest. This rescue may be little more than a controlled pull from the vehicle, with minimal use
of tools to create an exit. A snatch rescue will have normally been instituted by the fire service
or even members of the public.
CONTROLLED RELEASE
The controlled release is usually plan A in the stable casualty where minimising patient move-
ment is key, whilst maximising their comfort. In this situation the vehicle is dismantled around
the patient creating an exit point through which the patient can be carefully removed with full
consideration given to potential injuries. Inevitably, this takes a significant amount of time.
Before any attempt is made to gain access to a trapped patient or to move them, a clear plan
must be in place with which those involved are familiar.
RAPID ACCESS
Rapid access can be seen as plan B, when, in the time-critical casualty, access is necessary to man-
age the medical condition and extricate the patient. Examples of such situations include when
airway manoeuvres in the vehicle are failing, to treat life-threatening ventilation problems or
where haemodynamic instability necessitates immediate transfer to definitive care. An extrica-
tion path is rapidly created, if necessary by simple removal of a door, possibly with the addition of
a B-post rip to allow extrication of the casualty. Extrication is performed as carefully as possible,
whilst appreciating the time critical situation and the need for the patient to be out of the vehicle.
126
The approach of the fire and rescue service
The rapid access must be planned first in case of deterioration, prior to the full controlled
removal being designed and carried out. Rapid access may be the only appropriate option for
some seriously injured patients. The fire service will look to the medical team for guidance as
to which plan is appropriate. The medical team will need to communicate with the fire com-
mander if the patient deteriorates and resort to plan B is needed.
THE APPROACH OF THE BOX 11.2: The Fire Service Structured

Approach to Extrication
FIRE AND RESCUE SERVICE
▪▪ Scene assessment and scene safety
The systematic team approach followed establishment
by the fire service involves six stages ▪▪ Stabilisation and initial access
(Box 11.2). ▪▪ Glass management
The first three stages should happen ▪▪ Space creation
simultaneously so as to minimise delay in ▪▪ Full access
patient removal. ▪▪ Extrication
STAGE 1: SCENE ASSESSMENT AND SCENE SAFETY

The fire officer in charge will do a 360° walk
BOX 11.3: Hazards at the Scene
around the incident to gather information,
of a Road Traffic Collision
noting its extent, hazards, the number and
▪▪ Traffic
location of casualties, and mechanisms of
▪▪ Fire
injury. Based on this information they will
▪▪ Damaged vehicle
begin to formulate tactical rescue plans. At
▪▪ Damaged objects
the same time other fire officers will be estab-
▪▪ Vehicle stability
lishing scene safety, setting up and establish-
▪▪ Electricity
ing zones, preparing equipment and initiating
▪▪ Airbags
early casualty contact. Road traffic collisions
▪▪ Automatic rollover protection devices
present numerous hazards to both casualties
▪▪ Trip hazards
and rescuers (also see Box 11.3):
▪▪ Hydraulic equipment hoses
• Traffic – The commonest cause of death ▪▪ Hazardous materials
of rescuers is being struck by another
vehicle.
• Fire – Fuel leaks coupled with electrical systems, hot exhaust systems and bystanders
smoking provide opportunities for ignition. Once alight a number of vehicle components
have explosive capabilities.
• Damaged vehicles – The wreckage of the vehicle will contain glass, multiple sharp metal
edges and hot surfaces.
• Damaged objects – Roadside signs and lighting may be unstable.
• Vehicle stability – Prior to stabilisation the vehicle may move, potentially causing injuring
and trapping rescuers.
• Electricity – Short circuiting may lead to sparking and ignition of fuel. There is also
the risk of electrocution both from the vehicle’s electrical system and from any street
furniture that may have been damaged.
• Airbags – Un-deployed airbags may provide a significant risk to rescuers who should try
to avoid placing themselves in the deployment zone.
127
• Automatic rollover protection devices – Found

on convertible cars and normally deployed
when a rollover occurs, they can present a
hazard if the have failed to deploy
• Trip hazards – From equipment and debris.
• Hydraulic equipment hoses may cause
high-pressure injection injuries.
• Hazardous materials being transported.
The fire service may well have identified
and addressed hazards prior to the arrival of
the medical support, however the medical team
should perform their own risk assessment on
their arrival. The key to minimising risks is to
ensure that the team is fully kitted in appropriate Figure 11.2 The inner (5 m) and outer (10 m)
zones.
personal protective equipment (PPE).
The fire service will create notional zones around the immediate wreckage (Figure 11.2).
The inner zone should only contain personnel directly involved in casualty care and extrication
procedures. Eye protection must be worn when inside the inner zone.
The outer zone will include a salvage sheet with a kit dump for equipment needed for the
extrication. Personnel without a task are to be found on the edge of the outer zone ready to be
allocated tasks as necessary.
STAGE 2: STABILISATION AND INITIAL ACCESS

The fire service will stabilise the vehicle in its current position using blocks, wedges, stepped
chocks, pneumatic struts and winches to prevent movement of the vehicle. This may result from
the additional load of rescuers or occur following dismantling of the vehicle and whilst moving
casualties. Contact with the casualty should occur as soon as possible to allow for triage and
life-saving interventions. Access can be through any door that will open or occasionally glass
management in the form of removal of window or windscreen may be required.
STAGE 3: GLASS MANAGEMENT

Glass management is the process of making glass safe to allow further access and extrication.
This commonly involves shattering the glass using a glass punch, though windows can be simply
wound down if they are manual or if the battery has not yet been disconnected. Because of their
lamination windscreens normally require sawing. The rear windscreen is often removed intact as
part of the tailgate. The casualty, and rescuers, should be protected from inhalation of glass dust.
Once casualty care has been established the patient is then protected from further injury caused
by the debris created by the efforts of the rescue team. Protection may be ‘hard’, such as a teardrop,
or ‘soft’ protection from durable sheeting. The patient should also be given eye protection, ear
protection and, if appropriate, reassurance and an explanation of what is happening around them.
STAGE 4: SPACE CREATION

Space creation involves making the largest working space possible around the patient. This
may be simply achieved by adjusting the seat position, that is sliding the patient away from the
128
dashboard and reclining the seat. However, electrical seat control systems may no longer be
active and seat runners are often structurally disrupted in severe impacts.
Reclining the patient at an early stage may offer a number of advantages including improv-
ing perfusion to the brain in patients who are shocked, positioning the patient at an early stage
in their clot formation process which will not greatly change prior to arrival at definitive care,
moving the patient and rescuer out of the deployment zone of any un-deployed airbags, and
making it easier for a single rescuer to maintain cervical spine immobilisation whilst improv-
ing eye contact and reassurance. However, fully reclining the patient prior to insertion of an
extrication board may make the process more difficult. Also, in circumstances such as when the
patient is dependent on postural drainage of facial haemorrhage, any attempt to recline them
should be avoided until the very last minute before formal airway control is achieved.
Space creation can be lifesaving, for example in the patient with marked constriction of the
chest where asphyxiation is a real possibility without rapid expansion in space to allow them
to breathe properly.
Further space creation includes removal of rear parcel shelves and possibly rear seating. Roof
removal is often required to give the vertical space required for extrication. Roof removal need
not be complete; the roof may be flapped in any direction to give access.
STAGE 5: FULL ACCESS

During this stage, the vehicle is dismantled around the patient in order to maximise access to
them so that extrication can occur with minimal manoeuvring along the extrication path.
The fire service will refer to removal of the structural posts of a car as shown in Figure 11.3.
Additional techniques may need to be employed when the vehicle shape has been distorted.
A dashboard roll may be needed when the patient’s lower limbs are still trapped by the intrusion
into the passenger compartment. This involves cuts low down on the A-posts and pushing forward
or lifting the dashboard, either with hydraulic rams or spreaders. Alternatively the metalwork of the
front wing may need to be pushed forward to gain access to the foot well.
Significant side impacts may rotate the occupant’s seat, preventing it from reclining, or alter-
ing the extrication path with the result that the patient may have to exit in an oblique direction.
Where the vehicle has been wrapped around a tree or piece of street furniture, and no access is
available on the side of the impact, a B-post rip (division and folding outwards) on the opposite
side will allow removal of a casualty who may well have been rotated with the back of the seat
to face the midline of the car.
‘B’ post
Firewall ‘C’ post

‘A’ post
Sill
Figure 11.3 The structural components of a car.
129
(a) (e)
(c)
(d)
(g)
(b)
(f )
Figure 11.4 Potential vehicle extrication paths: (a) extrication board out to rear; (b) rapid extrication,
driver’s door; (c) rapid extrication, opposite door; (d) extrication board and rear quarter oblique;
(e) extrication board and rear quarter contralateral oblique; (f) extrication board and feet first front quarter
oblique; (g) appropriate for minibuses without a front mounted engine.
STAGE 6: EXTRICATION
There are a number of extrication paths that a patient can follow (Figure 11.4). The ideal path in
a plan A extrication is on an extrication board out of the rear of the vehicle. However, where the
vehicle shape has been distorted, the patient has been unrestrained, or where multiple occupants
prevent full access, other directions may need to be used. The alignment of the patient relative to
the vehicle structure and any obstructions to extrication will determine the extrication path.
EXTRICATING THE DRIVER

The intended plan must be confirmed with the rescue services and other clinicians, and roles
clearly defined and allocated. Ideally at least six people are needed to extricate a patient with
minimal movement. The patient’s feet must be free and the lower limbs moved away from the
steering column. The following personnel are needed:
• Two people on either side lifting at the thighs and pelvis

• Two people lifting either side of the torso
• One to maintain C-spine control
• One to insert and brace the long board
The casualty should be reassured and an explanation given of the procedure. Adequate anal-
gesia is essential. The process of extrication of a front seat passenger is described in Box 11.4.
BOX 11.4: Extrication of a Front Seat Passenger

▪▪ Minimise monitoring.
▪▪ Check that the headrest has been removed where possible.
▪▪ Maintain C-spine control from the front.
▪▪ Recline the seat away from the patient enough to allow insertion of the extrication board
between the casualty and the seat.
▪▪ Recline the patient back onto the extrication board.
130
▪▪ Recline the seat as far as possible to the point at which the extrication path will still clear any of
the rear seats or posts.
▪▪ Hand over C-spine control to a rescuer at the head end of the board during this time.
▪▪ At the command of the rescuer maintaining C-spine control, slide the patient up the extrication
board. This rescuer should confirm a distance to be moved with all the other rescuers
▪▪ Once the casualty is fully on the extrication board, rest the extrication board in a secure
position, often on the top of the rear seats, to enable securing of the patient to the board prior
to further movement.
▪▪ Carry the patient away from the vehicle to be scooped off the extrication board for transport to
definitive care.
EXTRICATING REAR SEAT PASSENGERS

The inability to recline the rear seats increases the difficulty of extrication of casualties from
this position. Moving the front seat forward where possible will create space, and door removal
and removal of the C-post bodywork will make access easier. Vertical removal of a patient
should be avoided as it invariably places too much strain on rescuers as well as being difficult
to control. Creating an extrication path through the rear quarter or rotating the patient out
through the rear door are two feasible options.
OVERTURNED CARS
An overturned car with a patient still restrained in their seat provides an interesting challenge.
Where the casualty has slid out of their seat or where the A-posts have been flattened by the force
of the rollover, their head may come to rest against the roof, possibly forcing their neck into flexion.
Severe flexion can cause an ischaemic cord injury and, when present, this is a time-critical situation.
There are two possible methods of extrication.
METHOD 1
The patient is lowered face first onto a extrication board. Access is gained via the rear of the car
and space created for the extrication path through the rear.
With the patient still retrained by their seat belt the seat is reclined so that the patient ends
up suspended facing the ground or roof. Two straps or fire hoses are passed across the front
of the patient, one at the level of the pelvis, the other at the level of the chest, and held under
tension to suspend the patient against their seat. The seat belt can then be cut and by gradual
release of tension on the fire hoses, the casualty is lowered face first down onto a padded extri-
cation board. Once the patient has been slid out of the vehicle on the extrication board, the
patient can then be log rolled (if there is no concern regarding pelvic injuries) off the extrication
board directly onto a scoop stretcher, or sandwiched between an extrication board and scoop
stretcher and rotated supine.
METHOD 2
The front roll manoeuvre. If the patient has slipped out of their seat and come to rest with the crown
of their head facing towards the front of the car, then it is likely that they have rotated out of their
seat to the point that their upper spine and neck are close to perpendicular with the ground.
131
This rotation from the seat can be then continued so that the patient exits through the front
w indow void. Space can be created in the overturned car through a rear oyster in which the B- and
C-posts are cut and hydraulic rams lift the floor of the car vertically away from the roof.
HGVS/VANS
Vehicles other than cars provide specific challenges. The patterns of intrusion will differ given
the different forces involved in the impact. It is often not possible or advantageous to recline
seating as the extrication pathway is likely to be obstructed by trailers or loads. The cab of a
heavy goods vehicle (HGV) is well above ground level so extrication must take place 10 feet up
in the air. However, the principles are the same. A platform will normally be created around the
cab to enable safe working at height. The fire service will follow the same management stages,
but the possible extrication pathways will be limited.
EXTRICATION DEVICES
A number of commercial extrication jackets are available (Figure 11.5). These devices are designed
to be applied securely to the casualty whilst in the vehicle, and are structured to maintain the
head, neck and torso in alignment during the extrication process. They aim to minimise move-
ment and provide handles for lifting and manoeuvring the patient.
ALTERNATIVE EXTRICATION TECHNIQUES

Mainstream UK practice involves stabilising the vehicle in the position in which it came
to rest, which fortunately in the majority of cases is on all four wheels. In cases where the
vehicle comes to rest on its side or roof, extrication can be performed once the vehicle has
been stabilised in that position. Alternatively, as is practised in other countries, the vehicle
is repositioned on all four wheels in a controlled manner, prior to extrication continuing.
Proponents of this technique argue the extra time taken to right the vehicle is outweighed by
the time saved carrying out the conventional extrication that follows. More commonly when
there is significant intrusion into the passenger compartment from an immovable object,
such as a tree or other vehicle, it is necessary
to winch the vehicle away from the immov-
able object in order to allow access and release
of entrapment.
The ever developing technology seen in
vehicles poses increasing challenges to the
fire service: for example structural composites
that cannot be cut through and crash protec-
tion systems with multiple airbags. Most fire
services have specialised teams with extended
training and experience in managing difficult
extrications. In situations where extrication is
expected to be challenging, ensuring the atten-
dance of such a team with additional skills and
Figure 11.5 A commercial extrication device. equipment is valuable.
132
Immobilisation and packaging
THE NEED FOR EXTRICATION

Decision-making regarding the mode of extrication is challenging for the medical team.
Traditional decision-making balances the need for controlled extrication aiming to avoid move-
ment and further injury, especially spinal injury, against the time taken to achieve it and the
consequent delay to definitive care.
Pre-hospital management of spinal injuries is an evolving field. There is a body of expert
opinion that, given the magnitude of difference between the energy involved causing the pri-
mary traumatic insult and that transferred during patient handling, there is little chance of
causing or worsening an existing spinal injury during medical handling of the patient. This
position challenges current practice which places significant emphasis on minimising move-
ment of the spinal column whenever possible.
For the co-operative patient, there is evidence suggesting that the most effective method of
getting a patient out of a car with the least amount of movement of their head and neck is for
the patient to simply step out of the vehicle, assuming they are physically capable of doing so
and are not trapped.
With the unconscious or seriously injured patient, the need to provide definitive care is
pressing. Adding on-scene time with extensive and prolonged extrication techniques and pre-
cautions aimed at minimising movement of the spinal column for a potential spinal injury may
not be in the patient’s best interests given the higher likelihood of injury elsewhere. Recognising
that hypoxia and poor perfusion are detrimental to spinal cord injuries should drive the medi-
cal team to treat these and expedite transfer to hospital. Given the current balance of evidence,
spinal immobilisation measures should not hamper care or delay transfer. As such, complex
evacuation plans might not be appropriate for the unconscious or critically injured patient.
IMMOBILISATION AND PACKAGING

Preparing the patient for transfer to definitive care is an important stage in the patient’s journey.
Ensuring the patient is safe, secure, as comfortable as possible and protected from further dete-
rioration helps to deliver the patient to hospital in the best possible condition.
IMMOBILISATION
Patients in the United Kingdom are fortunate in that transfer times to definitive care are usually
relatively short compared to other regions of the world. Most patients will be at hospital well
under an hour from leaving the scene. The pre-hospital clinician has to judge whether immo-
bilisation of the spine is warranted and then package the patient so that they arrive at definitive
care in the best condition possible.
PRACTICE POINT
The majority of conscious patients without distracting injuries will ‘manage’ their own cervical spines.
Spinal cord injuries carry significant morbidity and mortality, though fortunately the inci-
dence is relatively rare. Injury to the bony spinal column occurs in about 10% of major trauma
patients; injury to the spinal cord in under 2%. The vast majority of patients immobilised in the
pre-hospital arena have no injury. However, in most cases, pre-hospital management centres
133
on recognising the potential for injury to the spinal cord, as opposed to identifying an actual
injury. The potential for injury is based on the mechanism of injury and the clinical findings,
whilst management relies on attempting to avoid further injury by minimising movement
through immobilisation.
Current practice, aimed at minimising further movement of the spinal column in the belief
that it will avoid further deterioration of a neurological injury, is not one fully supported by evi-
dence. The evidence is weak both for and against current practice. There is evidence supporting
the view that immobilisation might be harmful and worsen outcome. It has been argued that,
given the significant force required to cause the primary fracture and injury, further move-
ment is unlikely to cause further damage to the cord. The lack of evidence to determine best
practice makes it difficult to move away from the widespread practice of immobilisation, espe-
cially given the fear that further deterioration could carry devastating consequences. Treating
hypoxia and hypoperfusion as part of the patient’s overall care may also help to reduce second-
ary spinal injury and should not be impaired by immobilisation.
The gold standard for immobilisation is considered to be the correct application of an appro-
priately sized cervical collar secured in neutral alignment to a firm surface with blocks and
tape or straps. Manual in-line immobilisation (or stabilisation) – MILS – is the term given to
the practice of holding the patients head in a neutral position before instigation of triple immo-
bilisation. Immobilisation is nearly always performed once the patient has returned to neutral
alignment. In rare cases where the nature of the injury prevents this happening, and gentle
attempts to bring the head into the midline have failed, the patient should be immobilised in a
pain- and paraesthesia-free position. Pre-existing disease, such as ankylosing spondylitis, may
prevent neutral alignment as may immediate pain or neurological symptoms on movement. In
such cases immobilisation should be in the position in which the patient is found.
Manual in-line stabilisation without a cervical collar in place is pragmatic whilst assessment
and treatment is ongoing. Application of a collar need only occur, if indicated, when the patient
is due to be moved and packaged for transfer to hospital. Wearing a correctly applied collar is
uncomfortable and not without the risk of harm: minimising duration of application is in the
patient’s interests and likely to be appreciated by the alert patient.
The emphasis in spinal cord management is invariably on the cervical spine. However, inju-
ries can occur along the length of the spinal cord. Clinical vigilance and the current practice of
minimising movement through immobilisation relates to the whole length of the spinal column
and should not be missed.
PRACTICE POINT
Mobile patients who are not complaining of neck pain do not need to be compelled into triple
immobilisation!
RULES FOR CLEARING C-SPINE

Recognising that the majority of patients are immobilised unnecessarily has driven the devel-
opment of algorithms that enable the pre-hospital clinician to reliably identify those patients
who do not warrant immobilisation. These decision tools are extensions of the guidelines
developed for in-hospital clearance of the cervical spine in the emergency department.
UK practice continues to use the NEXUS criteria as a tool for identifying patients who do
not need immobilisation. If the patient satisfies all criteria then injury to the cervical spine can
be reliably excluded (Box 11.5).
134
Packaging
PRAGMATIC COLLARING BOX 11.5: The NEXUS Criteria

Some practitioners utilise the Canadian If the patient
C-Spine Rule in addition to, or instead of
▪▪ Is alert
the, NEXUS criteria. Again the rule asks
▪▪ Is not intoxicated
a series of questions to identify who not to
▪▪ Has no vertebral tenderness or deformity
immobilise (Box 11.6).
▪▪ Has no focal neurological deficit
The importance of experience and judg-
▪▪ Has no painful distracting injury
ment should not be ignored in avoiding
unnecessary immobilisation, which is not then spinal immobilisation is not necessary.
a risk-free procedure. If an ambulatory
patient is deemed to be in need of immobilisation the technique of a vertical takedown is no
longer appropriate and should not be used. In the majority of cases the co-operative patient
should be asked to lie themselves down on the ambulance stretcher with the least degree of
movement of their cervical spine.
BOX 11.6: The Canadian C-Spine Rule

1.
Is any high-risk factor present that mandates radiography?
Age 65 years or more
Dangerous mechanism of injury
▪▪ A fall from greater than one metre or five stairs
▪▪ An axial load to the head, e.g. diving
▪▪ A high-speed motor vehicle collision (combined speed >100 km/hr)
▪▪ A rollover motor vehicle accident
▪▪ Ejection from a motor vehicle
▪▪ An accident involving motorised recreational vehicles
▪▪ A bicycle collision
Paraesthesia in the extremities
2. If none of the above is present, is any low-risk factor present that allows safe assessment
of range of motion?
▪▪ Simple rear-end motor vehicle collision
▪▪ Sitting position in ED
▪▪ Ambulatory at any time since injury
▪▪ Delayed onset of neck pain
▪▪ Absence of midline C-spine tenderness
3. If no high-risk factors are present, and the patient does not have any of the low risk factors rotation
can be assessed: can the patient actively rotate their neck 45 degrees to the left and right?
Patients capable of neck rotation do not need to be immobilised.
PACKAGING
Preparing the patient for transfer to definitive care is an important stage in the patient’s jour-
ney. Ensuring the patient is safe, secure, as comfortable as possible and protected from further
deterioration helps to deliver the patient to hospital in the best possible condition.
135
Current best practice focuses on minimal patient handling. The principle of minimis-
ing movement is part of this approach. Planning ahead is essential, aiming to minimise and
streamline the patient’s movements, reducing overall scene time as well as overall movement,
both on scene and at definitive care. The long spinal board is no longer considered appropri-
ate for transport to definitive care – it should be used for extrication only. Not only are spinal
boards uncomfortable with an increased risk of tissue pressure damage, but log-rolling to place
the patient on the board may not be appropriate.
The scoop stretcher is the recommended platform for the majority of transfers to hospital
within the UK. The ability to insert the blades of the scoop under the patient with little more
than a 10° tilt to each side helps to minimise movement. Their removal is just as quick and
simple, although in many cases the patient will remain on a scoop stretcher throughout resus-
citation and CT scanning, following which it will be removed, as this facilitates easy and rapid
handling.
For lengthy journeys to definitive care there is an increased risk of tissue pressure injuries
caused by immobility and unchanged pressure contact points with the scoop stretcher. In these
situations a vacuum mattress will conform to the patient’s body distributing contact pressure
more evenly. In addition patients report a greater degree of comfort.
Avoiding hypothermia is very important for trauma patients as it directly impacts on out-
come. Proprietary waterproof, windproof and insulating blankets help to mitigate temperature
loss. Active warming blankets are also available.
Once suitably packaged, a pragmatic approach to transport to hospital can be used. The
compliant patient will appreciate the reasoning behind the use of immobilisation and keep
their head still. Loosening the cervical collar, coupled with reassurance and reminding of the
need to remain still, may well make their journey more bearable. Similarly in anaesthetised
patients, who are unable to move, loosening the collar may aid cerebral perfusion.
SUMMARY
Effective extrication and packaging requires effective and coordinated team working, as well
as some basic technical knowledge. The expertise of the rescue services and clinicians are
absolutely complementary. Recent changes in guidelines have promulgated a more pragmatic
and thoughtful approach to possible spinal injury, recognising that full immobilisation is not
a procedure without risks. In this area, as in all other aspects of pre-hospital care, there is no
substitute for practice in realistically simulated scenarios.
FURTHER READING
Benger J, Blackham J. Why do we put cervical collars on conscious trauma patients?
Scandinavian Journal of Trauma, Resuscitation and Emergency Medicine 2009;17:44.
Calland V. Extrication of the seriously injured road crash victim. Emergency Medicine Journal
2005;22:817–821.
Connor D, Greaves I, Porter K, Bloch M, on behalf of the Consensus Group Faculty of
Pre-Hospital Care. Pre-hospital spinal immobilisation: An initial consensus statement.
Emergency Medicine Journal 2013;30:1067–1069.
Engsberg JR, Standeven JW, Shurtleff TL, Eggars JL, Shafer JS, Naunheim RS. Cervical spine
motion during extrication. Journal of Emergency Medicine 2013;44:122–127.
136
Further reading
Hauswald M. A re-conceptualisation of acute spinal care. Emergency Medicine Journal 2013;

30:720–723.
Hauswald M, Ong G, Tandberg D, Omar Z. Out-of-hospital spinal immobilization: Its effect
on neurologic injury. Academic Emergency Medicine 1998;5:214–219.
Kwan I, Bunn F, Roberts I, on behalf of the WHO Pre-Hospital Trauma Care Steering
Committee. Spinal immobilisation for trauma patients. Cochrane Database Systematic
Review 2001;(2):CD002803.
Moss R, Porter K, Greaves I. Minimal patient handling: A faculty of pre-hospital care consen-
sus statement. Emergency Medicine Journal 2014;30:1065–1066.
Stuke LE, Pons PT, Guy JS, Chapleau WP, Butler FK, McSwain NE. Prehospital spine immo-
bilization for penetrating trauma—Review and recommendations from the Prehospital
Trauma Life Support Executive Committee. Journal of Trauma 2011;71:763–769.
Valliencourt C, Stiell IG, Beaudoin T, Maloney J, Anton AR, Bradford P, Cain E et al. The out-
of-hospital validation of the Canadian C-Spine Rule by paramedics. Annals of Emergency
Medicine 2009;54:663–671.
137
Head injury
12
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Have an understanding of the pathophysiology of head injuries

▪▪ Have a systematic approach to the assessment of the head injured patient in the pre-
hospital environment
▪▪ Be able to formulate a strategic management plan for the treatment of head-injured
patients in the pre-hospital environment
INTRODUCTION
‘Head injury’ is a term that encompasses injury to the scalp, skull and brain. Traumatic brain
injury (TBI) is often used as it captures the importance of the neurological insult to the brain
tissue. TBI is an insult to the brain tissue from an external force, leading to temporary or perma-
nent impairment of cognitive, physical and psychosocial functions, with an associated dimin-
ished or altered state of consciousness (1).
Traumatic brain injury remains a leading cause of death and disability in young individuals.
However, its epidemiology is changing and improvements in road safety are now being offset
by increases in fall-related injuries in an ageing population. In all age groups there is a male
predominance (2). Other populations at high risk of sustaining TBI include low-income indi-
viduals, the unmarried, members of ethnic minority groups, residents of inner cities, individu-
als with a history of substance abuse and those who have suffered a previous TBI (1).
In the United Kingdom 1.4 million people attend emergency departments with a head injury
each year. A meta-analysis of 23 European countries revealed a combined hospitalisation and
fatal TBI incidence of 235 per 100,000 people, although there was large variability between
centres (3,4). In the UK 10.9% of these injuries are classified as either moderate or severe (5).
Survivors commonly have neurocognitive defects (such as impaired attention, inability to form
visuospatial associations or poor executive function), psychological health issues (30%–70%
develop depression), or increased impulsivity, and many display lack of self-regulatory behav-
iours which can affect relationships and integration in society (3). As a consequence, TBI of all
levels of severity is a major cause of death, disability and economic cost to society.
138
Pathophysiology of traumatic brain injury (TBI)
The leading causes of TBI are road traffic collisions (RTCs), falls, assaults and violence,
sports and recreation activities. Alcohol use is implicated in 25%–65% of cases (6). There is no
effective treatment which will reverse the effects of primary TBI, but measures can be taken
to prevent it through changes in socio-economic, behavioural and environmental factors (for
example legislation and enforcement of seat belts, helmets and airbags).
The medical management of brain-injured patients is complex and includes specialised pre-
hospital care, transport to an appropriate treatment centre, in-hospital acute care and, for some,
long-term rehabilitation (5). Ischaemia has a key role in all forms of brain injury and preventing
ischaemia (or secondary) injury is at the core of all neuroprotective strategies. Prompt medical
care in the pre-hospital setting has the potential to influence outcomes by preventing, or at least
reducing, secondary brain injury.
PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY (TBI)

Primary brain injury occurs at the moment of trauma. It results from the physical mechanism
of injury, for example blunt or penetrating trauma, acceleration/deceleration forces or even
blast waves from an explosion. These physical mechanisms can be classified as impact loading,
impulsive loading and static loading (1,7).
IMPACT LOADING
Impact loading may be caused by a direct blow to the head. Such a collision of the head with a
solid object causes traumatic brain injury through mechanical force resulting in deformation of
brain tissue as a result of compression, stretching or shearing.
IMPULSIVE LOADING
In impulsive loading, for example due to a motor vehicle accident, the head is set in motion
and then the moving head is stopped abruptly without being directly struck or impacted by a
mechanical force. This usually results in diffuse axonal injury.
STATIC LOADING
In static loading, the effect of speed of occurrence may not be significant. Static loading results
from a slowly moving object trapping the head against a fixed rigid structure and gradually
squeezing the skull. This causes comminuted fractures that may be enough to deform the brain.
Primary injuries may manifest as focal lesions such as skull fractures, intracranial haemato-
mas, cranial nerve lesions, lacerations, contusions and penetrating wounds, or more widespread
damage including diffuse axonal injury (7,8). Coup and contre-coup cerebral contusions result from
a combination of vascular and tissue damage. There is injury at both the site of impact to the
skull (coup) and on the opposite side of the head (contre-coup). The impact accelerates first the
skull and then its contents away from it. As the skull stops, the brain then impacts on the internal
surface of the skull resulting in damage. Diffuse axonal injury is characterised by extensive, gen-
eralised damage to the white matter tracts of the brain as a result of shearing forces (Box 12.1).
Neurological damage due to trauma evolves over the ensuing hours and days: this is termed
secondary brain injury. Improved outcomes result when these delayed insults, which have the
139
Head injury
effect of reducing cerebral blood flow, are pre-

BOX 12.1: A Classification
vented or appropriately treated (9). Reduced
of Brain Injury cerebral blood flow and associated reduction
Localised injury in the delivery of oxygenated blood to cere-
bral tissues leads to ischaemia and neuronal
▪▪ Skull fracture
cell death. Causative factors include hypoxia,
▪▪ Cerebral lacerations
hypotension, raised intracranial pressure
▪▪ Cerebral contusions
(ICP) and anaemia (for example through
▪▪ Penetrating wounds
haemorrhage). Hyperthermia and epileptic
▪▪ Cranial nerve injuries
seizures cause an increased cerebral meta-
Generalised injuries bolic rate and oxygen consumption which
can be catastrophic in the face of reduced
▪▪ Diffuse axonal injury
oxygen delivery. The brain is dependent on a
▪▪ Hypoxic brain injury
continual supply of glucose for cellular func-
tion and hypoglycaemia risks neuronal cell
death. Hyperglycaemia on the other hand increases cerebral metabolism and therefore oxygen
demand, which in the context of impaired perfusion and the resultant restrictions to oxygen
delivery can also contribute to poor outcomes.
At a cellular level a complex cascade of processes occurs that results in secondary brain
injury. Damaged neurons bring about the release of inflammatory neurochemical mediators.
These mediators are responsible for altered vessel permeability, oedema, neuronal ischaemia,
necrosis and cell death. Heightened metabolism in the injured brain is stimulated by a further
increase in the circulating levels of catecholamines contributing to a vicious cycle of ischaemia,
cell death and tissue oedema (1,10).
INJURY TYPES
INTRACRANIAL HAEMORRHAGE
EPIDURAL/EXTRADURAL HAEMATOMA (EDH)
Epidural/extradural haematoma (EDH) is common following head trauma. A collection of blood
forms between the inner surface of the skull and outer layer of dura. In 80% of cases EDH is
associated with a skull fracture. The bleeding source is usually a torn middle meningeal artery.
Occasionally it can result from venous blood from a torn sinus. Commonly patients have a
period of lucidity followed by decreasing consciousness, although this is not invariable and
cannot be relied upon in diagnosis.
SUBDURAL HAEMATOMA (SDH)

In subdural haematoma (SDH) a collection of blood accumulates in the potential space between
the dura and subarachnoid mater of the meninges. It results from stretching and tearing of
bridging cortical veins as they cross the subdural space to drain into an adjacent dural sinus.
140
Neurophysiological effects of traumatic brain injury
SUBARACHNOID HAEMORRHAGE (SAH)

Subarachnoid haemorrhage (SAH) is a collection of blood within the subarachnoid space and is
caused by lacerations of the superficial microvessels in the subarachnoid space.
INTRACEREBRAL HAEMORRHAGE (ICH)

The term intracerebral haemorrhage (ICH) encompasses a number of entities that share the find-
ing of an acute accumulation of blood in the parenchyma of the brain. ICH occurs secondary to
lacerations or contusion of the brain following trauma.
NEUROPHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF TRAUMATIC BRAIN

INJURY
The Monroe–Kellie doctrine states that the skull is essentially a ‘rigid box’ with three
components:
• Brain tissue (85%)

• Cerebrospinal fluid (10%)
• Blood (5%).
None of these components are appreciably compressible. If one component increases in vol-
ume the other components must accommodate this additional volume. When the body can no
longer compensate for these changes the intracranial pressure (ICP) rises. Raised ICP can be
caused by any space-occupying lesion including haematoma, obstructed flow of cerebral spinal
fluid (hydrocephalous), brain oedema or through vasodilatation (as a result of hypoxia and
hypercarbia).
Once the compensatory mechanisms are exhausted, the ICP rises exponentially. Areas of
focal ischaemia may occur as perfusion of the brain (and hence supply of oxygen and glucose)
becomes increasingly compromised. This is a crucial period where interventions can influence
longer-term morbidity or even mortality. If the ICP reaches a critical threshold, then global
ischaemia, brain herniation and death are the likely outcomes. Signs of cerebral herniation
include abnormal pupils (asymmetric, dilated or unreactive), progressive neurological deterio-
ration, extensor posturing and compromised brainstem function (bradycardia, hypertension
and irregular respiration).
To prevent the consequences of raised ICP it is important to have an understanding of the
neurophysiology behind it. Normal cerebral blood flow is approximately 50 mLs/100g/min.
In the first few hours after severe head injury, cerebral blood flow can fall to 25 mLs/100g/
min. Irreversible neuronal damage occurs once cerebral blood flow drops below 18 mLs/100g/
min. Therefore following traumatic injury the brain is susceptible to further ischaemic insult.
As cerebral blood flow is difficult to measure, cerebral perfusion pressure is used as a surro-
gate marker for cerebral perfusion. Cerebral perfusion pressure is determined by the following
calculation:
Cerebral perfusion pressure (CPP) = Mean arterial pressure (MAP) − Intracranial pressure (ICP)

141
Head injury
CPP represents the pressure gradient driving cerebral blood flow (CBF) and hence oxygen
delivery. In head trauma the ICP is assumed to be raised above 20 mmHg (as the ICP cannot be
directly measured in the pre-hospital setting).
Under normal circumstances autoregulation ensures that cerebral blood flow is constant
over a range of cerebral perfusion pressures. Autoregulation occurs by involuntary alteration
of the resistance of cerebral blood vessels. As the blood-brain barrier becomes damaged, these
homeostatic mechanisms are lost and cerebral blood flow becomes proportional to cerebral
perfusion pressure. Those areas of the brain that are ischaemic, or at risk of ischaemia become
critically dependent on an adequate cerebral blood flow, and therefore cerebral perfusion pres-
sure (11).
To prevent further neuronal death (secondary brain injury), this flow of well-oxygenated
blood must be maintained. Maintaining an adequate CPP is the cornerstone of modern brain
injury therapy. Pre-hospital hypotension (defined as a single observation of systolic blood pres-
sure <90 mmHg) has a significant negative impact on outcome from brain injury (12).
The partial pressures of carbon dioxide (PaCO2) and oxygen (PaO2) influence ICP through
changes in cerebral blood flow and blood volume. PaCO2 exerts the greater influence, with a
15%–30% increase in cerebral blood flow per kilopascal (kPa) increase in PaCO2. Increases
in blood volume in this compromised ‘rigid box’ contribute further to increases in ICP, thus
reducing cerebral blood flow. Hyperventilation can have the opposite effect of reducing the
blood volume, however the vasoconstriction can be so profound that this itself compromises
blood flow. Normocapnia should be maintained. Hypoxaemia is a strong predictor of poor
outcome in the TBI patient (12). Low oxygen tensions (PaO2 <8 kPa; SpO2 <90%) cause cere-
bral vasodilatation, and cerebral blood flow rises rapidly in an attempt to maintain oxygen
delivery.
PRACTICE POINT
Hypoxia and hypotension should be avoided!
SYSTEMIC EFFECTS OF TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY

A number of systemic complications may be seen after a head injury. These can present within
hours or days following the primary insult. Of particular importance in the pre-hospital phase
are the cardiovascular effects. These are common and are associated with increased morbid-
ity and mortality. An initial catecholamine surge is driven by the central neuroendocrine axis
due to direct damage or as a protective effect to maintain cerebral perfusion. Disruption of
brainstem function brings about neurogenic hypotension and the systemic response to neuro-
inflammatory mediators can contribute to a systemic inflammatory response and myocardial
dysfunction. The clinician may encounter hypertension or hypotension (more than expected
for the associated injury pattern), ECG morphological changes (ST-segment changes, flat/
inverted T waves and prolongation of the QTc interval), arrhythmias and myocardial dysfunc-
tion. In severe cases this can lead to cardiogenic shock and pulmonary oedema (13).
APPROACHES TO THE CLASSIFICATION OF TBI

Being able to determine the type of traumatic brain injury is less important in the pre-hospital
environment than an accurate overall assessment of the clinical state of the patient. In most
142
Initial assessment and management of TBI
cases, an accurate diagnosis will only be pos-

BOX 12.2: Classification of TBI,
sible on CT scanning after arrival in hospi-
Clinical Severity
tal. It is the seriousness of the brain injury in
terms of conscious level that will influence the Glasgow Coma Scale
pre-alert and handover to the hospital as well The GCS score comprises the values from
the most appropriate transfer destination. The three component tests (eye, motor and verbal
most useful tool for assessing conscious level scales).
is the Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) score (Box Eyes
12.2) (14). An alternative is AVPU: 1 = No response
• A – Alert 2 = Open in response to pain
• V – Responds to voice 3 = Open in response to speech
• P – Responds to painful stimuli 4 = Spontaneous
• U – Unresponsive ▪▪ Motor
1 = No response
AVPU is rapid, reproducible and suitable for 2 = Extension to painful stimuli
rapidly changing pre-hospital conditions. 3 = Abnormal flexion to painful stimuli
In addition, there is no absolute agreement 4 = Flexion/withdrawal to painful stimuli
on some of the definitions used in the clas- 5 = Localises painful stimuli
sification systems. This is especially true of 6 = Obeys commands
the clinical severity classifications. Literature ▪▪ Verbal
review has shown there to be numerous defi- 1 = No response
nitions for what encompasses a mild, mod- 2 = Incomprehensible sounds
erate or severe traumatic brain injury. In the 3 = Inappropriate utterances
pre-hospital setting the mechanism, the dis- 4 = Disoriented, confused
tinction between isolated head injury and 5 = Oriented, converses normally
head injury as part of multi-trauma and the
Glasgow Coma Scale based classifications are used most commonly. The GCS score may be
invalidated by medical sedation or anaesthesia, paralysis or intoxication.
Other features which must be identified in determining the magnitude of a traumatic brain
injury include whether the injury is blunt or penetrating and whether it is isolated or associ-
ated with extracranial injuries (50% of cases are associated with extracranial injuries including
cervical spine injuries) (15). Other factors include the length of loss of consciousness or amnesia
and the presence of neurological deficit on history taking or examination. Using the Glasgow
Coma Scale score injuries are classified as
• Severe (GCS 3–8)

• Moderate (GCS 9–13)
• Mild (GCS 14–15)
INITIAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF TBI

Emergency medical service personnel are often the first healthcare providers for patients with
TBI. Pre-hospital assessment and treatment are critical links in providing appropriate care (12).
The primary survey (as described in Chapter 6) ensures systematic assessment and manage-
ment of patients. The main aim of pre-hospital treatment is to deliver adequate oxygen to the
(already damaged) brain by optimising oxygenation of the blood and maintenance of cerebral
perfusion. There is a window of opportunity in which to manage hypoxia and hypotension and
143
Head injury
prevent progression of secondary TBI before changes become irreversible. When pre-hospital
data is reviewed, oxygen saturation below 90% is found in 44%–55% of cases and hypoten-
sion in 20%–30%. Trauma renders the brain more vulnerable to these insults, and hypoxia and
hypotension are strongly associated with poor outcomes (12,14,15).
The cause of the initial traumatic head injury must always be established and any possible
medical cause such as epileptic seizure or diabetes resulting in hypoglycaemic coma must be
identified. The involvement of alcohol and recreational or other drugs should be considered.
However, a depressed conscious level should only be ascribed to intoxication after a signifi-
cant brain injury has been excluded, and this is unlikely to be possible until after arrival in
hospital and appropriate investigation (8,16). It is essential to be aware of the potential for non-
accidental injuries in both children and adults, especially the elderly, and there may be safety
issues for medical personnel. As much scene information as possible about the mechanism
of injury and potential confounding factors should be gathered. Such information provides a
global overview of the situation for the receiving medical team in hospital.
CATASTROPHIC BLEEDING
Sources of obvious massive haemorrhage must be identified and controlled. Maintenance of
the circulation has relevance for maintaining cerebral perfusion, and early external haemor-
rhage control to maintain the blood pressure is important (12). Bleeding from scalp wounds
may occasionally be catastrophic.
AIRWAY
There may be evidence of airway obstruction with blood, vomit, foreign bodies or soft tissue
swelling. Associated facial or cranial trauma must be identified. Signs include bruising, lacera-
tions, fractures, boggy swellings, CSF leak from the ears or nose, and Battle’s sign suggestive of a
base of skull fracture. Airway management needs to be prompt, as patients with a depressed level
of consciousness are less capable of protecting their own airway. The airway should be cleared
and initially maintained with simple airway manoeuvres or airway adjuncts as required. Simple
measures include jaw thrust and chin lift (to allow for cervical spine control); head tilt should be
a last resort. Adjuncts, including supraglottic airway devices and suction, should be used where
necessary, although all can raise ICP. There is a theoretical risk that nasopharyngeal airway
devices may enter the cranium via a basal skull fracture. However, if the airway is in jeopardy and
no other airway devices are appropriate, their use should still be considered. In practice, penetra-
tion of the cranium is unlikely with careful insertion and would require a very large basal skull
defect indeed. If the skill set is available, intubation is the definitive airway procedure, allowing
the airway to be secured and optimal ventilation and oxygenation to be achieved. Mobile medical
teams with the appropriate skill set can provide drug-assisted intubation (see later). However,
there is always a need to balance the delay on scene resulting from achieving a secure airway with
rapid transfer to the receiving hospital following simple manoeuvres.
CERVICAL SPINE IMMOBILISATION

Cervical spine injury is common in this patient group. The risk increases with the severity of
TBI (15). Spinal immobilisation should therefore be established and maintained in patients
with reduced consciousness. Where possible ability to move the limbs should be documented
144
Initial assessment and management of TBI
in addition to any notable signs or symptoms of spinal cord injury (for example diaphragmatic
breathing, hypotension without obvious cause, bradycardia, priapism and loss of pain below a
dermatomal level) (16,17).
BREATHING
The catastrophic consequences of hypoxia mandate a thorough assessment of breathing and
ventilation. Hypoxia, hyperventilation and hypoventilation all require treatment. Oxygen
saturations and respiratory rate will guide the assessment. Even a single episode of hypoxia
(SpO2 <90%) should be avoided. High concentration oxygen should be administered via a
non-rebreathing mask aiming for an oxygen saturation greater than 95% (even in those with
COPD), as this provides a safety margin should the partial pressure of oxygen deteriorate rap-
idly. Ventilation may need to be assisted if saturations are below 90% on high concentration
oxygen, the respiratory rate is less than 10 or greater than 30, or chest expansion appears inad-
equate (8).
The decision to intubate and ventilate a head-injured patient is a balance of benefit versus
risk: whether to stay on scene to secure a definitive airway and institute controlled ventila-
tion, or scoop and run to the nearest neurosurgical centre for rapid definitive treatment using
simple effective airway adjuncts meanwhile? Intubation requires a skill set that not all pre-
hospital medical personnel have. However, knowledge of the reasons for and the process of
intubation will allow individuals who do to prepare for intubation and potentially reduce
vital time on scene.
Box 12.3 provides guidance regarding which patients should be considered for intubation
and ventilation (16).
BOX 12.3: Indications for Intubation and Ventilation Following Head Injury
▪▪ Coma – Not obeying commands, not speaking, not eye opening (GCS ≤ 8)
▪▪ Loss of protective laryngeal reflexes
▪▪ Spontaneous hyperventilation
▪▪ Irregular respirations
▪▪ Significantly deteriorating conscious level (1 or more points on the motor score) even if not
coma
▪▪ Unstable fractures of the facial skeleton
▪▪ Copious bleeding into the mouth (e.g. from skull base fracture)
▪▪ Seizures
▪▪ Combative patients who benefit from induction of anaesthesia for their own safety
Intubation in traumatic brain injury can be challenging and the decision to do so should
not be taken lightly. Patients can be combative and there may be associated facial trauma with
soiling and deformity of the airway. Manual in-line immobilisation of the cervical spine must
be maintained throughout the intubation process with due regard to potential injury during
airway manoeuvres thus making siting an endotracheal tube more difficult.
Anaesthetic and paralysing agents facilitate rapid control of the airway by a competent laryn-
goscopist. Ketamine is preferred for trauma anaesthesia. Evidence suggests that previous con-
cerns raised regarding changes in the intracranial pressure following ketamine administration
145
Head injury
are limited (15). A high-dose opiate (for example fentanyl) may be used in conjunction with
ketamine to reduce the response to laryngoscopy. Once intubated, the patient should continue
to be ventilated with appropriate sedation, muscle relaxation and analgesia en route to hospi-
tal. When using sedatives and analgesics, attention must be paid to potential undesirable side
effects which might contribute to secondary injury (for example haemodynamic instability) (9).
Deep sedation and muscle paralysis reduce the cerebral metabolic demands and allow optimi-
sation of ventilation to prevent hypoxia and preserve normocapnia. Prophylactic hyperventila-
tion causes cerebral vasoconstriction, may worsen ischaemia and secondary brain injury, and
is contraindicated. Recommendations suggest a PaCO2 of 4.5–5.0 kPa (18). There is a gradient
between the arterial and end-tidal concentrations of carbon dioxide (EtCO2) of 0.5–1.0 kPa.
Routine use of capnography in these patients guides the adjustment of ventilation to target an
EtCO2 of 4.0–4.5 kPa.
CIRCULATION
Systemic hypotension increases the morbidity and mortality from traumatic brain injury.
Hypotension in the early phases is unlikely to be caused by the head injury, and other sources
of blood loss should be sought and addressed. In many polytrauma patients, anti-fibrinolytic
agents (tranexamic acid) will be given as per local protocols (19). Trials are ongoing to deter-
mine the efficacy of tranexamic acid in isolated head injury (20). The blood pressure should
be supported with fluid and vasopressors to maintain adequate cerebral perfusion. Hypotonic
solutions such as dextrose should not be used for resuscitation. Scalp lacerations can cause
significant blood loss and should be attended to during the primary survey. If associated car-
diovascular side effects (arrhythmias, ventricular dysfunction, changes in ECG morphology)
are encountered, treatment should be supportive and management focused on the underlying
head injury (13).
DISABILITY
Conscious level is easily assessed using the AVPU system. There is limited evidence for using
the GCS in the pre-hospital environment as a reliable indicator of the severity of TBI (15),
but its use together with pupillary function may guide subsequent decision-making with
regard to the management of the injury. An accurate assessment of GCS, neurological signs
(sensory or motor deficit) and pupillary size and reactivity should be recorded at presenta-
tion and subsequently to establish a trend. The presence of drugs or alcohol and the addi-
tion of sedative agents can influence the GCS, making interpretation of trends difficult. The
presence of such agents should be clearly documented and communicated to the receiving
hospital team.
Seizures may occur acutely following traumatic head injury and should be managed as for
any convulsion (by protection from harm, protection of the airway, oxygenation, and medica-
tion such as a benzodiazepine). These seizures may precipitate further adverse events in the
injured brain because of a dramatic increase in the cerebral oxygen requirement. Opinions
vary greatly about routine anti-seizure prophylaxis. Prophylactic anticonvulsants are indi-
cated to decrease the incidence of early (within 7 days of injury) post-traumatic seizures,
but are not indicated in the pre-hospital context (9). Patients who are suffering seizures post
head injury should be considered for induction of anaesthesia and subsequent intubation and
ventilation.
146
Additional interventions
EXPOSURE AND ENVIRONMENT

There is as yet no confirmation from a high-quality randomised controlled trial that prophy-
lactic hypothermia improves outcome or reduces mortality following traumatic brain injury.
Previous research has suggested that using therapeutic hypothermia to reduce ICP might be
beneficial in TBI. However this was studied as part of the Eurotherm3235 trial and no improve-
ment in clinical outcomes was found compared to standard of care (10).
ADDITIONAL INTERVENTIONS
Pain should be managed effectively, as it can lead to a rise in ICP. Hypoglycaemia and hypergly-
caemia are associated with poor outcome from traumatic brain injury. Hypoglycaemia should
be treated promptly to avoid a cerebral metabolic crisis. Conversely, administration of hypogly-
caemic agents is not indicated in the pre-hospital environment. Tight glycaemic control (blood
glucose <6.7 mmol/L) has been shown to increase the incidence of hypoglycaemic events and
a more tolerant approach (mild hyperglycaemia) should be accepted aiming to keep the blood
glucose <10 mmol/L (21).
The use of steroids to reduce cerebral oedema and ICP following TBI is not recommended.
The majority of available evidence indicates that steroids do not improve outcome or lower ICP
in severe TBI. There is also strong evidence that steroids are deleterious. The MRC CRASH
Trial 2005 (corticosteroid randomisation after significant head injury) was a large international
double-blind randomised placebo-controlled trial of the effect of early administration of a
48-hour infusion of methylprednisolone on the risk of death and disability after head injury.
The risk of death was higher in the corticosteroid group than in the placebo group (22). Similarly
the results of two randomised, controlled trials of the neurosteroid progesterone showed no
benefit with respect to a functional outcome at 6 months (23).
Obstructing cerebral venous drainage can further compound the problem of maintaining
adequate cerebral perfusion. If possible the trolley should be slightly head-up, with the head in
a neutral position, and ties and collars loosened sufficiently so as to not cause venous conges-
tion. The administration of mannitol has been common practice in the management of TBI with
suspected or actual raised ICP. There are two described mechanisms of action of mannitol: an
immediate plasma-expanding effect, which reduces the haematocrit, increases the deformabil-
ity of erythrocytes (and thereby reduces blood viscosity), increases CBF, and increases cerebral
oxygen delivery, as well as a delayed osmotic gradient effect (15–30 min), which mobilises
water across an intact blood-brain barrier into plasma (9,14). The risks of mannitol therapy
include a rebound phenomenon with reversal of the osmotic gradients allowing water to pass
back into the extracellular space of the brain and reduced cerebral perfusion due to hypovo-
laemia, as a result of the diuretic effect. Despite widespread current use there is insufficient
reliable evidence to make recommendations on the use of mannitol in the management of
patients with traumatic head injury and insufficient data on the effectiveness of pre-hospital
administration (24). Mannitol crystallises at low temperatures, which reduces its suitability for
pre-hospital use.
Hypertonic saline (HS) can also be used for osmotherapy. The principle effect on ICP
is thought to be due to osmotic mobilisation of water across the intact blood-brain barrier,
which reduces cerebral water content. Effects on the microcirculation may also have a role.
HS dehydrates endothelial cells and erythrocytes, which increases the diameter of the vessels
and deformability of erythrocytes and leads to plasma volume expansion with improved blood
147
Head injury
flow. It was thought that HS would benefit patients with TBI, as it has the potential to preserve
or even improve haemodynamic parameters. However, current evidence is not strong enough
to make recommendations on the use, concentration and method of administration of HS.
Consequently, in adults there is insufficient evidence to support the use of HS over mannitol
for osmotherapy at present (9,14).
TRANSFER
Pre-hospital recognition of traumatic brain injury and an effective management strategy are
essential to the patient’s recovery. Vital actions in the pre-hospital setting include (12,14):
• Information gathering by emergency medical call-takers and dispatchers to determine if

the patient potentially has a significant brain injury.
• Dispatching the optimal personnel and equipment to the scene and allocating the correct
response.
• Carrying out a rapid and accurate assessment of the overall neurological situation
through evaluation of the mechanism of injury, the scene, and the patient examination.
• Initiating the appropriate clinical interventions and management strategy to prevent or
correct hypotension or hypoxaemia and to address other potential threats to life or limb.
At this step the decision regarding the level of responder dispatched to the scene impacts
on patient care.
• Selecting the most appropriate transport mode.
• Selecting the most appropriate destination facility to allow for rapid detection and
treatment of operable lesions.
Standby calls to the chosen destination should be made for all patients with a GCS less than
or equal to 8 to ensure appropriately experienced professionals are available for their treatment
and to prepare for imaging. The current primary investigation of choice for the detection of
acute clinically important brain injuries is CT imaging of the head (16).
The patient needs to be transferred to the most appropriate facility for management of the
injury. Ideally this should be a major trauma centre (MTC) with a neurosurgical capability.
This limited resource may not always be directly accessible and will depend on the regional
configurations of the trauma network. The receiving emergency department may be required
to continue the supportive pre-hospital management and identify the extent of head and asso-
ciated injuries before promptly referring on to the neurosurgical centre. A provisional written
radiology report should be made available within 1 hour of the scan being performed (16).
Patients requiring an onward emergency transfer to a neuroscience unit should be accompa-
nied by a doctor with appropriate training and experience in the transfer of patients with acute
brain injury. The doctor should be familiar with the pathophysiology of head injury, the drugs
and equipment they will use, and with working in the confines of an ambulance (or helicopter
if appropriate). They should also have a dedicated and adequately trained assistant and adhere
to the minimum monitoring standards (18).
HEAD INJURY IN CHILDREN

Of the 1.4 million attending emergency departments annually with a head injury, between 33%
and 50% are children under 15 years of age (16). During the treatment process, families should
148
References
have as much access to their child as is practical. In children, as in adults, global or regional
ischaemia remains an important secondary insult to the acutely injured brain. Paediatric values
for blood pressure, cerebral blood flow and cerebral metabolic rate differ from that of an adult.
A CPP threshold of 40–50 mmHg may be considered with age-specific thresholds for infants
at the lower end and adolescents at the upper end of this range (25). The blood pressure should
be maintained at a level appropriate for their age. The paediatric version of the Glasgow Coma
Scale should include a ‘grimace’ alternative to the verbal score to facilitate scoring in pre-verbal
children (16).
SUMMARY
Traumatic head injury is common. Avoidance of hypoxia and hypotension is key to preventing
secondary injury. Effective management techniques and appropriate decision-making regard-
ing patient destination are essential.
REFERENCES
1. Dawodu ST. Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI) – Definition, epidemiology, pathophysiology.
March 6, 2013. http://emedicine.medscape.com/article/326510-overview.
2. Murray G, Teasdale GM, Braakman R, Cohadon F, Dearden M, Iannotti F, Karimi A
et al. The European Brain Injury Consortium survey of head injuries. Acta Neurochirurgica
(Wien) 1999;141(3):223–236.
3. Roozenbeek B, Maas AIR, Menon DK. Changing patterns in the epidemiology of trau-
matic brain injury. Nature Reviews Neurology 2013;9:231–236.
4. Tagliaferri E, Compagnone C, Korsic M, Servadei F, Kraus J. A systematic review of
brain injury epidemiology in Europe. Acta Neurochirurgica (Wien) 2006;148:255–268.
5. Yates PJ, Williams WH, Harris A, Round A, Jenkins R. An epidemiological study of head
injuries in a UK population attending an emergency department. Journal of Neurology,
Neurosurgery, and Psychiatry 2006;77:699–701.
6. Critchley G, Memon A. Epidemiology of head injury. In Head Injury, PC Whitfield, EO
Thomas, F Summers, M Whyte, PJ Hutchinson (eds.). Cambridge University Press, 2009,
1–11.
7. Ganacher RP. Traumatic Brain Injury: Methods for Clinical and Forensic Neuropsychiatric
Assessment. 2nd ed. CRC Press, 2008, 2–17.
8. Fisher JD, Brown SN, Cooke MW (eds.). UK Ambulance Service Clinical Practice Guidelines.
2006.
9. Brain Trauma Foundation. Guidelines for the management of severe traumatic brain
injury. Journal of Neurotrauma 2007;24(sup 1):S7–S13.
10. Andrews PA, Sinclair HL, Battison CG, Polderman KH, Citerio G, Mascia L, Harris
BA et al. Hypothermia for Intracranial hypertension after traumatic brain injury (the
Eurotherm 3235 trial). N Engl Med J 2015;373:2403–2412.
11. Cerebral perfusion pressure. Trauma.org 2000;5:1. http://www.trauma.org/archive
/ neuro/cpp.html.
12. Brain Trauma Foundation. Guidelines for prehospital management of traumatic brain
injury 2nd edition. Prehospital Emergency Care 2007;12(Supp 1):S1–S52.
149
Head injury
13. Gregory T, Smith M. Cardiovascular complications of brain injury. Continuing Education

in Anaesthesia, Critical Care & Pain 2012;12(2):67–71.
14. Maas A, Stocchetti N, Bullock R. Moderate and severe traumatic brain injury in adults.
Lancet Neurology 2008;7:728–741.
15. Dinsmore J. Traumatic brain injury: An evidence-based review of management.
Continuing Education in Anaesthesia, Critical Care & Pain 2013;13(6):189–195.
16. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE). Head injury. Clinical guide-
line CG176. 2014. www.guidance.nice.org.uk/cg176.
17. Bonner S, Smith C. Initial management of acute spinal cord injury. Continuing Education
in Anaesthesia, Critical Care & Pain 2013;13(6):224–231.
18. Association of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland. Recommendations for the Safe
Transfer of Patients with Brain Injury. London: Association of Anaesthetists of Great
Britain and Ireland, 2006.
19. CRASH-2 Collaborators. The importance of early treatment with tranexamic acid in
bleeding trauma patients: An exploratory analysis of the CRASH-2 randomised con-
trolled trial. Lancet 2011;377(9771):1096–1101.
20. Dewan Y, Komolafe EO, Mejia-Mantilaa JH, Perel P, Roberts I, Shakur H. CRASH-3 –
Tranexamic acid for the treatment of significant traumatic brain injury. Trials 2012;13:87.
21. Vespa P, McArthur DL, Stein N, Huang SC, Shao W, Filippou M, Etchepare M, Glenn T,
Hovda DA. Tight glycaemic control increases distress in traumatic brain injury: A ran-
domized controlled within-subjects trial. Critical Care Medicine 2012;40(6):1923–1929.
22. Edwards P, Arango M, Balica L, Cottingham R, El-Sayed H, Farrell B, Fernandes J et al.
Final results of MRC CRASH, a randomized placebo-controlled trial of intravenous cor-
ticosteroid in adults with head injury-outcomes at 6 months. Lancet 2005;365:1957–1959.
23. Schwamm LH. Progesterone for traumatic brain injury – Resisting the sirens’ song
(Editorial). New England Journal of Medicine 2014:371(26):2522–2523.
24. Wakai A, McCabe A, Roberts I, Schierhout G. Mannitol for acute traumatic brain injury.
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2013;(8):CD001049.
25. Kochanek PM, Carney N, Adelson PD, Ashwal S, Bell MJ, Bratton S, Carson S et al.
Guidelines for the acute medical management of severe traumatic brain injury in
infants, children, and adolescents – second edition. Pediatric Critical Care Medicine
2012;13 (Suppl 1):S1–S82.
150
Spinal injuries
13
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the importance of secondary injury prevention

▪▪ Be able to perform an accurate neurological assessment
▪▪ Be competent to manage the treatment and handling of a patient with an established or
suspected spinal injury
INTRODUCTION
Spinal injury can be one of the most devastating outcomes following major trauma. It causes
significant morbidity and mortality, and spinal injury patients very often need long-term, com-
plex and costly care. Fortunately, the incidence of spinal injury is reasonably low: in the range
of 19 to 88 cases per 100,000 population for spinal fractures and 14 to 53 per million population
for a spinal cord injury (1–6). Spinal fractures or dislocations without cord injury were found to
occur in 9.6% of patients presenting with major trauma in one cohort study; in the same study
1.8% of patients had a cord injury (7). Spinal injuries typically affect young adults with the
incidence decreasing with age before increasing again in patients over 75. There is a 2:1 male to
female ratio. Spinal injuries following apparently minor trauma are an important component of
the increasingly common phenomenon of ‘silver trauma’.
Certain mechanisms of injury offer some predictive value for the presence of a spinal injury.
Falls from greater than 2 m, then sports injuries (to include leisure activities such as horse rid-
ing) followed by road traffic collisions (RTCs) have the highest odds ratios for spinal fractures
and dislocations. For actual spinal cord injuries, sports injuries show the highest association
followed by falls greater than 2 m and then RTCs. However, the relative rarity of sports-related
incidents means that they account for just 1.8% of all injuries. This is in comparison to RTCs
which account for the majority (37%), then falls of greater than 2 m (30%), and falls of less than
2 m (23%).
151
Spinal injuries
PRACTICE POINT
Where no neurological examination is possible, a high index of suspicion should be maintained
in the unconscious patient, especially in patients with concomitant chest injuries and those pre-
senting after a high-risk mechanism: RTCs, sports injuries and falls of over 2 m.
ASSOCIATED INJURIES
As might be expected, there is an association between chest, abdominal and pelvic injuries and
the presence of a spinal cord injury, simply reflecting the increased forces undergone by the
patient during the trauma. Concurrent chest injuries demonstrate the strongest association.
Spinal injuries are also associated with a reduced Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) score, with the
likelihood increasing as the GCS score decreases. However, although the likelihood of spinal
injury increases with reducing GCS score it is important to remember that the majority (69%)
of all injuries are seen in patients with a GCS score of 15.
DISTRIBUTION OF INJURIES
The traditional teaching regarding the pre-hospital management of spinal injuries has empha-
sised, almost to the exclusion of other areas, injuries to the cervical spine. However, injuries at
all levels of the spinal column can have profound consequences (8). The majority of cord injuries
are seen in the cervical region (45%), but the incidences of injury elsewhere are thoracic spine
(28%), lumbar (23%) and multiple spinal levels (1%). Only 25% of all spinal fractures and disloca-
tions involved the cervical spine, with 28% the thoracic, 37% the lumbar, and injuries at multiple
levels accounting for a tenth (7) (Figure 13.1).
PRACTICE POINT
Spinal injuries are seen in about 1 in 10 patients with major trauma.
ANATOMY
The vertebral column is made up of 33 vertebrae: 7 cervical, 12 thoracic, 5 lumbar, 5 sacral
and 4 coccygeal. The sacral and coccygeal vertebrae are fused forming the sacrum and coccyx,
respectively. The spinal column is most vulnerable to injury at the junctions between articulat-
ing regions – the cervicothoracic junction, the thoracolumbar junction, and to a lesser extent at
the lumbosacral junction (Figure 13.2).
The spinal cord runs from the foramen magnum down the spinal canal ending between T12
and L3, but usually at about L1. The cauda equina, made up of the lumbar, sacral and coccygeal
spinal nerves, continues below this. The spinal cord is divided into 31 segments with each seg-
ment having a motor and sensory nerve root. Each motor nerve root supplies a distinct group of
muscles and each sensory root receives innervation from a specific area of skin. Testing sensa-
tion and motor function allows the mapping of neurological injury to a specific level. An injury
is classified according to the lowest level that still has full neurological function. (The sensory
152
Anatomy
250,584
(100%)
Patients > 16 years
from 1988–2009 with major trauma
217,455
(86.8%)
Patients with other
than spine injuries
33,139
(13.2%/100%)
Patients with spine injury
9,477 7,853 11,277 1,488 469 2,326 249

(28.6%) (23.7%) (34.0%) (4.5%) (1.4%) (7.0%) (0.8%)
Cervical Thoracic Lumbar C&T C&L T&L C&T&L
4,650 24,000
(1.9/14.0%) (9.6%/72.4%)
Patients with other Patients with exclusively spinal
spine injuries fractures/dislocations
5,879 6,734 8,902 650 197 1,562 76

(24.5%) (28.1%) (37.1%) (2.7%) (0.8%) (6.5%) (<0.3%)
4,489
(1.8%/13.5%)
Patients with spinal cord injury
2,039 1,321 1,069 21 9 30 0

(45.4%) (29.4%) (23.8%) (0.5%) (0.2%) (0.7%) (0%)
416
(0.2%/1.3%)
Patients with SCIWORA
Figure 13.1 The incidence of spinal fractures and cord injuries from TARN. (Reproduced by permission
of TARN and redrawn by Andrew Dakin, Department of Clinical Illustration QEHB.)
levels are illustrated in Figure 13.3 and Table 13.1; a limited list of myotomes is also included
in Table 13.1.)
Not only can the level of injury be quantified on examination, but the nature and location
of the injury within the cord may also be determined. Specific areas of the cord contain specific
nerve components, for example the motor fibres lie within the lateral and anterior regions of the
cord, whilst the posterior region contains sensory functions such as proprioception and vibra-
tion. Using this information it is possible to identify areas of damage (Figure 13.4). The motor
fibres also decussate (cross the midline) before descending in the spinal cord. Therefore injuries
produce signs on the opposite side (contralateral). The same applies to the sensory modalities of
light touch, proprioception and vibration sense the fibres which carry them also decussating. The
153
Spinal injuries
fibres for the modalities of pain and tempera-

ture do not decussate, therefore symptoms
can be identified on the ipsilateral side to the
injury.
The cord also carries both the sympa-
thetic nervous system, which leaves the cord
between C7 and L1, and the parasympathetic
system, which leaves between S2 and S4.
The vascular supply to each cord segment
is primarily from three arteries: one lying
anterior and two lying posterior on the surface
of the cord and running the length of the cord
(Figure 13.5). There are a number of regions
of the cord where the blood supply is fragile,
known as watershed areas, due to their dis-
tance from the supply arteries from the ante-
rior and posterior arteries. These watershed
areas are therefore susceptible to ischaemia in (a)
the event of hypotension and poor perfusion. F
In addition, the centre of the cord, being most C
distant from the supplying arteries is also at E E
risk. An ischaemic insult can therefore pro-
duce a range of clinical patterns of injury. D B
A
MECHANISMS OF INJURY (b)
The spinal column can undergo abnormal Figure 13.2 (a) The vertebral column viewed
extension, flexion, rotation and compression, anteriorly posteriorly and laterally. (b) The
or a combination of any of the four. In gen- anatomy of a typical vertebra with a dense bony
body (A), behind which the spinal foramen (B)
eral, each injury type will lead to a predictable carries the spinal cord. The medially facing facet
injury pattern. The cervical spine is commonly joints (C) articulate with the vertebra above.
injured through a combination of abnormal There is a laterally placed pedicle (D) from which
the transverse processes (E) arise for muscular
flexion and extension, together with rotation. attachments. There is a posterior spinous
Hyperflexion is commonly seen in RTC inju- process (F).
ries and from activities such as diving. If there
is the addition of rotation, as seen in significant RTCs and major impact trauma, the extent of the
injury will be correspondingly more severe. Hyperextension injuries tend only to be found in the
cervical and lumbar regions of the spinal column.
Compression injuries are normally associated with falls from height. Wedge fractures, when the
vertebral body is compressed at its anterior border, are caused by compression and forward flexion.
These are the most common fractures seen in the lumbar and thoracic regions. The C1 vertebra can
also be compressed following transmission of force applied directly to the crown of the head.
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY INJURY

The injury to the spinal cord can be separated into primary and secondary neurological
damage. Primary neurological injury is damage to neural tissue resulting directly, from the
154
Mechanisms of injury
C2 C1
C3
C4 C5
C2
C3 C5
C4 C6 C8
C5 (C4) C78 T1
T1 (T2) C T1 T2
T2 T23
T3 T4 T3
T
T4 C6 T56 T4
T5 T
T7 T5
T6 T8
T7 T9
T8 C3 T1101 T6
T9 T12
TL1 T7
T10
L2
T11 L3 T8
T12 L4 T9
L1 S1
S2 C8 C7 L5 S2 T10
L2
S3 T11
L3 S3
S4 T12
S5
L4 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L4
L5 L3
L5
S1
S2
S4 L4 S3
S4
S5
L5
L4
Figure 13.3 Dermatones.
Table 13.1 Segmental values for dermatomes and myotomes
Segment Representative dermatomes Representative myotomes

C5 Sensation over deltoid Deltoid muscle
C6 Sensation over thumb Wrist extensors
C7 Sensation over middle finger Elbow extensors
C8 Sensation over little finger Middle finger flexors
T1 Sensation over inner aspect of Little finger abduction
elbow
T4 Sensation around nipple –
T8 Sensation over xiphisternum –
T10 Sensation around umbilicus –
T12 Sensation around symphysis –
L1 Sensation in inguinal region –
L2 Sensation on anterior upper thigh Hip flexors
L3 Sensation on anterior mid-thigh Knee extensors
L4 Sensation on medial aspect of leg Ankle dorsiflexors
L5 Sensation between first and Long toe extensors
second toes
S1 Sensation on lateral border of foot Ankle plantar flexors
S3 Sensation over ischial tuberosity –
S4/5 Sensation around perineum –
155
Spinal injuries
C4 Injury
• Quadriplegia/
Tetraplegia, results in complete 7 Cervical Vertebrae
paralysis below the neck
C6 Injury 12 Thoracic Vertebrae
• Results in partial paralysis of
hands and arms as well as
lower body
T6 Injury 5 Lumbar Vertebrae
• Paraplegia, results in paralysis
below the chest 5 Sacral Vertebrae
4 Coccyx (fused together)
L1 Injury
• Paraplegia, results in paralysis
below the waist
Figure 13.4 Cord damage levels.
Blood supply to the spinal cord: Horizontal distribution mechanism of injury. Causes of primary
Posterior injury include damage to the cord from the
Posterior
spinal artery abnormal movement undergone by the spi-
nal column and cord, damage from bony
fragments or fractures, or compression from
haematomas and soft tissues. These mecha-
nisms frequently reduce the volume of the
canal. The primary injury directly disrupts
the nerves and causes haemorrhage within
the white, and particularly, grey matter.
Peripheral Secondary neurological injury is the ongo-
Anterior spinal Central ing injury to tissue following the initial
artery
Anterior traumatic insult. This can continue for a
The central area supplied only by the anterior spinal artery is
predominantly a motor area
number of hours as oedema develops, fur-
ther compressing neurones and compromis-
Figure 13.5 Cross section of the spinal cord. ing perfusion to tissues. Secondary injury
often extends above the area of initial pri-
mary injury by up to two spinal levels. It is at
about 8 hours post injury that ischaemia develops into infraction and necrosis and becomes
irreversible. The common causes of secondary neurological damage are
• Hypoxia
• Hypoperfusion
• Further mechanical disruption
Trauma patients are frequently globally hypoxic and hypoperfused due to the extent of their
concomitant injuries. Recognising and addressing these issues is key to survival, let alone to
minimising spinal cord injury. There is debate regarding the importance of minimising further
mechanical disruption by limiting further movement of the spinal column, which has for so
long been a central tenet of pre-hospital spinal management (9). Efforts to improve oxygenation
and perfusion should not be hampered by spinal immobilisation.
156
Pre-hospital assessment and management
NEUROGENIC SHOCK AND SPINAL SHOCK

Neurogenic shock is the term given to hypotension associated with the loss of sympathetic auto-
nomic outflow following a high (above T6) cord injury. The loss of sympathetic outflow leads to
uninhibited vasodilatation and a redistributive shock, along with uninhibited vagal responses,
namely profound bradycardia. Classically, patients present with a triad of hypotension, brady-
cardia and peripheral vasodilatation.
The term spinal shock is unhelpful, but its use persists. Spinal shock is defined as the complete
loss of all neurological function below the level of cord injury. This period of flaccid paralysis and
areflexia lasts for 24 to 72 hours, and therefore prevents full assessment of the true extent of
injury and neurological deficit. Full recovery can be seen after periods of profound paralysis.
The term spinal shock therefore is effectively spinal concussion; it certainly has nothing to do
with inadequate perfusion.
PRE-HOSPITAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

The pre-hospital management of spinal injuries is centred on the recognition of an injury or,
far more frequently, the recognition of the possibility of an injury or potential injury. The patient
is therefore managed with the aim of minimising further cord damage by minimising further
movement of the spinal column (9,10).
The belief that minimising further movement of the spinal column will avoid further dete-
rioration of a neurological injury is not one fully supported by evidence (11). The evidence is
weak both for and against current practice. Indeed, there is evidence supporting the view that
immobilisation might be harmful and worsen outcome (12). The principle has been put for-
ward that given the considerable force required to bring about the primary fracture and injury,
subsequent movement is unlikely to cause further damage to the cord (13). The lack of evi-
dence to determine best practice makes it difficult to move away radically from the practice of
widespread immobilisation, given that an injury can cause devastating consequences, although
current practice is more pragmatic than previously.
INITIAL MANAGEMENT
Current pre-hospital management follows the <C>ABCDE method. Consideration is given to
minimising further movement in the cervical, and also the wider spinal column, only once cata-
strophic haemorrhage and life-threatening airway compromise have been managed. Examination
for any spinal injury, and its extent, is undertaken once other more pressing issues have been
addressed, and is usually delayed until after arrival in hospital. Treating hypoxia and hypoper-
fusion as part of the patient’s overall care will also help to reduce secondary spinal cord injury.
IMMOBILISATION
The ‘gold standard’ of triple immobilisation is seen as the correct application of an appropriately
sized cervical collar, and securing the head, in neutral alignment, to a firm surface with blocks
and tape or straps (Figure 13.6) (14). Manual in-line immobilisation (or stabilisation) is the term
given to the practice of holding the patients head in a neutral position before instigation of tri-
ple immobilisation. Immobilisation is nearly always performed once the patient has returned to
neutral alignment. In rare cases the injury may make this impossible: should the patient report
157
Spinal injuries
pain or paraesthesia on gentle movement of the head

towards the neutral position, then no further movement
should occur with the patient being immobilised in the
pain- or paraesthesia-free position.
More commonly pre-existing disease, such as anky-
losing spondylitis, will prevent neutral alignment. In
such cases immobilisation should be in the normal
alignment for that patient (15).
The previous practice of ensuring manual in-
line immobilisation as soon as possible has been
de-emphasised with the adoption of a more prag-
matic approach. Requiring one clinician to be solely
Figure 13.6 Triple immobilisation.
responsible for ‘immobilising the neck’ is often not an
efficient use of resources. This can sometimes be del-
egated to a bystander or other emergency services responder, as it is a relatively unskilled
task. Alternatively, and most simply, the conscious patient can be advised not to move their
neck until further assessment has been made. The unconscious patient is unlikely to move
their neck independently and so the head can be moved, and secured, in a neutral position,
without manual support where possible.
THE AGITATED PATIENT

The uncooperative, combative patient presents the greatest challenge. Their risk of spinal injury
is higher given that the mechanism of injury is likely to have been severe enough to cause serious
head injury (a common cause of agitation), yet they are not in a position to cooperate. Manual
immobilisation is of value in this situation, as it can rapidly react to the movements of the patient,
and the constant attention and reassurance of a clinician can have a calming effect. However,
the movements the patient is making should not be forcibly restricted by the immobilising clini-
cian, as there is the potential for further harm if restraint requires noticeable strength. Sedation
and pre-hospital anaesthesia are increasingly commonly used, not just to facilitate immobilisa-
tion but also as part of the overall care for the patient. If this is not possible or appropriate, some
patients may tolerate a collar alone. Otherwise, no immobilisation should be applied and in no
circumstances should forcible restraint, either manually or with straps or tape, occur.
A similarly pragmatic approach is taken to the timing of the application of a cervical collar.
Manual in-line stabilisation without a cervical collar in place is acceptable whilst assessment and
treatment is ongoing. Application need only occur, if indicated, when the patient is due to be
moved and packaged for transport. Wearing a correctly applied collar is not comfortable and not
without the risk of harm; therefore minimising duration of application is in the patient’s interests.
Again it is important to stress the possibility of injuries in the spinal column other than
the cervical region. Devastating injuries can occur along the length of the spinal cord. Clinical
vigilance and the current practice of minimising movement through immobilisation, when
indicated, applies to the whole length of the spinal column.
ONGOING MANAGEMENT
Further management commonly involves an assessment as to whether spinal immobilisation pre-
cautions are indicated or necessary. Although over 13% of patients suffering major trauma have a spi-
nal injury, the incidence in patients presenting to the emergency department following blunt trauma
158
Management of penetrating trauma
is approximately 2% (16,17). It is well recognised that a vast number of patients, approaching 98%
of all immobilised patients, are immobilised without any spinal injury being subsequently found.
Spinal immobilisation is not without negative consequences. Apart from being uncomfort-
able and distressing for some patients (18), it can restrict ventilation (19,20), increase intracranial
pressure (21–23), hamper the drainage of vomit and blood with an increased risk of aspira-
tion (24), obstruct efforts at airway management (25), and cause tissue pressure damage (26). In
addition the financial costs of transport, examination and investigation of unnecessary injuries
which are clinically unlikely is also significant. The time taken to immobilise patients on scene
can be up to 5 minutes (27). This can be a significant delay in time-critical patients.
PRACTICE POINT
If there is associated head injury, the cervical collar should be loosened or removed, and the
patient immobilised with head blocks and tape.
Therefore appropriate efforts should be made to use spinal immobilisation only in patients
who require it. No pre-hospital algorithm has been validated; current guidelines on cervical
spine immobilisation (28,29) are based on an extrapolation of in-hospital practice which itself
is based on the NEXUS and Canadian C-spine rules which aim to identify patients in need of
further cervical spine imaging. The ability of pre-hospital providers to correctly apply the rules
has been demonstrated (30–36).
The National Emergency X-Radiography Utilization Study (NEXUS) was an observational
study of cervical spine radiography in blunt trauma patients (16). This study of 34,069 patients
stated that significant injury to the cervical spine could be excluded without the need for imag-
ing if five criteria each indicative of low risk could be met:
1. No midline cervical tenderness

2. No focal neurological deficit
3. Normal alertness
4. No intoxication
5. No painful distracting injury
Midline tenderness was reported in up to 58% of patients without a neck injury (17) and no
definition regarding what comprises a distracting injury was initially given. Attempts at a defini-
tion suggest that more proximal injuries (upper limb, ribs, in other words closer to the neck) are
more distracting, together with those reported to give a pain score of more than 7 out of 10 (37).
The Canadian C-Spine Rule is based on high- and low-risk factors, generating a series of
three questions (Table 13.2) (17). It is based on a prospective cohort study of 8924 blunt trauma
patients who were not walking after an incident with a dangerous mechanism of injury but
alert, stable, had neck pain, or had no neck pain but had a visible injury above the clavicle.
The NICE guidance is based primarily on the Canadian C-Spine Rule but combined with the
‘absence of midline tenderness’ from the NEXUS rules in an attempt to increase sensitivity (29).
MANAGEMENT OF PENETRATING TRAUMA

Spinal immobilisation is very rarely warranted for penetrating head and neck injuries (38).
Immobilisation is associated with doubling of the mortality rate, possibly due to increased on-
scene time for application of immobilisation and therefore delayed transport to definitive care (39).
159
Spinal injuries
Table 13.2 The Canadian C-Spine Rule

1. Is any high-risk factor present that mandates radiography?
Age 65 years or more
Dangerous mechanism of injury
• A fall from greater than one metre or five stairs
• An axial load to the head, e.g. diving
• A high-speed motor vehicle collision (combined speed >100 km/hr)
• A rollover motor vehicle accident
• Ejection from a motor vehicle
• An accident involving motorised recreational vehicles
• A bicycle collision
Paraesthesia in the extremities
2. If none of the above is present, is any low-risk factor present that allows safe assessment
of range of motion?
• Simple rear-end motor vehicle collision
• Sitting position in ED
• Ambulatory at any time since injury
• Delayed onset of neck pain
• Absence of midline C-spine tenderness
3. If no high-risk factors are present, and the patient does not have any of the low risk factors rotation
can be assessed: can the patient actively rotate their neck 45 degrees to the left and right?
Patients capable of neck rotation do not need to be immobilised.
Patients who need immobilisation in these circumstances will usually have clear indications of
a spinal injury (40).
EXAMINATION
As highlighted earlier, consideration should be given to the whole spinal cord, as well as exami-
nation for cervical tenderness. Where possible, the length of the column should be examined
for tenderness and alignment. In the majority of cases a detailed examination will occur after
arrival in hospital. Should the patient be found in a position that enables examination, then the
opportunity to examine the back should be considered. Delaying evacuation from the scene to
logroll the patient for examination is not appropriate.
Consideration should be given to the presence of neurogenic shock, classically presenting
with hypotension, bradycardia and peripheral vasodilatation below the level of the injury. This
is rare. The diagnosis is one of exclusion and other more common reasons for hypotension
should be considered first. In addition a spinal injury may mask the classical signs of hypoten-
sion when the two co-exist. A spinal injury causing neurogenic shock is unlikely if there is no
neurological deficit or if the level of injury is below T6.
PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT

Current best practice focuses on minimal patient handling (41). The principle of minimising
movement is fundamental to this approach. Planning ahead is essential: If it is thought that
160
Paediatric spinal injury
immobilisation is warranted, then the process of pack-

aging for immobilisation and transport should be con-
sidered early in the patient’s management. This will
streamline the patient’s movements, reducing time as
well as overall movement, both on scene and at defini-
tive care. The principles of minimal handling are
• Use a long spinal board, if necessary, for extrication

only
Figure 13.7 A scoop stretcher.
• Transfer the patient using a scoop stretcher combined
with a minimal tilt to allow insertion of the scoop blades
Immobilisation for transport to definitive care should take the form of
• A scoop stretcher if the total scoop time will be less than 45 minutes
• A vacuum mattress if a prolonged transport time is likely
Immobilisation for transport should no longer be performed on a rigid long spinal board
due to the increased discomfort and risk of tissue pressure damage. Immobilisation for short
transfers to definitive care should be carried out using a modern scoop stretcher (Figure 13.7).
In addition to being more comfortable, and potentially having a lower risk of tissue pressure
damage, use of a scoop stretcher should shorten timelines and transfers at definitive care.
Logrolling a patient is no longer considered the optimum method when positioning a
patient for immobilisation. A minimal tilt of 10° to 15° is sufficient to insert the blades of the
scoop stretcher. Minimising movement will help to reduce movement of the spinal column as
well as adhering to the principles of careful patient handling.
Once the patient is packaged for transfer to definitive care, a pragmatic approach to immo-
bilisation can be employed. In the compliant or the anaesthetised patient, the collar can be
loosened to improve comfort and limit potential increases in intracranial pressure.
PAEDIATRIC SPINAL INJURY

Fortunately, devastating spinal injuries are rare amongst the paediatric population. Nevertheless
they present a challenge in the pre-hospital setting.
One specific type of injury seen in children under the age of 8 is spinal cord injury without
radiological abnormality (SCIWORA). This occurs as a result of the increased hypermobility and
laxity of the paediatric spinal column, which can withstand trauma without fracturing. The
underlying cord however is still damaged from the abnormal flexion, extension, compression,
distraction or rotation. Although no bony abnormality will be seen on plain X-ray or CT, the
injury will be identified using MRI scanning.
The management of paediatric spinal injuries or potential injuries is a challenge. Immobilising
an injured, frightened child will often be an additional traumatic experience for them. Again a
pragmatic approach should be taken. The NEXUS criteria included patients under the age of 16,
but there is inevitably an age limit below which young children will be unable to give meaning-
ful information. Distress will be just as great a distraction as a ‘distracting injury’. Some reas-
surance can be taken from the rarity of significant spinal injuries in the paediatric population.
At its simplest, and least upsetting, manual in-line stabilisation without any collar is appro-
priate and tolerated by many. If a child is already restrained in a car seat, then transfer to defini-
tive care in that car seat may solve many issues. Vacuum mattresses and splints can be useful
161
Spinal injuries
and are often well tolerated. Simple makeshift head roll supports have their advocates. But it
may be that no immobilisation is tolerated, in which case the child should be transported to
hospital following the principles of minimal handling with as little movement as is possible. It
is important to remember the normal anatomical position for the age of the child. In the infant,
with a relatively larger head, lying flat will lead to abnormal flexion and so support under the
torso may be required (42).
SUMMARY
The pre-hospital management of spinal injuries is currently being scrutinised. Whilst recognis-
ing the devastating consequences of these reasonably rare injuries, the practice of routine immo-
bilisation is being challenged. A more pragmatic approach, in the absence of robust evidence
and reflecting concerns that immobilisation may harm patients, is being adopted. Decision tools
may help to identify patients who need immobilisation and, importantly, those who do not.
Pre-hospital spinal management should not distract from, or delay, the management of life-
threatening injuries. The whole length of the spine, not just the cervical spine, should be con-
sidered when managing patients, who should be managed expediently following the principles
of minimal handling.
REFERENCES
1. Pirouzmand F. Epidemiological trends of spine and spinal cord injuries in the larg-
est Canadian adult trauma center from 1986 to 2006. Journal of Neurosurgery Spine
2010;12(2):131–140.
2. Lenehan B, Boran S, Street J, Higgins T, McCormack D, Poynton AR. Demographics
of acute admissions to a National Spinal Injuries Unit. European Spine Journal 2009;
18(7):938–942.
3. Hu R, Mustard C, Burns C. Epidemiology of incident spinal fracture in a complete
population. Spine 1996;21(4):492–499.
4. Dryden DM, Saunders LD, Rowe BH, May LA, Yiannakoulias N, Svenson LW,
Schopflocher DP, Voaklander DC. The epidemiology of traumatic spinal cord injury in
Alberta, Canada. Canadian Journal of Neurolological Sciences 2003;30(2):113–121.
5. Jackson AB, Dijkers M, Devivo MJ, Poczatek RB. A demographic profile of new traumatic
spinal cord injuries: Change and stability over 30 years. Archives of Physical Medicine and
Rehabilitaion 2004;85(11):1740–1748.
6. Pickett W, Simpson K, Walker J, Brison RJ. Traumatic spinal cord injury in Ontario,
Canada. Journal of Trauma 2003;55(6):1070–1076.
7. Hasler RM, Exadaktylos AK, Bouamra O, Benneker LM, Clancy M, Sieber R,
Zimmermann H, Lecky F. Epidemiology and predictors of cervical spine injury in adult
major trauma patients: A multicenter cohort study. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care
Surgery 2012;72(4):975–981.
8. Goldberg W, Mueller C, Panacek E, Tigges S, Hoffman JR, Mower WR. Distribution
and patterns of blunt traumatic cervical spine injury. Annals of Emergency Medicine
2001;38:17–21.
9. American College of Surgeons. Advanced Trauma Life Support for Doctors. 8th ed.
Chicago: American College of Surgeons, 2009.
162
References
10. Theodore N, Hadley MN, Aarabi B, Dhall SS, Gelb DE, Hurlbert RJ, Rozzelle CJ, Ryken
TC, Walters BC. Prehospital cervical spinal immobilization after trauma. Neurosurgery
2013;72(Suppl 2):22–34.
11. Kwan I, Bunn F, Roberts IG. Spinal immobilisation for trauma patients (review). The
Cochrane Library 2009;(1).
12. Hauswald M, Ong G, Tandberg D, Omar Z. Out-of-hospital spinal immobilization: Its
effect on neurologic injury. Academic Emergency Medicine 1998;5(3):214–219.
13. Hauswald M. A re-conceptualisation of acute spinal care. Emergency Medicine Journal
2013;30:720–723.
14. Podolsky S, Baraff LJ, Simon RR, Hoffman JR, Larmon B, Ablon W. Efficacy of cervical
spine immobilization methods. Journal of Trauma 1983;23(6):461–465.
15. Thumbikat P, Hariharan RP, Ravichandran G, McClelland MR, Mathew KM.
Spinal cord injury in patients with ankylosing spondylitis: A 10-year review. Spine
2007;32(26):2989–2995.
16. Hoffman JR, Mower WR, Wolfson AB, Todd KH, Zucker MI. Validity of a set of clinical
criteria to rule out injury to the cervical spine in patients with blunt trauma. National
Emergency X-Radiography Utilization Study Group. New England Journal of Medicine
2000;343(2):94–99.
17. Stiell IG, Wells GA, Vandemheen KL, Clement CM, Lesiuk H, De Maio VJ, Laupacis
A et al. The Canadian C-spine rule for radiography in alert and stable trauma patients.
JAMA 2001;286(15):1841–1848.
18. Chan D, Goldberg R, Tascone A, Harmon S, Chan L. The effect of spinal immobilization
on healthy volunteers. Annals of Emergency Medicine 1994;23(1):48–51.
19. Bauer D, Kowalski R. Effect of spinal immobilization devices on pulmonary function in
the healthy, nonsmoking man. Annals of Emergency Medicine 1988;17(9):915–918.
20. Totten VY, Sugarman DB. Respiratory effects of spinal immobilization. Prehospital
Emergency Care 1999;3(4):347–352.
21. Kolb JC, Summers RL, Galli RL. Cervical collar-induced changes in intracranial pressure.
American Journal of Emergency Medicine 1999;17(2):135–137.
22. Davies G, Deakin C, Wilson A. The effect of a rigid collar on intracranial pressure. Injury
1996;27(9):647–649.
23. Mobbs RJ, Stoodley MA, Fuller J. Effect of cervical hard collar on intracranial pressure
after head injury. ANZ Journal of Surgery 2002;72(6):389–391.
24. Lockey DJ, Coats T, Parr MJA. Aspiration in severe trauma: A prospective study.
Anaesthesia 1999;54:1097–1098.
25. Goutcher CM, Lochhead V. Reduction in mouth opening with semi-rigid cervical collars.
British Journal of Anaesthesia 2005;95(3):344–348.
26. Hewitt S. Skin necrosis caused by a semi-rigid cervical collar in a ventilated patient with
multiple injuries. Injury 1994;25(5);323–324.
27. Arishita GI, Vayer JS, Bellamy RF. Cervical spine immobilization of penetrating neck
wounds in a hostile environment. Journal of Trauma 1989;29(3):332–337.
28. Joint Royal Colleges Ambulance Liaison Committee. Neck and back trauma. 2006.
29. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Triage, assessment, investigation
and early management of head injury in infants, children and adults. Clinical guideline
[CG56]. 2007.
30. Vaillancourt C, Stiell IG, Beaudoin T, Maloney J, Anton AR, Bradford P, Cain E et al.
The out-of-hospital validation of the Canadian C-Spine Rule by paramedics. Annals of
163
Spinal injuries
31. Armstrong BP, Simpson HK, Crouch R, Deakin CD. Prehospital clearance of the
cervical spine: Does it need to be a pain in the neck? Emergency Medicine Journal
2007;24:501–503.
32. Brown LH, Gough JE, Simonds WB. Can EMS providers adequately assess trauma
patients for cervical spinal injury? Prehospital Emergency Care 1998;2:33–36.
33. Domeier RM, Frederiksen SM, Welch K. Prospective performance assessment of an
out-of-hospital protocol for selective spine immobilization using clinical spine clearance
criteria. Annals of Emergency Medicine 2005;46:123–131.
34. Domeier RM, Swor RA, Evans RW, Hancock JB, Fales W, Krohmer J, Frederiksen SM,
Rivera-Rivera EJ, Schork MA. Multicenter prospective validation of prehospital clinical
spinal clearance criteria. Journal of Trauma 2002;53:744–750.
35. Stroh G, Braude D. Can an out-of-hospital cervical spine clearance protocol identify all
patients with injuries? An argument for selective immobilization. Annals of Emergency
Medicine 2001;37:609–615.
36. Domelier RM, Fredericksen SM, Welch K. Prospective performance assessment of an
out-of-hospital protocol for selective spine immobilization using clinical spine clearance
criteria. Annals of Emergency Medicine 2005;46:123–131.
37. Heffernan DS, Schermer CR, Lu SW. What defines a distracting injury in cervical spine
assessment? Journal of Trauma 2005;59:1396–1399.
38. Barkana Y, Stein M, Scope A, Maor R, Abramovich Y, Friedman Z, Knoller N. Pre-
hospital stabilization of the cervical spine for penetrating injuries to the neck—Is it
necessary? Injury 2000;31:305–309.
39. Haut ER, Kalish BT, Efron DT, Haider AH, Stevens KA, Kieninger AN, Cornwell EE 3rd,
Chang DC. Spine immobilization in penetrating trauma: More harm than good? Journal
of Trauma 2010;68:115–120.
40. Connell RA, Graham CA, Munro PT. Is spinal immobilization necessary for all patients
sustaining isolated penetrating trauma? Injury 2003;34:912–914.
41. Moss R, Porter K, Greaves I et al. Minimal patient handling: a faculty of prehospital care
consensus statement. Emergency Medicine Journal 2013;30:1065–1066.
42. Nypaver M, Treloar D. Neutral cervical spine positioning in children. Annals Emergency
Medicine 1994;23:208–211.
164
Musculoskeletal trauma
14
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be aware of the common presentations of musculoskeletal trauma

▪▪ Understand the significance of musculoskeletal trauma in the multiply injured patient
▪▪ Understand the basic techniques required for the management of musculoskeletal trauma
in the pre-hospital environment
INTRODUCTION
Musculoskeletal trauma encompasses a broad range of injury and injury patterns. It is the most
common type of trauma encountered by the pre-hospital practitioner ranging from simple
strains and sprains through to complex polytrauma associated with high-energy transfer to
the limbs and axial skeleton. Minor injury is one of the most common reasons for present-
ing to emergency departments and calling for the help of the statutory ambulance services.
Many of these injuries can be dealt with using simple measures including analgesia, advice and
arranging appropriate follow-up. For more complicated injuries, referral to hospital specialists,
in-patient treatment and operative intervention will be necessary. This chapter outlines the
epidemiology of musculoskeletal injury, before describing the general principles of manage-
ment. Specific regional injuries are then considered in turn.
EPIDEMIOLOGY
Approximately 10,000 people per year are killed as a result of trauma in the United Kingdom (1).
Head injuries make up the largest group, accounting for approximately one-third of deaths.
Limb injuries appear within the 20% of people killed by ‘multiple injuries’, but also on their
own, with lower limb injuries accounting for 25% of all trauma mortality. The bulk of this group
occurs in the ageing population as a result of fragility fractures, but femoral shaft fractures
also appear high on the list. Musculoskeletal injuries kill people by contributing to blood loss
165
(for example open fractures of the femoral shaft) or as a result of septicaemia or embolic phe-
nomena as secondary sequelae of the injury itself.
Whilst the mortality burden of musculoskeletal trauma is high as a proportion of total
injury, the vast majority of patients survive their injury. The burden in terms of healthcare
cost is considerable, with pre-hospital care, emergency department admission, in-patient stay,
and associated operative costs and hospital follow-up. For the healthcare system, the costs are
measurable, however, for the patient, the costs are even greater, with lost workdays, travel to
and from clinics and the psychosocial burden. Some studies approximate the costs of multiple
fractures as being as high as £35,000 per patient over 6 months (2).
ASSESSMENT
Assessment of patients with musculoskeletal trauma must follow the paradigm laid out
in Chapter 6. Many musculoskeletal injuries present with obvious pain and deformity: this
can distract the clinician towards treating the musculoskeletal injury and away from life-
threatening injuries in other body systems. Only those musculoskeletal injuries associated
with life-threatening external haemorrhage (<C>) present a requirement for immediate inter-
vention including elevation, pressure, haemostatic dressing and tourniquets.
PRACTICE POINT
Do not focus on the musculoskeletal injury unless it is causing massive haemorrhage: search
aggressively for other life-threatening injuries before returning to the obvious injury.
Other musculoskeletal injuries which should be detected and managed during the primary
survey include those with associated vascular injury, lesser degrees of external blood loss and
pelvic fractures. These require prompt and effective treatment. A pelvic binding device should
be placed in every case where pelvic injury is suspected.
The majority of musculoskeletal injuries will be formally identified during the E (exposure)
component of the primary survey, although less obvious injuries may not be found until the
secondary survey if there is time to perform one before the patient arrives in hospital.
The most common presenting complaint is pain in the affected bone or joint, with a history
of trauma to that area. For those who are conscious, the patient will often make the diagnosis,
although the patient’s assessment of the seriousness of the injury is unreliable. Catecholamines
and cytokines may mask initial pain, allowing the patient to continue to use the affected limb,
although this is unusual in significant long bone fractures. This is also true for those who are
under the influence of drugs or alcohol. Focused questioning relating to numbness or altered
sensation will elicit clues to underlying neurological involvement or injury and is important
when completing documentation.
The mechanism of injury will often give a clue as to the likely injuries or injury patterns. For
example, patients falling from height and landing on their feet may well have calcaneal or ankle
fractures, but transmitted force may fracture the tibial plateaux, the hip, the spinal column or
base of skull. Knowing the mechanism allows these injuries to be suspected and the affected
areas examined. Although an exact history of the mechanism of injury can be difficult to obtain,
every attempt should be made to achieve this. Triangulating a history from the patient, the first
person to find the patient and the first person on scene is often helpful in this regard.
166
Assessment
Any history elicited from the patient may

focus the clinician towards certain injuries,
but this should not prevent a systematic
examination. Missed injuries are a common
source of morbidity, complaint and litiga-
tion (3). The pre-hospital clinician often sets
the tone for the in-hospital care. It is there-
fore imperative that the patient is examined
as much as the situation safely allows, and
any abnormal findings or suspected injuries
Figure 14.1 Deformity and tenting of the skin in conveyed verbally and in writing to the in-
a fracture dislocation of the ankle. hospital or primary care teams.
The most common findings on physical
examination include tenderness over the fracture, dislocation and deformity. For certain joints
and bones the extent of deformity can be subtle. Comparison with the non-affected side is use-
ful. To be meaningful, the patient should be fully exposed, with clothing removed by cutting
where necessary, within the limits of dignity and environmental exposure. Clothing removal
also facilitates application of splints and binders.
PRACTICE POINT
The patient should be appropriately exposed to permit examination of the affected limb. Once
examined, the patient should be covered for dignity and environmental control.
Where fracture or dislocation is suspected, the affected area should be gently palpated, noting
any tenderness and its exact location. The neurovascular status of the limb should be checked (distal
pulses, capillary refill in digits and the sensation in the dermatomes supplied by distal radicular
nerves). The skin should be examined for any redness, bruising, tenting or breaches (Figure 14.1).
Any disruption to the skin should lead to a high index of suspicion of an open fracture and the patient
treated accordingly. Finally, in the absence of obvious fractures, it is important to ask the patient to
move or use the limb. Pain or inability to use the limb properly should lead to the suspicion of injury.
DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY
Photographs offer the advantage of highlighting the initial deformity of the limb, in particular when
there is an open fracture, whilst (hopefully) preventing repeated and unnecessary examination.
Digital cameras offer a rapid means of taking photographs at the scene of the accident, helping with
identification of mechanism of injury and deformity of limbs prior to reduction. The information
must remain confidential and, ideally, patient consent should be obtained. In any case, the patient
must be informed that the image has been taken (4). Printed copies of the image should be added
to the patient’s notes and the digital copy immediately deleted to prevent accidental distribution.
PRACTICE POINT
Whilst useful in passing on information to the hospital teams, great care should be taken to make
sure images are stored securely or deleted. Where possible, the patient should be informed
images have been taken.
167
ANALGESIA/SEDATION
Many injuries will cause such severe pain that general patient management is difficult. In these
circumstances, it is necessary to administer analgesia prior to other activities, such as extrica-
tion, clothing removal or movement of the patient. Small aliquots of intravenous opiates are
usually effective. Inhaled nitrous oxide/oxygen (Entonox®) is useful if the patient is conscious
and able to self-administer the gas. Other agents such as methoxyfluorane (Penthrox®), fen-
tanyl lozenges and intravenous paracetamol offer alternatives. Occasionally, it is necessary to
sedate the patient to achieve rapid control of the situation and the patient’s pain. Small intrave-
nous doses of midazolam (for example 0.5–1 mg) or ketamine (30–60 mg) usually suffice. It can
be dangerous to administer sedation where other life-threatening injuries are present or when
access to the patient’s airway is restricted.
PRACTICE POINT
Having excluded life-threatening injuries in the primary survey, attention should focus on pain
control.
IMMEDIATELY LIFE-THREATENING MUSCULOSKELETAL

INJURIES
Musculoskeletal injuries may be life threatening per se or be an indicator of other associ-
ated internal injuries. Certain pelvic fractures (see later) are associated with exsanguination
and should be immobilised as part of the second C in the primary survey (<C>ABCDE).
Equally, open fractures or soft tissue injuries with arterial or major venous bleeding should
already have been treated as part of haemorrhage control (<C>). Failure to address these
injuries promptly can lead to exsanguination, propagation of acute traumatic coagulopathy,
cardiac arrest and death. Simple, rapid measures are usually sufficient. Pelvic binders should
be applied at the level of the greater trochanters and tightened according to manufacturers’
instructions (Figure 14.2).
Tourniquet use was previously considered controversial. However, recent experience in
military conflicts has seen development of tourniquet technology and a surge in its use (5).
Where direct pressure and elevation are ineffec-
tive, a commercially available tourniquet must be
applied. Partial or complete amputation of the limbs
may require such measures, as may penetrating
vascular injury. In the lower limbs, a second proxi-
mal tourniquet is occasionally required in circum-
stances where haemorrhage has not been arrested by
the distal one (6). Failure to tighten the tourniquet
enough is common. Appropriate tightness is painful
and supplemental analgesia necessary. If the tourni-
quet is under-tightened it will fail to prevent arterial
flow and will encourage distal venous engorgement,
Figure 14.2 A pelvic binder applied at worsening haemorrhage and reducing the viability of
the correct level of the greater trochanters. the distal limb.
168
Splints
OPEN FRACTURES
Open fractures, where the periosteum of the bone has been exposed to external contamination,
are at high risk of complications arising from infection. Systemic sepsis is a serious condition
with an associated mortality, prolonged in-hospital stay, and delay in recovery and rehabilita-
tion. Localised osteomyelitis of the bone is associated with a substantial morbidity. Patients
often need frequent visits to the operating theatre for repeated wash out and debridement,
sometimes followed by complex reconstructive orthoplastic procedures and may require lengthy
courses of antibiotics. As a result, every effort must be made to prevent infection. Antibiotics
are recommended as early as possible where open fractures are present, ideally administered
within an hour of injury (7,8). A single dose of a broad-spectrum antibiotic is sufficient, such
as co-amoxiclav (1.2 g for an adult; 30 mg per kg for a child). For penicillin-allergic patients, a
third-generation cephalosporin or clindamycin may be appropriate. In most cases, antibiotic
therapy can be administered after arrival in hospital.
There is no evidence for the routine administration of antibiotics in wounds other than
those associated with open fractures. Formal pre-hospital irrigation of wounds is not recom-
mended, although gross contamination should be removed. Where the patient is unlikely
to get to help in a reasonable timeframe, gentle irrigation with sterile 0.9% sodium chloride
to remove gross contamination is a sensible approach. Iodine-based dressings should not
be used.
SPLINTS
Splinting limbs has a number of benefits:
• Anatomical or near anatomical reduction is usually the most comfortable position for the
limb.
• Ongoing blood loss from fracture sites (including open fractures) is reduced.
• Relocation of the periosteum prevents the release of ongoing inflammatory mediators,
which contribute to ongoing pain, neurological damage and help to drive coagulopathy.
• The risk of fat embolism is reduced.
• Packaging of the patient for transport is facilitated.
A variety of commercially manufactured splints are available to maintain anatomical align-

ment once reduction has been performed. They all work on similar principles (Box 14.1).
BOX 14.1: Technique for Applying a Kendrick® Splint and Sager® Splint
Kendrick® splint
– Apply the ankle hitch and tighten the stirrup.
– Apply the upper thigh strap at the top of the thigh and tightly into the crotch.
– Snap out the traction pole and ensure it is correctly seated
– Place the pole against leg, ensuring the pole extends 8 inches past the foot. Place the pole
into receptacle in the thigh strap.
– Secure elastic strap around knee.
– Place yellow tab over dart end. Apply traction by pulling red tab.
– Finally, apply the thigh and ankle straps.
169
Sager® splint
– Apply the ankle hitch.
– Place the crutch in the groin against the pubic symphysis.*
– Extend the splint to 8 inches past the foot.
– Attach the ankle hitch to the splint.
– Applying gentle upwards pressure on the splint, slowly pull the handle downwards to apply
traction.
– Apply the thigh and groin slings.
*In the male patient the external genitalia should be gently moved from between the crutch and the pelvis to avoid
painful trapping of soft tissue.
For femoral fractures, traction splints apply traction

against the pelvis. A further strap is placed around the
ankle. All available splints then apply a force between
these two points along the limb to maintain it in reduction
and reduce post-fracture shortening. The Kendrick® and
Sager® splints are the most commonly used in the pre-
hospital environment (Figure 14.3). The Kendrick® traction
splint has the advantage that it is lightweight and can be
used in patients with suspected concomitant pelvic injury,
however using a Sager® splint allows splintage of two legs
with a single device.
For distal long bone injuries, traction is usually not
required. The limbs can be held in anatomical alignment by
simple box splints, vacuum splints or disposable casts. The
malleable SAM® splint is useful for smaller patients and
children, and is lightweight. It consists of an aluminium
wire mesh within a soft foam outer covering. The splint can
be moulded to provide maximum support to a joint or limb. Figure 14.3 The Sager splint in use.
The application of splints can usually wait until the sec-
ondary survey/packaging phase, with the exception of pelvic slings, which should be applied
during the primary survey (see earlier). Splinting a limb can be achieved by instructing other
members of the team to hold the limbs in anatomical reduction, whilst other tasks are performed
and the splints made ready. It should be remembered that the splints themselves only maintain
traction that has been applied by the practitioner. Analgesia, anaesthesia or procedural seda-
tion are usually required before the limb is reduced and the splint applied. All of this should be
undertaken with the patient appropriately monitored.
CRUSH INJURIES
Where tissue is crushed, for example by falling masonry or machinery, it may become devital-
ised. External compression of the tissues prevents perfusion and the cells become ischaemic and
die. As they die, they spill their acidic, potassium-rich internal fluid into surrounding structures
and blood vessels. If the limb is trapped for an extended period of time, these metabolites may
be released into the systemic circulation causing dangerous arrhythmias, which may in turn
170
In-hospital management
precipitate cardiac arrest. Secondary rhabdomyolysis can cause renal failure which may require
in-patient renal dialysis.
Consensus guidelines (9) recommend loading the patient with intravenous fluids in the res-
cue phase, prior to release of the affected limb. This desire may need to be balanced with the
need to limit haemorrhage by over-infusion. There is no evidence supporting the use of tour-
niquet application or amputation to prevent the systemic sequelae of crush injury on release of
the affected limb. Renal impairment often ensues as a result of release of myoglobin and other
toxic metabolites. Sodium bicarbonate administration may help ameliorate such effects and can
be considered in the pre-hospital environment where necessary.
AMPUTATION
Amputation is a rarity in pre-hospital practice (10). It may be traumatic or therapeutic (11). Traumatic
amputation occurs when such force is applied to the limb that it is severed by cutting (guillotine
amputation) or tearing. Military practitioners will be more familiar with traumatic amputation
than those in the civilian world, as it is a feature of blast injury. Depending on the mecha-
nism, the nature of the forces involved may mandate a search for other life-threatening visceral
injuries, although amputation due to isolated entrapment of a limb in machinery is relatively
common. Blood loss from the amputation may be, but is not invariably, severe. Exsanguinating
haemorrhage from the proximal stump should therefore be controlled using pressure, haemo-
static dressings or a tourniquet tightened until the bleeding stops (<C>). This will usually be
painful, therefore cannulation and analgesia will be required. The distal fragment should be
wrapped in saline-soaked gauze and transported with the patient where practicable.
Therapeutic amputation may be required when the patient’s life is at threat. This is a rarity
and there is usually time to re-evaluate the extrication and call for a second opinion. Occasions
when this is not possible include the following:
• The patient’s life is at threat from other scene hazards.

• The patient’s physiology is rapidly deteriorating and they are at imminent risk of cardiac
arrest but remain trapped.
• The patient is deceased and they are preventing access to live casualties.
• The limb is unsalvageable as evidenced by experienced assessment of severe tissue
disruption or near-complete amputation (10).
To perform an amputation, a proximal tourniquet should be applied. The patient should be

cannulated, monitored and procedural sedation given by a trained practitioner. Ketamine is
the agent of choice as it provides relative haemodynamic stability. The limb should be prepared
with iodine or a chlorhexidine-based antiseptic. A distal circumferential incision should be
made through the skin, muscle and ligaments. A Gigli saw can then be used to cut through the
bone. The bone edges are likely to bleed and a dressing should be applied. The patient should
then be transported to hospital. Cadaveric studies indicate that a simple hacksaw may be as
easy to use as a Gigli saw, particularly for the inexperienced (12).
IN-HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT
The in-hospital teams follow the same principles as pre-hospital teams. The patient receives a fur-
ther primary and secondary survey, and a full history is obtained. This helps plan necessary inves-
tigations and defines ongoing treatment. It is common UK practice to perform a trauma CT scan
171
(head, neck, chest abdomen and pelvis) on patients who have been exposed to high mechanisms,
have altered physiology or anatomically significant injuries. This should happen rapidly and allows
full radiological diagnosis of internal injuries as well as musculoskeletal injuries, such as rib frac-
tures, clavicular fractures, scapular fractures and pelvic fractures. The CT scout film will also often
reveal limb injuries which can then be formally x-rayed. Treatment priorities will be determined by
critical injuries identified during the primary survey or revealed on radiological investigation.
REGIONAL INJURIES
The remainder of this chapter will consider the pre-hospital management of injuries by region.
SCAPULA
The scapula articulates with the ribs, the clavicle (via the acromioclavicular joint) and the
humerus, via the glenoid cavity. Numerous muscular attachments keep the scapula in position
and its position on the posterior thoracic wall offers it a fair degree of protection. Consequently,
scapular fractures are relatively rare. When they do occur, it is usually a result of direct and
severe force applied to the back. Confident pre-hospital diagnosis of scapular fracture is dif-
ficult and its main significance is as a marker of significant force applied to the thorax which is
likely to produce other injuries. Patients usually present with lateral back pain, made worse on
movement of the arm, particularly anterior movement at the shoulder. Analgesia is the main-
stay of pre-hospital management.
CLAVICULAR FRACTURE
The clavicle forms the attachment of the upper limb onto the axial skeleton. Both the ster-
noclavicular joint and the acromioclavicular joint are held together by tough ligamentous
attachments.
Sternoclavicular dislocation is a very rare injury, but can cause life-threatening airway com-
promise as posterior displacement may put pressure on the trachea. It these circumstances it
may be necessary to pull the clavicle forward manually if signs and symptoms of airway com-
promise are present.
Falling directly onto the point of the shoulder can break the strong ligamentous attachments
and result in acromioclavicular joint dislocation. The diagnosis may be suspected when the
patient gives a history of landing on their shoulder
with a prominent distal end of the clavicle with ten-
derness. The pre-hospital treatment is a broad arm
sling and analgesia (Figure 14.4).
The clavicle itself can fracture at any point along
its length. The most common mechanism is by
falling onto an outstretched hand (or putting the
hand up prior to impact). Pain, point tenderness
and a sagging of the arm on the affected side are
hallmarks of a clavicular fracture. The conscious
patient will want to support the arm to take the
weight of the humerus off the clavicle and a broad
arm sling is the treatment of choice. Figure 14.4 Application of a broad arm sling.
172
Regional injuries
GLENOHUMERAL DISLOCATION (‘DISLOCATED SHOULDER’)

The most common shoulder dislocation is anterior dislocation; the other forms are rare.
Dislocation occurs as a result of forced external rotation when the arm is abducted. This may
occur during a fall onto an outstretched hand. Inevitably, there is some damage to the liga-
mentous structures of the shoulder, which puts the patient at risk of recurrent dislocation. The
patient will present with severe pain and inability to move the arm. It is usually self-splinted
in the position of dislocation and there is characteristic squaring of the shoulder. Pre-hospital
treatment should normally be restricted to analgesia. Pre-hospital reduction of a dislocated
shoulder is not usually appropriate. Depending on the mechanism of injury and the age of the
patient, there may be associated fractures; in the obese the diagnosis may be made in error
and the precise nature of the dislocation is not always clear. In addition, significant analgesia
and/or sedation is generally required, especially in first dislocations. There may be specific cir-
cumstances when reduction is appropriate, but this should only be undertaken by those with
considerable experience.
The precise method of reduction, if it is to be attempted, must be the one with which the
operator is most comfortable and experienced. Kocher’s method involves external rotation fol-
lowed by adduction and internal rotation, but many practitioners do not favour this method
owing to the risk of damage to the shoulder joint during its execution (13). Other techniques
involve gentle external rotation of the humerus and external rotation with abduction. The axil-
lary nerve runs around the neck of the humerus and is at risk during dislocation and reloca-
tion. The patient should be examined for altered sensation in the regimental badge area on the
lateral aspect of the shoulder.
HUMERAL FRACTURES
The humerus usually fractures as a result of the application of direct force to the bone itself,
such as being struck with a baseball bat or other object. In those with weakened bones, for
example as a result of osteoporosis or metastatic spread of tumours, the bone can break as a
result of relatively little indirect force, such as falling onto the elbow or an outstretched hand.
Pain is located to the upper arm, deformity may be present, although it is less likely with
proximal fractures in the elderly where significant and early proximal bruising may be seen.
The radial nerve winds around the midshaft of the humerus as it runs towards the elbow.
Signs of radial nerve involvement include wrist drop and altered sensation to the back of
the hand. Pre-hospital management includes analgesia and the application of a splint. For
patients with an isolated humeral fracture, a ‘collar and cuff’ may suffice. This has the effect
of utilising the lower arm and elbow as a weight to pull the humerus out to length and
maintain anatomical reduction. If the patient has multisystem injuries and is lying flat, the
arm should be allowed to rest in a position of comfort. Malleable splints may be useful for
midshaft fractures.
DISLOCATED ELBOW
The elbow is vulnerable to injury from direct trauma, for example when a patient lands directly
on the elbow itself. Dislocation is possible if force is applied along the length of the forearm
whilst the arm is flexed at the elbow. Elbow injuries are extremely painful. The arm should
be examined fully to assess for neuromuscular injury as the radicular nerves run through the
elbow and are therefore vulnerable to damage.
173
Treatment is reduction to anatomical alignment, which is usually achieved by flexing the

forearm at the elbow and palpating for anatomical reduction of the coracoid process of the ulna.
This should not be attempted pre-hospital.
FOREARM AND WRIST FRACTURES

The radius and ulnar may be broken either as a result of direct force or indirect force trans-
mitted when landing awkwardly on the wrist. Sudden deceleration in a road traffic collision
where the patient grabs the steering wheel results in force being transmitted and can result in
bilateral fractures. The most common cause is a fall onto an outstretched hand in the elderly.
Management of the fracture includes the covering of any wounds, provision of analgesia and
placement in a splint. Vacuum splints, box splints or SAM splints provide useful options in the
field. Patients with open fractures should be given antibiotics.
The proximal row of carpal bones articulates with the distal aspect of the radius and ulna,
whilst the distal row articulates with the metacarpals. The scaphoid bone, located in the well of
the ‘anatomical snuffbox’, is vulnerable if the patient falls onto an outstretched hand. Diagnosis
is not possible without imaging, and the patient with a painful wrist following a fall is likely to
require hospital assessment. Management consists of analgesia and the application of a splint
or sling. Malleable splints are useful.
METACARPAL FRACTURES
Metacarpal fractures, most commonly of the fifth metacarpal, usually arise form punching
another person or more commonly a hard surface. There is swelling and tenderness over the
affected metacarpals, and sometimes angulation of the metacarpal or ‘loss’ of the knuckle may
be seen. Neighbour strapping prior to review in hospital for imaging is appropriate.
PHALANGEAL FRACTURES
The bones of the fingers may break if struck directly, or if the patient lands awkwardly on them.
Adjacent fingers offer a useful splint to which the affected finger can be immobilised. Where
open, wounds should be covered with saline-soaked gauze. Any amputated distal fragments
should be wrapped in a saline-soaked gauze and transported with the patient to hospital.
THE HIP
Injury to the hip usually results in the patient complaining of pain in the joint itself, the proxi-
mal femur or the groin. Elderly patients and those with osteoporosis are particularly prone to
fragility fractures of the neck of the femur. The exact location of the fracture within the femoral
neck determines the surgical treatment, but cannot be determined by the pre-hospital clinician.
This is an injury with significant long-term morbidity, particularly in older patients. Patients
usually complain of pain associated with a fall, often onto the hip itself. The affected leg may be
externally rotated and shortened when the patient is in the supine position. A history of minimal
or no trauma and signs suggestive of proximal femur fracture should raise the possibility of a
pathological fracture. Analgesia will be required for extrication and transfer. Intravenous opi-
ates are appropriate. Where skill and expertise are available, a femoral nerve block offers good
analgesia of the hip, which usually lasts for several hours. In the elderly, femoral neck fractures
may appear to be associated with surprisingly little discomfort until the patient is moved.
174
Regional injuries
The head of the femur may dislocate from the acetabulum in high-energy injuries, although
significantly less energy is required to dislocate a hip prosthesis. This usually occurs as a result
of transmitted force along a flexed leg. In the most common type of dislocation (posterior dis-
location) the patient presents with the leg in flexion at the knee, the hip internally rotated and
the leg abducted. In all cases the neurovascular status should be assessed, including in the
case of clinically posterior dislocations the function of the sciatic nerve. The powerful upper
leg muscles work against spontaneous reduction and a general anaesthetic is usually required
for relocation. Attempts at re-location in the pre-hospital phase are not generally practical or
appropriate.
THE PELVIS
The pelvis is formed by the illium, ischium and the pubic bones and their articulations with
the sacrum. It houses the pelvic viscera, including the bowel, bladder and reproductive organs,
and conducts the nerves which supply the lower limb. The bones are held together by tough
ligaments (sacrospinous, sacrotuberous and sacrocoxygeal). Several arterial and venous plex-
uses travel through the pelvis and are particularly susceptible to injury. Pelvic fractures have
been associated with up to 50% mortality at the scene of accidents and so should be treated
with respect (14). Pelvic fractures should be suspected during high-mechanism injuries and a
systematic search for other associated injures must be made. These are present in up to 40% of
patients.
The pelvis fractures in three principle ways, relating to the direction of energy transferred
through it (15). Anterior-posterior fractures occur when force is applied to the anterior superior
iliac spines. The force causes the pelvis to open out, so-called open book fractures. The pubic
ramus widen at the front and, if severe enough, the force will cause tearing of the sacroiliac
joint. This leads to rupture of pelvic blood vessels and the risk of exsanguination. Motorcyclists
are particularly at risk of pelvic fractures, as the petrol tank and handlebars catch the pelvis as
the rider leaves the bike during a collision.
Lateral compression (LC) pelvic fractures occur when force is applied across one hemipelvis,
such as when being run over by a car. The iliac wing, sacroiliac joint and pubic rami are all at
risk of fracture. Haemorrhage is also likely. As the bone rotates inwards, it can damage the
pelvic viscera, making bowel, bladder and reproductive organ injury more likely. Lateral com-
pression injuries are associated with significant morbidity when the viscera are involved (16).
They should be suspected when the transmission of force is lateral to the pelvis, such as lateral
impact road traffic collisions or ‘run over’–type mechanisms.
Vertical shear injuries can occur when the patient falls from height, landing on one foot.
Force is transmitted along the leg, through the acetabulum. A moment is created and the con-
tralateral hemipelvis rotates around the fixed point as it continues to ‘fall’. This causes sacro-
iliac joint disruption, which can be severe. There is a high risk of neurovascular damage, with
exsanguination from torn vessels and long-term injury to sciatic and possibly femoral nerves.
In the primary survey, suspected pelvic fractures should be managed by the application of
a pelvic sling. Commercial slings, such as the TPOD® and SAM® sling, are particularly useful.
If such a splint is not available, the feet can be tied together with a narrow-folded triangu-
lar bandage and a sheet applied tightly and circumferentially around the greater trochanters.
Motorcycle leathers are quite tight and often maintain a broken pelvis in a reasonable degree
of alignment. If no other slings are available, the leathers should be left uncut. When apply-
ing a pelvic binder, the binder should be placed against the skin; all overlying clothing should
be removed.
175
PRACTICE POINT
Do not ‘spring’ the pelvis: splint it effectively and move on.
FEMORAL SHAFT FRACTURES

Femoral fractures result from direct or indirect force applied to the bone. Given the strength of
this bone, the forces involved are usually large and a search for other associated injuries should
be made. The patient will usually complain of severe thigh pain, and swelling and deformity
are usually obvious. The patient will not be able to bear weight. Femoral fractures are associ-
ated with significant blood loss into the leg itself, which may not be visible. Open femoral
fractures should be treated aggressively to prevent circulatory shock.
The powerful muscles of the thigh act to prevent manual reduction of the fracture. Opiate intra-
venous analgesia is essential and the affected limb should be placed in a traction splint after man-
ual correction of the deformity during which the leg should be pulled out to near its normal length.
Once the splint is in place, the patient’s analgesic requirements normally drop dramatically.
PATELLAR DISLOCATION
Patellar dislocation usually occurs as a result of sudden twisting of the knee or occasionally a
result of a direct blow. Some patients will be able to reduce the patella themselves, particularly
if dislocation has occurred before. The patient experiences pain and an inability to weight-bear
and the leg is held flexed. The trick to reduction is to gradually extend the knee with gentle
pressure on the patella in a lateral to medial direction, whilst offering reassurance. Entonox®
is useful for analgesia and as a distraction. The patient should be advised to attend hospital, as
these injuries may be associated with bony fractures and may require specific imaging. All will
require physiotherapy to reduce the risk of recurrent dislocation.
KNEE DISLOCATION
Knee dislocation occurs as a result of a high-energy injury and is a rare injury. It is usually
part of a multisystem trauma. (Patellar dislocation is often referred to by lay people as knee
dislocation.) This is a serious injury which is often limb-threatening. It is inevitably associated
with rupture of several of the knee ligaments, and the popliteal artery is particularly vulnerable
to compression over the distal aspect of the femur. This compromises the blood supply to the
distal limb and risks ischaemia and myonecrosis.
The diagnosis is usually obvious if the dislocation persists, however, it may spontaneously
relocate prior to the arrival of the pre-hospital practitioner. Residual pain may be confused
with patellar, meniscal or tibial plateau injury. The leg should be splinted with the dislocation
reduced under analgesia and the patient transferred to hospital for expert assessment (16,17).
LOWER LEG FRACTURES

The tibia and fibula are commonly fractured and may break separately or together, depending on
the mechanism of injury. Since the tibia lies immediately subcutaneously, open fractures are rela-
tively common. Because these injuries are often obvious, they may distract rescuers. The diagnosis
is usually straightforward, as there is pain, swelling and obvious deformity, although this is not
always the case. Conscious patients are usually unable to bear weight on the affected limb.
176
References
The limb should be thoroughly examined for any sign of an open injury which should be
covered if found, after removal of any gross contamination. The patient can usually be man-
aged with intravenous or inhalation analgesia, and the limb straightened and placed in a splint.
Box splints, malleable casts and vacuum splints are all sensible options, although the latter are
favoured by the National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE) (7).
PRACTICE POINT
Open fractures are managed by removal of gross contamination (particulate dirt, debris, etc.)
and coverage with a wet sterile dressing. Wound lavage is not required.
ANKLE FRACTURES
The ankle is a complex joint involving articulation of the tibia, fibula, calcaneum and talus.
A number of ligaments hold the bones in position and contribute to ankle stability. If force is
applied across the ankle or in inversion/eversion, a fracture can result. This often results from
falling or landing awkwardly. Various classification systems exist for ankle fractures, but they
are of little use to the pre-hospital practitioner.
Diagnosis is made on the basis of pain and deformity. If the ankle is not grossly deformed
but swollen, ligamentous injury may have occurred. Simple sprains can be diagnosed by the
application of the Ottawa ankle rules (18). If there is deformity, the patient is unable to weight-
bear or there is tenderness over either malleolus or over the fifth metatarsal, hospital assess-
ment is appropriate.
SUMMARY
Individual musculoskeletal injuries are rarely life-threatening, but such injuries must be
immediately recognised and managed. These injuries, which include pelvic and femoral
fractures may not always be obvious. Some fractures may not be of significance in them-
selves but may be important as markers of the severity of the trauma or the likelihood of
other potentially critical injuries elsewhere. In most cases, even dramatic-looking fractures
or soft tissue injuries require only the simplest pre-hospital management and must not be
allowed to distract from the identification and treatment of other less obvious but more
immediately critical injuries. The key to the management of these injuries once they have
been identified is analgesia and splintage followed by transfer to hospital for assessment:
precise anatomical diagnosis of an injury is rarely possible and will not affect the treatment
required at scene.
REFERENCES
1. Office for National Statistics. Deaths Registered in England and Wales 2011.
2. Bonafede M, Espindle D, Bower A. The direct and indirect costs of long bone fractures
in a working US population. Journal of Medical Economics 2013;16(1):169–178.
3. Pfeifer R, Pape HC. Missed injuries in trauma patients: A literature review. Patient Safety
in Surgery 2008;2:20.
177
4. General Medical Council. Making and using visual and audio recordings of patients.
2011.
5. Lee C, Porter K, Hodgetts T. Tourniquet use in the civilian setting. Emergency Medicine
Journal 2007;24:584–587.
6. Faculty of Pre-Hospital Care, Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh. Interim position
statement on the site of application of tourniquets. 2013.
7. National Institute of Health and Care Excellence (NICE). Fractures (complex) assess-
ment and management. NICE guideline [NG37]. February 2016. Accessed July 1, 2016.
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng37/chapter/Recommendations#hospital-settings.
8. British Orthopaedic Association Standard for Trauma. The management of severe open
lower limb fractures (BOAST 4). 2009.
9. Greaves I, Porter K, Smith J. Consensus statement on the early management of crush
injury and the prevention of crush syndrome. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps
2003;149:255–259.
10. Porter K. Prehospital amputation. Emergency Medicine Journal 2010;27(12):940–942.
11. O’Meara M, Porter K. Extremity trauma. In ABC of Pre-Hospital Emergency Medicine,
T Nutbeam, M Boylan (ed.). Oxford: Wiley, 2013.
12. Leech C, Porter K. Man or machine? An experimental study of pre-hospital amputation.
Emergency Medicine Journal 2016. 2016;33:641–644.
13. Limb D, Rankine J, Sloan J, Aldous S. Soft tissue injuries: 7 shoulder and elbow.
14. Scott I, Porter K, Laird C, Greaves I, Bloch M. The pre-hospital management of pelvic
fractures: An initial consensus statement. Emergency Medicine Journal 2013;30:1070–1072.
15. Burgess AR, Eastridge BJ, Young JW, Ellison TS, Ellison PS Jr, Poka A, Bathon GH,
Brumback RJ. Pelvic ring disruptions: Effective classification system and treatment
protocols. Journal of Trauma 1990;30(7):848–856.
16. Brenneman FD, Deepak K, Boulanger BM, Tile M, Redelmeier DA. Long-term outcomes
in open pelvic fractures. Journal of Trauma 1997;42(5):773–777.
17. Piper D, Howells N. Acute knee dislocation. Trauma 16(2):70–78.
18. Stiell I, McKnight RD, Greenberg GH, McDowell I, Nair RC, Wells GA, Johns C,
Worthington JR. Implementation of the Ottawa ankle rules. JAMA 1994;271(11):827–832.
178
Analgesia, sedation and
emergency anaesthesia
15
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the different options available for the management of pain

▪▪ Understand the potential hazards of sedation and anaesthesia
▪▪ Be aware of the importance of teamwork and drills in successful sedation and anaesthesia
INTRODUCTION
The effective and safe management of pain is an essential element of pre-hospital care. Pain
must be managed because it is unpleasant and distressing, but also in order that necessary pro-
cedures can be carried out. In some cases it will be the procedure itself which mandates anaes-
thesia or analgesia, and in this situation a judgement must be made regarding the necessity of
the intervention before the patient arrives in hospital. Whilst anaesthesia in particular offers
immense benefit to the trauma victim, it is perhaps the most potentially hazardous component
of pre-hospital care and not one to be undertaken lightly.
ANALGESIA
Pain is defined as an unpleasant sensory and emotional experience associated with actual or potential
tissue damage or described in terms of such tissue damage (1). It is exhibited in a variety of ways:
psychosocial factors play a major part in both perception of pain and the individual’s ability to
cope with it. There is significant interpatient variability in the pain experienced with similar
injuries. Analgesia is the inability to feel pain while still conscious (2) and is often inadequately
achieved following injury (3).
Effective analgesia is kind, improves patient compliance, allows better assessment and facil-
itates emergency procedures demonstrating logistic, physiological and long-term psychological
benefits (4).
179
Analgesia, sedation and emergency anaesthesia
PHYSIOLOGY OF PAIN
The pain pathway is complex and some elements remain poorly understood. In a simplistic
model, a painful stimulus in a particular area of the body activates sensory nerves (nocicep-
tors) in that area. Axons from these nociceptors relay signals as electrical impulses to their cell
bodies in the dorsal root ganglion and then onto the dorsal horn of the spinal cord. This ‘signal’
then ascends the spinal cord mainly through the spinothalamic tract to the thalamus from
where it is relayed to areas of the cerebral cortex. It is when this ‘signal’ reaches the cerebral
cortex that it is converted into a conscious sensation of pain.
Concurrent sympathetic stimulation causes tachycardia and vasoconstriction together with
hyperventilation, decreased urinary tract tone and gastric emptying, and the cortical functions
of fear and anxiety. Cumulatively, these may cause harm by increasing myocardial workload
and reducing peripheral perfusion.
ASSESSMENT OF PAIN
Numerous pain-scoring systems are in use. The commonest are the visual analogue scale (VAS),
verbal numerical rating scale (NRS) and the verbal categorical rating scale (VRS). The VAS and NRS
are both equally sensitive in detecting changes in pain score and more sensitive than the VRS (5).
In children, the Wong-Baker FACES pain scale is commonly used as a validated measure of
pain (6). Whichever scale is used, it is important to realise that as a general rule the patient’s
pain is what they report it to be, not what the clinician thinks it is or thinks it should be. In pre-
hospital care only the verbal numerical rating system is likely to be of value (where 0 is no pain
and 10 the worst pain the patient has ever suffered).
Analgesia should be titrated to the pain that the patient reports, although in order to avoid
giving too much analgesia, some awareness of the likely pain levels associated with particular
injuries should be maintained. Whatever the initial pain score, it is vital to measure pain severity
using the same system after analgesia has been provided. Pain measurement scores work best
for the assessment of the effectiveness of analgesia and a decreasing pain score is the initial goal.
MANAGING PAIN
The ideal analgesic is one that is simple to use, has no adverse effects or drug interactions,
and completely controls the patient’s pain: such an agent does not exist. Often multiple anal-
gesic modalities are needed for optimal results. Analgesia can be broadly classified into non-
pharmacological and pharmacological.
NON-PHARMACOLOGICAL
Non-pharmacological methods of managing pain include
• Reassurance
• Positioning
• Physical methods
• Immobilisation and splinting
• Reduction of dislocations and fractures
Reassurance, particularly, is important but often forgotten. The patient who feels that they
are in safe hands will be more confident in the outcome, calmer and cooperative and their pain
180
Analgesia
perception will be reduced. Some patients may be reluctant to move from a position of comfort
they have adopted and should not be compelled to do so unless there is a pressing reason, in
which case alternative analgesia may be required to allow transport or further investigations.
Pain from burns is amenable to physical methods such as cooling or covering the burn wound
to limit exposure to air. Ideally, fractures and dislocations should be reduced into their anatomi-
cal position to decrease ongoing pain. However, this may not be immediately possible due to the
constraints of the environment, lack of expertise or other treatment priorities. Immobilisation and
splinting provide some pain relief in these situations by reducing limb movement.
PHARMACOLOGICAL
There are numerous agents available for the relief of pain. Most can be administered through more
than one route. Each route and drug has its own advantages and disadvantages. The clinician needs
to tailor the analgesia to the patient’s needs, taking into consideration injury, physiological status
and skill available. The various routes for analgesia with their pros and cons are given in Table 15.1.
Table 15.1 Routes of analgesia
Route Pro Con

Oral Easy to use Slower onset of action
No specific training required Supine positioning of patient limits
Ideal for mild pain scores its use
Not easily titrated
Variable absorption
Inhalational Patient controlled analgesia Needs specific equipment

Rapid onset Nausea and vomiting
Not all patients can co-ordinate
Rectal Simple to use Patient preference may limit

Quicker onset than oral acceptance
Nasal Very useful in small children Complex drug calculations needed

Non-invasive Variable absorption depending on
nasal secretions/blood
Buccal Rapid onset Limited availability

Potent drugs available in this route
Intravenous/ Quick onset Needs training in cannulation/

intraosseous Can titrate to effect intraosseous access
Widely used, most clinicians will be
familiar with use
Intramuscular Useful for situations where Cannot titrate

cannulation cannot be achieved Potential for ‘build up’ of potent drugs
Transdermal Painless Slow and variable onset
Subcutaneous (local Very effective pain relief Need training in nerve blocks to be
anaesthetic only) Variety of agents available effective
depending on speed and duration Potential to damage nerves
of analgesia needed
181
Table 15.2 Pharmacodynamic properties of commonly used opioids
Duration of Relative Other routes in

Drug Speed of onset action potency common use
Morphine 10 minutes 2–4 hours 1 Oral or intramuscular
Diamorphine 5 minutes 2–4 hours 1.5 Intranasal
Fentanyl 2–5 minutes 15–30 minutes 75–125 Intranasal or buccal
Alfentanil 1 minute 5–10 minutes 10–25
OPIOIDS
Opioids are a commonly used class of analgesic in acute trauma. Morphine is the most com-
monly used, but other opioids in common use include fentanyl, alfentanil and diamorphine.
There are varying rates of onset, peak effect and duration. Table 15.2 details the pharmacody-
namic properties of the commonly used opiates when given intravenously.
Opioids act on three types of receptors in the central nervous system (CNS) to produce their
effect: mu, kappa and delta (µ, κ and δ). The varying affinity of each drug to the different recep-
tors is responsible for their differing pharmocodynamic actions. The main immediate adverse
effects of opioids are nausea, vomiting, drowsiness and respiratory depression. These can be
minimised by giving titrated doses in small aliquots, by administering an antiemetic and by
combining them with other analgesic strategies in order to reduce the opioid dose and duration
of action.
NON-STEROIDAL ANTI-INFLAMMATORY DRUGS (NSAIDs)

Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) reduce prostaglandin synthesis through
inhibition of cyclooxygenase 1 and 2 (COX 1, COX 2) to produce analgesic, antipyretic and
anti-inflammatory effects. COX 1 inhibition reduces gastro-protection and may cause gastro-
intestinal side effects. Eighty percent of asthmatics can safely take NSAIDs without respira-
tory effects. It is advisable not to give an NSAID to an asthmatic if they have not taken one
before, but they can safely be prescribed if the asthmatic patient has taken them in the past.
Renal dysfunction may occur and NSAIDs should be avoided in those with known renal
disease and in the elderly, although single doses are extremely unlikely to cause significant
problems.
Common NSAIDs include ibuprofen, diclofenac, naproxen and ketoprofen. Ibuprofen has
the lowest side effect profile, while naproxen and diclofenac have higher efficacy but more side
effects. Newer NSAIDs (for example ketorolac) are selective COX 2 inhibitors and have a better
safety profile than older NSAIDs.
PARACETAMOL
Paracetamol has long been the first choice of analgesia at the bottom of the pain ladder. It has
almost no side effects and very few people are allergic to it. The exact mechanism of action is
not understood but it is thought to be via selective COX 2 inhibition. Paracetamol in combina-
tion with ibuprofen is a highly effective combination analgesic (7).
Intravenous (IV) paracetamol is a popular and effective analgesic. There is some evidence
that IV paracetamol is as effective as IV morphine and with a low side effect profile. It can be
used in most trauma patients (8).
182
Analgesia
KETAMINE
Ketamine is a phencyclidine derivative. It provides profound analgesia and is an ideal analgesic for
injuries where opiates alone may not be enough. It is described in more detail later in the chapter.
INHALATIONAL AGENTS
The inhalational agents used in the management of trauma patients are Entonox® and methoxyflu-
rane. Entonox is a 50:50 mixture of oxygen and nitrous oxide. It is usually carried in cylinders with
a mouthpiece for inhalation. Entonox is particularly useful for early analgesia while other agents
are being prepared as it has a rapid onset (and offset) of action. It is contraindicated in patients with
suspected pneumothorax and patients with decompression illnesses, as the nitrous oxide increases
the volume of any gaseous space. In cold temperatures (usually below 6°C) Entonox separates into
its component parts: administration of only nitrous oxide causes hypoxaemia. Therefore, if stored in
cold temperatures, the cylinder must be inverted several times before use to remix the gases.
Methoxyflurane is an inhalational analgesic widely used in Australia which has recently been
licensed for use in adults in the UK. The main concerns regarding its use have included poten-
tial nephrotoxicity associated with its use in anaesthetic doses. There seems very little evidence
to suggest that this is a significant concern in pre-hospital practice. Methoxyflurane appears to
be a safe and efficacious drug in smaller (analgesic) doses (9,10). It shows particular promise
in remote or mountain medicine and may be self-administered through a Penthrox® inhaler
which, due to the colour and appearance of the device, is often referred to as the ‘green whistle’.
Reasonable analgesia is available on intermittent use of one inhaler for a period of about one
hour and the onset is rapid. Methoxyflurane, unlike Entonox, is not contraindicated in peumo-
thorax or other conditions which involve air-filled spaces within the body.
New Ideas
Methoxyflurane (Penthrox®) is an inhalational analgesic agent for self-administration with potential
advantages for use in pre-hospital care.
LOCAL ANAESTHETICS (LAs)

Like opioids, local anaesthetics (LAs) vary in their onset and duration of action (see Table 15.3).
They are used for subcutaneous injection, and nerve blocks as topical creams to reduce can-
nulation pain, and very occasionally for intravenous field analgesia.
Table 15.3 Common local anaesthetic agents
Maximum dose
Local anaesthetic (SC injection) Onset Duration
Lidocaine 3 mg/kg 5 minutes 30 minutes
7 mg/kg when combined
with adrenaline
Prilocaine 6 mg/kg 5 minutes 1–1.5 hours
Bupivacaine/ 2 mg/kg 10–20 minutes 5–16 hours
levobupivacaine
Note: Each agent comes in different concentrations presented as a percentage. Care should be taken to check the
concentration before calculating the volume of injection.
183
Local anaesthetics affect neuronal cell membrane sodium channels, blocking action poten-
tial transmission. Used correctly they are safe and very effective. However, due to the nature
of their use, inadvertent nerve damage and intravascular injections are potential complica-
tions. Intravascular injection can lead to cardiovascular collapse, seizures and cardiac arrest.
This must be recognised quickly, as early administration of a lipid solution (Intralipid®) acts
to reduce toxicity. Ideally, Intralipid should be available in all areas where local anaesthet-
ics are used (11), but following pre-hospital use, rapid transfer to hospital is likely to be more
appropriate.
New Ideas
Intralipid® is a mixture of soya oil, glycerol, egg phospholipids and phosphate designed for parenteral
feeding. In the event of LA toxicity, 1.5 mLs/kg of Intralipid should be administered IV over 1 minute fol-
lowed by an infusion of 15 mLs/kg/hr. After 5 minutes if the first bolus has not restored cardiac stability
or if the patient deteriorates, two further boluses should be given, each over a minute and 5 minutes
apart followed by an infusion of 30 mLs/kg/hr. The maximum cumulative dose is 12 mL/kg.
There are numerous nerve, compartment and field blocks that provide local anaesthesia
to different parts of the body. A guide to the simpler nerve blocks is given later, but the
clinician will still need training to perform them in order to to achieve safety and efficacy.
Frequent practice is required in order to remain competent in the performance of these
techniques.
Topical LA is very useful in young children and patients with needle phobia but gener-
ally takes too long to work to be of value in pre-hospital trauma care. EMLA cream (eutectic
mixture of local anaesthetics) contains lidocaine and prilocaine and can be applied to intact
skin to achieve topical anaesthesia. The full effect is usually achieved in about 1 hour. Ametop ®
(tetracaine gel) is similar to EMLA but has a quicker onset of anaesthesia. TAC (tetracaine,
adrenaline and cocaine) and LET (lidocaine, epinephrine and tetracaine) are two mixtures
that can be used on open wounds. They have been successfully used to suture wounds in
children (12,13).
Haematoma block is used for fractures of the wrist. Local anaesthetic (usually up to
20 mLs of 1% lignocaine without adrenaline) is directly injected into the haematoma that
surrounds the fracture. The injection is inserted through the dorsal aspect of the wrist to
minimise inadvertent arterial injection after the skin has been cleaned. LA is then injected
into the haematoma under sterile conditions to enable fracture reduction. Haematoma
block is inferior to a Biers block in terms of wrist fracture reduction rates but is popular due
to the ease and speed of use (14). It theoretically converts a closed fracture into an open
one, but rates of infection are extremely low. This block is very rarely performed before the
patient arrives in hospital, as simple splintage is usually adequate for pain control. It may
be considered if circumstances require the correction of an obvious deformity, and evacu-
ation is likely to be very delayed.
Femoral nerve block (Figure 15.1 and Box 15.1) is used for fractures of the femur and can
significantly reduce the need for opiate anaesthesia and allow a pain-free reduction of fracture.
The related fascia iliaca block provides improved analgesia specifically for fractured necks of
femur but requires a specific needle and longer acting local anaesthetic and is probably best
reserved for the emergency department.
184
Sedation
Digital nerve blocks (ring blocks)

Femoral artery are used for anaesthetising digits on
Femoral vein the hand or feet. They are not often
Site of injection
External ring performed in pre-hospital care, but
Femoral nerve Inguinal ligament may sometimes be needed, for exam-
Femoral sheath ple to allow the release of trapped dig-
Termination
of long
its from machinery. The technique is
Sartorius
saphenous vein described in Box 15.2.
Adductor longus Although the use of local anaes-
thetic with adrenaline as a vasocon-
strictor is usually avoided because of
the risk of digital ischaemia, there is
some recent evidence that shows this
may not be a significant risk (15). It
is still best avoided and especially in
Patella those peripheral vascular diseases
such as Raynaud’s disease.
Figure 15.1 Landmarks for a femoral nerve block.
BOX 15.1: Femoral Nerve Block Technique

▪▪ LA is injected around the femoral nerve as it passes below the inguinal ligament deep to the
fascia lata in the groin.
▪▪ The nerve lies about 1 cm lateral to and slightly deeper than the femoral artery (remember
nerve–artery–vein–Y fronts: NAVY) at a depth from the skin of about 2 to 3 cm.
▪▪ Having located the correct insertion point, check that the needle is not in a vessel by
withdrawing the plunger.
▪▪ Inject 10–15 mLs of lignocaine.
▪▪ If the patient experiences a shooting pain or paresthesia during the needle insertion, the needle
has touched the nerve and should be withdrawn.
BOX 15.2: Digital (ring) Block Technique

▪▪ The digits have two dorsal and two palmar nerves accompanying the digital vessels.
▪▪ 1–2 mL of anaesthetic is injected on either side of the digit to block these nerves.
▪▪ If the thumb or great toe is being blocked, additional local anaesthetic should be injected
across the dorsum of the digit.
▪▪ LA with vasoconstrictors (adrenaline) should not be used for these blocks.
SEDATION
The wide variety of multimodal analgesic techniques will provide excellent pain relief for
most trauma patients but in some cases, due to the nature of the injury or the procedures
undertaken, or both, commonly employed techniques are inadequate to achieve or main-
tain effective pain relief. Sedation in addition to analgesia is frequently employed in these
situations.
185
The patient with a fracture–dislocation of the ankle who is trapped by the foot and requires
extrication from a vehicle offers an example of a situation in which sedation may be appropri-
ate. Reassurance, strong opioid intravenous anaesthesia and inhalational agents are highly
likely to provide good analgesia whilst the patient is in situ in the vehicle but are unlikely to
be inadequate for dynamic analgesia when attempts are made to move the trapped limb and
the patient.
Procedural sedation must be considered a temporary intervention designed to achieve a
specific goal within the duration of effect of the drugs used. The dose of the chosen agent
will be determined by the patient’s clinical state, age, weight and pre-morbid medical status.
Caution is required in frail patients and those with physiology altered to compensate for their
injuries. The increased risk of cardiorespiratory decompensation exists on administration of
sedating drugs due to decreased physiological reserves. In the frail and elderly, there is a sig-
nificant likelihood of interaction with existing medications; as a result reduced doses should be
used and these must be carefully titrated to effect.
In children, the smaller functional residual capacity and higher metabolic rate leads to a
greater risk of hypoxaemia with respiratory embarrassment. The anatomical differences in
children’s airways (proportionally larger tongue plus narrow airway) make obstruction more
likely (16).
Sedation is a pharmacologically affected state of consciousness described by various grada-
tion scores including sequential depths of sedation up to general anaesthesia plus dissociative
sedation (Table 15.4) (17,18).
Whilst sedation can be described using discrete levels, in practice it is not an easily com-
partmentalised phenomenon; rather there is a continuum, and inadvertent progression to deep
sedation or general anaesthesia can, and does, occur.
The potential for apnoea, loss of airway protective reflexes and cardiovascular compromise
require the precautions and considerations discussed later (19). Pre-oxygenation then continued
administration of oxygen during procedural sedation reduces the incidence of hypoxaemia.
PRACTICE POINT
Sedation is not an easy option: It requires the same care and attention as general anaesthesia
and a plan B in the event of airway compromise.
Capnography must be available whenever pre-hospital sedation is to be undertaken, and

may provide early warning of changes in ventilation that could lead to hypoxaemia (20,21).
Electrocardiogram (ECG), non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP) (cycling) and pulse oximetry
should be monitored during sedation as must the level of consciousness. Ongoing multimodal-
ity monitoring is expected; assessment of the motor component of the Glasgow Coma Scale
(GCS) has been validated as effective and safe during sedation (22,23).
Advanced airway equipment, suction and emergency drugs are essential in order to allow
reversal of the sedation or conversion to general anaesthesia in the event of problems arising.
Airway management techniques are discussed in Chapter 8. Pre-hospital sedation must not
be undertaken by those who do not have the necessary skills to proceed to the induction of
anaesthesia, including a full range of airway techniques up to and including surgical airway.
Two practitioners must be present during induction and maintenance of sedation. Ideally the
patient should have fasted for at least 4 hours (24,25), although this is unlikely to be the case in
pre-hospital care. Just as in hospital practice, consent should be sought for the sedation as well
as the procedure: in pre-hospital care, this is likely to be witnessed verbal consent (26).
186
Sedation
Table 15.4 Levels of sedation
Level of Spontaneous Cardiovascular

sedation Responsiveness Airway ventilation function
Anxiolysis Normal (increased Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
pre-procedural
compliance)
Minimal Normal response to Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
verbal stimulation
Moderate Purposeful Unaffected Adequate Usually
response to verbal/ maintained
tactile stimuli
Deep Purposeful Intervention May be Usually
response following may be inadequate maintained
repeated or painful required
stimulation
General Nil Intervention Likely to be Often affected
anaesthesia required apnoeic;
ventilator support
usually required
Dissociative May respond to Retention of Generally Usually
Sedation verbal stimuli protective adequate maintained
airway reflexes
Source: Chudnofsky CR, Lozon MM, Sedation and analgesia for procedures, in Rosen’s Emergency Medicine:
Concepts and Clinical Practice, 5th ed., JA Marx, RS Hockberger, RM Walls (eds.), St. Louis, MO: Mosby,
2002, 2578–2590; American Society of Anesthesiologists, Continuum of depth of sedation: Definition of
general anaesthesia and levels of sedation/analgesia, 2009.
For the safe sedation of children, SOAP ME, an acronym from the American Academy
of Pediatrics, is a useful aid which neatly summarises the required elements of preparation
(Box 15.3) (27).
BOX 15.3: Considerations for Safe Sedation in Children

S (Suction) Appropriately sized and functioning suction device with attachments
O (Oxygen) Sufficient oxygen supply with flow meters and appropriate delivery devices
A (Airway) Patient-sized airway equipment
P (Pharmacy) Correctly dosed drugs. Sufficient oxygen supply with flow for sedation, relevant anti-
dotes and resuscitative drugs
M (Monitoring) Pulse oximetry, ECG, BP, capnography
E (Equipment) Specialist equipment depending upon each case requirement, e.g. paediatric com-
patible defibrillator
DRUGS FOR SEDATION

The relief of pain and anxiety and minimalisation of distressing recall in a way best tolerated by
the patient are achieved with a range of drug classes and combinations. The evidence base and
safety profiling of drugs beyond standard benzodiazepine and opioid combinations is expanding.
187
Entonox has rapid onset and offset of action. The time to peak effect is approximately one
lung–brain circulation time (approximately 30 seconds); it takes approximately 60 seconds to
wear off. It can be used on its own for various purposes such as anxiolysis in the needle averse,
analgesia in simple reductions, or used concurrently with other agents to aid sedation (28–30).
Midazolam, a benzodiazepine, has a very short onset of action (1–2 minutes) and can last
30–60 minutes when administered IV/IO. The duration of action is similar to morphine and
together they are a common procedural sedation combination.
Ketamine is a phencyclidine derivative, a dissociative anaesthetic with analgesic properties.
The mechanism of action is multifactorial but mainly via N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) recep-
tor antagonism. In sub-anaesthetic doses of 0.25–0.5 mg/kg IV/IO there is profound analgesia
with dissociation. It is an ideal analgesic for painful procedures in the trauma patient. Ketamine
causes an increase in heart rate and blood pressure via sympathetic stimulation, respiration is
not usually depressed, and although consciousness is altered, it is often not lost. It is relatively
cardiostable and can be used in hypovolaemic patients. These properties make it an ideal anal-
gesic and sedative in the pre-hospital phase during extrication or fracture reduction (31).
Ketamine has been associated with an emergence phenomenon in its recovery period char-
acterised by hallucinations, nightmares and psychological distress. This is unusual after anal-
gesic doses and its incidence is probably overstated (32). Co-administration of a small dose of
benzodiazepine may settle this phenomenon. Patients who have been given ketamine should
be allowed to recover in as quiet and restful an atmosphere as possible.
Propofol is lipophilic, sedative and hypnotic and normally used for general anaesthesia. It
causes central nervous system depression via the GABAa receptor agonism. The onset of effect
is rapid at 30–45 seconds and lasts up to 10 minutes. The duration of action is dose dependent.
Propofol is metabolised in the liver, excreted by the kidneys and protein bound. It should be
used with caution if pathology affects these pharmacokinetic factors. Dosages beyond a seda-
tive dose (0.1 mg/kg/min) can result in deep anaesthesia where laryngeal reflexes and respira-
tory drive are lost, putting the patient at risk of aspiration and hypoxaemia. In addition propofol
can cause significant hypotension, which may complicate the management of the seriously
injured casualty (33). As propofol confers no analgesic effect, a concomitant analgesic, such as
fentanyl, is required.
Reversal agents provide an additional level of safety during sedation. Flumazenil is very occa-
sionally used to reverse adverse benzodiazepine effects including cardiorespiratory depression
(34). It has a rapid onset of action but the half-life is considerably shorter than the shortest act-
ing benzodiazepine. Caution is necessary when treating patients with a low seizure threshold
like those with epilepsy, head injury or those on tricyclic antidepressants.
Naloxone (35) is an opioid reversal agent that, like flumazenil, has a short half-life. Its dura-
tion of effect can be prolonged by intramuscular administration. It should be noted that nalox-
one also reverses the analgesic effect of opioids; careful titration is needed in these cases. Both
flumazenil and naloxone must be available before pre-hospital sedation is carried out.
PRE-HOSPITAL EMERGENCY ANAESTHESIA

Anaesthesia for the ill or injured patient is indicated for a number of reasons including the pro-
vision of ongoing treatment, safe transfer and facilitation of urgent investigations. In trauma
the likelihood of other concurrent physiological compromise is high, and the incidence of seri-
ous airway complications in this patient group in these environments is significantly higher
than during elective anaesthetic practice (36).
188
Pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia
PREPARING FOR ANAESTHESIA

In pre-hospital care it is essential to ensure that the scene is safe and will stay safe for the
duration of the procedure. Adequate (360°) access to the patient is essential. Every effort must
be made to pre-oxygenate the patient: adjuncts, sedation and assisted ventilation may all be
required. Effective pre-oxygenation significantly increases the time before desaturation occurs
during the period of hypopnoea and apnoea. In the injured patient, it is impossible to predict
the duration of safe apnoea and the aim must be to bring the patient’s SpO2 as close to 100% as
possible and to de-nitrogenate the functional residual capacity (FRC) of the lungs before anaes-
thesia is induced. This will maximise the lung oxygen reservoir. Failure to achieve an SpO2
>95% before tracheal intubation predicts a higher likelihood of desaturation during intubation
with increased potential for harm.
Adequacy of pre-oxygenation is determined by technique but also by patient positioning,
and physiology (chronic impairment and acute changes due to injury or illness). Head-up tilt
is ideal but rarely possible in the pre-hospital environment. Whenever possible, 100% oxy-
gen should be administered via a tight-fitting mask for at least 3 minutes, an acceptable pre-
oxygenation period assuming normal tidal volumes and respiratory rate. However, the ill or
injured patient may not be adequately pre-oxygenated with this technique. A low respira-
tory rate precludes sufficient alveolar ventilation to replace nitrogen in the functional residual
capacity with oxygen, and lung pathology whether acute or chronic causes shunt physiology
resulting in alveoli being perfused but not ventilated.
An SpO2 <95% after 3 minutes of tidal volume breathing with a high FiO2 source is evidence
of shunting. Increasing FiO2 will not improve this; assisted ventilation (low volume, low pres-
sure and reasonably slow) is required. If the patient requires assisted ventilation before induc-
tion, this should continue after administration of the induction drug whilst waiting for the
onset of complete paralysis.
Critically ill and injured patients are frequently agitated and this may affect delivery of
effective care, including pre-oxygenation. Small boluses of sedation may be given (often the
induction drug to be used for emergency anaesthesia) to achieve patient compliance and facil-
itate pre-oxygenation and other pre-anaesthesia preparations. This technique is known as
delayed sequence induction. Forgoing optimal pre-oxygenation due to agitation and proceeding
directly to general anaesthesia is unacceptable due to the associated higher risk of hypoxaemia
and harm.
New Ideas
APNOEIC OXYGENATION
Continued delivery of oxygen to the alveoli during apnoea will occur if the airway is patent, for example
during laryngoscopy. At pre-oxygenation, nasal cannula placed under mask and set at 15 L/min will
significantly increase the time before desaturation.
Intravenous access must be available and working (flushed or with a running intravenous
infusion). Intraosseous access is an effective alternative to multiple unsuccessful attempts
to place an intravenous cannula. Monitoring standards should follow AAGBI (Association
of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland) recommendations (wherever RSI performed)
(37) and include ECG, SpO2 and blood pressure monitoring (NIBP set to 2–3 minute auto cycles
or intra-arterial BP). Using the capnograph during pre-oxygenation confirms that it is working.
189
BOX 15.4: Suggested Anaesthetic Regimes
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5
Anticipated
CVS CVS ‘less CVS Agonal or difficult
‘stable’ stable’ ‘unstable’ peri-arrest intubation
a. Induction 2 mg/kg 1 mg/kg 0.5 mg/kg Omit 1–2 mg/kg
ketamine ketamine ketamine ketamine
b. Adjunct 2 mcg/kg 1 mcg/kg Omit Omit Omit
fentanyl fentanyl
c. Paralysis 1 mg/kg 1 mg/kg 1 mg/kg 1 mg/kg 2 mg/kg
rocuronium rocuronium rocuronium rocuronium suxamethonium
There is no ideal drug for emergency anaesthesia, although in the sick and injured the safety
profile of some drugs appears to be far better than others. Ketamine is widely used for this
reason both in and out of hospital and is recommended as the drug of choice for pre-hospital
induction of anaesthesia (38) (Box 15.4). When preparation is completed, and with ongoing pre-
oxygenation, an emergency anaesthesia checklist should be completed, with active engagement
of the whole team. Safe practice means that all members of the team have a role in assisting
with and monitoring the process. Fatalities have resulted from the erroneous belief that deter-
mination of correct placement is the responsibility of the intubator alone. Other members of
the team, who will be less task centred, are ideally placed to identify errors and problems on
induction of and during anaesthesia.
Precalculated doses of induction and neuromuscular blocking drugs are then administered
(IV/IO). Ideally, if the likelihood of use justifies it, anaesthetic drugs should be drawn up and
labelled at the beginning of each shift.
Ketamine is recommended for pre-hospital induction of anaesthesia. Doses of 0.5 to 2 mg/kg
should be used, titrated to the haemodynamic state of the patient. Typically 2mg/kg will be
a suitable dose for the very stable patient; 1mg/kg is used in a less responsive and/or more
unstable patient. In very unstable patients the dose should be reduced further to 0.5 mg/kg.
Ketamine is relatively haemodynamically stable and has a wide therapeutic margin; as a result,
a small overdose is unlikely to cause significant problems (a fact which is relevant in a working
environment where the patient‘s weight is only estimated). There is considerable experience of
the use of ketamine as an induction agent for the whole spectrum of injury patterns. In particular
ketamine is now accepted to be safe for traumatic brain injury and for patients who may be fitting.
Ketamine is best avoided in patients with significant cardiac disease or post ROSC from
a predominantly cardiac cause of an arrest. Induction with 1 to 3 mcg/kg of fentanyl with or
without a small dose of midazolam and a normal dose of rocuronium offers an acceptable
alternative in these patients.
ADJUNCTS
If the patient is haemodynamically stable, fentanyl can be given in addition to the induction
agent ketamine. This will prevent a hypertensive response to laryngoscopy. As well as opti-
mising the physiology of the patient. This is particularly useful in head-injured patients. The
dose given must be altered according to the patient’s cardiovascular status and relative size.
190
References
In cardiovascularly unstable patients the fentanyl should be omitted. A suitable dose is
2 mcg/kg in a stable patient, 1 mcg/kg if the patient is less stable, or none if they are unstable.
MUSCLE RELAXANTS
Rocuronium (1 mg/kg) should be used as the standard muscle relaxant in patients where dif-
ficult intubation is not anticipated. It has been demonstrated that a ‘quick-look assessment’ often
identifies the group of patients in which most difficult laryngoscopies are likely to be encoun-
tered. If a difficult laryngoscopy is anticipated, then 2 mg/kg of suxamethonium should be
used, and fentanyl must be omitted. Ongoing muscle relaxation is subsequently achieved with
0.6 mg/kg of rocuronium.
POST-INTUBATION MAINTENANCE OF ANAESTHESIA

Ongoing sedation of the ventilated patient will be maintained with boluses of sedatives
depending on the cardiovascular status of the patient. Signs of awareness include lacrimation
and a strong bounding pulse with a rise in heart rate and blood pressure. If a weak, thready
tachycardia is present, then hypovolaemia should be excluded as a cause, and end tidal CO2 can
be used as a surrogate cardiac output monitor.
In a patient with a good blood pressure who is tachycardic, boluses of 25 to 50 mcg of fentanyl
and 1 mL of midazolam are appropriate for maintenance anaesthesia. In a patient who is hypoten-
sive but requiring further sedation, then boluses of 10 to 20 mg of ketamine are appropriate. In a sta-
ble patient a combination of the above can be used as guided by the blood pressure and heart rate.
PAEDIATRIC ANAESTHESIA
Pre-hospital anaesthesia of small children is very rarely required. In many cases the risks of pre-
hospital emergency anaesthesia outweigh the potential benefits. Where airway compromise
cannot be overcome with simple airway manoeuvres, the risk–benefit equation may change
and drug-assisted intubation may become appropriate. The experience of the pre-hospital team
attending the child may also influence the risks and benefits.
CONCLUSION
Analgesia and anaesthesia are essential components of pre-hospital care. Many, perhaps the
majority of, patients will require analgesia, some will need sedation, and a relatively small
number will need general anaesthesia. Where anaesthesia is contemplated, the indications
should be clear and the procedure should be performed in the full awareness of the associated
risks. Clear protocols and governance are essential.
REFERENCES
1. Subcommittee on Taxomony. Pain terms: A list with definitions and notes on usage. Pain
1979;6:249–252.
2. Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English. 6th ed. Analgesia. Oxford
University Press, 2000.
191
3. Albrecht E, Taffe P, Yersin B, Schoettker P, Decosterd I, Hugli O. Undertreatment of

acute pain (oligoanalgesia) and medical practice variation in prehospital analgesia
of adult trauma patients: A 10 year retrospective study. British Journal of Anaesthesia
2013;110(1):96–106.
4. Weisman SJ, Bernstein B, Schechter NL. Consequences of inadequate analgesia
during painful procedures in children. Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine
1998;152(2):147–149.
5. Breivik EK, Bjornsson GA, Skovlund E. A comparison of pain rating scales by sampling
from clinical trial data. Clinical Journal of Pain 2000;16(1):22–28.
6. Hicks CL, Von Baeyer CL, Spanfford PA, Van Korlaar I, Goodenough B. The faces pain scale-
revised: Toward a common metric in pediatric pain measurement. Pain 2001;93:173–183.
7. Ong CK, Seymour RA, Lirk P, Merry AF. Combining paracetamol with nonsteroidal
anti-inflammatory drugs: A qualitative systemic review of analgesic efficacy for acute
postoperative pain. Anesthesia and Analgesia 2010;110(4):1170–1179.
8. Craig M, Jeavons R, Probert J, Benger J. Randomised comparison of intravenous
paracetamol and intravenous morphine for acute traumatic limb pain in the emergency
department. Emergency Medicine Journal 2012;29(1):37–39.
9. Coffey F, Wright J, Hartshorn, Hunt P, Locker T, Mirza K, Dissmann P. STOP!: A ran-
domised double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the efficacy and safety of methoxy-
flurane for the treatment of acute pain. Emergency Medicine Journal 2014;31(8):613–618.
10. Buntine P, Thom O, Babl F, Bailey M, Bernard S. Prehospital analgesia in adults using
inhaled methoxyflurane. Emergency Medicine Australasia 2007;19(6):509–514.
11. Association of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland. Management of severe local
anaesthetic toxicity.
12. Comparison of topical anaesthetic agents for minor wound closure in children.
13. Zempsky WT, Karasic RB. EMLA versus TAC for topical anaesthesia of extremity
wounds in children. Annals of Emergency Medicine 1997;30(2):163–166.
14. www.bestbets.org
15. Mohan PP, Cherian PT. Epinephrine in digital nerve block. Emergency Medicine Journal
2007;24(11):789–790.
16. Bauman BH, McManus JG. Pediatric pain management in the emergency department.
Emergency Medicine Clinics of North America 2005;23(2):393–414.
17. Chudnofsky CR, Lozon MM. Sedation and analgesia for procedures. In Rosen’s
Emergency Medicine: Concepts and Clinical Practice, 5th ed., JA Marx, RS Hockberger, RM
Walls (eds). St. Louis, MO: Mosby, 2002, 2578–2590.
18. American Society of Anesthesiologists. Continuum of depth of sedation: Definition of
general anaesthesia and levels of sedation/analgesia. 2009.
19. AAGBI Safety Statement: The use of capnography outside the operating theatre.
Association of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland, 2011.
20. Deitch K, Miner J, Chudnofsky CR, Dominici P, Latta D. Does end tidal CO2 monitor-
ing during emergency department procedural sedation and analgesia with propofol
decrease the incidence of hypoxic events? A randomized controlled trial. Annals of
Emergency Medicine 2010;55:258–264.
21. Sivilotti MLA, Messenger DW, van Vlymen J, Dungey PE, Murray HE. A comparative
evaluation of capnometry versus pulse oximetry during procedural sedation and analge-
sia on room air. Canadian Journal of Emergency Medicine 2010;12:397–404.
192
References
22. Godwin SA, Caro DA, Wolf SJ, Jagoda AS, Charles R, Marett BE, Moore J. Clinical
policy: Procedural sedation and analgesia in the emergency department. Annals of
23. Royal College of Anaesthetists and College of Emergency Medicine. Safe sedation of
adults in the emergency department.
24. Practice guidelines for preoperative fasting and the use of pharmacological agents to
reduce the risk of pulmonary aspiration: Application to healthy patients undergoing
elective procedures: A report by the American Society of Anesthesiologist Task Force on
Preoperative Fasting. Anaesthesiology 1999;90:896–905.
25. Thorpe RJ, Benger J. Pre-procedural fasting in emergency sedation. Emergency Medicine
Journal 2010;27(4):254–261.
26. Department of Health (UK). Reference guide to consent for examination or treatment. 2009.
27. American Academy of Pediatrics, Committee on Drugs. Guidelines for monitoring and
management of pediatric patients during and after sedation for diagnostic and thera-
peutic procedures: Addendum. Pediatrics 2002;110(4):836–838.
28. Entonox. Anaesthesia UK. Retrieved from http://www.anaesthesiauk.com/ on April 10,
2009.
29. Ahlborg G, Axelsson G, Bodin L. Shift work, nitrous oxide exposure and spontane-
ous abortion among Swedish midwives. Occupational and Environmental Medicine
1996;53:374–378.
30. Branptom P. Review of Toxicological Data on nitrous oxide. MGC 153/08. European
Industrial Gases Association (EIGA). 2008.
31. Porter K. Ketamine in prehospital care. Emergency Medicine Journal 2004;21:351–354.
32. Treston G, Bell A, Cardwell R, Fincher G, Chand D, Cashion G. What is the nature of
emergence phenomenon when using intravenous or intramuscular ketamine for paedi-
atric procedural sedation? Emergency Medicine Australasia 2009;21(4):315–322.
33. https://www.medicinescomplete.com/mc/bnf/current/PHP8521-propofol-non
-proprietary.htm.
34. https://www.medicinescomplete.com/mc/bnf/current/PHP8653-flumazenil.htm.
35. https://www.medicinescomplete.com/mc/bnf/64/PHP8656-naloxone-hydrochloride
.htm.
36. Cook TM, Woodhall N, Frerk C (eds). 4th National Audit Project (NAP4): Major compli-
cations of airway management in the UK. Royal College of Anaesthetists and Difficult
Airway Society. 2011.
37. Association of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland (AAGBI). Recommendations
for standards of monitoring during anaesthesia and recovery. February 14, 2007.
38. Sehdev RS, Symmons DA, Kindl K. Ketamine for rapid sequence induction in patients
with head injury in the emergency department. Emergency Medicine Australasia
2006;18(1):37–44.
193
The injured child
16
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Be aware of the differences in pre-hospital trauma care between children and adults
▪▪ Be aware of the challenges posed by pre-hospital paediatric trauma care
▪▪ Be able to assess and treat the injured child in the pre-hospital setting
INTRODUCTION
Paediatric trauma can present a significant challenge to the pre-hospital practitioner. Many
practitioners lack experience in managing children as well as the knowledge required to do
so and consequently are not confident when dealing with the injured child. Recognising the
acutely sick or injured child can be difficult without experience, and management can be tech-
nically challenging, especially in very small children, and complex due to the variations in size
between neonates at one end of the spectrum and adolescents at the other. In addition, there is
undoubtedly a sense of higher emotional engagement when dealing with children.
The amount of serious paediatric trauma continues to decline. In the year 2000 there were
5011 seriously injured children (<18 years) and 191 deaths as a result of road traffic accidents
in the UK. By 2014 this had fallen to 2519 seriously injured and 83 deaths (4.7% of all road
deaths) (1). The 2012 Trauma Audit & Research Network (TARN) data contains 737 children
with an Injury Severity Score (ISS) of >15, of which over 90% was blunt in mechanism (2).
Trauma accounted for just 2.4% of all unplanned paediatric intensive care unit (PICU) admis-
sions in 2014 (3). These figures are a great success story but as a result many pre-hospital
practitioners will have limited exposure to serious paediatric trauma. Consequently practitio-
ners must seek knowledge of the key differences in assessing and treating children, and must
develop a structure which will enable them to successfully manage the injured child in the
pre-hospital environment. That said, the pre-hospital practitioner can be confident that much
of their adult trauma skill and experience is directly transferable to children.
Most of the anxiety surrounding emergency paediatric care is heightened by self-perceived
lack of ability and fear of the consequences of error in caring for seriously injured children.
This is not always justifiable and practitioners should be confident that they can provide good
194
Initial assessment
immediate care. Whilst children may be different from adults in certain ways, and the favourite
phrase ‘they’re not just little adults’ is too often used; children are still little human beings and
have much in common with older patients.
INITIAL ASSESSMENT
<C>ABCDE
The framework for assessing and treating the injured child is exactly the same as that for an
adult, namely <C>ABCDE. Generally speaking children sustain the same injuries and require
the same pre-hospital management as adults, albeit in a modified form. Because of their size,
anatomy and physiology, children are more likely to be multiply injured (4), and significant
injury can easily go unrecognised or be underestimated. Practitioners must be aware of the
normal ranges of physiological parameters at different ages (Box 16.1) (5). Other obstructions
to assessment include the non-verbal or distressed and uncooperative child. This section will
highlight key differences in the assessment of the injured child (also see Table 16.1).
BOX 16.1: Normal Paediatric Vital Signs
Age (years) Heart rate Respiratory rate Systolic B/P

<1 110 – 160 30–40 70–90
1–2 100–150 25–35 80–95
2–5 95–140 25–30 80–100
5–12 80–120 20–25 90–110
>12 60–100 15–20 100–120
CATASTROPHIC HAEMORRHAGE
Peripheral, immediately life-threatening haemorrhage is rarely seen in civilian pre-hospital
practice, but when present, the control of catastrophic haemorrhage takes immediate priority,
as in adults. Limb tourniquets can be used on almost any size of child, but some pelvic splints
may not fit smaller children and improvisation may be required. Haemostatic agents can be
used in junctional haemorrhage in the same manner as in adults.
AIRWAY
Careful assessment of the paediatric airway is required. The paediatric larynx is higher and
more anterior than in adults (C3/4 versus C6/7) and is more pliable and therefore less suscep-
tible to cartilage fracture, but there may be injury without anatomical disruption or crepitus.
However, the small diameter of the paediatric airway means oedema or haematoma will lead
to obstruction more quickly than in adults.
195
The injured child
Table 16.1 Key anatomical and physiological differences of children
Key differences Relevance

Catastrophic Higher mL/kg blood volume Rapid exsanguination
haemorrhage Smaller total circulating volume
Higher cardiac index
Airway Higher, more anterior larynx with Miller (straight) laryngoscope blades
floppy epiglottis and different technique
Narrow airway More rapid obstruction with oedema
or swelling
Soft neck/airway tissues Easy to compress and occlude with
handling or swelling
Changing anatomy with age Different positions of the open airway
Changing equipment and technique
requirements
Breathing Compliant chest wall Thoracic injury without external
evidence or rib fracture
High, anterior ribs Diaphragmatic breathing
No or less thoracic abdominal organ
protection
Diaphragmatic breathing Respiratory failure when diaphragmatic
movement is impaired by injury or
gastric distension
Lower functional residual capacity Rapid de-saturation following pre-
and high oxygen consumption oxygenation and reduced
laryngoscopy time
Changing respiratory rate with age Failure to recognise the injured child
Circulation Changing pulse rate and blood Failure to recognise the injured child
pressure with age
Difficulty accessing veins Reliance on alternative routes of drug
and fluid delivery
Task focus and scene delay
Less stroke volume variation High significance of tachycardia in
response to hypovolaemia
Increased cardiovascular Hypotension occurs later and
compensation for hypovolaemia considered a peri-arrest finding
Disability Low glycogen stores and high Propensity for hypoglycaemia
metabolic rate
More permeable blood brain barrier Never use hypotonic/hyponatremic
fluids for resuscitation, risk of cerebral
oedema
Exposure Higher surface body area to weight Propensity for hypothermia
ratio
196
Initial assessment
Signs of airway injury or obstruction are given in

BOX 16.2: Signs of Airway
Box 16.2
Injury or Obstruction
Airway obstruction will require immediate
resolution and possibly advanced airway manage- ▪▪ Snoring/gurgling
ment. This should be performed by clinicians com- ▪▪ Stridor
petent in paediatric advanced airway management ▪▪ Voice disturbance
(see Chapter 15). Basic airway management can be ▪▪ Cough/bark
tricky, in particular for infants, since small move- ▪▪ Surgical emphysema
ments can obstruct the airway and constant vigi- ▪▪ Tracheal shift
lance and repositioning is required. Maintaining ▪▪ Palpable disruption
an airway in order to provide bag–valve–mask ▪▪ Crepitus
(BVM) ventilation with the two-person technique ▪▪ Loss of landmarks (swelling)
is particularly useful in children. Appropriately ▪▪ Respiratory distress
sized airway adjuncts must be carried to assist in ▪▪ Hypoxia
basic airway management. ▪▪ Visible penetrating wounds with
bubbling/sucking
CERVICAL SPINE
A detailed understanding of the mechanism of injury is required in order to assess the likelihood
of cervical spine injury. The cervical spine should be assessed for pain, tenderness and restricted
range of movement. In addition the child must be assessed for signs of neurological deficit. If any of
these are present in the context of trauma, immobilisation should be considered (see Chapter 13).
BREATHING BOX 16.3: Signs of Increased

Effort of Breathing and
An increased rate and effort of breathing is an
Respiratory Compromise
early sign and should always raise suspicion of
chest injury or hypovolaemia. It should be actively ▪▪ Tachypnoea
sought. It is vital to inspect the chest, bearing in ▪▪ Nasal flaring
mind that external signs of injury may be absent. ▪▪ Intercostal or subcostal recession
Signs of increased effort of breathing and respira- ▪▪ Tracheal tug
tory compromise are given in Box 16.3. ▪▪ Accessory muscle use and posturing
It is important to remember that exhaustion ▪▪ Grunting
and bradypnoea are peri-arrest signs, and if they ▪▪ Cyanosis
are present, immediate support is required. Care ▪▪ Agitation
ful palpation may reveal evidence of rib injury ▪▪ Altered consciousness
and abnormal chest movement. Percussion and
auscultation may add valuable information but are often not practical in the pre-hospital envi-
ronment where assessment may be limited to a ‘look and feel’. The respiratory rate and oxygen
saturation should be measured using an appropriately sized paediatric or infant oxygen satura-
tion probe and recorded.
If there is a breathing problem requiring BVM ventilation, it is important to maintain an
open airway and not to insufflate the stomach which will lead to diaphragmatic splinting and
respiratory failure and ultimately cardio-respiratory arrest. This is very easily done in the heat
of the moment in small sick children and some degree of gastric insufflation is practically
unavoidable. When arriving at a scene where a child is receiving assisted ventilation, an assess-
ment should be performed for gastric distension and consideration given to decompressing the
stomach with a gastric tube if insufflation is suspected and evacuation likely to be delayed.
197
The injured child
If BVM ventilation is being provided for anything but a brief period, a nasogastric or orogastric
tube in the case of head injury will need to be be inserted to allow periodic decompression of
the stomach. Active suction on the gastric tube may be necessary.
CIRCULATION
A common and serious pitfall is the failure to recognise shock in children. Children compensate
exceptionally well for volume loss but progress rapidly to cardiac arrest when decompensation
occurs. Paediatric cardiac arrest has a very poor outcome, and pre-hospital practitioners must
pay particular attention to identifying hypovolaemia in trauma in order to prevent deterioration
to the point of arrest. For many years measuring blood pressure in children was not encour-
aged, however, all injured children should have their blood pressure recorded. To achieve this,
appropriately sized non-invasive blood pressure cuffs must be available. When assessing circu-
lation the pre-hospital practitioner should record:
• Pulse (site, rate and volume)

• Capillary refill time
• Blood pressure
• Skin colour
• Skin temperature of peripheries
• Respiratory rate
• Consciousness
In infants the radial pulse is difficult to palpate, and the brachial pulse should be used
instead to record the presence and rate of peripheral pulses.
In the presence of any of the signs listed in Table 16.2 together with a mechanism suggesting
significant injury, hypovolaemia must be suspected and managed.
DISABILITY
All injured children require a blood glucose measurement (BM stix® or similar). Children are at
particular risk of hypoglycaemia at times of physiological stress. This has the potential to cloud
assessment by altering consciousness and cardiorespiratory observations.
Table 16.2 Signs of shock in children
Signs of hypovolaemia/shock
in children Pitfalls
Tachycardia Also caused by pain, fear and hypoxia; where there is a
mechanism for injury, always assume the cause is hypovolaemia
Delayed central capillary refill time Check centrally, e.g. the chest; ambient temperature may
(greater than 2 seconds) effect refill time
Weak or absent peripheral pulses Brachial pulse in infants, radial in older children
Pallor May be affected by ambient temperature, pain and fear
Cold peripheries May be affected by ambient temperature
Tachypnoea Also caused by chest injury, pain and fear
Altered consciousness Also caused by hypoxia, hypoglycaemia intoxication and
head injury
Measured hypotension Age-/size-specific reference ranges; hypotension is a late and
pre-arrest sign
198
Injuries and their management
Careful examination for head injury is

BOX 16.4: Signs and Symptoms
required. Any fall from over a metre should
of Head Injury
be considered significant in addition to
high-energy injury such as being struck by ▪▪ Haematoma
a vehicle. Significant features in the child’s ▪▪ Abrasion or lacerations
history which must be sought include an ▪▪ Deformity/depression
increased risk of bleeding (for example ▪▪ Fluid or blood from the nose or ears
from haemophilia; children are rarely on ▪▪ Distended or tense anterior fontanelle
anticoagulant or antiplatelet drugs but a ▪▪ Pupil abnormalities
few, such as cardiac patients, are) and pre- ▪▪ Abnormal eye movement
vious cranial neurosurgery. The child must ▪▪ Abnormal limb tone, power and reflexes
be carefully examined for signs of head ▪▪ Abnormal gait
injury (Box 16.4). ▪▪ Irritability
▪▪ Respiratory depression/apnoea
▪▪ Altered consciousness
EXPOSURE
Injured children require a brief but full exposure to identify all injuries. Handling and move-
ment should be kept to a minimum to preserve formed clots and prevent pain. Hypothermia
mitigation and if possible warming are required for all trauma patients including in the warmer
months. Hypothermia contributes to coagulopathy in trauma victims and its associated
increased mortality. Once assessment and emergency treatment is complete, the child should
be wrapped with blankets, including covering their head. In more severe conditions, an active
warming device with heat packs should be used.
INJURIES AND THEIR MANAGEMENT
AIRWAY
Airway injuries are uncommon in children and account for less than 0.5% of trauma presentations
(6). Management of the compromised airway follows the same stepwise approach used for adults
beginning with opening manoeuvres and progressing to advanced airway techniques. Airway
and ventilation equipment must be appropriately sized, including tube holders, capnography,
ventilation circuits and rescue devices such as supraglottic airway devices. Instrumentation and
insertion of airway devices should be done under direct vision to avoid injury to the soft tissues.
Children are particularly susceptible to vagal stimulation, especially if they are hypovolaemic.
Over-instrumentation of the oropharynx can cause bradycardia and arrest.
Oedema or compression of the airway due to swelling will cause rapid airway obstruction, par-
ticularly in younger children. In certain circumstances such as burns, ‘elective’ advanced manage-
ment may be required prior to transfer if it is felt that the airway may become obstructed in transit.
It is taught that cricothyroid surgical airway insertion is not to be attempted in children
under 12 years old. The anatomical changes of puberty make surgical airway insertion pos-
sible. If a surgical airway is being considered in a child, careful assessment of the laryngeal
anatomy is required. Needle cricothyroidotomy can provide some oxygenation in extremis but
not ventilation. This is still practically difficult, and equipment to attempt this should be preas-
sembled in the bag. Nevertheless, a child must never be allowed to die of an obstructed airway
because a surgical airway has not been performed: do a cricothyroidotomy. Complications such
as tracheal stenosis can be dealt with later in a live child.
199
The injured child
HEAD INJURY BOX 16.5: Symptoms

and Signs in Head Injury
Head injury is the most common traumatic cause of
Which Mandate Hospital
immediate death in children, and head injury (both
Assessment
isolated and in multiple injuries) is associated with the
highest mortality rates amongst children (2,4), more ▪▪ Altered consciousness
than doubling the mortality rates of isolated chest and ▪▪ Altered behaviour/irritability
abdominal injuries. National Institute for Health and ▪▪ Focal neurology
Care Excellence (NICE) guidance on head injuries ▪▪ Seizure
includes pre-hospital assessment and describes the ▪▪ Vomiting
predictor variables for significant head injury. Hospital ▪▪ Amnesia
assessment will be required in any high-energy mecha- ▪▪ Persistent headache
nism, and for children with a history of cranial neurosur- ▪▪ Significant soft tissue injury
gery, bleeding disorder, anticoagulation (or antiplatelet ▪▪ Clinical signs of skull fracture
medication) and any suspicion of non-accidental injury. ▪▪ Suspected penetrating injury
Children with any of the signs or symptoms in Box 16.5 ▪▪ Intoxication
will also require hospital assessment.
Children with an obviously minor injury who are asymptomatic may be considered for dis-
charge from scene within local and national guidance. However, the carers of the children must
receive careful head injury advice.
AVPU is a useful rapid assessment of consciousness but pre-hospital clinicians must be
competent in the application of the paediatric and infant Glasgow Coma Scales (Table 16.3).
Table 16.3 The paediatric Glasgow Coma Scale
>1 Year <1 Year Score

Eye Spontaneously Spontaneously 4
opening To verbal command To shout 3
To pain To pain 2
No response No response 1
Motor Obeys Spontaneous 6

response Localises to pain Localises to pain 5
Flexion withdrawal from pain Flexion withdrawal from pain 4
Flexion abnormal to pain Flexion abnormal to pain 3
Extension to pain Extension to pain 2
No response No response 1
>5 Years 2–5 Years 0–23 Months

Verbal Orientated Appropriate Smiles/coos appropriately 5
response words/phrases
Disorientated/ Inappropriate Cries but consolable 4
confused words
Inappropriate words Persistent cries Persistent inappropriate 3
and screaming crying and/or screaming
Incomprehensible Grunts Grunts, agitated and 2
sounds restless
No response No response No response 1
TOTAL PAEDIATRIC GLASGOW COMA SCORE (3–15):
200
If sedation or pre-hospital anaesthesia is required, the best pre-sedation/induction GCS and

the state of the pupils should be recorded.
Patients with severe head injury are likely to require critical care including intubation
and ventilation. The aims of pre-hospital critical head injury care in children are to main-
tain normal ventilation (oxygenation and carbon dioxide elimination), cerebral perfusion and
normoglycaemia.
Good analgesia, sedation and paralysis are essential to prevent awareness, gagging and
ventilatory difficulty, all of which raise intracranial pressure. Compression of the neck with
tube ties, tube holding devices, cervical collars or dressings should be avoided and if at all pos-
sible a 30-degree head up position should be maintained. If there is clinical evidence of raised
intracranial pressure, it is essential to ensure all the above are being achieved and consider
hypertonic fluids if available (mannitol or hypertonic saline, both of which can be given to
children).
SPINAL INJURY
Spinal injuries in children are uncommon. In children up to 14 years of age 82% of spinal
injuries are cervical, the majority of which are in the upper cervical spine (7). The most com-
mon causes of spinal injury are motor vehicle collisions, sports and falls. The majority of spinal
injuries are isolated but nearly 40% are associated with head injury (8).
Cervical spine immobilisation in children is a challenge. Children are less likely to cooper-
ate with restrictive control measures and thus create more movement around the cervical spine
if this is attempted. The rigid application of ‘triple immobilisation’ has been de-emphasised
and very importantly C-spine immobilisation must never be prioritised over any life-saving
intervention or critical care. Cervical spine collars are no longer recommended for children and
should not be used for immobilisation. Spinal immobilisation should only be considered when
• There is peripheral neurological deficit.

or
• There is a mechanism consistent with cervical spine injury or clinical findings suggestive
of potential injury:
• Neck pain
• Reduced range of movement/torticollis
• Injury above the clavicle
And
• The child is not fully alert and cooperative.
Or
• The child has undergone pre-hospital anaesthesia.
• There is a reduced level of consciousness.
Fully conscious children with potential injury but no neurological deficit do not require
cervical spine immobilisation and can maintain their own cervical spine control during trans-
fer to hospital.
If immobilisation is required this should initially be manual. Co-operative children can
have head blocks and tape applied or can be immobilised using a vacuum mattress. In the rare
occurrence of penetrating cervical spine injury, immobilisation is not required.
Like adult patients, children should never be transported on spinal boards; these are appro-
priate for extrication only. Scoop stretchers and vacuum mattress devices can be used to trans-
port and transfer children.
201
The injured child
Table 16.4 Summary of chest injuries in children
Injury Signs Pre-hospital interventions

Pneumothorax Tachypnoea Oxygen
Hypoxia
Unilateral breath sounds
Open pneumothorax Penetrating wound Chest seal dressing
Tachypnoea
Hypoxia
Reduced breath sounds
Tension pneumothorax Tachypnoea Oxygen
Hypoxia Chest decompression
Signs of shock
Massive haemothorax Tachypnoea Oxygen
Signs of shock Volume replacement
Unilateral breath sounds Chest drainage
Dull to percussion
Flail chest Paradoxical chest wall movement Analgesia
Tachypnoea Oxygen
Hypoxia (Ventilatory support)
Cardiac tamponade Signs of shock Oxygen
Penetrating wound Volume replacement
(Thoracotomy)
CHEST INJURY
Chest injury accounts for approximately 20%–30% of paediatric major trauma (9) (Table 16.4).
It is the second leading cause of death following head injury (2). The paediatric chest wall is
highly compliant leading to significant energy transfer to the thoracic cavity without external
signs of injury. Rib fractures occur in only 1%–2% of chest injuries, however if present they are
associated with a very high risk of other system injuries (10). Chest injuries should be suspected
where there is a consistent mechanism or signs of injury, respiratory distress or hypovolaemia.
Children sustain the same chest injuries as adults, but because of their size are more likely to
be multiply injured. Most children with a chest injury will have injuries in another body area (4).
Pre-hospital chest decompression may be required. It is essential that appropriately sized
equipment is available and that providers are familiar with procedures in children. ‘Finger
thoracostomy’ may not be possible in small children, as the rib spaces can be too narrow; a pair
of forceps should be used. For emergency decompression of a tension pneumothorax, a cannula
may well provide temporary resolution because of the thin and less muscular chest wall.
ABDOMINAL INJURY
Children are more susceptible to intra-abdominal injury than adults. Because of their size,
thinner and less muscular abdominal wall and less thoracic and pelvic protection, there is more
energy transfer to the intra-abdominal structures. Splenic and then hepatic injuries are the
commonest intra-abdominal injuries (11,12).
Abdominal pain is almost always seen in significant injury but signs of peritoneal irrita-
tion on examination are frequently absent (13). In studies of children presenting to level 1
202
trauma centres, over 50% of children with a direct blow to the abdomen, for example from
cycle handlebars, had a significant abdominal injury. Any similar mechanism should heighten
suspicion of intra-abdominal injury. Positive findings on abdominal examination (tenderness,
abrasions or contusion) are associated with significantly increased chance of intra-abdominal
injury (14,15). These children should have hospital assessment.
MUSCULOSKELETAL INJURY
PELVIS
Pelvic fractures are far less common in children than adults with an incidence of around 50%
that of adults (16), accounting for 1%–3% of pelvic fractures seen by orthopaedic surgeons (17).
Additionally life-threatening haemorrhage is less likely in children, possibly due to the pliability
of the immature pelvis and more effective vasoconstriction of healthy vessels. Exsanguination
is more likely to be from organ injury: the incidence of gastrointestinal and solid organ injury is
similar in the adult and paediatric populations (16,18). There is conflicting evidence regarding
differences in mortality between adults and children whose reported mortality is up to 25%
(19). The principles of clot preservation should still apply, namely stabilisation and minimal
handling. Around 10% of fractures are unstable (19). Pelvic stabilising devices should still be
applied in the pre-hospital setting and maintained until imaging is obtained, if the mechanism
and clinical findings suggest pelvic fracture, but they must be appropriately sized and applied.
EXTREMITIES
Pre-hospital clinicians should be aware of the different pattern of fractures seen in children. In
every case the joint above and below the injury must be examined, as localisation of injuries can be
difficult (particularly in non-verbal children) and pain is quite often referred. Causing pain during
examination only increases the child’s level of distress. Assessment and examination must always
start with the uninjured limb. The examination should be limited to the minimum required and
adequate analgesia should be provided as soon as possible. Limbs should be splinted and elevated
where practical. Neurovascular status distal to the injury should be recorded.
In the upper limb, supracondylar fractures of the humerus are common in younger children.
Scaphoid injuries are very rarely seen in young children but begin to appear when approaching
puberty. Distal radial and radial head injuries are more likely.
PRACTICE POINT
A long leg box splint or vacuum splint provides an effective transport and immobilisation device
for an infant.
In the lower limb, toddler’s fractures (spiral fractures of the tibia) are a very common fracture
in children. The typical presentation is a non-weight bearing child complaining of lower limb
pain following what is often a very minor mechanism of injury. They typically occur in ambu-
latory children up to 3 years old. In older children an injury not to be missed is a slipped upper
femoral epiphyses (SUFE). It should be excluded in any episode of trauma, minor or otherwise,
leading to limp, hip, thigh or knee pain, and pain or restricted movement on hip examination
in a child approaching puberty or older (10–17 years). Hospital referral should therefore be
considered for any child who is not weight bearing.
203
The injured child
BURNS BOX 16.6: Criteria for Referral

to a Paediatric Burns Centre
Each region of the United Kingdom has
a nominated paediatric burns centre and ▪▪ All burns greater than 1% total body
there will be local guidelines on referral surface area (the size of the child’s palm)
and transfer as well as access to burns treat- ▪▪ Circumferential burns
ment advice via telephone. ▪▪ Burns involving the face, hands, perineum
Paediatric burns are common. It must be or chest
remembered that blunt trauma may accom- ▪▪ Burns with inhalational injury including
pany burns: signs of hypovolaemia in a smoke or gas
patient with burns in the pre-hospital phase ▪▪ Electrical, chemical or radiation burns
are unlikely to be due to the burn. Burns may ▪▪ Neonatal burns of any size
occur as a result of safeguarding issues or ▪▪ Burns where there are safeguarding
non-accidental injury, and the pre-hospital concerns
practitioner must be vigilant for evidence of ▪▪ Burns in a systemically unwell child
concern at the scene. The criteria for paediat- ▪▪ Old or infected burns
ric burns referral are given in Box 16.6.
Fluids resuscitation is only required if there are signs of shock. If the presentation is delayed,
then fluids should be calculated using the Parklands Formula.
Burns are extremely painful and thus the burned child will be distressed and difficult to
manage. Vascular access can be difficult if burns are extensive and in these patients intramus-
cular ketamine may be particularly useful (see analgesia section). All burns should be covered
to prevent airflow over the injury.
VASCULAR ACCESS AND FLUID RESUSCITATION
ACCESS
Intravenous (IV) access in most children is perfectly achievable, but in toddlers, infants and
shocked children it can be technically difficult if the practitioner is not well practised in paediatric
cannulation. In the event of a seriously injured child requiring emergency fluids or drugs, multiple
attempts at cannulation can lead to unnecessary delays in treatment and extended time at scene.
If the initial attempt to cannulate is unsuccessful, then the practitioner should move straight to
intraosseus (IO) access. Practitioners who are not skilled in the cannulation of smaller or unwell
children should consider using an intraosseus needle device as the first route of access. The pre-
ferred site for IO access is the tibia, however, there are several alternatives including the distal
femur and proximal humerus. Care should be taken to site needles away from epiphyses, although
this is practically impossible if the proximal humerus is chosen. The evidence suggests that sig-
nificant consequences as a result of epiphyseal damage are exceptionally rare. The pain of flushing
and infusion can be considerable and the use of a slow bolus of lidocaine is often advocated. This
is at the discretion of the practitioner and may not be warranted if the child is very unwell. If it is
considered , great care must be taken in drawing up the correct dose. Once IO access is established,
all fluids and drugs must be actively infused using a syringe and not left to passively infuse.
PRACTICE POINT
In critical trauma, after one failed attempt at intravenous access, insert an intraosseus line.
204
Traumatic cardiorespiratory arrest
FLUID RESUSCITATION
Hypotension in children represents cardiovascular decompensation as a result of prolonged
hypovolaemia, acidosis and hypoxia. This will be rapidly and potentially irretrievable. As a
consequence hypotension cannot be used as a safe end point for resuscitation. When there are
signs of hypovolaemia (Table 16.2) in the context of trauma it should be assumed that the child
requires fluid resuscitation and the low blood pressure must not be written off as a result of
pain or distress.
Resuscitation with blood products is best, however, not all pre-hospital services currently
carry blood and most still rely on crystalloid fluids for volume replacement. Whichever fluid is
used, children should receive boluses of 5 mL/kg repeated after reassessment and to the target
end point. A reasonable end point is the presence of an easily palpable radial pulse (brachial in
infants). If non-invasive blood pressure monitoring with an appropriate sized cuff is available
it should be used. A reasonable measured end point following fluids would be the lower end of
the age-specific normal systolic blood pressure range.
TRAUMATIC CARDIORESPIRATORY ARREST

Traumatic cardiorespiratory arrest (TCRA) in children requires expert coordinated treatment to
identify and very rapidly correct reversible causes of arrest (Table 16.5).
It may be difficult to distinguish arrest from an extremely low cardiac output state, but both
conditions require the same rapidly applied steps:
• Intubation and end tidal carbon dioxide monitoring

• Oxygenation and ventilation
• Bilateral thoracostomies
• Volume replacement
• Reassessment
• Consideration of thoracotomy if there is no return of output
Outcomes in paediatric thoracotomy are similar to those in adults (20). Thoracotomy in chil-
dren is indicated in low velocity penetrating chest trauma and cardiac arrest. Its role in other
causes of traumatic arrest in children, including blunt trauma has not yet been fully established.
Table 16.5 Causes of TCRA and interventions
Cause Intervention
Catastrophic haemorrhage and hypovolaemia Control external haemorrhage, splint the pelvis
Replace volume
Hypoxia Open and secure airway

Ventilate
Tension pneumothorax Perform bilateral thoracostomy (see text)
Cardiac tamponade Perform thoracotomy and pericardial release
High spinal injury Provide advanced life support
205
The injured child
ANALGESIA
Excellent pain control is an essential and basic standard in the management of injured children.
Analgesia will reduce tachycardia and bleeding, reduce distress and result in a calmer, more
cooperative child. Not only will it settle the child, enabling further assessment, but it will also
calm parents and carers, enabling a better patient–parent–provider therapeutic dynamic. The
essential steps in achieving this are first, recognition of the problem and second, a comprehen-
sive knowledge of the agents and routes available to the pre-hospital practitioner. Full dosing
information can be found in Box 16.7 and Tables 16.6 and 16.7.
BOX 16.7: Calculating a Child’s Weight

An estimation of the child’s weight will be required for fluid and drug prescription. A carer may know
the child’s weight and it is worth remembering to ask. Recently new weight formulae have been pub-
lished to reflect the increasing weight of Western paediatric populations (21). The traditional formula
Weight in kg = ( Age + 4 ) × 2
is simple to remember and for drugs and fluids in the pre-hospital setting is not likely to cause harm.
However the older the child, the more the potential underestimation (22). There are new formulae
adjusted to age (21).
1 to 12 months (0.5 × Age months) + 4
1 to 5 years (2 × Age years) + 8
6 to 12 years (3 × Age years) + 7
Pounds to kilogram conversion:
Weight in kg = Weight in pounds/2.2
Table 16.6 Intranasal diamorphine dosing table (using 10 mg vial of diamorphine; a worked example
is given in Box 16.8)
Weight (kg) Volume saline added (mL) Notes

15 1.3 1. Estimate weight or weigh to nearest 5 kg
20 1.0 2. Add weight specific volume of 0.9%
25 0.8 sodium Chloride to 10mg vial of
30 0.7 diamorphine powder
35 0.6 3. Draw up 0.2 mL of the solution
40 0.5
50 0.4
60 0.3
Source: Kendal LM et al., BMJ 2001;332:261–265.
Note: Once drawn up, administer into nostril using a mucosal atomiser device. This will deliver 0.1 mg/kg of
diamorphine.
206
Analgesia
Table 16.7 Paediatric drug doses
Drug Routea Dose Cautions

Paracetamol Oral 15 mg/kg (maximum 1g) QDS Always check if
Rectal 15 mg/kg (maximum 1g) QDS paracetamol has been
Intravenous Over 10kg administered by carers.
15mg/kg (maximum 1g) QDS
Under 10kg
7.5 mg/kg QDS (Maximum
30mg/kg/day)
Ibuprofen Oral only 5 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg) May exacerbate asthma;
TDS avoid in renal disease,
gastric ulceration and
bleeding disorders
Diclofenac Oral 1 mg/kg (max 50 mg) TDS May exacerbate asthma;
Rectal 1 mg/kg (max 50 mg) TDS avoid in renal disease,
gastric ulceration and
bleeding disorders
Codeineb Oral only 1 mg/kg (maximum 60 mg) QDS Contraindications below
Tramadol Oral 1 mg/Kg (max 50 mg) QDS Serotonergic side effects
Intravenous 1 mg/Kg (max 50 mg) QDS
Oramorph Oral only 1–3 months, 50–100 mcg/kg, Respiratory and CNS
4 hourly depression. Nausea and
3–6 months, 100–150 mcg/kg, vomiting
4 hourly
6–12 months, 100–200 mcg/
kg, 4 hourly
Over 1 year, 200–300 mcg/kg,
4 hourly
Morphine Intravenous 50 mcg/kg boluses up to Respiratory and CNS
only 200 mcg/kg titrated to pain depression. Nausea and
vomiting
Fentanyl Intravenous 0.25 mcg/kg in boluses up to Respiratory and CNS
1 mcg/kg titrated to pain depression. Nausea and
Intranasal 1 mcg/kg atomised into vomiting
nostril(s) If >0.4 mL, divide between
nostrils
Diamorphine Intravenous Respiratory and CNS
Intranasal depression. Nausea and
vomiting
Ketamine Intravenous 0.25–0.5 mg/kg Dysphoria
(sedation and Intramuscular 2–4 mg/kg Consider small dose of
analgesia) Intranasal 3 mg/kg benzodiazepine
Ketamine Intravenous 1–2 mg/kg Adjust dose to
(induction of Intramuscular 5–8 mg/kg physiological status
anaesthesia)
(Continued )
207
The injured child
Table 16.7 (Continued) Paediatric drug doses
Drug Routea Dose Cautions

Midazolam Intravenous 0.1 mg/kg Respiratory and CNS
(sedation) depression, particularly
with opiates
Suxamethonium Intravenous 1–2 mg/kg
Rocuronium Intravenous 0.6–1.2 mg/kg
Mannitol (20%) Intravenous 1.25–2.5 mL/kg
Hypertonic Intravenous 1–2 mL/kg
saline (3%)
a All IV doses apply to intraosseus route.
b Codeine is now contraindicated in all children less than 12 years of age and children 12 to 18 years of age who are
post-tonsillectomy or -adenoidectomy with a history of sleep apnoea. Alternatives to codeine are dihydrocodeine,
oral morphine solution and tramadol.
ORAL ANALGESIA BOX 16.8: Intranasal Morphine

Dose: Worked Example
Oral analgesics include paracetamol, ibuprofen
and opioids. Estimated weight 20 kg
Codeine is now contraindicated in all chil- Add 1.0 mL to 10 mg vial of diamorphine
dren less than 12 years of age and children 12 to powder
18 years of age who are post-tonsillectomy or Draw up 0.2 mL
-adenoidectomy with a history of sleep apnoea. Dose given equals 4 mg (0.1 mg/kg)
RECTAL ANALGESIA
Rectal administration is a useful route in distressed or vomiting infants. Both paracetamol and
diclofenac can be administered via the rectal route.
INTRAVENOUS ANALGESIA
Titrated intravenous opiates remain the gold standard for the control of severe pain. However,
intravenous access can be difficult to achieve and cause distress for the child. It can also be a
cause of unacceptable scene delay. For most children, pain will be controlled by alternative routes.
Analgesics suitable for IV administration include paracetamol, morphine, fentanyl and ketamine.
INTRAMUSCULAR ANALGESIA
Intramuscular ketamine is a rapid and effective route for delivering good pain control. It is par-
ticularly useful in burns where the patient is both very distressed and is difficult to cannulate.
Whilst analgesic, sedative and anaesthetic doses are quoted, the reality is that the distinction
can be difficult to achieve. Practically, any ketamine use in children will produce some altered
consciousness. Monitoring, equipment and safety requirements should reflect those of sedation.
INTRANASAL
Intranasal is a particularly useful route for achieving effective and rapid analgesia. Ketamine, fen-
tanyl and diamorphine are all well absorbed through the nasal mucosa. Diamorphine is commonly
208
Sedation and anaesthesia
used in UK emergency departments for burns and fracture analgesia. Initially piloted in the 1990s
it is acceptable to patients and staff, is extremely well tolerated and very safe (21). The drugs need
to be in a low volume, and volumes above 0.4 mL should be divided between nostrils. At volumes
above 0.4 mL efficacy may be lost. The drugs should be administered using a 1 mL syringe and a
mucosal atomiser device (MAD). Doses for intranasal drugs are detailed in Tables 16.6 and 16.7.
INHALED ANALGESIA
Older children, essentially those of school age and above, will be able to used inhaled agents
such as nitrous oxide and oxygen mix (Entonox®). This will provide temporary but not defini-
tive pain relief. The child is likely to be more cooperative once some analgesia or sedation sec-
ondary to the nitrous oxide is achieved. This may allow the practitioner to gain IV access, dress
or splint the injury, and provide further pain relief.
NON-PHARMACOLOGICAL PAIN RELIEF

One should never underestimate the powers of the ‘magic bandage’. Children in pain need reas-
surance and comfort – be nice! Dressing wounds will reduce pain. All injured limbs should be
placed in a sling or splinted and elevated. Wherever possible, parents should be allowed to stay
with their children unless parental anxiety is sufficient to complicate management.
SEDATION AND ANAESTHESIA
PRINCIPLES
Around 8% of severely injured children are intubated prior to arrival at hospital (2). Clinicians
undertaking pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) and intubation in children must be
trained and competent in induction of anaesthesia and advanced airway management. The
indications for pre-hospital anaesthesia and intubation are
• To secure and protect and airway

• Neuroprotection in head injury
• Respiratory failure
• To facilitate the humane provision of emergency care
• To facilitate safe transfer (particularly air transport)
Pre-hospital clinicians are likely to be less experienced in PHEA in children than in adults.
It is important that regular team training in paediatric PHEA scenarios is undertaken to mini-
mise risk and maximise success. All team members should be familiar with the correct sizing of
equipment and drug dosing in children (Boxes 16.7 and 16.9 and Tables 16.6 and 16.7).
Most pre-hospital critical care units have moved now to using cuffed endotracheal tubes in chil-
dren of term age and over. It is vital that the practitioner is familiar with the sizing and correct
inflation of cuffed tubes. It is also vital that it is very clearly handed over on arrival to hospital by
the pre-hospital team and acknowledged by the receiving team that a cuffed tube has been used.
Aside from endotracheal tubes the clinician will also require paediatric sized and specific
equipment including
• Endotracheal tube holder
• Catheter mount
• Paediatric colorimetric end tidal carbon dioxide indicator
209
The injured child
• Correctly sized straight and curved

BOX 16.9: Paediatric Airway Sizes
laryngoscope blades
• Introducer Endotracheal tube internal diameter in mm
• Bougie Cuffed = (Age/4 + 4) – 0.5
Sedation of children may be required Uncuffed and microcuff = Age / 4 + 4
to facilitate extraction or packaging, and
Endotracheal tube oral length in cm
for procedures such as fracture or joint
reduction when there is immediate con- Age/2 +12
cern regarding neurovascular status.
Supraglottic Airway Device Sizing
Practitioners who undertake sedation
must be prepared to take over the airway LMA I-gel
and thus should be trained and compe- Weight/kg Size Weight/kg Size
tent in paediatric pre-hospital anaesthe- <5 1.0 2–5 1.0
sia. Children who are sedated must have 5–10 1.5 5–12 1.5
full monitoring including end tidal car- 10–20 2.0 10–25 2.0
bon dioxide. 20–30 2.5 25–35 2.5
30–50 3.0 30–40 3.0
PREPARATION
The assessment and treatment of children often causes heightened anxiety because of lack
of experience and familiarity. Practitioners can mitigate this by being thoroughly prepared to
treat children when it is required. Appropriately sized equipment must be available and fit for
purpose. Practitioners must be familiar with its use, and aide memoires will help with fluid and
drug calculations and are readily available in paper and electronic form. Pre-hospital unit train-
ing and clinical governance activity must regularly include paediatric topics. Access to senior
paediatric advice may be available and relevant phone numbers should be carried.
SAFEGUARDING
In the TARN report, 10% of children under 2 years old were injured non-accidentally (2).
Information from the scene of injury and on the observed nature of presentation and fam-
ily dynamics can be vital to enable community and secondary care health care profession-
als to make decisions regarding safeguarding children. Pre-hospital clinicians will have the
advantage of seeing the child in the community setting and possibly in the home. Any such
observations and concerns must be documented and passed on to the relevant organisations.
The injury mechanism must be correlated with the injuries seen, and the child’s behaviour
and interaction with clinicians and family members observed. Any delay in accessing health
care and inconsistencies in history should be noted and passed on. Smaller children, par-
ticularly non-ambulatory children, with injuries should have a full examination whenever
possible, particularly if discharge at the scene is being considered. Cause for concern forms or
similar notifications of concern to social workers can be completed and returned. When there
are concerns surrounding safeguarding, it is essential to enquire about other children in the
household. Immediate child safety concerns should be reported to the police who have dedi-
cated safeguarding officers. Advice can usually be obtained from community paediatricians or
by contacting the local paediatric emergency department. All pre-hospital clinicians should be
trained to the correct safeguarding children level.
210
References
DESTINATIONS
Around 45% of severely injured children in the TARN report were taken to a major trauma cen-
tre (MTC) as the first admitting hospital. Most of these were taken to either a children’s or adult
and children’s MTC. Currently there are only 5 children’s MTCs and 11 adult and children’s
MTCs out of a total of 26 MTCs in England. UK-based evidence to show improved outcomes at
children’s MTCs is not yet available. Pre-hospital practitioners should apply local trauma net-
work criteria to choose their destination. Unstable children should be taken to the nearest unit
and should not bypass emergency facilities.
SUMMARY
Managing children who have been victims of trauma requires attention to detail and a knowl-
edge of paediatric anatomy and physiology and how it changes with age. However, the princi-
ples of management are essentially the same in children as in adults. Practice as a team reduces
anxiety and improves care in this vulnerable group of patients.
REFERENCES
1. Department for Transport (UK) statistics, Reported casualties by road user type, age and
severity, Great Britain, 2014.
2. The Trauma Audit & Research Network. Severe Injury in Children 2012.
3. PICANet annual report, 2015.
4. Bayreuther J, Wagener, Woodford M, Edwards A, Lecky F, Bouamra O, Dykes E.
Paediatric trauma: Injury pattern and mortality in the UK. Archives of Disease in
Childhood: Education and Practice Edition 2009;94:37–41.
5. Advanced Life Support Group. Advanced Paediatric Life Support: The Practical Approach
(APLS). 5th ed. Blackwell, 2005.
6. Mandell DL. Traumatic emergencies involving the paediatric airway. Clinical Pediatric
7. Brown R, Brunn MA, Garcia V. Cervical spine injuries in children: A review of 103
patients treated consecutively at a level 1 pediatric trauma center. Journal of Pediatric
Surgery 2001;36:1107–1114.
8. Cirak B, Ziegfield S, Knight VM, Chang D, Avellino AM, Paidas CN. Spinal injuries
in children. Journal of Pediatric Surgery 2004;39:607–612.
9. Deasy C, Gabbe B, Palmer C, Bevan C, Crameri J, Butt W, Fitzgerlad M, Judson R,
Cameron P. Paediatric and adolescent trauma within and integrated trauma system.
Injury 2012;43:2006–2011.
10. Kessel B, Dagan J, Swaid F, Ashkenazi I, Olsha O, Peleg K, Givon A, Israel Trauma
Group, Alfici R. Rib fractures: Comparison of associated injuries between pediatric and
adult population. American Journal of Surgery 2014;208:832–834.
11. Lynn KN, Werder GM, Callaghan RM, Sullivan AN, Jafri ZH, Bloom DA. Pediatric blunt
splenic trauma: A comprehensive review. Pediatric Radiology 2009;39:904–916.
12. Potoka DA, Saladino RA. Blunt abdominal trauma in the pediatric patient. Clinical
Pediatric Emergency Medicine 2005;6:23–31.
211
The injured child
13. de Jong WJ, Stoepker L, Nellensteijn DR, Groen H, El Moumni M, Hulscher JB.
External validation of the Blunt Abdominal Trauma in Children (BATiC) score: Ruling
out significant abdominal injury in children. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery
76:1282–1287.
14. Hynick N, Brennan M, Schmit P, Noseworthy S, Yanchar NL. Identification of blunt
abdominal injuries in children. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2014;76:95–100.
15. Holmes JF, Lillis K, Monroe D, Borgialli D, Kerrey BT, Mahajan P, Adelgais K et al.
Identifying children at very low risk of clinically important blunt abdominal injuries.
Annals of Emergency Medicine 2013; 62:107–116.
16. Ismail N, Bellemare JF, Mollitt DL, DiScala C, Koeppel D, Tepas JJ 3rd. Death from pel-
vic fracture: Children are different. Journal of Pediatric Surgery 1996;31:82–85.
17. Holden C. Paediatric pelvic fractures. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic
Surgeons 2007;15:172–177.
18. Demetriades D, Karaiskakis M, Velmahos GC, Alo K, Murray J, Chan L. Pelvic fractures
in pediatric and adult trauma patients: Are they different injuries? Journal of Trauma
2003;54:1146–1151.
19. Fractures of the pelvis in children: A review of the literature. European Journal of
Orthopedic Surgery and Traumatology 2013;23:847–861.
20. Easter JS, Vinton DT, Haukoos JS. Emergent pediatric thoracotomy following traumatic
cardiac arrest. Resuscitation 2012;83:1521–1524.
21. Kendal LM, Reeves BC, Latter VS. Multicentre radomised controlled trial of nasal
diamorphine for analgesia in children and teenagers with clinical fractures. BMJ
2001;332:261–265.
22. Luscombe MD, Owens BD, Burke D. Weight estimation in paediatrics: A comparison
of the APLS formula and the formula ‘Weight=3(age)+7’. Emergency Medicine Journal
2001;28:590–593.
212
Trauma in pregnancy
17
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the anatomical and physiological changes which occur in pregnancy

▪▪ Understand the obstetric complications of trauma
▪▪ Understand the principles of pre-hospital management of the pregnant trauma patient
INTRODUCTION
The possibility of pregnancy needs to be considered in all female trauma patients of child-
bearing age (between puberty and the menopause). Although the practitioner may be con-
cerned that there are two patients to manage, the outcome of a viable foetus is reliant on the
optimal resuscitation of the mother (1). In pregnant women, trauma may not infrequently be
the consequence of domestic violence or psychiatric conditions which may make management
more complex.
The Centre for Maternal and Child Enquiries (CMACE) report reviewing all maternal deaths in
the UK from 2006 to 2008 identified 30 deaths in pregnant women involving trauma, from a
total of 261 patients (11%) (2). Life-threatening trauma in pregnant women is therefore fortu-
nately rare.
In the CMACE report the most common cause of death from trauma in pregnant women
was a road traffic collision as a passenger or pedestrian. This accounted for 15 deaths. Failure
to wear a seat belt and failure to position the seat belt in the correct position were common
factors. Domestic violence is still distressingly common and the CMACE study identified eight
pregnant women who were murdered by violent methods. Between 2006 and 2008, six preg-
nant women committed suicide by traumatic means (including hanging, jumping from height,
setting themselves alight or stabbing).
213
Trauma in pregnancy
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY IN PREGNANCY
AIRWAY
Management of the airway in pregnant women is potentially challenging. Weight gain, soft
tissue oedema and enlarged breasts may impede laryngoscopy. A bougie and short-handled
laryngoscope must be available (3). The landmarks for a surgical airway may be more difficult
to identify.
Pregnant women are at increased risk of regurgitation and aspiration due to pregnancy
hormones relaxing the gastro-oesophageal sphincter, delayed gastric emptying, and increased
intra-gastric pressure from upward pressure on the diaphragm from the gravid uterus. If
advanced airway manoeuvres are required, intubation with a cuffed endotracheal tube is pre-
ferred over a laryngeal mask airway, with the use of cricoid pressure during induction of anaes-
thesia and early decompression of the stomach with a naso- or orogastric tube.
BREATHING
Pregnancy leads to increased oxygen consumption and reduced functional residual capacity.
Oxygen should be given to all pregnant women, irrespective of their recorded SpO2. Rapid
desaturation will occur during intubation and it may be useful to administer 15 L via nasal can-
nula throughout the procedure as well as ensuring an adequate period of pre-oxygenation via a
mask. The tidal volume increases by 20% at 12 weeks and up to 40% at term. Hyperventilation
is normal, with the result that the pregnant patient should be running a low-normal end tidal
CO2. During pregnancy the thorax is less compliant due to breast enlargement and increased
intra-abdominal pressure, so bag–valve–mask ventilation may be more difficult. The dia-
phragm rises by up to 4 cm as the uterus enlarges. This means any thoracostomy or chest
drain insertion will need to be performed higher (3rd or 4th intercostal space) to avoid intra-
abdominal incision.
CIRCULATION
In the supine position the gravid uterus will cause compression of the inferior vena cava reduc-
ing venous return and therefore cardiac output. This can occur from 20 weeks or earlier (4):
if there is a visible ‘bump’, then the supine position should be avoided. Even if a woman is
asymptomatic lying flat, the foetus may be compromised. If a pregnant woman is found to be
hypotensive, it is important to check that she is lying in a ‘left lateral tilt’ position.
Heart rate is increased by 10–15 beats per minute by the third trimester. Blood pres-
sure falls by 10–15 mmHg in the second trimester and returns to near normal by term.
Circulating blood volume increases by up to 50% in the third trimester. This means that
significant haemorrhage can occur (more than 1.5 litres) before signs of hypovolaemic
shock become evident. Shunting of uterine and placental blood into the maternal circu-
lation may mask maternal shock. The foetus may be in hypovolaemic shock even if the
mother appears normovolaemic.
The uterine circulation is directly dependent on maternal blood pressure. Once the mother
develops hypotension from hypovolaemia, peripheral vasoconstriction will reduce uterine
blood flow further. It is likely that with a maternal systolic blood pressure of 90 mmHg or a
palpable radial pulse the foetus will still be perfused adequately. Therefore the principles of
214
Obstetric complications following trauma
permissive hypotension (fluids titrated to a radial pulse, an alert (A) conscious level or systolic
blood pressure of 90 mmHg) are still appropriate in pregnancy. In late pregnancy the uterus
displaces the abdominal viscera making patterns of injury and abdominal examination less
reliable, and there is increased vascularity of the pelvis which means pelvic fractures may easily
cause life-threatening haemorrhage (Box 17.1).
BOX 17.1: Anatomical and Physiological Changes in Pregnancy

Airway
– Soft tissue oedema and enlarged breasts may make intubation more difficult.
– Surgical airway may be more difficult as landmarks may be more difficult to identify.
– There is an increased risk of regurgitation and aspiration.
Breathing
– Increased oxygen consumption.
– Reduced functional residual capacity.
– Rapid desaturation may occur during rapid sequence intubation.
– Tidal volume increases by 20% at 12 weeks and to 40% at term.
– Hyperventilation is normal.
– The thorax is less compliant.
– The diaphragm rises by up to 4 cm.
Circulation
– The gravid uterus will cause compression of the inferior vena cava reducing venous return
and therefore cardiac output.
– Heart rate is increased by 10–15 beats per minute by the third trimester.
– Blood pressure falls by 10–15 mmHg in the second trimester and returns to near normal by
term.
– Blood volume increases by up to 50% in the third trimester.
Other
– In late pregnancy the uterus displaces the abdominal viscera making patterns of injury and
abdominal examination less reliable.
– Increased vascularity of the pelvis means pelvic fractures may easily cause life-threatening
haemorrhage.
OBSTETRIC COMPLICATIONS FOLLOWING TRAUMA
PLACENTAL ABRUPTION
Placental abruption is the premature separation of the placenta from the uterine wall. It may
occur after relatively minor trauma and can also present late, up to 3–4 days after the initial
incident (5). Haemorrhage occurs between the placenta and the uterine wall and is commonly
concealed with little or no external bleeding from the vagina.
Placental abruption will normally cause severe abdominal pain and premature contractions
may develop. There is tenderness over the uterus with classically a tense, hard, woody feeling
to the uterus on palpation, and the fundal height may be higher than expected if the gestation
is known. There may be vaginal bleeding which is commonly dark in colour, and as discussed
earlier, the amount does not correlate with the severity of bleeding. Significant separation of
the placenta will result in intra-uterine death.
215
Trauma in pregnancy
PLACENTA PRAEVIA
Placenta praevia is where the placenta is abnormally located in the lower part of the uterus, near
to, or over the cervix. Placenta praevia is diagnosed on routine antenatal scans so the mother
should be aware of this diagnosis. In the presence of placenta praevia, separation of the pla-
centa is likely to result in significant vaginal bleeding which is bright red in colour. In contrast
to a placental abruption, the patient may not be in pain and the uterus will not be tender to
palpation. However, the bleeding may cause uterine irritation and provoke premature contrac-
tions which will cause intermittent pain.
In both placental abruption and placenta praevia the mother may demonstrate signs of
hypovolaemic shock. In both cases this is a life-threatening condition for both the mother and
the foetus.
UTERINE RUPTURE
A uterine rupture is a tear in the uterus. This may be caused by blunt trauma to the abdomen
and is usually associated with later gestation with an expanded uterus and a previous caesar-
ean section scar (3). The patient presents with severe abdominal pain and may exhibit hypo-
volaemic shock from concealed major haemorrhage. The top of the fundus may be difficult to
distinguish and extra-uterine foetal parts may be palpated. Uterine rupture is a life-threatening
emergency for both the mother and the foetus.
PREMATURE LABOUR
Trauma to the uterus may injure the myometrium causing cells to release prostaglandins that
stimulate uterine contractions. With significant uterine damage and a greater gestational age this
may progress to premature labour. In the majority of cases contractions resolve without treatment.
FOETAL DEATH
Direct foetal injury is rare. Indirect injury may occur due to hypoxia or hypotension in the
mother, the conditions described earlier, or a placental or cord injury. Attempts to diagnose
foetal death in the pre-hospital environment are unnecessary, as this will not change manage-
ment. After diagnosis at hospital the mother will go on to have an induced vaginal delivery of
the deceased foetus if there are no significant maternal injuries.
FOETO-MATERNAL HAEMORRHAGE
Even minor trauma may cause trans-placental haemorrhage from the foetus to the maternal
circulation. A Kleihauer test should be performed at hospital on all Rhesus D negative women
to estimate the amount of foetal blood cells present in the maternal circulation. All Rhesus neg-
ative mothers who are more than 12 weeks pregnant will require anti-D IgG injection within
72 hours of injury (6).
PRACTICE POINT
Women who are more than 12 weeks pregnant will require anti-D IgG injection within 72 hours
of injury.
216
Initial assessment
PENETRATING INJURY TO THE UTERUS

As pregnancy progresses, the uterus acts as a shield for the maternal abdominal organs,
although this means a potentially poor prognosis for the foetus. The uterine muscle and amni-
otic fluid reduce energy transfer from higher energy missiles. Penetration of the umbilical cord
or placenta may cause placental abruption or life-threatening haemorrhage.
INITIAL ASSESSMENT
HISTORY
In addition to the standard AMPLE history (Allergies, Medications, Past medical history, Last
ate or drank, Events [what happened]), an obstetric history should be obtained from the preg-
nant patient or her relatives. In the UK, the patient usually has her own antenatal records which
will provide useful information.
The additional questions which should be asked of the pregnant trauma victim are
• How many weeks pregnant are you or when was the last menstrual period (LMP; the
first day of their last menstrual period)?
• Is it a singleton pregnancy or a multiple birth?
• Have any problems been identified in this pregnancy (for example a low lying placenta)?
• How many previous pregnancies and deliveries have occurred? Were they normal
vaginal deliveries or caesarean sections, and were there any complications with these?
This information can be recorded as gravidity (the total number of pregnancies including
this one) and parity (the total number of births), for example G2 P1.
• When did you last feel the baby move and is it moving normally? (Unfortunately, a dead
foetus may be felt to move as it floats in amniotic fluid, conversely the absence of foetal
movements does not mean foetal death.)
• Have you had any contractions or abdominal pain?
• Have you had any vaginal bleeding or discharge?
PRACTICE POINT
Optimal assessment and management of the maternal injuries will lead to the best prognosis for
the foetus.
EXAMINATION
The standard <C>ABCDE approach should be adopted for the management of the pregnant
trauma patient. In addition to this it will be necessary to make a more detailed assessment of
the abdomen. This can be described as <C>ABCDEFG with the F standing for fundus and the
G for go to a hospital or major trauma centre with obstetric capability (5).
ASSESSING FUNDAL HEIGHT

Fundal height can be used to estimate the gestation in an unconscious woman. The first
method is using anatomical landmarks to give a gross estimation of the gestational age. At
217
Trauma in pregnancy
12–14 weeks the uterus becomes palpable out of the weeks

pelvis, at 20–22 weeks the uterus is at the level of the 38
40
36
umbilicus, and by 34–36 weeks the uterus reaches 32
the costal margin (see Figure 17.1). 28
After 24 weeks gestation the fundal height mea- 22
surement can be made by identifying the upper bor- 16
der of the symphysis pubis and the uterine fundus 12

and measuring the distance between with a tape
measure. The measurement in centimetres should
then correspond to the gestation in weeks, with an
allowance of ±2 centimetres difference. This is less Figure 17.1 Fundal height and gestation.
practical in the pre-hospital environment.
PRACTICE POINT
A fundal height below the umbilicus is probably the most useful measure as it suggests that
emergency caesarean section will not influence the survival of the mother or foetus.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ABDOMEN

The presence of a Pfannenstiel scar from a previous caesarean section should be noted; this is
found as a transverse scar just above the mons pubis.
The abdomen should be palpated for any tenderness or rigidity. Contractions or foetal move-
ments may be palpable.
External blood loss from the vagina must be identified with an assessment of the amount
and the presence of any clots or active bleeding. There may also be clear fluid if the mem-
branes have ruptured or a yellow-green fluid suggesting meconium staining. There is no
indication for a pre-hospital vaginal examination. Verbal consent must be obtained from
conscious patients and information provided to the patient and relatives about the need for
inspection. The patient’s dignity and modesty must be maintained at all times and another
health care practitioner should be used as a chaperone when possible. The patient may refuse
or may request a female member of staff.
FOETAL ASSESSMENT
Foetal well-being is extremely difficult to assess in the pre-hospital environment. Foetal heart
sounds may be heard with a standard stethoscope or pre-hospital ultrasound, if available, can
be used to view the foetal heart. However, neither are reliable; they may delay transport and do
not influence the pre-hospital management of the patient. This means that foetal assessment
is not indicated in the pre-hospital setting but will need to be performed on arrival to hospital.
MANAGEMENT
CATASTROPHIC HAEMORRHAGE CONTROL

Catastrophic haemorrhage is exceptionally rare, but where necessary, exsanguinating external
bleeding should be controlled using the techniques described in Chapter 7.
218
Management
AIRWAY AND CERVICAL SPINE CONTROL

The standard assessment of the airway will be made with consideration that any intubation
may be difficult and there is a high risk of regurgitation so cricoid pressure should be applied.
BREATHING
High-flow oxygen must be given to all pregnant women who have suffered trauma. Because of
the anatomical changes described earlier, thoracostomy needs to be performed at a higher level
(3rd or 4th intercostal space) than on the non-pregnant patient.
CIRCULATION
The gravid uterus must be displaced to the left as soon as possible in order to reduce aortaca-
val compression and increase venous return. This can be done by manual displacement (see
Figure 17.2). If the patient is on a scoop stretcher, padding can be placed under the stretcher
on the right side to give a left lateral tilt of 15 to 30 degrees (5). This will allow in-line spinal
immobilisation to be maintained. Padding placed directly under the right side of the patient is
not advisable following blunt trauma as this will cause rotation of the spine, but may be used in
penetrating trauma when spinal immobilisation is not required.
The traditional principles of permissive hypotension for fluid resuscitation and titrating flu-
ids to a radial pulse apply equally to pregnant women (7). There is a fine balance between
increasing the blood pressure by fluid resuscitation, which will improve perfusion of the foetus
and vital organs and the risk of disrupting clots and increasing haemorrhage. It is assumed that
the foetus will be adequately perfused with a maternal systolic blood pressure of 90 mmHg.
Pregnant patients with a suspected pelvic injury should have a pelvic splint applied.
Pregnancy is not a contraindication to using tranexamic acid and this should be given to
all patients showing signs of hypovolaemia or who have suspected internal haemorrhage fol-
lowing trauma (8). For patients with difficult vascular access or injuries to the upper limbs,
cannulation in the lower limbs should ideally be avoided, as flow may be affected by vena caval
compression from the gravid uterus (9).
(a) (b)
Figure 17.2 Manual displacement of the uterus to the left with (a) operator on right side of patient and
(b) operator on left side of patient.
219
Trauma in pregnancy
New Ideas
Tranexamic acid should be given to pregnant patients following significant trauma
DISABILITY AND EXPOSURE

There are no major differences in management during pregnancy. The patient’s modesty must
be maintained during examinations and they must be kept warm. Any drugs administered
must be safe in pregnancy. For analgesia, Entonox®, paracetamol, morphine and ketamine can
be considered.
CHOICE OF DESTINATION
Determining the most appropriate hospital may involve a complex decision-making process.
For the pregnant major trauma patient the gold standard will be to transfer to a major trauma
centre (MTC) with on-site senior obstetric clinicians and theatres as well as neonatal and pae-
diatric support. For the time-critical patient in which there is a long transfer time to the gold
standard, but a shorter transfer to an MTC without obstetric support on-site is possible, the
latter may be the only option. Trauma networks should discuss these eventualities so it is clear
what the options might be in different locations.
For the time-critical pregnant major trauma patient, a pre-alert is essential in order to ensure
that senior obstetric, anaesthetic and neonatal/paediatric staff (when there is a gestation >24 weeks)
are ready for the patient’s arrival. Where there are short transfer times to the receiving hospital
(<20 minutes) or the trauma occurs out of hours it may be advisable to ask ambulance control to
contact the hospital before the full pre-alert message to allow time for mobilisation of resources.
Pregnancy >20 weeks is frequently used as an indicator on pre-hospital major trauma tri-
age tools that the patient may benefit from being transported to a MTC regardless of vital
signs, mechanism of injury or injury patterns. However, studies show that pregnancy alone
is not an independent predictor of the need for trauma team activation by the receiving
department (10,11).
PRACTICE POINT
The patient with minor injuries or who is apparently uninjured following an RTC or abdominal
trauma should be taken to the local emergency department with obstetric facilities for further
assessment of the foetus.
MATERNAL CARDIAC ARREST FOLLOWING TRAUMA

In the event of a maternal cardiac arrest following trauma, resuscitation should be commenced
immediately and continued during transfer to hospital.
Following the diagnosis of cardiac arrest the immediate management is
• Basic life support

• Left lateral tilt if the patient is secured on an orthopaedic scoop stretcher (or long spinal
board) or manual lateral displacement of the uterus to the left by a team member
• Rapid assessment of fundal height or bystander confirmation of gestational age
220
Summary
Chest compressions will need to be performed slightly higher on the sternum to allow
for the elevation of the diaphragm and abdominal contents caused by the gravid uterus (9).
Defibrillation pads may be difficult to apply over large breasts and with a left lateral tilt in place.
If the fundal height is below the umbilicus, there are no obstetric interventions which will
improve outcome, so the focus is on the standard management of a traumatic cardiac arrest (12).
This includes intubation and ventilation; bilateral thoracostomies; reduction and splintage of
long bone fractures and pelvic fractures; arrest of major external haemorrhage and intravenous
or intraosseous access with fluid resuscitation, ideally blood. It also includes consideration of a
resuscitative thoracotomy in the case of penetrating chest trauma (13).
If the fundal height is above the umbilicus, a resuscitative caesarean section or emergency
hysterectomy is indicated if the patient fails to respond to initial resuscitation. At 20–24 weeks,
the primary role of the procedure is to save the life of the mother by improving cardiac output
and it is unlikely that the foetus will survive. Above 24 weeks the aim is to attempt to save both
the mother and foetus (9).
This procedure should start after 4 minutes of unsuccessful cardiopulmonary resuscitation,
as the neurological outcome of the foetus and success of return of spontaneous circulation in
the mother will decline with time. Nevertheless, foetal and maternal survival has been reported
even when perimortem caesarean section was performed after 30 minutes of arrest (14).
If the pre-hospital practitioner has the required training, skills and governance support
within their organisation to perform a pre-hospital emergency hysterotomy, the procedure may
take place on scene. Organisations should have their own standard operating procedures for this
situation written in conjunction with local obstetricians. If no such policy is in place, the patient
should be rapidly transported to the nearest emergency department with senior obstetric staff
on site, with a clear pre-alert message communicating the resources required on arrival.
The technique of performing an emergency hysterectomy will require multiple personnel to
undertake the following tasks (15):
• Management of the cardiac arrest (intubation, thoracostomies, etc.)

• Performance of the hysterectomy
• Resuscitation of the foetus (if >24 weeks of pregnancy)
Practitioners should undergo simulation training with obstetric colleagues in order to pre-
pare for such an event.
SUMMARY
Death from trauma in pregnancy in the UK population commonly results from the mecha-
nisms of RTC or domestic violence or is associated with psychiatric disorders. The main princi-
ple of the management of trauma in pregnancy is that the resuscitation of the mother facilitates
resuscitation of the foetus. All visibly pregnant women should be placed in a left lateral tilt or
should have manual displacement of the uterus to avoid aortocaval compression.
Obstetric complications such as placental abruption or uterine rupture may present as hypovo-
laemic shock after even relatively minor trauma, and the resuscitating team must be aware of this
possibility. Assessment of fundal height is essential if the gestational age is not known from the
history, but all pregnant women should be conveyed to hospital after any form of blunt trauma.
Emergency hysterotomy should be considered for all pregnant women in cardiac arrest
who have a fundal height above the umbilicus and in whom there has been no response to
4 minutes of CPR.
221
Trauma in pregnancy
REFERENCES
1. Barraco RD, Chiu WC, Clancy TV, Como JJ, Ebert JB, Hess LW, Hoff WS et al. Practice
management guidelines for the diagnosis and management of injury in the pregnant
patient: The EAST Practice Management Guidelines Work Group. Journal of Trauma
2010;69(1):211–214.
2. Centre for Maternal and Child Enquiries (CMACE). Saving Mothers’ Lives: Reviewing
maternal deaths to make motherhood safer: 2006–08. The Eighth Report on Confidential
Enquiries into Maternal Deaths in the United Kingdom. BJOG 2011;118(Suppl 1):1–203.
3. Campbell TA, Sanson TG. Cardiac arrest and pregnancy. Journal of Emergencies, Trauma,
and Shock 2009;2(1):34–42.
4. Ueland K, Novy MJ, Peterson EN, Metcalfe J. Maternal cardiovascular dynamics, IV:
the influence of gestational age on the maternal cardiovascular response to posture and
exercise. American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology 1969;104:856–864.
5. Advanced Life Support Group. Pre-Hospital Obstetric Emergency Training: The Practical
Approach. Wiley Blackwell, 2010.
6. Royal College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists (RCOG). Rhesus D prophylaxis, The
use of anti-D immunoglobulin for (Green-top Guideline 22). March 2011.
7. Joint Royal Colleges Ambulance Liaison Committee. UK Ambulance Services Clinical
Practice Guidelines 2013. Association of Ambulance Chief Executives (AACE), 2013.
8. Roberts I, Perel P, Prieto-Merino D, Shakur H, Coats T, Hunt BJ, Lecky F, Brohi K, Willett K.
Effect of tranexamic acid on mortality in patients with traumatic bleeding: Prespecified
analysis of data from randomized control trial. BMJ 2012;345:e5839.
9. American Heart Association. Cardiac arrest associated with pregnancy. Circulation
2005;112:IV-150–IV-153.
10. Greene W, Roninson L, Rizzo AG. Sakran J, Hendershot K, Moore J, Weatherspoon K,
Fakhry SM. Pregnancy is not a sufficient indicator for trauma team activation. Journal of
Trauma 2007;63(3):550–554.
11. Aufforth R, Edhayan E, Dempah D. Should pregnancy be a sole criterion for trauma code
activation: A review of the trauma registry. American Journal of Surgery 2010;199(3):387–389.
12. Soar J et al. European Resuscitation Council Guidelines for Resuscitation 2010. Section 8.
Cardiac arrest in special circumstances. Resuscitation 2010;81:1421–1424.
13. Lockey DJ, Lyon RM, Davies GE. Development of a simple algorithm to guide the effec-
tive management of traumatic cardiac arrest. Resuscitation 2013;84(6):738–742.
14. Einav S, Kaufman N, Sela HY. Maternal cardiac arrest and perimortem caesarean deliv-
ery: Evidence or expert-based? Resuscitation 2012;83(10):1191–200.
15. Carley S. Perimortem C-section at St. Emlyn’s. http://stemlynsblog.org/peri-mortem
-c-section-at-st-emlyns/. Accessed December 10, 2013.
222
Trauma in the elderly
18
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the particular challenges of managing the elderly trauma patient

▪▪ Understand the potential importance of past medical history and drug history in how an
elderly patient responds to trauma
▪▪ Recognise the possibility of significant injury following apparently minor trauma
INTRODUCTION
Management of trauma in patients of advanced years provides many challenges for clinicians.
In the context of ageing populations the incidence of traumatic injuries amongst the elderly
is rising throughout the world. Differences in injury profiles compared to younger victims of
trauma, combined with the physiological and pharmacological effects of advanced age and the
treatment of existing medical co-morbidities necessitate an approach to the management of
trauma in the elderly that is specifically tailored to the clinical needs of these patients. Problems
may range from obvious issues such as mobility to more subtle issues such as difficulty com-
municating with the deaf in noisy environments or with partially sighted patients. Each phase
of patient management from the point of injury through to rehabilitation must be carefully
considered when formulating an appropriate holistic approach to the management of traumatic
injuries in the elderly. However, many of the techniques used in managing the older patient
form part of good medical practice in the management of trauma patients of all ages.
THE EPIDEMIOLOGY OF TRAUMA IN THE ELDERLY

In Western countries the term elderly has for many years been defined as an age equal to or in excess
of 65 years (1). Changing population demographics and patterns of health in individuals of this age
have meant that more recently care of the elderly services around the United Kingdom have pushed
this transition to 70 or even 75 years old. Patients in their nineties, once uncommon in emergency
departments, now represent a significant part of the emergency workload. Elderly patients have
consistently been shown to be more vulnerable to injury than their younger counterparts, have
223
higher rates of mortality and spend longer in hospital following injuries of comparable severity
(1–5). Elderly victims of trauma consume greater amounts of healthcare resources per injury, suffer
a greater number of complications and have poorer long-term outcomes (6,7).
As a consequence of increased longevity, especially in Western societies, the incidence of
trauma amongst elderly populations is increasing (8). As many in the elderly population are liv-
ing longer and experiencing healthier, more active and, in many cases, more adventurous life-
styles, they are in fact becoming more exposed to a greater risk of trauma than previously (9).
There is growing consensus that the traditional definition of elderly requires refinement given
the changes in overall health and life expectancy that have been observed in many countries (10).
Trauma outcomes in patients of advanced years have been reported to deteriorate with
each 1-year increase in age resulting in a 6% increase in the probability of death (11). Notable
increases in mortality amongst older trauma patients have been identified after the age of 75
(12–13), and there is an emerging trend to divide older victims of trauma into older age (aged
65–75), elderly (aged 75–85) and extreme old age (aged >85) groups (14–17). A better indication
of physiological age can be made by using the term frailty for which validated scoring systems
exist, although these have limited utility in the pre-hospital environment.
In contrast to trauma cases involving younger patients in which there is a higher incidence
amongst males, elderly victims of trauma are more likely to be female (18–20). This is likely to be
multi-factorial and to mirror the overall demographics of elderly populations in many Western
countries in which life expectancy for women exceeds that of men (10,18). In contrast, how-
ever, males have been shown to be more likely to suffer traumatic brain injuries than females
(20) and are more commonly injured as a result of road traffic collisions (RTCs) (21), probably
reflecting the increased incidence of driving amongst elderly males compared to females.
Trauma in the elderly is a complicated, multifaceted area that requires a detailed under-
standing amongst healthcare professionals involved in the provision of trauma care. The inci-
dence of reported traumatic injury in the elderly population is rising commensurate with the
proportional increase in the ageing population (18).
MECHANISM OF INJURY IN ELDERLY TRAUMA

The vast majority of elderly patients present with blunt traumatic injuries and the most com-
mon mechanism of injury is falls from less than 2 metres (9,22–24). The elderly are most likely
to be injured in their own home, reflecting the high incidence of falls as the mechanism of
injury. Approximately 1 in 10 people over the age of 65 visit an emergency department each
year following a fall-related injury (25) but only 25% require admission (26). The physiological
changes of ageing and decreases in bone mass, reaction time and balance have all been identi-
fied as predisposing factors to falls in elderly people (27). Ten percent of falls in older people
result in significant injuries (28). Falls prevention is therefore an important and expanding area
of geriatric care in many countries in an attempt to reduce the incidence and limit the complica-
tions from this type of injury (29).
Following falls, RTCs are the next most common mechanism of injury amongst the elderly
population (29–34). Traditionally, elderly patients injured in an RTC were more likely to be pedes-
trians struck by vehicles (35–36), however, with greater numbers of older adults retaining driving
licences, over the last two decades an increasing proportion of RTCs have involved elderly patients
as drivers or passengers (37,38). The risk factors for greater mortality and injury in RTCs involving
elderly road users and pedestrians include vision problems, slower reflexes, co-morbid conditions,
cognitive impairment, decreased bone density, and alcohol and medication use (9,37–39).
224
Physiological response to trauma in the elderly
Injuries to older adult pedestrians have been shown to be more severe than those to younger
pedestrians involved in similar accidents (39,40). Injury profiles amongst drivers and passen-
gers involved in RTCs are also different in elderly patients compared to younger counterparts
involved in similar accidents (34,41,42). Elderly patients are more likely to suffer long bone and
pelvic fractures following RTCs than their younger counterparts, probably due to the effects of
osteoporosis (43). There is a higher incidence of chest wall injuries with rib fractures and hae-
mopneumothorax in elderly patients with abdominal injuries which require laparotomy being
more common amongst younger drivers (43,44). It is postulated that this observation is due to
changes in the way forces are distributed throughout the body through seat belts and airbags
in older and younger patients (45,46). Decreased muscle mass and chest wall compliance in
the elderly have been identified as possible causative factors for the observed higher incidence
of chest wall injuries in this group (43). Chest injuries amongst elderly patients are of great
importance, as those that sustain blunt chest wall injury with rib fractures have been shown to
have twice the mortality and morbidity of younger patients with similar injuries (47). For each
additional rib fracture in the elderly, mortality increases by 19% and the risk of pneumonia by
27% (47).
After falls and road traffic collisions, trauma following attempted suicide is the next most
common cause of injury in adults aged over 65 (48). In countries with ready access to fire
arms, self-inflicted gunshot wound is the most common method of suicide and accounts for
a notable proportion of reported penetrating injury amongst elderly patients (8). Older adults
in urban settings are more likely to hang themselves or jump from a height as their method
of attempting suicide, possibly due to ease of access, high lethality and an association with
a high likelihood of polytrauma (40). In older adults, male gender, chronic pain and illness,
social isolation and depression have been identified as risk factors for attempted suicide (49).
The possibility of deliberate abuse of the elderly, especially those who are forgetful, deaf or
suffering dementia, should always be considered and if necessary appropriate safeguarding
steps taken.
PRACTICE POINT
Always consider the possibility of deliberately inflicted injury in the elderly.
PHYSIOLOGICAL RESPONSE TO TRAUMA IN THE ELDERLY

Decreased cardiovascular and respiratory reserves and the effects of pre-existing co-morbidities
in elderly patients can adversely affect the physiological response of elderly victims of trauma
(34,50). This may present clinicians with a diagnostic quandary in identifying patients who
have suffered significant injuries in the early phases of their care.
Age-related insufficiency in cardiac output results in a state of hypoperfusion that adversely
affects end organ perfusion following severe injury (2). In some elderly patients cardiac output
can remain stable at rest, but due to reduced physiological reserves, they are unable to com-
pensate for the stress caused by physical injury as effectively as younger victims of trauma (51).
As many as a third of patients who were identified as ‘stable’ in the resuscitation room fol-
lowing trauma, with heart rate and blood pressure readings in the normal range, suffered car-
diac arrest within 24 hours of admission to hospital. Impaired cardiac output in elderly victims
of trauma has been shown to be related to poorer outcomes and increased mortality in this
patient group (52–54).
225
A high index of suspicion is required to identify hypoperfusion states in elderly trauma vic-
tims and the initial assessment in such cases should be tailored appropriately. Both serum
lactate and arterial base deficit levels can be utilised as markers of poor perfusion, identify-
ing patients that may benefit from intensive resuscitation and monitoring early in the hospital
phase of their care (55–57). Normal base deficit levels in patients with an Injury Severity Score
(ISS) ≥16 have been shown to have a lower negative predictive value for death in patients aged
>55 years than in younger cohorts (40% versus 60%) (58). Moderate elevation of base deficit
(–6 to –9) is associated with mortality rates of up to 60% in elderly trauma victims and of
patients with severely elevated levels (>10) up to 80% die.
Whilst elevated serum lactate levels are associated with states of hypoperfusion, with rate
of clearance directly correlating with mortality in both young and old patients (59), elderly
patients have been shown to tolerate such states less effectively. In elderly patients, a serum
lactate level of greater than 2.4 mmol/L for over 12 hours has been shown to be associated with
increased mortality (60). In the pre-hospital environment this means that every effort must be
made to ensure adequate perfusion and that ideally blood products should be used as the resus-
New Ideas
Point of care pre-hospital lactate analysis is being trialled by a number of UK pre-hospital providers.
citation fluids. Every attempt must therefore be made, by effective and prompt pre-hospital
intervention, to avoid tissue hypoperfusion and acidosis.
PAST MEDICAL HISTORY AND DRUG HISTORY

The majority of the elderly who are involved in trauma will be taking regular medication. In
some cases their medication history will be very complex; in the majority of cases it is unlikely
to be known to those treating them in the pre-hospital environment. However, when it is
known, the drug history may offer a rapid means of establishing the patient’s co-morbid condi-
tions. It may even, for example with diabetic or ischaemic heart disease medication, suggest
the possibility that the trauma was itself secondary to a medical problem. The most important
drugs and elements of the past medical history which affect the response of a patient to trauma
or may indicate a cause for an accident are listed in Box 18.1.
BOX 18.1: Drugs and Medical Conditions in Trauma
Trauma may occur secondary to Drugs which affect the physiological response
to trauma or its management include
Ischaemic heart disease Digoxin, beta-blockers, other anti-arrythmics
Diabetes Insulin, metformin, other hypoglycaemic agents
Epilepsy Anticoagulants
Instability poor balance, postural hypotension Sedatives and anxiolytics
Confusion Anti-epileptics
Depression
Drowsiness (may be secondary to drugs
including hypnotics)
226
Injury scores and mortality in elderly trauma patients
THE EFFECT OF AGE ON SURVIVAL AND OUTCOME

IN ELDERLY TRAUMA PATIENTS
Mortality rates following traumatic injuries are higher in patients aged >65 years (8,61,62), with
mortality in some studies of up to 10% (32). Mortality has been shown to increase from the
age of 40 years (63), even amongst those with moderate injuries (ISS 9 to 24). Even within the
elderly trauma population, advanced age is associated with an increased likelihood of death
(7,62,64,65). Advancing age has also been shown to be a predictor of late mortality in trauma
victims. Being over the age of 65 has been shown to confer a 2.46-fold increase in the likelihood
of death within 24 hours and 4.64-fold increase in the likelihood of death after 24 hours (34).
In addition to an increased likelihood of death following major trauma, elderly patients have
been shown to suffer greater rates of complications and require longer periods of time in hos-
pital than younger patients (1). Higher rates of pulmonary and infectious complications are
reported in elderly trauma victims (50,61). This trend is observed in survivors even after dis-
charge from hospital (48).
The incidences of cardiac, pulmonary and septic complications have been shown to be inde-
pendent predictors of poor outcome in non-survivors in elderly trauma populations (2,42,66).
The effect of complications on the likelihood of death following major trauma in elderly patients
appears to be cumulative: (5.4% with no complications, 8.6% with a single complication, 30%
with more than one complication). Complications have been shown to directly contribute to
death in elderly trauma patients in up to a third of cases, with almost two-thirds of deaths being
due to multi-organ failure (62).
THE EFFECT OF PRE-EXISTING MEDICAL CONDITIONS

IN ELDERLY TRAUMA PATIENTS
Due to a higher incidence of pre-existing conditions in the elderly trauma population it has
proved challenging to clearly separate the effects of age and premorbidity on mortality fol-
lowing significant injury. An added complication is the heterogeneous nature of pre-existing
medical problems within patient populations.
A number of studies have identified the presence of pre-existing conditions as predicting
poor outcome in elderly trauma victims (51,53,67,68). The effect of pre-existing conditions on
mortality following trauma is more pronounced in middle-aged patients with moderate ISS but
after 65 years of age, chronological age becomes the predominant predictor of death (63). As
patients progress through ‘old age’ (65–74 years) to ‘elderly’ (>75 years), mortality rates have
been shown to increase following a similar trend irrespective of the presence of pre-existing
conditions (69).
The number and severity of pre-existing conditions suffered by individual patients appears
to correlate with poorer outcome and increased mortality, but more data is required to fully
understand this relationship (70).
INJURY SCORES AND MORTALITY IN ELDERLY TRAUMA

PATIENTS
Whilst injury scores have been shown to be effective in predicting mortality in young patients,
their use in an elderly population is less clearly defined (71). Discrepancies in the observed
227
mortality rates between young and elderly cohorts with similar Injury Severity Scores have
been identified (51,53,67,68). Mortality rates have been shown to increase sharply in elderly
patients with ISS >18, most notably in those aged >75 years. Combinations of ISS and APACHE
II scores have been investigated to attempt to refine prognostication following major trauma in
elderly populations, but the evidence is limited.
The difficulties in accurately predicting mortality in elderly trauma victims based on injury
profiles reflects the heterogeneous make-up of such populations and is probably heavily influ-
enced by the effects of age, abnormal physiology related to the ageing process, pre-existing
co-morbidities and the increased incidence of complications.
TREATMENT STRATEGIES IN ELDERLY TRAUMA PATIENTS

The traditional view held for many years was that the need for general surgical interventions
in elderly patients following traumatic injury was associated with significantly increased rates
of mortality (6). In recent years treatment strategies in elderly trauma populations have begun
to evolve.
Evidence now suggests that early decisions to perform general surgery on elderly trauma
patients can improve outcome (6) combined with aggressive and invasive monitoring to detect
and correct states of hypoperfusion (72–74). Advanced age should never be the sole reason to
withhold operative management in elderly trauma victims (75).
SUMMARY
Trauma in older people is becoming increasingly common. Inevitably, as more people survive
into old age, their medical co-morbidities increase and they take more medication. Thus aging
is associated with confounding factors which adversely affect outcomes compared to younger
patient with the same injuries. In addition, factors such as deafness, poor hearing and confu-
sion, although not invariably present, may in many cases make managing these patients more
challenging. Optimum survival rates, therefore, for elderly trauma victims can only be achieved
by application of the highest standards of care and scrupulous attention to detail. There is no
place for half-hearted care for the elderly.
REFERENCES
1. Champion HR, Copes WS, Buyer D, Flanagan ME, Bain L, Sacco WJ. Major trauma in
geriatric patients. American Journal of Public Health 1989;79(9):1278–1282.
2. Chang WH, Tsai SH, Su YJ, Huang CH, Chang KS, Tsai CH. Trauma mortality factors in
the elderly population. International Journal of Gerontology 2008;(2):11–17.
3. National Safety Council. Accident Facts, 1986 ed. Chicago: NSC, 1986.
4. Baker SP, O’Neill B, Kapuf RS. Overview of injury mortality. In The Injury Fact Book.
Lexington Books, 1984.
5. Snipes GE. Accidents in the elderly. American Family Physician 1982;26:117–122.
6. Tornetta P 3rd, Mostafavi H, Riina J, Turen C, Reimer B, Levine R, Behrens F, Geller J,
Ritter C, Homel P. Mortality and morbidity in elderly trauma patients. Journal of Trauma
1999;46(4):702–706.
228
References
7. van Aalst Ja, Morris JA Jr, Yates HK, Miller RS, Bass SM. Severely injured geriatric
patients return to independent living: A study of factors influencing function and inde-
pendence. Journal of Trauma 1991;31:1096–1101.
8. Smith D, Enderson B, Maull K. Trauma in the elderly: Determinants of outcome.
Southern Medical Journal 1990;83:171–177.
9. Labib N, Nouh T, Winocour S, Deckelbaum D, Banici L, Fata P, Razek T, Khwaja K.
Severely injured geriatric population: Morbidity, mortality and risk factors. Journal of
Trauma 2011;71(6):1908–1914.
10. Macninven, D. Scotland’s Population 2009. The Registrar General’s Annual Review of
Demographic Trends. 155th edition. Scottish Government, Edinburgh, Scotland, 2009.
11. Grossman MD, Miller D, Scaff DW, Arcona S. When is an elder old? Effect of pre-
existing conditions on mortality in geriatric trauma. Journal of Trauma 2002;52(2):242–246.
12. Richmond TS, Kauder D, Strumpf N, Meredith T. Characteristics and outcomes of
serious traumatic injury in older adults. Journal of the American Geriatrics Society
2002;50:215–222.
13. Aitken LM, Burmeister E, Lang J, Chaboyer W, Richmond TS. Characteristics and out-
comes of injured older adults after hospital admission. Journal of the American Geriatrics
Society 2010;58(3):442–449.
14. Cagetti B, Cossu M, Pau A, Rivano C, Viale G. The outcome from acute subdural and
epidural intracranial haematomas in very elderly patients. British Journal of Neurosurgery
1992;6:227–231.
15. Meldon SW, Reilly M, Drew BL, Manusco C, Fallon W. Trauma in the very elderly:
A community based study of outcomes at trauma and nontrauma centers. Journal of
Trauma 2002;29:494–497.
16. Bulpitt CJ, Peters R, Staessen JA, Thijs L, De Vernejoul MC, Fletcher AE, Beckett NS.
Fracture risk and the use of diuretic (indapamide SR) +/– perindopril: A substudy of the
Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial (HYVET). Trials 2006;7:33.
17. Peters R, Beckett N, Burch L, de Vernejoul MC, Liu L, Duggan J, Swift C, Gil-Extremera
B, Fletcher A, Bulpitt C. The effect of treatment based on a diuretic (indapamide) +/–
ACE inhibitor (perindopril) on fractures in the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial
(HYVET). Age and Ageing 2010;39(5):609–616.
18. O’Neill S, Brady RR, Kerssens JJ, Parks RW. Mortality associated with traumatic
injuries in the elderly: A population based study. Archives of Gerontology and Geriatrics
2012;54(3):e426–e430.
19. Oyetunji TA, Ong’uti SK, Bolorunduro OB, Gonzalez DO, Cornwell EE, Haider AH.
Epidemiological trend in elderly domestic injury. Journal of Surgical Research
2012;173(2):206–211.
20. Shinoda-Tagawa T, Clark DE. Trends in hospitalization after injury: Older women are
displacing younger men. Injury Prevention 2003;9:214–219.
21. Langolis JA, Rutland-Brown W, Thomas KE. Traumatic brain injury in the United States:
Emergency Department visits, hospitalisations and deaths. National Center for Injury
Prevention and Control, Atlanta, GA, 2004.
22. Gates S, Fisher JD, Cooke MW, Carter YH, Lamb SE. Multifactorial assessment and
targeted intervention for preventing falls and injuries among older people in com-
munity and emergency care settings: Systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ
2008;336:130–133.
23. Peel NM. Epidemiology of falls in older age. Canadian Journal of Ageing 2011;15:1–13.
229
24. Inci I, Ozcelik C, Nizam O, Eren N. Thoracic trauma in the elderly. European Journal of
25. King MB. Falls. In Principles of Geriatric Medicine and Gerontology, 5th ed. W Hazzard,
JP Blass, JB Halter (eds.). New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003, pp. 1517–1529.
26. National Center for Injury Prevention and Control. www.cdc.gov/ncipc/wisqars.
27. Wolf ME, Rivara FP. Nonfall injuries in older adults. Annual Review of Public Health
1992;13:509–528.
28. Thompson HJ, McCormick WC, Kagan SH. Traumatic brain injury in older adults:
Epidemiology, outcomes, and future implications. Journal of the American Geriatrics
Society 2006;54(10):1590–1595.
29. Gowing R, Jain MK. Injury patterns and outcomes associated with elderly trauma vic-
tims in Kingston, Ontario. Canadian Journal of Surgery 2007;50(6):437–444.
30. Kent R, Funk J, Crandall J. How future trends in societal ageing, air bag availability,
seat belt use and fleet composition will affect serious injury risk and occurrence in the
United States. Traffic Injury Prevention 2003;4:24–32.
31. de Souza JA, Igelsias AC. Trauma in the elderly. Revista da Associacao Medica Brasileira
2002;48:79–86.
32. McCoy GF, Johnston RA, Duthrie RB. Injury to the elderly in road traffic accidents.
Journal of Trauma 1989;29:494–497.
33. McMahon DJ, Schwab CW, Kauder D. Comorbidity and the elderly patient. World
Journal of Surgery 1996;20:1113–1119.
34. Perdue PW, Watts DD, Kaufmann CR, Trask AL. Differences in mortality between
elderly and younger adult trauma patients: Geriatric status increases risk of delayed
death. Journal of Trauma 1998;45:805–810.
35. Kong LB, Lekawa M, Navarro RA, McGrath J, Cohen M, Margulies DR, Hiatt JR.
Pedestrian-motor vehicle trauma: An analysis of injury profiles by age. Journal of the
American College of Surgeons 1996;182(1):17–23.
36. Peng RY, Bongard FS. Pedestrian versus motor vehicle accidents: An analysis of 5000
patients. Journal of the American College of Surgeons 1999;189(4):343–348.
37. National Highway Traffic Safety Association. Traffic Safety Facts 2002: Older
Population. National Center for Statistics and Analysis, Washington DC, 2004.
38. Ekleman BA, Mitchell SA, O’Dell-Rossi P. Driving and older adults. In Functional
Performance in Older Adults, BWM Bonder (ed.). Philadelphia: FA Davis, 2001, pp. 448–476.
39. Binder S. Injuries among older adults: The challenge of optimising safety and minimis-
ing unintended consequences. Injury Prevention 2002;8(Suppl 4):iv2–iv4.
40. Demetriades D, Murray J, Martin M, Velmahos G, Salim A, Alo K, Rhee P. Pedestrians
injured by automobiles: Relationship of age to injury type and severity. Journal of the
American College of Surgeons 2004;199(3):382–387.
41. Schiller WR, Knox R, Chleborad W. A five year experience with severe injuries in elderly
patients. Accident Analysis and Prevention 1995;27:167–174.
42. Osler T, Hales K, Baack B, Bear K, Hsi K, Pathak D, Demarest G. Trauma in the elderly.
American Journal of Surgery 1988;156:537–543.
43. Malik AM, Dal NA, Talpur KAH. Road traffic injuries and their outcome in elderly
patients 60 years and above. Does age make a difference? Journal of Trauma and
Treatment 2012;1(4). doi: 10.4172/2167-1222.100012.
44. Victorino GP, Chong TJ, Pal JD. Trauma in the elderly patient. Archives of Surgery
2003;138:1093–1098.
230
References
45. Bergeron E, Lavoie A, Clas D, Moore L, Ratte S, Tetreault S, Lemaire J, Martin M.

Elderly patients with rib fractures are at greater risk of death and pneumonia. Journal of
Trauma 2003;54:478–485.
46. Martinez R, Sharieff G, Hooper J. Three point restraints as a risk factor for chest injury
in the elderly. Journal of Trauma 1994;37:980–984.
47. Bulger EM, Arneson MA, Mock CN, Jurkovich GJ. Rib fractures in the elderly. Journal of
Trauma 2000;48:1040–1046.
48. Johnson CL, Margulies DR, Kearney TJ, Hiatt JR, Shabot MM. Trauma in the elderly: An
analysis of outcomes based on age. American Surgeon 1994;60:899–902.
49. Demetriades D, Sava J, Alo K, Newton E, Velmahos GC, Murray JA, Belzberg H,
Asensio JA, Berne TV. Old age as a criterion for trauma team activation. Journal of
Trauma 2001;51:754–757.
50. Finelli FC, Jonsson J, Champion HR, Morelli S, Fouty WJ. A case control study for major
trauma in geriatric patients. Journal of Trauma 1989;29:541–548.
51. Hossack KF, Bruce RA. Maximal cardiac function in sedentary normal men and women:
Comparison of age-related changes. Journal of Applied Physiology 1982;53:799–804.
52. Oreskovich MR, Howard JD, Copass MK, Carrico CJ. Geriatric trauma: Injury patterns
and outcome. Journal of Trauma 1984;24:565–572.
53. Horst HM, Obeid FN, Sorensen VJ, Bivins BA. Factors influencing survival of elderly
trauma patients. Critical Care Medicine 1986;14:681–684.
54. Safih MS, Norton R, Rogers I, Gardener JP, Judson JA. Elderly trauma patients admit-
ted to the intensive care unit are different from the younger population. New Zealand
Medical Journal 1999;112:402–404.
55. Davis JW, Parks SN, Kaups KL, Gladen HE, O’Donnell-Nicol S. Admission base
deficit predicts transfusion requirements and risk of complications. Journal of Trauma
1996;41:769–774.
56. Davis JW, Shackford SR, Holbrook TL. Base deficit as a sensitive indicator of compensated
shock and tissue oxygen utilization. Surgery, Gynecology and Obstetrics 1991;173:473–476.
57. Dunham CM, Belzberg H, Lyles R, Weireter L, Skurdal D, Sullivan G, Esposito T,
Namini M. The rapid infusion system: A superior method for the resuscitation of hypo-
volemic trauma patients. Resuscitation 1991;21:207–226.
58. Davis JW, Kaups KL. Base deficit in the elderly: A marker of severe injury and death.
59. McNelis J, Marini CP, Jurkiewicz A, Szomstein S, Simms HH, Ritter G, Nathan IM.
Prolonged lactate clearance is associated with increased mortality in the surgical inten-
sive care unit. American Journal of Surgery 2001;182:481–485.
60. Schulman AM, Claridge JA, Young JS. Young versus old: Factors affecting mortality after
blunt traumatic injury. American Surgeron 2002;68:942–947.
61. Lonner J, Koval K. Polytrauma in the elderly. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research
1995;318:136–143.
62. Pellicane J, Byrne K, DeMaria E. Preventable complications and death from multiple
organ failure among geriatric trauma victims. Journal of Trauma 1992;33:440–444.
63. Morris JA Jr, MacKenzie EJ, Damiano AM, Bass SM. Mortality in trauma patients: The
interaction between host factors and severity. Journal of Trauma 1990;30:1476–1482.
64. Battistella FD, Din AM, Perez L. Trauma patients 75 years and older: Long-term follow-up
results justify aggressive management. Journal of Trauma 1998;48:618–624.
65. Knudson MM, Lieberman J, Morris JA Jr, Cushing BM, Stubbs HA. Mortality factors in
geriatric blunt trauma patients. Archives of Surgery 1994;129:448–453.
231
66. Shabot MM, Johnson CL. Outcome from critical care in the ‘oldest old’ trauma patients.
67. Broos PL, D’Hoore A, Vanderschot P, Rommens PM, Stappaerts KH. Multiple trauma
in elderly patients. Factors influencing outcome: Importance of aggressive care. Injury
1993;24:365–368.
68. Broos PL, Stappaerts KH, Rommens PM, Louette LK, Gruwez JA. Polytrauma
in patients of 65 and over. Injury patterns and outcome. International Surgery
1988;73:119–222.
69. Milzman D, Boulanger B, Rodriguez A, Soderstrom CA, Mitchell KA, Magnant CM.
Pre-existing disease in trauma patients: A predictor of fate independent of age and
Injury Severity Score. Journal of Trauma 1992;2:236–243.
70. Gubler KD, Davis R, Koepsell T, Soderberg R, Maier RV, Rivara FP. Long-term survival
of elderly trauma patients. Archives of Surgery 1997;132:1010–1014.
71. Baker SP, O’Neill B, Haddon W Jr, Long WB. The injury severity score: A method for
describing patients with multiple injuries and evaluating emergency care. Journal of
Trauma 1974;14:187–196.
72. Nagy KK, Smith RF, Roberts RR, Joseph KT, An GC, Bokhari F, Barrett J. Prognosis of
penetrating trauma in elderly patients: A comparison with younger patients. Journal of
Trauma 2000;49:190–193.
73. Demetriades D, Karaiskakis M, Velmahos G, Alo K, Newton E, Murray J, Asensio J,
Belzberg H, Berne T, Shoemaker W. Effect on outcome of early intensive management of
geriatric trauma patients. British Journal of Surgery 2002;89:1319–1322.
74. Demetriades D, Sava J, Alo K, Newton E, Velmahos GC, Murray JA, Belzberg H,
Asensio J, Berne T. Old age as a criterion for trauma team activation. Journal of Trauma
2001;51:754–756.
75. Godley CD, Warren RL, Sheridan RL, McCabe CJ. Nonoperative management of blunt
splenic injury in adults: Age over 55 years as a powerful indicator for failure. Journal of
the American College of Surgeons 1996;183:133–139.
232
Burns
19
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the initial priorities in the management of burns

▪▪ Recognise the association between burns and other injuries
▪▪ Understand that early shock in the burned patient implies the presence of unrecognised
haemorrhagic trauma
INTRODUCTION
Burns are one of the most common injuries sustained by the general population, both at home
and at work. However, the frequency of severe burns in the UK is fortunately relatively low.
Over 13,000 burn injuries require hospital attention occur every year in England and Wales.
Approximately 1000 patients suffer major burns each year, with 50% occurring in children
under the age of 12 years old (1).
Severe burns are multi-system injuries which require advanced resuscitation and a multi-
disciplinary approach in order to be managed effectively.
SCENE SAFETY
A burns patient is likely to have originated from a scene which is hostile to rescuers. There may
be multiple hazards on scene which require skilful management. In the majority of situations,
the primary responsibility for scene management and safety rests with the fire service. They
have expertise in casualty extrication, firefighting and working in confined/smoke-filled envi-
ronments wearing the necessary personal protective equipment (PPE).
Other hazards include the presence of noxious fumes associated with the burning of house-
hold objects, including cyanide and the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning. In cases of chemi-
cal exposure, specific PPE may be required depending on the chemical involved. Under no
circumstances should clinicians enter hazardous areas requiring specific PPE unless they have
previously been trained to use it.
233
Burns
SCENE SAFETY
The initial priority is to stop the burning process. The patient should be removed from the
burning source and any burnt clothing should be removed from the patient as quickly and as
safely as possible. Any materials adherent to the patient’s skin may need to be left in place and
not forcibly be removed unless there is an immediate threat to life or limb. Any jewellery should
be removed, as swelling following the burn may make later removal difficult.
The majority of burns sustained domestically are likely to be superficial or partial thickness
in nature, thus early effective first aid is likely to reduce the ongoing burning process, provide
analgesia and promote healing. Cooling the burned skin under a running cold-water tap is a
highly effective method and should be continued for a period of at least 20 minutes (2). The use
of ice or ice water (<8°C) is not recommended (3).
Simultaneously the patient should be kept warm to maintain body temperature. Care should
be taken not to render the patient hypothermic; cold and wet clothing should be removed and
the patient should be wrapped in warm, dry blankets if possible.
TYPES OF BURN
A thermal burn caused by flame is the most common type of burn sustained in the adult
population; these are often associated with inhalational airway burns and other traumatic
injuries.
In paediatrics, burns due to scalding are much more common and typically affect the upper
limbs and torso. All too commonly these are caused by the spilling of hot drinks or other liquids
onto the child. The elderly population is also frequently injured by scald burns.
Contact burns occur when there is prolonged contact with a hot object or short contact
against a very hot object. The typical example encountered in UK pre-hospital practice is when
an elderly or otherwise infirm patient falls against a hot surface and is unable to move away
from the object, for example a radiator, that is causing the burning.
Chemical and electrical burns both have specific characteristics which will be discussed
later in this chapter.
A burn wound compromises the physiological functions of the skin, including its ability to
control temperature, provide an effective barrier to infection, maintain fluid balance and offer
sensory perception. The burn wound also can be aesthetically damaging to the skin’s appear-
ance and can cause significant psychological morbidity.
A burn wound displays three zones according to a model proposed by Jackson in 1953 (4). The
central zone is the most severely damaged necrotic tissue and is known as the ‘zone of coagula-
tive necrosis’. This represents the primary burn injury and the damage is irreversible. The degree
of necrosis is proportional to the duration of exposure and the temperature of the contact.
Surrounding this central zone is a potentially salvageable area of injury known as the ‘zone
of stasis’. In the zone of stasis the microcirculation of the dermis is compromised, and if the
patient is inadequately fluid resuscitated or suffers further physiological insult, then this zone
will progress to necrosis.
Finally the peripheral ‘zone of hyperaemia’ is caused by an increase in blood flow and the
release of pro-inflammatory cytokines. In a severe burn (total burn surface area [TBSA] >20%)
the local inflammatory response from the zone of hyperaemia is sufficient to cause systemic
inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS).
234
Assessment of burn size
BURN DEPTH
Burns are conventionally divided according to their depth, into
• Simple erythema
• Partial thickness
• Full thickness
Simple erythema results from a very superficial burn without skin loss. The affected area is
pink and painful but with normal looking skin, such as occurs in sunburn.
Partial thickness burns involve the epidermis and dermis. The extent of burn into the der-
mis determines the appearance and healing potential of the burn. Superficial partial thick-
ness burns involve a thin layer of dermis and are characterised by blisters. Deep dermal burns
destroy the deep dermal plexus of nerves and capillaries. Therefore the burn has a mottled red
appearance, does not blanch to pressure and has decreased sensation. Mid-dermal burns will
show features of both superficial and deep dermal burns.
In full thickness burns the skin is entirely destroyed and deeper structures may be involved.
The burn appears leathery, waxy, firm and dry. On pinprick examination the burn may be
insensate and does not bleed. This burnt skin is called an eschar.
Burn injuries are rarely homogenous and a burn wound may encompass varying degrees of
depth of injury. In the pre-hospital environment, differentiation between the different depths
of partial thickness burns is difficult and of limited immediate value. Repeated examination
over the first 48 hours post burn injury is often required to accurately judge the depth of a burn,
but its relevance is in terms of long-term healing and it does not impact specifically on the pre-
hospital management. It is, however, important to distinguish simple erythema from partial
and full thickness burns since simple erythema is not included when calculating burn size.
ASSESSMENT OF BURN SIZE

A number of different methods are available for estimating burn depth. Accurate assessment of
total burn surface area (TBSA) is important in order to direct initial fluid management and also to
triage patients in need of specialist burn care. It is not essential to work out precise fluid replace-
ment calculations in the pre-hospital arena unless this time is likely to be very prolonged. When
estimating TBSA it should be remembered that only partial
and full thickness burns should be included in the calcula- 4.5%
4.5%
tion. The methods commonly used for assessing TBSA are
described next.
18%
18%
4.5% 4.5% 4.5% 4.5%
WALLACE RULE OF NINES
1%
The Wallace Rule of Nines is the traditional method of 9% 9% 9% 9%
assessing burns in adults (Figure 19.1) (5). The arms account
for 9% each, each leg 18%, the head and neck 9%, the abdo-
men and thorax 18% front and 18% back, and the remain-
ing 1% is the genitalia and perineum. Due to the changing
proportions of a child’s head and limb size relative to the
total body surface area, the standard Rule of Nines should Figure 19.1 The Rule of Nines in
not be used in children. adults.
235
Burns
SERIAL HALVING
Another quick technique suitable to the pre-hospital environment is that of serial halving.
Begin by looking to see if the TBSA is more or less than 50% burnt. If less than 50% TBSA,
then estimate whether they are more or less than 25% burnt. Continue halving until a burn
size is estimated.
HAND SURFACE
It is estimated that the patient’s palm (including the adducted fingers) can be used as 1% TBSA (6).
Therefore the number of patient’s handprints that would be required to cover the burns can
estimate the total burn size. It is accurate for burns up to 15% TBSA, it can also be used for
assessing greater than 85% TBSA by measuring the unburnt skin using the same method. For
burns between 15% and 85% TBSA it is thought to be inaccurate.
LUND AND BROWDER CHART

This method allows for a simultaneous recording and assessment of TBSA (7). The areas of
the body burnt are given a weighted percentage dependent on the age of the patient. The per-
centage allocated to head and leg areas change with age to reflect the changes in body surface
area with age. The Lund and Browder chart is appropriate for calculations in both adults and
children, and is the preferred method for in-hospital assessment (Figure 19.2). Small pre-
laminated charts are available for pre-hospital use. Once completed the chart should remain
with the patient.
Estimating Percent Total Body Surface Area in Children Affected by Burns
Head and
a a
neck 9%
1 1
Trunk
Anterior 18% Arm 9% 13 13
Posterior 18% (each) 2 2 2 2
11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2
21 2 21 2
1
11 2 b b 11 2 b b
11 2 11 2
Genitalia
and perineum 1% Leg 18%
(each)
c c c c
13 4 13 4
A B
ANTERIOR POSTERIOR
Relative percentage of body surface areas (% BSA) affected by growth

0 yr 1 yr 5 yr 10 yr 15 yr
a— 1 2 of head 91 2 81 2 61 2 51 2 41 2
b— 1 2 of 1 thigh 23 4 31 4 4 41 4 41 2
c— 1 2 of 1 lower leg 21 2 21 2 23 4 3 31 4
(A) Rule of ‘nines’

(B) Lund-Browder diagram for estimating extent of burns
Figure 19.2 The Lund and Browder Chart.
236
Initial assessment
New Ideas
A further way of estimating the area of burn is by using a smart phone or tablet with an appropri-
ate app. The area of burn can be coloured in on an outline of a patient figure using the touchscreen
interface, with the device then offering a suggested percentage area of the burn. An example app is
Mersey Burns (see http://merseyburns.com/) (8).
PRE-HOSPITAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

OF THE BURNED PATIENT
All burned patients should be initially managed following current trauma protocols, particularly
when there is risk that the patient may have fallen (for example to escape a burning building) or
have been involved in an explosion where they have been thrown as part of the effects of the blast.
Whilst the burn may be a distracting injury, it should not be allowed to draw attention from
undertaking an assessment of both the scene and the patient to determine the presence of other
injuries that could pose a greater or more immediate threat to life.
INITIAL HISTORY TAKING

Where possible, an initial AMPLE (Allergies, Medication, Past medical history, Last ate or
drank, Events) and tetanus immunisation history should be taken. It may be the case that
the pre-hospital provider may be the only person able to obtain a first-hand history if the
patient later develops airway oedema and requires intubation.
The exact mechanism, events surrounding the burn and nature of the burn exposure should
be recorded if possible. It is important to note any treatment received prior to the arrival of
trained providers.
An accurate witness account should be recorded in cases of paediatric burns; this will usu-
ally come from a parent/guardian. The initial account will become particularly important if
there is a suspicion of non-accidental injury (NAI).
INITIAL ASSESSMENT
AIRWAY
A high index of suspicion should be maintained for the risk of inhalation injury leading to
potential airway compromise. Risk factors
for inhalational injury include flame burns to BOX 19.1: Signs Suggestive
the face and prolonged exposure to heat in a of Airway Burns
confined environment. The signs listed in Box
▪▪ Full thickness facial burns
19.1 should be actively sought as evidence of a
▪▪ Stridor
potential airway burn (9).
Any evidence of the signs in Box 19.1 should
▪▪ Evidence of swelling on laryngoscopy
alert the pre-hospital provider to the presence
▪▪ Smoke inhalation
of a potential airway burn. This can quickly
▪▪ Singed nasal hairs
progress to airway oedema and the airway
237
Burns
may become compromised within a relatively short timeframe. However, reports of very rapid
airway obstruction are uncommon, and in most cases intubation can wait until arrival in hospital
if conditions at the scene make inhibation hazardous or difficult. These patients should be rapidly
transported to a major trauma centre or burns centre as per local protocols. Instrumentation of
the airway should be avoided in order to prevent worsening oedema and causing airway compro-
mise. A hospital pre-alert should include the concern/presence of airway burns in order to ensure
senior airway specialists are present to receive the patient in the emergency department.
If the skills to provide pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) on scene are available,
consideration may be given to securing the airway on scene, particularly if there is evidence of
airway burns or established airway compromise. Persistently hypoxic patients may also require
PHEA and invasive ventilation. The ability and equipment to secure a surgical airway should
be immediately available if considering PHEA in this situation.
BREATHING
Burns patients should be given high flow oxygen through a non-rebreathing mask. This may
be omitted if the burn is very localised (i.e. <5% TBSA) and no inhalational component is
suspected.
Ventilation may become compromised in the presence of circumferential deep dermal or full
thickness burns affecting the chest and limiting adequate expansion. This may require escha-
rotomies (surgical incision into the burnt skin) to be performed to relieve the restriction. These
are rarely if ever required in the pre-hospital environment and is only indicated for circumfer-
ential (or near circumferential eschar) with impending/established respiratory compromise due
to thoraco-abdominal burns.
If there is clinical suspicion of a blast injury, pre-hospital providers should be aware of the
risk of blast lung, which can impair ventilation. There is also the possibility of barotrauma
causing a pneumothorax and/or lung contusions. These injuries should be managed as per local
trauma protocols with rapid transfer to a major trauma centre.
CIRCULATION
Following a significant burn intravascular fluid is lost locally into the burn wound and systemically
into the interstitial space. Although hypovolaemic shock can occur in large burns, this is unusual
in the very early stages, and if present mandates a thorough search for a cause of haemorrhage.
PRACTICE POINT
Early shock suggests the presence of a haemorrhage from an associated injury.
Cannulation should be attempted, ideally through areas of unburnt skin. Intraosseous (IO)
is an alternative route for fluid replacement. Intravenous fluid should be started for all burns
of >20% TBSA, and/or when transport to definitive care is likely to exceed 1 hour. In the pre-
hospital environment, crystalloid fluid should be used as fluid replacement. Ideally fluid given
should be warmed to prevent worsening hypothermia.
A calculation of initial fluid requirements can be made using the Parkland formula (Box 19.2) (10).
It is essential to remember that this formula (and every other burns formula) does not take into
account fluid loss from other injuries.
238
Hypothermia mitigation
Higher volumes should be used for inha-

BOX 19.2: The Parkland Formula
lational injuries and electrical burns (up to
Fluid requirement for first 24 hours 9 mL/kg may be needed).
▪▪ 2 to 4 mL crystalloid × % TBSA × Weight (kg) In paediatrics, normal maintenance fluid
▪▪ 50% in first 8 hours (from time of burn) requirements should be added to any resus-
▪▪ 50% in next 16 hours citation fluid calculation.
In pre-hospital practice where transfer
times may be short, an alternative fluid regimen for burns >20% TBSA (10% in children) is
• Adults = 1000 mL
• 10 to 15 years = 500 mL
• 5 to 10 years = 250 mL
• <5 yrs = No fluids
Care should be taken not to overinfuse, especially if the patient is elderly or has left ven-
tricular failure. Patients with associated traumatic injuries should receive fluid therapy based
on local guidelines for trauma resuscitation.
Circumferential limb burns can cause significant reduction in distal perfusion and isch-
aemia. However, escharotomies carry significant risk of complications, including iatrogenic
neurovascular injury. They are not indicated to performed in the pre-hospital environment,
except in prolonged field care situations.
DRESSINGS
The application of dressings will help to keep the wound clean and provide analgesia. The
ideal dressing should be non-adherent and allow the burn wound to be visualised without
unnecessary and painful removal of dressings. The use of a cellophane wrap is ideal for
this task. It should be applied in strips and layers, and must not be wrapped around a limb,
which can result in a constrictive effect as the wound and surrounding tissue swells.
The use of hydrogel dressings is not recommended unless no other alternative is available.
There is no evidence for the benefit of hydrogel dressings in pre-hospital care for wound heal-
ing (11). Cooling temperatures to aid healing are not effectively achieved and such dressings
must remain uncovered to allow air movement so as to facilitate cooling (12). Prolonged use
should be monitored to avoid inducing hypothermia in patients.
ANALGESIA
The application of effective dressings will usually provide good levels of analgesia for patients
with mild to moderate burns. Some patients will require intravenous analgesia and an intrave-
nous opioid can be titrated as required. Patients may require ketamine for analgesia. In children
the intranasal route can be used for the administration of both diamorphine and ketamine.
HYPOTHERMIA MITIGATION
Once the thermoregulatory capability of the skin has been lost through the burning process, sig-
nificant heat loss can occur. This can be compounded by aggressive cooling of the burn and sur-
rounding skin associated with excessive evaporative heat losses. Once a burnt patient has become
239
Burns
hypothermic it is very difficult for them to be rewarmed and this has a detrimental effect on wound
healing and survival.
Any wet clothing should be removed and the patient should be wrapped in warm, dry
blankets once the burn wounds have been appropriately dressed. The use of bubble wrap and
warming blankets will help to reduce heat loss. The ambient temperature within the ambu-
lance should be increased if possible. If transporting the patient by aircraft, care should be
taken to exclude any draughts. If the patient is anaesthetised, an oesophageal temperature
probe may be used to monitor core body temperature.
ANTIBIOTICS
The use of prophylactic antibiotics is not recommended for the majority of burns; only in rare
cases of gross contamination would pre-hospital antibiotics be warranted. Some patients will
require a tetanus immunisation booster, but this will be given in hospital.
CARBON MONOXIDE AND CYANIDE

Carbon monoxide (CO) is produced when incomplete combustion occurs. The symptoms of CO poi-
soning vary from mild malaise to coma and death. Standard pulse oximetry will not detect the pres-
ence of CO. All patients at risk of being exposed to CO should be given high-flow oxygen until arrival
at hospital when arterial oxygen and CO concentrations can be measured. It is worth noting that
CO levels are now routinely measured pre-hospital by the hazardous area response team (HART).
Cyanide is present as hydrogen cyanide gas in most domestic fires. No test is available for the
diagnosis of cyanide poisoning, and the symptoms and signs are non-specific. There is a failure of
oxygen utilisation by the tissues, which occurs despite high-inspired oxygen concentrations. The
specific treatment for cyanide poisoning in the pre-hospital environment is hydroxocobalamin.
CHEMICAL BURNS
Chemical burns usually occur as a result of industrial accidents. In such industrial locations,
chemicals information and specific treatments may be available. Where possible the chemical
that the patient has been exposed to should be recorded. Initial management is to irrigate the
area with copious amounts of water. Care should be taken to avoid washing the chemical onto
unaffected skin or the exposed skin of rescuers.
Hydrofluoric acid is a common chemical used in glass etching and in the manufacture of
printed circuit boards. Exposure to even 1% TBSA can be fatal due the systemic effects of fluo-
ride ions, dependent upon the concentration strength. Calcium gluconate can be used to neu-
tralise the acid and prevent continued injury.
ELECTRICAL BURNS
Electrical current can cause contact burns if it passes through the body or flash burns if it arcs
close to the body. The degree of tissue damage is proportional to the voltage.
In domestic, low voltage burns, there may be local burns at the entry and exit points but
minimal damage along the tract through which the current has travelled. The alternating
nature of domestic electricity can lead to arrhythmias, especially if the tract is across the thorax.
240
Summary
In high voltage (>1000 V) burns, there is significant tissue damage between entry and exit
points despite the skin potentially appearing normal. Extensive deep damage to the muscles
can lead to rhabdomyolysis and renal failure. These burns require aggressive fluid resuscitation.
A flash burn can occur when high voltage electricity arcs close to a patient and causes a
thermal burn to the skin but does not lead to damage to deeper structures as current does not
pass through the body. The ECG should be monitored for arrhythmias during transport if there
is evidence or suspicion of electrical injury.
TRIAGE AND TRANSFER

Local protocols vary as to whether direct triage to a burns centre is possible. Patients with
suspicion of concomitant trauma should initially be managed in a centre that can deal with the
possible injuries; this is likely to be a major trauma centre in the UK.
Guidelines from the British Burn Association and National Health Service (NHS) exist for
the threshold to refer or discuss burn cases with specialist burn care.
• All burns ≥2% TBSA in children or ≥3% in adults.

• All full thickness burns and all circumferential burns.
• Any burn with suspicion of non-accidental injury should be referred to a burn unit/centre
for expert assessment within 24 hours.
• Any burn >30% in adults or >15% in children, or any burn likely to need intensive care
requires a burn centre.
The following cases should be discussed with a burns service as they may require transfer
to specialist care:
• All burns to hands, feet, face, perineum or genitalia.

• Any chemical, electrical or cold burn injury.
• An unwell child with a burn or concerns of toxic shock syndrome.
• Concerns regarding burn injuries and co-morbidities that may affect treatment or any
burn that has not healed in 2 weeks.
NON-ACCIDENTAL INJURY
Although the majority of burns are accidental, a small proportion of paediatric burns are as
a result of non-accidental injury. Occasionally these injuries can present in the elderly and
dependant adult populations also.
The role of the pre-hospital practitioner is to accurately record the history surrounding the
event and to make an assessment of the scene. Any concerns should be passed on to the receiv-
ing hospital team. Local safeguarding policies should be followed in order to allow any con-
cerns to be recorded and followed up.
SUMMARY
Burns are common; fortunately severe burns are rare. When severe burns do occur they are
associated with great distress for the patient, and very often anxiety in the practitioner. Initial
management is straightforward and the key is not to be distracted by the appearance of the
burn wound. Simple attention to the <C>ABCDE process, exclusion (as far as is possible) of
241
Burns
immediately life-threatening injury elsewhere, awareness of the context in which the injury
has occurred, fluid replacement without recourse to complex formulas, covering the wound and
providing analgesia are all that is required.
REFERENCES
1. Stylianou N, Buchan I, Dunn KW. A review of the international Burn Injury Database
(iBID) for England and Wales: Descriptive analysis of burn injuries 2003–2011. BMJ
Open 2015:5(2):e006184.
2. Bartlett N, Yuan J, Holland AJ, Harvey JG, Martin HC, La Hei ER, Arbuckle S, Godfrey C.
Optimal duration of cooling for an acute scald contact burn injury in a porcine model.
Journal of Burn Care and Research 2008;29(5):828–834.
3. Venter THJ, Karpelowsky JS, Rode H. Cooling of the burn wound: The ideal temperature
of the coolant. Burns 2007;33(7):917–922.
4. Jackson DM. The diagnosis of the depth of burning. British Journal of Surgery 1953;40(164):
588–596.
5. Wallace AB. The exposure treatment of burns. The Lancet 1951;257(6653):501–504.
6. Nagel TR, Schunk JE. Using the hand to estimate the surface area of a burn in children.
Pediatric Emergency Care 1997;13(4):254–255.
7. Lund CC, Browder NC. The estimation of areas of burns. Surgery Gynecology and
Obstetrics 1944;79(352):8.
8. Barnes J, Duffy A, Hamnett N, McPhail J, Seaton C, Shokrollahi K, James MI, McArthur
P, Pritchard Jones N. The Mersey Burns App: Evolving a model of validation. Emergency
Medicine Journal 2015;32(8):637–641.
9. Sauaia A, Ivashchenko A, Peltz E, Schurr M, Holst J. Indications for intubation of the
patient with thermal and inhalational burns. In A42 ARDS: Risk, treatment, and outcomes.
American Thoracic Society, 2015, p. A1619.
10. Baxter CR, Shires T. (1968). Physiologic response to crystalloid resuscitation of severe
burns. Annals of New York Academy of Science 1968;150:874–893.
11. Goodwin NS, Spinks A, Wasiak J. The efficacy of hydrogel dressings as a first aid
measure for burn wound management in the pre-hospital setting: A systematic review
of the literature. International Wound Journal 2016;13(4):519–525.
12. Coats TJ, Edwards C, Newton R, Staun E. The effect of gel burns dressings on skin
temperature. Emergency Medicine Journal 2002;19(3):224–225.
FURTHER READING
Allison K, Porter K. Consensus on the prehospital approach to burns patient management.
Palao R, Monge I, Ruiz M, Barret JP. Chemical burns: Pathophysiology and treatment. Burns
2010;36:295–304.
Rowan MP, Cancio LC, Elster E, Burmeister DM, Rose LF, Natesan S, Chan RK, Christy RJ,
Chung KK. Burn wound healing and treatment: Review and advancements. Critical Care
2015;19(1):243.
Sheppard NN, Hemington-Gorse S, Shelley OP, Philp B, Dziewulski P. Prognostic scoring
systems in burns: A review. Burns 2011;37:1288–1295.
Victoria Burns Management Guidelines, http://www.vicburns.org.au/index.html.
242
Firearms, ballistics and gunshot
wounds
20
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the basic pathophysiology of gunshot wounds

▪▪ Understand the spectrum of injury arising from the use of firearms
▪▪ Be aware of the general principles of management of firearms injuries in the pre-hospital
environment
INTRODUCTION
Throughout the history of conflict, human ingenuity has focused on methods of killing and
injuring at a distance. With firearms, this is achieved by the transfer of chemical energy from
the propellant into a projectile’s kinetic energy (KE) and then the transfer of the projectile’s KE
into the tissues it strikes.
The use of chemical energy in the form of gunpowder to move projectiles had been around
for centuries in Asia when Edward III used a cannon for the first time in Europe in 1346. The
English used artillery to defeat Genoese crossbowmen fighting for King Philip VI during the
Battle of Crećy (1). Over the following centuries, refinements in metallurgy and chemistry
allowed the size of firearms to reduce to handguns, shotguns and rifles or small arms. This
chapter will focus on the science underpinning these weapons, the injuries they produce and
the strategy for treating casualties of firearms.
EPIDEMIOLOGY
The United Kingdom has one of the lowest rates of firearm assaults and homicides in the world
(2). Table 20.1 shows characteristics of firearm offences and injuries over a 12-month period in
England and Wales (3).
In 2011 the UK had 0.23 firearms-related deaths per 100,000 of the population. This com-
pares to 10.64 in the United States (2013 figures) and 1.75 in Norway. No major European state
has a lower rate than the UK. These figures include, murder, suicide and accidents.
243
Firearms, ballistics and gunshot wounds
Table 20.1 Firearms offences in England and Wales, 2011–2012
Firearm Offences involving Fatal Serious Minor

Weapon type offences shots fired injury injury injury
Shotguns 495 248 (50.1%) 16 56 36
Handguns 2651 332 (13%) 18 103 56
Imitation, BB or 1377 1,053 (76%) 0 8 624
airsoft firearms
Rifles/others 1478 597 (40%) 8 48 313
Air weapons 3554 3160 (89%) 0 29 329
Total 9555 5388 (56%) 42 244 1358
Source: Office for National Statistics, Violent crime and sexual offences, 2011/12, Statistical Bulletin, London, 2013.
Note: Serious injury is defined as requiring hospital admission. BB/airsoft guns are very low velocity air weapons.
NOMENCLATURE AND CLASSIFICATION

The nomenclature of firearms is confusing with the use of metric and imperial measurements,
and overlapping, synonymous terms.
BULLETS
A bullet is the projectile. Bullets are moved by the detonation of an explosive termed the propellant. The
propellant is enclosed by a casing fixed to the back of the bullet and is ignited by a small impact sensi-
tive explosive called the primer which is itself ignited when it is struck by the firing pin (Figure 20.1).
The classification of ammunition is complicated and not obviously logical. The diameter of
the bullet is known as its calibre; this corresponds to the internal diameter of the gun barrel.
Confusingly, this measurement is frequently given both in millimetres and fractions of an inch.
For example, the same calibre round could be described as 5.56 mm or .223.
In the NATO system of classification, two numbers are used to describe a type of ammuni-
tion: the first refers to the calibre and the second to the length in millimetres. Commonly just the
calibre is used, for example 5.56 × 45 mm ammunition is normally just referred to as ‘5.56 mm’.
However, different manufacturers make different lengths of bullets of the same calibre and
similarly change the dimensions of the casing to allow different quantities of propellant. For example,
bullets of 7.62 mm calibre are manufactured with lengths of
39 mm (AK-variant weapons), 51 mm (NATO) and 25 mm
for handguns.
Some manufacturers use designations where the sec-
ond number or word refers to the quantity of propellant.
The term magnum implies a variant of standard ammuni-
tion with a greater quantity of propellant in a larger cas-
ing. An example of this is the .357 magnum round which
has the same sized bullet as a .38 special but 11.5 grains of
propellant compared to 6.7 in the original version.
FIREARMS Figure 20.1 Schematic showing

longitudinal cross section of 9 ×
Guns are machines that convert the chemical energy in 19 mm and 5.56 × 45 mm and
an explosive into the kinetic energy of a projectile and shotgun cartridge.
244
Nomenclature and classification
include mortars, artillery and firearms. A firearm is a portable gun that fires a projectile across a
relatively flat trajectory. Firearms involve a controlled explosion in the breech, which then drives
the bullet along the barrel and out of the gun.
The term ‘firearm’ describes both extremely large weapon systems, which must be trans-
ported mounted to vehicles, as well as those that can be carried by hand. These man-portable
firearms are usually referred to as small arms and will be the focus of this chapter. However, for
simplicity the term firearm will be used throughout.
Small arms are divided into handguns, rifles and shotguns. A handgun is a short-barrelled
weapon that can be operated with one hand; handguns are further subdivided into pistols with
rounds stored in a straight magazine or revolvers in which rounds sit in a revolving drum.
Rifles are long barrelled weapons that have to be held with both hands and typically rested
against the shoulder. The term ‘rifle’ is misleading since both handguns and rifles are rifled
(have spiral grooves on the inside of their barrels). Rifles can have heavier barrels able to with-
stand greater forces than handguns and therefore typically fire higher-energy rounds.
Shotguns are similar in appearance to rifles but instead of firing a single bullet, fire mul-
tiple small spherical projectiles called shot through an un-rifled barrel. Shotguns are described
according to their calibre, known as gauge in the US and bore in the UK. Bores are numbered
according to the size of a lead sphere made from a given fraction of one pound of lead which fits
the internal diameter of the barrel. For example a 12-bore shotgun has a barrel diameter that
fits a sphere of 1/12th of a pound of lead, and a 20-bore has a barrel diameter that fits a sphere
of 1/20th of a pound of lead. Therefore a higher number indicates a smaller barrel. Shotgun
ammunition can vary enormously according to the number and size of shot.
A simple, practical division of firearms is into ‘long’ and ‘short’ weapons. This can be read-
ily understood by victims or bystanders of a firearm incident. Attempts to determine this by pre-
hospital medics will be extremely useful in anticipation of the likely injury patterns and should be
included in part of the ATMIST handover. Shotgun wounds are normally obvious clinically and
unmistakeable on X-ray due to the large number of foreign bodies of uniform size, but differentiat-
ing between handgun and rifle wounds can be difficult and reliant on a thorough history from pre-
hospital practitioners. Table 20.2 shows the comparative characteristics and wounding patterns of
shotguns, rifles and handguns. Shotgun pellets spread from the muzzle of a gun in a conical shape
with the result that the inflicted wounds become more separated the further the victim is from the
weapon when it is fired. However at very short ranges, shotgun wounds can be devastating with
massive soft tissue destruction as the mass of pellets will act, in effect, as a single massive projectile.
Table 20.2 Comparison of firearm types grouped according to ‘long’ or ‘short’
‘Short’ ‘Long’
Appearance of firing position Held in one or two Held with both hands, rested against
hands away from the shoulder
the body
Weapon type Handgun Rifle Shotgun
Example ammunition 9 × 19 mm 5.56 × 45 mm Shot
Kinetic energy (joules) 550 1800 3200
Muzzle velocity (metres per second) 390 930 400
Projectile weight (grams) 7.5 4 40
Wounds Permanent cavity Permanent and Wide but
temporary cavity shallow wound*
* The wounding effect of a shotgun depends on the distance from muzzle to target.
245
FIREARMS IN THE UK
The UK has one of the tightest legal frameworks governing firearms in the world; their use
is restricted by the 1997 Firearms Act and the 2006 Violent Crime Reduction Act. In practical
terms, only rifles and shotguns (together with appropriate ammunition) may be legally owned
by private citizens.
Police forces in the UK have access to a variety of firearms, and casualties from law enforce-
ment and security operations may well require treatment. Typically police rely on handguns
and sub-machine guns firing 9 × 19 mm ammunition, but increasing numbers of police forces
are issuing firearms officers with rifles firing 5.56 × 45 mm rounds.
Police forces also occasionally use Attenuating Energy Projectiles (AEPs) during public order opera-
tions. The AEP replaces plastic or rubber bullets often called ‘baton rounds’ and is regarded as a less
lethal form of firearm. AEPs are made from 98 g of polyurethane and are 37 × 100 mm in size. AEPs
are slow (<100 ms–1) and despite their large mass typically only possess around 250 joules of kinetic
energy, depending on range. An AEP can cause significant blunt injuries and is theoretically life
threatening but no fatalities have been reported following their use in the UK (4).
BALLISTICS
Ballistics is the science of projectiles and is divided into three areas. Internal ballistics deals with
the behaviour of the projectile in the gun, external ballistics describes the flight of the projectile
and terminal ballistics examines the transfer of energy from the projectile into its target.
INTERNAL BALLISTICS
The ignition of the propellant results in the extremely rapid conversion of a solid into a gas; this
explosion occurs in the casing, held in the breech at the rear of the barrel. At the moment of igni-
tion (detonation) the gas occupies a very small volume under enormous pressure. This pressure is
released by forcing the bullet along the barrel. The bullet accelerates along the barrel as the propel-
lant continues to burn and produce gaseous products. The rifling in the barrel is helical and either
comprised of raised lands between grooves or more subtle ‘hills and valleys’ in polygonal rifling. Both
forms cause the bullet to spin around its longitudinal axis, providing stability to the bullet in flight.
EXTERNAL BALLISTICS
The KE of the round is related to the velocity and is determined by the following equation:
mv 2
KE =
2
where
KE is kinetic energy.
m is mass of the projectile.
v is velocity of the projectile.
It is important to note that the velocity is squared in this equation and therefore increases in
velocity have a greater effect on the energy of the bullet than increasing its mass.
246
Ballistics
Projectiles are at their fastest when they leave the end of the barrel (the muzzle) hence muzzle
velocity. From the point of leaving the muzzle, the projectile is slowed by the effect of drag as
it passes through the air. Drag is complex and consists of two main components: pressure drag
and skin friction. In supersonic bullets there is the additional factor of wave drag. These compo-
nents of drag are simplified by combining them into the drag coefficient, which differs between
projectiles. The drag force is the resultant retarding force on the bullet as it travels through the
air and is given by the equation:

Fd = 1/2 pv 2 Cd A
where
Fd is the drag force acting to slow the bullet.
Cd is the drag coefficient.
p is the mass density of the air the bullet is passing through.
v is the velocity of the projectile.
A is the cross-sectional surface area of the projectile.
It is important to note that in this equation, as in the KE equation, velocity is squared; there-
fore higher velocity projectiles are subject to much greater drag.
The drag coefficient is dependent on multiple factors including the shape of the bullet.
A ‘sharper’ bullet is less susceptible to drag. The sharpness of a bullet is quantified by the
ratio of the calibre to the curve of the front of the bullet and is measured in ogives as shown in
Figure 20.2. Bullets with higher ogives are ‘sharper’ and less susceptible to drag. Clearly if a
projectile is unstable in flight, it presents a greater surface area as it tumbles. It is therefore
subject to much greater drag and will slow rapidly.
The concept of drag is also relevant in the understanding of the transfer of kinetic energy
into the tissues and will be revisited in the next section.
BULLET INSTABILITY
Despite the spinning effect conveyed to the bullet by the rifling, it does not travel with perfect
stability along the axis of its trajectory. There are three main types of instability: yaw, preces-
sion and nutation.
Yaw is defined as the linear oscil-
lation of the bullet around the axis of
the trajectory and can be thought of as
‘wobble’. Precession is the helical rota- Ogive number
tion or spiralling of the nose of the pro-
jectile around the axis of the trajectory. 0.5
1 2
Nutation is the small oscillations of the 3 4 5
6 7
nose from the rotational arc of preces- 3.0
sion. Of these types of projectile insta-
bility, the most significant is yaw (5). 10.0
1 cal
However, during the flight of modern
bullets, yaw is negligible and is probably Figure 20.2 Schematic showing ogive arc calculations
less than 2°. (Figure 20.3) (6). on the left and typical ogive values on the right.
247
(a)
(b)
N
P
R
Figure 20.3 (a) Schematic showing yaw, or ‘linear wobble’. This has been exaggerated for the purposes of
illustration and is usually less than 2°. (b) Schematic showing precession (P) or rotation of the nose around the
axis of flight, along with nutation (N), a rocking motion in the axis of rotation. Throughout these movements,
the bullet spins (R) around its longitudinal axis, conveyed by the rifling of the barrel.
TERMINAL BALLISTICS
The most relevant area of ballistic physics to the trauma practitioner is terminal ballistics. This
is concerned with the passage of the projectile into the casualty and the transfer of KE into the
casualty’s tissues. It is the ‘work’ done by the projectile as it transfers its KE that causes tissue
damage. It is important to recognise that the action of a projectile as it passes through tissue
is idiosyncratic and largely unpredictable. Unlike internal and external ballistics, which have
clear laws of physics describing them, terminal ballistics describes a much more complex set
of interactions and therefore offers few ‘rules’ that predict wounding patterns. Projectiles can
ricochet within bodies, follow unpredictable paths and seemingly defy scientific expectations.
In the simplest sense, the KE transferred into tissues is simply the difference between the
KE of the projectile as it strikes the body and that which remains when it exits tissue. If the
projectile does not exit the tissues, all of its KE will be transferred into the body. Projectiles
damage tissue via three mechanisms: permanent cavity formation, temporary cavity formation and
generation of a shock wave as shown in Figure 20.4.
PERMANENT CAVITY
The projectile cuts and shears tissue as it passes through the casualty creating a tract that is
the same diameter as the projectile. This tract, the permanent cavity, is typically a continuation
Permanent cavity
Temporary cavity
0 cm 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 64
Figure 20.4 Schematic showing the three components of ballistic wounding: the permanent cavity
directly behind the path of the bullet, the temporary cavity expanding radially away from the bullet tract
and the shock wave.
248
Ballistics
of the trajectory of the projectile and is similar to that which would be created by a spear,
arrow or stabbing weapon of the same diameter. If a round fragments, which can occur either
in soft tissue or after bone strike, then each fragment will create a permanent cavity and pos-
sibly even a temporary cavity (see below), dramatically increasing tissue damage.
As has been previously stated, there are few rules in terminal ballistics. However, lower energy
handgun projectiles (for example 9 × 19 mm bullets), normally only produce a permanent cavity.
Gunshot wounds (GSWs) produced by these rounds usually involve damage limited to structures
and organs lying in the path of the projectile. Therefore, in through and through injuries, where
both entry and exit wounds exist, the structures damaged can be predicted with a fair degree of
accuracy. However, it is important to recognise that higher energy handgun projectiles can form
a temporary cavity (see later). Where the round has not been recovered or the weapon type is
unknown, it is perilous to assume that damage from cavitation will not have been caused.
CAVITATION AND TEMPORARY CAVITY FORMATION

The formation of a temporary cavity is a feature of fluid dynamics. As the projectile travels
through tissue, it creates momentary areas of very low pressure in its wake. The pressure can
be so low that the tissue, acting as a liquid, can vaporise. It is important to note that this is an
effect of low pressure, not increase in temperature. It is analogous to the phenomena that the
boiling point of water decreases as altitude increases.
This newly created vapour expands radially from the path of the projectile, stretching tissues and
causing tensile damage. Following expansion, the vapour rapidly returns to a liquid state, causing
a subsequent drop in pressure. As the pressure drops the tissues return to their relaxed state.
The ability of tissues to tolerate this temporary tensile damage will determine the amount of tis-
sue destruction. For example, muscle and lung tissue are very elastic and tolerate this temporary
stretching well: tissue damage is therefore minimal. Liver and brain tissue are inelastic and there-
fore relatively intolerant of cavitation, so tend
to suffer devastating tissue damage. The size
of the temporary cavity formed is related to the
turbulence of the flow of the projectile. A stable,
high ogive bullet will pass through tissue for
some distance without creating much turbulent
flow and therefore cause little cavitation.
An unstable, expanding or fragmenting
round however, creates massive turbulent
flow. As the projectile passes through tissue,
the spin conferred upon it by the rifling is
slowed, reducing its stability and increasing
the yaw. This is combined with the likelihood
that the projectile will not cross tissue inter-
faces perpendicular to them, causing further
destabilisation. If the penetration distance
through tissue is sufficient, or if it strikes
bone, it is likely that the bullet will tumble. Figure 20.5 Schematic showing the formation
When its long axis is at 90° to its trajectory, and persistence of the temporary cavity, with
maximal cavity formation at point where the
the rate of energy transfer and cavitation is projectiles tumble and turn through 180° to the
greatest, as shown in the Figure 20.5. direction of travel.
249
It is important to recognise the fact that cavitation does not necessarily occur throughout the
wound tract: there will only be a large exit wound if significant cavitation occurs at the point
the projectile leaves the body.
SHOCK WAVE
The shock wave is one of the most controversial areas of ballistics, as the significance of this
component is not yet fully understood. It has long been recognised that when a projectile
strikes tissue, a tiny region of very high pressure is generated. This propagates through the
tissue at approximately the speed of sound in water (1434 ms –1), typically faster and therefore
ahead of the projectile (7).
Some investigators, particularly those examining actual shootings and animal models,
believe a significant degree of the damage sustained can be attributed to the shock wave (8,9).
However, other investigators discount the wounding potential of the shock wave and regard it
as insignificant when compared to cavitation (6).
BULLET DESIGN AND ENERGY TRANSFER

Bullet design is of significant interest to the trauma practitioner due to the effect that it has on
the wound pattern. As shown in the earlier equation, a projectile’s kinetic energy increases in
proportion to its mass; however, enlarging the surface area that the bullet presents to the air
increases drag. Bullets have therefore traditionally been made from dense metals to reduce this
effect. For centuries, lead formed the predominant component for both its density and softness.
The softness means that it deforms and flattens when it strikes its target. The deformation leads
to an increase, or expansion, in the advancing surface area only after striking the target, thus
increasing the drag and the rate of energy transfer into the casualty’s tissues.
Despite this, the softness of lead bullets has a disadvantage. The switch in propellants in
the late 19th century from gunpowder to more powerful nitrocellulose significantly increased
the velocity of bullets as they passed down the barrel. It was noted that at speeds above
300 ms –1 there was excessive damage to the bullet as it travelled down the barrel. To combat
this, bullets were wrapped, or jacketed, in copper and became known as full metal jacket (FMJ)
bullets.
It was noted in the late 1800s that the standard British army round, the FMJ Mk II .303,
had less ‘stopping power’ than traditional lead bullets. To counter this, the superintendent of
the Dum-Dum arsenal near Calcutta, India, Captain Neville Bertie-Clay, developed a round
which was jacketed except for the tip (10). This protected the lead of the bullet core, but allowed
the soft, exposed nose to expand on impact. The expanding effect was further enhanced by
the addition of a hollow tip in the nose of the bullet in the Mk IV round. These semi-jacketed
rounds were noted to produce devastating injuries when they were first used in the Battle of
Omdurman in 1898. British Army soldiers issued with the old Mk II rounds reportedly cut off
the tips to increase their expansion upon impact. The term ‘Dum-Dum’ has been associated
with expanding rounds ever since.
Expanding rounds have been shown to produce wounds an order of magnitude larger than
comparable FMJ bullets (11). In 1899, the signatories to a Hague convention declared that in
conflicts between them, they would ‘abstain from the use of bullets which expand or flatten
easily in the human body, such as bullets with a hard envelope which does not entirely cover
the core, or is pierced with incisions’. Expanding bullets are permissible for security services
250
Ballistic protection
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Figure 20.6 Schematic showing variations in bullet design. (a) is an un-jacketed, soft bullet liable
to deform on impact. (b) is a full metal jacket, military-type bullet that should pass through soft tissue
without deforming. Bullet (c) is a semi-jacketed or dum-dum design that will normally expand on impact.
Similarly, bullet (d) is a hollow point design, intended to expand on impact. Bullet (e) has a steel core and
is designed to pass through armour and is unlikely to deform, but the jacket may fragment.
(where the aim is to instantly take down the target and ensure that through-and-through shots
do not injure passers-by) and for civilian hunting use.
Some bullets have been designed with other modifications to increase their expansion and
energy transfer. For example the Winchester Supreme Expansion Technology©/Black Talon©
round has six segments that peel outwards when striking the target. This effect increases
the surface area presented to the tissue, causing rapid retardation and energy transfer.
This increases the damage caused and makes the bullet less likely to pass through the body to
potentially injure another casualty. Figure 20.6 demonstrates basic differences in bullet design.
It should be noted that even FMJ bullets not designed to deform will fragment in tissue at
high velocities. This effect is observed in the standard 5.56 × 45 NATO round at speeds of over
750 ms –1.
BALLISTIC PROTECTION
Attempts to protect against the effects of projectile weapons with armour have evolved with
the development of the weapons themselves. Modern ballistic protection is made up of three
components: mesh, plates and carriers. Carriers do not convey any protection, but position the
protective armour over vital organs while causing the least limitation to the wearers’ function.
BALLISTIC MESH
Ballistic mesh or soft armour is composed of a ‘web’ of very strong fibres, for example Kevlar® or
nylon. These fibres are woven into fabric sheets, which are then overlaid to form a multi-layered
material. This material absorbs and disperses the impact energy that is transmitted to the vest
from the bullet, and causes the bullet to deform, or ‘mushroom’. Each successive layer of mate-
rial in the vest absorbs additional energy, until such time as the bullet has been stopped (11).
Because the fibres work together both in the individual layer and with other layers of mate-
rial in the vest, a large area of the garment becomes involved in preventing the bullet from
penetrating its target (11). Unfortunately, this means that though the bullet may not penetrate
the vest, the area of tissue beneath the vest may be exposed to a large area of blunt trauma.
This trauma can result in a spectrum of injury, from a simple haematoma to significant damage
251
to underlying organs. It is possible for this type of material armour to defeat most low veloc-
ity rounds from handguns and shotguns. However, it is ineffectual against the higher energy,
higher ogive ammunition fired by rifles.
BALLISTIC PLATES
To provide protection against high-energy ammunition, ballistic insert plates are added to bal-
listic mesh. Ballistic plates are traditionally manufactured from boron carbide or silicon carbide
ceramic, but have also been made of steel or ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene. Ceramic
plates provide the best combination of hardness, lightness and brittleness, the desirable quali-
ties of any ballistic protection plate. The ceramic plate usually has lightweight, high-strength
material similar to Kevlar attached as a backing.
The mechanism of effect of ballistic plates lies in absorbing and dissipating the projectile’s
kinetic energy by local shattering of the ceramic plate and blunting the bullet material on the
hard ceramic. The backing then spreads the energy of the impact to a larger area and arrests the
fragments, reducing the likelihood of fatal injury to the wearer.
The US National Institute of Justice (NIJ) is the internationally recognised standard for bal-
listic protection. In general, there are four protection levels. NIJ Levels II and IIIa require the
armour to protect against handgun ammunition and tend to refer to mesh or soft armour protec-
tion systems. Most body armour issued to pre-hospital practitioners will be at this level. Levels III
and IV require protection against high-velocity rifle ammunition and usually involve the use of
hard armour plates. As previously mentioned, no armour will completely protect the user against
injury, however, its aim is always to decrease the extent of injury the wearer experiences.
PRE-HOSPITAL ASSESSMENT AND TREATMENT
SCENE SAFETY AND COMMAND AND CONTROL

The potential dangers of attending the scene of a firearms incident are obvious. If there is any
suggestion of a perpetrator at large, pre-hospital practitioners should wait in the muster area
or outside the incident cordon. They should only advance to treat casualties following direct
instruction from the police incident commander.
The United Kingdom has fortunately avoided significant numbers of multiple shootings
such as are all too distressingly common in the United States where, in 2015, there were
according to one estimate 372 mass shootings killing 475 people and wounding 1870 (12).
The Dunblane incident of 1996 in which Thomas Hamilton killed 16 pupils and 1 teacher and
the Whitehaven tragedy of 2011 in which Derrick Bird killed 12 and injured 11 are notable
exceptions. In the event of mass shootings, the medical incident commander should consider
establishing a casualty clearing station. Casualties with non-life-threatening injuries can be
held there while limited resources are focused on transferring casualties with life-threatening
injuries to hospital.
The majority of shootings do not therefore fit into this pattern and will simply require
appropriate security cordoning of the area until the risk is eliminated and medical care
when it can be provided safely. Factors which make a shooting more complex include dif-
ficulty in locating and eliminating the perpetrator, as was the case with Derek Bird or
Raoul Moat, large numbers of living, or possibly living casualties, and major disruption to
infrastructure.
252
History and assessment
ZONES AT A SHOOTING INCIDENT

The police will usually establish the following zones at an incident involving firearms.
NON-PERMISSIVE ZONE
Under no circumstances must non-specialist medical staff enter the non-permissive zone.
Patients must be extracted from the non-permissive area for treatment and clinical protocols
must reflect this. Police firearms teams receive standard advanced first-aid training relevant to
such environments.
SEMI-PERMISSIVE ZONE
The semi-permissive zone is sometimes referred to as the warm zone because some risk persists
but direct threat is absent. The minimal level of care necessary to save life should be provided,
under instruction from the relevant commander and ideally by specially trained personnel only,
such as members of a HART (hazardous area response team). Because this area is within the
police cordon, an escort should be provided if clinical staff are required to enter.
PERMISSIVE ZONE
By definition, work in this area poses no risk to clinicians and all appropriate interventions are
possible. However, transfer to hospital must not be delayed.
HISTORY AND ASSESSMENT

As has been previously stated, shotgun wounds are normally obvious due to their characteristic
appearance. Differentiating between typically low-energy handgun GSWs and higher energy rifle
GSWs can be simplified by asking casualties/bystanders if a ‘long’ or ‘short’ weapon was used.
Range and direction of fire is likely to be of less relevance and is often mistaken by witnesses anyway.
It is important not to be tempted to over-interpret wounding patterns: high-energy rounds
can leave small exit wounds and low-energy rounds can leave large ones as shown in Figure 20.7.
Such surmise is not relevant to the initial management of the patient, and in any case is usually
wrong. In the pre-hospital environment, treat the patient, not the suspected ammunition.
Figure 20.7 Schematic showing the variable size of entrance and exit wounds depending on bullet
orientation when it strikes or leaves tissue.
253
Patient assessment in cases of gun-

shot injury follows exactly the same
<C>ABCDE as in any other case of trauma.
Preconceptions about the presumed sever-
ity of gunshot wounds must not influence
treatment. Treatment must therefore be
based on the injuries found on examina-
tion and the observed or expected physi-
ological consequences of those injuries.
It should also be borne in mind that any
predictions regarding the wound track,
unreliable as these are likely to be, can only
be made if the position of the victim at the
moment of impact is known (Figure 20.8). Figure 20.8 Position at impact and wound track.
PRE-HOSPITAL TREATMENT
A casualty with a GSW is no different from any other and a standard <C>ABCDE approach
should be followed (Box 20.1). As previously mentioned, bullets can follow unpredictable path-
ways within the body, and at least some consideration should be given to spinal immobilisation
particularly if the victim may have fallen as a result of being shot. Any GSW involving the torso
or junctional areas has the potential to damage any structure within the thorax or abdomen
and can result in rapidly fatal chest injuries. Positive pressure ventilation of a casualty with a
penetrating chest injury from a GSW is a relative indication for thoracostomy.
BOX 20.1: Management of Gunshot Wounds

<C>
Massive exsanguinating external haemorrhage is unusual following a GSW but is conventionally man-
aged by tourniquet application, pressure dressings, haemostatic dressings and fluid replacement
ideally with blood products.
A
Direct trauma to the airway is likely to require intubation or a surgical airway. Loss of airway control due to loss
of conscious level is managed conventionally. Facial GSWs may require the conscious patient to maintain
a posture sitting up and leaning forward, and soft tissues can be held off the airway with a tongue suture.
B
Chest injuries due to GSW are managed in the same way as the same injury (tension pneumothorax,
haemothorax, etc.) due to another cause. Consider thoracostomy if the patient is to be ventilated and
has a chest wound.
C
The principles of hybrid resuscitation apply. Ideally resuscitation should be with blood products. The
possibility of multi-cavity penetration by the round must always be considered.
D
AVPU and the Glasgow Coma Score (GCS) can be used. Penetrating injuries to the brain are usually
but not invariably fatal. Treatment should therefore be active unless death is obvious on arrival.
E
Every wound must be identified by a careful all over assessment of the patient.
254
Further reading
Haemorrhage, both compressible and non-compressible, is a common feature of GSWs and

can be fatal if unchecked. A direct pressure dressing is normally sufficient to arrest extremity
haemorrhage and a tourniquet should rarely be required. Bleeding from the liver or spleen, or
great vessel penetration, can be rapidly fatal and suspicion of these injuries should be reported
to the receiving hospital in advance of the casualty’s arrival. If available, pre-hospital transfu-
sion should be given to shocked patients, especially those with a torso GSW.
Recent military experience has clearly demonstrated that an inter- or transcranial GSW is
potentially survivable; ideally transfer should be to a hospital with a neurosurgical facility and
the GCS should be documented as soon as feasible and repeated en route.
SUMMARY
The management of gunshot wounds is not complex and most of the mystique and anxiety
associated with shootings can be easily dispelled by a knowledge of basic ballistics. Attempts to
speculate about injury patterns are unhelpful and may be dangerously misleading. A straight-
forward <C>ABCDE approach and an awareness that a projectile, whatever its point of entry,
may have an entirely unpredictable path will ensure that critical injuries are not missed.
REFERENCES
1. Keen M. Medieval Warfare: A History. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999.
2. Crime UNOoDa. UNODC Homicide Statistics 2013. New York, 2013.
3. Office for National Statistics. Violent crime and sexual offences, 2011/12. Statistical
Bulletin, London, 2013.
4. Maguire K, Hughes DM, Fitzpatrick MS, Dunn F, Rocke LG, Baird CJ. Injuries caused by
the attenuated energy projectile: The latest less lethal option. Emergency Medical Journal
2007;24(2):103–105.
5. Owen-Smith MS. High Velocity Missile Wounds. London: Edward Arnold, 1981.
6. Fackler ML. Wound ballistics. A review of common misconceptions. JAMA
1988;259(18):2730–2736.
7. Harvey EN, McMillen JH. An experimental study of shock waves resulting from the impact of
high velocity missiles on animal tissues. Journal of Experimental Medicine 1947;85(3):321–328.
8. Marshall EP, Sanow EJ. Handgun Stopping Power: The Definitive Study. Boulder, CO:
Paladin Press, 1992.
9. Suneson A, Hansson HA, Kjellstrom BT, Lycke E, Seeman T. Pressure waves caused by
high-energy missiles impair respiration of cultured dorsal root ganglion cells. Journal of
Trauma 1990;30(4):484–488.
10. The military bullet. British Medical Journal 1896;2:1810.
11. DeMuth WE Jr. Bullet velocity and design as determinants of wounding capability: An
experimental study. Journal of Trauma 1966;6(2):222–232.
12. www.shootingtracker.com/
FURTHER READING
Brooks A, Clasper J, Midwinter MJ, Hodgetts TJ, Mahoney PF. Ryan’s Ballistic Trauma.
Springer, 2011.
255
Blast injuries
21
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the basic science of blast injury

▪▪ Understand the patterns of injury associated with an explosion
▪▪ Be able to safely manage blast injuries in the pre-hospital environment
INTRODUCTION
The first recorded bombing in Europe occurred in Antwerp on April 4, 1585. It was a pan-
European incident where the English government of Elizabeth I funded the Italian military
engineer Federgio Giambelli to construct two floating bombs to destroy a bridge constructed
by the Spanish who were besieging the Protestant forces in the city. Three thousand kilograms
of gunpowder was used in a rudimentary shaped charge directed up at the bridge. ‘A thousand
soldiers were destroyed in a second of time; many of them being torn to shreds, beyond even the sem-
blance of humanity’. However, it was also noted that some casualties ‘fell dead without a wound,
killed by the concussion of the air’ (1).
An explosion is a near instantaneous oxidation of an explosive solid or fluid, converting
huge amounts of chemical energy into kinetic and thermal energy. This rapid energy conver-
sion can be immensely destructive with obviously massive potential for injury.
Explosions can occur through domestic and industrial accidents as well as deliberate actions
in war or terrorist attacks. Practitioners potentially responsible for the care of casualties of
explosions need to have an understanding of the unique circumstances and features of these
injuries.
BLAST INJURIES IN WAR AND PEACE

Blast injuries can be considered in the military and civilian environment, however, in the mod-
ern world such distinctions are becoming increasingly blurred.
256
Blast injuries in war and peace
Table 21.1 Relative proportions of GSW to blast injuries
UK, Iraq and US OIF/OEF

Afghanistan 2001–2005 Falklands US Vietnam US Korea
GSW 30% 19% 29% 35% 31%
Blast 70% 81% 71% 65% 69%
n 2276 1416 48 13,050 111,716
Note: OIF, Operation Iraqi Freedom (US-led invasion of Iraq 2003); OEF, Operation Enduring Freedom (US operations
in Afghanistan).
BLAST INJURIES IN WAR

Contrary to popular perception, casualties from hostile action are due to explosions rather than
gunshot wounds (GSWs) at a ratio of approximately 3:1. This ratio has remained remarkably
consistent throughout modern high-intensity conflict as Table 21.1 shows (2–6).
Prefabricated military explosive weapons include indirect fire weapons such as mortars and
artillery, rockets, mines and grenades. Non-state military forces have long favoured improvised
explosive devices (IEDs). These are often initiated by the victim or remotely by a command wire
or radio signal in order for the assailant to remain distant from their target (7). IEDs, particu-
larly those initiated by the victim, are often concealed underground in open spaces, thus the
numbers of victims are relatively limited to those directly above the blast. In order to injure
large numbers of casualties, either very large devices must be employed, with associated dif-
ficulty in concealment, or multiple devices will be needed.
BLAST INCIDENTS IN THE CIVILIAN SETTING

Terrorists targeting civilians to achieve a political aim have long favoured explosive weapons
due to the potential for mass casualties and terrible injuries without direct engagement of the
terrorist with their target. These weapons are most effective when deployed in an enclosed,
densely populated urban environment. The most significant terrorist bombings in North
America and Europe are shown in Table 21.2 (8–14). These continents are amongst the least
susceptible to this type of attack and similar data from other continents might reveal far more
extensive casualties.
Table 21.2 Examples of terrorist bombing attacks in Europe and North America over the last 25 years
Attack Fatalities Injured Suicide attack

Manchester 2017 23 139 Yes (1 bomber killed)
Boston Marathon 2013 3 264 No
Oslo bombing 2011 8 209 No
7/7 London bombing 2005 52 700 4 bombers killed
Madrid train bombing 2004 191 1,800 No
Myyrmanni bombing 2002 7 166 1 bomber killed
Omagh bombing 1998 29 220 No
Oklahoma City bombing 1995 167 592 No
257
Blast injuries
The geographic range of terrorist bomb attacks on civilian targets over the last 25 years is
demonstrated in Table 21.2. Sadly, the obvious conclusion is that there is a possibility of an
attack of this nature almost anywhere.
COMPONENTS OF THE EXPLOSION

Explosions are complicated events that occur extremely rapidly with the release of energy and gen-
eration of large volumes of gaseous products. Their precise nature depends on the type of explosive.
Professionally manufactured military- or mining-grade explosives will behave differently to home-
made munitions such as fertiliser bombs which behave technically more like very rapid combus-
tions. In general, commercial or high-grade explosives require a detonator to cause them to explode
but do not require confinement. Low-grade explosives including traditional gunpowder and home-
made explosives require confinement if they are to explode but do not require to be detonated.
SHOCK WAVE
The shock wave is analogous to a sound wave in that it passes through substances rather than
moves them. Figure 21.1 illustrates the shock wave propagating spherically from the point of
the explosion.
The shock wave travels much faster than the speed of sound (330 metres/second in air) and
produces an effectively instantaneous rise in pressure for milliseconds. This rise in pressure
is often referred to as the overpressure. The energy of the shock wave dissipates rapidly as it
propagates away from the source explosion, proportionally to the distance, or radius (R) cubed
(15). Immediately following this transient increase in pressure is a slightly longer period of
negative pressure as shown in Figure 21.2.
The negative pressure component is negligible in non-experimental explosions and involves
less energy but lasts longer by approximately an order of magnitude than the positive pressure
component (16).
Like a sound wave, the shock wave can be reflected; therefore a casualty in a built up envi-
ronment can be subjected to multiple shock waves from a single explosion as they bounce back
and forth, reflected from structures near to the explosion (Figure 21.3). Similarly the shock
wave can propagate around and through structures.
(a)
(b)
Figure 21.1 The shock wave (a) and blast wind (b).
258
Injury patterns
Peak overpressure Peak overpressure
Pressure
Pressure
Atmospheric
pressure
Atmospheric
pressure
Negative or under-
pressure phase
Positive or
overpressure phase Time
Figure 21.2 Schematic showing idealised Figure 21.3 Schematic showing idealised
shock wave from ‘naked’ explosion in an shock wave from an explosion within a confined
open space. space showing multiple peaks of overpressure as
the wave is reflected back and forth.
BLAST WIND
The gas created by the explosion expands outward at high velocity. It is this blast which carries
objects such as body parts, fragments of the device and energised objects from the environ-
ment. The effect of the blast wind has a much greater range than the shock wave.
HEAT
Along with the blast wind, the combustion of explosive products continues to generate heat.
This is more significant with home-made explosives and blasts in enclosed spaces. The ignition
of adjacent structures can also result in propagation of the thermal effect. In some incidents a
majority of casualties can be due to burns alone, although this is uncommon (17).
INJURY PATTERNS
The injury patterns produced following a blast can be predicted by the components of the
explosive blast as described earlier.
PRIMARY BLAST INJURY

Clinically, in the pre-hospital environment, primary blast injuries are the least significant com-
ponent of blast injury, because if a victim is close enough to a blast to be significantly affected
by the effect of the blast shock wave, they are normally also severely injured by fragmentation
injury and the effects of the blast wind which will be the priorities for management at scene.
However, victims in buildings or vehicles may be particularly vulnerable to primary blast injury
due to reflection of the blast wave.
As the shock wave moves through the casualty’s body, energy is transferred into tissues
particularly at interfaces between gases and tissues. This is analogous to the absorption of
sound energy by the open cell foam in ear defenders: as the sound wave travels through the
259
Blast injuries
foam, it encounters multiple air–plastic interfaces of the foam cell and the energy of the wave
is dissipated.
The organs particularly affected are those with gas–tissue interfaces, mainly the lungs, ears
and bowel (18). The pressure generated by the shock wave typically must be >35 KPa to produce
ear injuries and >250 KPa to produce lung or bowel injuries (19).
Blast lung injury can result in disruption at the alveolar–capillary interface resulting in lung
parenchymal haemorrhage, pneumothorax and alveolar-venous fistulae (20). The incidence of
blast lung in terrorist bombings varies enormously depending on proximity and enclosure but
has been reported as high as 14% of casualties (21,22).
Blast intestinal injury is rare in land-based explosions but very common in submerged vic-
tims (23). The blast wave causes intramural haemorrhage and even perforation, which may
occur several days after injury (24).
Ear injuries typically range from tympanic membrane to ossicle dislocation and can be a
feature of up to half of blast casualties (21). It has been noted that the presence of ear injuries
varies significantly depending on the position of the head relative to the blast, and even though
the threshold pressure for ear damage is theoretically an order of magnitude less than that for
lung injury, the absence of ear injuries is a poor surrogate for the absence of visceral injury (25).
SECONDARY BLAST INJURY

The majority of injuries are due to secondary blast effects: the impaction on the victim’s body
of pre-formed projectiles within the device, irregular fragments from the device, environmental
debris and even tissue from other victims. These materials are accelerated by the blast wind caus-
ing widespread and often gross tissue damage and mutilation. These projectiles are accelerated
radially away from the blast epicentre and follow an arced trajectory due to the effect of gravity.
Fragments and debris behave exactly like projectiles discussed in the ballistics chapter, with
the caveat that they are often irregularly shaped, are subject to greater drag and therefore do
not travel as far. Victims are often struck by multiple projectiles along with the tissue stripping
effect of large numbers of small pieces of debris.
There have been two proposed mechanisms for the traumatic amputation of limbs. First,
that the shock wave fractures the diaphysis of the long bones and then the amputation is com-
pleted by the limb being flailed by the blast wind (26). The second proposed mechanism is that
the amputation occurs through the joint through a purely flail mechanism as a result of the
flailing of the limb (27). In practice, it is likely that both mechanisms are involved.
TERTIARY BLAST INJURY

If a victim is thrown by the blast wind, they are at risk of sustaining blunt injury when they
strike walls or objects.
BLAST INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

Each explosive incident is unique. Such incidents have the capability to cause large numbers of
casualties as shown in Table 21.1; they are crime scenes with evidence which must be preserved
and collected, and there is potential for injury to rescue workers.
A terrorist attack in the UK would probably be under the control of the Cabinet Office
Briefing Room (COBR) as platinum command. Under the 2003 Communications Act, COBR
260
Summary
can order the shut down of mobile phone networks and therefore communication plans should
not rely on them, for example for calling in extra hospital staff. Most explosive incidents in the
UK will trigger a declaration of a major incident.
SCENE CONSIDERATIONS
The scene of a blast will be under the control of the police incident commander.
Pre-hospital practitioners should be aware that terrorists are familiar with emergency service
standard operating procedures and might plan a secondary device aimed at responders. This tactic
was used in the 1975 Warrenpoint ambush where the secondary device killed 12 soldiers, more
than the 6 killed by the primary IED (28). Triage will probably have to occur at the scene with
distribution of casualties to several hospitals to avoid overwhelming a single facility’s resources.
In all cases involving blast, command and control of the scene will be essential. Not only is
there a potential for a large number of casualties from an explosive incident, but each one may have
extremely complex poly-trauma requiring significant resources, and there is likely to be a significant
level of concern over safety with the risk of building collapse or a secondary device. The horrific
nature of the injuries is likely to further increase the stress on rescuers, clinicians and victims alike.
TREATMENT STRATEGIES
The aim of immediate treatment is to preserve life and to facilitate future reconstruction and
rehabilitation. In practice this is focused on treating haemorrhage and preventing infection.
HAEMORRHAGE CONTROL AND RESUSCITATION

Pre-hospital management follows the <C>ABCDE process. Initially attention must be focused
on extremity haemorrhage control with the use of tourniquets in the event of traumatic ampu-
tation or severe bleeding from lacerations. Multiple superficial fragment wounds do not require
immediate management. Intravenous or intraosseous access (which may be particularly useful
where there is limb loss) must be obtained and fluid replacement, ideally with blood products
commenced. Transfer to hospital must not be delayed. The pre-hospital phase of management
is part of a continuum of damage control principles (29). Treatment for primary blast injury
is rarely required at scene, and careful attention to maintaining a patent airway and effective
ventilation are central to management. Penetrating injury may result from high-energy frag-
ments akin to bullet wounds, but the majority of fragment wounds will be superficial. Injuries
due to translocation of the body by the blast wind are managed in the same way as conven-
tional blunt injuries.
It is hard to exaggerate the degree of contamination in blast wounds. Explosions can drive
fragments, debris, foliage, items of clothing and even tissue from other blast victims deep along
tissue planes. If possible, antibiotics should therefore be administered as soon as possible in the
pre-hospital setting (30).
SUMMARY
Blast injuries are often dramatic, with amputation and devastating soft tissue injuries being
relatively common. It is essential that clinicians are not distracted by these injuries, but with
261
Blast injuries
a knowledge of how blast effects the human body, simply concentrate on the management of
those injuries which are potentially life threatening. Particular attention must be paid to control
of exsanguinating haemorrhage and the <C>ABCDE system followed without deviation.
REFERENCES
1. Motley JL. The United Netherlands: History from the Death of William the Silent to the Twelve
Years’ Truce – 1609. [S.l.]: John Murray, 1904.
2. Penn-Barwell JG, Bishop JRB, Roberts S, Midwinter M. Injuries and outcomes: UK
military casualties from Iraq and Afghanistan 2003–2012. Bone and Joint Journal 2013;95B
(Supp 26):1.
3. Owens BD, Kragh JF, Jr., Wenke JC, Macaitis J, Wade CE, Holcomb JB. Combat wounds
in operation Iraqi Freedom and operation Enduring Freedom. Journal of Trauma
2008;64(2):295–299.
4. Jackson DS. Sepsis in soft tissue limbs wounds in soldiers injured during the Falklands
Campaign 1982. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps 1984;130(2):97–99.
5. Hardaway RM 3rd. Viet Nam wound analysis. Journal of Trauma 1978;18(9):635–643.
6. Reister FA. Battle Casualties and Medical Statistics: U.S. Army Experience in the Korean War.
Washington, DC: Surgeon General, 1973.
7. Ramasamy A, Hill AM, Clasper JC. Improvised explosive devices: Pathophysiology,
injury profiles and current medical management. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps
2009;155(4):265–272.
8. Biddinger PD, Baggish A, Harrington L, d’Hemecourt P, Hooley J, Jones J, Kue R,
Troyanos C, Dyer KS. Be prepared—The Boston Marathon and mass-casualty events.
New England Journal of Medicine 2013;368(21):1958–1960.
9. Sollid SJ, Rimstad R, Rehn M, Nakstad AR, Tomlinson AE, Strand T, Heimdal HJ,
Nilsen JE, Sandberg M. Oslo government district bombing and Utoya island shoot-
ing July 22, 2011: The immediate prehospital emergency medical service response.
Scandinavian Journal of Trauma, Resuscitation and Emergency Medicine 2012;20(1):3.
10. Aylwin CJ, Konig TC, Brennan NW, Shirley PJ, Davies G, Walsh MS, Brohi K.
Reduction in critical mortality in urban mass casualty incidents: Analysis of tri-
age, surge, and resource use after the London bombings on July 7, 2005. Lancet
2006;368(9554):2219–2225.
11. Turegano-Fuentes F, Caba-Doussoux P, Jover-Navalon JM, Martin-Perez E, Fernandez-
Luengas D, Diez-Valladares L, Perez-Diaz D et al. Injury patterns from major urban
terrorist bombings in trains: The Madrid experience. World Journal of Surgery
2008;32(6):1168–1175.
12. Torkki M, Koljonen V, Sillanpaa K, Tukianinen E, Pyorala S, Kemppainen E, Kalske J,
Arajarvi E, Keranen U. Triage in a bomb disaster with 166 casualties. European Journal of
Trauma 2006;32(4):374–380.
13. Potter SJ, Carter GE. The Omagh bombing—A medical perspective. Journal of the Royal
Army Medical Corps 2000;146(1):18–21.
14. Mallonee S, Shariat S, Stennies G, Waxweiler R, Hogan D, Jordan F. Physical injuries
and fatalities resulting from the Oklahoma City bombing. JAMA 1996;276(5):382–387.
15. Taylor G. The formation of a blast wave by a very intense explosion I. Theoretical dis-
cussion. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A: Mathematical and Physical Sciences
1950;201(1065):159–174.
262
References
16. Owen-Smith MS. High Velocity Missile Wounds. London: Edward Arnold, 1981.
17. Chapman CW. Burns and plastic surgery in the South Atlantic campaign 1982. Journal of
the Royal Naval Medical Service 1983;69(2):71–79.
18. Guy RJ, Kirkman E, Watkins PE, Cooper GJ. Physiologic responses to primary blast.
Journal of Trauma 1998;45(6):983–987.
19. Ritenour AE, Baskin TW. Primary blast injury: Update on diagnosis and treatment.
Critical Care Medicine 2008;36(7 Suppl):S311–S317.
20. Guy RJ, Glover MA, Cripps NP. The pathophysiology of primary blast injury and its
implications for treatment. Part I: The thorax. Journal of the Royal Naval Medical Service
1998;84(2):79–86.
21. Mellor SG, Cooper GJ. Analysis of 828 servicemen killed or injured by explosion in
Northern Ireland 1970–84: The Hostile Action Casualty System. British Journal of Surgery
1989;76(10):1006–1010.
22. Ritenour AE, Blackbourne LH, Kelly JF, McLaughlin DF, Pearse LA, Holcomb JB, Wade
CE. Incidence of primary blast injury in US military overseas contingency operations:
A retrospective study. Annals of Surgery 2010;251(6):1140–1144.
23. Huller T, Bazini Y. Blast injuries of the chest and abdomen. Archives of Surgery
1970;100(1):24–30.
24. Mellor SG. The pathogenesis of blast injury and its management. British Journal of
Hospital Medicine 1988;39(6):536–539.
25. Hill JF. Blast injury with particular reference to recent terrorist bombing incidents.
Annals of the Royal College of Surgeons of England 1979;61(1):4–11.
26. Hull JB, Cooper GJ. Pattern and mechanism of traumatic amputation by explosive blast.
Journal of Trauma 1996;40(3 Suppl):S198–S205.
27. Singleton JAG, Gibb IE, Bull AMJ, Clasper JC. Blast-mediated traumatic amputation:
Evidence suggesting a new injury mechanism. Bone and Joint Journal 2014;96B(Suppl 9):1.
28. Edwards A. The Northern Ireland Troubles: Operation Banner, 1969–2007. Oxford: Osprey,
2011.
29. Midwinter MJ. Damage control surgery in the era of damage control resuscitation.
Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps 2009;155(4):323–326.
30. Penn-Barwell JG, Murray CK, Wenke JC. Early antibiotics and debridement indepen-
dently reduce infection in an open fracture model. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery British
Volume 2012;94(1):107–112.
263
Trauma management in
the austere pre-hospital
22 environment
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the concept of austerity as applied to trauma management

▪▪ Be aware of the constraints an austere environment places on the management of the
trauma victim
▪▪ Be able to plan a trauma response appropriate to an austere operating environment
INTRODUCTION
In the United Kingdom and developed world, we are increasingly comforted by the protec-
tion of a robust pre-hospital care system. An ambulance, fully equipped and staffed by highly
trained paramedics, is never far away, more often than not backed up by a helicopter-borne
critical care service. Unfortunately, timely, excellent care for the ill and injured is not ubiqui-
tous. Many states lack the finances or infrastructure to provide medical services even in key
urban areas, and in remote parts there may be no professional help coming. Other areas are so
remote that even with the full support and funding of government, the pre-hospital phase can
be prolonged: even in the direst emergency and under perfect conditions, a patient from the
British Antarctic Survey base at Halley (located 75°35′S, 26°39′W) is 12 hours from an operat-
ing theatre (1).
Trauma, on the other hand, is universal. Road deaths account for 1.24 million people a year
worldwide (91% occurring in low- or middle-income countries) and as many as 50 million
people are injured (2). Trauma is the ninth leading cause of death worldwide and a greater cause
of mortality than malaria. Thus there is a pressing need for those working in austere environ-
ments to understand how to deliver the best trauma care with the resources available.
264
What is austerity in the medical context?
WHAT IS AUSTERITY IN THE MEDICAL CONTEXT?

Austerity conjures images of hostile climates and scarce population, but in medical terms it
simply means that resources are limited. Resource-constrained is an equivalent term. Austere
environments can include:
• Remote expedition environments such as a jungle, mountain or desert.

• Conflict environments such as Syria and Afghanistan.
• Rural communities with difficult access routes and vehicle availability in developing
countries such as Sierra Leone, Sudan and Central African Republic.
• Rural communities with difficult access in developed countries such as the Scottish Highlands.
• The humanitarian disaster environment where there has been disruption to normal
healthcare infrastructure and personnel.
• Any environment with a lack of skilled healthcare workers and resources.
The implication is that in these environments access to one or more key resources will be
limited. In terms of pre-hospital trauma care, these constraints tend to fall into three broad
domains: capability, capacity and access. These domains may be chronically limited – for
example in a less economically developed country (LEDC) where total spending on health-
care and infrastructure is a small proportion of a tiny gross domestic product and there have
been decades of underfunding or degradation from conflict. Alternatively, resources may be
acutely reduced after natural disasters such as earthquake and flooding, or because of a sudden
increase in population at risk, for example in the case of a large refugee population moving into
the area, fleeing a conflict elsewhere. Expeditions may be limited by what personnel can carry,
use and purchase whilst in the field.
CAPABILITY
The capability of medical services is dependent on several factors, any or all of which may be
limited in an austere environment. Components include equipment (including drugs and con-
sumables with potential for resupply), personnel and their level of training, and the secondary
care capability in the area.
EQUIPMENT
Medical equipment is expensive and in resource-poor areas there may be significant constraints
on both what can be afforded and what is available for purchase even if there are funds. There is
often lack of funding available to maintain equipment, purchase replacement parts or develop
the skills to implement repairs. Once broken, equipment may remain unserviceable, perma-
nently reducing capacity or even capability.
Equipment must be transported and so the scaling that can be taken to the patient depends
on whether it needs to be man-portable or is vehicle delivered. The latter will also depend on
the availability and capability of the transport platform.
There is no generic list of equipment that should be available for trauma management in the
pre-hospital environment, although recommendations and minimum standards are suggested
for trauma care in general (3).
Ideally, infection control measures mandate single-use items, but in resource-poor envi-
ronments these may not be practical, as the number needed along with the space taken up by
265
Trauma management in the austere pre-hospital environment
individual packaging may be prohibitive. Reusable equipment is often more robustly designed
which also suits the environment, though this often also means heavier and bulkier. Resupply
needs to be considered – turnaround time is longer if there is no simple off-the-shelf replace-
ment or a period of sterilisation is required.
Disposal of single-use equipment, packaging and waste or sharps is also important. Many
areas will not have dedicated facilities for processing these by-products. Adequate sharps bins
and clinical waste bags must be built into the stock carried and resupply options.
Locally sourced drugs may vary considerably in availability, quality and cost. Imported sup-
plies are likely to be much more expensive and resupply opportunities less frequent. Medical
gases may be available in canisters, but the weight and bulk soon becomes an issue without
good transport. Oxygen concentrators are becoming smaller and cheaper but suffer from simi-
lar constraints, as well as the need for a reliable power supply. Single-use chemical oxygen gen-
erators are also becoming more widely available.
TRAINED PERSONNEL
Medical personnel are often in critically limited supply, both in terms of their absolute num-
bers, and in terms of their specialist training. In Sierra Leone in 2010 there were 0.03 physi-
cians per 1000 population, compared to 2.7 in the UK (3 per capita) (4) – as a result in 2008
there were only five anaesthetists in total across ten government hospitals. Where resources
are stretched so thin, generalism is a valued commodity – any surgeon will be expected to
be able to perform basic general, obstetric and orthopaedic procedures. Conversely there
will be very limited access to specialist surgeons and so to more complex definitive proce-
dures. The same Sierra Leone study found that at that time a chest drain could be placed at
60% of the hospitals, an open fracture managed at 80% and a laparotomy performed at only
20% (5).
SECONDARY CARE
The capability of the secondary care network is critical to understanding the level of pre-
hospital care that should be provided. The pre-hospital delivery of trauma care is rarely defini-
tive; it is a bridge, preventing or minimising deterioration of the patient’s condition until they
can be transported to a higher echelon. A severe head injury, retrieved within 30 minutes,
intubated, resuscitated and with ongoing sedation requirements cannot be managed in a local
hospital that has neither surgeons, a CT scanner, nor an intensive therapy unit (ITU). Without
adequate secondary care support, pre-hospital care becomes futile at best; a distraction and
waste of scarce resources at worst (6,7). Any attempt to provide pre-hospital care in a remote
or austere environment needs to be planned carefully in the light of these constraints. The
level of care that can be provided is rarely limited in these environments by the skill set of
the practitioner; far more common it is the logistical issues surrounding the availability and
transport of equipment, or the duration of travel to a higher level of care that limits what can
reasonably be done.
PRACTICE POINT
The level of pre-hospital care must be congruent with the available secondary care receiving
facilities.
266
What is austerity in the medical context?
Constraining factors other than resources include cultural and political issues. The care that
is delivered must be culturally acceptable and the practitioner should be mindful of the com-
plexities around, for example, the treatment of an unaccompanied woman by a Western male
team in Afghanistan.
CAPACITY
Even where the capability exists, the capacity of the system may be critically inadequate.
Occasionally this can occur even in developed urban settings (for example during epidemics or
a major incident) but is usually limited in duration and rarely has a major impact on the delivery
of care. In resource-poor areas, such capacity issues may be chronic and severe, as evidenced by
the fact that the only 3.5% of surgical procedures occur in the poorest third of the world (8). In
some areas of South Africa, residents describe ambulances as almost non-existent or arriving
hours after patients have died (7).
These chronic problems may be dramatically worsened when many patients present with a simi-
lar illness or mechanism of injury, for example large numbers of crush injuries after large earth-
quakes or fragmentation wounds after a large explosion. Because these patients are all competing
for the same limited resources, pinch points in the system such as operating theatres become critical.
Where problems affect the wider populace (such as the cholera outbreak in Haiti or people
fleeing a village during a conflict), the intrinsic medical infrastructure (probably already weak-
ened by the situation) will struggle to cope with the increased demand across all specialties; the
simple numbers of beds, staff and basic drugs become the issue. Finally there will be conflicting
demands on non-medical assets and infrastructure (communications and transport assets in
particular), which may exacerbate pre-existing shortages.
In the context of medical support to expeditions or military operations, the capacity should be
clearly defined before setting off. Sadly, because of poor planning – particularly on expeditions –
the limited capacity for a given treatment is often not discovered until the drugs start to run low.
ACCESS
DISTANCE
The nearest medical resource, be it first responder, ambulance or medical facility, may be some
distance away. In the United States the average distance to hospital for an urban resident is only
5.5 miles, rising to 35.9 miles for people in rural areas (9). In a Kenyan study, 66% of accident vic-
tims reached a hospital within an hour (10). In Sierra Leone distances between hospitals can be in
excess of 200 km; while the majority of surgical patients there have to travel less than 80 km to get
to a hospital, the state of the roads means that in some cases even this journey can take days (5).
INFRASTRUCTURE AND TRANSPORT PLATFORMS

The patient’s location and ease of access to that location will determine the required level of
transport capability for a particular situation. While in the UK this is usually a smooth road
easily covered by a standard ambulance; in other areas it may need to be a modified 4 × 4
vehicle, helicopter or even boat. Even if a platform is available, limited fuel supply, maintenance
and parts may restrict its use.
Communications infrastructure is also critical. A delayed call will inevitably result in
delayed arrival of medical assistance. In developing countries where the onus is usually on the
267
patient’s family or good Samaritans to transport them, pre-hospital times for fractured femurs
in one study in four low-income countries averaged 6 days (10,11).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Access to remote areas when weather is poor (for example during the monsoon) may be espe-
cially difficult. Air support is often equally limited. In extreme examples, areas may become
completely inaccessible, preventing any access to additional healthcare facilities. Evacuation
from the British Antarctic Survey base at Halley is impossible for over 5 months of the year (1).
SECURITY AND CONFLICT

Health workers and patients are particularly vulnerable in areas of conflict or where secu-
rity is limited or absent. Recent examples include hospitals being targeted in Syria, and polio
immunisation teams executed in Pakistan (12,13). The International Committee of the Red
Cross (ICRC) specifically recognises the risk to healthcare workers in such regions (14).
Purposeful deprivation of health resources has been seen as a strategy in various conflicts,
and while internationally condemned, is difficult to overcome politically (12,15). Even if facil-
ities and staff are not overtly targeted, healthcare provision can be made harder through a
variety of administrative means (restricted access to visas, control of movement through check-
points, etc.). Thus the freedom to provide pre-hospital care is intricately linked to the cultural
and political situation on the ground.
STRATEGIES FOR DELIVERY OF GOOD PRE-HOSPITAL CARE

IN AUSTERE ENVIRONMENTS
PLANNING
In order to effectively plan a pre-hospital function in an austere environment, the mission
needs to be clearly defined. Whether an enduring service, expecting to manage many casualties
over a period of time, or a ‘one-shot’ capability such as to provide cover for a brief expedition,
the problem can be broken down into several parts (see Box 22.1).
BOX 22.1: Key Planning Questions

▪▪ What is the population at risk?
▪▪ What spectrum of conditions will be managed and for how long? How will resupply take place?
▪▪ Where is the next level of care, and what is the ceiling of care that can be provided there? How
far away is it?
▪▪ What platform will transport the team and casualty, and how long does it take to get to the next
level of care?
▪▪ How much treatment can be done in one episode before resupply?
▪▪ How will the response be activated?
▪▪ How do I guarantee the safety of the team?
▪▪ Do I need additional non-medical facilitators?
268
Strategies for delivery of good pre-hospital care in austere environments
WHAT IS THE REMIT OF MY SERVICE?

Will the service be supporting a specified group (for example an expedition) or will it be avail-
able to all comers? Will the service or facility be working alone (expedition) or at the request of
the host nation as a small part of the multi-national response to a disaster? These questions are
fundamental to understanding the mission and need to be answered in as much detail as pos-
sible. They impact every aspect of the planning process, from the visas and paperwork allowing
entry to the country through to the list of drugs carried, and the communications network and
command and control structure that co-ordinate pre-hospital care.
PRACTICE POINT
Clarity regarding eligibility for care, and hence the scope of the service to be provided, is abso-
lutely essential.
WHAT SPECTRUM OF CONDITIONS WILL BE MANAGED AND FOR

HOW LONG? HOW WILL RESUPPLY TAKE PLACE?
It is unusual to be asked to provide a service for trauma victims alone, even if, for example
after an earthquake, this appears to be the thrust of the intervention. It is essential there-
fore that clinicians and organisers are aware of the other likely presenting problems and be
prepared and able to manage them. Effective plans must be in place to replace drugs and
consumables.
WHERE IS THE NEXT LEVEL OF CARE, AND WHAT IS THE CEILING

OF CARE THAT CAN BE PROVIDED THERE? HOW FAR AWAY IS IT?
There is no point delivering a level of care that exceeds the capability of the next echelon –
intubation of a head-injured patient before delivery to a hospital that has no CT scanner, neu-
rosurgical capability or ITU is futile. Where pre-hospital critical care interventions are feasible
because they are appropriate to the local secondary care facilities, then the resources needed to
support them must be calculated. Oxygen, power for ventilators and drugs to maintain seda-
tion in particular become limiting factors in the prolonged transfer of such patients.
WHAT PLATFORM WILL TRANSPORT THE TEAM AND CASUALTY,

AND HOW LONG DOES IT TAKE TO GET TO THE NEXT LEVEL OF CARE?
As already noted this determines the amount of equipment that can be transported, how far
and how quickly. This in turn constrains what interventions can be undertaken and the amount
of consumables needed to perform them.
HOW MUCH TREATMENT CAN BE DONE IN ONE EPISODE BEFORE

RESUPPLY?
In particular, this limits the flexibility of the system to respond to multiple casualties or to
attend consecutive incidents without returning to base. This is largely a logistical issue in terms
of the quantity of consumables carried.
269
HOW WILL THE RESPONSE BE ACTIVATED?

The method of activation will impact on time to dispatch, and will also impact on workload
and effectiveness. If calls come from multiple sources without a reliable screening mechanism
(‘intelligent tasking’) then there is little control over whether the resource is deployed appropri-
ately (16). High-level pre-hospital care interventions are only of benefit if they are given to the
small percentage of trauma patients that actually need them.
HOW DO I GUARANTEE THE SAFETY OF THE TEAM?

Given that medical care will be harder to provide in an austere environment, it is essential that all
reasonable precautions are taken to look after all members of the team. This personal preparation –
from fitness, control of ongoing medical conditions and vaccinations before deployment, through
to hydration, rest and safe food during the deployment – is critical. The wider political and social
context also impacts on the ability of personnel to move safely around the area.
DO I NEED ADDITIONAL NON-MEDICAL FACILITATORS?

Drivers, guides and translators also provide local and cultural knowledge, security and situ-
ational awareness that may be essential to the safe and effective provision of care. In some
cases these roles may be fulfilled by a single person; in others when operating as part of a wider
network there may be larger numbers of locals involved in a variety of roles.
UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT JOURNEY

When the transfer time is prolonged and resources are limited, care must be taken to deliver
care efficiently. A good example of this is in the use of analgesia. In order to make the patient
as comfortable as possible, and yet also conserve resources, careful mapping of the anticipated
analgesic needs against the journey to the next echelon of care is critical. For the purposes
of planning, the journey can be broken down by how permissive the situation is – a military
concept regarding enemy activity, which can be extended to imply whether the environment is
amenable to safe intervention or whether it is less than ideal (semi-permissive) or overtly dan-
gerous (non-permissive). Periods of high or low medical activity – assessment or intervention
(such as analgesic demands) – can then be laid over this environmental timeline. This allows
the practitioner to plan ahead and modify either the sequence of tasks or the method chosen to
best complete them in order to best suit the needs of the patient and the situation.
To demonstrate these principles we will return to the Halley Antarctic scenario and an over-
turned vehicle. Initially the patient is inaccessible (wedged upside down inside a vehicle) but in
a warm, sheltered environment. It is semi-permissive at best – intervention is difficult but the
patient is in no immediate danger from the environment. Once the patient is removed from the
vehicle, the rescuers have 360-degree access making interventions easier, but the temperature
is –10°C and an immediate risk to both casualty and rescuer; a non-permissive environment.
If a tent could be erected as work to extricate the patient progressed, then they could be moved
to a warm, sheltered environment with 360-degree access; in other words, a more permissive
environment. However, once the patient has been stabilised, they face a 2-hour journey in the
back of a cramped vehicle with poor light; again, semi-permissive at best. When they reach
a warm, well-lit base, then the environment becomes permissive again, until transfer to the
plane to fly out.
270
Individual components of care
Now overlay the periods of demand. The extrication from a semi-permissive environment
may require fast-acting analgesia or sedation. If the patient is relatively easy to access, then
intravenous access is ideal. If only the upper torso can be reached, then an intraosseous needle
(sternal or humeral) might be the only accessible option. If no part of the patient can be easily
reached and pain control is a priority, then intranasal (e.g. fentanyl) or inhaled agents (entonox,
methoxyflurane) might be ideal initial options. Intravenously, fentanyl or ketamine might be
preferred agents because of their rapid onset and relative cardiovascular stability. All of these
options allow almost immediate progression to extrication.
Once the patient has been extricated to the tent, then there is time for a longer acting anal-
gesic to be administered (such as IV morphine) as additional access is secured. While a tent is
not an ideal situation to perform many medical procedures, those that need to be done within
the next 2 hours should be done now. It will be impossible to do anything more than the most
basic care during the next stage of the trip. The philosophy of treat then transfer is appropriate
when treat during transfer is impossible. Primary survey interventions and resuscitation should
be followed by reduction and splintage of the limbs if needed and thorough precautions against
hypothermia. If the patient needs to micturate, now is the time! Top-up analgesia will be pos-
sible later but not easy, so oral analgesics should be given for their long duration of action, and
additional IV analgesia drawn-up and labelled ready to give. The same is true for IV fluids. If
appropriate forethought has taken place, then the 2-hour trip to base should now be comfort-
able, warm and require minimal additional intervention.
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS OF CARE

In this section we consider some adaptations to standard techniques, equipment or drugs that
may be more suitable in some austere environments.
ANAESTHESIA AND AIRWAY MAINTENANCE

Pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia requires a specialist skill set and ideally an array of equip-
ment to cover a range of eventualities. Rendering a breathing patient apnoeic in the pre-hospital
arena is dangerous, especially if environmental conditions are difficult (cold, dark, cramped,
noisy). It should be performed with a trained assistant, oxygen saturations, waveform ETCO2
monitoring, non-invasive blood pressure and ECG (17). The necessary drugs (especially muscle
relaxants) degrade and so an effective cold chain and resupply mechanism is critical to main-
taining their efficacy. In very austere environments the risks and logistical constraints of pre-
hospital emergency anaesthesia will often outweigh the benefits of a spontaneously breathing
patient without a secured airway; simpler options such as a nasopharyngeal airway and left
lateral positioning may be preferred, and a clear and consistent policy should be in place.
Where pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia is necessary and appropriate, every effort should
be made to ensure success at the first attempt and so adequate pre-oxygenation, use of a bou-
gie, careful positioning and effective teamwork with the assistant are essential.
Failed intubation drills are likely to be simple, for example a supraglottic airway or even
direct progression to cricothyroidotomy, as stocking a wide range of additional difficult airway
equipment is simply not feasible.
Cricothyroidotomy can be done awake, without paralysis, and by a lone practitioner and has
the highest success rate when performed using an open technique (18). These surgical airways
may even prove a valuable first line in carefully selected patients in austere environments where
271
there are not the skills, equipment or ability to maintain an anaesthetic. Those with significant
facial injuries/burns and airway compromise could potentially be managed spontaneously by
ventilating with local anaesthetic, a scalpel and a cuffed tube.
BREATHING
Oxygen delivery is difficult and relies on either cylinder supply (large and heavy), concentrators
(electrically driven, bulky and low flow) or manufacture units (costly chemical process, single
use such as the O2Pak™). As a result, it is usually in short supply. Thus high-flow oxygen will
be used much more sparingly in an austere environment than would be the UK norm. What
little there is can be made to go further with specialist low-resistance reservoir bag systems
which maximise inspired oxygen for a given flow rate (for example Topox™), but these are
considerably more expensive than standard systems.
Mechanical ventilation will rely on either relatively unrestricted gas supply or electricity,
and ventilators are usually bulky. There have been attempts to manufacture ventilators that
resolve these issues and some companies now provide lightweight, multiple-use non-electrical
ventilators. The Sure-vent 2™, for example, is a disposable plastic ventilator allowing multiple
uses of the same device with different patients and with no need for electrical power.
If a ventilator is not feasible, then manual ventilation via bag–valve–mask (BVM) may
need to continue for long periods. While such use of manpower is intensive, it is sometimes
advantageous in the difficult pre-hospital environment; there is immediate tactile feedback –
disconnection results in immediate loss of resistance and increasing pressures can also be felt
easily. On the back of a dark, vibrating, noisy moving platform, these cues will be far more eas-
ily detected than alarms on a mechanical ventilator.
Other breathing interventions remain largely as normal in UK practice. In areas of conflict
where rates of penetrating chest injury are high it is prudent to also carry commercial chest
seals (Russell™, Bolin™) for open pneumothoraces rather than having to improvise one on
scene.
CIRCULATION – ACCESS
Intravenous access remains the gold standard for the delivery of fluids and drugs pre-hospital
no matter how challenging the environment. Emergency access can be achieved easily and
quickly by less skilled personnel with the use of intraosseous access. However these systems
are usually heavier and bulkier than simple cannulae (powered units in particular tend to be
larger) and are only licensed for use for up to 24 hours. Whatever technique is used, it must still
be performed in as aseptic a manner as possible (or if placed in an emergency, exchanged as
early as practical for an aseptically placed means of access) and extremely well secured.
RESUSCITATION FLUIDS AND STRATEGIES

In the context of non-compressible truncal trauma in particular, UK practice has moved towards
a model of limited pre-hospital fluid administration. There is considerable evidence that early
normotensive resuscitation with crystalloids in these patients is harmful (19,20). However
these approaches have been shown to be time-limited options, harmful if maintained for long
periods, leading to the concept of novel hybrid resuscitation (21). Permissive hypotension for
the first hour after injury is beneficial – only giving boluses of fluids to maintain a degree
of hypotension (for example to a radial pulse). This strategy is not acceptable in all patient
groups – being inappropriate in head injuries and paediatric trauma in particular.
272
Individual components of care
Furthermore it has been proven harmful if a more normal blood pressure is not re-established
within 2 hours (21). So after this first hour fluids will have to be given to maintain end organ
perfusion (indicated for example by adequate urine output) accepting that bleeding is still not
definitively controlled and that some additional coagulaopathy may result.
One intervention that has been shown to be of clear value in this setting is tranexamic
acid, which is cheap and easy to carry and should be administered to all patients considered
at risk of significant bleeding or shock (22). Freeze-dried blood products such as lyophi-
lised plasma (e.g. Lyoplas™) are increasingly available, and may have a role in some specific
circumstances.
Combining strategies like hybrid resuscitation with newer fluid options could provide a
novel solution to an endemically challenging problem, particularly in LEDCs, where resuscita-
tion timelines are longer and access to gold standard products is constrained by cost.
DISABILITY
Cervical spine immobilisation has become a staple of pre-hospital care in the Western world
over the last 30 years. More recently, concerns have been mounting around the number of
patients who are immobilised unnecessarily for the benefit of the very few who have significant
spinal injuries (23). Some patients may also come to harm as a result of spinal immobilisation.
There can be no doubt that immobilisation can be very uncomfortable if prolonged and once
the decision has been taken to apply it, practitioners may be reluctant to remove it. Conscious
co-operative patients without major distracting injuries can be encouraged to self-extricate and
settle themselves down for further evaluation. Then rules such as the NEXUS or Canadian
C-Spine Rules can be applied before taking the decision to apply formal immobilisation. Even
if these non-specific decision rules are positive, in the truly austere or isolated environment,
the increased difficulty in managing and transporting the patient may outweigh the very small
risk of an unsecured spine and large studies in the past have shown no evidence of harm from
such a strategy (24).
ENVIRONMENTAL
In an attempt to reduce the impact of fixed constraints from the environment, those that can be
modified need to be aggressively managed. One of these is temperature. There are many single-
use warming systems available for field use, which have been proven to be effective in mili-
tary settings (such as HPMK™ and Blizzard™). Techniques such as splintage and transfer by
stretcher are low-tech and largely independent of the level of resource in the area. Particularly
with prolonged evacuation times, great care must be taken to ensure that the patient is com-
fortable, well padded at all contact or pressure points, and kept warm during transfer. This has
a huge impact on analgesic requirements but also minimises further bleeding and injury.
ANALGESIA
Well-described concepts such as the analgesic ladder are just as effective in austere environ-
ments, but consideration should also be given to onset time, duration and route. Combining
these concepts (as previously illustrated) will maximise patient comfort, particularly during
challenging phases such as extrication and transport. All routes of administration may have a
role, but intranasal, inhalational, intraosseous and rectal are probably neglected, with the focus
on oral and intravenous administration seen in UK practice.
273
Step 3
Strong opioid
Pain persisting for moderate
or increasing to severe pain
(e.g. morphine)
Step 2 +/− non-opioid
Weak opioid +/− adjuvant
Pain persisting for mild to
or increasing moderate pain
(e.g. codeine)
Step 1 +/− non-opioid
+/− adjuvant
Non-opioid
(e.g. aspirin,
paracetamol
or NSAID)
+/− adjuvant
Pain controlled
Figure 22.1 The analgesic ladder.
Agents should be selected to maximise the options in terms of analgesic strategies, so that
fast-acting, high-efficacy agents as well as longer-acting agents need to be carried, covering the
spectra of duration and potency. Local anaesthesia may also have a role in prolonged evacu-
ation from, for example, remote expeditions, and the impact that adequate pain relief has on
mobility should never be underestimated. A well-placed haematoma block after a fall while
mountaineering has allowed climbers with splinted fractures to the upper limb to climb/ski
themselves off the hill – averting an otherwise challenging rescue attempt (Figure 22.1).
PROLONGED FIELD CARE

As evacuation times become longer, more and more patient needs will become evident beyond
normal trauma and critical care management. There are many ways to think of these, but a
basic strategy is called HITMAN (25) (Box 22.2).
BOX 22.2: HITMAN
H Hydration – IV or oral fluids.

Hygiene – Plan for the patients’ need to micturate and defaecate. Consider how best to
keep the patient clean.
I Infection – Antibiotics, wound cleaning and dressing (including changes). Check cannula-
tion sites regularly for signs of erythema.
Monitor contact areas, and exclude compartment syndrome.
T Tubes – Ensure they are secured and protected, but also whether they are necessary given
the fact that they are a high septic focus risk. Consider urethral catheterisation.
Temperature control – Both monitoring for fever and avoiding hypothermia.
M Medication – Beyond simply analgesics and antibiotics. Does the patient need antiemetics
or their own regular medicines (for example antimalarials)?
A Analgesia
N Nutrition – Ensure adequate nutrition if they are able to eat.
Notes – Document thoroughly.
274
Summary
THE DISASTER ENVIRONMENT

There is increasing interest in the standards of medical care provided following a disaster, such
as the Haiti earthquake or Typhoon Haiyan. Any community affected by a disaster should
receive a minimum standard of health provision even in the event of extensive infrastructural,
human and logistical damage. Pre-hospital teams from the wider international community
may comprise part of any effort to assist with meeting these basic healthcare needs.
Although very much environmental and location dependent, the healthcare systems of
many affected countries are significantly degraded immediately following a sudden onset
disaster. There is not only structural damage to health facilities, but also disruption to water,
power, logistics and access – all of which will influence the functioning integrity of an indi-
vidual health facility and the national health system. This will often also be compounded
by a reduction in available healthcare workers, either directly through injury and deaths, or
loss of relatives, housing and other personal affects which limit their ability to continue in
their work. If the disaster hits an already resource-constrained environment, such as Haiti,
then the impact on community health provision is even more significant. Injury patterns and
health needs will vary after different disasters and over time following the disaster. Common
immediate health needs after an earthquake or typhoon include traumatic injuries (in particu-
lar wounds and limb injuries), which require triage, resuscitation, surgery and postoperative
care. Days and weeks after the disaster, health needs change; communicable diseases and
vector-borne diseases increase, and malnutrition and exacerbation of chronic disease become
more prevalent.
Medical care during a disaster is likely to be delivered by both local and international
providers. Collaboration between the two is fundamental. In these circumstances, the most
effective method of healthcare delivery by far is local clinicians within local health systems,
strengthened as needed by external resources. Where international medical teams are needed
(and invited), they must work with the local health authorities and integrate within the health
cluster to target those needs identified by the disaster-affected country.
These teams must be self-sufficient in order not to draw on the already stretched resources
of the affected country. Ideally this means that they should come complete with logistical sup-
port including vehicle(s) and fuel; they should bring their own habitat, medical equipment and
resupply. They should be able to manage their own water and sanitation needs. Alongside
their equipment, they clearly must have the skills both to deliver the relevant medical capabil-
ity and to look after themselves. Ideally this should involve specific training in humanitarian
principles, team-focused training and foreign medical team standards. Finally, they must have
adequate experience and information to facilitate effective decision-making in the context of
the local community and culture, and the resources available. An ideal starting point for the
development of such experience is the UK International Emergency Trauma Register (UKIETR),
which seeks to identify interested professionals and direct them to appropriate training (26).
SUMMARY
Austere environments provide unique challenges for pre-hospital trauma care. By their very
nature these settings limit some or all of the resources available to the practitioners and
so require imagination and flexibility to make the most of what is available. Planning and
275
forethought become essential tools. To achieve the greatest effect, the individual or team
requires a deep understanding of the environment, the people, the geography and the society
in which they will operate, as well as the non-clinical skills to ensure they can function in that
environment safely, comfortably and effectively.
REFERENCES
1. Marquis P, British Antarctic Survey Medical Unit Manager, Personal communication,
December 2013.
2. World Health Organisation. Media centre factsheets. July 2013. http://www.who.int
/mediacentre/factsheets/fs310/en/.
3. World Health Organization. Guidelines for essential trauma care. 2004. http://www
.who.int/violence_injury_prevention/publications/services/guidelines_traumacare/en/.
4. The World Bank. World Development Indicators databank, Physicians per 1000 popula-
tion. http://databank.worldbank.org/data/views/reports/tableview.aspx.
5. Kingham TP, Kamara T, Cherian M, Gosselin RA, Simkins M, Meissner C, Foray-Rahall L,
Daoh KS, Kabia SA, Kushner AL. Quantifying surgical capacity in Sierra Leone.
Archives of Surgery 2009;144(2):122–127.
6. Eisenburg MF, Christie M, Mathew P. Battlefield neurosurgical care in the current con-
flict in southern Afghanistan. Neurosurgical Focus 2010;28(5):E7.
7. Sun JH, Shing R, Twomey M, Wallis LA. A strategy to implement and support pre-
hospital emergency medical systems in developing, resource-constrained areas of South
Africa. Injury 2014;45:31–38.
8. Bickler SW, Spiegel DA. Global surgery – Defining a research agenda. Lancet 2008;372:
90–92.
9. Nallamothu BK, Bates ER, Wang Y. Driving times and distances to hospitals with percu-
taneous coronary intervention in the United States. Circulation 2006;113:1189–1195.
10. Macharia WM, Njeru EK, Muli-Musiime F, Nantulya V. Severe road traffic injuries in
Kenya, quality of care and access. African Health Science 2009;9(2):118–124.
11. Matityahu A, Elliott I, Marmor, M. Time intervals in the treatment of fractured femurs
as indicators of the quality of trauma systems. Bulletin of the World Health Organization
2014;92(1):40–50.
12. Amnesty International. Climate of fear in Syria’s hospitals as patients and medics
targeted. October 25, 2011. http://www.amnesty.org/en/news-and-updates/report
/climate-fear-syrias-hospitals-patients-and-medics-targeted-2011-10-25.
13. BBC News. Pakistan polio team hit by deadly attack. March 1, 2014. http://www.bbc
.co.uk/news/world-asia-26397602.
14. International Committee of the Red Cross. The healthcare in danger project. http://
www.icrc.org/eng/what-we-do/safeguarding-health-care/solution/2013-04-26-hcid
-health-care-in-danger-project.htm.
15. United Nations News Centre. February 24, 2009. http://www.un.org/apps/news/story
.asp/story.asp?NewsID=30005&Cr=sri+lanka&Cr1=#.UyQ_stzA7Hg.
16. Thurgood A, Boylan M. Activation and deployment. In ABC of Prehospital Care,
T Nutbeam, M Boylan (eds.). Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell, 2013.
17. Association of Anaesthetists of Great Britain and Ireland (AABGI) Standard for pre-
hospital RSI. http://www.aagbi.org/sites/default/files/prehospital_glossy09.pdf.
276
References
18. Hubble M, Wilfong D, Brown L, Hertelendy A, Benner RW. A meta-analysis of pre-hospital

airway control techniques part 2: Alternative airway devices and surgical c ricothyroidotomy
success rates. Prehospital Emergency Care 2010;14:515–530.
19. Bickell WH, Wall MJ, Pepe PE, Martin RR, Ginger VF, Allen MK, Mattox KL. Immediate
versus delayed fluid resuscitation for hypotensive patients with penetrating torso inju-
ries. New England Journal of Medicine 1994;331:1105–1109.
20. Kasotakis G, Sideris A, Yang Y, de Moya M, Alam H, King DR, Tompkins R, Velmahos G.
Aggressive early crystalloid resuscitation adversely affects outcomes in adult blunt
trauma patients: An analysis of the Glue Grant database. Journal of Trauma and Acute
Care Surgery 2013;74(5):1215–1221.
21. Midwinter M, Woolley T. Resuscitation and coagulation in the severely injured
trauma patient. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B: Biological Sciences
2011;366(1562):192–203.
22. CRASH2 Collaborators. The importance of early treatment with tranexamic acid in
bleeding trauma patients: An exploratory analysis of the CRASH-2 randomised con-
trolled trial. Lancet 2011;377(9771):1096–1101.
23. Connor D, Greaves I, Porter K, Bloch M. Pre-hospital spinal immobilization: An initial
consensus statement. Emergency Medical Journal 2013;30(12):1067–1069.
24. Hauswald M, Ong G, Tandberg D, Omar Z. Out-of-hospital spinal immobilization: Its
effect on neurological outcome. Academic Emergency Medicine 1998;5(3):214–219.
25. Corey G, Lafayette T. Preparing for operations in a resource-depleted and/or extended
evacuation environment. Journal of Special Operations Medicine 2013;13(3):74–80.
26. UK International Emergency Trauma Register. http://www.uk-med.org/trauma.html.
277
Mass casualty situations
23
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the underlying principles of major incident management

▪▪ Understand the principles of prioritisation (triage) of trauma victims
▪▪ Be aware of the generic structure of a major incident response
INTRODUCTION
The UK National Health Service Emergency Preparedness Framework (2013) defines a signifi-
cant incident or emergency as ‘one that cannot be managed within routine service arrange-
ments’. The response will require special procedures, involve more than one emergency service,
the wider National Health Service (NHS) and even the local authority (1). This is a very broad
definition designed to capture the traditional major incident but also to accommodate extreme
health system pressures such as an infectious disease outbreak, perhaps a flu epidemic in win-
ter, or a logistics challenge such as a fuel tanker driver strike.
A mass casualty situation is defined by the World Health Organization as simply one where
an event generates ‘more patients at one time than locally available resources can manage
using routine procedures’ (2).
In considering such broad terms, for the pre-hospital responder in a rural area with limited
facilities, a simple road traffic collision with a handful of casualties may meet this definition,
whereas in an urban area with more resources the event would be readily manageable within
available resources and without special arrangements. The ability to manage a situation can be
considered under the term surge capacity where the ability to manage depends upon ‘staff, stuff
and structure’ (3), that is having sufficient staff with
the equipment they need following a plan defined Table 23.1 Terminology
by a command system. In essence, they need a major
NHS level Numbers
incident response.
Major 10s
In terms of numbers, specific terms are applied
Mass 100s
(Table 23.1) (4). Likewise, in terms of type, there is
Catastrophic 1000s
recognised terminology (Table 23.2) (1).
278
Resilience and preparation
Table 23.2 Incident descriptors
Nature of incident Definition

Big bang Transport incident, explosion, series of smaller events
Rising tide Developing infectious disease epidemic, evolving staffing crisis/industrial action
Cloud on the A threat such as chemical or radiation release elsewhere where there is time
horizon to prepare
Headline news Public or media alarm about a pending issue
Internal incident Loss of utilities, fire, or breakdown of core equipment such as IT failure
CBRN Deliberate release of chemical, biological or radiological material
HAZMAT Incident involving hazardous material
The scope to be covered in the chapter relates to the pre-hospital phase of managing a mass
casualty incident. Planning for such events is constantly evolving using the emergency plan-
ning cycle (Figure 23.1) (5).
The intentions are that guidance and
future responses are sensitive to the per-
7. Validate
ceived risks or threats, and also to learn from in exercises 6. Train key
exercises and critical analysis of actual events. - and in staff
response
The science behind emergency prepared-
ness and response is dynamic; the literature
is replete with case studies and narratives EMBED
of major incidents, but the formal academic
study and developing science of emergency 8. Maintain,
5. Issue
review and
preparedness, resilience and response is and
consider
evolving rapidly. It is not possible to carry out disseminate
revision
formal studies; development and evolution
arise from post-hoc incident investigation
and from expert consensus (6).
4. Agree and 1. Take
direction from
finalise risk assessment
RESILIENCE AND PREPARATION
Disaster management consists of four distinct CONSULT
components:
• Mitigation 3. Determine 2. Set

• Preparedness actions and objectives
• Response responsibilities
• Recovery
The first two of these involve recognising the Figure 23.1 The emergency planning cycle.
(From Civil Contingencies Act Enhancement
hazards that exist and taking steps to reduce Programme, Chapter 5 (Emergency planning):
their potential impact. Revision to emergency preparedness, 2011,
Hazards can be anticipated. Natural chal- https://www.gov.uk /government/uploads
/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/61028
lenges such as a town that is built in a flood zone /Emergency_Preparedness_chapter5
or technological ones such as a large airport or _amends_21112011.pdf.)
279
an industrial chemical plant raise specific threats that can be proactively addressed and the risk
reduced through preparation.
Often underestimated, mass gathering medicine has evolved to consider the challenge sim-
ply of large numbers of people gathered together (7). Predictive tools have been developed that
consider the nature of the challenge and describe the level and type of resources that should be
put in place to manage this. Perhaps the world’s greatest recurring challenge is the annual Hajj
to Mecca (8), but even such relatively regular events as UK Premier League football matches
carry a risk that should be mitigated and prepared for (9). In the UK there is official guidance in
this regard for sports stadia and other crowd events, the Green Guide and Purple Guide (10,11).
Through careful preparation and risk assessment, the potential consequences can be reduced;
there are examples of where this has been well managed (12) and equally of where disaster has
followed (13).
In terms of specific natural or technological hazards, local communities will typically have a
risk register and plan for those hazards that figure most highly. Flooding has been a recurrent
challenge in parts of the UK and the potential impact is far wider than simply the immediate
emergency service local response (14). An optimal system response is complex and wide rang-
ing, involving the local authority and government agencies over months. The current UK politi-
cal environment has raised the threat of terrorism to a significant level and general preparation
through the CONTEST strategy (15), and specific threats such as a marauding terrorist firearms inci-
dent, or a Mumbai-type event (16), are now regular features of the mass casualty exercise schedule.
The literature is replete with narrative descriptions of exercise reports and public health plan-
ning for major events, but there are far fewer that honestly critique the effectiveness of that prepa-
ration, with a problematic level of variance in the reporting and identification of learning points
(17). The development of a more structured academic approach is necessary but slow to evolve.
This said, there is little doubt that education and training of emergency service respond-
ers can significantly improve the incident response and involvement in such events has
become a mandatory part of the responding personnel training cycle and of licencing
requirements for many events. This apparent effectiveness is not without its challenges
however. Consistency and standardisation are a challenge (18) and sometimes there can
be over-resourcing in such environments that undermines the value of training for the
subsequent response (19).
As part of a strategic approach to this challenge, the UK Emergency Services introduced the
JESIP (Joint Emergency Services Interoperability Programme) (20) that is now established training for
all responders, applying the core principles of cooperation and communication has evolved and
significantly improved preparation for a response and so increased system resilience.
THE ALL HAZARDS APPROACH

Cervantes Saavedra said, ‘Forewarned is forearmed, to be prepared is half the victory’. When a
disaster occurs current expert opinion is that the strategic emergency response should be based
upon a common and practised multi-agency standard framework which can be adapted for the
specific needs of the event, an All Hazards approach (21).
This leads to the JESIP doctrine which is the principles-based philosophy capturing this
approach that defines the tactical and operational command (20). The themes are co-location,
communication, co-ordination and shared situational analysis, the intention being that there is
a connected situational awareness that allows for intelligent flexibility in the response.
280
MIMMS principles: methane and CSCATTT
There will always be unexpected challenges and adaptation is key to mounting an effective
and efficient response. The challenges of adverse weather, darkness and remoteness all com-
pound an effective response to a mass casualty incident.
A model health response to a mass casualty incident will involve the entire health
economy, from the emergency first responders to the community services for the area.
Civil contingencies documents from the 1990s approach major incidents in a very limited
response-oriented way (22), but the breadth of the necessary response and the need to
integrate all responders into a coordinated whole for the duration of the response, includ-
ing the recovery period, has become more evident and the command system now captures
all parties from the blue-light emergency services to category 2 responders defined by the
Civil Contingencies Act 2004 (23) to include utility and water companies and even the
Environment Agency.
Being aware of the complexity of the wider mass casualty response, the core principles of
mounting a response, particularly as it relates to the pre-hospital environment, can best per-
haps be considered using the principles taught in the entry qualification programme, Major
Incident Medical Management and Support, or MIMMS® (24). This is essential knowledge for
anyone who responds to trauma in the pre-hospital environment.
MIMMS PRINCIPLES: METHANE AND CSCATTT

Over the last two decades, basic training
BOX 23.1: MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic
in the management of a significant inci-
dent was taught through the MIMMS Command and control
philosophy (24). To facilitate recall of the Safety
different components of this structured Communication
approach the mnemonic CSCATTT is used Assessment
(Box 23.1). Triage
The first step in any mass casualty or Treatment
major incident is to recognise it as such. Transport
The first lesson taught in the programme
is DECLARE IT! There are a variety of
anecdotal tales of delays and missed BOX 23.2: MIMMS METHANE mnemonic
opportunities to manage an incident aris-
ing from failure to recognise the magni- M Major incident declared or stand by
E Exact location
tude of the challenge and mobilise the
T Type of incident
necessary resources. During basic train-
H Hazards present and potential
ing, significant emphasis is placed on
A Access, the direction of approach
the need for those first responding to an
N Numbers of casualties, with nature and type
incident to have a relatively low threshold
E Emergency services present and required
for activating the response, with the reas-
surance that it can always be stood down
later. The emergency services would rather begin to escalate their response and then stand it
down as more information becomes available than have an unnecessary period of delay ‘to be
absolutely sure’. It is now accepted that this should be done using the METHANE mnemonic
(Box 23.2) (6).
For the responding pre-hospital personnel from the health system, the structure of the
response is perhaps best considered using the CSCATTT.
281
It is generally recognised that the early phase of the response is often based upon incomplete
information and it is necessary that each aspect is considered and planned for during this period.
Failing to consider each will cause difficulty as the response builds. The initial responders are
unlikely to form the command element for the full incident, but their early decisions will build
the foundation upon which the subsequent response is built. There is clearly a huge pressure to
begin moving patients to hospital, but it is unlikely that patients will be moved from scene during
the first 30 minutes; addressing the CSCATTT components is fundamental to a robust response.
COMMAND AND CONTROL

In describing the oversight function at a mass casualty event, it is usual to consider it in the
context of a big bang-type event. The structure and principles can then be adapted to more
protracted events as required.
Ideally, the first ambulance crew on scene should recognise the incident as a major one and
activate the cascade. They should take a command function and begin to structure the response
until relieved by more senior personnel with specific training to take on the role of ambulance
incident commander (AIC) and other core command roles.
By the very nature of such an incident, there is typically confusion during the first phase
and the responding emergency services need to function almost on autopilot. This is helped by
the inclusion of action cards, giving step-by-step instructions, in emergency plans. A detailed
understanding is not required; the responder adopts an identified role and follows the list of
instructions in sequence. It is only later that adaptation and modification might be required and
the trained commanders are typically in the leadership functions at this point.
Command is a vertical transmission of authority and instruction. Whilst this is a clear con-
cept to the police and fire services, it is not natural in the health service where clinicians are
accountable for their actions on a patient-by-patient basis. In the environment of a major inci-
dent, a command hierarchy is essential.
The current and established command system in the UK operates a ‘medallion’ approach
with gold (strategic) command remote from the scene but coordinating the wider health service
response and ensuring business continuity, silver (tactical) at scene leading the direct response
and, as required, bronze (operational) commanders moving forward and taking charge of spe-
cific functions such as patient triage or scene rescue (Figure 23.2) (4).
STRATEGIC COMMAND
Strategic command involves senior officers, typically chief officers or executives, who have
responsibility for providing the resources
to support the incident response and is Outer
usually remote from the scene of the Cordon
incident. Whilst ensuring that there is BRONZE
Inner
sufficient support deployed, they are also Cordon
responsible for maintaining the function GOLD
of the wider health system during the
time of strain and thinking about con- SILVER
tinuity going forward. This may require
calling on mutual aid from adjacent
areas and appraising senior government
infrastructure of events. The response Figure 23.2 Command circles at an explosion.
282
may require the involvement and coordination of a much wider range of organisations beyond
the emergency services, potentially including the local authority, environment agency and even
utility companies.
The gold commanders from the lead responding agencies can be brought together as a strate-
gic coordinating group (SCG), typically chaired by the police, to mount a joint response. In events
of sufficient magnitude there may be a number of SCGs that are brought together through
a regional committee before communicating vertically to the Major Incident Coordination
Centre (MICC) at the Department of Health and, through them, to the Cabinet Office Briefing
Room (COBR) and the Civil Contingencies Committee (CCC) (4).
TACTICAL COMMAND
Tactical command is the level that leads the response at the scene of the incident, taking charge
as the ambulance incident commander (AIC), overseeing and responsible for delivering a pro-
portionate response. They will usually be supported by a medical incident advisor (MIA) and
a number of additional specialist staff. The tactical commanders from each of the attending
emergency services should cooperate as a command team with shared understanding of the situ-
ation and agreed assessment of the risks and challenges (Figure 23.3) (20).
During the early stages of the response there is a need to agree the flow in and out of the incident
area for responding vehicles, the evacuation plan and the treatment and management thresholds
for casualties. Whilst the specific details will be defined by local geography, such as the availability
of buildings and the nature of the road network, the structure is fairly clear (Figure 23.4).
The nature of the incident and the range and type of casualties will determine the evacuation
plan. The ambulance incident commander should determine the destination hospitals and the
rate of patient flow to each based upon the nature of the injuries. Strategic command should be
aware of this and facilitate capacity in those receiving facilities by providing support as necessary.
OPERATIONAL COMMAND
The AIC and MIA roles are ideally hands-off positions. There are a number of different func-
tions at the incident scene and oversight of these is typically delegated. Examples might include
sectoring of a large incident scene, management of the casualty clearing station, vehicle park-
ing and loading, and perhaps oversight of patient decontamination. Each of these operational
functions is overseen by a command element that feeds back to the AIC.
Ambulance
Parking
Point IN
Casualty
SITE Inner Cordon Clearing Ambulance Outer Cordon
Loading
Station
Point
OUT
Figure 23.3 Scene command team. Figure 23.4 Patient flow at a mass casualty incident.
283
With a specific remit for patient care, at the casualty clearing station there should be an
operational commander overseeing the ongoing triage and also delivery of clinical care
to the injured whilst awaiting evacuation. This is likely to be the base for the majority
of the medical assets working at scene, and often an operational medical incident advi-
sor is required to support this and ensure that only appropriate clinical interventions are
provided.
SAFETY
The scene of a major incident will be an environment with inherent hazards that pose a risk
to rescuers. Responsibility for mitigating and managing these risks rests with the strategic
command team and should be managed through DORA (Dynamic Operation Risk Assessment).
The challenges are constantly changing and must be continually reassessed. Basic pre-hospital
emergency medicine principles apply; the Safety 1-2-3. Personal safety of the rescuers must be
considered, then that of the scene before finally addressing the safety of the survivors, both
casualties and the involved but not injured.
PERSONAL SAFETY
Employers have an absolute duty under health and safety legislation to minimise the risk to
their staff in the pursuance of their duties. The effect of this can be seen through the evolution
of PPE, the personal protective equipment worn by staff entering an environment over the last
few years (Figure 23.5).
A reflective jacket was all that was considered necessary 30 years ago; now a responder
would not be allowed to enter an emergency scene without full personal protection. Whilst the
necessary level of protection is subject to the dynamic risk assessment, judgement about the
level of personal protection can be applied; the responder should have the full level of protection
(b)
(a)
Figure 23.5 Evolving PPE (a) old and (b) new.
284
necessary. Where a hazard, such as a toxic environment, potentially exists, the basic training is
to withdraw to a safe position and call for a higher level of protection. The ‘Stay Out, Get Out,
Call HART’ principle, where HART is the hazardous area response team, is the norm (25).
SCENE SAFETY
As part of the command assessment of the scene and the planning for management by the scene
command team, a security (Silver) cordon and a safety (Bronze) cordon are defined, and entry to
each should be controlled. If there is a fire, chemical or radiation hazard, the inner cordon will be
secured by the fire service; in a terrorist or firearms incident the police may control this cordon.
Once it has been deemed safe to enter an incident scene, the rescuers can begin to attend
to those involved. This assumes that the scene can be contained. In a terrorist explosion, for
example, those involved and still able to walk will self-evacuate and ‘starburst’ in all directions.
It is unlikely that a cordon to contain a large number of people could be drawn in sufficient time
to control the dispersal.
CASUALTY SAFETY
Those involved in a major incident may be affected by a number of unknowns. There have been
many examples of chemical contamination affecting both casualties and rescuers. Bio-hazards,
either from body fluids from those injured or deceased and spread by an explosive force, including
for example the contents of toilets on trains or aircraft, are a theoretical risk to all. To date there
has not been a significant issue with radiation contamination, but it is regarded as only a matter
of time before this occurs and decontamination of all involved may become necessary. In a ter-
rorist event there is always a potential danger from a terrorist masquerading as an injured person.
There are other risks to rescuers such as MMMF (man-made material fibre) and toxic fumes
from burning components that may be relatively concealed and must be guarded against (26).
They should be recognised in the DORA from the scene command team, but may come through
direct contact with patient clothing after evacuation or through ‘off-gassing’.
COMMUNICATION
Communication both at the scene between the different levels of command and the emergency
services and also from the scene to the remote command chain is vital to the smooth running
of even the most straightforward response to a mass casualty incident. This also includes com-
munication from the scene to the identified receiving hospitals.
There have been many examples of communication systems failing at the scene of a major
incident. Radio systems have often been overwhelmed by the volume of traffic or lack of area
coverage. The encrypted digital TETRA (Terrestrial Trunked Radio) radio network, known as
Airwave, is now the standard for the emergency services in the UK. Whilst not invulnerable, it
has multiple layers of redundancy and so allows relatively smooth interservice communication.
Following the London experience with the terrorist events of 2005, well-known communica-
tion black spots, such as tunnels and the London Underground, have now been TETRA enabled.
There are still some remote areas that remain inaccessible, but coverage is now almost universal.
The emergency services have become increasingly dependent upon the use of mobile phone
cellular technology. Dependency on mobile telephones has become an area of vulnerabil-
ity; there are a limited number of users permitted in each ‘cell’ and capacity can readily be
exceeded. The danger of this dependency has been shown serially through communication
285
difficulties at mass events. The amount of traffic to be carried overwhelms the network and the
mobile phones become ineffective.
A system was developed, termed ACCOLC (Access Overload Control), where specified mobile
phone cell areas could be closed to all but those pre-registered and so priority mobile phone
traffic. This option was managed centrally and was never shown to work effectively in practice.
The system was changed to MTPAS (Mobile Telecommunications Privileged Access System) where
there is more local control of the priority SIM cards for the ‘entitled organisations’, Category 1
responders to a major incident (27).
In any event, technological solutions can always fail and the old style ‘runner’ system may
need to be instituted. To avoid the ‘Chinese whispers’ phenomenon, messages should ideally
be written.
THE MEDIA
The 24-hour news organisations have become extremely effective at communicating details of
an evolving emergency situation. It is quite possible that news reporting, particularly live video
from the scene, may give vital information to the more remote commanders and to the wider
health response before the normal communication channels can generate a properly informed
report. The capacity to view this information flow is a key part of an emergency control centre
infrastructure.
There should be strict adherence to policy regarding media communication by all involved
in responding to an incident. Only official communications, typically though the command
hierarchy and managed by the police, should be made. Any statements or information given out
must to be checked for accuracy, avoid speculation and be approved in advance.
Clear guidance is given that the media should be proactively managed by the command
elements; transmission of public safety information and reassurance can be disseminated if
this aspect of the response is properly addressed. Uncontrolled, the media can cause increased
public distress and mislead. Syndication of sources and active engagement can help manage
the insatiable demand from the news media. Awareness of news deadlines and regular updates
from command officers can be very helpful.
PRACTICE POINT
Use the media proactively to inform and advise the public and prevent panic.
SOCIAL MEDIA
Social media is a relatively new phenom-
enon, often providing Twitter feeds and
video from within the emergency scene
by those involved in the incident or wit-
nessing it unfold (Figure 23.6). Termed
backchannel communication, this modality
cannot be easily managed or controlled
but should certainly be watched by the
responding emergency services; there may
be useful information contained within it Figure 23.6 Real-time images and video via social
(28). It is increasingly common for the gold media within minutes of an incident.
286
command to ensure that the ambulance service communications team is monitoring the feed
and putting out statements of its own into the domain to inform the public and deflect any
potential misleading information.
ASSESSMENT
The first step in managing a major incident is to recognise it and declare it. The initial report
should use the framework of the METHANE mnemonic.
The most important aspect of using the acronym is that it is comprehensive and both the
sender and recipient of the message understand the structure of the report. Sending all of this
information in a first report will allow the system to construct an appropriate and proportion-
ate response.
REPORT REFINEMENT AND CASCADE

As the response begins and more information becomes available about the scale and full nature
of the incident, and more experienced and trained commanders arrive at the incident scene, a
more detailed needs analysis of the situation will be constructed.
The level of resources to be brought to the scene will depend on the nature of the event
and the numbers involved. The AIC and MIA will need to decide how the injured are
going to be managed and to where they are to be evacuated: intelligent dispersal rather
than simply evacuation to the nearest hospital. Appropriate hospitals will be notified and
information sought on the numbers of injured that can be received. Preparation and exer-
cising can help with planning in this area but real-time information will be necessary.
Local knowledge by the commanders of the capability and specialist skills of the hospitals
will be important in determining how far the activation process radiates from the scene.
For example, in an incident involving multiple patients with significant major burns, the
cascade may need to go as far as the National Burn Bed Bureau, beginning the search for
dedicated burn bed capacity around the UK. A similar process may be necessary if there
are significant numbers of critically injured children through the Children’s Intensive Care
networks.
TRIAGE
A mass casualty incident is one where there are typically more people injured than there
are resources immediately available to provide the necessary care. In this situation there is a
need to determine priority for both treatment and evacuation from the scene; it is a resource-
constrained environment. The prioritisation of casualties must be objective and reproducible,
ideally based on evidence. The process must be dynamic; patients can deteriorate or improve
after contact with the responding personnel, and it must be flexible to accommodate the capac-
ity available to manage the load. The process should occur serially; at the incident scene, at
entry to the casualty clearing station (CSS; front triage), at departure from the CCS (rear triage)
and again on arrival at hospital.
The terms sieve and sort have become the terminology used, arising from the MIMMS pro-
gramme. An initial screen is applied at the point of first contact and then further more detailed
reviews are performed at subsequent stages (24). This has become the UK standard.
287
TRIAGE SIEVE
To be acceptable for this environment, the system must be quick, reliable and reproducible. A
number of systems have been described. The current first look, primary triage or sieve is based
upon START (Simple Triage and Rapid Treatment) (29) (Figure 23.7).
This approach is based on each patient being reviewed in under 30 seconds, rapid assess-
ment for the number and severity of the injured to be determined, and providing the incident
command team with information to begin to make decisions about the resources required and
plan for the evacuation. Priorities for treatment are identified and then the limited resources
can be directed to those in most urgent clinical need.
There is a range of documentation systems for labelling the casualties and a danger of the
process losing sight of its purpose in discussion about the best way to do this. Examples of these
include the use of coloured clothes pegs or slap bands, the SMART tag and the Cambridge Cruciform
System (Figure 23.8). Each has an increasing level of complexity, but the principle is the same: clear
and quick to apply but adjustable if there is a need to upscale or downgrade the category.
Victim can walk? YES GREEN
NO
Assess breathing without
opening the airway
Victim breathing? NO Open airway
YES
Assess respiratory rate Breathing? NO
BLACK
> 30/min?
YES
NO YES
Take pulse at wrist RED
NO
Present? NO
YES
Assess level of consciousness Responsive?
YES
YELLOW
Figure 23.7 The triage sieve based on START.
288
(b)
(a)
P1 Priority 1 Immediate Care P1
P2 Priority 2 Urgent Care P2
P3 Priority 3 Delayed Care P3
DEAD DEAD DEAD DEAD
Figure 23.8 Triage (a) slap bands and (b) Cambridge Cruciform triage label.
CHILDREN AND TRIAGE

Children have different physiology to
adults and there is therefore a need to
accommodate the child’s weight or size
in determining the normal range of their
physiology. This is difficult to do both in
a hurry and from recall. The generally
accepted approach is to use the standard
START algorithm but with a sizing ‘tape’,
such as the Broselaw tape, with different Figure 23.9 Paediatric sizing tape.
physiological parameters for respiratory
rate and pulse rate for different sizes of children marked on it (30) (Figure 23.9).
T1 HOLD
An additional category of immediate but no intervention has been described (31). In prin-
ciple, this is used for circumstances when there are too many critically injured casualties
for the system to manage and the immediate category needs to be subdivided. Essentially,
this category is too sick to receive treatment at the current time and these casualties are put
to one side of the evacuation chain. This is contrary to the current principles of clinical
practice and, whilst the concept is a useful one when under huge pressure, any decision
to introduce this category would need to come from the most senior command level at the
incident. The decision to implement this protocol is not one for the operational personnel
within the scene.
TRIAGE SORT
Once the casualties have been sieved and the number and severity of the injured has been
determined, there needs to be recognition that the first process is ‘rough and ready’. The ‘sort’
is a more detailed and clinically informed process but requires a higher level of clinical skill and
may not be appropriate in the early stages of the response to an incident.
Determining the severity of injury is often a retrospective process once the details of the
injuries are known. The Injury Severity Score (ISS) is an anatomical injury-based system but
can only be applied retrospectively. It is more appropriate to use the patient’s physiological
289
Table 23.3 Triage Revised Trauma Score
Physiological variable Measured value Score

Respiratory rate 10–29 4
>29 3
6–9 2
1–5 1
0 0
Systolic blood pressure >90 4
76–89 3
50–75 2
1–49 1
0 0
Glasgow Coma Scale 13–15 4
9–12 3
6–8 2
4–5 1
3 0
status using simple readily measured param- Table 23.4 Triage categories and scores
eters: the pulse rate, systolic blood pressure, Priority TRTS
Glasgow Coma Score (GCS) and perhaps oxy-
T1 1–10
gen saturation through pulse oximetry. Each
T2 11
variable has a different predictive value and
T3 12
there are a variety of systems that weight these
Dead 0
factors to produce a categorical triage score. In
the UK the most common system is the Triage
Revised Trauma Score (TRTS) (32) which is the basis for the triage sort (Table 23.3).
This system can then be used to assign a more refined triage category to each casualty
(Table 23.4).
Triage to this detail is a time-consuming process when clinicians are busy providing care,
but it more accurately determines which patients are in need of intervention more urgently. The
use of such an objective tool helps make the decision on which patient should be treated next
in a very difficult situation.
TRIAGE ACCURACY
Triage is intended to be an objective and reproducible process, but the reality is that in an
emotional environment responders find it difficult to apply rigorously. Likewise, any simple
system is relatively crude and has an error rate. Over the 25 years that the described tri-
age principles have been established, there have been few occasions where the system has
been consistently and reliably applied. In the 1990s, responders rarely used the system at all,
but more recently it has been shown to be capable of being used effectively and influencing
evacuation decisions (33).
Analysis has shown that there is consistent over-triage: responders put the injured in a more
urgent category than warranted, particularly when children are triaged. Over-triage will clog
the system and delay essential treatment for others in need. At the same time, there are some
290
Table 23.5 2 × 2 triage table
Critically injured Non-critically injured

Higher priority Correct high triage Incorrect high triage
(over-triage)
Lower priority Incorrect low priority Correct low triage
(under-triage)
patients for whom the triage process fails to recognise the urgency of their situation and unnec-
essary delay is incurred, that is ‘under-triage’ (Table 23.5).
Inaccurate triage potentially means that resources are not distributed in an optimal manner
and, further down the evacuation chain, people are evacuated to hospital in an order that may
not benefit the most severely injured. Analysis of incidents shows how significant field triage
decisions can be in a potentially resource constrained environment. An over-triage rate of 64%
occurred in some locations of the London bombings in 2005, and this would potentially cause
significant issues for patients if hospital resources were being overwhelmed (33).
Emergency responders understand the principles of triage but often allow other factors to
influence their decision process, undermining its efficacy. Less injured casualties will often not
be willing to comply with evacuation decisions, preferring to stay with their friends and rela-
tives who might be more severely injured. It cannot be reasonable to expect a parent to leave
their severely injured child to comply with the evacuation chain. This requires the system to
rigorously apply the triage decisions but allow for some flexibility in terms of the nature and
timing of the evacuation of some patients in some categories.
TREATMENT
The capacity to provide care at the scene of a mass casualty incident is, by the nature the inci-
dent, relatively limited. There are a range of tiers of potential care:
• Bystander first aid

• Treatment at the scene
• Casualty clearing station interventions
• Discharge from the scene
• Diagnosis of death
BYSTANDER CARE
Many members of the public caught up in a mass casualty incident have first aid training and
often healthcare providers are involved but not injured. Members of both groups will want to
provide immediate assistance to the injured. Simple treatments such as opening an airway in an
unconscious casualty or applying a pressure dressing to a bleeding wound in the first few min-
utes can be life-saving. Following the London bombings, NHS major incident dressing packs have
been forward deployed to transport hubs to facilitate this good Samaritan casualty care (34).
TREATMENT AT THE SCENE

Medical assistance to the emergency services involved in extricating casualties from a com-
plex environment will often be required, and safe provision of analgesia can significantly
291
improve the speed and efficiency of the process. The presence of an experienced doctor who
can work with the paramedics and other rescue personnel to risk assess the interventions
being proposed and, with the rescuers, determine the process of extrication can create a
significant momentum.
Within the Medical Emergency Response Incident Team (MERIT) there will be people who
are limited to being able to work in the casualty clearing station (CCS) and others who are suf-
ficiently experienced to move forward into the scene. The need for this support will be deter-
mined by the tactical command team.
CASUALTY CLEARING STATION INTERVENTIONS

The management of the injured in a mass casualty response involves the creation of a CCS, a
focal point through which all casualties pass for assessment and from where they will be evacu-
ated to an appropriate hospital for their injuries. With any resource-constrained environment
there is the potential for a queue, or delay, before evacuation. The environment may be one
where the more detailed triage sort is applied and prioritisation more accurately determined.
There are also potential opportunities to provide clinical interventions that can reduce the
urgency or triage category of some casualties. Traction splint application to fractured long
bones or chest drain insertion for a significant chest injury such as a tension pneumothorax
can decrease the time pressure for onward movement. This activity can facilitate more intel-
ligent sieving, allowing for example the more urgent evacuation from the field of those for
whom nothing beyond fluid resuscitation can be done in the CCS such as intra-abdominal
bleeding.
The level of intervention in the CCS depends on the clinical skill and competence of those
staffing it. Historically this capability was provided by mobile medical teams drawn from the local
hospitals. Now this should be done by the personnel on the MERIT, with a consequent signifi-
cant increase in the range of interventions that can be competently performed.
The MERIT should provide the medical staff to support the ambulance service in this envi-
ronment, and its members should both understand the clinical expectations and have practised
them. They should also be familiar with the demands of intelligent evacuation and the role of
senior clinical input in assisting with evacuation priority decisions.
DISCHARGE FROM SCENE

Often a significant number of people at the scene of a major incident will have sustained no
or only very minor injuries. Depending upon the nature of the incident, many may not require
hospital treatment. The use of experienced health personnel to assess the triage category green
casualties, including those involved but not injured, and discharge them from the scene to the
care of the police, can significantly reduce the burden for transport for the ambulance service
and allow focused use of resources.
DIAGNOSIS OF DEATH
The diagnosis of death is an important legal step in the management of an incident scene.
Whilst a lower priority than the care of the injured, at some point this procedure will be
required from the responding clinicians.
The initial triage sieve will already have identified those who are deceased. The labelling
process leaves the body in situ and since the location of a deceased person is important to the
292
incident investigation and possibly also identification of the dead, there are only two reasons
to move a body:
• To gain access to a living person who is trapped within the incident

• To prevent destruction of the deceased person’s body such as in the event of a fire
The police will manage the remains under their regulations on behalf of HM Coroner once
the living have been evacuated from the scene.
EVACUATED POPULATIONS
In some major incidents, particularly of the rising tide and cloud on the horizon types, there can
be a significant displacement of the population. Examples might include a river flooding an
urban area or an industrial incident with the potential for a toxic gas cloud spreading over a
residential district. If such an evacuation takes place, most people will be able to self-evacuate
but residential facilities such as nursing homes and schools will need assistance. Resilience
planning for primary care trusts requires them to maintain a record of all those who are poten-
tially vulnerable within their community so that they can be identified and support provided
during the evacuation.
Local authorities have a responsibility to establish care facilities for their population, should
they be displaced, frequently involving the use of public buildings such as sports facilities and
schools. Many of those moved will not have brought their regular medications with them, and
a primary care treatment facility, together with a pharmacy, may be necessary to accommodate
the essential medication re-provision needs. Whilst most able-bodied people can sleep on a
camp bed and live in a communal resource for a brief period of time, the more highly care-
dependent, often elderly, people will require more specialised support.
TRANSPORT
In a big bang or conventional incident, the evacuation of the injured from the scene to hospital is
the final stage in the clinical response.
EVACUATION
There have been occasions where those involved have largely self-evacuated to hospital and
there has been little emergency service control of this flow; in the Manchester terrorist bomb-
ing in 1996 many of the injured took themselves to the local hospitals. There have been other
examples where, without any real coordination or planning, the emergency services have evac-
uated the injured to local hospitals (termed the Vietnam concept or scoop and run), but caused
significant confusion in doing so. A good exemplar of this was the response to the Ramstein
Air Show disaster in Germany in 1988 which resulted in the relatively uncontrolled evacuation
of the injured to over 50 health facilities across northern Europe (35).
In planning terms for evacuation to hospitals, the science behind emergency prepared-
ness has adapted the concept of surge capacity and this now equates to the number of
injured persons and the severity of their injuries that can be accommodated in each facility
per unit time.
Allowing for the time delay between a hospital receiving notification of the declaration of a
mass casualty incident and the transport of the first injured by ambulance, there is an expecta-
tion that a hospital should be able to empty its emergency department (ED), creating an initial
293
surge capacity equivalent to the number of resuscitation bays for red/immediate casualties and
the number of major/trolley bays for the number of T2/urgent casualties. As an example, for a
large ED, this might equate to 6 reds and 16 yellows in the first instance; for a smaller depart-
ment, this may only be 2 reds and 6 yellows.
After this initial influx, there will be a smaller but continuing capacity as the first casualties
are managed and moved onwards into the hospital. This continuing capacity is expected to be
of the order of half the initial wave per hour for up to 4 hours. The exact flow rate will depend
upon the nature of the injuries but this might equate to 18 reds and 48 yellows for a large receiv-
ing hospital and 6 reds and 18 yellows for a smaller hospital. This would certainly stretch the
services that are available but should not exceed their capacity and lead to a degradation in the
standard of care.
The role of the AIC/MIA health command is to try to manage the flow and ensure that no
location is completely overwhelmed. This will require communication between the hospitals
and the control team, often achieved by dispatching an ambulance liaison officer to each des-
tination hospital.
As an additional complexity, if there are injuries requiring specialist treatment, ideally the
patients should be moved directly to a facility with those specialist services available on site,
reducing the need for onward secondary transport. Examples of such injuries might be neu-
rosurgical injury or significant burns of a complex orthoplastic injury. However, the presence
of associated injuries which could not be appropriately managed at a specialist facility might
make this course of action unsafe, and in many cases casualties will be secondarily transferred
to specialist facilities after a more general assessment and resuscitation.
Fundamental to an effective dispersal plan, effective and sufficiently clinically senior ‘rear
triage’ is key. Experienced clinical judgement with a knowledge of the facilities of the surround-
ing hospitals, properly informed by the physiological triage sort and with clinical assessment of
the injuries can allow intelligent disperal.
MODE OF TRANSPORT
Evacuation is carried out by ambulance. Old style vehicles used to be able to carry two
stretchers, one being the normal transport trolley and a second a series of sideways facing
seats that could be used as a stretcher if necessary. Ambulance safety and design issues
have now eliminated this option and each ambulance is only able to transport a single
stretcher patient.
The management of the rear of the casualty clearing station requires careful planning. There
needs to be a free flow for vehicles in and out of the ‘pinch point’ and active management of
potential congestion through a parking and queuing system (Figure 23.10).
Around the scene of a major incident,
the traffic network will often become
gridlocked as a result of road closures
and traffic diversions. The police will
aim to create blue light routes through
the congestion to allow more free move-
ment to the designated hospitals.
In many incidents, a significant
number of the casualties may have
only minor injuries and other manage-
ment options may be available. In some Figure 23.10 Ambulance parking.
294
incidents, public transport such as buses might be commandeered to transport these indi-
viduals to a hospital some distance from the scene, protecting the nearer hospitals for the
more significantly injured. There may also be alternative treatment locations such as walk-in
centres which can provide simple dressings and basic treatments.
If there is sufficient capacity, it may be possible to screen and discharge those with no or
minimal injuries from scene, removing the need to transport to hospital. These people will
need to be processed by the police for investigation and documentation purposes but can be
discharged by the health system.
HELICOPTERS
Over the last few years, a network of charitable UK air ambulances has developed with the
capacity collectively to significantly impact on the care provided at an incident scene (Figure
23.11). In the first instance, they can carry both personnel and specialist equipment to the inci-
dent to support the MERIT function and then also provide for the evacuation of patients to spe-
cialist centres. This is increasingly pertinent with the establishment of major trauma networks
but also applies for such injuries as large burns.
There is such potential to call on this resource, particularly in more remote locations, that
some ambulance service emergency plans now have a specialist air movement officer as well as
an ambulance parking officer to help manage the air traffic.
MERIT: MEDICAL EMERGENCY RESPONSE INCIDENT TEAM

Traditionally, mobile medical teams might have been brought to scene from the local emergency
departments, but with the development of pre-hospital emergency medicine as a sub-specialty,
this provision has evolved and current emergency preparedness guidance recommends that
there is a dedicated medical asset administered by the ambulance service. Termed a MERIT,
and drawn from across the region rather than from a specific location, it should be mobilised to
the scene to provide additional medical support to the scene.
New Ideas
Medical provision at the scene of a major incident is provided by members of MERITs (see text) trained
and equipped to work in challenging pre-hospital environments.
Part of the person specification

for the role is that these medical staff
should be familiar with the pre-hospital
environment, have trained for it, and
come both equipped and prepared for
the environment of the casualty clear-
ing station and forward into the scene
of the incident as deemed necessary by
the tactical commanders, the AIC and
MIA. Figure 23.11 Charitable air ambulances.
295
The number and type of MERIT response will depend upon the size and nature of the inci-
dent. There is a range of potential roles, including:
• Work at the casualty clearing station – Assisting and supporting ambulance crews with
the delivery of care in a relatively controlled environment.
• Work forwards at the scene (bronze) in support of paramedics in the scene wreckage
managing and extricating the injured.
• ‘Clearing the scene’ – Not all those involved are physically injured and some may not need
transfer to hospital. Clinical review and discharge of those with no physical injuries from
the scene to the care of the police may be an appropriate disposition.
• Diagnosing death – It may be necessary for a doctor to be assigned to work with a police
officer and to officially ‘diagnose death’ on those who have perished in the incident,
ensuring that the time of determination and location are properly recorded.
The National Burn Plan calls for specialist skills in the form of a BAT (burns assessment team)
to be made available to manage a significant burn injury incident, a sub-group of the MERIT
(36). This team of specialist practitioners is most likely to be best deployed to the designated
receiving hospitals, but there may be circumstances where their deployment to support the
medical staff in the CCS may be beneficial, allowing for the direct transfer of seriously burned
patients to burn units around the country.
RECOVERY
Major incident scenes have typically managed to evacuate their injured casualties within
4 hours of the incident. There is usually a period of intense activity, beginning with consider-
able confusion which then becomes more organised and can function very effectively. All mass
casualty events are likely to be followed by a detailed investigation of the circumstances of the
event, but also of the actions of those who responded to provide assistance.
A detailed log of the decision-making and actions taken in response to the information
available at the time is invaluable when any formal investigation is carried out. Many NHS
emergency plans have a specific ‘loggist’ role, a person who accompanies the command ele-
ment to document the activities and time stamp the decisions. ‘If it wasn’t written down, it
never happened’.
PRACTICE POINT
For major incidents as for the care of a single patient: ‘If it wasn’t written down, it never happened’.
SUMMARY
Every clinician who is involved in the management of trauma victims in the pre-hospital envi-
ronment is likely, sooner or later, to be involved in a major incident, whether it is a road traffic
collision involving multiple vehicles, a crash involving a bus full of schoolchildren or more
rarely a terrorist incident. It is essential therefore that every clinician has at least a basic under-
standing of how the response to such an event is organised, hence the inclusion of major inci-
dent management in this manual.
296
References
REFERENCES
1. National Health Service. Emergency Preparedness Framework. 2013. Accessed January
5, 2015. http://www.england.nhs.uk/wp-content/uploads/2013/03/eprr-framework.pdf.
2. World Health Organization. Mass Casualty Management Systems. 2007. Accessed
January 5, 2015. http://www.who.int/hac/techguidance/MCM_guidelines_inside_final
.pdf.
3. Kaji A, Koenig KL, Bey T. Surge capacity for healthcare systems: A conceptual frame-
work. Academic Emergency Medicine 2006;13(11):1157–1159.
4. Department of Health. Mass casualties incidents: A framework for planning. 2005.
Accessed January 5, 2015. http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130107105354
/http://www.dh.gov.uk/prod_consum_dh/groups/dh_digitalassets/@dh/@en/documents
/digitalasset/dh_063393.pdf.
5. Civil Contingencies Act Enhancement Programme. Chapter 5 (Emergency planning):
Revision to emergency preparedness. 2011. Accessed January 5, 2015. https://www
.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/61028/Emergency
_Preparedness_chapter5_amends_21112011.pdf.
6. Radestad M, Jirwe M, Castrén M, Svensson L, Gryth D, Ruter A. Essential key indicators
for disaster medical response suggested to be included in a national uniform protocol for
documentation of major incidents: A Delphi study. Scandinavian Journal of Trauma and
Resuscitation Emergency Medicine 2013;21(1):68.
7. Arbon P, Bridgewater FH, Smith C. Mass gathering medicine: A predictive model for patient
presentation and transport rates. Prehospital and Disaster Medicine 2001;16(3):150–158.
8. Memish ZA, Stephens GM, Steffen R, Ahmed QA. Emergence of medicine for mass
gatherings: Lessons from the Hajj. The Lancet Infectious Diseases 2012;12(1):56–65.
9. Leary A, Greenwood P, Hedley B, Agnew J, Thompson D, Punshon G. An analysis of
use of crowd medical services at an English football league club. International Emergency
Nursing 2008;16(3):193–199.
10. Department of Culture, Media and Sport (CMS). Green Guide – Sports Grounds Safety
Authority 2007. Accessed June 28, 2015. www.safetyatsportsgrounds.org.uk/publications
/green-guide.
11. Health and Safety Executive. The event safety guide: A guide to health, safety and welfare
at music and similar events. 1999. Accessed June 28, 2015. www.thepurpleguide.co.uk/.
12. Mahoney EJ, Harrington DT, Biffl WL, Metzger J, Oka T, Cioffi WG. Lessons learned
from a nightclub fire: Institutional disaster preparedness. Journal of Trauma and Acute
Care Surgery 2005;58(3):487–491.
13. Elliott D, Smith D. Football stadia disasters in the United Kingdom: Learning from trag-
edy? Organization & Environment 1993;7(3):205–229.
14. Carroll B, Balogh R, Morbey H, Araoz G. Health and social impacts of a flood disaster:
Responding to needs and implications for practice. Disasters 2010;34(4):1045–1063.
15. Home Office. CONTEST: The United Kingdom’s strategy for countering terrorism. The
Stationery Office, 2011.
16. Shankar D, Agrawal M, Rao HR. Emergency response to Mumbai terror attacks: An
activity theory analysis. Cyber Security, Cyber Crime and Cyber Forensics: Applications and
Perspectives 2010:46–58.
17. Ranse J, Hutton A. Minimum data set for mass-gathering health research and evalua-
tion: A discussion paper. Prehospital and Disaster Medicine 2012;27(6):543–550.
297
18. Ingrassia PL, Prato F, Geddo A, Colombo D, Tengattini M, Calligaro S, La Mura F,

Franc JM, Della Corte F. Evaluation of medical management during a mass casualty
incident exercise: An objective assessment tool to enhance direct observation. Journal of
19. Romundstad L, Sundnes KO, Pillgram-Larsen J, Røste GK, Gilbert M. Challenges of
major incident management when excess resources are allocated: Experiences from a
mass casualty incident after roof collapse of a military command center. Prehospital and
Disaster Medicine 2004;19(2):179–184.
20. JESIP. Joint Emergency Services Interoperability Programme. 2015. Accessed June 28,
2015. http://www.jesip.org.uk/.
21. Cabinet Office. Emergency response and recovery. 2013. Accessed June 28, 2015. https://
www.gov.uk/government/publications/emergency-response-and-recovery.
22. Cabinet Office. Dealing with disaster. 2001.
23. Office C. Civil Contingencies Act 2004. Accessed June 28, 2015. http://www.legislation
.gov.uk/ukpga/2004/36/contents.
24. Carley S, Mackway-Jones K. Major Incident Medical Management and Support. Oxford:
Blackwell, 2005.
25. NARU. Hazardous Areas Response Team 2015. Accessed July 16, 2015. http://naru.org
.uk/naru-work-activities/naru-work-activities-capability-deliverables-hart-programme/.
26. CFRA. Fire and Rescue Service Operational Guidance GRA 4.1 Incidents involving
transport systems - Road 2009. Accessed July 15, 2015. https://www.gov.uk/government
/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/14907/gra-4-1.pdf.
27. Government U. Public safety and emergencies – guidance Resilient communications
2014. Accessed July 12, 2015. https://www.gov.uk/resilient-communications.
28. Sutton J, Palen L, Shklovski I (eds.). Backchannels on the front lines: Emergent uses
of social media in the 2007 southern California wildfires. Proceedings of the 5th
International ISCRAM Conference, Washington, DC, 2008.
29. Gebhart ME, Pence R. START triage: Does it work? Disaster Management and Response
2007;5(3):68–73.
30. So T-Y, Farrington E, Absher RK. Evaluation of the accuracy of different methods used
to estimate weights in the pediatric population. Pediatrics 2009;123(6):e1045–e1051.
31. Buma AH, Henny W. Triage: Ballistic Trauma. Springer, 2005, pp. 527–534.
32. Moore L, Lavoie A, Abdous B, Le Sage N, Liberman M, Bergeron E et al. Unification of
the revised trauma score. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2006;61(3):718–722.
33. Challen K, Walter D. Major incident triage: Comparative validation using data from 7th
July bombings. Injury 2013;44(5):629–633.
34. Government U. Coroner’s Inquests into the London bombings of 7 July 2005: Review of
progress 2012. Accessed July 15, 2015. https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system
/uploads/attachment_data/file/97988/inquest-7-7-progress-report.pdf.
35. Martin T. The Ramstein airshow disaster. Journal of the Royal Army Medical Corps 1990;
136(1):19–26.
36. Department of Health. NHS Emergency Planning Guidance. Planning for the manage-
ment of burn-injured patients in the event of a major incident: Interim strategic national
guidance 2011. Accessed July 15, 2015. https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system
/uploads/attachment_data/file/215643/dh_125842.pdf.
298
Retrieval and transport
24
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Have knowledge of the criteria used in deciding the most appropriate transport method
▪▪ Understand the constraints, duration and limitations of air transfer
▪▪ Understand the need for organisational systems for patient retrieval
INTRODUCTION
Following patient assessment and stabilisation, transport to definitive care is a critical part of
the injured patient’s journey. Retrieval and transport can be divided into four types as shown
in Table 24.1.
It is widely recognised and clearly supported by the evidence that the retrieval phase of
patient care carries significant risks to both the patient (1–3) and to pre-hospital clinicians
(4–7). A well-planned and well-governed approach to patient retrieval is therefore essential as
part of any organisation providing pre-hospital care. The use of dedicated teams to undertake
retrieval may improve patient outcomes (8–9).
The following principles must be applied to all trauma patients:
• Transport from scene should be directly to definitive care whenever possible.

• Patients must be stabilised as much as is possible before transport, especially by air.
• When helicopter transport is available the clinician must make an informed decision as
to whether this is the fastest and safest mode of transport.
• For prolonged transfers redundancy is required for equipment, consumables and power.
• Accurate and timely communication with the receiving centre is essential.
PRE-TRANSFER MANAGEMENT AND TRIAGE

A thorough primary and rapid secondary survey at scene should be used to determine the
potential hospital capabilities required for each patient. Pre-hospital trauma scoring and triage
tools should be employed where possible (10–12). The choice of receiving hospital should be
299
Table 24.1 Retrieval classification
Primary retrieval Retrieval from the scene of an incident to hospital

Secondary retrieval Retrieval from a healthcare facility with basic facilities on site
Tertiary retrieval Retrieval from a secondary care facility to definitive tertiary care
Quaternary retrieval International repatriation
based on this assessment, ensuring where possible that all relevant surgical and critical care
facilities which the patient may need are available on the one site. This prevents unnecessary
secondary and tertiary retrievals, which add delay and risk (13,14).
When direct retrieval to definitive care will be prolonged, the decision to bypass nearer
hospitals must take into account the clinical condition of the patient and the skills of the clini-
cal personnel on scene. For example the ability to provide pre-hospital anaesthesia, ventilation
and blood transfusion may make a prolonged journey safe to undertake which would not be
possible if only basic airway, breathing and circulation management techniques were available.
Within each trauma network, guidelines should be available describing how and when the
decision to bypass facilities should be made.
When there is debate about appropriateness of triage, telephone or telemedicine advice from
a senior doctor experienced in pre-hospital care can be of significant benefit. Longer transfer
times and transport by air should lower the clinician’s threshold for pre-transfer intubation and
ventilation. This reduces the risk of patient deterioration during the retrieval phase.
Pre-alerting the receiving hospital improves the initial care provided for seriously injured
patients (15). In particular requesting a hospital trauma team response or the immediate avail-
ability of blood and blood products or radiological imaging are important.
In cases where transport to a nearby hospital is required for stabilisation before secondary
transfer to definitive care, alerting the local secondary retrieval service as early as possible is
beneficial.
The decision regarding the most appropriate destination for a retrieval may, thus, be com-
plex, involving consideration of evacuation times, geographical location of health service assets,
clinical capability of crew (and thus the level of intervention they might perform), and the
nature and likely progression of the patient’s injuries. For air retrieval other factors will include
weather and the time of day. Thus the 30-year-old unconscious patient with an apparently iso-
lated head injury as a result of a fall will probably be best transferred to a regional trauma centre
with neurosurgery on site 30 km away. If, however, there are airway problems or his physiology
is significantly abnormal, then transfer to the nearest hospital is most likely to be the correct
decision. If a pre-hospital critical care team is on scene, they may be able to optimise the patient
sufficiently to allow safe transfer directly to the major trauma centre.
DECIDING ON MOST APPROPRIATE TRANSPORT METHOD

Two main transport modalities are generally available for primary retrievals: land ambulance
and helicopter ambulance. For retrievals between hospital facilities, fixed-wing aircraft may
also be used.
It is clinically safer to transfer a patient by land than air. Patient assessment in terms of
examination and auscultation is easier due to lower noise levels. Equipment alarms are audible
in road vehicles but not in rotary aircraft where helmets and headphones are routinely worn.
In the event of patient deterioration it is usually straightforward to stop the ambulance allow-
ing re-assessment and correction of the problem with adequate space to work. The same is not
300
Patient packaging for retrieval
possible in a helicopter. Physical space within an air ambulance is often restricted and crew
members’ physical movement and communication abilities may be restricted by safety equip-
ment such as harnesses, helmets, life jackets and immersion suits.
Therefore the benefits of air transfer in terms of speed over prolonged distance must be bal-
anced against the more limited ability to assess and treat the patient during transfer.
Road ambulances allow direct transfer in one vehicle from the scene to the emergency
department. With some helicopter transfers and all fixed-wing journeys, an ambulance journey
is required to initially reach the aircraft and for transportation from the aircraft to the hospital
at the receiving end. Each patient movement risks dislodging equipment and takes considerably
more time than one would anticipate.
If the road transfer time is less than 45 minutes it may be faster to go by road ambulance
(16). When driving times exceed 45 minutes, then helicopter retrieval should be considered.
In general, fixed-wing retrieval is only appropriate for journeys exceeding 100 miles.
PRACTICE POINT
If the road transfer time is less than 45 minutes, it will normally be faster and clinically safer to go
by road ambulance.
Although a 30-minute transfer by road ambulance to a major trauma centre may appear
slower than a helicopter flying time of 7 minutes, the time taken for a more detailed pre-flight
patient assessment, helicopter loading and unloading times (as well as time for the airframe
to be called and arrive if it was not the primary response) mean that the land transfer will be
quicker, as well as safer and allowing better patient observation and monitoring. Conversely,
aeromedical evacuation is likely to be more comfortable for the patient.
PATIENT PACKAGING FOR RETRIEVAL

Patients should be carefully packaged before transfer. Good packaging aims to achieve patient
comfort, spinal immobilisation and thermal insulation. Effective equipment management also
ensures that invasive lines and other equipment are adequately secured.
The gold standard device to use for trauma patient packaging is a vacuum mattress. This
forms a rigid but conforming stretcher for the patient to lie on and, for short distances, to
be carried with. Pressure areas risks are minimised, reducing the danger of skin ischaemia.
For short primary retrievals to hospital a scoop stretcher is an acceptable method of patient
support. The scoop has the advantage of being applied and removed with minimal patient
movement thus maintaining clots which have formed and minimising discomfort for injured
casualties. Rescue boards (long spine boards) are for extrication only and should not be used
to transport patients.
PRACTICE POINT
Rescue boards (long spine boards) are for extrication only and should not be used to transport
patients.
301
For all retrievals, especially prolonged transfers in cold weather conditions, patients should
be insulated against heat loss. Vacuum mattresses act as effective insulators, supplemented
with blankets over the patient and head insulation. Patients on scoop stretchers require addi-
tional thermal protection. Insulation kits comprising of bubble wrap-type material are com-
mercially available, as are warming blankets such as the Blizzard® blanket, which incorporate
chemically based heating elements.
NEW IDEAS
Active warming blankets consisting of insulated blankets and several chemically based warming
blocks are an effective way of treating and preventing hypothermia amongst trauma victims and have
been extensively used by the military in Afghanistan.
When packaging patients for transport it is good practice to ensure that access to intra-
venous cannulae, thoracostomies, chest drains and arterial lines is possible. This can, how-
ever, be challenging. Cognisance should be paid to which side of the vehicle the stretcher is
mounted against. In such cases only one side of the patient will be easily accessible during
transport.
It is good practice to provide patients with ear protection during air transfer. This includes
ventilated patients who are liable to the same hearing damage risks. Anaesthetised patients
should have eye protection in place.
With head-injured patients there are a number of techniques which can be employed to
reduce intracranial pressure. These include placing the patient in a 10 degrees head up position
(17), loosening or removing cervical collars (18) when head blocks are in place, and using adhe-
sive tape to secure endotracheal tubes rather than circumferential tube ties.
EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSFER

Pre-hospital care providers should ensure that they have sufficient equipment and consum-
ables for the duration of the journey. This means that it is advisable to have at least twice the
amount estimated to be required to allow for unseen delays: this includes drugs, fluids, oxygen
and battery power for electrical devices.
Time should ideally be taken to optimise equipment alarm parameters according to individ-
ual patient physiology. During movement, clinicians may lose the ability to effectively observe
the patient and so become more reliant on monitor and ventilator alarms. Inappropriately
adjusted alarms which display frequently may reduce their impact and the clinician’s response
when a true emergency occurs.
Equipment display brightness should be adjusted to optimise the information on the screens.
Dull screens can be difficult to see in daylight, and in noisy aircraft, clinicians are more reliant
on visual alarm messages than audible ones.
Equipment must be procured with pre-hospital care and retrieval requirements in mind.
It should also be noted that there are complex regulations regarding carriage of equipment in
airframes to which all operators are subject. The following characteristics must be considered:
• Weight and bulk; the smaller and lighter the better

• Durability when dropped
302
Rotary wing patient transfer
• Weather proofing
• Battery duration
• Battery power monitoring
It is advisable to carry backup equipment to deal with equip-

ment failure. A monitor can be replaced by a pulse oximeter and
a portable capnometer device such as the EMMA™ (Figure 24.1).
These two small pieces of equipment can provide measurements
of heart rate, oxygen saturation, respiratory rate and end tidal
CO2. A bag valve mask can replace the work of a non-functioning
ventilator.
Considerable risk is associated with unsecured equipment
during transfer. Equipment items become projectiles during EMMA CO2 Capnometer
sudden changes in vehicle speed and direction and during colli-
Figure 24.1 The EMMA™
sions. Equipment can be secured in bespoke retainers, on equip- capnometer.
ment bridges or in specially designed transfer trolleys.
CLINICAL GOVERNANCE AND SAFE TRANSPORT SYSTEMS

Patient retrieval is widely regarded as being a hazardous activity. Limited equipment and per-
sonnel combined with environmental challenges place patients and personnel at risk. Robust
clinical governance systems are therefore necessary to maximise safety (19). Components of a
retrieval clinical governance system are described in Table 24.2.
National standards and guidelines exist around the provision of care for transport of criti-
cally ill and injured adults (20,21) and all those involved in critical care transport should audit
themselves against these standards.
ROTARY WING PATIENT TRANSFER

Helicopter transfer is ideal for patients when the road transfer time exceeds 45 minutes. Time
to load and unload patients must be taken into account, as should time for land ambulance
transfers to and from the aircraft. Helicopter operations are restricted during periods of poor
weather and reduced visibility.
Clinicians working with helicopters should be suitably trained as medical passengers
(22). Training should include the use of in-flight communications equipment, personal pro-
tective equipment (Table 24.3), emergency exit use, cabin security and moving around the
aircraft. Personnel operating regularly on rotary aircraft over water should complete heli-
copter underwater escape training.
Helicopters used for patient transport vary considerably in size and capability. The small-
est helicopter ambulances can carry three people – the pilot, patient and a medical attendant.
Larger helicopters, especially those used for search and rescue operations, may have two pilots
and a navigator.
Some helicopters are fitted with hydraulic winches to allow rescuers and clinical personnel
to be deployed to patient locations which are not suitable for landing. Following stabilisation,
patients can be winched in stretchers onto the aircraft. The size of the airframe determines what
may be achieved in flight. Smaller airframes will inevitably result in limited access to the patient,
303
Table 24.2 Elements of retrieval system governance

Standard operating Service specific SOPs dealing with clinical conditions, equipment
procedures and transport logistics which must be regularly updated in light of
experience and incidents.
Checklists Two person ‘check and response’ checklists are advisable including:
pre-mission checklist, emergency anaesthesia, procedural sedation
and leaving scene.
Equipment management Daily check system, post-mission two-person checks, regular full
equipment pack checks.
Significant event Low threshold for event reporting within the team. Facilitated by
management system paper, app based or online reporting. Effective investigation,
communication and system change framework in place.
Audit Continual audit of clinical and operational effectiveness.
Training and simulation Regular scheduled and job planned training and simulation.
Emergency action cards Pre-planned action cards for emergencies such as equipment failure,
accidental extubation and unexpected patient deterioration.
Debriefs Mandatory, structured post-retrieval team debriefs.
Clinical governance Regular clinical governance meetings to discuss cases and events.
meetings
Transfer standards Applying standards applicable to critical care transfer as described

by the Intensive Care Society and the Association of Anaesthetists
of Great Britain and Ireland.
Table 24.3 Personal protective equipment for helicopter medical and so a ‘treat-then-transfer’
personnel policy should be adopted.
Larger airframes, such as the
At all times:
Eurocopter 145 and military
• Helicopter helmet with visor and communication system
support helicopters, may be
• Toe protector boots
large enough for procedures to
• Flame-retardant flight suit
be carried out in flight, allow-
• High-visibility jacket
Dependent on conditions and training:
ing a ‘treat-during-transfer’
• Immersion survival suit
policy, which will reduce pre-
• Life jacket
hospital time for the patient.
• Short-term air supply
The largest airframes of all,
• Personal locator beacon
such as the CH-47 Chinook,
enable a full suite of interven-
tions to be carried out in flight,
bringing the emergency department to the patient. Motion sickness is common amongst crew
members and patients alike. Awake patients should be given an anti-emetic.
It is hazardous to approach helicopters while the rotor blades are turning, especially when
they are shutting down or starting up as they can be rotating below head height. If the helicop-
ter has landed on sloping ground, the blades will be closer to ground level on the side higher up
the slope. If at all possible the helicopter should shut down before personnel and patients move
304
Fixed wing patient transfer
(a) (b)
Figure 24.2 (a) Equipment secured to bridge attached to stretcher. (b) Ventilator secured on retainer
attached to aircraft.
around the aircraft. If this is not possible, then the crew should listen to the directions of the
pilot before leaving the aircraft.
On level ground, the aircraft should be approached from the front in the 10 to 2 o’clock arc.
Movement around the tail rotor should be avoided completely. It is imperative that the pilot
knows that people are moving near the aircraft and must give permission for them to enter or
leave the rotor disc.
Medical equipment should be secured using a medical bridge or equipment retaining brack-
ets (Figure 24.2). Equipment should ideally be flight tested by an avionics engineer before it is
certified for use in flight. Defibrillation and external pacing are possible in flight, but it is essen-
tial to inform the pilot before it is activated.
FIXED WING PATIENT TRANSFER

As with helicopters, the size and capabilities of fixed-wing aircraft are very variable. Generally
there is more room to move around and less need for constant harness use by the crew. Fixed-
wing aircraft also tend to be less noisy, allowing more effective communication and patient
assessment when it is needed. Again, it is essential that equipment is secured appropriately
according to aviation regulations. The potential clinical effects of the reduction in atmospheric
pressure due to altitude must be considered. Air-filled spaces will expand. These include:
• Endotracheal tube cuffs

• Gas in the pleural space
• Pneumocranium
Changes in air pressure may necessitate replacement of air with saline in endotracheal tube
cuffs (23). In some fixed-wing aircraft, it may be possible to increase cabin pressurisation to
sea level during the flight. In rare instances maintaining a low flight altitude may be necessary,
however, risks to flight safety must be fully discussed with the aircraft captain.
Rapid acceleration during takeoff may lower the patient’s blood pressure due to reduced
venous return. This is usually transient and causes no harm. In haemodynamically unstable
patients and those with increased intracerebral pressure, decreases in venous return may be
more detrimental, and hence adequate and appropriate filling of the vascular compartment,
ideally with blood products, is advised.
305
Land ambulance transfers at the referring site and the receiving centre airfield are essential
when using aeroplanes. Time for these transfers needs to be factored in to the transport time
estimate.
SUMMARY
Appropriate and careful selection of the method of transfer of a patient from the scene of an
accident are essential in achieving optimum outcomes. Where possible, patients should be
transferred directly to definitive care, but the factors influencing this decision, like those influ-
encing mode of transport, are complex, and good decision-making requires experience. Careful
pre-transfer stabilisation is essential before transfer, especially by air, and patients must be
carefully packaged and equipment well secured before transfer.
Transfer by air limits the ability to assess the patient, detect deterioration and carry out
interventions. Although it may seem rapid, time for transport to and from the aircraft and load-
ing and unloading the patient may mean that road transfer from the scene is a faster method
for the patient to reach definitive care. It must not be forgotten that patient retrieval is clinically
and physically hazardous and that robust, safe organisational systems are therefore a necessity.
REFERENCES
1. Flabouris A, Runciman WB, Levings B. Incidents during out-of-hospital patient trans-
portation. Anaesthesia and Intensive Care 2006;34(2):228–236.
2. Uosaro A, Parvianen I, Takala J, Ruokonen E. Safe long-distance interhospital ground
transfer of critically ill patients with acute severe unstable respiratory and circulatory
failure. Intensive Care Medicine 2002;28:1122–1125.
3. Maccartney I, Nightingale P. Transfer of the critically ill adult patient. British Journal of
Anaesthesia CEPD Reviews 2001;1:12–15.
4. Holland J, Cooksley DG. Safety of helicopter aeromedical transport in Australia:
A retrospective study. Medical Journal of Australia 2005;182:17–19.
5. Lutman D, Montgomery M, Ramnarayan P, Petros A. Ambulance and aeromedical
accident rates during emergency retrieval in Great Britain. Emergency Medicine Journal
2008;25:301–302.
6. Kahn CA, Pirrallo RG, Kuhn EM. Characteristics of fatal ambulance crashes in the
United States: An 11-year retrospective analysis. Prehosp Emergency Care 2001;5:261–269.
7. Hinkelbein J, Dambier M, Viergutz T, Genzwuerker HV. A six-year analysis of German
emergency medical services helicopter crashes. Journal of Trauma 2008;64:204–210.
8. Gilligan JE, Griggs WM, Jelly MT, Morris DJ, Haslam RR, Matthews NT, Everest ER,
Bryce RL, Marshall PB, Peisach RA. Mobile intensive care services in rural South
Australia. Medical Journal of Australia 1999;171:617–620.
9. Britto J, Nadel S, Maconochie I, Levin M, Habibi P. Morbidity and severity of illness
during interhospital transfer: Impact of a specialised paediatric retrieval team. BMJ
1995;311:836–839.
10. Bruijns SR, Guly HR, Bouamra O, Lecky F, Lee WA. The value of traditional vital signs,
shock index, and age-based markers in predicting trauma mortality. Journal of Trauma
and Acute Care Surgery 2013;74(6):1432–1437.
306
References
11. Raum MR, Nijsten MW, Vogelzang M, Schuring F, Lefering R, Bouillon B, Rixen D,
Neugebauer EA, Ten Duis HJ; Polytrauma Study Group of the German Trauma Society.
Emergency trauma score: An instrument for early estimation of trauma severity. Critical
Care Medicine 2009;37(6):1972–1977.
12. Hasler RM, Kehl C, Exadaktylos AK, Albrecht R, Dubler S, Greif R, Urwyler N.
Accuracy of prehospital diagnosis and triage of a Swiss helicopter emergency medical
service. Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery 2012;73(3):709–715.
13. Atkins ML, Pinder AJ, Murphy PG. Quality of care during the transfer of the critically
ill neurosurgical patients in West Yorkshire: A comparison with national guidelines.
Journal of Neurosurgical Anaesthesiology 1998;10:293.
14. Vyvyan HAL, Kee S, Bristow A. A survey of secondary transfers of head injured patients
in the south of England. Anaesthesia 1991;4:728–731.
15. Porter JM, Ursic C. Trauma attending in the resuscitation room: Does it affect outcome?
American Surgeon 2001;67(7):611–614.
16. Black JJM, Ward EM, Lockey DJ. Appropriate use of helicopters to transport trauma
patients from incident scene to hospital in the United Kingdom: An algorithm.
17. Ng I, Lim J, Wong HB. Effects of head posture on cerebral hemodynamics: Its influ-
ences on intracranial pressure, cerebral perfusion pressure, and cerebral oxygenation.
Neurosurgery 2004;54(3):593–597.
18. Davies G, Deakin C, Wilson A. The effect of a rigid collar on intracranial pressure. Injury
1996;27(9):647–649.
19. Hearns S, Shirley PJ. Retrieval medicine: A review and guide for UK practitioners. Part
2: Safety in patient retrieval systems. Emergency Medicine Journal 2006;23:943–947.
20. Whiteley S, Mccartney I, Mark J, Barratt J, Binks R. Guidelines for the transport of the
critically ill adult (3rd edtion). London: Intensive Care Society, 2011. http://www.ics.ac.uk
/ professional/guidance_transport_3_3_.
21. Safe Transfer of Patients with Brain Injury. The Association of Anaesthetists of Great
Britain & Ireland, 2006. http://www.aagbi.org/sites/default/files/braininjury.pdf.
22. JAR-OPS 3. Commercial air transportation (helicopters). Joint Aviation Authorities,
2007, page 1-B-11. http://www.jaa.nl/publications/jars/606970.pdfpage.
23. Shirley P. Transportation of the critically ill and injured patient. Update in Anaesthesia
2004;18.
307
Handover and documentation
25
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the importance of optimal handover and good documentation

▪▪ Be able to provide a structured pre-alert message
▪▪ Understand the legal and regulatory obligations relating to patient health care records
INTRODUCTION
Knowledge of the events prior to hospital admission may help facilitate appropriate patient
care. Elements of information are passed verbally at handover, but a written (often electronic)
report must be prepared that is left at the hospital for reference and does not omit any important
details (1). Unfortunately, there is a well-recognised tendency for emergency department staff
to rely on the verbal handover with up to 50% of clinicians failing to refer to pre-hospital docu-
mentation despite its usefulness (2). This may be exacerbated by the use of electronic recording
systems by ambulance trusts. Thus initial decision-making in the emergency department is
often based on a combination of the handover provided by the pre-hospital practitioner and the
rapid evaluation of the patient. Despite its importance, there is usually only one opportunity
to provide a handover, and receiving clinicians are often focused on commencement of patient
assessment which distracts them from listening carefully.
PRACTICE POINT
The aim of an effective clinical handover is to pass information, professional responsibility and
accountability seamlessly between the pre-hospital team and hospital clinicians (3).
Unfortunately, it is well recognised that the handover of patients in hospital between health
care professionals is a particularly hazardous time (4). This is due to the potential for misinter-
pretation, dilution or total loss of information (5). There is likely to be no difference when pre-
hospital practitioners hand over to emergency department staff on arrival at hospital. Indeed, it
may be of greater importance, as any lost information may not easily be retrieved or be available
from any other source.
308
Hospital handover
Information conveyed to the hospital trauma team is highly variable. Whilst some studies
have found that on average 70% of transmitted information is received and documented, others
have found this to be as low as 36% (2,6,7). Stiell et al. used the term information gaps to describe
the information that an emergency department clinician requires to manage a patient opti-
mally but which is found to be missing (8). As a result, emergency department stays were found
to be delayed by up to 60 minutes. A failure of high-quality pre-hospital handover of informa-
tion is likely to increase these information gaps resulting in increased length of stay, delayed
t reatment and poorer patient outcomes (6). This is perhaps not surprising as few pre-hospital
care practitioners have had any formal training in handover provision (9,10).
PRE-ALERT
Communication with the receiving hospital must begin at scene. The establishment of
regional trauma, cardiac and stroke networks in the United Kingdom has resulted in pre-
hospital staff bypassing local hospitals in favour of specialised facilities located further
away. Information on patient condition, intervention and expected time of arrival at the
health care facility is essential in preparing the hospital to receive the patient. This may
include the alerting and mobilisation of specialised medical staff such as a trauma team, the
preparation and allocation of a resuscitation bay, activation of massive transfusion proto-
cols, and the alerting of ancillary services such as imaging and laboratory personnel. Where
a pre-alert is passed, evidence suggests that definitive treatment is instituted faster than
when it is not (11). Pre-alert information for seriously ill or injured paediatric patients is
particularly useful to the receiving team, as details of the child’s demographics and physiol-
ogy allows appropriate equipment to be prepared and accurate calculation of drug dosages
prior to their arrival (12).
Pre-alert information may be passed directly from scene or via a central control room to the
hospital. Studies have suggested that pre-alerting is generally done poorly, with the major-
ity of patients with an Injury Severity Score (ISS) greater than 15 not being pre-alerted (13).
Furthermore, up to 75% of patients with traumatic injury who were alerted by the ambulance
service fell outside of the inclusion criteria for major trauma, as defined by the Trauma Audit
Research Network (14). In the UK, criteria have been developed to identify those who would
benefit most from direct transfer to a major trauma centre (MTC). This mandates the need for
a pre-alert message.
The majority of pre-hospital care information is transmitted via ambulance control rooms to
the hospital (15). This method prevents direct two-way communication between pre-hospital
staff at scene and hospital clinicians and risks information being diluted or altered, particularly
if personnel passing the message to the receiving hospital are non-clinical. Ideally, communi-
cation between pre-hospital staff at scene, ambulance control and the receiving hospital should
be made via a conference call. This allows direct transmission of information between scene
and hospital and permits a recording to be made for accurate documentation, whilst ensuring
a continuous flow of information through ambulance control.
HOSPITAL HANDOVER
The delivery of key information during a pre-alert message and at patient handover to the receiv-
ing hospital team is vital in maintaining continuity of care and ensuring patient safety (16).
309
All communication, whether passed by radio, mobile phone or face to face, at patient handover
should be done with accuracy, clarity and brevity.
An effective handover is most likely to be delivered when the pre-hospital practitioner is
experienced, confident and succinct. A noisy environment, inattention by receiving hospital
staff and constant interruptions during handover have been cited as key reasons why informa-
tion may be lost or become distorted during handover (7,9,10). Information conveyed to the
receiving team at handover may have important implications for the patient’s ongoing man-
agement and ideally all receiving clinical hospital staff should be apprised of this information.
On the patient’s arrival at hospital the emergency department team leader should confirm that
there are no life-threatening conditions that may require immediate intervention, for example
cardiac arrest or catastrophic haemorrhage. In such a case handover may instead be directed
towards the individual team leader or scribe (9). If the patient is stable, however, handover may
be undertaken before transfer of the patient onto the hospital bed (10). This prevents the natu-
ral tendency for medical staff to commence patient treatment before or during handover from
the pre-hospital care personnel (17). The performance of a ‘five second check’ for immediately
life-threatening issues such apnoea or life-threatening haemorrhage before the handover will
ensure that critical issues are not missed.
ATMIST
Structured templates have been developed for
BOX 25.1: ATMIST and ASHICE
pre-hospital use in order to convey information
in a systematic manner. This allows a handover Age and sex
and pre-alert to be provided in a rapid, stan- Time of injury and hospital arrival
dardised manner. Their usage is now common- Mechanism of injury
place, with the ATMIST handover being seen by Injuries sustained
many UK ambulance services as the standard of Signs and symptoms
care and in the military setting as a pre-hospital Treatment administered
key performance indicator (18). This mnemonic Age
has largely superseded ASHICE (see Box 25.1). Sex
The aim should be to complete handover in History
45 seconds. It is sometimes difficult to convey Injuries sustained
a perception of the patient in the pre-hospital Condition of patient
setting in a way that receiving staff have a full Estimated time of arrival
appreciation of it (10). Photography taken at
scene or of an injury prior to application of a
dressing can often improve this understanding.
DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY
Despite the wide availability of digital photography, evidence suggests that fewer than 10%
of pre-hospital responders routinely provide photographic images, although 75% of hospital
clinicians believe such images to be beneficial (15). Like written documentation it must be
remembered that any stored photographic material remains part of the patient record and as
such patient confidentiality must be maintained. Digital material may also be subject to data
protection laws and may be requested by law enforcement agencies in the event of an inquiry
or prosecution.
310
Patient documentation
Increasingly, technological innovations such as telemedicine are playing an integral role in

the transmission of information between scene and hospital. One non-trauma example of this
is the transmission of electrocardiograms to centres offering percutaneous coronary interven-
tion. This allows the rapid identification of patients who may benefit from such procedures and
allows the receiving centre time to prepare or mobilise the appropriate staff.
In addition, advice and support can now be provided to emergency services at the scene of
an incident with the help of digital media. Specialist paramedics such as those in the hazardous
area response team (HART) carry live-feed cameras, permitting recordings of the environment
in which the individual is working. This data can then be transmitted back from the scene to
a control centre where information regarding the patient’s condition, injury and environment
can be disseminated to the relevant personnel.
PATIENT DOCUMENTATION
Documentation of pre-hospital events is a critical element in patient care, ensuring that the
patient continues to receive optimal management. It may also be relied upon to facilitate an
appropriate response in the event of a complaint, legal proceedings or coroner’s inquest.
PRACTICE POINT
Good records, good defence; poor records, poor defence; no record, no defence.
If a vital sign has been observed or a drug has been administered, but neither have been recorded,
the assumption will be made that such actions have not been performed, the consequences of which
may be disastrous. In one study pre-hospital documentation was only found to be adequate, when
compared to a set of emergency care standards, two-thirds of the time (19). Good clinical records
contain sufficient information to allow another health care professional to reconstruct a patient
encounter without relying on memory or assumption. In general, clinical records that contain ade-
quate information to permit continuity of care will also be satisfactory for other purposes (20).
There are many different forms of pre-hospital documentation that will ultimately form part
of the patient’s health care record. These are listed in Box 25.2.
PATIENT REPORT FORMS

In the main, most UK ambulance services BOX 25.2: Types of Pre-Hospital
use a patient report form (PRF) with a Documentation
standardised check box, circle or fill-in-the-
Patient report form (PRF) (paper or
box format or alternatively an ePRF system.
electronic)
This form details key demographic patient
Text messages
information, dates, times and incident
Printouts from monitoring equipment
numbers. Space is allocated for details of
Electrocardiograms (ECGs)
drug administration and specific interven-
Video or audio recordings
tions such as insertion of an airway adjunct.
Digital photography
Many pre-hospital organisations have a
Ultrasonography scans (USS)
list of common approved abbreviations or
Written correspondence between health
codes that may be used. Space may also be
care professionals
provided for freehand text to describe the
311
mechanism of injury, clinical findings and

BOX 25.3: Uses of Pre-Hospital
management of the patient. The PRF then
Clinical Material
becomes a part of the patient’s medical record.
Its main role is to allow sufficient documenta- Clinical audit
tion of the patient’s condition to allow other Publication
health care professionals to continue optimal Research
patient management. It may also be used as Education
a reference document for legal purposes, for NHS administration
example if the patient wishes to proceed with Managerial requirements
a claim of alleged assault or in the event of Charity presentations
legal proceedings for clinical negligence (21).
Whilst the main purpose of the PRF is to provide an accurate record to facilitate continuity
of care, pre-hospital data may have a wide variety of other uses subject to the necessary caveats
regarding confidentiality (Box 25.3).
CONTENT
Good documentation must include the following:
• Incident number
• Patient details and demographics
• Patient’s history or mechanism of injury
• Relevant clinical findings on examination
• Time stamps
• Drugs administered
• Patient observations
• Decisions made, actions taken and who is making the decisions
• Any information given to the patient
• Follow-up arrangements
• Any information surrounding patient refusal of examination, treatment or hospital admission
• Signature and date
The guidelines for doctors in Good Medical Practice (GMC 2013; Box 25.4) provide useful
guidance for all clinicians.
All patients have a right to expect a timely response when requesting the attendance of
an emergency service. The time of call is often taken as the closest reliable marker of injury
onset time and may have important implications for further management of the patient. As an
example, it is important to ascertain the time of burn injury, as this influences fluid administra-
tion, whilst the time to defibrillation for a patient in cardiac arrest has important implications
for patient outcome. In the United Kingdom response time targets for the ambulance service
have been set by the government, making the documentation of response times essential.
As a minimum the following response times should be recorded by all pre-hospital practi-
tioners attending an incident (22).
• Time of call
• Time of response
• Time of arrival at scene and/or patient
• Time leaving scene
• Time of arrival at hospital (if appropriate)
312
BOX 25.4: Good Medical Practice Guidelines for Doctors

Record your work clearly, accurately and legibly
▪▪ Documents (including clinical records) must be clear, accurate and legible. Wherever possible
records should be made at the same time as the events recorded or as soon as possible
afterwards.
▪▪ Records that contain personal information about patients, colleagues or others must be kept
securely, and in line with any data protection requirements.
▪▪ Clinical records should include:
– relevant clinical findings
– the decisions made and actions agreed, and who is making the decisions and agreeing the
actions
– the information given to patients
– any drugs prescribed or other investigation or treatment
– who is making the record and when
It may also be appropriate to document any delays in patient treatment or transportation, such
as those due to adverse weather conditions or patient location.
As well as recording positive findings, it is also advisable to document important nega-
tives. For example, following comprehensive assessment of a patient, it may be deemed that
immobilisation of the cervical spine is unnecessary. If the patient subsequently wishes to make
a complaint or institute legal proceedings, any documentation will be relied upon to provide a
robust defence of the decisions made at the time of the incident. It must be remembered that
this may not occur until years after the original event.
As patients have a right to access their own medical records under the Data Protection Act
1988, it is imperative that documentation is professional and in keeping with that expected
by colleagues and regulatory bodies. The use of abbreviations should be avoided where
possible, as this will prevent ambiguity when read by other medical personnel and avoid
distress to patients and their relatives, especially if misinterpreted. The Health and Care
Professions Council states that paramedics must ‘understand the need to use only acceptable
terminology’ in making records, whilst the Nursing and Midwifery Council recommends
‘that records should be factual and not include unnecessary abbreviations, jargon, meaningless
phrases or irrelevant speculation’ (23,24).
REFUSAL OF CARE OR NON-HOSPITAL ATTENDANCE

Patients who request the attendance of pre hospital personnel but subsequently refuse assess-
ment or attendance at hospital represent 50%–90% of litigation cases in some studies (25,26).
Patients under the influence of alcohol or illicit drugs and those with central nervous system
impairment or mental illness represent the most difficult to fully evaluate. It is therefore imper-
ative that particular care is taken to document findings, advice given and patient disposition in
these groups of patients (27).
Meticulous documentation is also essential in the event that the clinical condition does
not mandate the patient travelling to hospital or if the patient refuses admission. A thor-
ough assessment must be undertaken with adequate documentation explaining any treat-
ment administered, any self-care instructions and any red flag warning signs that the patient
313
or carer should look out for in case of subsequent deterioration. It is also recommended that
under these circumstances a record is made of the patient’s capacity to consent or refuse
treatment along with a note of any witnesses present at the time of patient discharge. This
is particularly important if the patient is left with their next of kin or parent who may be
involved in the provision of ongoing care or supervision. In some cases discussion may have
taken place with other health care providers, for example the patient’s general practitioner, a
hospital specialist, or incident commander, in the event of a major incident and these discus-
sions must be fully documented. Whilst it is appreciated that critical interventions play an
essential role in determining patient outcome, so too does an understanding of the decision-
making process resulting in a management plan.
PRESENTATION
All handwritten notes should be made
in indelible black ink such that is clear to BOX 25.5: Features of Good
the reader and allows legible copies of the Documentation
original notes to be made by photocopier ▪▪ Specific with accurate records of events
or scanning if necessary. In some cases and the mechanism of injury
copies are made at the time of documen- ▪▪ Contemporaneous
tation on to carbon paper. All notes made ▪▪ Concise; providing sufficient, clear
must be legible. Indeed, some advocate the information
use of printing words rather than cursive ▪▪ Objective; avoiding assumptions, for
handw riting (22). example ‘alleged assault’ rather than
Poorly recorded information may be just ‘assault’
as hazardous to a patient as missing infor- ▪▪ Objective; stating the facts and avoiding
mation. Poorly presented documentation subjective comments
which is unclear, inaccurate or difficult to ▪▪ Accurate
follow may result in errors and misinter- ▪▪ Legible if handwritten
pretation. The features of good documen-
tation are listed in Box 25.5.
ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR AMENDMENTS

If information needs to be amended or added to a patient record, it must be ensured that any
entry is signed or initialled and the date and time of the amendment recorded. This will help
to prevent accusations of deception and claims that the new entry is being passed off as part of
the original record (20). If an error is made, this should be struck through with a single line so
that the original entry can still be read, and initialled, timed and dated.
Under the Data Protection Act 1988, patients also have the right to amend any factual inac-
curacies in their medical records or, if appropriate, to have them permanently removed. Patients
do not, however, have the right to ask for entries expressing a professional opinion to be
changed. Where there is dispute over a professional entry, the patient’s view should be docu-
mented alongside any further advice sought from regulatory and indemnity organisations (21).
CONTEMPORANEOUS NOTES
In theory notes should be written contemporaneously. However, in the critically injured patient,
treatment may need to be provided en route to hospital and it may not be possible to make a
314
record during this time. It is also recognised that in the pre-hospital environment the majority
of documentation is prepared in sub-optimal conditions, for example in a moving vehicle or
whilst administering patient treatment. In addition, the pre-hospital practitioner may only have
a short period of time to construct a verbal handover and document all the necessary patient
details and findings before arriving at their destination. Where it is not possible to complete
a comprehensive record of patient care before arrival at hospital, this should be completed at
the earliest opportunity thereafter, usually following verbal patient handover. This will allow
proficient recall of events and prevent important omissions of information that other members
of the health care team would otherwise rely upon to make treatment and prognostic decisions
regarding ongoing patient care.
COPIES
It is often necessary to record notes in a manner that permits multiple copies to be made. This
allows an original copy to be kept by the organisation or individual who made the record,
whilst permitting subsequent copies to be distributed elsewhere, such as being left with the
patient who does not travel to hospital. In the event that the patient is later admitted to hospital,
copies can also be given to the receiving health care facility, ideally with a duplicate forwarded
onto the patient’s usual doctor or general practitioner.
ELECTRONIC RECORDING
The use of electronic media to record, process and store data is an essential part of modern
life. Collection and storage of all recorded data, allowing legible presentation either on
screen or in the form of printouts, is particularly desirable. Further benefits could also be
achieved if collated data was then shared with other health care systems in primary and
secondary care.
Many automated devices currently store a wealth of useful data, for example defibril-
lators accurately record the time of defibrillation, presenting cardiac rhythm and duration
of monitoring, whilst monitoring equipment records the exact time of the vital sign val-
ues. Ideally this information would be immediately integrated into the patient’s health care
record; however, this requires a standardised interface for all medical devices which is not
currently available. Nevertheless, data storage cards within the aforementioned devices do
permit recording of information and knowledge of how to access this may be useful in par-
ticular circumstances (27).
ELECTRONIC PATIENT REPORT FORM (ePRF)

A growing number of pre-hospital providers are moving away from paper-based patient
documentation to electronic devices, as these devices help to improve the accuracy and
legibility of recorded data. They also allow comprehensive data collection that can then
be used to audit the quality and consistency of care provided, whilst avoiding the need
for costly storage. A range of devices and software platforms are available from rug-
ged laptops to smaller tablets and personal pocket computers with a varying ability
to interface with other health care provider IT systems. Such devices allow immediate
access to clinical decision support tools such as National Poisons Databases, drug for-
mularies and national guidelines. They are also able to provide information on previous
patient attendances, allowing comparison of clinical material such as electrocardiograms.
315
Some systems have been integrated with the IT of local emergency departments allowing

immediate sharing of information from the time of input, prior to patient arrival. Not only
does this help to minimise administrative delays at hospital by preventing duplication of
workload but it also optimises patient handover, enabling immediate continuity of patient
treatment. In addition the patient’s hospital notes and previous admissions may be easily
made available prior to the patient’s arrival.
In the UK there is a national strategy to develop the ePRF as part of the NHS National
Programme for IT, resulting in a transition from hard copy patient report forms to an electronic
system. The NHS Information Standards Board has produced national guidance on the mini-
mum clinical information that emergency NHS ambulance personnel in England are required
to record. Its purpose is to improve the comparability of recorded data recorded on the form
across all ambulance services and other health care providers (28). This guidance states that the
following items of data that must be included on the ePRF:
• Details of the patient

• Details of the incident
• Details of the ambulance crew
• Details of the presenting complaint
• Details of patient assessment
• Details of patient treatment or interventions made
• Details of drug administration
• Patient past medical history
• Patient pain score
• Destination hospital or details of discharge at scene if applicable
Whilst some fields on the ePRF may be autopopulated by data collected by the ambulance
call centre, such as time of call to the emergency services or time of arrival of the first responder,
the remainder must be inputted manually by the pre hospital-practitioner. The majority of
input fields are mandatory thus minimising the risk of incomplete data collection. Some data
fields may only apply if a particular condition is met, for example trauma. In addition, ambu-
lance trusts are able to add additional fields that are considered appropriate for regional service
delivery, such as clinical performance indicators (28).
In the future, sychronisation of pre-hospital electronic patient data with the records of other
health care facilities such as general practices or community hospitals may allow the shar-
ing of important information such as allergies, chronic diseases or prescribed medications.
This knowledge would help to assist the practitioner in their management of the patient and
improve patient safety, particularly where the patient or relative was unable or unwilling to
provide this information themselves (27).
AUDIOVISUAL RECORDING
The General Medical Council (GMC) has issued comprehensive guidance on the creation and
use of audiovisual material, such as video recordings or photographic material. This includes a
wide range of recording devices including digital cameras, video cameras and mobile phones.
Specific guidance on the use of these devices is provided with reference to both adult and
paediatric patients and those who lack capacity to consent to usage of such material. Most pre-
hospital organisations provide guidance as to how any material taken should be used or stored,
but the principles remain the same.
316
Legal requirements
The essential principles of audiovisual recording (29) include maintaining the patient’s
privacy and dignity; ensuring, when possible, that consent has been obtained before making
any recordings; and stopping recording and/or deleting images following any patient request
to do so. If the images are to be used for any purpose, the patient’s consent must be obtained
and recordings must be stored in an appropriately secure place. However ‘if you judge an adult
to lack capacity and where treatment must be provided immediately, recordings may still be made
where they form part of an investigation or treatment that you are providing in accordance with
common law’ (29).
Visual recordings made of the scene or injuries sustained may enhance teaching, train-
ing and assessments of health care professionals and students. If such material is to be used
for any purpose other than for direct patient benefit, then further consent must be obtained
from the patient. Where possible the recording should be anonymised or coded (29). It
is important to bear in mind that even insignificant details may still make the patient
identifiable.
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
Strict rules govern the recording and storage of patient information. This includes all written
and digital documentation, clinical or non-clinical data. In the United Kingdom, a named
individual, usually a senior member of the organisation (Caldicott Guardian), must take
responsibility for protecting patient confidentiality and enabling appropriate information
sharing. Most pre-hospital organisations will have guidelines detailing how, what and when
patient information should be recorded and how this should be stored. Good information
governance should not be underestimated and heavy fines have been imposed on health care
organisations in the UK which have failed in their responsibility to keep patient information
confidential and secure (30).
CONFIDENTIALITY AND ACCESS TO MEDICAL DOCUMENTATION

Maintaining patient confidentiality is not only central to maintaining a therapeutic patient rela-
tionship but is also a legal principle which must be maintained even following the death of the
patient. It is also a condition of registration with the GMC, Nursing and Midwifery Council, and
the Health and Care Professions Council.
The principle of confidentiality extends beyond that of divulging confidential patient infor-
mation to ensuring that any written documentation is securely stored (31). Medical records
should not be left in a position where unauthorised access may easily occur.
Despite the need to keep all patient data confidential there are occasions when such infor-
mation may be disclosed. This is discussed next.
DISCLOSURE WITH CONSENT

Health care records may be disclosed to other parties if the patient gives their consent. Requests
from insurance companies or individuals involved in legal proceedings (for example personal
injury claims) are common and information may only be disclosed with written agreement
from the patient. It is important to ensure that any information provided only extends to that
agreed in the written authority the patient provides.
317
DISCLOSURE WITHOUT PATIENT CONSENT

Disclosure without patient consent may only occur if the disclosure is required by law, for
example by court order or is judged by the practitioner to be in the public interest. In determin-
ing whether there is a public interest justification to breach confidentiality, it is necessary to
weigh the harm that is likely to arise from non-disclosure of information against the possible
harm to the patient of disclosure. The police may also request disclosure of information in
certain defined situations when the information is required for the prosecution of a criminal
case or in the interests of public safety. There are clearly established regulations regarding the
disclosure by clinicians of information to the police. Information must without exception be
disclosed if the clinician is ordered to do so by a court.
DISCLOSURE TO CLINICAL TEAM MEMBERS

Most patients understand that personal information will be shared with other health care pro-
fessionals in order to facilitate their ongoing care. The sharing of information should be on a
need-to-know basis only, and patients have the right to request that particular information
remain confidential. Where this occurs, the patient’s request should be respected unless the
withholding of information from other health care team members would put the patient or
others at risk of serious harm or death.
RELATIVES
Patient’s relatives are often present at the scene of the incident or may arrive before the patient is
transported to hospital. If the patient is conscious with capacity to consent, the easiest method
is to ask the patient themselves if they will give permission to discuss their condition and treat-
ment with their relatives and if so, the degree of detail. Where a patient is not able to provide
consent to this disclosure, it is still possible to discuss personal information with a patient’s
relatives. The GMC states ‘you may need to share personal information with a patient’s relatives,
friends or carer to enable you to assess the patient’s best interests’. Deciding how much detail to
disclose is a matter of individual judgment when determining what is in the patient’s best
interests. It is important to ensure that only relevant information pertaining to the particular
condition is discussed.
THE POLICE
In general the police have no more right of access to medical records than anybody else, except
in the following circumstances:
• Under the Road Traffic Act where the police may require the name and address of
someone suspected of some form of traffic offence
• When the patient consents to disclosure
• To comply with a court order
• When public interest in disclosure outweighs the public interest in preserving patient
confidentiality
When victims of violence refuse police assistance, disclosure may still be justified if others
remain at risk, such as domestic violence where children may be at risk, or when the assault
involved the use of weapons. The GMC states that where a patient has received gunshot or knife
318
Summary
wounds, doctors have a duty to inform the police immediately (32). In general this extends only
to the release of the patient’s personal details such as name and address. However, it may also
be appropriate to disclose confidential health care information of the patient. The police have a
duty to consider whether there is a likelihood of further attacks.
CHILD PROTECTION
In any case where there is concern over a child’s welfare, the child’s best interests must be
made paramount. This may require disclosure of confidential information to social services or
the police, and wherever possible the parents’ consent to disclosure should be obtained. This
may not always be required however, if doing so would put the child at increased risk of injury.
SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES
In the event of a mass casualty scenario, modifications may need to be made to documentation.
Triage cards often provide a useful place to document patient details, injuries and destination.
This can be supplemented later on by more comprehensive medical notes or by the completion
of a PRF.
There are many other forms of documentation that pre-hospital care practitioners may have
to complete in line with their routine duties, for example critical incident report forms, inocula-
tion injury forms, administration forms or police statements. The same diligence in completing
these forms must be shown as when completing any other patient documentation.
SUMMARY
Handover and documentation are skills that are rarely taught but are as essential as any other
in the provision of good quality pre-hospital care. A failure of either can lead to duplication of
effort, loss of information and patient harm. It is essential that when a pre-alert is passed to
hospital all key elements that may allow a hospital to prepare for patient arrival are passed.
Using a standardised format such as ATMIST allows this to be achieved with relative ease. The
primary role of good documentation is to assist with continued patient care. It also acts as refer-
ence to hospital clinicians of the events pre-hospital, for research and audit, and in case of com-
plaint or legal proceedings. As such, meticulous documentation must occur with every patient
contact. As well as moral and regulatory body obligations, the Data Protection Act 1988 places
specific duties upon each individual and organisation handling patient data. These duties are
reinforced by the Caldicott principles (33). The format of data can vary from written records
to electronic patient report forms through to audiovisual recordings and digital images. The
pre-hospital practitioner must stay aware of the guidance available to them and the constraints
these may pose. It is likely that electronic documentation will play an increasingly significant
role. The introduction of the electronic patient report form (ePRF) and its integration with other
NHS IT systems is likely to improve safety and efficiency of pre-hospital care medicine.
In general, only individual patients themselves may consent for what, how and when records
can be made and shared about them (34). Most patients recognise that documentation will be
made and shared with others within the health care team in order to continue to manage their
health care. However, separate consent is required if this information is to be used for any other
purpose (e.g. publication). Despite this, there are occasions when it may be possible to disclose
319
information without the patient’s consent. Such situations are uncommon, and pre-hospital
practitioners are encouraged to seek guidance from their regulatory, employing or medico-legal
organisation where they feel this is appropriate.
REFERENCES
1. Murray SL, Crouch R, Ainsworth-Smith M. Quality of the handover of patient care:
A comparison of pre-hospital and emergency department notes. Int Emerg Nurs. 2012;
20(1):24–7.
2. Yong G, Dent AW, Weiland TJ. Handover from paramedics: Observations and emer-
gency department clinician perceptions. Emerg Med Australas. 2008;20(2):149–55.
3. Jeffcott SA, Evans SM, Cameron PA, Chin GS, Ibrahim JE. Improving measurement in
clinical handover. Qual Saf Health Care. 2009;18(4):272–7.
4. Safe handover: safe patients. British Medical Association Junior Doctors Committee
2004.
5. Evans SM, Murray A, Patrick I, Fitzgerald M, Smith S, Cameron P. Clinical handover in
the trauma setting: A qualitative study of paramedics and trauma team members. Qual
Saf Health Care. 2010;19(6):e57.
6. Carter AJ, Davis KA, Evans LV, Cone DC. Information loss in emergency medical ser-
vices handover of trauma patients. Prehosp Emerg Care. 2009;13(3):280–5.
7. Evans SM, Murray A, Patrick I, Fitzgerald M, Smith S, Andrianopoulos N, Cameron
P. Assessing clinical handover between paramedics and the trauma team. Injury.
2010;41(5):460–4.
8. Stiell A, Forster AJ, Stiell IG et al. Prevalence of information gaps in the emergency
department and the effect on patient outcomes. CMAJ. 2003;169(10):1023–8.
9. Thakore S, Morrison W. A survey of the perceived quality of patient handover by ambu-
lance staff in the resuscitation room. Emerg Med J. 2001;18(4):293–6.
10. Owen C, Hemmings L, Brown T. Lost in translation: Maximizing handover effective-
ness between paramedics and receiving staff in the emergency department. Emerg Med
Australas. 2009;21(2):102–7.
11. Learmonth SR, Ireland A, McKiernan CJ, Burton P. Does initiation of an ambulance
pre-alert call reduce the door to needle time in acute myocardial infarct? Emerg Med J.
2006;23(1):79–81.
12. McInerney JJ, Ward CT, Hussan TB. Strategies to improve communication at the pre-
hospital/accident and emergency interface. Prehospital Immediate Care. 2000:176–9.
13. Brown E, Bleetman A. Ambulance alerting to hospital: The need for clearer guidance.
Emerg Med J. 2006;23(10):811–14.
14. Crystal R, Bleetman A, Steyn R. Ambulance crew assessment of trauma severity
and alerting practice for trauma patients brought to a general hospital. Resuscitation.
2004;60:279–82.
15. Budd H, Almond L, Porter K. A survey of trauma alert criteria and handover practice in
England and Wales. Emerg Med J. 2007;24:302–4.
16. Bruce K, Suserud BO. The handover process and triage of ambulance-borne patients:
The experiences of emergency nurses. Nurs Crit Care. 2005;10(4):201–9.
17. Talbot R, Bleetman A. Retention of information by emergency department staff at
ambulance handover: Do standardised approaches work? Emerg Med J. 2007;24(8):539–42.
320
Further reading
18. Stannard A, Tai N, Bowley D et al. Key performance indicators in British military
trauma. World J Surg. 2008;32:1870–3.
19. Selden BS, Schnitzer PG, Nolan FX. Medicolegal documentation of prehospital triage.
Ann Emerg Med. 1990;19(5):547–51.
20. MPS factsheet, Access to Health Records. www.medical protection.org/uk/factsheets
21. MPS booklet, MPS Guide to Medical Records. www.medical protection.org/uk/booklet
22. Harkins S. Documentation: Why is it so important? Emerg Med Serv. 2002;31(10):89–90,
93–4.
23. HPC, Standards of proficiency – Paramedics. http://www.hpc-uk.org/assets/documents
/1000051CStandards_of_Proficiency_Paramedics.pdf (accessed 25 May 2013).
24. NMC, Record keeping – Guidance for nurses and midwives. http://www.nmc-uk.org/Docu
ments/NMC-Publications/NMC-Record-Keeping-Guidance.pdf (accessed 25 May 2013).
25. Soler JM, Montes MF, Egol EB et al. The ten year malpractice experience of a large urban
EMS system. Ann Emerg Med. 1985;14:982–5.
26. Ayres JR. Jr: The law and You: Causes of lawsuits: Emergency Medical Update (video-
cassette series). Winslow, Washington, Ellen Lockert and Assoc, Inc., 1988 Vol1 P4.
27. Felleiter P, Helm M, Lampl L, Bock KH. Data processing in prehospital emergency
medicine. Int J Clin Monit Comput. 1995;12(1):37–41.
28. Ambulance Electronic Patient Report: Standard specification Information Standards
Board for Health and Social Care 2011. www.isb.nhs.uk/documents/isb-1516/amd-48
-2010/1516482010spec.pdf
29. GMC, Making and Using Visual and Audio Recordings of Patients – Guidance for
Doctors (2011). www.gmc-uk.org/recordings
30. NHS Trust fined £325,000 following data breach affecting thousands of patients and
staff. Information Commissioners Office Press Release. http://www.ico.org.uk/news
/latest_news/2012/nhs-trust-fined-325000-following-data-breach-affecting-thousands
-of-patients-and-staff-01062012 (accessed 25 May 2013).
31. GMC, Confidentiality – Guidance for Doctors (2009). www.gmc-uk.org/recordings
32. GMC Confidentiality: Reporting Gunshot and Knife Wounds (2009).
33. The Caldicott Guardian Manual 2010 Department of Health UK.
34. Information Commissioners Office: Principles of data protection. http://www.ico.org.uk
/for_organisations/data_protection/the_guide/the_principles (accessed 2 June 2013).
FURTHER READING
Borst N, Crilly J, Wallis M, Paaterson E, Chaboyer W. Clinical handover of patients arriving
by ambulance to the emergency department – A literature review. International Emergency
Nursing 2010;18:210–20.
Chapleau W, Pons P. Emergency Medical Technician: Making the Difference. Elsevier, 2006.
General Medical Council. Consent – Patients and doctors making decision together. Guidance
for Doctors 2008. www.gmc-uk.org/recordings.
The Information Commissioners Office. http://ico.org.uk.
Data Protection Act 1988. http://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1998/29/contents.
321
Law and ethics in
pre-hospital care
26
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the important legal principles relevant to the practice of pre-hospital care
▪▪ Be aware of some of the ethical challenges of pre-hospital practice
▪▪ Be more able to practise in the pre-hospital environment safely and within the law
INTRODUCTION
Central to the issues of lawful and ethical practice in pre-hospital trauma care is the concept
of accountability. Whilst clinicians and leaders have a considerable degree of freedom and
autonomy in making clinical and policy decisions, they are accountable for their actions and
for the decisions they make. Oxford Dictionaries regard those who are accountable as being
‘required or expected to justify actions or decisions’ (1). The ability to justify one’s decisions
or actions is important, but it is equally important to know who it is that can call us to account
for our decisions or actions. That professionals engaged in the provision and delivery of any
aspect of healthcare are accountable to their patients is obvious. However, there are also official
bodies charged with the responsibility of protecting the interests of service users, acting on
their behalf and calling clinicians and leaders to account. In particular, clinicians and leaders
are subject to the accountability requirements of their professional regulator and in law. They
are also expected, partly as a matter of professional regulation but also as a matter of personal
integrity, to operative within an ethical framework.
This chapter will address some of the issues faced by those involved in pre-hospital trauma
care in the areas of professional regulation, the law and ethical theory. Whilst these issues are
considered individually, there is overlap between the different areas of regulation, law and eth-
ics, and occasionally contradiction between them.
322
Criminal and civil law
PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTABILITY AND REGULATION

Most of those working in the field of pre-hospital trauma care will be subject to professional
regulation: doctors by the General Medical Council, paramedics by the Health and Care
Professions Council, and nurses by the Nursing and Midwifery Council. Whilst each of these
professional groups has a different regulator, the standards the regulators set out as required
of their registrants are broadly similar with the protection of the public as a central tenet. In
the case of the General Medical Council, this is articulated in the document ‘Good Medical
Practice’ (2); in ‘Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics’ (3) for the Health and Care
Professions Council; and ‘The Code: Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics for Nurses
and Midwives’ (4) for the Nursing and Midwifery Council.
The published standards of conduct set out the requirements of healthcare professionals in
generic terms but must be applied to the specialist field in which the professional is working, in
this case pre-hospital trauma care. Professional regulators require
• That registrants are skilled and knowledgeable in their area of practice

• That their skills and knowledge are up to date
• That they act within the limits of their own knowledge and skills
It is incumbent upon registrants to define their scope of practice, in that they must only
undertake skills they are competent to perform or make decisions they are competent to make.
This is particularly important in specialist areas, such as pre-hospital trauma care where there
is a risk of informal and ad hoc development of skills without the appropriate governance
arrangements being in place.
Regulators require registrants to work safely and effectively, to engage in effective com-
munication with those they encounter in their professional practice and to provide appropriate
supervision of those to whom they have delegated tasks. In highly pressured and time-critical
situations, such as are frequently encountered in pre-hospital trauma care, registrants must
take care to avoid inappropriate delegation for the sake of expedience. Asking a colleague to
undertake a task they are not qualified to, or lawfully permitted to undertake, can expose the
patient to increased risk. Allowing a student or trainee to undertake a task they have been
taught to do, that will be part of their role and is performed under close supervision is permis-
sible. This is not delegation but supervised practice. The two are not the same and should not
be confused.
Professional regulators exercise their duty to protect the public in a number of ways: ensuring
those entering the profession have qualified in their discipline and specialism via an approved
programme of study, maintaining a register of those eligible to practise in that discipline, and
monitoring standards of performance and conduct. In effect the regulator seeks to ensure reg-
istrants meet and maintain standards and that they are fit for practice.
CRIMINAL AND CIVIL LAW
LEGAL ACCOUNTABILITY
There is no single legal system operating in the United Kingdom. There are in fact three systems:
law applying to England and Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. There are some broad prin-
ciples shared across the different legal systems, but there are also some significant differences.
323
Law and ethics in pre-hospital care
It is beyond the scope of this chapter to provide an analysis of the differences. The broad prin-
ciples will be considered in the context of the legal system operating in England and Wales.
In very broad terms, the law can be divided into criminal law and civil law. Both branches
have relevance to those working in pre-hospital trauma care.
Criminal law relates to behaviour that is forbidden by the state and which the state seeks
to control by means of punishment. It is designed to maintain order and protect society (5).
Criminal offences include assault, homicide, possession and supply of drugs, and driving under
the influence of drugs or alcohol.
Civil law relates to matters of concern to individuals rather than the state, for example a
contract between two or more individuals. Civil law includes law as it applies to the family, the
law relating to property and the area this chapter will concentrate on, the law of tort. The law
of tort relates to a wrong affecting an individual or individuals and which has not arisen from
a prior agreement. It is there to preserve the rights of the individual (5). Negligence falls within
the remit of the law of tort.
Law is derived from two main sources: that created by parliament in the form of Acts of
Parliament (statute law) and that created by precedent, following the decisions made by the
courts in previous cases, often described as common law or case law.
STATUTE
Those working in the pre-hospital trauma care are subject to the requirements of an extensive
and diverse range of statutory legislation. The possession, prescribing and administration of
medicines falling within, for example, the Medicines Act 1968 and the Misuse of Drugs Act
1971 which are implemented in orders such as the Prescription Only Medicines (Human Use)
Order 1997. Other important legislation relating to clinical care includes the Mental Capacity
Act 2005, the Mental Health Act 1983, the Human Rights Act 1998, the Equality Act 2010 and
the Children Act 1989.
Other legislation, whilst not directly concerned with clinical care, has clear implications for
those working in the field of pre-hospital trauma care, for example the Health and Safety at Work
Act 1974, the Health and Social Care Act 2012, the Data Protection Act 1998, Access to Health
Records Act 1990 and the Freedom of Information Act 2000. In addition there is a legislation
relating to operating and driving an emergency vehicle as well as general road traffic legislation.
COMMON LAW
Civil law is largely underpinned by the law of precedent and is created by the interpretation, by
the courts, of legal principles and decisions made by the courts in previous cases. For this reason,
the law continues to evolve. However, there are a number of landmark cases which form the
basis of legal principles and reasoning. For example, in establishing the minimum standard of
care a clinician should provide the courts often follow the principle set out in the case of Bolam
v Friern Hospital Management Committee (1957). In that case, Mr Justice McNair, when directing
the jury, stated that a doctor is not guilty of negligence if he has acted in accordance with the practice
accepted as proper by a responsible body of medical men skilled in that particular art. Although specific
reference is made to doctors, the principle has been applied in respect of many other healthcare
professionals. Almost inevitably, the Bolam test has been successfully challenged in the courts in
the case of Bolitho (Bolitho v. City and Hackney Health Authority [1997]) which established that a
judge would be entitled to choose between two bodies of expert opinion and to reject an opinion
which is ‘logically indefensible’ even if it were followed by a body of the profession. Thus Bolam
324
Consent and capacity
can no longer be relied on as a defence, although a judge is likely to override the opinion of a
body of professional experts in only the most exceptional circumstances.
CONSENT AND CAPACITY

There is a common law principle that individuals have the right to have their bodily integ-
rity protected against invasion (6), underlining the individual’s right to autonomy and self-
determination. In accepting this principle, the pre-hospital trauma clinician requires permission
or consent in order to lawfully treat the individual. There are of course a small number of cir-
cumstances where the clinician can intervene without consent, for example in an emergency
and where the patient is unconscious.
It is generally accepted that for consent to be valid there are three basic requirements: con-
sent must be given freely and voluntarily, the individual must have sufficient information on
which to base their consent, and they must have sufficient mental capacity to be able to give
consent (7).
If, therefore, an individual has the mental capacity to do so, they are free to decide whether
they agree to a proposed treatment or not, even if the healthcare professional believes that
decision to be unwise. Attempting to persuade an individual to accept a course of action, to
the point of coercion, is likely to invalidate consent. The argument that this was done on the
basis of acting in the patient’s best interest will provide no defence. Patients must be given the
freedom to make their own choices. However, in order to make a decision, individuals need
information on which to base their decision. The information provided by the clinician must
be balanced, allowing the patient to understand the benefits and risks. It is not appropriate to
provide the patient with only the benefits of an intervention in order to sway their decision and
secure consent to proceed. In accepting that the clinician is bound to provide the patient with
sufficient information to make a decision, it is less clear how much information the clinician
should provide. The principle is addressed in the case of Sidaway v Bethlem RHG (1985) which
established that it was not necessary to warn the patient of every risk, but that the patient
should be provided with sufficient information for them to reach a balanced decision and the
disclosure of risk must be in line with that of a respectable body of medical opinion.
The issue of whether the individual has the mental capacity to give consent is set out in the
Mental Capacity Act 2005. The overarching principle in this legislation is that everyone has
mental capacity regardless of age or appearance. The act sets out the principles in Box 26.1.
BOX 26.1: Requirements under the Mental Capacity Act 2005

▪▪ A person must be assumed to have capacity unless it is established that he lacks capacity.
▪▪ A person is not to be treated as unable to make a decision unless all practicable steps to help
him to do so have been taken without success.
▪▪ A person is not to be treated as unable to make a decision merely because he makes an
unwise decision.
▪▪ An act done, or decision made, under this act for or on behalf of a person who lacks capacity
must be done, or made, in his best interests.
▪▪ Before the act is done, or the decision is made, regard must be had to whether the purpose for
which it is needed can be as effectively achieved in a way that is less restrictive of the person’s
rights and freedom of action.
325
Pre-hospital trauma clinicians are often in the difficult position of having to determine if an
individual lacks capacity to allow them to act without consent, in their best interest. In order
to establish if an individual has mental capacity, the act deems an individual to lack mental
capacity if they cannot
• Understand the information relevant to the decision

• Retain that information
• Use or weigh up that information as part of the process of making the decision
• Communicate their decision, by any means
CONSENT AND CAPACITY: CHILDREN

In law, an adult is a person aged 18 or over, but this does not mean that younger people cannot make
autonomous decisions. The principles of the Mental Capacity Act 2005 stand regardless of age.
Children 16 or 17 years old are presumed to have capacity and are able to give consent for
treatment, unless they lack capacity for reasons other than age. Whilst the 16 or 17 year old can
consent to treatment; their decision to refuse treatment can be overridden by a person with
parental responsibility.
The issue of who has parental responsibility is not as clear-cut as it first appears. For exam-
ple, the father of the child may not have parental responsibility if he was not married to the
mother at the time of the birth or is not named on the birth certificate. Parental responsibility
under the Children Act 1989 is described in Box 26.2.
BOX 26.2: Responsibility for Children (Children Act 1989)

▪▪ A mother always has parental responsibility for her child. Unless this has passed to another
agency following statutory intervention.
▪▪ A father only has this responsibility if he is married to the mother when the child is born or has
acquired legal responsibility for his child by:
– Jointly registering the birth of the child with the mother (since December 2003)
– A parental responsibility agreement with the mother
– A parental responsibility order, made by a court
– A child arrangements or residence order made by a court.
▪▪ A local authority may have responsibility designated to them in a care order in respect of the
child (but not where the child is being looked after under section 20 of the Children Act, also
known as being ‘accommodated’ or in ‘voluntary care’).
▪▪ A local authority or other authorised person may hold an emergency protection order in respect
of the child.
In respect of same sex civil partners, the biological mother will automatically have parental
responsibility. Her partner can acquire parental responsibility if
• She and the mother were in a civil partnership or, deemed to have been in a civil
partnership, at the time of the child’s birth.
• Her name is registered on the birth certificate.
• She has entered into a parental responsibility agreement with the mother.
• She has obtained a court order for parental responsibility.
• She has a residence order.
326
Negligence
In the landmark case of Gillick v West Norfolk Area Health Authority [1986] AC 112, Lord
Scarman indicated that a child under 16 years may be legally competent to give consent to
treatment providing they have ‘sufficient understanding and intelligence to enable [them] to
understand fully what is proposed’. In interpreting this, the clinician ought to take into account
whether the child
• Understands the medical issues including benefit and risk

• Has views of their own and is not just repeating the views of others
• Understands the moral issues of the decision
• Is evidently competent
This, of course, is a complex issue when there is time to make a decision. However, it is
significantly more challenging in a time-critical situation requiring important decisions to be
made quickly.
The Mental Capacity Act 2005 makes provision for those emergency situations affecting
adults and children and where consent cannot be obtained. In such circumstances the clinician
can provide necessary clinical care limited to saving a life or preventing significant deteriora-
tion. In practice, it is extremely unlikely that a legal challenge would follow treatment given in
good faith and in what was believed to be the patient’s best interest.
NEGLIGENCE
The matter of clinical malpractice can be dealt with by a number of means, including criminal
prosecution, regulatory fitness to practise procedures and civil law, normally within the scope
of the law of tort (7).
In order for an individual to succeed in a civil claim of negligence they must demonstrate
that they were owed a duty of care by the defendant, that there was a breach in that duty of
care and this resulted in them being harmed (7). Some argue that there is a further theoretical
construct, that of fault (6).
Simply put, a duty of care is owed to anyone you may foreseeably injure (7). The issue of
whether injury was foreseeable was raised in the case of Donoghue (or McAlister) v Stevenson
[1932] AC 562, where the judge indicated that ‘you must take reasonable care to avoid acts or omis-
sions which you can reasonably foresee would be likely to injure your neighbour. Who, then, in law is
my neighbour? The answer seems to be persons who are so closely and directly affected by my act that
I ought reasonably to have them in contemplation as being so affected when I am directing my mind to
the acts or omissions which are called in question’. In respect of the pre-hospital clinician treating
an injured patient, it is apparent that the clinician would owe the patient a duty of care.
Reference has already been made to the Bolam Case (p. 373) which offers the clinician a
defence against a claim of clinical negligence if they can demonstrate there is a responsible
body of medical (professional) opinion that the clinician’s actions were acceptable (7). This
issue was evolved in the case of Bolitho v City and Hackney HA [1997] 4 All ER 771 which
introduced a test of logic in that a judge is entitled to take a view that a clinician may not
have acted reasonably even if fellow professionals regarded it reasonable if it is not logical
to do so.
The matter of harm is tied into the concept of causation, which might be best explained
by way of the ‘but for’ test. The principle being ‘but for the actions of the clinician the patient
would not have been harmed’. In simple terms had the clinician not done what they did, or
omitted to do what they ought to have done, the patient would not have been harmed.
327
ETHICAL RESPONSIBILITY
It is suggested that in making ethical decisions the clinician should contemplate ‘what ought I
do?’ rather than the ‘what will I do?’ (8). In order to decide what one ought to do, clinicians need
a framework to support ethical decision-making. Ethicists have proposed four key principles
worthy of consideration (9), namely autonomy, beneficence, non-maleficence and justice.
AUTONOMY
Autonomy is a principle at the centre of the Mental Capacity Act 2005 but has a broader reach.
It is the principle that individuals have the right of self-determination in making decisions for
themselves. This includes the notion that an individual is entitled to make decisions the clini-
cian or others might regard as being unwise. In such circumstances clinicians can be tempted
into taking an alternative course of action against the patients stated wishes, claiming to be
acting in the patient’s best interest as a means of justification. Clearly this disregards the indi-
vidual’s right of autonomy and such a course of action may not actually be acting in the patient’s
best interest.
BENEFICENCE
The principle of beneficence is one of aiming to do good. This must be balanced against the
patient’s right of autonomy. To that end, the decision to do good or act in the patient’s best
interests should be patient centred and not clinician centred (10).
NON-MALEFICENCE
Non-maleficence is almost the opposite to the principle of beneficence in that it is the principle
of doing no harm. However, it is a principle of balance that accepts harm may not be entirely
avoidable, for example the insertion of an intraosseous cannula may necessary to save a life, but
may not avoid doing harm such as pain or the introduction of the risk of infection. The balance
of beneficence with non-maleficence is about striving to eliminate avoidable harm.
JUSTICE
When regarded from a theoretical perspective, patients would receive all the necessary care to
the highest standards available with few if any negative effects. In reality such a situation does
not exist, for many reasons, not least because of an environment of finite resources. The principle
of justice deals with these issues, incorporating fairness, equality and reasonableness (7).
CONCLUSION
Those involved with pre-hospital trauma care are subject to a degree of scrutiny, guidance and
direction, in common with all other healthcare providers. Safe practice (for both patient and
doctor) requires a knowledge of legal principles and an awareness of potential ethical chal-
lenges. Much of this, however, is common sense: if in doubt, the practitioner should always do
what they consider to be best for the patient.
328
References
REFERENCES
1. Oxford Dictionaries. Accountable (adj.). Accessed December 22, 2014. http://www
.oxforddictionaries.com/definition/english/accountable.
2. General Medical Council. Good medical practice. September 2014.
3. Health and Care Professions Council. Standards of conduct, performance and ethics.
July 2012.
4. Nursing and Midwifery Council. The Code: Standards of conduct, performance and eth-
ics for nurses and midwives. July 2014.
5. Hope RA, Savulescu J, Hendrick J. Medical Ethics and Law. Elsevier Health Sciences,
2008.
6. Mason K, Laurie G. Mason and McCall Smith’s Law and Medical Ethics. 9th ed. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 2013.
7. Herring J. Medical Law. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011.
8. Thomson A. Critical Reasoning in Ethics. London: Routledge, 2002.
9. Beauchamp TL, Childress JF. Principles of Biomedical Ethics. 7th ed. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 2013.
10. Campbell AV, Gillett G, Jones DG. Medical Ethics. New York: Oxford University Press,
2005.
329
Research and audit
in pre-hospital care
27
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand what the processes of research and audit entail

▪▪ Understand the importance of collecting high-quality clinical data
▪▪ Understand how research and audit improve clinical care
INTRODUCTION
Clinicians, educators and researchers in all clinical specialties seek the best outcomes for
patients. Those involved in pre-hospital trauma care should be no different. Key to achieving
this aim is the use of high-quality, outcome-focused evidence to inform and underpin practice.
This important principle is, however, more difficult to adhere to in pre-hospital care than in
many other areas of medical practice.
Standard, generally accepted practice in the pre-hospital management of the trauma patient
often lacks an evidence base. Where evidence does exist, it is often weak, based on consensus
opinion and lacking empirical rigor. The assumption is often made that interventions which
have been shown to be effective in hospital will be equally appropriate in immediate care.
There are, however, some notable examples of areas of practice supported by high-quality evi-
dence, for example we know that early pre-hospital administration of tranexamic acid to trauma
patients with, or at risk of, significant bleeding reduces the risk of death from haemorrhage (1).
The challenge here is knowing the extent to which this knowledge has been disseminated and
is implemented in practice. We do not know if, internationally, nationally or locally, all eligible
patients who would benefit from the treatment are receiving it in line with published guidance.
Research and audit help address some of the challenges, with clinicians using existing
research evidence to inform their practice as well as identifying clinical problems which are
worthy of investigation. Researchers should be responding to the ideas emerging from practice
and developing the evidence which will allow educators to help disseminate their findings.
Audit then helps in the implementation of new evidence-based guidelines and the understand-
ing of the extent to which existing evidence-based guidance is implemented in practice.
330
Clinical questions
At least in part because pre-hospital emergency medicine has only recently been accepted
as a medical sub-speciality, there is not, as yet, a peer-reviewed journal devoted to this area of
practice.
RESEARCH
The word research can convey a sense of dry academic work somewhat remote from the real
world of clinical practice, yet, when we consider research in the context of evidence-based prac-
tice, the benefits for clinicians and for patients become obvious.
Research provides clinicians with the evidence to change practice, to know how effective
their intervention or interventions are likely to be, and to understand the likely benefits and
risks for patients. In the words of Archie Cochrane, evidence-based health care is ‘the conscien-
tious use of current best evidence in making decisions about the care of individual patients or the deliv-
ery of health services. Current best evidence is up-to-date information from relevant, valid research
about the effects of different forms of health care, the potential for harm from exposure to particular
agents, the accuracy of diagnostic tests, and the predictive power of prognostic factors’ (2).
There are thus two groups: the researchers, who produce the evidence through scien-
tific study, and those who consume the evidence, including both clinicians and policy mak-
ers. The two are mutually dependent: clinicians identifying aspects of practice where they
lack evidence to inform decisions, the researchers undertaking scientific study to answer the
questions and the clinicians implementing the findings of the researcher. Whilst the roles
are different, it is not uncommon for the clinician and the researcher to be one and the same
person.
CLINICAL QUESTIONS
Clinicians can and do encounter situations where they are unsure of the right course of action
or which course of action would deliver the greatest benefit or least risk to the patient. In the
face of uncertainty, it has been argued that the first step is to translate that uncertainty into
answerable clinical questions (3).
For questions to be useful they should be answerable, specific and clearly articulated. With
this in mind, questions should be constructed in a structured and reproducible manner. It is
not essential that a standard question template is used, but the three-part question and the PICO
question (population [participants], intervention [or exposure for observational studies], com-
parator and outcomes) are often used.
The three-part question includes the patient characteristic (e.g. adults with penetrating
chest injury), an intervention or defining question (e.g. respiratory rate) and an outcome (e.g.
survival). This might be constructed into a question such as ‘In adults with penetrating trauma to
the chest (P) is respiratory rate (I) a good predictor of survival (O)?’
An alternative that allows for a comparator to be introduced but follows a similar format is
the PICO question. The P, I and O are as described in the three-part question, but PICO intro-
duces a comparator. A PICO question might be ‘In adult patients with penetrating chest trauma (P)
does the administration of intravenous fluids (I) when compared with not administering intravenous
fluid (C) improve survival (O)?’
331
Research and audit in pre-hospital care
The question can be made more specific by the addition of the context of care, such as the
pre-hospital phase. For example ‘In adult patients with penetrating chest trauma (P) does the admin-
istration of intravenous fluids in the pre-hospital environment (I) improve survival (O) when compared
to withholding intravenous fluid in the pre-hospital environment (C)?’
Patient or population characteristics, interventions and their comparators are often relatively
straightforward to define. Outcome measures can be a little more complex. When formulating
the outcome component, it is advantageous that they are patient orientated rather than disease
orientated. A disease-orientated outcome might focus on the effect of intervention X compared
with intervention Y in arresting catastrophic external haemorrhage. This outcome measures
the control of haemorrhage but does not provide any information on the impact this has on sur-
vival. There would be little benefit if haemorrhage were controlled more quickly using a given
intervention, but that survival rates using either method were the same. A patient-focused
outcome is more concerned with outcomes such as mortality or morbidity. In this case the ques-
tion may focus on whether intervention X resulted in an increased rate of survival to discharge
compared with intervention Y.
DISCOVERING WHAT IS ALREADY KNOWN

Once properly structured, the question can form the basis of a search of the medical literature
to discover if the answer to the question is already known. A well-structured and executed
search strategy will help to identify published work that may answer or contribute to answer-
ing the question. It is important when searching and reviewing the literature that a distinction
is made between opinion and research evidence. Given that the clinician is seeking evidence
to support their decision-making, it is the research evidence to which they should be giving
weight. They may also wish to restrict their search for evidence to particular types of research
which are more robust and scientifically rigorous. This is discussed further in the hierarchy of
evidence.
Caution must be exercised when the search reveals a single research report on a particular
issue. Some large studies may be sufficiently robust to allow their findings to be used to support
clinical decision-making. However, in many cases this evidence does not exist, but there is a
body of smaller studies which, when combined, may provide the clinician with the confidence
to implement findings.
Many research studies have negative findings, that is they do not prove what it was initially
thought they would or they disprove the initial theory. This information can be as important as
studies proving the theory. It is as useful to know if an intervention does not improve outcome
so we can stop doing it, as it is to know something improves outcome. Unfortunately, negative
findings are often not published or may even be suppressed.
COMBINING EXISTING KNOWLEDGE TO PRODUCE ROBUST

EVIDENCE
Perhaps the most valuable source of evidence is where the findings of several studies are com-
bined to produce new knowledge and findings that are more robust than any single report.
Such studies are termed systematic reviews. As the name suggests, a rigorous and systematic
search is made of the literature to identify as much published and unpublished evidence on the
332
Summarising evidence
given issue as possible. This is subjected to detailed analysis and, where appropriate, further
statistical testing, in order to generate new knowledge.
Systematic reviews are particularly helpful to the consumers of research in that the review-
ers have undertaken the time-consuming processes of developing a search strategy, searching
the literature, filtering out weak or irrelevant studies, analysing all of the data and then drawing
conclusions. This allows the consumer of the research to access the best available evidence, but
in a time-efficient manner.
Systematic reviews take a lot of time and can be expensive to conduct. Furthermore, not
all aspects of practice have been investigated in this way. As a result, whilst being potentially
very useful, systematic reviews are relatively few in number and will not cover all areas of pre-
hospital clinical practice.
GENERATING NEW EVIDENCE

For much of health care practice, there is relatively little research evidence to underpin clinical
decisions. Where evidence does not exist, clinical questions may form the basis for scientific
research studies.
Although there are many aspects of pre-hospital trauma care that might benefit from the
attention of scientific research, there are some issues that cannot be investigated for reasons
of cost, practicality or ethics. For example, it might be of value to explore outcome following
oxygen therapy in severe trauma by giving some patients 100% oxygen, some 28% oxygen and
others no oxygen at all. In reality, it is unlikely that such an investigation could be carried out
due to ethical objections. Many would see it as inappropriate to withhold treatment thought to
be but not proven to be effective.
It may not be possible for many pre-hospital clinicians to be directly involved in conducting
primary research. However, clinicians can be enormously helpful in the identification of prac-
tice where they are uncertain of the optimal intervention. Thus they have a vital role in develop-
ing clinical questions even if they are unable to find evidence-based answers.
THE HIERARCHY OF EVIDENCE

Pre-hospital clinicians must be alert to the relative value or potency of the evidence they use
to inform practice. This is often influenced by the methodological approach or design of the
research study. Not all published evidence carries the same weight. Unfortunately much of the
evidence underpinning pre-hospital practice is relatively weak.
A number of frameworks are used to rank research evidence in order of its reliability in
answering research questions. The Oxford 2011 levels of evidence table is widely used for this
purpose (Table 27.1).
SUMMARISING EVIDENCE
It is clearly not practical for clinicians to read all the research evidence relevant to their area
of practice, particularly if this involves reading hundreds of individual papers on any given
issue. The best solution is summarised evidence, where the work of sourcing and reviewing
of the literature is carried out by a review team and the findings published in a digestible form.
333
334
Table 27.1 The Oxford Levels of Evidence
Oxford Centre Evidence-Based Medicine 2011 Levels of Evidence

Question Step 1 Step 2 Step3 Step 4 Step 5
(Level 1*) (Level 2*) (Level 3*) (Level 4*) (Level 5*)
How common is the Local and current Systematic review of Local non-random Case-series** n/a
problem? random sample surveys that allow sample**

surveys (or censuses) matching to local
circumstances**
Is this diagnostic or Systematic review of Individual cross- Non-consecutive Case-control studies, Mechanism-based
monitoring test cross-sectional studies sectional studies with studies, or studies or ‘poor or non- reasoning
accurate? with consistently consistently applied without consistently independent reference
(Diagnosis) applied reference reference standard and applied reference standard’
standard and blinding blinding standards**
What will happen if we Systematic review of Inception cohort Cohort study or control Case-series or n/a
do not add a therapy? inception cohort studies arm of randomised case-control studies,
(Prognosis) studies trial* or poor quality
prognostic cohort
study**
Does this intervention Systematic review of Randomised trial or Non-randomised Case-series or Mechanism-based
help? randomised trials or observational study controlled cohort/ case-control, or reasoning
(Treatment Benefits) n-of-1 trials with dramatic effect follow-up study** historically controlled
studies**
(Continued )
Table 27.1 (Continued) The Oxford Levels of Evidence
Oxford Centre Evidence-Based Medicine 2011 Levels of Evidence

Question Step 1 Step 2 Step3 Step 4 Step 5
(Level 1*) (Level 2*) (Level 3*) (Level 4*) (Level 5*)
What are the Systematic review of Individual randomised Non-randomised Case-series, case- Mechanism-based
COMMON harms? randomised trials, trial or (exceptionally) controlled cohort/ control studies, or reasoning
(Treatment Harms) systematic review of observational study follow-up study historically controlled
nested case-control with dramatic effect (post-marketing studies**
studies, n-of-1 trial surveillance) provided
with the patient you there are sufficient
are raising the numbers to rule out a
question about, or common harm. (For
observational study long-term harms the
with dramatic effect duration of follow-up
must be sufficient.)**
What are the RARE Systematic review of Randomised trial or

harms? randomised trials or (exceptionally)
(Treatment Harms) n-of-1 trial observational study
with dramatic effect
Is this (early detection) Systematic review of Randomised trial Non-randomised Case-series, case- Mechanism-based
test worthwhile? randomised trials controlled cohort/ control, or historically reasoning
(Screening) follow-up study** controlled studies**
Abbreviation: n/a, not applicable.

* Level may be graded down on the basis of study quality, imprecision, indirectness (study PICO does not match questions PICO), because of inconsistency between studies, or because
the absolute effect size is very small; level may be graded up if there is a large or very large effect size.
** As always, a systematic review is generally better than an individual study.
Summarising evidence
335
The Cochrane Collaborative lead the way in this field, but the Oxford Centre for Evidence-
based Medicine also recommends BMJ Clinical Evidence, NHS Clinical Knowledge Summaries,
Dynamed, Physicians Information and Education Resource and UpToDate.
CLINICAL AUDIT
The NHS Clinical Governance Support Team describes clinical audit as ‘a quality improvement
process that seeks to improve the patient care and outcomes through systematic review of care against
explicit criteria and the implementation of change’ (4). To that end clinical audit must be viewed as
a part of the clinical governance and quality arrangements of the provider organisation and be
considered essential in driving up the standards of pre-hospital trauma care.
A key element of clinical audit is that measurement of performance or compliance is set
against agreed standards and criteria. It therefore follows that the routine review of log books
or patient report forms, which may be illuminating, does not amount to clinical audit if it is
merely a counting exercise. For example, counting the number of times an individual success-
fully places a peripheral venous cannula may give an indication of levels of activity, but it does
not reflect the quality of care or explain whether these interventions were appropriate. If a
criteria measure were introduced, such as ‘secure venous access was established in all patients with
clinical evidence of hypovolaemia within 10 minutes of arrival of the pre-hospital clinician’, this would
provide much more useful information about the quality of service being provided and has a
clear link with patient benefit. Log books and patient care forms do provide a useful source of
data to inform clinical audit but should not be reduced solely to a simple inventory of the num-
ber of times a given procedure has been undertaken.
Provider organisations can, and should, where appropriate, contribute to national clinical
audits, providing a local perspective on the national picture of pre-hospital trauma services.
However, it is also important for service providers to have a detailed understanding of the qual-
ity of care they are providing locally. It is therefore essential that service providers establish an
audit programme with local priorities responsive to the needs of local patients and services.
THE AUDIT CYCLE

Set standards
Clinical audit is typically described as a cycli-
cal process of preparation (standard setting),
measurement of current performance, analy-
Measure
sis, implementation of change, and re-audit to Re-audit current
ensure change of practice. This leads back into practice
the first stage of the next cycle (Figure 27.1).
PREPARATION AND PLANNING

Reflect, plan Compare
The starting point for anyone engaging in a clin- change and results of
ical audit ought to be asking the question ‘What implement practice to
change standards set
needs to be improved and why?’ (5). The answer to
the question may reveal a surprising number of
issues worthy of investigation, often too many to Figure 27.1 The audit cycle.
336
The audit cycle
be answered all at once. It is often useful to start with a blank sheet of paper and invite sugges-
tions for clinical audit from a wide group of stakeholders. This allows a broad perspective rather
than the potentially narrow or single perspective of the audit lead. Whilst wide consultation is
potentially beneficial in exposing most or all of the areas of concern, in its raw form it is likely to
lead to an unmanageable programme of clinical audit. Key themes will emerge and the clinical
audit team will be able to establish a programme of clinical audit, prioritised or ranked on the
basis of relative importance.
PRIORITIES IN THE CLINICAL AUDIT PROGRAMME

The aspects of practice where compliance with evidence and evidence-based guidelines is sub-
optimal might be perfectly clear to an informed observer. This might be the starting point for
developing a programme of clinical audit; however, this introduces the risk that less obvious
but equally important compliance issues are not identified. It is important that a programme
of clinical audit has logic in its prioritisation. The key to informing the prioritisation is the
potential impact of non-compliance on patient outcome. It might be appealing to undertake a
clinical audit of an area of practice where compliance with guidance is thought to be low com-
pared with an aspect of practice where compliance is moderate to high. However, improving
compliance from low to high in a practice of limited consequence for patient outcome has less
value than improving compliance from an area of high compliance to 100% compliance where
the practice is critical to patient outcome. For example, it might be believed that the age of adult
patients was infrequently recorded on the patient care form. Quantifying the extent to which
the age was not recorded, providing education to encourage compliance and then demonstrat-
ing improvement in compliance might be good practice but is unlikely to make a big impact
on patient outcome. Alternatively, it might be noted that most, but not all, seriously injured
patients eligible for admission to a trauma centre were considered for transfer to a trauma cen-
tre. The consequences of not considering admission to a trauma centre and transporting the
patient to a general facility, albeit for a small number of patients, are likely to have a significant
impact on patient outcome. In this example it might be expected that all eligible patients are
considered for admission to a trauma centre and that anything short of 100% compliance is
unacceptable.
Clinical audit programmes should be meaningful and not merely a process of measuring
something just because it is measurable; they must focus on measuring something that could
lead to patient benefit.
PRACTICE POINT
The key to informing the prioritisation is the potential impact of non-compliance on patient
outcome.
PROSPECTIVE OR RETROSPECTIVE CLINICAL AUDIT

Copeland suggests that an audit conducted retrospectively, utilising existing data from clinical
records or log books, may be useful in establishing a benchmark or in response to an adverse
or serious untoward incident (4). A prospective audit provides greater flexibility and utility in
that the audit can set out the data required to assess compliance against a standard rather
337
than attempting to understand compliance using data gathered for another purpose. Using
retrospective data may make it impossible to execute certain clinical audits. As with research,
reliance on the data you have is inferior to relying on the data you need.
IDENTIFYING THE STANDARDS AGAINST WHICH PERFORMANCE

WILL BE MEASURED
The standards against which compliance is measured must be credible and authoritative, as
they articulate the expected standard of care in a given situation or for a particular clinical
condition.
Ideally the identified standards should be evidence based and nationally agreed, such as
the guidelines published by the National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE) or
leading specialist bodies such as the British Thoracic Society which produced the ‘Guidelines
for Emergency Oxygen Use in Adult Patients’ (6). In reality, there are significant areas of prac-
tice that lack evidence-based guidelines, but which are informed by expert consensus opinion
either at a national or local level. It is entirely permissible to use such guidelines as the basis for
a clinical audit, provided that the guidance is regarded as credible.
As an underlying principle, the guidance should be able to demonstrate a positive effect on
patient outcome. Although some observers do suggest that management-based outcomes, such
as cost effectiveness, are appropriate outcome measures in a clinical audit (7).
CRITERIA AGAINST WHICH COMPLIANCE IS MEASURED

It is not sufficient to ask ‘Are clinicians following the British Thoracic Society Guidelines for the emer-
gency use of oxygen in adult patients?’, although that may be the question of interest. It is neces-
sary to define the individual components of care to be measured and the degree of compliance
that will be regarded as acceptable. In some cases only 100% compliance will be acceptable, for
example 100% of patients with a clinical fracture of the ankle must be assessed for neurovascu-
lar function distal to the ankle. In other situations there may be some tolerance in the accepted
standard of compliance, for example at least 75% of injured patients have a pain intensity score
recorded on the clinical record prior to the administration of analgesia. The extent to which com-
pliance is regarded as acceptable must be determined at this stage and not when the audit has
been started. Criteria can be phrased as a series of questions which articulate the desired stan-
dard of performance.
It is suggested (7) that to ensure that criteria are robust and reliable, the clinical auditor
should consider whether
• It is possible to understand precisely what information is required

• It is possible to obtain the information required to answer the question
• The question is specific enough to give an answer that is useful and meaningful
• The question is sensitive enough to relate solely to the standard being assessed
DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS

Criteria need to be translated into a data collection tool, taking account of the way in which data
are to be collected (retrospectively or prospectively). The clinical auditor needs to consider the
338
References
source of the data, the professional groups who are to be audited and the number of patients or
patient episodes to include.
Clinical audits need to be concluded in a timely manner and this should be taken into
account when deciding the size of the sample. For procedures or activities that occur frequently
it may be possible to audit relatively large numbers of episodes in a short time. Where an inter-
vention or episode occurs infrequently, it might be necessary to compromise on the sample size
in order for the audit to be completed in a timely manner. There are circumstances where it is
desirable to continue to monitor performance against standards. In this case there should be
identified analysis points with the completion of one audit cycle before immediately rolling into
the next. It is, however, important that the sample size is sufficient to allow analysis and for the
results to be meaningful.
Analysis should be undertaken using a method capable of allowing a comparison to be
made between the expected compliance standard and the actual compliance standard. The
degree and sophistication of the analysis will be determined by the sample size and local needs.
REPORTING RESULTS AND DEVELOPING AN IMPROVEMENT

PLAN
Given that the rational for undertaking a clinical audit is service improvement, it is imperative
that the results of the audit are not only communicated but form the basis of a plan of improve-
ment. The analysis is not just about reporting compliance against standards but is crucially also
about trying to understand the obstacles and reasons for sub-optimal compliance.
Education is a key to the implementation of any improvement plan, articulating good prac-
tice and ways of achieving it. The clinical audit may identify very specific learning needs which
are impacting on compliance and require a programme of training or retraining to correct.
RE-AUDIT
The final logical step is to evaluate the effect of the improvement plan through re-audit.
Although this is the final step in one cycle, it is also the first step in the next cycle. Achieving
maximum compliance is not a reason for complacency: re-audit is a vital part of achieving and
maintaining service improvement.
SUMMARY
Both research and clinical audit play an important part in ensuring that seriously injured
patients receive the appropriate care based on the best available evidence.
REFERENCES
1. CRASH-2 collaborators, Roberts I, Shakur H, Afolabi A, Brohi K, Coats T, Dewan Y
et al. The importance of early treatment with tranexamic acid in bleeding trauma
patients: An exploratory analysis of the CRASH-2 randomised controlled trial. Lancet
2011;377(9771):1096–1101.
339
2. Cochrane AL. Effectiveness & Efficiency: Random Reflections on Health Services. London:
RSM Press, 1999.
3. Geddes J. Asking structured and focused clinical questions: Essential first step of
evidence-based practice. Evidence-Based Mental Health 1999;2(2):35–36.
4. Copeland G. A Practical Handbook for Clinical Audit. London: Clinical Governance
Support Team, NHS, 2005.
5. Gillam S, Siriwardena AN. Frameworks for improvement: Clinical audit, the plan-do-
study-act cycle and significant event audit. Quality in Primary Care 2013;21(2):123–130.
6. O’Driscoll BR, Howard LS, Davison AG, British Thoracic Society. BTS guideline for
emergency oxygen use in adult patients. Thorax 2008;63(Suppl 6):vi1–vi68.
7. Potter J, Fuller C, Ferris M. Local Clinical Audit: Handbook For Physicians. London:
Healthcare Quality Improvement Partnership, 2010.
FURTHER READING
Centre for Evidence Based Medicine, http://www.cebm.net
Cochrane Collaborative, http://www.cochrane.org
Healthcare Quality Improvement Partnership, http://www.hqip.org.uk
Institute for Healthcare Improvement, http://www.ihi.org/Pages/default.aspx
340
Training in pre-hospital
emergency medicine (PHEM)
28
OBJECTIVES
After completing this chapter the reader will be able to
▪▪ Understand the origins of the sub-specialty of pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM)

▪▪ Understand the curriculum framework for PHEM
▪▪ Appreciate the role of PHEM within emergency medical systems and trauma networks
INTRODUCTION
Since its inception in 1996, the Faculty of Pre-hospital Care of the Royal College of Surgeons
of Edinburgh has been active in articulating the scope of clinical practice underpinning pre-
hospital care. Faculty activity has included hosting consensus conferences, developing approval
and accreditation systems for training courses, and introducing the concept of a common
generic curriculum for all levels of pre-hospital care. The Faculty, in partnership with the British
Association for Immediate Care, has also developed the generic short courses (for example the
Pre-hospital Emergency Care [PHEC] course) and formal assessments by examination (the
Diploma in Immediate Care and Fellowship in Immediate Care) which have become recog-
nised as benchmarks for basic clinical and operational practice. Eligibility to sit the Diploma in
Immediate Care has now been extended to nurses and paramedics. In addition to this national
educational activity, a number of operational services across the UK developed apprenticeship-
style training programmes with the aim of ensuring that doctors and other pre-hospital profes-
sionals had the knowledge and skills required to operate safely. In November 2005, the Faculty
hosted the first consensus meeting to articulate the competence framework for sub-specialist
physician practice in pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM). In October 2006, a nationwide
questionnaire survey of opinion leaders within UK organisations responsible for pre-hospital
care was conducted, and in October 2008 the Faculty established a Curriculum Advisory Group
to develop the PHEM curriculum (1,2). The key drivers for PHEM to be developed as a sub-
specialist area of medical practice were to (Figure 28.1):
• Meet existing demand for on-scene and in-transit medical support (sometimes referred
to as pre-hospital ‘enhanced care’) (3,4)
• Improve the quality and standards of pre-hospital critical care (5)
341
Training in pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM)
• Improve equity of access to on-scene and

in-transit medical support (6)
• Improve governance of pre-hospital care and
Improve
inter-hospital transfer services (7) professional
Meet
demand
• Support the Care Quality Commission essen development
tial standards for quality and safety in pre-
hospital care
Improve Improve
• Improve professional training and develop governance clinical care
ment of pre-hospital personnel (8)
Improve
• Provide a robust medical incident response equity of
(MERIT) capability access
• Provide medical leadership for pre-hospital
care services and providers
As a guide, pre-hospital emergency medicine Figure 28.1 Drivers for development of

(PHEM) refers to clinical intervention by doctors, PHEM as a sub-specialist area of medical
care.
and pre-hospital emergency care (PHEC) refers to
treatment in the pre-hospital environment more
generally. An Intercollegiate Board for Training in PHEM (IBTPHEM) was formed in May
2009. PHEM was subsequently approved by the General Medical Council (GMC) as a medical
sub-specialty of emergency medicine and anaesthetics in July 2011 and of acute internal medi-
cine and intensive care medicine in October 2013. There are now PHEM training programmes
across the UK with a national recruitment framework and the aim that all UK ambulance ser-
vices should have consistent immediate access to deployable sub-specialist PHEM services
24 hours a day to support personnel and patients on the ground.
ROLE OF THE PHEM PRACTITIONER

The term pre-hospital care covers a wide range of medical conditions, medical interventions,
clinical providers and physical locations. Medical conditions range from minor illness and
injury to life-threatening emergencies. Pre-hospital interventions therefore also range from
simple first aid to advanced emergency care and pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia. Care
providers may be lay first responders, ambulance professionals, nurses or physicians of varying
backgrounds. All of this activity can take place in urban, rural or remote settings, and is gener-
ally mixed with wider out-of-hospital and unscheduled care. The complexity of unscheduled
and urgent care provision is illustrated in Figure 28.2.
Another useful way to conceptualise this breadth of clinical providers is to use the levels
of practice described in the Skills for Health ‘Career Framework for Health’ (Figure 28.3). The
career framework describes the level of autonomy, responsibility and clinical decision-making
expected of a health care professional operating at a particular level.
Sub-specialist PHEM practice relates to the emergency response, primary scene transfer
and secondary emergency transfer functions highlighted in Figure 28.2 at the level of the con-
sultant practitioner (level 8) illustrated in Figure 28.3, and thus as described above refers to
interventions carried out by doctors. (Pre-hospital emergency care [PHEC] refers to pre-hospital
practice more broadly, irrespective of who provides it.) PHEM relates to that area of medical
care required for seriously ill or injured patients before they reach hospital (on scene) or during
emergency transfer to or between hospitals (in-transit). It represents a unique area of medical
342
Role of the PHEM practitioner
Access to unscheduled care

Call 999 or NHS Direct
Walk in, Minor Injuries or Urgent Care Centre
GP Practice/Out-of-hours service
Emergency Department
Pharmacy/Dentist/Mental health service
Social care service
Other health care provider
Consistent assessment of urgency of care need

(on the telephone or face-to-face)
EMERGENCY ADVICE AND SELF CARE

RESPONSE
OUT-
URGENT
PATIENT
RESPONSE
REVIEW
PRIMARY
SCENE
TRANSFER
SECONDARY LOCAL SOCIAL CARE

REGIONAL
EMERGENCY HOSPITAL CRISIS
SPECIALIST
DEPARTMENT SERVICES INTERVENTION
HOSPITAL
TRANSFER
Figure 28.2 Conceptual model of effective urgent care. (Adapted from ‘Direction of travel for urgent
care: A discussion document’, Department of Health, October 2006.)
practice which requires the focused application of a defined range of knowledge and skills to a
level not normally available outside hospital.
PHEM encompasses the underpinning knowledge, technical skills and non-technical
(behavioural) skills required to provide safe pre-hospital critical care and safe transfer. ‘Pre-
hospital’ refers to all environments outside an emergency department resuscitation room or a
place specifically designed for resuscitation and/or critical care in a health care setting. It usu-
ally relates to an incident scene but it includes the ambulance environment or a remote medical
facility. Implicit in this term is the universal
need, for this specific group of patients, for 9 More senior level
transfer to hospital. Although a component
8 Consultant practitioner level
of urgent and unscheduled care (Figure
28.2), PHEM practice relates to a level of ill- 7 Advanced practitioner level
ness or injury that is usually not amenable Senior/Specialist practitioner level
6
to definitive management in the commu-
nity setting and is focused on critical care 5 Practitioner level
in the out-of-hospital environment. 4 Associate/Assistant practitioner level
Critical care refers to the provision of organ
3 Senior healthcare assistant/Technician level
and/or system support in the management of
severely ill or injured patients. It is a clinical 2 Support worker level
process rather than a physical place, and it
1 Initial entry level
requires the application of significant under-
pinning knowledge and technical skills to a Figure 28.3 Skills for Health career framework
level that is not ordinarily available outside descriptors.
343
hospital. Hospital-based critical care is typically divided into three levels: level three (intensive care
areas providing multiple organ and system support), level two (high dependency medical or surgi-
cal care areas providing single organ or system support) and level one (acute care areas such as coro-
nary care and medical admission units). In the context of PHEM, all three levels of critical care may
be required depending on the needs of the patient. In practical terms, the critical care interventions
undertaken outside hospital more closely resemble those provided by hospital emergency depart-
ments, intensive care outreach services and inter-hospital transport teams.
Transfer refers to the process of transporting a patient whilst maintaining in-transit clinical
care. A distinction between retrieval and transport (or transfer) is sometimes made on the basis
of the location of the patient (for example from the scene or between hospitals) and the com-
position or origins of the retrieval or transfer team. Successful pre-hospital emergency medical
services in Europe, Australasia and North America have recognised that many of the compe-
tences required for the primary transport of the critically ill or injured patient from the incident
scene to hospital are the same as those required for secondary intra-hospital or inter-hospital
transport. In the PHEM curriculum, the term ‘transfer’ means the process of physically trans-
porting a patient whilst maintaining in-transit clinical care.
A PHEM practitioner, as defined earlier, should be capable of fulfilling a number of career
or employment roles which include, for illustrative purposes, provision of on-scene, in-transit
and/or on-line (telephone or radio) medical care in support of PHEM service providers such as
• NHS Acute Hospitals (particularly regional specialist hospitals with an outreach and
transfer capability)
• NHS Ambulance Trusts (e.g. as part of regional Medical Emergency Response Incident
Teams [MERIT] or their equivalent)
• Defence Medical Services
• Non-NHS independent sector organisations (including immediate care schemes, air ambu
lance charities, event medicine providers and commercial ambulance and retrieval services)
THE PHEM CURRICULUM

The PHEM curriculum was developed over a Working in
considerable time period using consensus devel- emergency
medical
opment processes with trainees, other health- systems
Providing
care professionals and PHEM practitioners. Supporting
pre-hospital
emergency
emergency
The development process is described in detail preparedness
and response c tice
Clin
ica medical care
ra
on the Intercollegiate Board for Training in
lG
lP
ove
Operationa
Pre-Hospital Emergency Medicine (IBTPHEM) Good

rnance
Medical
website (www.ibtphem.org.uk). The derived Practice
curriculum relates to what should be expected
Tea
of a newly ‘qualified’ consultant in PHEM across Supporting m R urce Using pre-
safe patient Man eso ent hospital
transfer agem
equipment
the four nations of the UK. Although designed
for medical practitioners, it is clearly of wider
Supporting
application within the PHEC environment. rescue and
extraction
The curriculum framework is illustrated
schematically in Figure 28.4. It comprises six
sub-specialty-specific, one central and three Figure 28.4 Skills for Health career framework
cross-cutting themes. Themes are over-arching descriptors.
344
The PHEM curriculum
areas of PHEM professional practice. The framework diagram illustrates the central impor-
tance of Good Medical Practice and the relationship between the cross-cutting generic themes
of Operational Practice, Team Resource Management and Clinical Governance to the six specialty-
specific themes. The diagram also emphasises the interrelationship of all themes – none stands
alone.
Within each theme are a number of discrete work roles or activities which are referred
to as ‘units’. Each unit contains grouped or related ‘elements’ of underpinning knowledge,
technical skill and behavioural attribute or non-technical skill – otherwise referred to as
‘competences’. The full curriculum framework, detailing the elements of underpinning
knowledge, technical skill and non-technical skill for each of these themes is available from
the IBTPHEM website.
CENTRAL THEME: GOOD MEDICAL PRACTICE (GMP)

Good Medical Practice (GMP) is the term given to the core ethical guidance provided to doc-
tors by the GMC. Other healthcare professional regulators such as the Nursing and Midwifery
Council and the Health and Care Professions Council provide similar guidance. GMP sets out
the principles and values on which good practice is founded; these principles together describe
medical professionalism in action.
CROSS-CUTTING THEME A: OPERATIONAL PRACTICE

Maintaining safe and effective operational practice is a generic or cross-cutting theme of pro-
fessional practice within PHEM. This theme concerns the knowledge, skills and non-technical
skills required to maintain safe and effective operational practice within a pre-hospital emer-
gency medicine service provider.
CROSS-CUTTING THEME B: TEAM RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Contributing to effective team resource management is a generic or cross-cutting area of pro-
fessional practice within PHEM. This theme concerns the knowledge, skills and non-technical
skills required to work as part of a multi-disciplinary team in the high-hazard, resource-limited,
environmentally challenging and time-pressured pre-hospital environment.
CROSS-CUTTING THEME C: CLINICAL GOVERNANCE

Application of clinical governance principles and techniques is a generic or cross-cutting area
of professional practice within PHEM. This theme concerns the knowledge, skills and non-
technical skills required to ensure that clinical governance principles and mechanisms are
applied to clinical practice.
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 1: WORKING IN EMERGENCY MEDICAL

SYSTEMS
Specialist practitioners in PHEM operate within wider emergency medical systems (EMS).
These systems have a number of inter-dependent components. Having an understanding
of these components, the way in which they interact and the wider regulatory framework
surrounding them is essential to effective professional medical practice in this field.
345
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 2: PROVIDING PRE-HOSPITAL

EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE
Sub-specialist training in PHEM currently commences after completion of the fourth year of
higher specialist training in emergency medicine, anaesthetics, intensive care medicine or acute
internal medicine. Trainees therefore have experience of emergency clinical care in the hospital
environment. The established principles and techniques used in those settings often need to be
modified for effective pre-hospital emergency use. In addition, the provision of emergency medi-
cal care in a relatively unsupported environment requires a greater in-depth knowledge of resus-
citation in all age groups. The units within this theme reinforce resuscitation concepts learned
during higher specialist training and relate them to the pre-hospital operational environment.
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 3: USING PRE-HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT

Pre-hospital and in-transit emergency care requires use of a wide range of medicines, devices
and portable equipment. Practitioners must be competent in both the application and operation
of specific equipment items and the principles underlying their function and design.
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 4: SUPPORTING RESCUE

AND EXTRICATION
Pre-hospital emergency medical services are frequently targeted at patients who, because of physi-
cal entrapment, physical geography or functional geographic constraints, cannot just be taken to
the nearest appropriate hospital. This competence theme focuses on the underpinning knowledge,
technical skills and non-technical skills required to manage a trapped patient and effectively inter-
act with professional rescue service personnel at common pre-hospital rescue situations.
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 5: SUPPORTING SAFE

PATIENT TRANSFER
This theme covers the competences required to make destination hospital triage decisions;
select the most appropriate transport platform; provide safe, effective and focused in-transit
critical care; and ensure that the patients’ condition and immediate needs are communicated
to receiving hospital clinical staff. As with other competence themes, many of the elements are
common across all clinical services.
SUB-SPECIALTY THEME 6: SUPPORTING EMERGENCY

PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE
This theme encompasses the competences required to ensure that practitioners are appropri-
ately prepared and equipped for larger scale emergency incidents in terms of their understand-
ing of emergency planning and the principles of major incident management.
MEDICAL TRAINING IN PHEM

Doctors in the final years of their training in one of the specialties of acute medicine, anaes-
thesia, emergency medicine or intensive care medicine can apply to undertake 12 months of
346
Summary
PHEM sub-specialty training in an approved organisation. The IBTPHEM has designed a pre-
ferred and unique blended training programme combining training in PHEM and the parent
specialty reflecting likely future consultant working patterns.
Training covers the entire PHEM curriculum and is divided into three distinct phases:
1a (initial training, 1 month), 1b (development training, 5 months) and 2 (consolidation training,
6 months). An IBTPHEM residential National Induction Course brings together trainees in phase
1a to familiarise them with the challenges of the pre-hospital environment. The phases allow super-
vised progression towards competent and more autonomous practice. The gaining of knowledge
and skills are assessed continuously by consultant supervisors and formally in the two National
Summative Assessments at the end of phases 1 and 2 undertaken by the Royal College of Surgeons
of Edinburgh. Success in all these assessments against the curriculum will lead to recognition of
sub-specialist status with the GMC. Whilst a fully immersive one-year training programme is pro-
vided, alternatives include an 80/20 and 50/50 split between pre-hospital care and base specialty.
It has to be recognised that although this approved training is within National Health
Service (NHS) training programmes, it is largely delivered through charitable organisations
that provide enhanced care teams by land and air. It is this partnership that has allowed the
investment and innovation in PHEM training and the focus on training rather than service
provision that is characterised in many other areas of postgraduate training.
The development of sub-specialty training has also required an increase in the number
of consultants involved, allowing adequate trainee supervision and training. With increasing
number of doctors now with sub-specialty accreditation, the workforce is becoming more qual-
ified and driving a further increase in consultant-led and delivered pre-hospital critical care.
In other areas of medicine, this has equated to improved clinical care and better outcomes for
patients, and it is reasonable to expect that this will occur in PHEM.
MULTI-PROFESSIONAL PHEM PRACTITIONERS

A large component of the care outlined in Figure 28.2 is provided by ambulance service para-
medics. All PHEM training programmes operate medical teams consisting of a physician and a
paramedic working together. These paramedics are usually trained to a much higher skill level,
and a framework for formalising and recognising this advanced practice is being developed by
the College of Paramedics (8).
In November 2015, with close support from the College of Paramedics and Royal College of
Nursing, and guidance from the IBTPHEM, the Faculty endorsed the concept of the development of
a multi-professional training programme in PHEM and the development of pilot training schemes to
test the concept. The Fellowship in Immediate Medical Care is now open to paramedics and nurses.
SUMMARY
The PHEM sub-specialist role is uniquely challenging. The tempo of decision making, the haz-
ards faced at incident scenes, the relatively unsupported and isolated working conditions, the
environmental challenges, the resource limitations and the case mix all make this a very dif-
ferent activity compared to in-hospital practice. An investment in training reaps the reward of
a motivated, highly skilled individual that is able to better care for patients. The formalisation
of PHEM multi-professional training for physicians, paramedics and nurses has only just com-
menced in the UK and is expected to bring these benefits.
347
REFERENCES
1. Mackenzie R, Bevan D. For Debate …: A license to practise pre-hospital and retrieval
medicine. Emergency Medicine Journal 2005;22:286–293.
2. Faculty of Pre-hospital Care. Pre-hospital and Retrieval Medicine: A New Medical Sub-
Specialty? Edinburgh: Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh, 2008.
3. NHS Clinical Advisory Groups Report. Regional networks for major trauma. 2010.
4. Mackenzie R, Steel A, French J, Wharton R, Lewis S, Bates A, Daniels T, Rosenfeld M.
Views regarding the provision of prehospital critical care in the UK. Emergency Medicine
Journal 2009;26:365–370.
5. Hyde P, Mackenzie R, Ng G, Reid C, Pearson G. Availability and utilisation of physician-
based pre-hospital critical care support to the NHS ambulance service in England,
Wales and Northern Ireland. Emergency Medicine Journal 2012;29:177–181.
6. Robertson-Steel I, Edwards S, Gough M. Clinical governance in pre-hospital care.
Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 2001;94(Suppl 39):38–42.
7. Clements R, Mackenzie R. Competence in prehospital care: Evolving concepts.
8. College of Paramedics. Post-Registration Career Framework. 3rd ed. College of
Paramedics, 2015.
FURTHER READING
Information about the Intercollegiate Board for Training in Pre-Hospital Emergency Medicine
is available at www.ibtphem.org.uk.
348
Trauma systems
29
OBJECTIVES
▪▪ Understand the organisational context in which UK trauma is managed

▪▪ Recognise the importance of systems in offering optimal trauma care
▪▪ Recognise and be prepared to promote the features of an effective and safe system
INTRODUCTION
The urgency, multiplicity and complexity of major trauma care demand careful organisation
in order to achieve good outcomes. A trauma network is a collaboration between providers
commissioned to deliver trauma care services in a geographical area (1). A trauma system is a
broader concept that reflects the current view of trauma as a public health disease (2) (Figure
29.1). It is defined as a public health model for the delivery of optimal trauma care to a specified popu-
lation (3). While the emphasis has often been on acute care, its scope must include rehabilita-
tion, re-integration into the community and prevention.
No country has unlimited funds for healthcare. Commissioners rightly demand value for
money, but must not undermine safety and quality. Performance and cost-effectiveness are
integral aspects of system development. In a national trauma system, it is essential to work to
common standards (4) and to achieve a high degree of consistency across individual networks,
although there is no single, optimal way of delivering trauma care.
Pre-hospital care is a crucial element of a trauma system. While the details of hospital care
are beyond the scope of this book, some aspects are covered generically in this chapter in order
to describe trauma systems as a whole.
349
Trauma systems
Trau
ma
S yst
em
As
Enforce Laws,
Injury
Trauma se
Rules, and
Epidemiology
Management s
Competent Regulations
sm
Information
Workforce System
en
Resource
Financial Assessment
t
and Publ
Q1 Linkage ic H Emergency
eal Preparedness
ce th Assessment
Rehabilitation
A s
ran
Availability Monitor
Health
se
Cost/Benefit
Assu
Evaluate
ssm
Continuous and Social
Diagnose
Trauma Care A N AG Investment
MM EM and
ent
Trauma System
Improvement
T E eadership E Investigate
e
Health Assuranc
L Inf
ov’t Oversig S
N
Ensure t
Y
Outreach and
T
or
h
Prevention Competent
ma
Workforce
tion Technolo
Integration of Statutory
Trauma Plan With RESEARCH Authority/
Emergency Administrative
P ub
Rules
eG
Management Link to
RE
ES
Provide y Inform, System
at
g
St
lic H
Analytical Care Educate, Leadership
TU
lic
SE N Finances
TI
UC
Monitoring Empower
Pub
AL
IN FR A STR
Tools Statewide
eal
Mobilise Trauma System
Enforce Plan
th
Role for all Acute Community
Care Facilities Laws Partnerships
Po
T
Develop Financial and
ic
r
l
Policies y
a
Infrastructure
De
um
EMS System Related
Support
velo
System Resources
aS
pment
Management Performance
y
Information Data and
s te
System to Performance Public
m
Facilitate Outcomes Trauma Inform/ Reports Policy
Po
Public Health Educate and Reviews ic
l
Emergency Mobilise De y
Preparedness Partnerships
Linked
ve
pm lo
nt e
Figure 29.1 Schematic representation of a trauma system. (From Optimal Resources ACSCT. With
permission.)
HISTORY
EARLY DEVELOPMENT IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

In 1894, the Manchester Ship Canal was completed, allowing Manchester to become the
third largest port in the country, despite being 40 miles inland. Its construction was accom-
panied by a high incidence of serious injury. The strategic placement of new hospitals with
staff trained in injury management and the establishment of temporary treatment centres
along the route helped to provide efficient care. Specific transport links were set up to
provide rapid access to definitive care. Robert Jones, a pioneer of fracture management,
oversaw the system.
The Birmingham Accident Hospital and Rehabilitation Centre was opened as a veterans
hospital in the Second World War in 1941 and was used exclusively for trauma patients. It is
widely regarded as the forerunner of modern major trauma centres (MTCs). Three surgical
350
History
teams provided care, each led by two senior trauma surgeons with a senior anaesthetist. The
philosophy at the ‘Acci’ was based on three principles:
• Segregation of the ill from the injured—Only trauma victims were treated at the hospital.
• Continuity of care and unity of control—The same surgical team was responsible for the
patient throughout their hospital stay and during rehabilitation.
• Rehabilitation as an integral part of trauma management—Recognising rehabilitation as
a pivotal service was visionary.
ADVANCES IN NORTH AMERICA

In 1922, the American College of Surgeons (ACS) established a Committee on Fractures, which
diversified to incorporate other types of injury in 1939. In 1950, this evolved into the Committee
on Trauma (ACSCOT), which continues to promote high standards in trauma care. Its regularly
updated publication Resources for Optimal Care of the Injured Patient gives wide-ranging guidance
on trauma system components, including those for performance improvement and prevention.
Injury care improved significantly as a result of experience in the Vietnam War (1959–1975).
The same principles of care were applied to patients with penetrating injuries in American cit-
ies. In 1966, the first civilian trauma centre opened in Cook County, Chicago. In 1969, R. Adams
Cowley, who coined the concept of the ‘golden hour’, established the Shock-Trauma Unit as a
standalone trauma hospital in Baltimore, together with a helicopter system serving the whole
of Maryland. This was the first region-wide system of care. A funded research programme
accompanied these developments.
In 1976, James Styner, an orthopaedic surgeon piloting a light aircraft, crashed his plane into
a field in Nebraska. His wife was killed instantly and three of his children sustained critical inju-
ries. The lack of organised care led him to declare, ‘When I can provide better care in the field with
limited resources than what my children and I received at the primary care facility, there is something
wrong with the system and the system has to be changed’. Within 2 years, he had developed the first
Advanced Trauma Life Support (ATLS) course (5). By 1980, it had been adopted by the American
College of Surgeons. While ATLS focuses on the individual doctor rather than on the team or
system, it remains an important training element within trauma systems and has spawned a
series of allied courses for nurses, paramedics and battlefield personnel.
In 1979, the mortality in Orange County and San Francisco County in California was
reported (6). The improvement in outcome in Orange County after the introduction of an inte-
grated trauma system influenced the development of major trauma systems across the United
States and beyond (7,8).
PROGRESS ELSEWHERE
Since the 1960s, a pre-hospital care system has been developed in France. This has matured
into the Service d’Aide Médicale Urgente (SAMU) (9). While standard operating procedures
(SOPs) are now widespread, the SAMU were early implementers of this approach.
In Germany, an efficient system of pre-hospital care has also been developed, based
on a dense network of helicopters and fast-response land vehicles (Notarzteinsatzfahrzeug,
bringing a pre-hospital doctor to the scene, and Rettungswagen, serving as a mobile intensive
care unit). As in France, doctors are actively engaged in pre-hospital care. In Germany and
Austria, specialist trauma surgeons lead the in-hospital trauma service, working closely with
a naesthetist-intensivist colleagues. Part of the Austrian system relies on insurance from
351
Trauma systems
employers (AUVA: Allgemeinen Unfallversicherungsanstalt). This has funded specialist trauma

hospitals which resemble updated versions of the Birmingham Accident Hospital. Co-located
with the Ludwig Boltzmann Institute for Experimental and Clinical Traumatology, the Lorenz
Böhler Trauma Centre in Vienna has been a centre of excellence in both clinical practice and
research for many years.
In the last decade, well-planned trauma systems have emerged in Australia. The best known,
the Victorian State Trauma System (10) was established in 2000 following a review of trauma and
emergency services that found opportunities for improvement at all stages of care and made more
than 100 recommendations. The key features of the system include adequate funding, a focus on
education and training, improved communications, effective standard operating procedures, an
emphasis on research and governance, and designated adult and paediatric trauma centres.
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN ENGLAND

Despite early promise, trauma systems were slow to develop further in the United Kingdom.
A national pilot project in the North West Midlands in the early 1990s did not reach the mor-
tality reduction target of 30% within three years to support whole-scale national investment
in trauma systems, although mortality subsequently halved over a more realistic 7-year period
(11,12). Several subsequent reports from professional organisations lobbied for trauma system
development, but failed to gain political support.
In 2007, the National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and Death (NCEPOD) published a
report titled ‘Trauma: Who Cares?’ (13), a snapshot that identified serious shortcomings in major
trauma care in England. This had a more profound impact. The Parliamentary Public Accounts
Committee approved the formal development of a national trauma system in England, overseen
by specialised commissioners and underpinned by financial arrangements. A National Clinical
Director for major trauma care was appointed and a Clinical Advisory Group (CAG) was estab-
lished to provide recommendations (1). In 2012, a system of major trauma networks went live in
England. Early evidence points to significant improvements within 2 years (14).
In parallel with the governmental support for trauma systems in England, military conflict
in Iraq and Afghanistan has been associated with a range of improvements in trauma care that
are being transferred to clinical practice in the National Health Service (NHS) (Box 29.1).
BOX 29.1: Civilian Lessons from Military Experience

▪▪ Enhanced logistics
▪▪ Integrated human factors training
▪▪ Regular team practice between busy periods of clinical activity
▪▪ Improvements in damage control resuscitation and in the use of blood products
▪▪ Near-real-time governance to deal with issues promptly
TRAUMA SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF TRAUMA

Understanding the characteristics and incidence rates of major trauma helps to define trauma sys-
tem requirements. Six general characteristics of trauma set the scene for system design (Box 29.2).
352
Trauma system requirements
The overall mortality rate of major trauma

BOX 29.2: General Characteristics
is over 10% and it remains the commonest
of Trauma
cause of death amongst those under 40 years
▪▪ Severity
of age. It frequently occurs out of hours and
▪▪ Multiplicity
in a disparate set of urban and rural locations.
▪▪ Complexity
Its care is often time-critical. This combina-
▪▪ Timing
tion has implications for delivering initial
▪▪ Urgency
care to remote locations and transporting
▪▪ Chronicity
unstable patients to an appropriate hospital
in time to treat life- or limb-threatening inju-
ries. Fast vehicles, such as helicopters, have an essential role, especially in rural areas.
Trauma is inherently complex. While some patients sustain single injuries, many have mul-
tiple injuries that require multidisciplinary care which must be effectively coordinated and pro-
vided in a timely manner. Many injuries fall into the territory of regional specialists, such as
neurosurgeons, cardiothoracic surgeons or plastic surgeons, for whom there is too little overall
elective and emergency work to justify employing them in every acute hospital. The need to
centralise trauma care is a direct consequence.
Most major trauma occurs in the evening and at weekends. The inevitable delay in bringing
patients from a remote location or via another hospital in the network skews care in the MTC
towards the overnight period. Working 24/7 is a necessity for major trauma, and staffing needs
to be adjusted to match workload.
The time course of major trauma care is often prolonged. Anatomical repair and physiologi-
cal recovery may take weeks, months or longer to achieve. Physical and mental disability may
persist for longer still or permanently, constituting a considerable societal burden.
THE FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF MAJOR TRAUMA

In the United Kingdom, major trauma is relatively uncommon. There are about 200 severely
injured patients (Injury Severity Score [ISS] >15) per million per year, while appendicitis is
about seven times as common (1400 per million per year). For a district hospital serving a
population of 250,000, there will be fewer than one major trauma case per week. In the recom-
mended minimum network catchment population of 2 million (see later), there will be about
400 cases/year of severe trauma per annum.
In the United Kingdom, blunt trauma predominates. In most networks, penetrating trauma
only accounts for about 3% of major trauma cases, although rates are considerably higher in
some inner city areas. In some American cities, in contrast, the percentage may be as high as
30%. In a typical mixed urban and rural area in the United Kingdom, the commonest trauma
mechanism is a motor vehicle collision (33%), followed closely by a low-energy fall (<2 metres,
27%), and then by a higher-energy fall (>2 metres, 22%). In moderate trauma (ISS 9–15), more
than half the cases result from falls less than 2 metres.
In the United Kingdom, the worst injury in more than 80% of major and moderate trauma
cases is to the head, spine or limbs. More than 61% of major trauma involves a serious head
injury. Major bleeding from trunk injuries, though less frequent, often requires time-critical
surgery (mainly general, vascular or cardiothoracic) or interventional radiology.
In the same typical area, more than 80% of major trauma patients had a serious injury or worse
(Abbreviated Injury Scale [AIS] (15) code ≥3) to the head, limbs or spine. This suggests that neuro-
surgery, orthopaedics and spinal surgery are the three busiest surgical specialties delivering care.
Abdominal injuries are less common, with AIS 3+ abdominal injuries occurring in 11% of these
353
Trauma systems
patients (just over one per week). In such a population, expertise in damage control surgery must
be maintained by continually refreshing training, rather than by ongoing experience.
Major trauma was previously considered to be a disease of young adults. A different age
profile is now emerging with a third of patients aged over 65 and a fifth over 80. While the
peak incidence still occurs in those aged 15 to 20 years, there is less variation from decade to
decade of adult life than previously recognised. Despite the peak in late adolescence and early
adulthood, the incidence is much smaller in younger children. Half of the children (0–15 years
old) with major trauma are age 13 or over. In patients with major trauma, the mortality in those
over 65 is twice that in younger adults. In moderate trauma (for example fractures of the neck
or femur), it is 10 times higher than in the younger age group.
THE SIZE OF TRAUMA NETWORKS

It has been recommended (1) that a major trauma network should have a catchment population
of at least 2 million in order to have a sufficient caseload to develop a ‘trauma culture’, as well as
to maintain individual experience and expertise. This population also represents the minimum
that can support some surgical specialties, such as neurosurgery.
In a typical major trauma network of 2.5 million patients, it is expected that more than 500
patients per year (about 10 per week) will be admitted with an ISS over 15. The Royal College
of Surgeons of England recommends that an MTC should admit a minimum of 250 ‘critically
injured’ patients per year.
In a frequently quoted study (16), a significantly improved outcome was shown in centres
receiving more than 650 cases per year with an ISS >15. However, the improvement was only
significant in penetrating torso trauma. The findings cannot be generalised to populations with
predominantly blunt trauma.
GENERIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDING PRINCIPLES

The overall aims of a major trauma system can be summarised as simple, generic requirements
(Box 29.3).
In order to achieve such a system, experience must be concentrated to promote expertise with
clear lines of clinical responsibility, there must be continuity of care along the patient’s pathway, there
must be a focus on rehabilitation, and there must be partnership and cooperation between speciali-
ties and NHS trusts. Feedback and governance are essential. For the in-hospital phase, these simple
concepts are well illustrated by the ‘trauma triangle’ (17) (Figure 29.2). While this is described in
terms of ‘medical’ personnel, those in the nursing and allied professions have complementary roles.
BOX 29.3: Aims of a Major Trauma System

▪▪ Swift pre-hospital assessment of seriously injured patients
▪▪ Immediate life-saving measures when needed and rapid transport to the most appropriate hospital
▪▪ Immediate clinical and radiological assessment
▪▪ Instant access to damage control resuscitation and surgery or radiological intervention
▪▪ Expert, well-coordinated, definitive surgical care with full patient and family engagement
▪▪ Intensive care (including specialist intensive therapy unit)
▪▪ Reconstructive surgery
▪▪ Tailored rehabilitation with full physical and psycho-social support
▪▪ Transfer closer to home with continuing rehabilitation support as soon as appropriate
354
Fundamental building blocks
Emergency Trauma Resuscitation

Medicine and Anaesthesia
ANATOMICAL PHYSIOLOGICAL
DIAGNOSIS CONTROL
COORDINATION
Diagnostic TTL (initial assessment) Intensive
Radiology TRA (emergency intervention) Care
Intensivist (Day 1 to step down)
*Admitting Consultant (from Day 1)
Rehabilitation Consultant (from Day 2)
Interventional Anaesthetics
Radiology
ics
illo c Su y
y
ry
y
y
er
r
er
er
er
er
ge
ge
ed
rg
g
rg
rg
Ot urg
ur
ur
ur
a
Su
Su
op
th ros
lS
rS
lS
al
ar
th
ra
he
cia
rd Neu
i
in
ac
ul
ne
Or
Sp
fa
sc
or
Ge
Va
io
ax
M
Ca
SPECIALIST INTERVENTION
Figure 29.2 The trauma care triangle. The admitting consultant may initially be a dedicated consultant
in major trauma care, rather than a specific surgical specialty. Responsibility may be transferred later to a
particular specialty depending on current needs and priorities. Children and frail elderly patients may be
transferred to the care of paediatricians or geriatricians at an appropriate point on their acute care pathway.
As the bedrock of major trauma care, a full range of surgical specialties sits at the base of the
triangle. Interventional radiology is shown at a lower apex of the triangle, providing specialist
intervention as well as anatomical diagnosis. Anaesthetists are placed at the other lower apex
as they provide physiological control during operative repair and reconstruction.
On reception in hospital, emergency physicians have a particular role in initial anatomical
diagnosis, though of course, they will also contribute to or oversee initial physiological control.
In more severely injured patients, intensivists have a continuing role in physiological control
after the initial interventions. A new subspecialty of trauma resuscitation anaesthetists (TRAs)
has been proposed but has yet to become widely accepted (17).
In the pre-hospital phase, an equivalent triangle cannot be drawn. The missing base of the
unfinished triangle is a reminder of the frequent need for timely specialist surgical (or radiolog-
ical) intervention in hospital. The pre-hospital environment with its limited human and physi-
cal resources precludes almost all surgical interventions. Pre-hospital coordination may be led
by or shared between the leader of the on-scene team (immediate care delivery), the trauma
desk paramedic (general guidance, transportation logistics and communication between agen-
cies) and the top cover consultant (senior advice).
FUNDAMENTAL BUILDING BLOCKS
AMBULANCE SERVICES AND ENHANCED CARE TEAMS

Ideally there should be a single service for the entire network. However, some major trauma
centres receive patients from across conventional regional boundaries with different ambu-
lance services using different protocols and procedures. Seamless collaboration is required to
provide continuity of care.
355
Trauma systems
Ambulance service paramedics receive in-depth training in trauma care, but may lack spe-
cific skills such as rapid sequence induction and intubation. This and other related gaps in their
skill set are being addressed by the use of enhanced care teams (ECTs) that include senior
doctors who practise these skills and work in a team with the paramedics. The doctors may
be directly employed by the ambulance service or by other agencies (see following section).
Selected paramedics may be able to extend their skills as a level 8 practitioner in the future,
but must be able to have sufficient ongoing experience to maintain them. Many ECTs staff a
helicopter in the daytime, resorting to a land vehicle response at night or in poor weather con-
ditions. Many services will be offering night-time flying in the future, using lit helipads at acute
hospitals and other designated rendezvous landing sites.
ECTs respond to emergencies, tasked by the trauma desk, and may attend the scene of the
incident, intercept the primary ambulance en route at a rendezvous, accompany the patient to
the primary hospital or transfer the patient from a TU (trauma unit) to an MTC.
ECTs are able to make independent triage decisions rather than be confined to the triage
tool. If they take a patient to a TU, they can contribute to ongoing management. If the patient
deteriorates or a rapidly accessed CT scan shows an injury that is more appropriately managed in
an MTC, they can undertake ‘hyper-acute secondary transfer’ to the MTC with minimal delay.
ALLIED SERVICES
The police and fire services may reach trauma victims first and need to be trained to initiate
care and to work in close cooperation with paramedics and pre-hospital doctors. Other agen-
cies are needed for pre-hospital care in particular terrains, such as search and rescue helicopter
services, mountain rescue teams and coastguard services.
Voluntary organisations, such as the British Association for Immediate Care (BASICS), are integrated
into the overall plan of care. Following the development of the new specialty of pre-hospital emer-
gency medicine (PHEM), an increasing numbers the doctors engaged in future pre-hospital work
may be formally employed by ambulance services or hospitals, rather than working as volunteers.
There are currently 34 charity-funded air ambulances operating across the United Kingdom,
some of which benefit from government funding. Their catchment areas are often greater
than individual trauma networks. They are able to bring an enhanced care team to the scene,
together with resources (such as blood products) that are normally confined to hospitals.
DESIGNATED HOSPITALS FOR MAJOR TRAUMA

One of the key aims of a major trauma service is to centralise the care of the most severely
injured patients in hospitals with a full range of surgical and critical care services. Given the
pattern of trauma sustained in the United Kingdom, it is essential that the central hospital has
neurosurgery and spinal surgery on site. In England, acute hospitals are classified into three
different types, depending on their capability for managing major trauma:
• Major trauma centres

• Trauma units
• Local emergency hospitals.
A major trauma centre (MTC) (1) is a large, multi-specialty, acute hospital with all of the acute
surgical specialties on site, together with resources for delivering critical care and acute reha-
bilitation. It acts as the central hospital in a major trauma network providing consultant-level
care for patients with all types of injury and is optimised for their definitive care.
356
The trauma pathway
A trauma unit (TU) is an acute hospital in a major trauma network that also provides care for
patients with significant injuries, but does not necessarily support certain specialised surgical
services, such as neurosurgery, spinal surgery or cardiothoracic surgery. It is optimised for the
definitive care of those trauma patients whose injuries lie within the expertise of locally sup-
ported specialties, such as orthopaedics and general surgery. It has critical care services on site.
The other designated acute facility is the local emergency hospital (LEH). This hospital has not
been designated as a TU or MTC and should not receive acute trauma patients, except for those
with minor injuries. The LEH still needs to have processes in place to ensure that any seriously
injured patients who self-present or who are overlooked in the pre-hospital triage process are
transferred promptly and safely to an MTC or TU. The LEH may have a role in the rehabilitation
of trauma patients who live locally.
Elsewhere, different hospital classifications are used. In the United States, Level 1 centres are
similar to MTCs, but with specific accreditation criteria and an emphasis on trauma surgeon
leadership. Level 2 centres generally have a full range of surgical specialties, unlike TUs in the
UK. They are not required to have an ongoing programme of research or a surgical residency pro-
gramme. Level 3 centres are often similar to TUs. Level 4 and level 5 centres are generally found
in more remote locations. They are expected to have an ability to carry out advanced trauma life
support, but need to transfer out all cases of severe trauma. In this regard, they resemble LEHs.
REHABILITATION UNITS
The chain of trauma care is as strong as its weakest link. Despite the early recognition of their
importance, rehabilitation services have been relatively neglected. There are three tiers of reha-
bilitation service (18):
• Level 3: Local non-specialist rehabilitation

• Level 2: District (250–500,000 population) specialist rehabilitation
• Level 1: Tertiary specialised rehabilitation for complex needs.
Level 2 units have consultants trained and accredited in rehabilitation medicine, who also
provide support for the level 3 units. Level 1 units provide high-cost, low-volume services for
patients with highly complex rehabilitation needs that are beyond the scope of the local and dis-
trict specialist services. These are normally provided over a regional population of 1–3 million
through specialised commissioning arrangements. The categories of rehabilitation services are
further subdivided according to rehabilitation needs. A new national Defence Rehabilitation
Centre opened near Loughborough in 2018.
From a major trauma perspective, the focus of attention is on musculoskeletal, brain and
spinal rehabilitation. An MTC should be able to provide acute rehabilitation on site in a dedi-
cated clinical area run by consultants in rehabilitation medicine. TUs should be able to provide
general rehabilitation within the hospital and should have direct input by rehabilitation con-
sultants. Spinal cord injury rehabilitation is carried out in supra-regional units serving several
trauma networks. In addition to defined rehabilitation units, rehabilitation takes place within
acute hospitals, in smaller community institutions and at home.
THE TRAUMA PATHWAY

The trauma pathway is summarised in Figure 29.4. Each of these elements is equally impor-
tant. Historically, the provision of rehabilitation has been the weakest link. The major
357
Trauma systems
trauma pathway extends from initial recognition to final rehabilitation. It can be considered
in three main phases:
• Recognition and resuscitation

• Repair and reconstruction (definitive care)
• Recovery and rehabilitation
In the field, clinical examination and a high level of suspicion underpin the identification of
injuries and physiological derangements, although adjuncts such as ultrasound machines and
devices for near-patient testing are becoming increasingly portable and robust enough to allow
field use. Recognition of potential major trauma cases in the field is based on the use of a major
trauma triage tool.
In hospital, a whole-body, contrast-enhanced, multi-detector CT scan is the default imaging
procedure of choice in the severely injured patient (19). Radiation dosage remains an impor-
tant consideration, especially in younger people. New guidelines (20) indicate how to limit the
use of CT in children without unduly missing injuries. Newer scanners use significantly lower
doses of radiation than older machines.
A rapidly accessible, dedicated emergency theatre is required to ensure resuscitative surgical
interventions can be made whenever they are needed. Surgical expertise must be available 24/7.
Similarly, a hybrid interventional radiology (IR) suite and interventional radiologists must be
rapidly available to stop bleeding, while maintaining the option of switching to damage control
surgery (DCS) in a severely compromised patient without needing to move to a separate loca-
tion. In DCS, different surgical specialist teams may need to operate sequentially or simultane-
ously. Definitive surgery can be completed later after a period of physiological stabilisation in
the intensive care unit (ICU).
Within an MTC, repair and reconstruction relies on the availability of consultants from a
broad range of specialties. Joint operating, simultaneously or sequentially, may be required for
optimal care. National standards for managing open limb fractures demand timely collabora-
tion between orthopaedic and plastic surgeons (21). Similarly, craniofacial injuries should be
managed jointly between neurosurgeons and maxillofacial surgeons.
There should be 24-hour-a-day dedicated trauma lists in theatres that are separate from
the normal emergency theatre. Many repairs and some reconstructions can be undertaken as
emergency operations, but complex reconstructions are generally best planned and scheduled.
Recovery from injury takes place in the ICU and on the acute wards and continues after
discharge. The clinical environment in this phase should reflect the physiological needs of the
patient. Nursing resources should match the indicated level of critical care (22) from level 3 on
the ICU with 1:1 nursing, through high-dependency (1:2), to acute ward level 1 (1:4) and level 0
(basic acute ward care). Most MTCs have developed a dedicated admission ward for all signifi-
cant trauma patients not requiring critical care.
Rehabilitation overlaps with recovery. It is defined as ‘the process of assessment, treatment and man-
agement by which the individual (and their family/carers) are supported to achieve their maximum potential
for physical, cognitive, social and psychological function, participation in society and quality of living’ (23).
Rehabilitation should start as soon as possible and the rehabilitation team should see patients
within a day of admission. At the ‘R-point’ (24), rehabilitation takes over from acute care as the
main priority. At this stage, the patient may move to a specific rehabilitation unit or continue
to be managed in an acute ward with in-reaching rehabilitation resources. Major trauma in the
elderly population was previously under-recognised. As the problems of limited mobility, pain
and confusion in frail, elderly trauma patients are similar to those in patients with hip fractures,
it is possible and desirable to develop a combined rehabilitation pathway for all these patients.
358
Pre-hospital triage and transport to the most appropriate hospital
PRE-HOSPITAL TRIAGE AND TRANSPORT TO THE MOST

APPROPRIATE HOSPITAL
Having a high level of suspicion of major trauma and taking the patient to the most appropriate
hospital are fundamental to delivering good care. A pre-hospital triage decision tool is used to
help direct injured patients to the most appropriate hospital. This guidance will never be per-
fect, given the limitations of assessment in the challenging pre-hospital environment. A degree
of over-triage is inevitable in order to ensure that more than 90% of patients with major trauma
are recognised as positive by the triage tool. In order to achieve 90% sensitivity, a low posi-
tive predictive value has to be accepted, typically about 30%, that is only 1 in 3 triage-positive
patients taken to the MTC turn out to have major injuries after full evaluation in hospital. An
example of a trauma triage tool is shown in Figure 29.3. It is derived from the one developed by
the American College of Surgeons (25).
Most major trauma systems in England have designated ‘trauma desks’ within one of the
regional ambulance control centres. Experienced paramedics, actively engaged in pre-hospital
care in other parts of their job, man the desk 24/7. They deal with all suspected cases of major
trauma, acting as initial case managers. Trauma desk staff will offer advice to staff at the scene,
select the most appropriate hospital for each patient and may establish conference calls to facili-
tate decision-making and the sharing of information. This may involve the scene attendants,
top-cover consultants and senior clinicians in the receiving hospital (Figure 29.4).
Paramedics or pre-hospital doctors report triage-positive cases to the major trauma desk.
The team at the scene or the trauma desk paramedic generally direct these patients to an MTC,
Major Trauma Triage Tool West Midlands Ambulance Service NHS

Entry criteria for this triage is a judgement that the NHS Trust
patient may have suffered significant trauma
3 TICK TEST 7 TICK TEST 8 TICK TEST 7 TICK TEST
1. Measure 2. Assess anatomy 3. Assess 4. Special

vital signs of injury mechanism conditions
Respiratory Rate <10 Penetrating to neck/ of injury Age > 55
or > 29/min chest/abdomen Fall > 6m/2 storeys Children < 8 years old
Systolic Blood Suspected fractured in adult Pregnancy > 20 weeks
pressure <90 mmHg pelvis Fall > 3m/2 times Renal dialysis patients
(2 measurements) 2 or more long bone height in child Bleeding disorders/
Glasgow Coma Scale fractures anticoagulants
<14 Crushed/de-gloved/ Motor Vehicle:
NO mangled extremity
NO Ejection (partial or NO Timecritical extremity
complete) injury
Amputation proximal Burns: Circumferential
to wrist/ankle Intrusion > 30cm at
patient site or 20% (BSA)
Open or depressed
skull fracture Death in same com-
Sensory or motor partment
deficit (new onset) Motorcycle crash
>20mph
Pedestrian/ bicyclist
versus motor vehicle
thrown/ run over with
significant impact
Entrapment
Yes
to any NO
Yes Yes Yes one
to any to any to any If any of Transport
one one one the factors to nearest
If any of the factors are are present Trauma
If any of the factors are present:- contact:
present contact: Unit or
Activate a Major Trauma Alert with the EOC Regional EOC Local
Trauma Desk EOC Regional Trauma
Regional Emergency
Desk for advice Trauma
Transport to Major Trauma Centre Hospital
If all factors are absent, Desk for
If all factore are absent, proceed to stage 3. proceed to stage 4. advice
Figure 29.3 Typical major trauma triage tool (derived from the American College of Surgeons).
359
Trauma systems
Bypass TU to MTC
or Hyper-acute 2° transfer
Incident
1° transfer 2° transfer
to TU to MTC
Paramedic
ambulance
TRAUMA UNIT
MAJOR TRAUMA CENTRE
Attend Rendezvous Inter-hospital
Scene or intercept transfer
en route
EMRTS helicopter
Fast response care

Ambulance Control Top Cover Advice
with Trauma Desk Pre-hospital Enhanced Care Team Senior Doctor
Experienced Paramedic Consultant Air or Land Response and Paramedic
Figure 29.4 Pre-hospital communication, scene attendance and transfer.
though the illustrated triage tool allows some clinical judgement in steps 3 and 4. Triage-positive
patients outside the 60-minute ‘isochrone’ that surrounds the MTC may be taken to a TU instead,
with subsequent secondary transfer to the MTC when appropriate. Within the 60-minute iso-
chrone, TUs are bypassed unless patients are severely compromised and significantly closer to
a TU. The choice of 60 minutes for the triage isochrone is pragmatic but arbitrary. This leads to
greater bypass of TUs. The receiving hospital should be alerted well in advance of the patient’s
arrival.
MANAGING THE PATIENT
THE MAJOR TRAUMA RECEPTION TEAM IN THE MAJOR TRAUMA

CENTRE (MTC) OR TRAUMA UNIT (TU)
In an MTC, the reception team should be consultant-led 24/7. In many centres, an emergency
physician acts as the trauma team leader (TTL). Elsewhere, the TTL may be a surgeon or the role
may be shared between disciplines. Currently, most trauma teams only include one consultant
at the outset, team members being drawn from training grades or non-consultant staff. Because
of the airway challenges posed by major trauma patients, a new sub-specialty of trauma resus-
citation anaesthesia has been proposed (17), although workload and rostering challenges have
resulted in limited development. The commitment of the team leader to major trauma care and
a good understanding of human factors are often more important than the individual’s back-
ground specialty, especially in a largely blunt trauma population, but in most cases the breadth
of clinical experience and knowledge of departmental practice makes emergency physicians
360
Managing the patient
ideally suited for the role. Specialties not represented in the trauma team should be informed
as soon as severe injuries are suspected or identified in their territory. In most MTCs and TUs,
the surgical members of the initial reception team are trainees rather than consultants. It is
vital to involve the corresponding consultants when any serious injuries are found so that key
decision-making and surgical intervention can be undertaken at the consultant level. Similarly,
emergency interventional radiology should be carried out at the consultant level. Likewise, the
anaesthetist looking after major trauma patients undergoing emergency surgery or radiological
intervention should be a consultant. In TUs, the resident TTL is not always a consultant and
some specialties (for example neurosurgery and cardiothoracic surgery) are not usually avail-
able locally. Prompt referral to the MTC when indicated is therefore essential.
CONSULTATION WITH AND REFERRAL TO THE MTC

For patients who present to TUs, there needs to be a clear, straightforward means of referral and
transfer to the MTC. This is illustrated in Figures 29.5 and 29.6.
There are two main approaches to emergency referral from a TU to the MTC. If the patient is
considered by the TU team to have injuries that need immediate transfer to the MTC for life-saving
intervention, they may be empowered to send the patient to the MTC without prior consultation.
This is the full ‘open door’ or ‘send and call’ approach, where the referring clinician contacts the
receiving TTL as soon as the patient has left (Figure 29.5). The open door arrangement may be
modified (as in Figure 29.6) to include immediate contact with the receiving TTL, while simul-
taneously proceeding with the transfer process. This allows advice to be given that may modify
management en route. It may also allow futile situations to be identified before the patient leaves.
However, it is essential that no time is lost waiting for the MTC to get back to the TU ‘just in case it
proves to be futile’.
Immediate Transfer Shared goal:

Patient with life-threatening
from Trauma Unit to Minimise ∆t while optimising
injuries arrives in TU
Major Trauma Centre multi-system care through
close collaboration
Identify need for immediate
transfer to MTC
Optimise and proceed Immediately contact Share imaging

towards immediate transfer resident TTL at MTC directly immediately
Respond to advice while Transfer decision confirmed Communication within MTC

continuing with immediate immediately and specific and review of imaging to
transfer advice given prepare action on arrival*
Patient with life-threatening

injuries arrives in MTC
Figure 29.5 Immediate secondary transfer to the MTC. *For critical, time-dependent interventions, it is
imperative not to cause unnecessary delay. Occasionally, subsequent MTC review may identify a reason
not to transfer, for example futility in an un survivable condition. The transfer can still be aborted if the
patient has not yet left the TU.
361
Trauma systems
Emergency Transfer
from Trauma Unit to Patient with severe injuries
Major Trauma Centre arrives in TU
Identify need for emergency

referral to MTC
Optimise and plan Contact TTL at MTC Share imaging

likely transfer directly 24/7 immediately
Immediate advice given and If needed, review of imaging

transfer decision made and specialist consultation
Respond to advice and immediately if possible to inform transfer decision
transfer promptly
to MTC if indicated Transfer decision by MTC
TTL within 30 minutes
of initial contact
Patient with sever injuries

arrives in MTC
Figure 29.6 Emergency secondary transfer to the MTC. For immediate and emergency referral of
severely injured patients, the TTL is contacted directly by the referring clinician in the TU or by the
Ambulance Service Trauma Desk. The CT and other images are transmitted to the imaging PACS system
in the MTC, so that the TU imaging can be viewed on the MTC’s own system by the receiving team.
PACS, picture archiving and communication system, is a medical imaging technology that provides
economical storage of and convenient access to images from multiple modalities (source machine types).
If the TU team identifies a patient who may or may not require emergency management in
the MTC (rather than one who is considered to need immediate life-saving intervention), the
MTC TTL is allowed a brief period to review the transmitted imaging and consult internally to
optimise decision-making. In this emergency setting, it is not appropriate for the TU team to
have to wait for more than 30 minutes for a decision. Often, the decision can be made on the
initial telephone call alone, without waiting for further assessment, incurring no delay at all.
A reliable means of contacting the TTL at the MTC is essential (for example direct telephone
contact to a personal internal telephone or pager with a backup of the emergency (red) phone in
the resuscitation room). Acute consultation with the MTC for less serious injuries may take place
via a specialist trainee or nurse coordinator at the MTC. Although the time pressure is less, it is still
appropriate for the MTC to provide a senior response in a timely manner to consultation requests.
SECONDARY TRANSFER TO THE MTC

Secondary transfer is increasingly carried out as ‘retrieval’ by the same enhanced care team
that responds to primary scene calls in the network. This spares the TU from losing personnel
for transfer; however, the TU must maintain the training and capability to transfer patients
in case the retrieval team is already engaged on a separate mission. If an enhanced care team
decides to take a patient to a TU, but serious injuries that are more appropriately managed in
the MTC are identified on arrival there, ‘hyper-acute secondary transfer’ is indicated. For this to
362
Making the system work
be effective, the TU reception team must act quickly and efficiently to carry out clinical exami-
nation and a CT scan, so that little overall time is lost.
RESPONSIBILITY AND REVIEW AFTER ADMISSION TO THE MTC

Each MTC will ensure that arrangements are in place for effective coordinated patient care. The
coordination role is particularly important when multiple specialties are involved.
In some centres, major trauma acute care/rehabilitation coordinators review care and engage
with patients, families, and the medical and nursing teams. Clinical coordination may lie with a
multidisciplinary team, or a single nominated specialty.
DISCHARGING PATIENTS FROM THE MTC TO A TU

One of the commonest delays in the system of care is discharging patients from the MTC to a TU or
from the MTC or TU to a separate rehabilitation unit. Current standards are for a TU or general reha-
bilitation unit to receive a patient within 2 days of being declared ready to transfer. For a specialised
rehabilitation unit, the transfer should take place within 1 day. Lack of capacity often leads to delay.
MAKING THE SYSTEM WORK BOX 29.4: Features of an Effective

Trauma System
A number of important additional elements ▪▪ Funding
are critical to trauma system success; these are ▪▪ Capacity and flow management
listed in Box 29.4. ▪▪ Peer review
▪▪ National trauma registry reporting
▪▪ Organisational structure
FUNDING ▪▪ Leadership and involvement culture
The resources required for major trauma care ▪▪ Multi-disciplinary team meetings
are expensive. Cost-effective business manage- ▪▪ Near-real-time reporting and governance
ment must go hand in hand with clinical exper- ▪▪ Policies and procedures
tise. Currently, there is a ‘best practice tariff’ for ▪▪ Education and training
major trauma that must be captured diligently
and accurately to help fund the service.
CAPACITY AND FLOW MANAGEMENT

Trauma is episodic with diurnal, weekly and seasonal patterns. This variation in workload can
be challenging to institutions with fixed facilities and staffing. Occupancy planning to provide
a degree of slack and escalation policies for effective surge control are essential ingredients of
MTC and network management. Similar considerations apply to the provision of paramedic
ambulances and enhanced care team helicopters.
PEER REVIEW
Review of MTC, TU and network performance by senior clinicians from equivalent institutions
and health service officials is an important external quality control process. Nationally agreed mea-
sures (4), developed by a national clinical reference group, are used as the basis of the assessments.
363
Trauma systems
12
9
Ws = number of
6 extra survivors over
those predicted per
100 TARN patients
3
0
Ws
–3
The higher volume
–6 centres tend to
have greater
–9 - Average Ws precision and are
- 3SD from the mean (positive) found on the right-
- 2SD from the mean (positive)
–12 - 3SD from the mean (negative) hand side of the
- 2SD from the mean (negative)
chart
Hospitals are plotted in order of precision (1/ standard error)
Figure 29.7 TARN funnel plot showing comparative performance of the various MTCs and TUs.
NATIONAL TRAUMA REGISTRY REPORTING

In the United Kingdom, the Trauma Audit & Research Network (TARN) (26) has developed and
maintains a national trauma registry. It produces regular, comparative outcome reports based
on the number of unexpected survivors per 100 patients enrolled onto the database – the Ws
statistic. This is weighted to adjust for the different severity profiles of patients seen in differ-
ent MTCs or TUs. The results are presented as a funnel plot to allow visualisation of relative
performance (Figure 29.7).
TARN also produces a quarterly dashboard report to show comparative performance in
terms of specific processes (rather than outcome) such as whether a consultant team leader is
available within 5 minutes of the patient’s arrival in hospital. The outcome reports and dash-
boards are scrutinised as part of peer review.
ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE
Although it is critical that a trauma system is clinically focused, organisational structures play
an important role in maintaining stakeholder engagement and optimising overall care. It is
essential for the network to have a defined influence, so that it cannot be ignored by individual
trusts or other supporting organisations.
Within the MTC, the major trauma service is often aligned managerially with a particular
service, such as the emergency department or orthopaedic service. As major trauma impinges
on a wide range of specialties, it is wise to set up a separate group to oversee care within the
MTC, chaired by a senior clinician from outside the directorate in which major trauma sits.
Rather than making the organisation more complicated than it needs to be, these complemen-
tary structures promote stakeholder engagement and representation.
LEADERSHIP AND INVOLVEMENT CULTURE

Leadership and involvement culture are key parts of an effective trauma system that must be
transmitted to new members of staff, including trainees rotating through the various elements
364
Making the system work
of the system, by the example and enthusiasm of senior permanent staff. They are promoted
through network and council meetings, multi-disciplinary team meetings, the governance pro-
cess and education.
MULTI-DISCIPLINARY TEAM MEETINGS

Trauma care is inherently multi-disciplinary. Face-to-face multi-specialty clinical meetings are
essential for coordinating care. There should be a daily multi-specialty meeting to discuss recent
admissions and new problems or changing plans in other patients. In addition, the main indi-
vidual surgical specialties need to hold weekly meetings between consultants, nurses, therapists
and coordinators. Similar procedures must be in place for established pre-hospital care schemes.
NEAR-REAL-TIME REPORTING AND GOVERNANCE

Accurate information is central to clinical management and governance. Near-real-time informa-
tion can be fed back to clinicians and used to report and address any issues raised, while the patient
is still in hospital. There must also be a coordinated system of collating issues so that trends can
be followed and kept on a risk register until resolved. The World Health Organization has recom-
mended that local governance meetings take place every week in busy institutions and that deaths
panels (where fatalities are scrutinised by peers) should meet between monthly and quarterly (27).
Governance meetings involving all groups involved in patient care must take place locally
both within the MTCs and TUs. Pre-hospital providers must be invited and encouraged to
attend. Governance meetings should also take place at a network level.
In the United Kingdom, TARN provides some of the aggregated data for governance, in the
form of Ws charts, dashboards and other material. In the United States, the American College of
Surgeons has developed a trauma quality improvement programme (ACS TQIP® (28)) involv-
ing more than 200 participating trauma centres.
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

Major trauma networks should develop a handbook of policies and procedures that are easily
accessible physically or on the institutional intranet. While some policies may be tailored to
specific hospitals or services, most policies should be shared for consistency across the network.
EDUCATION AND TRAINING

Education is central to performance. It is also a major source of staff motivation and satisfaction.
Standardised trauma courses, such as the Advanced Trauma Life Support (ATLS) and the European
Trauma Course (ETC), need to be combined with regular informal teaching and bespoke special-
ist courses to provide staff with a wide range of opportunities. Specific courses for paramedics,
nurses and allied professions for pre-hospital and in-hospital practice are equally important.
The importance of human factors in the aircraft industry was recognised after an air crash in
1978 when the plane ran out of fuel while the flight crew was trying to solve a landing gear problem.
Within a year, the American National Transportation Board (NTSB) recommended crew (or cock-
pit) resource management (CRM) training for all airline crews. The National Aeronautics and Space
Administration (NASA) immediately endorsed the CRM approach. Improvements in inter-personal
communication, leadership and decision-making were demonstrated, and the principles were rec-
ognised to be transferrable to other environments where time-critical decisions are made (29,30).
365
Trauma systems
The importance of non-technical factors in causing errors, omissions and delays in acute
trauma care has been increasingly recognised. A working definition of human factors in health-
care is ‘enhancing clinical performance through an understanding of the effects of teamwork, tasks,
equipment, workspace, culture, organisation on human behaviour and abilities, and application of that
knowledge in clinical settings’ (31).
CONTINUING DEVELOPMENT
IMPROVEMENT, INNOVATION AND RESEARCH

Trauma systems are not static. The governance process strives for improvement. Innovation
should be encouraged, but without losing the quality afforded by consistency and reliability.
Research provides the foundation for future practice. While randomised, controlled trials rep-
resent a gold standard; they are often difficult to carry out in emergency situations and espe-
cially in the pre-hospital environment. Research projects require adequate case numbers to
demonstrate important findings with convincing statistical significance. Multi-centre or multi-
network projects facilitate this and are more likely to attract funding.
PREVENTION
No system is complete until it embraces prevention. Adolescents are one of the most vulner-
able groups. Their immature judgement of risk, combined with peer pressure, demands an
education programme that is carefully pitched in order to influence behaviour. Meeting face-
to-face with major trauma victims of their own age brings major trauma to their attention. Such
encounters need to be handled carefully, so that they do not trigger denial or fuel a risk-taking
culture. Alcohol and drug awareness is a key part of any trauma prevention programme and
should not be limited to adolescents and young adults.
The elderly are particularly vulnerable to low-energy falls, particularly if they are receiv-
ing anticoagulant medication. Falls prevention programmes in frail, elderly people are well
established, but there is a need to address the risk of injury in fitter elderly people who are more
active than in previous generations.
Car and road design remain important elements of a prevention strategy. Nanotechnology,
new materials and intelligent movement sensors will have an important future role. Here too,
human factors must not be ignored. A careful balance must be struck between limiting indi-
vidual freedom and promoting safety, so that individuals learn about risk and are not driven to
rebel with other forms of high-risk or reckless behaviour.
CONCLUSION
The best care for the injured can only be achieved by the implementation and maintenance of
an effective trauma system. Pre-hospital care is now recognised to be an essential component
of such a system, not only for the provision of care before patients arrive in hospital, but also
as a resource for ensuring that patients are matched with the most appropriate receiving facil-
ity. Inevitably, such systems are complex, however, and they will only function well if all their
potential elements are funded, integrated and appropriately governed. In addition, every indi-
vidual involved as part of such a system must know their own role, the roles and skills of those
they work with, and must ensure that their practice remains up to date.
366
References
REFERENCES
1. Regional Networks for Major Trauma. NHS Clinical Advisory Groups Report,
Department of Health, September 2010. www.gov.uk/government/publications/regional
-trauma-networks-clinical-advisory-group-document.
2. Committee on Trauma, American College of Surgeons. Resources for optimal care of
the injured patient. 2014. https://www.facs.org/quality-programs/trauma/vrc/resources.
(Original diagram: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Health Resources
and Services Administration. Model Trauma System Planning and Evaluation.
Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2006. Available at
www.facs.org/quality-programs/trauma/tsepc/resource.)
3. The Intercollegiate Group on Trauma Standards. Regional trauma systems: Interim guid-
ance for commissioners. London: The Royal College of Surgeons of England, December
2009.
4. Major trauma measures, Trauma Quality Improvement Network System (TQuINS),
National Peer Review Programme, NHS England. www.tquins.nhs.uk/?menu=resources.
5. Styner R. The light of the moon: Life, death and the birth of advanced trauma life support. Lulu
Press, 2007.
6. West JG, Trunkey DD, Lim RC. Systems of trauma care: a study of two counties. Archives
of Surgery 1979;114:455–460.
7. West JG, Cales RH, Gazzaniga AB. Impact of regionalization: The Orange County expe-
rience. Archives of Surgery 1983;118:740–744.
8. Cales RH. Trauma mortality in Orange County: The effect of implementation of a
regional trauma system. Annals of Emergency Medicine 1984;13:1–10.
9. SAMU. www.samu-de france.fr/en/System_of_Emergency_in_France_MG_0607.
10. Victorian State Trauma System. www.health.vic.gov.au/trauma/.
11. Nicholl J, Turner J, Dixon S. The cost-effectiveness of the regional trauma system in the
North West Midlands. School of Health and Related Research (SCHARR), University of
Sheffield, 1995. www.sheffield.ac.uk/scharr/.
12. Oakley PA, MacKenzie G, Templeton J, Cook AL, Kirby RM. Longitudinal trends in
trauma mortality and survival in Stoke-on-Trent 1992–1998. Injury 2004;35:379–385.
13. National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and Death (NCEPOD). Trauma:
Who cares? A report of the National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and
Death (NCEPOD), 2007. www.ncepod.org.uk/2007t.htm.
14. Cole E, Lecky F, West A, Smith N, Brohi K, Davenport R. The impact of a pan-regional
inclusive trauma system on quality of care. Annals of Surgery 2016;264(1):188–194.
15. Abbreviated Injury Scale, Association for the Advancement of Automotive Medicine.
www.aaam.org/about-ais.html.
16. Nathens AB, Jurkovich GJ, Maier RV, Grossman DC, MacKenzie EJ, Moore M, Rivara
FP. Relationship between trauma center volume and outcomes. Journal of the American
Medical Association (JAMA) 2001;285:1164–1171.
17. Oakley P, Dawes R, Thomas R. The consultant in trauma resuscitation and anaesthesia.
British Journal of Anaesthesia 2014;113:207–210.
18. Turner-Stokes L. Specialist neuro-rehabilitation services: Providing for patients with
complex rehabilitation needs. British Society for Rehabilitation Medicine. www.bsrm
.co.uk/publications/Levels_of_specialisation_in_rehabilitation_services5.pdf.
19. RCR guidelines. www.rcr.ac.uk/docs/radiology/pdf/BFCR(11)3_trauma.pdf.
367
Trauma systems
20. CT in children. www.rcr.ac.uk/docs/radiology/pdf/BFCR(14)8_paeds_trauma.pdf.

21. British Orthopaedic Association Standards for Trauma. www.boa.ac.uk/publications
/boa-standards-trauma-boasts/.
22. Levels of Critical Care for Adult Patients. Intensive Care Society Standards, 2009. www
.ics.ac.uk/.
23. Definition of rehabilitation by Turner-Stokes. www.england.nhs.uk/commissioning
/spec-services/npc-crg/group-d/d02/.
24. Rehabilitation for patients in the acute care pathway following severe disabling illness
or injury: BSRM core standards for specialist rehabilitation. Working Party of the British
Society of Rehabilitation Medicine, October 2014. www.bsrm.co.uk/publications/.
25. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Guidelines for field triage of injured
patients. Recommendations of the National Expert Panel on Field Triage, 2011. MMWR
Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 2012;61:1–21.
26. Trauma Audit and Research Network. www.tarn.ac.uk/.
27. World Health Organization. Guidelines for trauma quality improvement programmes.
2009. www.who.int/violence_injury_prevention/services/traumacare/traumaguidelines
/en/
28. The American College of Surgeons Trauma Quality Improvement Program (ACS
TQIP®). www.facs.org/quality-programs/trauma/tqip/.
29. Carayon P, Tosha B. Wetternecka TB, Rivera-Rodriguez AJ, Hundt AS, Hoonakker P,
Holden R, Gurses AP. Human factors systems approach to healthcare quality and
patient safety. Applied Ergonomics 2014;45:14–25.
30. Catchpole K. Spreading human factors expertise in healthcare: Untangling the knots in
people and systems. BMJ Quality and Safety 2013;22:793–797.
31. Catchpole K. Towards a working definition of human factors in healthcare. Clinical
Human Factors Group. http://chfg.org/definition/towards-a-working-definition-of
-human-factors-in-healthcare.
368
Appendix A: Practical procedures
in thoracic trauma
NEEDLE THORACOCENTESIS
PROCEDURE
1. Identify the 2nd intercostal space in mid-clavicular line, remembering that the 2nd rib
joins the sternum at the sternal angle and that the 2nd intercostal space is below this rib
and above the 3rd rib (Figure A.1).
2. Clean the skin with an alcohol wipe.
3. Insert a large bore cannula (>4.5 cm in length) perpendicularly into the chest (Figure A.2).
4. Remove the metal needle (trochar) leaving the cannula in place and uncapped. Air should
be heard to escape, but this is not invariable.
If the procedure has been successful, the
patient’s condition and vital signs will
rapidly begin to improve.
5. If there is a possibility that the cannula is not
long enough and tension pneumothorax is still
strongly suspected, push the cannula hard into
the chest wall, indenting the skin, as this will
create a little extra length. It is essential to be
aware of the risk of going too medial with the
possibility of injury to great vessels (1).
6. If the procedure is unsuccessful using these
landmarks, it should be repeated in the Figure A.1 Correct site for (initial attempt)
finger thoracostomy area (see next section). needle thoracostomy.
(a) (b)
Figure A.2 (a,b) Correct insertion technique in 2nd intercostal space mid-clavicular line.
369
Appendix A
FINGER THORACOSTOMY
INTRODUCTION
Finger thoracostomy is the first half of putting in a chest drain, that is it is gaining access
to the pleural space. It is an important (and a change in emphasis) to consider this as a
procedure in its own right. This is because it is possible to gain access to the pleural space
in less than 20 seconds if the practitioner does not worry about the chest drain itself – this
can come later. A finger thoracostomy can also be performed using the equipment in a
standard suture kit.
This is a painful procedure and unless the patient is anaesthetised, adequate local
anaesthetic infiltration around the site of the thoracostomy and down to the pleura is
required in addition to parenteral analgesia. When traumatic cardiac arrest has occurred,
injection of local anaesthetic must be omitted and the procedure performed with the mini-
mum delay.
PROCEDURE
1. Identify 4th intercostal space mid-axillary line, which is in the ‘safe triangle’ (Figure A.3).
If the nipple is used as a marker of the 5th intercostal space in the male, the space must be
traced along the rib edge as it rises moving laterally; simply extending a line laterally from
the nipple will indicate a space which is too low. For this reason, the spaces are best counted
down from the manubriosternal junction and then followed along the rib edge above when
the collect space is identified.
2. As far as possible create clean conditions – sterility is not practically achievable pre-hospital.
In practice, this means a minimum of Betadine® spray, and gloves; sterile towels. It should
be remembered that empyema is the most serious of complications post-thoracostomy
with rates (after tube insertion) varying from 1% to 25% (2,3). The use of prophylactic
antibiotics does not reduce the risk of empyema (4).
3. If the patient is not anaesthetised, as stated above, adequate local anaesthesia and
analgesia are essential. The use of ketamine should be considered.
4. Use a scalpel to make a 1 inch (2½ cm) cut in the skin along the line of the intercostal space.
This can be done with a scalpel or by pinching the skin and cutting with scissors.
5. ‘Punch through’ all the chest wall
tissues with a pair of (closed) Spencer
Wells forceps (Figure A.4). Since tro
cars were removed from chest drain
teaching, the standard technique
taught is blunt dissection, but this can
take some time and is often extremely
painful. In an unstable patient out of
hospital, the punch through technique
is preferred and even works well in
flail chest patients when there is little
structural support to the chest wall.
This is called a ‘punch’ as the force is Figure A.3 The safe triangle for finger
applied very quickly and deliberately. thoracostomy.
370
Appendix A
Because the forceps are held 4 to

5 cm down the shaft, there is no
risk of damage to the mediastinal
structures.
6. By rotation and gently opening and
closing the forceps, enlarge the hole
through the chest wall and pleura.
7. Insert finger into pleural cavity,
then perform a 360° finger sweep
to free the lung from any chest wall
adhesions. Exclude bowel in the
chest and feel for lung touching the
tip of finger. Feeling the lung touch Figure A.4 The correct way to hold the Spencer
the finger excludes an advanced Wells forceps in order to perform a safe punch through.
tension pneumothorax. Care must The closed pair of forceps is held in the dominant hand
grasping the arms of the forceps. The hand hold should
be taken to avoid lacerating the be about 4–5 cm away from the points of the forceps,
inserted finger on fractured rib ends. but judged according to the estimated thickness of the
8. Dress the thoracostomy hole with patient’s chest. They may need to be farther in an obese
patient or if there is considerable surgical emphysema.
sterile/dry gauze (or see later). The points of the forceps are placed against the
9. If the patient is not being ventilated, intercostal muscles or overlying fat in the correct place for
a suitable one-way valve must be the thoracostomy, and the soft tissues punched through
into the pleural cavity in one swift movement.
applied.
PRACTICE POINT
There is no place for underwater drainage systems in pre-hospital care.
CLAMSHELL THORACOTOMY
PROCEDURE
1. Identify the patient who fits the inclusion criteria:
• Penetrating trauma to the chest within the ‘cardiac box’ (Figure A.5)
• Signs of life within previous 5 minutes
Having identified the need for thoracotomy, make the decision to proceed. Don’t delay and
don’t start CPR.
2. Attempt a sterile field, but under no circumstances delay the procedure.
3. Put on double gloves; there is a high risk of injury to the hands from sharp rib ends.
4. Delegate someone else to look after
• Endotracheal intubation
• Intravenous access
• Sedation/analgesia (which will be required if the procedure is successful and the
patient starts re-perfusing their brain)
5. Perform bilateral finger thoracostomies in the posterior axillary line, 4th intercostal space
using the technique described earlier.
6. Pause for 15 seconds to see if patient has improved from relief of a tension pneumothorax.
If not, carry on.
371
Appendix A
Figure A.6 Thoracotomy line. The correct line

Figure A.5 The ‘cardiac box’. is the dotted one, the dashed line is incorrect.
7. Cut along the 4th intercostal space from the lateral end of one of the thoracostomies
towards the sternum. It is important to remember that the plane of this is not an axial/
cross section of the patient’s chest and that the intercostal space drops downwards as it
extends forwards out of the axillary area. Failure to do this will lead to the need to cut
through ribs (Figure A.6). Cut through the skin and intercostal muscles together using
Tuff Cut® scissors, joining the thoracostomies. Take care not to damage structures deep to
chest wall.
8. Cut through sternum with the scissors and along the intercostals space to the other
thoracostomy, joining the thoracostomies and taking care not to damage structures deep
to chest wall. The use of a Gigli saw to cut the sternum is not recommended as it takes
considerably longer and is likely to result in the spraying of tissue and blood.
9. Pull clamshell open leading to extension of thoracic spine. Be careful to avoid injury on
cut ends of sternum/ribs.
10. Use an assistant or a retractor to open the clamshell (Figure A.7).
11. Look for cardiac amponade (a tense blue blood-filled sack).
12. If tamponade is found, relieve it by picking up the most anterior part of the pericardium
(this will avoid the phrenic nerve) with a pair of tissue forceps, snipping the pericardium,
extending the cut superiorly staying as anterior as possible and scooping out any clot,
being careful not to ‘deliver the heart’
anteriorly which will kink the great vessels.
13. Observe to see if heart beats. If the heart it is
fibrillating, flick it.
14. Gently obstruct the cardiac hole either by
placing a finger over it, suturing or stapling
the hole or inserting a Foley catheter into
the hole followed by balloon inflation and
very gentle traction. The Foley catheter
technique risks enlarging the hole if too
much traction is used.
15. In the pre-hospital environment, do not
attempt to suture a hole unless experienced
in this technique Figure A.7 Clamshell thoracotomy with
no intra-pericardial injury. Note the hand
16. Give blood if available. compressing the descending aorta against
17. Expedite transfer to a major trauma centre. the vertebral column.
372
Appendix A
NOTES
Cardiac massage may be required as may adrenaline, but the greatest chance of survival is with
patients who spontaneously regain output (and consciousness) after relief of their tamponade.
Digital compression of the aorta is possible if major abdominal or pelvic bleeding is suspected,
but if this is required in pre-hospital care, the outcome is likely to be very poor.
REFERENCES
1. ED Docs get it wrong a lot. Emergency Medicine Journal 2005;22:788.
2. Bailey RC. Complications of tube thoracostomy in trauma. Journal of Accident and
3. Eddy AC, Lunag K, Copass M. Empyema thoracis in patients undergoing emer-
gent closed tube thoracostomy for thoracic trauma. American Journal of Surgery
1989;157(7):494–497.
4. Maxwell RA, Campbell DJ, Fabian TC, Croce MA, Luchette FA, Kerwin AJ, Davis KA,
Nagy K, Tisherman S. Use of presumptive antibiotics following tube thoracostomy for
traumatic hemopneumothorax in the prevention of empyema and pneumonia – A multi-
center trial. Journal of Trauma 2004;57(4);742–748.
373
Appendix B: Traumatic cardiac
arrest
TRAUMATIC CARDIAC ARREST: 2 Hs and 2 Ts

For most pre-hospital clinicians, traumatic cardiac arrest is a situation that is very rarely
encountered. However, when it is, rapid decisions are required if a successful outcome is to be
achieved. In the pre-hospital environment access to skilled assistance may be limited, although
this will depend on the circumstances. As a consequence the necessary procedures may need
to be carried out in sequence, rather than parallel, and according to a protocol with which the
clinician must be completely familiar, even if the skills themselves are rarely practised. If there
are multiple rescuers, effective clear leadership is essential. Attendance at a suitable cadaver-
based training course is recommended.
In essence in traumatic rather than medical cardiac arrest, there are 2 Hs and 2 Ts.
2 Hs and 2 Ts
The causes of traumatic cardiac arrest mean that such situations must be managed very differ-
ently to cardiac arrest from medical causes. Traumatic cardiac arrest arises from one (or more)
of the following mechanisms:
2 Ts
• Tension pneumothorax
• Tamponade (pericardial; usually due to penetrating cardiac trauma)
2 Hs
• Hypoxia (usually airway obstruction, but may be reflex after head injury)
• Haemorrhage (massive haemorrhage from external or internal sources)
Immediate effective identification and management of these conditions is essential. If this is

not possible, the only hope lies in immediate evacuation to hospital.
INITIAL ASSESSMENT
A rapid initial assessment looking for an obvious cause is mandatory. This will confirm (or
eliminate) the presence of cardiac arrest (in practice often a very low cardiac output state): or an
airway obstruction or massive external haemorrhage may be obvious, or a penetrating injury
such as a knife wound in the precordium may be found.
374
Appendix B
STEP 1: IDENTIFY AND CONTROL LIFE-THREATENING

EXTERNAL BLEEDING
Direct pressure and elevation (where appropriate) or a tourniquet must be immediately applied.
Haemostatic dressings may be applied in traumatic cardiac arrest, but initial control of haemor-
rhage will be by pressure through the dressings. Whilst external bleeding is being managed,
intravenous access can be gained and fluids, ideally blood products, administered. External
jugular or femoral access may be easier in the shutdown patient and early resort to intraosseous
access may buy time. Early vascular access is the priority in traumatic cardiac arrest, especially
due to haemorrhage. Even in cases of tamponade or pneumothorax, access will be needed for
induction of anaesthesia or analgesia. In traumatic cardiac arrest in children, intraosseous access
is first line, venous access can follow. In adults, a large bore line should be inserted in the exter-
nal jugular or femoral vein. Intraosseous access is unlikely on its own to allow administration
of sufficient volumes of fluid but may buy time and allow some refilling, thus making cannula-
tion easier.
In most cases, there will be no life-threatening external haemorrhage, in which case, having
ensured that access is being obtained and fluids commenced, move to step 2.
STEP 2: ENSURE THE AIRWAY IS PATENT AND PROTECTED,

THEN ADMINISTER HIGH FLOW OXYGEN WITH VENTILATORY
SUPPORT IF NEEDED
The normal stepped airway care sequence must be followed, beginning with simple airway
manoeuvres. If there is no return of spontaneous circulation once the airway is clear, pre-
hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) will be necessary. Once the airway is clear and pro-
tected, move on to step 3.
STEP 3: IDENTIFY LIFE-THREATENING CHEST TRAUMA

The next intervention will depend on whether advanced surgical trauma skills are avail-
able. If they are, bilateral finger thoracostomies should be performed with scalpel and blunt
finger dissection in the 5th intercostal space just anterior to the mid-axilla line producing a
2.5 cm incision on each side. If thoracostomy/thoracotomy are not possible, bilateral needle
thoracocentesis should be performed. If there is no rapid improvement in the patient’s con-
dition, rapid infusion of blood products (or less ideally fluids) to achieve a palpable pulse
and transfer to hospital is essential. Evacuation should not be delayed whilst gaining vas-
cular access.
If the patient recovers spontaneous cardiac output and respiratory effort, and especially if
signs suggest that a tension pneumothorax has been effectively treated, go to step 4.
If this is not the case, and if there is major bleeding from the thoracostomies or evidence of
a penetrating chest wound, and cardiac arrest continues, a clamshell thoracotomy should be
performed. This will allow management of life-threatening pulmonary haemorrhage (which
will be seen from the thoracostomy incisions) or tamponade from penetrating trauma. If neither
are present, go to step 4.
The clamshell thoracotomy is achieved by extending each thoracostomy incision with
Tuff Cut™ shears, which should be used to cut the sternum. The cut must follow the curve
of the intercostal space and must avoid the neurovascular bundle. Once the chest is open
375
Appendix B
(an assistant will need to hold the thoracotomy open to allow effective access), pericardial
tamponade, if present, can be relieved and the cardiac wound may then be closed with a suture
(or staple) or by using a Foley catheter inserted through the wound and then inflated and with
gentle traction applied. Very gentle traction is applied to the catheter in order to ensure closure
of the wound without pulling the balloon through the defect and enlarging it. Blood products
or other fluids may be infused via the cardiac wound using the end of the giving set without
a cannula.
There is no role for needle pericardiocentesis in traumatic cardiac arrest.
There may also be a posterior cardiac wound as a result of transfixion of the heart which will
also require closure. Whilst these injuries are being managed, the heart should be handled as
little as possible.
Formal surgical equipment is not usually available in the pre-hospital environment but if
a clamp is available, it can be used to control haemorrhage from a lobe of the lung or a non-
crushing clamp can be placed across the hilum. The hilar twist manoeuvre can be performed by
dividing the inferior pulmonary ligament and rotating the lower lobe of the lung anteriorly over
the upper lobe and will effectively control major pulmonary haemorrhage on that side. Once
inside the chest, if no evidence of massive intrathoracic bleeding or penetrating chest trauma is
found or such bleeding has been controlled, go to step 4.
STEP 4: IDENTIFY AND MANAGE HAEMORRHAGE INTO

THE ABDOMEN OR PELVIS
The presence of internal haemorrhage other than in the chest is often presumptive and must
be deduced based on the physical signs and mechanism of injury, or the failure of the patient to
improve with appropriate interventions. There may be pattern bruising, abrasions and lacera-
tions over the abdomen and pelvis, abdominal pain (pre-arrest), abdominal distension, or in
the case of pelvic injury, pelvic disruption, blood at the urethral meatus, evidence of perineal
trauma or scrotal injury in males.
Where pelvic or abdominal haemorrhage is suspected to be the cause of cardiac arrest, the
management is urgent and vigorous fluid replacement, ideally with blood. The pelvis must not
be ‘sprung’. Pelvic instability is an unreliable sign and springing may exacerbate any bleeding.
In all suspected cases, a pelvic binder must be correctly applied.
If a thoracostomy has been performed, some control of lower torso haemorrhage can be
achieved by applying manual pressure on the descending aorta within the thorax. Laparotomy
has no role in the pre-hospital management of cardiac arrest. Go to step 5.
STEP 5: IDENTIFY AND MANAGE (OR EXCLUDE) LONG

BONE FRACTURES
Long bone fractures causing sufficient haemorrhage to result in cardiac arrest are very rare and
usually obvious. If compound and causing massive bleeding, they will have been managed as
part of step 1. Commercial splints should be applied, using traction splintage for femoral frac-
tures. If pelvic fracture is possible, this will influence the choice of splint, suggesting use of a
splint that does not provide traction against the symphysis. Go to step 6.
376
Appendix B
STEP 6: RAPID TRANSPORT TO THE NEAREST MAJOR

TRAUMA CENTRE
If no treatable cause has been found, or all possible treatment has been carried out, or if sponta-
neous circulation has returned, the patient must be transported immediately to a major trauma
centre. In some circumstances, there may be a role for a temporary stop at a trauma unit prior
to transfer to a more distant major trauma centre. Some traumatic arrests will be due to dev-
astating head injury, but only rarely is this diagnosis possible in the pre-hospital environment.
Otherwise the only appropriate course is to treat other salvageable causes first.
CPR
The role of cardiopulmonary resuscitation in traumatic cardiac arrest is controversial. What is
absolutely clear, however, is that chest compressions alone will be entirely futile if the cause
of the cardiac arrest is not addressed. There is also a role for supported ventilation once an
obstructed airway has been cleared and whilst tension pneumothorax or untreated tamponade
are managed or active bleeding from a site which can be controlled is stopped. Remember that
positive pressure ventilation may exacerbate pneumothorax if there is an ongoing bronchial or
pulmonary leak, or may result in systemic air embolus if there is a vascular communication.
If there are insufficient assistants, however, attention must focus primarily on identifying and
managing the cause of the arrest.
CPR does have a role after all these have been corrected, or non-compressible haemorrhage
has been identified and blood products or fluids are being infused. Before this, CPR can impede
clinical assessment and make procedures such as vascular access more difficult. If the clinical
skill set available does not allow the performance of a clamshell thoracotomy and tamponade
is suspected (other causes can be temporarily managed by clearing the airway, finger thora-
cotomy and administration of blood or fluid), then CPR should be promptly commenced and
continued until arrival in hospital. IV fluids will increase preload in low cardiac output states
and may increase cardiac output although consideration should be given to dilution of haemo-
globin and clotting factors, potential exacerbating oxygen delivery and traumatic coagulopathy.
RETURN OF SPONTANEOUS CIRCULATION (ROSC)

Effective resuscitation may result in rapid return of consciousness and spontaneous cardiac
output. Pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia must therefore be available. Judicious ketamine
and appropriate maintenance of paralysis is most appropriate. If a thoracotomy has been per-
formed, return of spontaneous circulation (ROSC) is likely to result in bleeding from the inter-
nal mammary and other smaller vessels at the incision/blunt dissection margins. Significant
bleeding can be controlled by the use of artery forceps.
377
Index
Page numbers followed by f and t indicate figures and tables, respectively.
A Ageing population, see Elderly, trauma in

CABCDE approach, initial assessment of injured child, Age on survival and outcome, in elderly trauma patients, 227
195, 196t Aggression, acts of, 28–29
Abdomen, assessment, 218 Agitated patient, pre-hospital management of spinal
Abdominal aortic aneurysm, 79 injuries, 158
Abdominal aortic tourniquets, 79 AIC (ambulance incident commander), 282, 283, 287,
Abdominal injuries 294, 295
blunt injuries, 56 Airbags
children, 202–203 in older patients, 225
Absolute entrapment, defined, 125 road traffic collisions, 127
Acceleration, of tissue, 51, 52 Airwave, 285
Access Airwave radio network, 46
individual components of care, 272 Airway(s)
to medical documentation, 317 burns, 237–238
medical facility, 267–268 with cervical spine control, 63–64
distance, 267 compression of, 199
infrastructure and transport platforms, 267–268 control, trauma in pregnancy, 219
security and conflict, 268 injured child, initial assessment, 195, 196t, 197
weather, 268 maintenance, individual components of care, 271–272
vascular, injured children, 204 nasopharyngeal, 63, 89
Access Overload Control (ACCOLC), 286 paediatric
Accountability injuries, 199
law and ethics, 323 sizes, 210
legal, 323–324 patent and protected, 375
Accuracy, triage, 290–291 trauma, pathophysiology of, 85–86
Acidaemia, 116, 117, 118 contamination as result, 86
Acute care surgery model, 10 direct, 85
Additions, patient documentation, 314 indirect, 85
Adjuncts, 190–191 thermal, 85–86
Adrenaline, 34, 184, 185 Airway management, 63–64, 65, 83–95
Advanced airway manoeuvres, airway management assessment, 86–88
cricoid pressure vs. BURP, 92, 94 cyanosis, 86
cricothyroidotomy, 95 feel, 88
difficult/failed airway, 94–95 listen, 87
endotracheal intubation, 91–92 look, 86–87
pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia, 92, 93t basic manoeuvres, 88–90
Advanced Clotting Sponge (ACS), 75 BVM, 90
Advanced Trauma Life Support (ATLS), 9, 376, 391 manual, 88, 89f
378
Index
NPA, 89 Anaesthesia, pre-hospital, 158

OPA, 89–90 emergency, 188–191
cervical spine considerations, 84 adjuncts, 190–191
manoeuvres muscle relaxants, 191
advanced airway, 91–92 overview, 188
cricoid pressure vs. BURP, 92, 94 paediatric, 191
cricothyroidotomy, 95 post-intubation maintenance of, 191
difficult/failed airway, 94–95 preparing for, 189–190
endotracheal intubation, 91–92 Analgesia, 179–185
intermediate airway, 90–91 burn wound, 239
pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia, 92, 93t chest injuries, 112
methodical assessment, 88 femoral shaft fractures, 176
open airway, 84 hip, injury, 174–175
overview, 83 individual components of care, 273–274
pathophysiology of airway trauma, 85–86 injured children, 206–209
contamination as result of trauma, 86 inhaled, 209
direct trauma, 85 intramuscular, 208
indirect trauma, 85 intranasal, 208–209
thermal trauma, 85–86 intravenous, 208
potential causes of, 83 non-pharmacological pain relief, 209
in pregnancy, 214, 215 oral, 208
secured airway, 84 overview, 206, 207t–208t
supported airway, 84 rectal, 208
TBI, assessment and management of, 144 lower leg fractures, 177
Alerts, 300, 309 musculoskeletal trauma, 168
Alfentanil, 182 overview, 179
Allergies, medication, past medical history, last ate or pain
drank, events (AMPLE), 237 assessment, 180
All Hazards approach, mass casualty situations, 280–281 defined, 179
Allied services, trauma systems, 356 inhalational agents, 183
Al-Qaeda, 8 ketamine, 183
Alterations, patient documentation, 314 local anaesthetics (LAs), 183–185
Ambulance incident commander (AIC), 282, 283, 287, management, 179, 180–185
294, 295 non-pharmacological methods, 180–181
Ambulance services, ECTs and, 355–356 NSAIDs, 182
Amendments, patient documentation, 314 opioids, 182
American Academy of Pediatrics, 187 paracetamol, 182
American College of Surgeons (ACS), 351 pharmacological methods, 181
American College of Surgeons Committee on Trauma, 58 physiology, 180
Amesbury, chemical weapons agent in, 28 patellar dislocation, 176
Ametop® (tetracaine gel), 184 routes of, 181
Amputation, musculoskeletal trauma, 171 Analysis, audit cycle, 338–339
Anaemia, 140 Anaphylaxis, 117
Anaesthesia Anarchy, 3
individual components of care, 271–272 Anatomical and physiological differences of children, 196t
injured children Anatomy
preparation, 210 in pregnancy, 214–215
principles, 209–210 airway, 214, 215
379
Index
breathing, 214, 215 catastrophic haemorrhage, 195, 196t

circulation, 214–215 cervical spine, 197
spinal injuries, 152–154, 155f, 155t, 156f circulation, 196t, 198
Ankle fractures, 177 disability, 196t, 198, 199
Ankylosing spondylitis, 134, 158 exposure, 196t, 199
Anterior-posterior fractures, pelvis, 175 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 287
Anti-arrythmics, 226 musculoskeletal trauma, 166–167
Antibiotics pain, 180
burns, 240 pregnancy, 217–218
musculoskeletal trauma, 169 abdomen, 218
Anticoagulants, 226 examination, 217–218
Anticonvulsants, 146 foetal, 218
Anti-epileptics, 226 fundal height, 217–218
Antifibrinolytic agent, 122, 146 history, 217
Anxiolytics, 226 pre-hospital
Aortic injury, 109–110 burned patient, 237
Aortic tear, 109 firearms, ballistics, and GSWs, 252–253
APACHE II scores, 228 pre-hospital, spinal injuries, 157–159
Apnoeic oxygenation, 189 agitated patient, 158
Application immobilisation, 157–158
pelvic sling, 175 initial management, 157–158
splints, 170 ongoing management, 158–159
tourniquet, 78–79 overview, 157
Asherman®, 104 scene, 127–128
ASHICE, 310 TBI, 143–147
Asphyxiation, 129 airway, 144
Assessment breathing, 145–146
of airway, 86–88 catastrophic bleeding, 144
close view, 86, 87 cervical spine immobilisation, 144–145
feel, 88 circulation, 146
listen, 87 disability, 146
look, 86–87 exposure and environment, 147
wide view, 86–87 indications for intubation and ventilation,
burn size, 235–237 145–146
hand surface, 236 traumatic cardiac arrest, 374–377
Lund and Browder chart, 236–237 airway, patent and protected, 375
serial halving, 236 CPR, 377
Wallace Rule of Nines, 235 identify and control life-threatening external
chest injuries, 101–103 bleeding, 375
feel, 103 identify and manage haemorrhage into abdomen/
initial, 101–103 pelvis, 376
listen, 103 identify life-threatening chest trauma, 375–376
look, 101–103 rapid transport to nearest MTCs, 377
firearms, ballistics, and GSWs, 253–254 ROSC, 377
injured child, 195–199 ATLS (Advanced Trauma Life Support), 9, 376, 391
CABCDE, 195, 196t ATMIST handover, 310–311
airway, 195, 196t, 197 Attenuating energy projectiles (AEPs), 246
breathing, 196t, 197–198 Audiovisual recording, 316–317
380
Index
Audit Autonomy, law and ethics in pre-hospital care, 328

clinical, 336 Autopilot, 282
in pre-hospital care, see Research and audit AVPU, 200
Audit cycle, 336–339 Awareness, SAFE approach, 16
data collection and analysis, 338–339
degree of compliance, 338 B
identifying standards, 338 Backchannel communication, 286
overview, 336 Backward–upward–rightward pressure (BURP)
preparation and planning, 336–337 manoeuvre, cricoid pressure vs., 92, 94
priorities in clinical audit programme, 337 Bag–valve–mask (BVM), 90, 94, 95, 197–198, 214, 272
prospective/retrospective clinical audit, 337–338 Ballistics, 243–255
re-audit, 339 bullet(s), 244
reporting results and developing improvement plan, 339 design and energy transfer, 250–251
Auscultation, 66, 197 instability, 247, 248f
Austere pre-hospital environment, 264–276 defined, 57–58
disaster environment, 275 epidemiology, 243, 244t
individual components of care, 271–274 external, 246–247
anaesthesia and airway maintenance, 271–272 history and assessment, 253–254
analgesia, 273–274 internal, 246
breathing, 272 mesh, 251–252
circulation, access, 272 nomenclature and classification, 244–245
disability, 273 non-permissive zone, 253
environment, 273 overview, 243
resuscitation fluids and strategies, 272–273 permissive zone, 253
medical context, 265–268 plates, 252
access, 267–268 pre-hospital assessment and treatment, 252–253
capability, 265–267 pre-hospital treatment, 254–255
capacity, 267 protection, 251–252
distance, 267 scene safety and command and control, 252
equipment, 265–266 semi-permissive zone, 253
infrastructure and transport platforms, 267–268 terminal, 248–250
secondary care network, 266–267 cavitation and temporary cavity formation, 249–250
security and conflict, 268 permanent cavity formation, 248–249
trained personnel, 266 shock wave, 250
weather, 268 zones at shooting incident, 253
overview, 264 Barotrauma, 238
prolonged field care, 274 BAT (burns assessment team), 296
strategies for delivery, 268–270 Baton rounds, 246
additional non-medical facilitators, 270 Battlefield Advanced Trauma Life Support (BATLS), 62
level of care, 269 Battle’s sign, 144
planning, 268–270 Beneficence, law and ethics in pre-hospital care, 328
response, activation, 270 Benzodiazepine, 146, 187, 188
safety of team, 270 Bertie-Clay, Neville, 250
services, remitting, 269 Beta-blockers, 226
spectrum of conditions, 269 Betadine® spray, 370
team and casualty, transportation, 269 Bird, Derrick, 252
understanding patient journey, 270–271 Birmingham Accident Hospital and Rehabilitation
Automatic rollover protection devices, 127, 128 Centre, 350
381
Index
Black Talon©, 251 Bolam v Friern Hospital Management Committee, 324

Blast injuries, 256–262 Bolin™, 272
components of explosion, 258–259 Bolin®, 104
blast wind, 259 Bolitho v. City and Hackney Health Authority, 324
heat, 259 Bolitho v City and Hackney HA [1997] 4 All ER 771, 327
shock wave, 258, 259f Bores, 245
haemorrhage control and resuscitation, 261 Boron carbide, 252
incident management, 260–261 Box splints, 170, 174, 177, 203
incidents in civilian setting, 257–258 Bradypnoea, 197
mechanism of injury, 57 Brain injury, classification, 140
overview, 256 Breathing, 64–65
patterns, 259–260 auscultation, 66
primary, 259–260 burns, initial assessment, 238
secondary, 260 individual components of care, 272
tertiary, 260 injured child, initial assessment, 196t, 197–198
scene considerations, 261 inspection, 65
treatment strategies, 261 palpation, 65
in war and peace, 256–258 percussion, 66
Blast lung in pregnancy, 214, 215
injury, 260 pregnancy, trauma in, 219
risk of, 238 TBI, assessment and management of, 145–146
Blast overpressure, defined, 57 Bribes, 2
Blast trauma, mechanisms of injury, 100 British Association for Immediate Care (BASICS),
Blast wind, 259 341, 356
Bleeding British Burn Association, 241
catastrophic, 144 British Transport Police, 28
control of, 73–74 Broselaw tape, 289
extremity, 73 Bruising (contusion)
internal, 74 myocardial, 110
junctional, 73–74 pulmonary, 110
methods, 73 Bubbling, 87
life-threatening external, identify and control, 375 Building blocks
Blizzard™, 273 fundamental, trauma systems, 355–357
Blizzard® blanket, 302 allied services, 356
Blood-borne pathogens, occupational exposure to, 19 ambulance services and ECTs, 355–356
Blood loss, 118 designated hospitals for major trauma, 356–357
potential sites for, 66 rehabilitation units, 357
Blood products, thoracic trauma, 112 Bullets, 244
Blood transfusion, 121 design and energy transfer, 250–251
Blunt injuries, by region, 56 instability, 247, 248f
Blunt trauma Bundle branch block, 110
cause of, 98 Bupivacaine, 183t
chest injury screening test in, 102 Burns, 233–242
kinetic energy and, 51, 52–53 analgesia, 239
mechanism of injury, 99 antibiotics, 240
Body’s response, to shock, 117–118 carbon monoxide and cyanide, 240
Boko Haram, 5 chemical, 240
Bolam Case, 327 depth, 235
382
Index
dressings, 239 Cardiac output, 116, 225, 377

electrical, 240–241 Cardiac tamponade, 65, 99, 101, 108–109
flash, 85 clinical features, 108
hypothermia mitigation, 239–240 management, 108–109
initial assessment, 237–239 mortality rate in blunt trauma, 99
airway, 237–238 overview, 108
breathing, 238 restricted cardiac filling, cause of, 117
circulation, 238–239 Cardiogenic shock, 117
initial history taking, 237 Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), in traumatic
non-accidental injury, 241 cardiac arrest, 377
overview, 233 Care/caring
paediatric, 204 bystander, 291
pre-hospital assessment and management, 237 critical care, defined, 343
scene safety, 233–234 individual components of, 271–274
size, assessment, 235–237 anaesthesia and airway maintenance, 271–272
hand surface, 236 analgesia, 273–274
Lund and Browder chart, 236–237 breathing, 272
serial halving, 236 circulation, access, 272
Wallace Rule of Nines, 235 disability, 273
triage and transfer, 241 environment, 273
types, 234 resuscitation fluids and strategies, 272–273
Bystander care, 291 level of, 269
pre-hospital care, see Pre-hospital care
C prolonged field, 274
Cabinet Office Briefing Room (COBR), 260–261 refusal of, 313–314
Calcium gluconate, 240 on scene, communicating, 47
Calibre, defined, 244 Cascade, MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 287
Caller line identification (CLI), 41 Casualty clearing station (CCS), 292
Canadian C-Spine rule, 159, 160t Casualty safety, 285
Cannulation, 238 Catastrophic bleeding, 144
Capability, austere pre-hospital environment, Catastrophic haemorrhage, 62–63
265–267 defined, 72
medical equipment, 265–266 injured child, initial assessment, 195, 196t
secondary care network, 266–267 overview, 72
trained personnel, 266 Catastrophic haemorrhage control, 72–80
Capacity of bleeding, 73–74
austere pre-hospital environment, 267 extremity, 73
criminal and civil law, 325–327 internal, 74
children, 326–327 junctional, 73–74
overview, 325–326 methods, 73
management, 363 pregnancy, trauma in, 218
Capnography, 186, 199 techniques, 74–80
Carbon dioxide, removal of, 84 direct pressure, 74
Carbon monoxide elasticated tourniquets, 78
burns, 240 factor concentrators, 75
poisoning, 233 haemostatic dressings, 75–77
Cardiac injuries, 55 mucoadhesive agents, 76–77
383
Index
pneumatic tourniquets, 78 mediastinal traversing injury, 109

procoagulant supplementers, 76 open pneumothorax, 105–106
ratchet tourniquets, 78 tension pneumothorax, 104–105
tourniquet application, 78–79 life-threatening, 64–65
tourniquets, 77–80 mechanisms of injury, 99–101
windlass tourniquets, 77 blast trauma, 100
wound clamps, 80 blunt trauma, 99
Catecholamines, musculoskeletal trauma, 166 chest wall, 100
Cavitation, 249–250 hypoxaemia, 100–101
Cellophane wrap, 239 pathophysiology of thoracic trauma, 100
Cellulose fibres, 74 penetrating trauma, 99–100
Celox™, 76–77 ventilation–perfusion mismatch, 101
Celox Gauze, 76 minor, 111
Central theme, GMP, 345 chest wall injury, 111
Central zone, 234 simple pneumothorax, 111
Centre for Maternal and Child Enquiries (CMACE) report, 213 sternal fracture, 111
Cephalosporin, 169 overview, 98
Ceramic plates, 252 potentially life-threatening injuries, 109–111
Cerebral oedema, 147 aortic (and other great vessel) injury, 109–110
Cerebral perfusion pressure (CPP), 141–142 diaphragmatic injury, 110–111
Cervical collar, 158, 159 myocardial contusion, 110
Cervical spine oesophageal injury, 110
considerations, 84 pulmonary contusion, 110
control tracheobronchial injury, 110
airway with, 63–64 simple interventions, 98
pregnancy, trauma in, 219 thoracic injuries, possible, 98–99
immobilisation, 201 thoracic trauma, general treatment of
TBI, assessment and management of, 144–145 intravenous access and fluids/blood, 112
injured child, initial assessment, 197 oxygen, 112
Characteristics, trauma system requirements, 352–353 penetrating objects, 112
Chemical burns, 234, 240 transport, 112–113
Chemical incidents, 28 Chest wall injuries
Chest compressions, 221 mechanical function, 100
Chest injuries, 98–113 minor, 111
analgesia, 112 Child protection, 319
assessment, 101–103 Children
feel, 103 anatomical and physiological differences, 196t
initial, 101–103 consent and capacity, 326–327
listen, 103 head injury in, 148–149
look, 101–103 triage and, 289
blunt trauma, screening test in, 102 Children Act 1989, 326
children, 202 Child’s weight, estimation, 206
hypotension, 101 Chin lift manoeuvre, 88, 89f
immediately life-threatening, 98–99, 104–109 ChitoFlex® PRO, 77
cardiac tamponade, 108–109 ChitoGauze® PRO, 77
flail chest, 107–108 Chitosan-based dressings, 76–77
massive haemothorax, 106–107 Chlorhexidine-based antiseptic, 171
384
Index
Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), 112 Clinical presentation, adult with shock, 120t
Circulation, 66–67 Clinical questions, research and audit, 331–332
burns, initial assessment, 238–239 Clinical team members, disclosure to, 318
individual components of care, 272 Close view, airway, look, 86, 87
injured child, initial assessment, 196t, 198 Clothing removal, 167, 168
in pregnancy, 214–215 Coagulative necrosis, zone of, 234
pregnancy, trauma in, 219–220 Coagulopathy, traumatic, 118, 119
TBI, assessment and management of, 146 Co-amoxiclav, 169
Civil Contingencies Act, 281 Cocaine, 184
Civilian setting, blast incidents in, 257–258 Codeine, 207t, 208
Civilian violence, 8–9 Collisions
Civil law, 324 direction and type, 52
Civil law, criminal and, 323–325 head-on, 53
common law, 324–325 pedestrian, 54–55
consent and capacity, 325–327 road traffic, 53
children, 326–327 vehicle occupant, 53–54
overview, 325–326 wing top, 55
legal accountability, 323–324 Coma, hypoglycaemic, 144
statute, 324 Combat Application Tourniquet (CAT), 77
Clamshell thoracotomy, procedure, 371–372 Combat Ready Clamp (CRoC™), 79
Classification Command and control, MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic,
ammunition, 244 282–284
blast injury, 57 operational, 283–284
brain injury, 140 strategic, 282–283
bullets, 244 tactical, 283
firearms, ballistics and gunshot wounds, 244–245 Command team, 283
TBI, 142–143 Commercial extrication jackets, 132
Clavicle, fracture, 172 Common law, 324–325
Climate change, energy use and, 3–4 Communication
Clindamycin, 169 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic
Clinical Advisory Group (CAG), 352 media, 286
Clinical approach, to trauma patient, 118–121 social media, 286–287
Clinical audit, 336 in pre-hospital care, 40–49
programme, priorities in, 337 after incident, 48–49
prospective/retrospective, 337–338 Airwave radio network, 46
Clinical features on arrival at receiving unit, 47–48
cardiac tamponade, 108 on arrival at scene, 42–43
flail chest, 107, 108 care on scene, 47
massive haemothorax, 106 CRM and on-scene communication, 44–46
open pneumothorax, 106 effective, 41
tension pneumothorax, 104 en route to hospital, 47
Clinical governance initial communication on scene, 42–43
cross-cutting theme, 345 JESIP programme, 48–49
retrieval, 303, 304t methods, on scene, 46–48
Clinical management, shock, 121–123 mobile telephones, 47
decompensated hypovolaemic shock, 122–123 overview, 40
overview, 121–122 radio voice procedure, 43–44
Clinical notes, incident scene, 39 responding to trauma call, 41–42
385
Index
Competences, defined, 345 Coup and contre-coup cerebral contusions, 139

Compliance, 336, 337 Cowley, R. Adams, 351
Complications, obstetric Crew resource management (CRM), 44–46
following trauma, 215–217 concepts, 45–46
foetal death, 216 defined, 44–45
foeto-maternal haemorrhage, 216 principles, 45
penetrating injury to uterus, 217 radio check, 44
placental abruption, 215 Cricoid pressure, BURP vs., 92, 94
placenta praevia, 216 Cricothyroidotomy, 83, 95, 199, 271–272
premature labour, 216 Crime, 3, 8–9
uterine rupture, 216 Criminal law, civil law and, 323–325
Compression injuries, 154 common law, 324–325
Computer aided dispatch system (CAD), 41 consent and capacity, 325–327
Concentrators, factor, haemostatic dressings, children, 326–327
75 overview, 325–326
Confidentiality, medical documentation, 317 legal accountability, 323–324
Conflict, medical facility, 268 statute, 324
Consent Criteria, degree of compliance, 338
criminal and civil law, 325–327 Critical care, defined, 343
children, 326–327 Cross-cutting theme
overview, 325–326 clinical governance, 345
disclosure with/without, 317–318 operational practice, 345
Consultation team resource management, 345
with MTC, 361–362 Crush injuries, 170–171
undertaking, 35–36 Crystalloids, 121, 122, 205, 238, 272
Contact burns, 234, 240 CSCATTT, MIMMS principles, 281–296
Contamination, as result of trauma, 86 assessment, 287
Contemporaneous notes, 314–315 command and control, 282–284
Content, patient documentation, 312–313 operational, 283–284
Continuing development strategic, 282–283
improvement, innovation and research, 366 tactical, 283
prevention, 366 communication
Control media, 286
of bleeding, 73–74 social media, 286–287
extremity, 73 overview, 281–282
internal, 74 report refinement and cascade, 287
junctional, 73–74 safety, 284–285
methods, 73 casualty, 285
life-threatening external bleeding, 375 personal, 284–285
Controlled release, 126 scene, 285
Contusion (bruising) treatment, 291–293
myocardial, 110 bystander care, 291
pulmonary, 110 CCS interventions, 292
Copies, patient documentation, 315 diagnosis of death, 292–293
Cord injuries, 151, 152 discharge from scene, 292
Corruption money, 2 evacuated populations, 293
Corticosteroids, 147 at scene, 291–292
Costs, musculoskeletal trauma, 166 transport, 293–296
386
Index
triage, 287–291 Destinations

accuracy, 290–291 choice of, 220
children and, 289 injured children, 211
sieve, 288, 289f Development(s)
sort, 289–290 continuing
T1 hold, 289 improvement, innovation and
C-spine, rules for clearing, 134–135 research, 366
Culture, leadership and involvement, 364–365 prevention, 366
Curriculum, PHEM, 344–346 early, in UK, MTCs, 350–351
central theme, GMP, 345 in England, 352
cross-cutting theme improvement plan, audit cycle, 339
clinical governance, 345 Devices, extrication, 132
operational practice, 345 Dextrose, 146
team resource management, 345 Diagnosis
overview, 344–345 cardiac arrest, 220
sub-specialty theme cardiac tamponade, 108
providing PHEM, 346 death, 292–293
supporting emergency preparedness and pneumothorax, 103
response, 346 in pre-hospital care, 34
supporting rescue and extrication, 346 Diamorphine, 24f, 182, 206t, 207t, 208, 239
supporting safe patient transfer, 346 Diaphragmatic injury, 110–111
using pre-hospital equipment, 346 Diastolic filling, 116, 117
working in EMS, 345 Diclofenac, 182, 207t, 208
Cyanide, 233, 240 Difficult/failed airway, 94–95
Cyanosis, 86 Diffuse axonal injury, 139
Cyclooxygenase 1 and 2 (COX 1, COX 2), 182 Digital nerve blocks (ring blocks), 185
Cytokines, musculoskeletal trauma, 166 Digital photography, musculoskeletal
trauma, 167
D Digital technology, 310–311
Damage control surgery (DCS), 358 Digoxin, 226
Damaged vehicles/objects, 127 Direct pressure, 74
Data collection, 338–339 Direct trauma, to airway, 85
Data Protection Act, 313, 314, 324 Dirty bomb, 7–8, 61
Deacetylated chitosan acetate, 77 Disability, 67–69
Death, diagnosis of, 292–293 individual components of care, 273
Debriefing, post-incident, 29–30 injured child, initial assessment, 196t, 198, 199
Deceleration, of tissue, 51, 52 pregnancy, trauma in, 220
Decision, on appropriate transport method, TBI, assessment and management of, 146
300–301 Disability adjusted life years (DALYs), 4
Decompensated hypovolaemic shock, 122–123 Disaster, medical care during, 275
Defibrillation pads, 221 Disaster-capitalism complex, 5
Definitive Surgical Trauma Care (DSTC™), 9 Discharge
Deformity, 166, 167 patients, from MTC to TU, 363
Delayed sequence induction, 189 from scene, 292
Delgado, Michael, 3 Disclosure
Depths, burn, 235 to clinical team members, 318
Dermatones, 155f with/without consent, 317–318
Design, bullet, energy transfer and, 250–251 Discovery, pre-hospital care, 332
387
Index
Dislocation, 167 E
elbow, 173–174
Ear injuries, 260
knee, 176
Education, trauma systems and, 9–10, 391
patellar, 176
Egress, incident scene, 38
shoulder (glenohumeral dislocation), 173
Ejection, 54
sternoclavicular, 172
Elasticated tourniquets, 78
Disseminated intravascular coagulation, 118
Elbow, dislocated, 173–174
Distal circulation, 67
Elderly, trauma in, 223–228
Distance, to hospital, 267
age on survival and outcome, 227
Distribution, of spinal injuries, 152, 153f
defined, 223
Distributive shock, 117
epidemiology, 223–224
Documentation
hip, injury, 174–175
handover and, see Handover and documentation
injury scores and mortality in, 227–228
medical, confidentiality and access to, 317
mechanism of injury, 224–225
patient, 311–317
medical history and drug history, 226
alterations, additions or amendments, 314
musculoskeletal injuries, 165–166
audiovisual recording, 316–317
overview, 223
contemporaneous notes, 314–315
physiological response, 225–226
content, 312–313
pre-existing medical conditions, effect, 227
copies, 315
proximal fractures in, 173
electronic recording, 315
treatment strategies in, 228
ePRF, 315–316
Electrical burns, 234, 239, 240–241
overview, 311
Electrical energy, 51
presentation, 314
Electronic patient report form (ePRF), 315–316
PRF, 311–312
Electronic recording, 315
refusal of care/non-hospital attendance, 313–314
Embolic phenomena, 166
Domestic violence, 213
Emergency care providers, 14–15
Donoghue (or McAlister) v Stevenson [1932] AC 562, 327
Emergency department (ED), 293–294
DORA (Dynamic Operation Risk Assessment), 284
Emergency medical systems (EMS), working in,
Double gloving, 21
sub- specialty theme, 345
Drag coefficient, 247
Emergency & Military Tourniquet (EMT), 78
Drag force, 247
Emergency preparedness and response, supporting, 346
Dressings
EMMA™ capnometer, 303
burn wound, 239
Endotracheal intubation, 91–92
chitosan-based, 76–77
Endotracheal tubes, in children, 209
haemostatic, 73, 74, 75–77
Energy transfer
factor concentrators, 75
bullet design and, 250–251
mucoadhesive agents, 76–77
physics, 51–52
procoagulant supplementers, 76
Energy use, climate change and, 3–4
Driver, extricating, 130, 131
England, recent developments in, 352
Drug history, trauma in elderly, 226
Enhanced care teams (ECTs), ambulance services and,
Drugs, for sedation, 187–188
355–356
Drug safety, 22–23, 24f
En route to hospital
Dry Fibrin Sealant Dressing, 76
communicating, 47
Dum-Dum arsenal, 250
manipulating environment, 38
Dunblane incident, 252
Entonox®, 112, 168, 176, 183, 188, 209, 220, 271
Dynamic Operation Risk Assessment (DORA), 284
Entrapment, vehicle accidents and, 36–37, 38f
Dysrhythmia, 110
388
Index
Entrapment and extrication, 125–136 justice, 328

alternative techniques, 132 non-maleficence, 328
approach of fire and rescue service, 127–132 Ethics, in pre-hospital care, 322–328; see also Law and
driver, extricating, 130, 131 ethics
extrication paths, 130 European Trauma Course (ETC®), 9
full access, 129 Eurotherm3235 trial, 147
glass management, 128 Eutectic mixture of local anaesthetics (EMLA) cream, 184
overturned cars, 131–132 Evacuated populations, 293
rear seat passengers, extricating, 131 Evacuation, MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 293–294
scene assessment and safety, 127–128 Evaluation, SAFE approach, 18–19
space creation, 128–129 Evidence
stabilisation and initial access, 128 generating, 333
devices, 132 hierarchy of, 333, 334t–335t
immobilisation and packaging, 133–134, 135–136 summarising, 333, 336
need for, 133 Evidence-based health care, defined, 331
overview, 125–126 Examination
rules for clearing C-spine, 134–135 spinal injuries, 160
types, 126–127 trauma in pregnancy, 217–218
controlled release, 126 abdomen, 218
overview, 126 foetal, 218
rapid access, 126–127 fundal height, 217–218
snatch/immediate rescue, 126 Explosion(s), 256
Environment components of, 258–259
individual components of care, 273 blast wind, 259
manipulating, 36–39 heat, 259
clinical notes, 39 shock wave, 258, 259f
egress and triage, 38 Exposure
en route to hospital, 38 injured child, initial assessment, 196t, 199
photography, 38 pregnancy, trauma in, 220
vehicle accidents and entrapment, 36–37, 38f primary survey, 69
primary survey, 69 TBI, assessment and management of, 147
TBI, assessment and management of, 147 Exsanguination, 203
Epidemiology External ballistics, 246–247
firearms, ballistics and gunshot wounds, 243, 244t External catastrophic haemorrhage, 62–63
musculoskeletal trauma, 165–166 Extremity(ies)
trauma in elderly, 223–224 bleeding, 73
Epidural/extradural haematoma (EDH), 140 children, 203
Epileptic seizures, 140, 144 Extrication
Epinephrine, 184 entrapment and, see Entrapment and extrication
Equipment paths, 130
governance, 29 supporting, sub-specialty theme, 346
safety, 22–23, 24f Eye protection, 74, 128
for transfer, 302–303
Eschar, 235 F
Escharotomies, 238 Factor concentrators, haemostatic dressings, 75
Ethical responsibility, in pre-hospital care Falls
autonomy, 328 from height, 55–56
beneficence, 328 in older people, 224–225
389
Index
Fall-specific mechanisms of injury, 55 space creation, 128–129

Federal Emergency Management Agency stabilisation and initial access, 128
(FEMA), 5 Fixed wing patient transfer, 305–306
Feel Flail chest, 99, 100, 107–108, 370
airway, assessment, 88 clinical features, 107, 108
chest injuries, assessment, 103 management, 107, 108
Femoral nerve block, 184, 185 overview, 107
Femoral shaft fractures, 176 Flail segment, 107
Fentanyl, 24f, 146, 168, 182, 188, 190, 191, 207t, Flash burns, 85
208, 271 Flow, management, 363
lozenges, 168 Fluid resuscitation, injured children, 205
Field triage criteria, 58 Fluids, thoracic trauma, 112
Finger thoracostomy, 104, 105, 202, 370–371 Flumazenil, 188
procedure, 370–371 Foetal assessment, 218
Firearms, 243–255 Foetal death, 216
ballistic protection, 251–252 Foeto-maternal haemorrhage, 216
bullet design and energy transfer, 250–251 Follow SAFETY 123, 16–18
cavitation and temporary cavity formation, patient, 17–18
249–250 practitioner, 16
epidemiology, 243, 244t scene, 16–17
history and assessment, 253–254 Forearm fracture, 174
nomenclature and classification, 244–245 Forward projection, 55
bullets, 244 Fracture(s), 166, 167
non-permissive zone, 253 ankle, 177
overview, 243 clavicle, 172
permanent cavity formation, 248–249 femoral shaft, 176
permissive zone, 253 forearm and wrist, 174
pre-hospital assessment and treatment, 252–253 hip, 174–175
pre-hospital treatment, 254–255 humerus, 173
scene safety and command and control, 252 lower leg, 176–177
semi-permissive zone, 253 metacarpal, 174
shock wave, 250 open, 169
types grouped according to ‘long’ or ‘short,’ pelvic, 55, 67, 166, 168, 175–176, 203
comparison, 245 phalangeal, 174
in UK, 246 proximal, in elderly, 173
zones at shooting incident, 253 scapula, 172
Firearms Act (1997), 246 sternal, 111
Fires, 28 vertebral, 56
Fire service, approach, 127–132 Frail states, 2–3
driver, extricating, 130, 131 Frequency, of major trauma, 353–354
extrication paths, 130 Frontal collision, 52
full access, 129 Front roll manoeuvre, 131
glass management, 128 Full access, approach of fire and rescue service, 129
overturned cars, 131–132 Full metal jacket (FMJ) bullets, 250
HGVS/VANS, 132 Full thickness burns, 235
methods, 131–132 Functional residual capacity (FRC), 189
rear seat passengers, extricating, 131 Fundal height, assessment, 217–218, 220, 221
scene assessment and safety, 127–128 Funding, 363
390
Index
G permanent cavity formation, 248–249

permissive zone, 253
Gauge, defined, 245
pre-hospital assessment and treatment, 252–253
Gauze roll, 76
pre-hospital treatment, 254–255
Gauze swabs, 74
scene safety and command and control, 252
GCS (Glasgow Coma Scale) score, 68, 143, 146, 148, 149,
semi-permissive zone, 253
152, 186, 200–201, 254, 290
shock wave, 250
General Medical Council (GMC), 316, 323, 342
zones at shooting incident, 253
Generating, new evidence, 333
Gurgling, 87
Generic requirements, guiding principles and, 354–355
Giambelli, Federgio, 256
H
Gigli saw, 171
Haematoma block, 184
Gillick v West Norfolk Area Health Authority [1986]
Haemopneumothorax, 225
AC 112, 327
Haemorrhage
Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) score, 68, 143, 146, 148, 149,
into abdomen/pelvis, identify and manage,
152, 186, 200–201, 254, 290
376
Glass management, approach of fire and rescue
catastrophic, see Catastrophic haemorrhage
service, 128
cause of shock, 118
Glenohumeral dislocation (‘dislocated shoulder’), 173
foeto-maternal, 216
Global Burden of Disease project, 4
Haemorrhage control, blast injuries, 261
Globalisation, trauma systems and, 9–10
Haemorrhage control techniques, 74–80
Global Peace Index ranking, 5
direct pressure, 74
Gloves, 20, 21, 63, 74, 370, 371
haemostatic dressings, 75–77
GMC (General Medical Council), 316, 323, 342
Goggles, 20, 21
Gold, Dore, 8
Good Medical Practice (GMC), 223, 312, 313, 323, 345
tourniquets, 77–80
Governance
application, 78–79
clinical, 303, 304t
elasticated, 78
near-real-time, 365
pneumatic, 78
Gravid uterus, 219
ratchet, 78
Great vessel injury, 109–110
windlass, 77
Greek financial crisis, 2
wound clamps, 80
Green whistle, 183
Haemostasis, maintenance of, 69
Groaning, 87
Haemostatic dressings, 73, 74, 75–77
GSWs, see Gunshot wounds (GSWs)
Guiding principles, generic requirements and, 354–355
Guillotine amputation, 171
Gunshot wounds (GSWs), 243–255
Haemostatic resuscitation, 118, 121, 122
ballistic protection, 251–252
Hamilton, Thomas, 252
bullet design and energy transfer, 250–251
Handgun, defined, 245
bullets, 244
Handover and documentation, 308–320
cavitation and temporary cavity formation, 249–250
ATMIST handover, 310–311
epidemiology, 243, 244t
digital technology, 310–311
history and assessment, 253–254
hospital, 309–310
nomenclature and classification, 244–245
legal requirements, 317–319
non-permissive zone, 253
child protection, 319
overview, 243
391
Index
confidentiality and access to medical disability, 146

documentation, 317 exposure and environment, 147
disclosure to clinical team members, 318 indications for intubation and ventilation, 145–146
disclosure with/without consent, 317–318 initial assessment and management, 143–147
overview, 317 neurophysiological effects, 141–142
police, 318–319 pathophysiology, 139–140
relatives, 318 systemic effects, 142
overview, 308–309 transfer, 148
patient documentation, 311–317 types, 140–141
alterations, additions or amendments, 314 EDH, 140
audiovisual recording, 316–317 ICH, 141
contemporaneous notes, 314–315 intracranial haemorrhage, 140–141
content, 312–313 SAH, 141
copies, 315 SDH, 140
electronic recording, 315 Head-on collision, 53
ePRF, 315–316 Headphones, 300
overview, 311 Health and Care Professions Council, 313, 317, 323, 345
presentation, 314 Heat, component of explosion, 259
PRF, 311–312 Heavy goods vehicles (HGVs), 132
refusal of care/non-hospital attendance, 313–314 Heights, falling from, 55–56
pre-alerts, 309 Heinsohn, Gunnar, 6
special circumstances, 319 Helicopter(s)
Hand surface, 236 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 295
HART (hazardous area response team), 240, 253, 285, 311 for patient transport, 301, 302, 304, 305
Hazardous area response team (HART), 240, 253, 285, 311 safety, 23, 26f
Hazards Helmets, 300
acts of aggression, 28–29 HemCon®, 76, 77
chemical incidents, 28 Hepatic injuries, children, 202
fires, 28 Hepatitis B e antigen (HBeAg), 19
motorways, 27 Hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg), 19
rail incidents, 28 Hepatitis B virus (HBV), 19
scene of road traffic collision, 127–128 Hepatitis C virus (HCV), 19
water, 28 Hierarchy of evidence, 333, 334t–335t
weather, 25, 27 Hip, injury, 174–175
Head injury(ies), 138–149 History
additional interventions, 147–148 firearms, ballistics, and GSWs, 253–254
children, 200–201 trauma systems, 350–352
in children, 148–149 HITMAN strategy, 274
overview, 138–139 Hospital
signs and symptoms of, 199 en route to
TBI communicating, 47
airway, 144 manipulating environment, 38
breathing, 145–146 handover, 309–310
catastrophic bleeding, 144 HPMK™, 273
cervical spine immobilisation, 144–145 Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), 19
circulation, 146 Humeral fractures, 173
classification, 142–143 Hydrofluoric acid, 240
392
Index
Hydrogel dressings, 239 I

Hyperaemia, zone of, 234
Ibuprofen, 182, 208, 207t
Hyperextension injuries, 154
ICP (intracranial pressure), 64, 84, 140, 141–142, 144,
Hyperflexion, 154
147, 159
Hyperglycaemia, 140, 147
Identification
Hypertonic saline (HS), 147–148, 201, 208t
haemorrhage into abdomen/pelvis, 376
Hyperventilation, 112, 142, 145, 180, 214
life-threatening chest trauma, 375–376
Hypoglycaemia, 147
life-threatening external bleeding, 375
Hypoglycaemic agents, 226
long bone fractures, 376
Hypoglycaemic coma, 144
standards, 338
Hypoperfusion, 117, 118, 120, 134, 156, 157, 225, 226
Immediately life-threatening chest injuries, see
Hypotension, 67, 99, 101, 104, 108, 120, 122, 123, 142,
Life- threatening chest injuries
143–144, 146, 157, 160, 205, 214–215, 272
Immediately life-threatening musculoskeletal injuries, 168
Hypotensive resuscitation, 67
Immediate rescue, 126
Hypothermia
Immobilisation
active warming blankets, 302
cervical spine, 201
avoiding, 136
cervical spine, assessment and management of TBI,
cerebral metabolic rate and oxygen consumption,
144–145
140
entrapment and extrication, 133–134
clotting, impaired, 75
spinal injuries
coagulopathy and, 101, 118
paediatric, 161–162
cold wet clothes, 69
pre-hospital assessment and management, 157–158
mitigation, 199, 239–240
for transport, 161
mucoadhesive agent, 76–77
Impact loading, pathophysiology of TBI, 139
prevention, 18
Improvement
procoagulant supplementer, 76
continuing development, 366
risk, 25, 27
plan, developing, 339
TBI and, 147
Improvised explosive devices (IEDs), 257
weather hazard in pre-hospital care, 25, 27
Impulsive loading, pathophysiology of TBI, 139
Hypoventilation, 145
Incidences
Hypovolaemia, 66, 69, 101, 116, 117, 191, 196, 197, 198,
blast lung injury, 260
204, 205, 214, 219
cardiac, pulmonary and septic complications, 227
Hypovolaemic shock
chest wall injuries, 225
compensated, 122–123
haemopneumothorax, 106
decompensated, 122–123
hypoglycaemic events, 147
in large burns, 238
of hypoxaemia, 186
signs of, 214, 216
pre-existing conditions in elderly trauma population,
type of shock, 116–117
227
Hypoxaemia
spinal injury, 151
hypoperfusion and, 116
TBI, 138
incidence, 186
traumatic injuries, 223
mechanism of injury, 100–101
in elderly population, 223
TBI patient, 142
Incident
Hypoxia
communication after, 48–49
catastrophic consequences of, 145
management, blast, 260–261
management, 143–144, 145
scene, 31–39
secondary neurological damage, causes
approach, direction of, 32–34
of, 156
393
Index
clinical notes, 39 TBI, 143–147

diagnosis, in pre-hospital care, 34 airway, 144
egress and triage, 38 breathing, 145–146
en route to hospital, 38 catastrophic bleeding, 144
manipulating environment, 36–39 cervical spine immobilisation, 144–145
overview, 31 circulation, 146
patient, 34 disability, 146
photography, 38 exposure and environment, 147
preparation and response, 31–34 indications for intubation and ventilation, 145–146
principles of scene management, 34–35 traumatic cardiac arrest, 374–377
taking call and setting out, 31–32 airway, patent and protected, 375
undertaking consultation, 35–36 CPR, 377
vehicle accidents and entrapment, 36–37, 38f identify and control life-threatening external
types, 53–56 bleeding, 375
falls from height, 55–56 identify and manage haemorrhage into abdomen/
pedestrian collisions, 54–55 pelvis, 376
vehicle occupant collisions, 53–54 identify and manage (exclude) long bone fractures,
Indirect trauma, to airway, 85 376
Ineffective respiration, 87 identify life-threatening chest trauma, 375–376
Infection, transmission of, 19 rapid transport to nearest MTCs, 377
Information gaps, 309 ROSC, 377
Infrastructure, medical facility, 267–268 Initial communication on scene, 42–43
Inhalational agents, managing pain, 183 Initial history, burns, 237
Inhalational injuries, 85–86 Injured children, 194–211
Inhaled analgesia, injured children, 209 analgesia, 206–209
In-hospital management, musculoskeletal trauma, 171–172 inhaled, 209
Initial access, fire service, 128 intramuscular, 208
Initial assessment intranasal, 208–209
burns, 237–239 intravenous, 208
airway, 237–238 non-pharmacological pain relief, 209
breathing, 238 oral, 208
circulation, 238–239 overview, 206, 207t–208t
chest injuries, 101–103 rectal, 208
injured child, 195–199 destinations, 211
CABCDE, 195, 196t initial assessment, 195–199
airway, 195, 196t, 197 CABCDE, 195, 196t
breathing, 196t, 197–198 airway, 195, 196t, 197
catastrophic haemorrhage, 195, 196t breathing, 196t, 197–198
cervical spine, 197 catastrophic haemorrhage, 195, 196t
circulation, 196t, 198 cervical spine, 197
disability, 196t, 198, 199 circulation, 196t, 198
exposure, 196t, 199 disability, 196t, 198, 199
pregnancy, 217–218 exposure, 196t, 199
abdomen, 218 injuries and management, 199–204
examination, 217–218 abdominal injury, 202–203
foetal, 218 airway, 199
fundal height, 217–218 burns, 204
history, 217 chest injury, 202
394
Index
head injury, 200–201 Intercollegiate Board for Training in PHEM (IBTPHEM),

musculoskeletal injury, 203 342, 344, 345, 347
spinal injury, 201 Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, 3
overview, 194–195 Intermediate airway manoeuvres, airway management,
safeguarding, 210 90–91
sedation and anaesthesia Internal ballistics, 246
preparation, 210 Internal bleeding
principles, 209–210 control of, 74
TCRA, 205 identification, 62
vascular access and fluid resuscitation, 204–205 International Committee of the Red Cross
Injuries (ICRC), 268
abdominal, 56 Interventions
blast, see Blast injuries additional, head injury, 147–148
blunt, by region, 56 CCS, 292
cardiac, 55 Intracerebral haemorrhage (ICH), 141
chest, see Chest injuries Intracranial haemorrhage, 140–141
chest, life-threatening, 64–65 EDH, 140
head, see Head injury(ies) ICH, 141
inhalational, 85–86 SAH, 141
life-threatening chest, see Life-threatening chest SDH, 140
injuries Intracranial pressure (ICP), 64, 84, 140, 141–142, 144,
lung, 55 147, 159
mechanism of, see Mechanisms of injury Intralipid®, 184
musculoskeletal, 56 Intramuscular analgesia, injured children, 208
non-projectile penetrating, 58 Intranasal analgesia, injured children, 208–209
primary cord, 56 Intraosseus (IO) access, 204
spinal, see Spinal injuries Intravenous (IV) access
thoracic, possible, 98–99 injured children, 204
thoracic aortic, 55 thoracic trauma, 112
traumatic brain, 55, 56 Intravenous analgesia, injured children, 208
Injuries, children, 199–204 Involvement culture, 364–365
abdominal injury, 202–203 Islamic State (IS), 6–7
airway, 199 Islamic State of Iraq and Levant (ISIL), 6
burns, 204 Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS), 6
chest injury, 202 ITClamp™, 80
head injury, 200–201
musculoskeletal injury, 203 J
extremities, 203 Jackets, commercial extrication, 132
pelvic fractures, 203 Jaw thrust, 63, 88, 89
spinal injury, 201 JESIP (Joint Emergency Services Interoperability
Injury scores, in elderly trauma patients, 227–228 Programme), 16, 33f, 36, 40, 42, 45,
Injury Severity Score (ISS), 54, 58, 194, 226, 227, 228, 289, 48–49, 280
309, 353, 354 Jones, Robert, 350
Innovation, continuing development, 366 Junctional bleeding, control of, 73–74
Inspection, breathing, 65 Junctional Emergency Treatment Tool (JETT™), 79
Institute of Medicine, 9 Junctional tourniquets, 79–80
Insulin, 226 Justice, 328
395
Index
K disclosure with/without consent, 317–318

overview, 317
Kaolin, 76
police, 318–319
Katrina (hurricane), 4, 5
relatives, 319
Kendrick® traction splint, 169, 170
Lethal triad, 25, 27
Ketamine, 24f, 145–146, 168, 171, 183, 188, 190, 191, 204,
Levobupivacaine, 183t
207t, 208, 220, 239, 271, 370, 377
Lidocaine, 183t, 184
Ketoprofen, 182
Life-threatening chest injuries
Ketorolac, 182
cardiac tamponade, 108–109
Kevlar®, 251
clinical features, 108
Kinetic energy (KE)
management, 108–109
blunt trauma and, 52–53
overview, 108
defined, 51
flail chest, 107–108
of projectiles, 58
clinical features, 107, 108
terminal ballistics, 248
management, 107, 108
Kinetic injury, penetrating trauma and, 57–58
overview, 107
Kleihauer test, 216
immediately, 98–99, 104–109
Klein, Naomi, 5
massive haemothorax, 106–107
Knee dislocation, 176
clinical features, 106
Knife crime, 99
defined, 106
Knowledge, combining existing, 332–333
management, 106–107
Kocher’s method, 173
mediastinal traversing injury, 109
L open pneumothorax, 105–106
Laden, Osama bin, 8 clinical features, 106
Laryngeal mask airway (LMA), 91 management, 106
Lateral compression (LC) pelvic fractures, 175 overview, 105
Law and ethics, in pre-hospital care, 322–328 potentially, 109–111
criminal and civil law, 323–325 aortic (and other great vessel) injury, 109–110
common law, 324–325 diaphragmatic injury, 110–111
consent and capacity, 325–327 myocardial contusion, 110
legal accountability, 323–324 oesophageal injury, 110
statute, 324 pulmonary contusion, 110
ethical responsibility tracheobronchial injury, 110
autonomy, 328 tension pneumothorax, 104–105
beneficence, 328 clinical features, 104
justice, 328 management, 104, 105
non-maleficence, 328 overview, 104
negligence, 327 Life-threatening chest trauma, identification, 375–376
overview, 322 Life-threatening external bleeding, identification and
professional accountability and regulation, 323 control, 375
Leadership and involvement culture, 364–365 Life-threatening musculoskeletal injuries, immediately,
Legal accountability, 323–324 168
Legal requirements, 317–319 Life-threatening problems, identification, 61
child protection, 319 Lignocaine, 184, 185
confidentiality and access to medical documentation, Listening
317 airway, assessment, 87
disclosure to clinical team members, 318 chest injuries, assessment, 103
396
Index
Local anaesthetics (LAs), 183–185 pre-alert information, 309

Local emergency hospital (LEH), 357 reception team in, 360–361
Localised osteomyelitis, 169 responsibility and review after admission to, 363
Long bone fractures, identification and management, 376 secondary transfer to, 362–363
Look transfer to, 148, 309
airway, assessment, 86–87 trauma in pregnancy, 220
close view, 86, 87 Management
wide view, 86–87 airways, see Airway management
chest injuries, assessment, 101–103 in austere pre-hospital environment, see Austere
Lower leg fractures, 176–177 pre- hospital environment
Lund and Browder chart, 236–237 blast incident, 260–261
Lung injuries, 55 burned patient, 237
Lyoplas™, 273 cardiac tamponade, 108–109
flail chest, 107, 108
M haemorrhage into abdomen/pelvis, 376
Magnum, defined, 244 in-hospital, musculoskeletal trauma, 171–172
Mahbubai, Kishore, 2 injured children, 199–204, 206–209
Major Incident Medical Management and Support abdominal injury, 202–203
(MIMMS ®), 281–296 airway, 199
METHANE and CSCATTT, 281–296 burns, 204
assessment, 287 chest injury, 202
bystander care, 291 head injury, 200–201
CCS interventions, 292 musculoskeletal injury, 203
command and control, 282–284 spinal injury, 201
communication, 285–287 long bone fractures, 376
diagnosis of death, 292–293 massive haemothorax, 106–107
discharge from scene, 292 open pneumothorax, 106
evacuated populations, 293 paediatric spinal injuries, 161
overview, 281–282 pain, 179, 180–185
report refinement and cascade, 287 inhalational agents, 183
safety, 284–285 ketamine, 183
transport, 293–296 local anaesthetics (LAs), 183–185
treatment, 291–293 non-pharmacological methods, 180–181
treatment at scene, 291–292 NSAIDs, 182
triage, 287–291 opioids, 182
Major trauma paracetamol, 182
designated hospitals for, 356–357 pharmacological methods, 181
frequency and types of, 353–354 penetrating trauma, 159, 160
networks, size of, 354 pregnancy, trauma in, 218–220
reception team, in MTC/TU, 360–361 airway and cervical spine control, 219
Major trauma centres (MTCs) breathing, 219
consultation with and referral to, 361–362 catastrophic haemorrhage control, 218
discharging patients from MTC to TU, 363 circulation, 219–220
early development in UK, 350–351 disability and exposure, 220
ECTs and, 356 pre-hospital, spinal injuries, 157–159
injured children, 211 agitated patient, 158
major trauma service, 364 immobilisation, 157–158
nearest, rapid transport to, 377 initial, 157–158
397
Index
ongoing management, 158–159 Mass casualty situations, 278–296

overview, 157 All Hazards approach, 281–281
pre-transfer, 299, 300 defined, 278
pulmonary contusion, 110 MIMMS principles, METHANE and CSCATTT,
scene, principles, 34–35 281–296
spinal injuries, 152 assessment, 287
TBI, 143–147 bystander care, 291
airway, 144 CCS interventions, 292
breathing, 145–146 command and control, 282–284
catastrophic bleeding, 144 communication, 285–287
cervical spine immobilisation, 144–145 diagnosis of death, 292–293
circulation, 146 discharge from scene, 292
disability, 146 evacuated populations, 293
exposure and environment, 147 overview, 281–282
indications for intubation and ventilation, 145–146 report refinement and cascade, 287
tension pneumothorax, 104, 105 safety, 284–285
tracheobronchial injury, 110 transport, 293–296
Manipulating environment, 36–39 treatment, 291–293
clinical notes, 39 treatment at scene, 291–292
egress and triage, 38 triage, 287–291
en route to hospital, 38 overview, 278–279
photography, 38 recovery, 296
vehicle accidents and entrapment, 36–37, 38f resilience and preparation, 279–280
Man-made disasters, 5 Massive haemothorax, 106–107
Man-made material fibre (MMMF), 285 clinical features, 106
Mannitol, 147, 148, 201, 208t defined, 106
Manoeuvres, airway management management, 106–107
advanced airway Maternal cardiac arrest, 220–221
cricoid pressure vs. BURP, 92, 94 Mean arterial pressure (MAP), 122–123, 141–142
cricothyroidotomy, 95 Mechanical Advantage Tourniquet (MAT), 78
difficult/failed airway, 94–95 Mechanical ventilation, open pneumothorax, 106
endotracheal intubation, 91–92 Mechanisms of injury, 50–59
pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia, 92, 93t blast injuries, 57
basic, 88–90 blunt injuries by region, 56
BVM, 90 chest injuries, 99–101
manual, 88, 89f blast trauma, 100
NPA, 89 blunt trauma, 99
OPA, 89–90 chest wall, 100
intermediate airway hypoxaemia, 100–101
LMA, 91 pathophysiology of thoracic trauma, 100
Manoeuvres, front roll, 131 penetrating trauma, 99–100
Manual in-line immobilisation (stabilisation) (MILS), 45, ventilation–perfusion mismatch, 101
64, 134, 145, 157, 158, 161 defined, 50
Manual manoeuvres, airway management, 88, 89f in elderly trauma, 224–225
Marauding terrorist firearms incident, 280 falls from height, 55–56
Marulanda, Manuel, 6 incident, types of, 53–56
Masks, 20, 21, 64; see also Bag–valve–mask (BVM); kinetic energy and blunt trauma, 52–53
Laryngeal mask airway (LMA) kinetic injury and penetrating trauma, 57–58
398
Index
musculoskeletal trauma, 166, 167 Misuse of Drugs Act, 324

non-projectile penetrating injury, 58 Moat, Raoul, 252
overview, 50 Mobile Telecommunications Privileged Access System
pathophysiology, 51 (MTPAS), 286
pedestrian collisions, 54–55 Mobile telephones, 47
physics of energy transfer, 51–52 Mode of transport, MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic,
pregnancy, trauma in, 213 294–295
spinal injuries, 151, 154–157 Morphine, 24f, 182, 188, 207t, 208, 220
use, 58–59 Mortality, in elderly trauma patients, 227–228
vehicle occupant collisions, 53–54 Mortality rates, following traumatic injuries, 227–228
Meconium staining, 218 Motorways, 27
Media, 286 MRC CRASH Trial 2005, 147
Mediastinal traversing injury, 109 MTCs, see Major trauma centres (MTCs)
Medical conditions, pre-existing, in elderly trauma MTPAS (Mobile Telecommunications Privileged Access
patients, 227 System), 286
Medical Emergency Response Incident Team (MERIT), Mucoadhesive agents, 76–77
292, 295–296 Mucosal atomiser device (MAD), 209
Medical equipment, austere pre-hospital environment, Multi-disciplinary team meetings, 365
265–266 Multi-professional PHEM practitioners, 347
Medical history, trauma in elderly, 226 Multisystem trauma, 176
Medical incident advisor (MIA), 283, 284, 287, 294, 295 Muscle relaxants, 191
Medical Priority Dispatch System (AMPDS), 41 Musculoskeletal injuries, 56
Medical training, in PHEM, 346–347 children, 203
Medicines Act (1968), 324 extremities, 203
Meetings, multi-disciplinary team, 365 pelvic fractures, 203
Mental Capacity Act, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328 Musculoskeletal trauma, 165–177
Mersey Burns, 237 amputation, 171
Mesh, ballistic, 251–252 analgesia/sedation, 168
Mesh bag, 75 assessment, 166–167
Metacarpal fractures, 174 crush injuries, 170–171
Metastatic spread of tumours, 173 digital photography, 167
Metformin, 226 epidemiology, 165–166
METHANE immediately life-threatening, 168
MIMMS principles, 281–296; see also Major Incident in-hospital management, 171–172
Medical Management and Support (MIMMS®) mechanism of injury, 166, 167
sequence, 42–43 open fractures, 169
Methods of communicating on scene, 46–48 overview, 165
Airwave radio network, 46 regional injuries, 172–177
on arrival at receiving unit, 47–48 ankle fractures, 177
care on scene, 47 clavicle, 172
en route to hospital, 47 dislocated elbow, 173–174
mobile telephones, 47 femoral shaft fractures, 176
Methoxyfluorane (Penthrox®), 168, 183, 271 forearm and wrist fractures, 174
Methylprednisolone, 147 glenohumeral dislocation (‘dislocated shoulder’),
Midazolam, 24f, 95, 168, 188, 190, 191, 208t 173
MIMMS ®, see Major Incident Medical Management and hip, 174–175
Support (MIMMS ®) humeral fractures, 173
Minimum requirements, for tracheal intubation, 91, 92 knee dislocation, 176
399
Index
lower leg fractures, 176–177 N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA), 188

metacarpal fractures, 174 Nomenclature
patellar dislocation, 176 bullets, 244
pelvis, 175–176 firearms, ballistics and gunshot wounds, 244–245
phalangeal fractures, 174 Non-accidental injury (NAI), 144, 200, 204, 237, 241
scapula, 172 Non-hospital attendance, 313–314
splints, 169–170 Non-maleficence, law and ethics in pre-hospital care, 328
Muzzle velocity, 247 Non-medical facilitators, additional, 270
Myocardial contusion, 99, 101, 110 Non-permissive zone, 253
Myotomes, 153, 155t Non-pharmacological methods, of managing pain, 180–181
Non-pharmacological pain relief, 209
N Non-projectile penetrating injury, 58
Naloxone, 188 Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs),
Naproxen, 182 managing pain, 182
Nargis (hurricane), 4 Normal paediatric vital signs, 195
Nasopharyngeal airways (NPA), 89 Normothermia, 69
National Academy of Science, 9 North America, advances in, 351
National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), 365 Nuclear detonation, 57
National Burn Bed Bureau, 287 Nursing and Midwifery Council, 345
National Confidential Enquiry into Patient Outcome and Nutation, defined, 247
Death (NCEPOD), 352 Nylon, 251
National Emergency X-Radiography Utilization Study
(NEXUS) criteria, 134, 135, 159, 161, 273 O
National Health Service (NHS), 10, 241, 278, 291, 316, 344, Obstetric complications, following trauma, 215–217
347, 352 foetal death, 216
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE), foeto-maternal haemorrhage, 216
159, 177, 200, 338 penetrating injury to uterus, 217
National Institute of Justice (NIJ), 252 placental abruption, 215
National Transportation Board (NTSB), 365 placenta praevia, 216
National trauma registry reporting, 364 premature labour, 216
Natural disasters, 4–5 uterine rupture, 216
Near-real-time reporting and governance, 365 Obstructed respiration, 86–87
Neck examination, features, 64t Obstructive shock, 117
Needle cricothyroidotomy, 95, 199 Occupational exposure, to blood-borne pathogens, 19
Needle thoracocentesis Oedema, 199
procedure, 369 Oesophageal injury, 110
tension pneumothorax, 104, 105 Older people, see Elderly
Negligence, law and ethics in pre-hospital care, 327 One-way valve dressing, 106
Network Rail, 28 Ongoing management, spinal injuries, 158–159
Networks, trauma, size of, 354 On-scene communication, CRM and, 44–46
Neurogenic shock, 157 O2Pak™, 272
Neurological injury, primary and secondary, 154, 156 Open airway, 84
Neurophysiological effects, TBI, 141–142 Open book fractures, 175
Neurosteroid progesterone, 147 Open fractures, 169
Newton’s Second Law of Motion, 51 Open pneumothorax, 100, 105–106
NHS Pathways, 41 clinical features, 106
Nitrous oxide/oxygen (Entonox®), 112, 168, 176, 183, 188, management, 106
209, 220, 271 overview, 105
400
Index
Operational command, 283–284 non-pharmacological methods, 180–181

Operational practice, cross-cutting theme, 345 NSAIDs, 182
Opiates, 34 opioids, 182
femoral shaft fractures, 176 paracetamol, 182
hip, injury, 174 pharmacological methods, 181
musculoskeletal trauma, 168 physiology, 180
Opioids, 208 psychosocial factors, 179
managing pain, 182 Palpation
for sedation, 187, 188 of abdomen, 67
Oral analgesia, injured children, 208 primary survey in pre-hospital environment, 65
Oramorph, 207t Paracetamol, 168, 182, 207t, 208, 220
Organisational structure, 364 Parental responsibility, 326
Organised crime, 8–9 Parklands formula, 204, 238, 239
Oropharyngeal airway (OPA), 89–90 Partial thickness burns, 234, 235
Osmotherapy, 147–148 Patellar dislocation, 176
Osteomyelitis, localised, 169 Pathophysiology
Osteoporosis, 173, 174, 225 of coagulopathy, 118, 119
Ottawa ankle rules, 177 mechanism of injury, 51
Outcome(s) TBI, 139–140
elderly trauma patients, age on, 227 impact loading, 139
paediatric thoracotomy, 205 impulsive loading, 139
Overpressure, defined, 258 static loading, 139–140
Over-triage, 58, 290–291, 359 thoracic trauma, 100
Overturned cars, 131–132 Pathophysiology of airway trauma, 85–86
HGVS/VANS, 132 contamination as result of trauma, 86
methods, 131–132 direct trauma, 85
Oxygen, for thoracic trauma, 112 indirect trauma, 85
Oxygenation, apnoeic, 189 thermal trauma, 85–86
Oxygen saturation, 144, 145 flash burns, 85
inhalational injuries, 85–86
P Pathway, trauma, 357–358
Packaging Patient
entrapment and extrication, 133–134, 135–136 documentation, 311–317
patient, for retrieval, 301–302 alterations, additions or amendments, 314
spinal injuries, 160–161 audiovisual recording, 316–317
Paediatric anaesthesia, 191 contemporaneous notes, 314–315
Paediatric cardiac arrest, 198 content, 312–313
Paediatric intensive care unit (PICU), 194 copies, 315
Paediatric spinal injuries, 161–162 electronic recording, 315
Paediatric trauma, see Injured children ePRF, 315–316
Paediatric vital signs, normal, 195 overview, 311
Pain presentation, 314
assessment, 180 PRF, 311–312
defined, 179 refusal of care/non-hospital attendance, 313–314
management, 179, 180–185 journey, understanding, 270–271
inhalational agents, 183 managing, 360–363
ketamine, 183 consultation with and referral to MTC, 361–362
local anaesthetics (LAs), 183–185 discharging patients from MTC to TU, 363
401
Index
major trauma reception team in MTC/TU, 360–361 Physiology

responsibility and review after admission to pain, 180
MTC, 363 in pregnancy, 214–215
secondary transfer, to MTCs, 362–363 airway, 214, 215
packaging for retrieval, 301–302 breathing, 214, 215
physiology, 34 circulation, 214–215
safety, 17–18 PICO question, 331–332
transfer Placental abruption, 215
fixed wing, 305–306 Placenta praevia, 216
rotary wing, 303, 304–305 Planning
Patient report form (PRF), 311–312 audit cycle, 336–337
Patterns, blast injuries, 259–260 austere pre-hospital environment, 268–270
primary, 259–260 Plates, ballistic, 252
secondary, 260 Pneumatic tourniquets, 78
tertiary, 260 Pneumothorax
Peace, blast injuries in, 256–258 diagnosis, 103
Pedestrian collisions, 54–55 open, 100, 105–106
Peer review, 363 simple, 111
Pelvic fractures, 175–176 tension, 65, 99, 101, 103, 104–105
children, 203 Poisoning, cyanide, 240
Pelvic sling, application, 175 Police, 318–319
Penetrating injury to uterus, 217 Policies and procedures, 365
Penetrating objects, thoracic trauma, 112 Pollock, Kevin, Dr., 40
Penetrating trauma, 51 Polytrauma patients, 146
kinetic injury and, 57–58 Polyurethane, 246
management, 159, 160 Populations, evacuated, 293
mechanisms of injury, 99–100 Portable ultrasound, 103
Penicillin-allergic patients, 169 Post-incident debriefing, 29–30
Penthrox® (methoxyfluorane), 168, 183 Post-intubation maintenance of anaesthesia, 191
Percussion, 66, 197 Potentially life-threatening injuries, 109–111
Permanent cavity formation, terminal ballistics, 248–249 aortic (and other great vessel) injury, 109–110
Permissive hypotension, defined, 122 diaphragmatic injury, 110–111
Permissive zone, 253 myocardial contusion, 110
Personal protective equipment (PPE), 20–22, 74, 128, 233, oesophageal injury, 110
284, 303, 304t pulmonary contusion, 110
Personal safety, 284–285 tracheobronchial injury, 110
Petrobras, 2 Poverty, 3
Pfannenstiel scar, 218 PPE (personal protective equipment), 20–22, 74, 128, 233,
Phalangeal fractures, 174 284, 303, 304t
Pharmacological methods, of managing pain, 181 Practical procedures, in thoracic trauma, 369–373
PHEA, see Pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA) clamshell thoracotomy, 371–372
PHEM, see Pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM) finger thoracostomy, 370–371
Phencyclidine derivative, 183, 188 needle thoracocentesis, 369
Phonetic alphabet, 43–44 Practitioners
Photography, incident scene, 38 multi-professional PHEM, 347
Physics, of energy transfer, 51–52 PHEM, role, 342–344
Physiological response, to trauma in elderly, 225–226 safety, 16
Physiological shock, 115 Pragmatic collaring, 135
402
Index
Pre-alerts, 309 spectrum of conditions, 269

Precession, defined, 247 team and casualty, transportation, 269
Pre-deployment checklists, 23, 25 communication, see Communication
Pre-existing medical conditions, in elderly trauma diagnosis, 34
patients, 227 law and ethics in, see Law and ethics
Pregnancy, trauma in, 213–221 research and audit, see Research and audit
anatomy and physiology in, 214–215 Pre-hospital care, defined, 343
airway, 214, 215 Pre-hospital emergency anaesthesia (PHEA)
breathing, 214, 215 airway adjuncts, 63–64
circulation, 214–215 airway burns, 238
destination, choice of, 220 airway management, 92, 93t
initial assessment, 217–218 in children, 209
abdomen, 218 CRM concepts, 45
examination, 217–218 flail chest, treatment, 108
foetal, 218 flail chest patients, 108
fundal height, 217–218 Pre-hospital emergency care (PHEC), 341, 342, 344
history, 217 Pre-hospital emergency medicine (PHEM), 16
management, 218–220 curriculum, 344–346
airway and cervical spine control, 219 central theme, GMP, 345
breathing, 219 cross-cutting theme, clinical governance, 345
catastrophic haemorrhage control, 218 cross-cutting theme, operational practice, 345
circulation, 219–220 cross-cutting theme, team resource management,
disability and exposure, 220 345
maternal cardiac arrest, 220–221 overview, 344–345
mechanisms of injury, 213 sub-specialty theme, providing PHEM, 346
obstetric complications following trauma, sub-specialty theme, supporting rescue and
215–217 extrication, 346
foetal death, 216 sub-specialty theme, supporting safe patient
foeto-maternal haemorrhage, 216 transfer, 346
penetrating injury to uterus, 217 sub-specialty theme, using pre-hospital equipment,
placental abruption, 215 346
placenta praevia, 216 sub-specialty theme, working in EMS, 345
premature labour, 216 training in, see Training, in PHEM
uterine rupture, 216 Pre-hospital hypotension, 142
overview, 213 Pre-hospital management
Pre-hospital anaesthesia, 158 firearms, ballistics, and GSWs, 254–255
Pre-hospital assessment spinal injuries, 157–159
burned patient, 237 agitated patient, 158
firearms, ballistics, and GSWs, 252–253 immobilisation, 157–158
Pre-hospital care ongoing management, 158–159
in austere environments, 268–270 overview, 157
additional non-medical facilitators, 270 Pre-hospital triage, trauma systems, 359–360
level of care, 269 Preload, 116, 117
planning, 268–270 Premature labour, 216
response, activation, 270 Preparation
safety of team, 270 for anaesthesia, 189–190
secondary care network, 266–267 audit cycle, 336–337
services, remitting, 269 incident scene, 31–34
403
Index
approach, direction of, 32–34 treatment, 291–293

taking call and setting out, 31–32 treatment at scene, 291–292
injured children, sedation and anaesthesia, 210 triage, 287–291
mass casualty situations, 279–280 minimal handling, 160–161
Presentation, patient documentation, 314 retrieval and transport, 299
Pressure drag, 247 scene management, 34–35
Pre-transfer management, 299, 300 Procedures, in thoracic trauma, 369–373
Prilocaine, 183t, 184 clamshell thoracotomy, 371–372
Primary blast injuries, 57, 259–260 finger thoracostomy, 370–371
Primary cord injury, 56 needle thoracocentesis, 369
Primary survey, 61–69 Procoagulant supplementers, 76
airway (with cervical spine control), 63–64 Professional accountability and regulation, law and
auscultation, 66 ethics, 323
breathing, 64–65 Progesterone, 147
catastrophic haemorrhage, 62–63 Progressive end-organ dysfunction, 118
circulation, 66–67 Projectiles, kinetic energy of, 58
disability, 67–69 Prolonged field care, austere pre-hospital environment,
exposure and environment, 69 274
initial approach, 62 Propellant, defined, 244
inspection, 65 Propofol, 188
overview, 61–62 Prospective clinical audit, 337–338
palpation, 65 Protection, ballistic, 251–252
percussion, 66 Protective eyewear, 20
stages, 62 Proximal fractures in elderly, 173
timelines, 69 Pulmonary contusion, 99, 101, 107, 110
Primer, defined, 244
Principles Q
audiovisual recording, 316–317 QuikClot®, 75–76
beneficence, 328
confidentiality, 317 R
CRM, 45 Radiation effects, 57
guiding, generic requirements and, 354–355 Radio check, CRM, 44
injured children, sedation and anaesthesia, 209–210 Radio voice procedure, 43–44
JESIP, 36, 37f, 48–49 Rail incidents, 28
Mental Capacity Act, 326 Ramos-Horta, Jose, 6
MIMMS, METHANE and CSCATTT, 281–296 Rapid access, 126–127
assessment, 287 Ratchet tourniquets, 78
bystander care, 291 Raynaud’s disease, 185
CCS interventions, 292 Rear-end collision, 52
command and control, 282–284 Rear impacts, 54
communication, 285–287 Rear oyster, 132
diagnosis of death, 292–293 Rear seat passengers, extricating, 131
discharge from scene, 292 Reassessment, of scene, 18–19
evacuated populations, 293 Re-audit, 339
overview, 281–282 Receiving unit, communicating on arrival at, 47–48
report refinement and cascade, 287 Recovery, mass casualty situations, 296
safety, 284–285 Rectal analgesia, injured children, 208
transport, 293–296 Re-evaluation, SAFE approach, 18–19
404
Index
Referral, to MTC, 361–362 space creation, 128–129

Refusal of care, 313–314 stabilisation and initial access, 128
Region, blunt injuries by, 56 Research, continuing development, 366
Regional injuries, 172–177 Research and audit, in pre-hospital care, 330–339
ankle fractures, 177 audit cycle, 336–339
clavicle, 172 data collection and analysis, 338–339
dislocated elbow, 173–174 degree of compliance, 338
femoral shaft fractures, 176 identifying standards, 338
forearm and wrist fractures, 174 overview, 336
glenohumeral dislocation (‘dislocated shoulder’), preparation and planning, 336–337
173 priorities in clinical audit programme, 337
hip, 174–175 prospective/retrospective clinical audit, 337–338
humeral fractures, 173 re-audit, 339
knee dislocation, 176 reporting results and developing improvement
lower leg fractures, 176–177 plan, 339
metacarpal fractures, 174 clinical audit, 336
patellar dislocation, 176 clinical questions, 331–332
pelvis, 175–176 combining existing knowledge, 332–333
phalangeal fractures, 174 discovery, 332
scapula, 172 evidences
Regulation, law and ethics, 323 generating new, 333
Rehabilitation units, trauma systems, 357 hierarchy of, 333, 334t–335t
Relative (clinical) entrapment, defined, 125 summarising, 333, 336
Relatives, legal requirement, 319 overview, 330–331
Reporting Researchers, defined, 331
near-real-time, 365 Resilience, mass casualty situations, 279–280
results, audit cycle, 339 Respiration
Report refinement, MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 287 ineffective, 87
Requirements obstructed, 86–87
Legal, see Legal requirements Respiratory distress, assessment, 102
for tracheal intubation, 91, 92 Responding, to trauma call, 41–42
trauma systems, 353–355 Response, incident scene, 31–34
frequency and types of major trauma, 353–354 approach, direction of, 32–34
general characteristics, 352–353 taking call and setting out, 31–32
generic, guiding principles and, 354–355 Responsibility
size of trauma networks, 354 after admission to MTC, 363
Rescue for children, 326
boards (long spine boards), 301 Resuscitation
snatch/immediate, 126 blast injuries, 261
supporting, sub-specialty theme, 346 fluids
Rescue service, approach, 127–132 individual components of care, 272–273
driver, extricating, 130, 131 injured children, 205
extrication paths, 130 Resuscitative endovascular balloon occlusion of aorta
full access, 129 (REBOA), 74
glass management, 128 Retrieval and transport, 299–306
overturned cars, 131–132 classification, 300t
rear seat passengers, extricating, 131 clinical governance and safe transport systems,
scene assessment and safety, 127–128 303, 304t
405
Index
deciding on most appropriate transport method, 300–301 helicopter, 23, 26f

equipment for transfer, 302–303 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 284–285
fixed wing patient transfer, 305–306 casualty, 285
overview, 299, 300t personal, 284–285
patient packaging for, 301–302 scene, 285
pre-transfer management and triage, 299, occupational exposure to blood-borne pathogens,
300 19
principles, 299 overview, 14
rotary wing patient transfer, 303, 304–305 patient, 17–18
Retrospective clinical audit, 337–338 post-incident debriefing, 29–30
Return of spontaneous circulation (ROSC), 377 PPE, 20–22
Review, after admission to MTC, 363 practitioner, 16
Revolutionary Medical Technologies™, 74 pre-deployment checklists, 23, 25
Rifles, defined, 245 SAFE approach, 15–19
Road Traffic Act, 318 safety 123, 15–16
Road traffic collisions (RTCs), 4, 35, 57, 148, 160–161, scene, 16–17, 127–128
165–166, 239–240 burns, 233–234
Rocuronium, 24f, 190, 191, 208t sharps management, 21–22
Rollover, 54 standards, 16
Roof removal, 129 team, 270
Rotary wing patient transfer, 303, 304–305 transmission of infection, 19
RTCs (road traffic collisions), 4, 35, 57, 148, 160–161, Sager® splint, 169–170
165–166, 239–240 Salisbury, chemical weapons agent in, 28
Rules for clearing C-spine, 134–135 SAM® Junctional Tourniquet, 79
Russell™, 104, 272 SAM® splint, 170, 174
Scapula, fracture, 172
S Scene
Sachs, Jeffrey, 3 assessment and safety, 127–128
SAFE approach, 15–19 communicating care on, 47
Safeguarding, injured children, 210 communication on arrival at, 42–43
Safe patient transfer, supporting, sub-specialty theme, considerations, blast injuries, 261
346 discharge from, 292
Safe transport systems, 303, 304t of incident, see Incident, scene
Safety, 14–31 management, principles of, 34–35
awareness, 16 methods of communicating on, 46–48
emergency care providers, 14–15 safety, 16–17
equipment and drug safety, 22–23, 24f burns, 233–234
evaluation and re-evaluation, 18–19 command and control, 252
facets, 15–16 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 285
follow SAFETY 123, 16–18 treatment at, 291–292
hazards Scoop stretchers, 64, 131, 136, 161, 201, 219,
acts of aggression, 28–29 301, 302
chemical incidents, 28 Screening test, chest injury, blunt trauma, 102
fires, 28 Seat belts, in older patients, 225
motorways, 27 Secondary blast injuries, 57, 260
rail incidents, 28 Secondary care network, austere pre-hospital
water, 28 environment, 266–267
weather, 25, 27 Secondary transfer, to MTCs, 362–363
406
Index
Secured airway, 84 Size(s)

Security, medical facility, 268 burn, assessment, 235–237
Sedation, 158, 168, 185–188 hand surface, 236
drugs for, 187–188 Lund and Browder chart, 236–237
injured children serial halving, 236
preparation, 210 Wallace Rule of Nines, 235
principles, 209–210 trauma networks, 354
levels, 187t Skin friction, 247
musculoskeletal trauma, 168 Slipped upper femoral epiphyses (SUFE), 203
overview, 185–187 Small arms, 245
Sedatives, 226 Snatch rescue, 126
Seizures, 146 Snoring, 87
Self-expanding haemostatic polymer, 75 SOAP ME, 187
Semi-permissive zone, 253 Social media, 286–287
Sepsis, systemic, 117, 169 Sodium bicarbonate administration, 171
Septicaemia, 166 SOPs (standard operating procedures), 23, 25, 29, 45
Serial halving, 236 Sort, triage, 289–290
Serum lactate levels, 226 Space creation, approach of fire and rescue service,
Service d’Aide Médicale Urgente (SAMU), 351 128–129
Sharps management, 21–22 Spencer Wells forceps, 370
Shock, 112–123 Spherical metal pellets, 7
body’s response to, 117–118 Spilt fuel, 33
clinical approach to trauma patient, 118–121 Spinal cord injury without radiological abnormality
clinical management, 121–123 (SCIWORA), 161
decompensated hypovolaemic shock, Spinal injuries, 151–162
122–123 anatomy, 152–154, 155f, 155t, 156f
overview, 121–122 associated, 152
hypovolaemic, 122–123 children, 201
overview, 112–113 distribution, 152, 153f
signs of, 121t examination, 160
types, 116–117 management, 152
cardiogenic, 117 mechanisms of injury, 151, 154–157
distributive, 117 neurogenic shock and spinal shock, 157
hypovolaemic, 116–117 overview, 151
obstructive, 117 packaging and transport, 160–161
wave, 250, 258, 259f paediatric, 161–162
Shot, defined, 245 penetrating trauma, management, 159, 160
Shotguns, defined, 245 pre-hospital assessment and management, 157–159
Shoulder dislocation, 173 agitated patient, 158
Sidaway v Bethlem RHG, 325 immobilisation, 157–158
Side impacts, 53, 54 initial management, 157–158
Silent killer, defined, 110 ongoing management, 158–159
Silicon carbide, 252 overview, 157
Silver trauma, 151 primary and secondary injury, 154, 156
Simple airway-opening manoeuvre, 63 Spinal shock, 157
Simple erythema, 235 Splenic injuries, children, 202
Simple pneumothorax, 111 Splints, 169–170, 174, 175
Sinus tachycardia, 110 Stabilisation, fire service, 128
407
Index
Staffing, 363 Supraglottic airway, 94–95

Standard operating procedures (SOPs), 23, 25, 29, 45 Supraglottic airway device (SAD), 91, 94
Standards Supraventricular tachycardia, 110
identification, 338 Sure-vent 2™, 272
for safe practice, 16 Surge capacity, defined, 278
Stasis, zone of, 234 Surgical cricothyroidotomy, 83
Static loading, pathophysiology, TBI, 139–140 Survival in elderly trauma patients, age on, 227
Statute, 324 Suxamethonium, 208t
‘Stay Out, Get Out, Call HART’ principle, 285 Sweating, 120
Stereotactic phenomenon, 56 Syrian civil war, 2
Sternal fracture, 111 Systematic reviews, 332–333
Sternoclavicular dislocation, 172 Systemic effects, TBI, 142
Steroids, 147 Systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS), 117,
Strain, defined, 53 142, 234
Straining, 87 Systemic sepsis, 169
Strategic command, 282–283
Strategic coordinating group (SCG), 283 T
Strategies Tachycardia, 108, 110, 120, 180, 191
for delivery of good pre-hospital care in austere Tachypnoea, 101, 102
environments, 268–270 Tactical command, 283
additional non-medical facilitators, 270 Target Compression Devices (TCD), 79–80
level of care, 269 TBI, see Traumatic brain injury (TBI)
planning, 268–270 T-bone–type collision, 52
response, activation, 270 TBSA (total burn surface area), 234, 235, 236, 238, 239,
safety of team, 270 240, 241
services, remitting, 269 Team and casualty, transportation, 269
spectrum of conditions, 269 Team resource management, cross-cutting theme, 345
team and casualty, transportation, 269 Telemedicine, 311
individual components of care, 272–273 Temporary cavity formation, 249–250
treatment, blast injuries, 261 Tension pneumothorax, 65, 99, 101, 103, 104–105
Stress, defined, 53 clinical features, 104
Stretch Wrap and Tuck Tourniquet (SWAT-T™), 78 management, 104, 105
Stridor, 87 overview, 104
Stroke volume, 116 Terminal ballistics, 248–250
Styner, James, 351 cavitation and temporary cavity formation, 249–250
Subarachnoid haemorrhage (SAH), 141 permanent cavity formation, 248–249
Subdural haematoma (SDH), 140 shock wave, 250
Sub-specialty theme Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) radio network, 285
providing PHEM, 346 Terrorism, 7–8
supporting emergency preparedness and response, 346 Tertiary blast injuries, 57, 260
supporting rescue and extrication, 346 Tetracaine, 184
supporting safe patient transfer, 346 Themes
using pre-hospital equipment, 346 central, GMP, 345
working in EMS, 345 cross-cutting
Sucking chest wound, 105 clinical governance, 345
Suicide, 225 operational practice, 345
Summarising evidence, 333, 336 team resource management, 345
Supported airway, 84 defined, 344–345
408
Index
sub-specialty Traction splint, 67

providing PHEM, 346 Traffic, 127
supporting emergency preparedness and Trained personnel, austere pre-hospital environment, 266
response, 346 Training, in PHEM, 341–347
supporting rescue and extrication, 346 curriculum, 344–346
supporting safe patient transfer, 346 central theme, GMP, 345
using pre-hospital equipment, 346 cross-cutting theme, clinical governance, 345
working in EMS, 345 cross-cutting theme, operational practice, 345
Therapeutic amputation, 171 cross-cutting theme, team resource management,
Thermal burn, 234, 241 345
Thermal energy, 51 overview, 344–345
Thermal trauma, 85–86 sub-specialty theme, providing PHEM, 346
flash burns, 85 sub-specialty theme, supporting emergency
inhalational injuries, 85–86 preparedness and response, 346
T1 hold, 289 sub-specialty theme, supporting rescue and
Thoracic injuries extrication, 346
aortic, 56 sub-specialty theme, supporting safe patient
possible, 98–99 transfer, 346
Thoracic trauma sub-specialty theme, using pre-hospital equipment,
general treatment of 346
intravenous access and fluids/blood, 112 sub-specialty theme, working in EMS, 345
oxygen, 112 medical training in, 346–347
penetrating objects, 112 multi-professional PHEM practitioners, 347
pathophysiology, 100 overview, 341–342
practical procedures in, 369–373 practitioner, role, 342–344
clamshell thoracotomy, 371–372 Training, trauma systems, 365–366
finger thoracostomy, 370–371 Tramadol, 207t
needle thoracocentesis, 369 Tranexamic acid, 122, 123, 146, 219, 220, 273, 330
Thoracotomy, in children, 205 Transfer
Timelines, 69 burn service, 241
Toddler’s fractures, 203 defined, 344
Topox™, 272 equipment for, 302–303
Total burn surface area (TBSA), 234, 235, 236, 238, 239, head injury, 148
240, 241 patient
Tourniquets fixed wing, 305–306
crush injuries, 171 rotary wing, 303, 304–305
haemorrhage control techniques, 63, 77–80 secondary, to MTCs, 362–363
abdominal aortic, 79 trauma pathway, 358
application, 78–79 Transmission of infection, 19
elasticated, 78 Transport
junctional, 73–74, 79–80 chest injuries, 112–113
pneumatic, 78 method, deciding on appropriate, 300–301
ratchet, 78 MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 293–296
resuscitation and, 261 evacuation, 293–294
truncal, 79 helicopters, 295
windlass, 77 MERIT, 295–296
life-threatening musculoskeletal injuries, 168 mode of, 294–295
Tracheobronchial injury, 110 platforms, medical facility, 267–268
409
Index
retrieval and, see Retrieval and transport pre-hospital triage and transport, 359–360
spinal injuries, 160–161 progress, 351–352
systems, safety, 303, 304t recent developments in England, 352
trauma systems, 359–360 requirements, 353–355
Trauma frequency and types of major trauma, 353–354
airway, pathophysiology of, 85–86 general characteristics, 352–353
call, communication and responding to, 41–42 generic, guiding principles and, 354–355
climate change and energy use, 3–4 size of trauma networks, 354
contamination as result of, 86 system work, making, 363–366
global burden, 4 capacity and flow management, 363
globalisation, trauma systems and education, 9–10 education and training, 365–366
global perspective, 1–10 features, 363
man-made disasters, 5 funding, 363
natural disasters, 4–5 leadership and involvement culture, 364–365
organised crime and civilian violence, 8–9 multi-disciplinary team meetings, 365
terrorism, 7–8 national trauma registry reporting, 364
thoracic, general treatment near-real-time reporting and governance, 365
intravenous access and fluids/blood, 112 organisational structure, 364
oxygen, 112 peer review, 363
penetrating objects, 112 policies and procedures, 365
thoracic, pathophysiology, 100 Trauma team leader (TTL), 360–361, 362
treatment of war wounds, 7 Traumatic amputation, 57, 72, 171, 260, 261
wars, 5–7 Traumatic brain injury (TBI), 55, 56
Trauma Audit & Research Network (TARN), 153f, 194, causes, 139, 144
210, 211, 309, 364, 365 classification, 142–143
Trauma network, defined, 349 incidence, 138
Trauma resuscitation anaesthetists (TRAs), 355 initial assessment and management, 143–147
Trauma systems, 349–366 airway, 144
advances in North America, 351 catastrophic bleeding, 144
continuing development intubation in, 145–146
improvement, innovation and research, 366 neurophysiological effects, 141–142
prevention, 366 pathophysiology, 139–140
early development in UK, 350–351 impact loading, 139
fundamental building blocks, 355–357 impulsive loading, 139
allied services, 356 static loading, 139–140
ambulance services and ECTs, 355–356 systemic effects, 142
designated hospitals for major trauma, 356–357 Traumatic cardiac arrest, 374–377
rehabilitation units, 357 2 Hs and 2 Ts, 374
history, 350–352 initial assessment, 374–377
managing patient, 360–363 airway, patent and protected, 375
consultation with and referral to MTC, 361–362 CPR, 377
discharging patients from MTC to TU, 363 identify and control life-threatening external
major trauma reception team in MTC/TU, 360–361 bleeding, 375
responsibility and review after admission to MTC, identify and manage haemorrhage into abdomen/
363 pelvis, 376
secondary transfer, to MTCs, 362–363 identify and manage (exclude) long bone fractures,
overview, 349, 350f 376
pathway, 357–358 identify life-threatening chest trauma, 375–376
410
Index
rapid transport to nearest MTCs, 377 Vasodilatory shock, 117

ROSC, 377 Vehicle accidents and entrapment, 36–37, 38f
Traumatic cardiorespiratory arrest (TCRA), in children, 205 Vehicle occupant collisions, 53–54
Traumatic coagulopathy, 118, 119 Venous access, 67
Traumatic myocardial dysfunction, 117 Ventilation, BVM, 197–198
Trauma unit (TU), 356, 357, 360–361, 362, 363 Ventilation–perfusion mismatch, 101
Treatment strategies, in elderly trauma patients, 228 Ventricular extrasystole, 110
Triage Verbal categorical rating scale (VRS), 180
accuracy, 290–291 Verbal numerical rating scale (NRS), 180
to burns, 241 Vertebral fractures, 56
incident scene, 38 Vertical shear injuries, 175
MIMMS CSCATTT mnemonic, 287–291 Vietnam concept, 293
children and, 289 Violence, 3
sieve, 288, 289f civilian, 8–9
sort, 289–290 domestic, 213
T1 hold, 289 managing, 28–29
over-triage, 58, 290–291, 359 Violent Crime Reduction Act (2006), 246
pre-hospital, trauma systems, 359–360 Visual analogue scale (VAS), 180
retrieval and transport, 299, 300
under-triage, 58, 291 W
Triage Revised Trauma Score (TRTS), 290 Wahhab, Ibn Abdul, 8
Triangle, trauma care, 354–355 Wahhabism, 8
Trip hazards, 128 Wallace Rule of Nines, 235
Truncal tourniquets, 79 Wallerstein, Immanuel, 2
Tsunami, 4 Warming blankets, 302
Twitter, 286 Warm zone, defined, 253
War(s), 5–7
U blast injuries in, 256–258
UK International Emergency Trauma Register wounds, treatment, 7
(UKIETR), 275 Water, 28
UK National Health Service Emergency Preparedness Watershed areas, defined, 154
Framework, 278 Wave drag, 247
Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, 252 Weather hazard, 25, 27
Ultrasound scanning (USS), 109 Wheeze, 87
Under-triage, 58, 291 Whitehaven tragedy (2011), 252
United Kingdom, firearms in, 246 Wide view
United Kingdom (UK), early development in, 350–351 airway, look, 86–87
United Nations Economy and Social Division (DESA), 2 cyanosis, 86
United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), 6 ineffective respiration, 87
Units, defined, 345 obstructed respiration, 86–87
Uterine rupture, 216 Winchester Supreme Expansion Technology ©, 251
Uterus Wind chill, 25
gravid, 219 Windlass tourniquets, 77
penetrating injury to, 217 Windscreen report, 42
Wing top collision, 55
V Wong-Baker FACES pain scale, 180
Vacuum splints, 174, 177 Working in EMS, sub-specialty theme, 345
Vascular access, injured children, 204 World Bank, 3–4
411
Index
World Health Assembly (WHA), 9 Z

World Health Organization (WHO), 3, 9
Zeolite, 75
Wound clamps, 80
Z-Medica®, 75
Wrap, 54–55
Zoellick, Robert, 3
Wrist fracture, 174
Zone of coagulative necrosis, 234
Zone of hyperaemia, 234
X
Zone of stasis, 234
XSTAT™, 74 Zones at shooting incident, 253
non-permissive zone, 253
Y permissive zone, 253
Yaw, defined, 247 semi-permissive zone, 253
412

4 5819047049554822430 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 5819047049554822430 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 5819047049554822430 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the key topics covered in the manual?

What are some of the key topics covered in the manual?

What are some of the techniques described for assessing trauma patients?

What are some of the techniques described for assessing trauma patients?

https://t.

KEITH PORTER FRCS FRCSEd FRCEM FFSEM FIMC FASI

CHRIS WRIGHT DIMC FRCEM L/RAMC

© 2019 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC

No claim to original U.S. Government works

Printed on acid-free paper

International Standard Book Number-13: 978-1-138-62684-3 (Paperback)

Library of Congress Cataloging‑in‑Publication Data

Names: Greaves, Ian, editor. | Porter, Keith M., editor.

Visit the Taylor & Francis Web site at

and the CRC Press Web site at

1 Trauma: A global perspective 1

Annex A: Practical procedures in thoracic trauma 369

AAA abdominal aortic aneurysm

BURP backward-upward-rightward pressure

FMJ Full metal jacket

MDI metered dose inhaler

PHEM pre-hospital emergency medicine

TRTS Triage Revised Trauma Score

Milan Kundera, The Curtain (1)

THE BIG PICTURE

Various combinations of fundamentalism, individual and institutional greed, inequality and

CLIMATE CHANGE AND ENERGY USE

GLOBAL BURDEN OF TRAUMA

TREATMENT OF WAR WOUNDS

ORGANISED CRIME AND CIVILIAN VIOLENCE

GLOBALISATION, TRAUMA SYSTEMS AND EDUCATION

7. Manner M. Suurpetos järisytti Brasiliaa. Helsingin Sanomat, September 14, 2015.

▪▪ Be aware of the full range of hazards associated with responding to an incident

GETTING TO THE SCENE SAFELY

THE SAFETY 123

BOX 2.2: SAFE

F – FOLLOW THE 123

BOX 2.3: First Steps on Arrival at the Scene

or damage to those arriving (Figures

Figure 2.3 Glass dust from a road traffic collision.

and allow a judgement regarding the

E- EVALUATION AND RE-EVALUATION

OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO BLOOD-BORNE PATHOGENS

BOX 2.4: Blood-Borne Pathogens

Hepatitis B virus (HBV)

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

• High visibility jacket with clear identification labels

BOX 2.5: Potential Hazards in Pre-hospital Practice

Goggles should provide adequate protec-

BOX 2.6: Double Gloving

BOX 2.7: Dealing with a Needle-Stick Injury

EQUIPMENT AND DRUG SAFETY

Induction agents Hypnotics

Neuromuscular blocking drugs Neuromuscular blocking drug antagonist

Opioids Opioid antagonist

Vasopressors Hypotensive agent

Anticholinergic agents Local anaesthetics

Figure 2.9 Standard drug labelling. (From http://www.rcoa.ac.uk/system/files/SYRINGE-LABELLING​

FENTANYL ANALGESIA 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg

1 Trauma: A global perspective 1

Annex A: Practical procedures in thoracic trauma 369

Figure 2.9 Standard drug labelling. (From http://www.rcoa.ac.uk/system/files/SYRINGE-LABELLING

Figure 2.12 Safe working around helicopters. (From https://www.caa.govt.nz/assets/legacy/safety_info